월드컵 시즌이 다가오면 축구 팬들은 실시간으로 경기를 시청하기 위해 다양한 방법을 찾습니다. 이때 자연스럽게 떠오르는 질문 중 하나가 바로 “월드컵중계 합법 서비스인가요?”입니다. 월드컵중계는 국내외 여러 방송사와 온라인 플랫폼에서 제공되지만, 모든 서비스가 합법적인 것은 아니며, 시청자가 어떤 플랫폼을 이용하느냐에 따라 법적 문제나 안전성 문제가 달라질 수 있습니다.
공식적으로 제공되는 방송사와 스트리밍 플랫폼은 모두 합법적인 서비스를 제공합니다. 국내에서는 공영 방송사와 민영 방송사에서 월드컵중계를 중계하며, 해당 방송사들은 저작권을 가지고 있어 합법적으로 방송할 수 있습니다. 이러한 합법 서비스는 안정적인 서버와 고화질 영상, 다양한 부가 기능을 제공하며, 광고나 유료 결제를 통해 정당한 수익 구조를 가지고 있습니다. 따라서 안전하게 경기를 시청하고 싶다면 공식 방송사나 인증된 스트리밍 플랫폼을 이용하는 것이 가장 확실한 방법입니다.
하지만 일부 무료 스포츠 중계 사이트나 해외 비공식 플랫폼에서는 저작권 문제로 인해 불법 중계가 이루어지는 경우가 있습니다. 이러한 플랫폼은 합법적 허가 없이 경기를 송출하며, 사용자는 이를 시청하는 순간에도 법적 위험에 노출될 수 있습니다. 불법 중계를 이용하면 갑작스러운 사이트 차단, 악성 광고, 개인정보 유출 등의 위험이 발생할 수 있으며, 경우에 따라 법적 책임을 질 가능성도 있습니다. 따라서 “월드컵중계 합법 서비스인가요?”라는 질문은 단순히 편리함을 넘어서, 안전하고 법적으로 보호받는 시청 경험을 위해 매우 중요한 요소입니다.
월드컵중계 합법 서비스인가요?
최근에는 모바일 앱과 온라인 스트리밍 서비스가 발전하면서, 합법적인 중계 서비스의 선택 폭도 넓어졌습니다. 공식 플랫폼에서는 경기 실시간 중계뿐만 아니라, 다시보기, 선수 정보, 경기 통계, 다중 카메라 시청 등 다양한 부가 기능도 제공합니다. 이러한 기능은 불법 중계에서는 거의 제공되지 않으며, 합법 서비스를 이용할 때만 안정적으로 즐길 수 있습니다. 또한 합법 플랫폼을 통해 시청하면, 서버 안정성과 영상 품질도 보장되어 경기 중 끊김이나 버퍼링 없이 쾌적하게 시청할 수 있습니다.
결론적으로, “월드컵중계 합법 서비스인가요?”라는 질문에 대한 답은 시청하려는 플랫폼에 따라 달라집니다. 공식 방송사와 인증된 스트리밍 플랫폼은 모두 합법적인 서비스이며, 안정적이고 고화질의 시청 환경을 제공합니다. 반면 불법 중계 사이트는 저작권 문제와 보안 위험이 있으므로 피하는 것이 좋습니다. 월드컵 시즌에는 합법 서비스를 이용하여 안전하게 경기를 즐기는 것이 팬들에게 가장 현명한 선택이며, 이를 통해 경기 몰입도와 즐거움을 최대한 높일 수 있습니다.
스포츠중계를 이용하는 많은 팬들에게 한국어 해설의 존재 여부는 중요한 관심사입니다. 특히 해외 경기나 국제 대회의 경우, 외국어 해설만 제공될 때 경기 내용을 완전히 이해하기 어려울 수 있습니다. 이에 따라 국내 사용자들은 한국어 해설이 포함된 스포츠중계를 선호하며, 이는 팬들이 경기의 흐름과 세부 전략을 더욱 정확하게 파악하는 데 큰 도움이 됩니다.
한국어 해설이 제공되는 스포츠중계 사이트는 대체로 국내 방송사와 연계되어 운영됩니다. 이러한 사이트들은 축구, 야구, 농구 등 주요 국내 및 국제 경기의 실시간 중계를 제공하며, 경기 해설을 한국어로 제공함으로써 시청자가 경기에 몰입할 수 있도록 돕습니다. 해설자는 경기 상황을 설명할 뿐만 아니라, 선수의 전략, 팀 전술, 주요 장면 분석까지 제공하여 단순 시청 이상의 정보를 전달합니다.
스포츠중계에서 한국어 해설이 중요한 이유 중 하나는 경기 이해도를 높이는 데 있습니다. 외국어 해설만 제공될 경우, 주요 경기 장면이나 선수의 전략적 움직임을 놓치기 쉽습니다. 반면 한국어 해설이 있는 중계는 시청자가 빠르게 상황을 이해하고 경기의 긴장감과 재미를 동시에 느낄 수 있도록 합니다. 이는 특히 e스포츠나 복잡한 규칙을 가진 스포츠에서 큰 장점으로 작용합니다.
또한, 한국어 해설은 시청자 참여와 몰입도를 높이는 효과가 있습니다. 많은 스포츠중계 사이트는 실시간 채팅이나 커뮤니티 기능과 결합하여, 시청자가 해설 내용을 기반으로 의견을 나누거나 분석을 공유할 수 있도록 지원합니다. 이러한 환경은 단순한 경기 관람을 넘어 팬 커뮤니티 활성화에도 기여하며, 사이트 이용 만족도를 높이는 중요한 요소가 됩니다.
스포츠중계는 한국어 해설이 있나요?
모바일 환경에서도 한국어 해설 제공 여부는 선택 기준이 됩니다. 이동 중 스마트폰이나 태블릿으로 스포츠중계를 시청하는 경우, 한국어 해설은 경기 이해를 돕고 현장감을 전달하는 핵심 요소입니다. 최신 스포츠중계 사이트들은 모바일 최적화와 함께 고품질 음성 스트리밍을 지원하여, 어디서든 안정적으로 한국어 해설을 즐길 수 있도록 설계하고 있습니다.
한편, 일부 스포츠중계 사이트는 국제 경기를 중심으로 서비스하기 때문에 한국어 해설을 제공하지 않을 수도 있습니다. 이 경우 사용자는 영어 해설이나 자동 번역 기능을 활용해야 하며, 이러한 환경은 한국어 해설에 익숙한 시청자에게는 다소 불편할 수 있습니다. 따라서 스포츠중계를 선택할 때, 원하는 경기와 언어 지원 여부를 확인하는 것이 중요합니다.
결론적으로, 현대 스포츠중계 서비스는 한국어 해설을 제공하는 플랫폼과 그렇지 않은 플랫폼이 존재하며, 팬들은 자신의 필요에 맞춰 선택할 수 있습니다. 한국어 해설이 포함된 스포츠중계는 경기 이해도를 높이고 몰입감을 강화하며, 팬 커뮤니티 참여와 현장감까지 함께 제공하는 장점이 있습니다. 따라서 국내 사용자는 자신이 시청하고자 하는 경기와 사이트의 해설 제공 여부를 사전에 확인하여 최적의 경기 관람 환경을 확보하는 것이 바람직합니다. 스포츠중계에서 한국어 해설은 단순한 편의 기능이 아니라, 경기 경험을 풍부하게 만드는 핵심 요소임을 명심해야 합니다.
High Potential — the ABC show about a single mom with an exceptional mind who winds up working as a consultant for the Los Angeles Police Department — debuted its first season a year ago. Now, Kaitlin Olson’s fashionable crime-solver Morgan Gillory is tackling new crimes in season 2.
The second season of High Potential will debut much like last season — episodes of the crime drama will air on ABC first before streaming on Hulu. In addition to Olson, the show stars Javicia Leslie as Daphne, Deniz Akdeniz as Lev “Oz” Ozdil, Amirah J as Ava, Matthew Lamb as Elliot and Judy Reyes as Selena. Daniel Sunjata plays Morgan’s by-the-book partner Karadec, and Steve Howey joins the cast in season 2 as new precinct captain Nick Wagner.
High Potential is based on the French series Haut Potentiel Intellectuel. According to official descriptions, the first few episodes of season 2 will again pit Morgan against the Game Maker and continue the storyline with Ava’s missing dad, Roman.
When to watch High Potential’s season 2 premiere on Hulu
Season 2 of the Kaitlin Olson-starring series will air on ABC on Tuesday and stream the following day on Hulu. Here are the release details for the first three episodes.
Episode 1, Pawns: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 16 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Sept. 17.
Episode 2, Checkmate: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 23 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Sept. 24.
Episode 3, Eleven Minutes: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 30 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Oct. 1.
James Martin/CNET
Hulu has two plans: a basic, ad-supported option for $10 a month, or $100 a year, and a mostly ad-free option for $19 a month. You can also get Hulu in a bundle with Disney Plus and HBO Max, Disney Plus and ESPN Unlimited, Disney Plus and ESPN Select (formerly ESPN Plus) or just Disney Plus.
Look to the slow cooker for a sneaky money-saver this fall.
CNET
Slow cooking transforms tough, inexpensive cuts of meat into melt-in-your-mouth dishes that rival upscale restaurants, all while requiring minimal hands-on time. These compact countertop devices consume significantly less electricity than your oven, helping reduce monthly utility costs.
With their straightforward operation, slow cookers shine during the cooler months when hearty meals are most appealing. Whether craving rich beef stew, robust chili, succulent pork shoulder, or perfectly shredded chicken, these versatile appliances work their magic unattended. Simply prep your ingredients in the morning, and return home to the aroma of a fully cooked meal waiting on your table.
To see how much you can save using a slow cooker instead of the oven, I priced out the cooking time and cost for a pork shoulder recipe — a relatively cheap cut of meat — using all three methods. The savings are significant; the more you use your slow cooker or multicooker, the greater they’ll get.
Oven, slow cooker and Instant Pot compared
Appliance
Max wattage pull
Cost per hour of cooking
Total hours (6-lb. pork shoulder)
Total cost
Large oven
3,000
$0.51
7
$3.57
Slow cooker (6-quart)
260
$0.05
8
$0.40
Instant Pot pressure cooker (6-quart)
1,000
$0.17
1.5
$0.26
How I got these numbers
The easiest way to figure out how much a pressure or slow cooker might save you versus the big oven is to calculate the wattage pulled per hour, versus how much an electric stove would use. For this exercise, we’ll compare the energy draw from a full-size electric stove to that of a standard 6-quart slow cooker and a 6-quart Instant Pot pressure cooker.
It’s difficult to prorate the wattage pull for lower temperatures, so I calculated each appliance at its max energy draw, even though you probably won’t generally be cooking on high for these long sessions. The slow cooker and oven totals would likely drop a bit if they were set to lower temperatures, but the Instant Pot would not.
I used one of Food Network’s top-rated recipes for each to calculate the time needed and the total cost to cook a large pork shoulder (classic slow-cooked food) using all three appliances. It’s worth noting that pressure cooking with an Instant Pot takes significantly less time than slow cooking in an oven or a slow cooker.
Ovens are great for cooking low and slow but they use about 90% more energy than a countertop slow cooker.
KitchenAid
How much does an electric oven cost to run?
To determine electric oven consumption, you’ll calculate the wattage pull per hour of cooking. Most electric ovens draw around 3,000 watts, depending on the temperature. Electricity rates also vary widely by state. To find yours, consult this chart with the 2022 prices listed in cents per kilowatt-hour (kWh).
Once you find your oven’s wattage (either on the appliance’s tag, the owner’s manual, or an online product listing), multiply that number by the number of hours you use the oven each day. Then, divide by 1,000 watts (1 kilowatt) to find the kilowatt-hours (kWh) of electricity consumed.
Next, determine the average price per kWh of electricity in your state for the year according to the US Energy Information Administration. Multiply that amount by the number you just calculated (3, in this example) to determine your daily operating cost.
Working with New York’s electricity rate of 17 cents per kilowatt-hour (kWh), a 3,000-watt oven would cost me about 51 cents per hour. Properly slow-cooking a 6-pound boneless pork shoulder in the main oven will cost about $3.57 for the full seven hours.
With a wattage pull of around 300 watts, appliances don’t get much more energy-efficient than the slow cooker.
Colin West McDonald/CNET
How much does a slow cooker cost to run?
Slow cookers are also electric, so you’ll use the same methodology as above to find their cost. The wattage pull for slow cooker models varies; larger ones will use more energy. A standard 6-quart slow cooker has a max output of 260 watts.
Using these figures, we can determine that a slow cooker uses about 9% of the total energy draw of a large oven. Again, factoring in New York’s electricity costs, we can safely say a leading six-quart slow cooker will cost about 5 cents per hour. That’s 91% more energy-efficient than the average full-size electric oven. The pork shoulder recipe calls for eight hours of cooking, costing you about 40 cents using a slow cooker.
Due to a shorter overall cooking time, the Instant Pot (pressure cooker) turns out to be the most energy-efficient way to achieve that tender, slow-cooked result.
Instant Pot
How much does an Instant Pot cost to run?
A similar recipe for pork shoulder cooked in an Instant Pot called for one hour of cooking for a four-pound pork shoulder cut into pieces. Instant Pots will draw different amounts of energy based on the setting. For pressure cooking, a standard 6-quart model will draw about 1,000 watts or one-third the energy draw of a big oven.
Knowing this, we can determine that in New York State, it will cost you about 17 cents per hour to pressure cook. Because this recipe is for a smaller pork shoulder cut into pieces, I’ll add 30 minutes to that cook time. That would net about 26 cents to cook a similar 6-pound cut of meat, not diced into pieces, in an Instant Pot.
You can make delicious pulled pork in an oven, slow cooker or Instant Pot but one will cost you significantly more in overall energy.
Chowhound
How much can a slow cooker or Instant Pot save you?
Of these three methods, the big oven is the most expensive way to cook low and slow by a good margin. While $3 of savings might seem small, expanding it out over a year of long braises and slow cooks could save you some serious dough on your overall energy bill. If you slow cook once weekly, that’s a quick savings of $150 for the year.
Every Instant Pot is also a slow cooker so there’s no real need to buy both.
Alina Bradford/CNET
All is not equal: One significant consideration
One big caveat is that these three cooking methods, while similar in some ways, don’t deliver the same results. Many swear by braising meats and slow cooking in the authentic oven, even if it takes longer and costs more. And they might not be wrong. With pressure cooking, for instance, I’ve never gotten precisely the same result as with slow oven-roasting, but specific recipes come pretty close. People are also critical of slow cookers for their propensity to make food appear mushy, not just tender, when used for long periods.
Bonus: Instant Pots are cheap and slow cookers, even cheaper
If trimming money from your monthly bill has drawn you to the slow cooker or Instant Pot, you likely don’t want to shell out a ton of money to buy one. The good news is you won’t have to: A 6-quart Instant Pot can be had for around $80 (less if you find one on sale) and slow cookers start at around $40. It’s also worth noting that every Instant Pot has a slow cooker function, so there’s no need to stock your kitchen with both.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition has a really odd green group — simple once you get it, of course. If you’re struggling but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Fore!
Green group hint: Name of a league.
Blue group hint: Subjective scoring.
Purple group hint: Drinking vessel.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Golf scoring terms.
Green group: WNBA.
Blue group: Sports that have judges.
Purple group: ____ cup.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for Sept. 16, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is golf scoring terms. The four answers are birdie, bogey, eagle and par.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is WNBA. The four answers are Association, Basketball, National and Women’s.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is sports that have judges. The four answers are diving, figure skating, gymnastics and skateboarding.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is ____ cup. The four answers are America’s, Ryder, Stanley and World.
Battery life is rated for up to 8 hours (up from 6 for AirPods Pro 2)
Cons
They still use the H2 chip found in the AirPods Pro 2
Heart-rate monitoring is buried in fitness apps
While they work with Android, many of their features are exclusive to Apple devices
Some new colors would be nice
One issue with next-gen AirPods such as the AirPods Pro 3 is that they often look very similar to the previous model, leaving many people to question whether the upgrades really matter. However, after using the AirPods Pro 3 for five days, I can say that these buds are significantly improved in four key areas: fit, sound quality, noise cancellation and battery life. The result is that you don’t feel like you’re making any compromises when buying the AirPods Pro 3. Read on to see just how much they’ve improved in each area and how they stack up against other top true-wireless earbuds.
Before I get into all the changes, here’s a quick breakdown of what’s stayed the same.
The AirPods Pro 3’s list price is still $249 (£219, AU$429). That wasn’t a given with all the uncertainty surrounding the Trump administration tariffs, but we’ll see where their street price shakes out on Amazon and other retailers where AirPods models often get discounted.
The AirPods Pro 3 are powered by Apple’s H2 chip — the same one that powers the AirPods Pro 2, AirPods 4 and Beats Powerbeats Pro 2. Rumors pointed to an H3 chip, but that didn’t happen.
Nor did we get any new color options; white is still the only option.
The AirPods Pro 3 stick with Bluetooth 5.3, just like the AirPods Pro 2 (though some true-wireless earbuds have already jumped to Bluetooth 6.0).
The buds still feature a MagSafe charging case with USB-C and wireless charging (no USB-C charging cable is included).
Now for the upgrades: I’ll run through them quickly, then share my take on many of them.
What’s new or upgraded
While they look similar to the previous model, the AirPods Pro 3 have been redesigned and their geometric shape has changed a bit, with the angle of the bud shifted. They’re the same length but are slightly smaller width-wise, slightly larger depth-wise and weigh a touch more (5.55 grams vs. 5.3 grams on the AirPods Pro 2).
They come with new foam-infused silicone ear tips in five sizes, including a new extra-extra small size.
They’re equipped with heart-rate sensors like the Beats Powerbeats Pro 2.
2x better noise cancellation compared to the AirPods Pro 2, according to Apple.
While they have 10.7mm drivers like the AirPods Pro 2, those drivers have been upgraded to take advantage of the buds’ new multiport acoustic architecture, which moves more air through the buds and improves sound quality.
The microphones have been upgraded.
Transparency Mode has been enhanced.
New Live Translation feature (also available for the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 series, but not the Beats Powerbeats Pro 2).
Their battery life has improved to 8 hours with noise cancellation on and up to 10 hours in Hearing Aid mode with transparency on.
Instead of being IPX4 splash-proof like the AirPods Pro 2, they’ve got an IP57 rating, which means they can withstand a sustained spray of water. (I poured water on them and they survived just fine). They’re also dust-resistant.
The case now includes a U2 chip, boosting Precision Finding range in the Find My app by 1.5x (requires an iPhone 17).
Like with the AirPods 4, there’s no longer a button on the case for Bluetooth pairing. You simply double tap on the front of the case to have the buds go into Bluetooth pairing mode.
Watch this: Apple AirPods Pro 3 Review: The Complete Package
Modified design improved the fit for me
As I mentioned, the AirPods Pro 3 are slightly narrower, but more importantly, their shape and bud angle have been adjusted so the ear tips point more directly into your ear canals.
Additionally, the ear tips have been redesigned. Traditional foam tips tend to feel dense and squishy at the same time, but these new tips are infused with a thin layer of memory foam, particularly toward the front, giving them a firmer and more premium feel.
Enlarge Image
Testing the AirPods Pro 3 in the streets of New York. They look the same in your ears as the AirPods Pro 2 but the fit feels different.
David Carnoy/CNET
The tips now come in five sizes, including a new extra-extra small option. There’s still no extra-large tip (which I was hoping for), but the large size now fits more like XL. Note that the new tips attach differently than before, so they aren’t compatible with the original AirPods Pro or Pro 2.
The buds felt noticeably different in my ears than the AirPods Pro 2 — snugger and more secure. With the Pro 3, Apple put a big emphasis on fit since a tight seal is key to sound quality and noise canceling, and it wants people to notice both have improved.
I think more people will be able to get a better fit with these buds, though I’m sure there will be some folks who were just fine with the fit of the AirPods Pro 2 who will say they prefer their fit.
I haven’t spent much time using the new heart-rate monitoring feature yet, and I don’t consider it a must-have in earbuds, particularly if you already own an Apple Watch or another watch with heart-rate monitoring capabilities. While the heart-rate sensors have been custom-designed for the AirPods Pro 3 (they’re Apple’s smallest heart-rate sensors) and aren’t identical to the ones in the Powerbeats Pro 2, my experience using them was the same as with the Powerbeats Pro 2, which I’ve tested more extensively.
The AirPods Pro 3 have heart-rate sensors like the Powerbeats Pro 2, but they’re custom-designed for the AirPods Pro 3.
Apple
The monitoring is compatible with a number of fitness apps, including Apple Fitness and Fitness Plus, and can work in tandem with the Apple Watch’s heart-rate monitoring feature to get the most accurate measurement between the two devices. You can also use a single bud for heart-rate monitoring — a feature Beats added to the Powerbeats Pro 2, too.
The one drawback of using the heart-rate monitor on the Powerbeats Pro 2 or AirPods Pro 3 is that you need to launch an app to see your heart rate. For example, with the Apple Fitness app, you have to start a workout activity like an outdoor walk, run or cycle. By contrast, with the Apple Watch (and other fitness watches), your heart rate appears as soon as you put the device on, making your heart rate easy to track whether you’re working out or not.
Using the heart-rate monitor does affect the AirPods Pro 3’s battery life — dropping from 8 hours with noise canceling on to 6.5 hours — which is likely why Apple didn’t design it to be always on. Still, I wish there were an option to keep the sensors running at times and have my heart rate show up in a widget on my iPhone’s home screen (or even lock screen), instead of only when I manually start it in a fitness app.
The current list of compatible third-party fitness apps for the heart-rate monitoring feature.
Screenshot by David Carnoy/CNET
Apple ups its noise-canceling game
The two biggest improvements people were hoping for in the AirPods Pro 3 were sound quality and noise-canceling performance, with voice-calling performance coming in a close third.
I tested their noise-cancellation capabilities on a plane against the AirPods Pro 2 and could definitely tell a difference, with the Pro 3s tamping down the cabin noise to a faint hum. The AirPods Pro 2 did a good job, but the Pro 3s took the noise level down even further. I can’t say the Pro 3’s noise canceling is exactly twice as good as the Pro 2’s, which Apple claims, but it’s definitely better.
When I got back to New York City, I put them up against the Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds (2nd Gen), which a lot of people consider to have the best noise-canceling capabilities when it comes to earbuds — or headphones for that matter. (Although Sony’s WH-1000XM6 headphones also offer outstanding noise cancellation — I named them the “new noise-canceling king” in my review).
The AirPodsPro 3 (right) look similar to the AirPods Pro 2 (left) on the surface, but have a slightly different shape and new eartips, along with a heart-rate sensor in each bud.
David Carnoy/CNET
What I can say is that Apple’s noise canceling now matches Bose and Sony, though it’s hard to name a clear winner without a pricey testing rig to provide scientific results. Apple says the AirPods Pro 3 offer the “world’s best in-ear active noise cancellation,” but it’s unclear whether it tested the AirPods Pro 3 against the 2nd Gen Bose QC Ultra Earbuds, which were released on June 28 internationally and on Sept. 10 in the US. In the fine print, Apple says that testing was conducted in July 2025 and comparisons were “made against the best-selling wireless in-ear headphones commercially available at the time of testing.”
I swapped Bose’s QC Ultra Earbuds 2s back and forth with the AirPods Pro 3 while riding the subway and walking the streets. Both have truly impressive noise-canceling capabilities. Compared to the AirPod Pro 2, the Pro 3s are designed to improve noise cancellation across all frequencies, including mids and highs that can be challenging to muffle. I could still hear people’s voices on the streets but they were toned down significantly and, unless they were talking loudly, I had a hard time understanding what they were saying. On the subway, the buds blocked out about 80-85% of the noise around me.
When I took the buds out of my ears or went into Transparency Mode, I was often shocked by just how much external noise there was.
More refined sound with better bass
The sound quality gains may not be quite as big as the noise-canceling gains, but the Pro 3’s sound is definitely improved over the Pro 2’s. The bass has more definition and extension — it hits harder and goes deeper — and the earbuds sound clearer, more natural and open with more sparkle in the treble. I also think they play a little louder.
I ran through the usual tracks I use for testing headphones — it’s an eclectic mix. They included Spoon’s Knock Knock Knock, Athletes of God’s Don’t Wanna Be Normal, Orbital’s Dirty Rat, Bjork’s Hollow, Drake’s Passionfruit, Pixies’ Vault of Heaven, Florence and the Machine’s Choreomania, various Foo Fighters songs, plus David Byrne’s new album Who Is the Sky?
Testing AirPods for sound quality is a bit tricky since Apple’s spatial audio can make tracks sound different — sometimes better, sometimes just different. Most of my testing was done on Apple Music (using an iPhone 17 with near-final iOS 26), which has plenty of tracks optimized for spatial audio. I also tried Spotify and streamed a few movies on the Apple TV app, since the improved audio carries over there as well.
Read more: You can preoder the iPhone 17 today — get it free with these carriers
Enlarge Image
A close-up of the new tips and heart-rate sensors. The pinch and swipe controls (for volume) remain the same.
David Carnoy/CNET
You aren’t going to get quite the same level of sound quality that you’d get from a good pair of wired studio headphones, but that extra bit of clarity and definition puts the AirPods Pro 3 in the same league as some of the best-sounding earbuds, including the Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 4 and Sony WF-1000XM5. I’d still give audiophile buds like the Noble Fokus Amadeus and Bowers & Wilkins Pi8 the slight edge sound-wise, but those models are larger, more expensive and can’t match the noise-canceling and voice-calling performances of the AirPods Pro 3.
Unlike most high-end earbuds and headphones, Apple doesn’t let you adjust the sound profile with EQ settings. Still, the AirPods deliver all the hallmarks of premium audio — or at least premium Bluetooth audio. Apple has leveled up the listening experience with purer, more accurate sound, tighter bass and a touch more openness. In my AirPods Pro 2 review, I noted how impressive the sound was for such small, lightweight buds — though it still fell a bit short of the very best earbuds out there.
Simply put: The AirPods Pro 3’s sound doesn’t fall short anymore. And while they come at a premium price, these small, lightweight earbuds deliver remarkably good audio for their size.
Voice-calling performance
AirPods have long stood out for voice-calling performance compared to other true-wireless earbuds. Back when the originals launched, I remember Android users buying them just for calls — and every generation since has remained top-tier in that department.
The thing that struck me in my tests with the AirPods Pro 3 was just how much background noise they eliminated. I made calls in the streets of New York City with a lot ambient noise around me, including traffic and ambulance sirens, and callers told me they couldn’t hear any of it. In loud environments, my voice would sometimes warble or sound a bit digitized to callers, but when I shared a recording of what I was actually hearing, they were surprised — even stunned — by how much background noise was removed.
Enlarge Image
The case is ever-so-slightly bigger than the AriPods Pro 2 case. It includes USB-C and wireless charging.
David Carnoy/CNET
While the voice-calling performance of the AirPodsPro 3 seems slightly better, I’ll have to run more comparisons to truly determine how much of a difference there really is. With iOS26, the AirPods Pro 2 and other H2-chip models — including both AirPods 4 versions — are getting an update that adds studio-quality recording and promises better voice-calling performance. As Apple says, “With the H2 chip, beamforming microphones, and computational audio, users will also enjoy more natural vocal texture and clarity across iPhone calls, FaceTime, and CallKit-enabled apps.”
The AirPods Pro 3 do have upgraded microphones, so that’s a plus when it comes to noise reduction and voice pickup. And that upgraded acoustic architecture with more air flow should help with hearing callers even better.
Live translation
Apple’s Live Translation is one of the new features that’s being highlighted with the AirPods Pro 3, but it’s also coming to other AirPods with the H2 chip, including the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 models, though not the H2-equipped Powerbeats Pro 2 (sorry, Beats owners).
Live translation currently has a limited number of languages.
David Carnoy/CNET
At home, I tested the feature with Spanish-language YouTube videos and TV (you first have to download the language you want). It worked well for the most part, and you also get a text readout of the translation as you hear it in your ears. The only real limitation is that it currently supports just five languages: English, French, German, Portuguese and Spanish.
You can program the action button on the iPhone to quickly launch the Live Translation app or hold both stems of the AirPods to launch it. With the translation done locally on your phone, you don’t need cell coverage to use the feature, so you can take advantage of it in remote places, too.
For live conversations in different languages to work, everyone involved needs to be wearing AirPods with an H2 chip. Also note: Live translation only works on iPhones that support Apple Intelligence — that includes the iPhone 15 Pro, as well as all iPhone 16 and iPhone 17 models.
While companies like Samsung, Google and even some budget Amazon earbuds also offer live translation (with Samsung and Google supporting far more languages), Apple’s version is notably simple to use and access. We’ll have to see how it evolves over time.
Transparency and Hearing Aid modes
One area I expected Apple to improve with the AirPods Pro 3 is Hearing Aid mode. I still need to test it more thoroughly, but the already best-in-class Transparency Mode now sounds even more natural, likely thanks to upgraded microphones, and includes an automatic Conversation Boost “for clearer speech in noisy environments.”
If you’re not familiar, transparency modes let you hear the outside world while still wearing the buds, even though they’re blocking your ear canals. Hearing Aid mode builds on that by using transparency to amplify the sounds around you.
Better battery life through chemistry
As noted, battery life has improved in both noise-canceling and transparency modes: up to 8 hours on a single charge with noise canceling on (7.5 hours with spatial audio and head tracking), and up to 10 hours with transparency and Hearing Aid mode. That number drops to 6.5 hours when heart-rate monitoring is engaged. It’s also worth noting that Apple lists total battery life with the charging case as 24 hours, versus 30 hours for the AirPods Pro 2. Some people, including me, are a bit perplexed as to why the overall battery life time is lower, particularly when the charging case is slightly bigger (my protective OtterBox Core Series case for the AirPods Pro 2 didn’t quite fit on the AirPods Pro 3’s case).
What’s interesting is that the battery in the buds is apparently the same size (with the same capacity) as the battery in the AirPods Pro 2; it’s the battery chemistry that’s changed. That change is largely what’s behind the battery life improvements, along with some energy efficiency gained through new software written for the AirPods Pro 3. You get an additional three charges in the charging case, which is less than the AirPods Pro 2’s four charges.
While certain AirPods Pro 3 features and enhancements are being made available to the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 through firmware updates, the AirPods Pro 3 have software written exclusively for the earbuds’ hardware upgrades and new acoustic architecture. That unfortunately means the AirPods 2’s battery life, sound quality and noise-canceling capabilities won’t be getting any better.
Upgraded U2 chip in charging case for Find My
While Apple didn’t add a new H3 chip to the buds, it did add a new U2 chip to the charging case. It says the new chip increases the range for Precision Finding in the Find My app by 1.5x (MacRumors reports that it offers 3x the range, but Apple says it’s 1.5x on its site). Whatever the exact number, it means you’ll be able to use Precision Finding to hone in on your case’s location — almost like a metal detector — even from farther away. Note that while the buds and case can both be tracked in Find My, only the case supports Precision Finding, so you’ll want to lose them together if you hope to track them this way.
Enlarge Image
Ah, that’s where I left the AirPods Pro 3.
David Carnoy/CNET
I tested out the feature and the range is extended and it also seemed zippier and more reliable. Like the U1, the U2 uses ultra-wideband technology, delivering improved spatial awareness and location accuracy to Bluetooth. There’s been some speculation about whether Apple could use the technology to deliver other features to the AirPods Pro 3, including lossless audio (via the charging case). But for now it’s only being used to enhance the ability to find the Pro 3’s charging case should you lose it.
While the U2 chip first appeared in the iPhone 15, you’ll need an iPhone 17 model to get the better range for Precision Finding with the AirPods Pro 3 (I tested it with an iPhone 17). I’m still confirming this and will update this section as I get more info and do further testing.
Additional features
The AirPods Pro 3 have all the same features as the AirPods Pro 2, including Conversation Awareness, Adaptive Audio, Hearing Protection head gestures to interact with Siri or manage calls and plenty of others. I won’t rehash every feature from the Pro 2, but here’s a rundown of the new additions coming to both models with iOS 26. I’ll be testing them further in the days ahead.
Studio-quality audio recording: Apple says that “interviewers, podcasters, singers and other creators can record their content with greater sound quality, and even record while on the go or in noisy environments, with Voice Isolation.”
Upgraded voice-calling performance: “Users will enjoy more natural vocal texture and clarity across iPhone calls, FaceTime and CallKit-enabled apps,” it says.
The new Camera Remote feature allows you to “start or stop video recordings from a distance with a simple press of the AirPods stem.”
AirPods models with the H2 chip will also be able to detect when you fall asleep and automatically pause what you’re listening to.
Several new features such as Live Translation will be available for the AirPods Pro 2, so many AirPods Pro 2 owners won’t feel the need to upgrade right away. But if you’ve been using AirPods Pro 2 for a while, it might be worth passing them on to a friend or relative and upgrading to the Pro 3s. They’re about as close as earbuds get to being complete: excellent noise cancellation, strong voice-calling performance and sound quality that rivals the very best. Few buds excel in all three areas — and the Pro 3s manage it while packing in plenty of extra features.
The latest iPhone system, iOS 26, is being released this week, bringing a new Liquid Glass interface and other features. Before you update, make sure iOS 18.6 on your iPhone is in top form to make it feel faster, more private and easier to use.
I tested the latest update and found 10 quick changes that had an immediate impact. Some help cut background battery drain, others boost privacy and a few are just small “quality of life” upgrades that make the iPhone smoother overall. The best part? None of them require advanced know-how — and most take less than a minute to turn on.
So if your iPhone has been dragging a little or you’re just curious about hidden features, these settings are worth checking. They can refresh your phone’s performance, extend its battery life and buy you more time before you even think about upgrading.
For more on what’s new in iOS 18, learn about improvements to the overhauled Calculator app and the Mail app. And don’t forget to consult our iOS 18 upgrade checklist, which includes making sure you have a proper backup before upgrading.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Watch this: 11 Hidden Features in iOS 18
Turn off categories in the Mail app
With email, everyone has their own way of dealing with the influx of messages. Traditionally, the Mail app has kept a chronological list, but that can get unwieldy if you also get scores of promotions, receipts and other types of email. The new categories feature creates virtual buckets for Primary, Transactions, Updates and Promotions, and guesses how your messages should be sorted.
If that approach doesn’t work for you, here are two things to try.
• In the event that categories are somewhat useful, but you still want a chronological view of your Inbox, swipe all the way to the right of the categories and tap All Mail.
• To turn off categories altogether, tap the three-dot menu (…) in the top-right corner, and then tap List View.
Turn off Mail Categories from within the Inbox. (iOS 18.5 beta shown here.)
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Change the default buttons on the lock screen
In real estate, location is everything, and the bottom corners of the iPhone lock screen are the prime spots, each an easy thumb press away when your device is still locked. Before iOS 18, those posts were held by the flashlight and camera buttons, with no way to change them.
In iOS 18, you can finally replace them with other buttons — or remove them entirely, a balm for folks who unknowingly activate the flashlight (believe me, there’s a better way to turn it on). You can add buttons to recognize music via Shazam, enable Dark Mode, set an alarm/timer, enable Airplane Mode, open your Wallet, send money via Tap to Cash and more.
Here’s how:
1. On the iPhone’s lock screen, touch and hold anywhere on the display until you see the Customize button. You’ll need to unlock the phone using Face ID, Touch ID or your passcode. If it opens the home screen, swipe down from the center-top of the screen (not the right edge, which brings up Control Center.
2. Tap Customize and then choose Lock Screen.
3. Remove one of the buttons by tapping the – (minus) button on the icon.
4. To replace the button with another function, tap its space (now with a + icon) and then choose the one you want on the next screen. (You can also opt to leave that space empty with no button.)
5. Repeat those steps for the other button if you want to change it.
6. Tap Done when you’re finished.
7. Tap the lock screen again to exit the customize mode.
Remove a lock screen button by tapping the – (minus) button, and then choose a new control to replace it.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Get important alerts using Prioritize Notifications
For iPhone models that can run Apple Intelligence, a new option in iOS 18.4 is fast becoming one of my favorite AI features. Go to Settings > Notifications, and under Apple Intelligence, tap Prioritize Notifications. As new alerts come in — and some days feel like they arrive in floods — Apple Intelligence determines which ones are more likely to be important to you. For example, texts from people in your contacts could be flagged in favor of random scam messages. On that settings screen, you can enable or disable priority notifications for individual apps.
In iOS 18.4, Apple Intelligence can prioritize notifications to grab your attention.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set up some of the new tasks available on the Action button
The Action button on the iPhone 15 Pro, iPhone 16, iPhone 16E and iPhone 16 Pro replaced the dedicated mute switch found on every earlier iPhone model with a configurable control. By default, it serves the same purpose — hold it to turn Silent Mode on or off — but you can configure it for other actions like opening the Camera app, performing multiple actions at once or even ordering coffee. The iOS 18.4 update adds Visual Intelligence as an option for the Action button. That makes the AI technology available on the iPhone 16E, which does not include the novel new Camera Control but is now an option for any iPhone with an Action button.
In iOS 18, the Action button gets new capabilities. You can bypass Control Center and choose a control of your choice, such as opening the Remote interface for navigating Apple TV or using Shazam to identify a song.
To choose a different action for the Action button, go to Settings > Action Button. Swipe sideways to select and activate one of the available actions. For the Controls, Shortcut and Accessibility options, tap the Choose button to pick which specific action to run.
iOS 18 now lets you program the Action Button with your favorite Control Center control.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Give your home screen a radical new look
You wouldn’t think that putting icons where you want is a radical new feature, but that’s because iOS has always had a locked arrangement. Apps get added from top to bottom, left to right. You could rearrange the order in which icons appear and move them to other screens, but that was about it.
In iOS 18, apps can be positioned nearly anywhere. You no longer need to deal with a wallpaper image of your kids or pets being obscured by icons. They still adhere to a grid — Apple isn’t about to sanction anarchy — but can be placed freely.
Also, Dark mode finally applies to all of the iPhone’s home screen, with options for coloring icons and affecting the brightness of the wallpaper image. Here’s how to customize the looks.
Arrange apps: Touch and hold the home screen to enter “jiggle mode,” and then drag the icons to new positions. It will still slide them around to fill spaces, but with patience, you can move them into the spots you want.
Position app icons where you want so this very good girl isn’t covered.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
You can also quickly turn compatible apps into widgets that display more information. Maps, for instance, can be a map of your current location with shortcut buttons to search for places or bring up a list of nearby places (such as dinner spots). Touch and hold the app icon and look for a row of resize buttons in the menu that appears. Once expanded beyond the standard icon size, you can drag the handle in the bottom-right corner of the new icon. To get it back to its single icon size you need to touch and hold again and choose the single-icon button
Some apps can be expanded into larger icons that act like widgets.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set Dark mode: If you’ve ever subjected yourself to the retina blast of black text on a white background late at night in a darkened room, you will appreciate the new Dark mode option for the home and lock screens. iOS has previously included a Dark mode, where light backgrounds switch to black or dark gray, text switches to white or light gray and other interface elements are dimmed to coexist in a dark environment. That’s never been applied to the home and lock screens in any significant way — only the dock and some widgets — until iOS 18.
First, touch and hold the home screen to enter jiggle mode. Tap the Edit button in the top-left corner and choose Customize from the menu. At the bottom of the screen, choose a mode for the icons and background: Automatic, Dark or Light (I’ll get to Tinted in a moment). In Dark mode, the icons gain black backgrounds, and folders and the Dock become dark gray. (Developers have the option of making Dark mode icons for their apps. In the meantime, apps not yet optimized get a generally darker appearance.)
In the home screen’s Dark mode, icons and the background are given a darker treatment.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
In Dark mode, the background image also changes. Apple’s default iOS 18 wallpaper dynamically changes from light to dark as the day progresses, or you can choose colors that offer a light and dark option. If you use a photo, its overall exposure is reduced to dim the light output.
If you want dark icons but aren’t a fan of the dimmed photo treatment, tap the sun icon in the corner of the options sheet at the bottom of the screen to toggle back to Light mode just for the background.
Tinted icons: A new and different option is to tint all of the app icons so they share the same color. In the Customize options at the bottom of the screen, choose Tinted as the icon style. You can then adjust the Hue (the slider with the color spectrum) and Luminosity (the slider with the dark to light range) to choose the color tint you prefer.
Apply a universal tint to all app icons, with controls for adjusting the hue and luminosity.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
What if you want to match a color from a background image? Tap the eyedropper button and then drag the reticle to pinpoint the color you want — the border indicates the selected color.
The tint is applied not only to icons but to widgets as well. For a widget such as Photos, the images it displays show up as duotones to match the theme.
Large icons: Do the labels below each app icon seem redundant to you? Now you can remove the labels and increase the size of the icons with one setting. Open the Customize options as described above and tap the Large button.
Make the home screen icons larger and hide the app labels.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
After making any of these changes, tap anywhere on the screen to apply them and exit the Customize interface.
Change up how the Control Center looks
Control Center was once a convenient place to quickly access controls such as playback volume and Airplane mode but under iOS 18 it’s a configurable playground. You can position controls where you want, resize many to reveal more information and add new controls on multiple screens.
Swipe down from the top-right corner to reveal the Control Center (or swipe up from the bottom on the iPhone SE). To enter edit mode, touch and hold or press the + button at the top-left corner.
Just as with moving apps, drag a control to another slot on the screen to reposition it. Many of the controls also include a bottom-right handle that can resize the control — in most cases, it reveals the name of the control and its current status (such as Flashlight Off).
Rearrange the controls in Control Center and, for some, expand them to reveal more information (or just make the button a larger target for pressing).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Control Center also now spans multiple screens. Swipe up to view controls for media currently playing, Home controls for smart lights and appliances and a page dedicated to the communication options that appear when you long-press the Connectivity block containing Airplane Mode, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Cellular and others. Look closely and you’ll see that those screens are actually individual controls expanded to occupy the entire Control Center area.
You can rearrange the order of those screens by moving their controls. Suppose you want Home controls to be the first swipe instead of Now Playing: In the editing mode, drag the large Home control up to the previous screen (Now Playing will shift to the right to make room).
Some controls get their own screens, such as Home. Normally it’s on the third screen, but here it’s been moved to the second screen.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove controls, tap the – (minus) button that appears. You can also add other controls: Tap Add a Control and scroll through the available options ranging from starting a Screen Recording to a host of accessibility options.
Read more: All the new controls you can add to Control Center
Lock or hide any of your sensitive apps
Our phones carry some of our most sensitive data and yet it’s not uncommon to hand a phone to a friend to view photos or look up something online. That doesn’t mean they’re going to snoop but it doesn’t not mean they might be more curious than you’re comfortable with. For data you want to ensure stays out of sight or to add a layer of protection in front of sensitive information, iOS 18 adds the ability to lock and hide apps.
For example, let’s say you keep an ongoing set of lists of gift ideas for family members in the Notes app. You can lock individual notes but that requires a separate step. Maybe a few ideas were made as individual quick notes or drawings. Instead of micromanaging access, you can lock the entire Notes app by doing the following:
Touch and hold the app icon you want to lock and choose Require Face ID or Require Touch ID (or Require Passcode if Face ID or Touch ID are not enabled) from the menu that appears. Confirm your choice by tapping Require Face ID (or similar) in the next dialog.
Lock individual apps.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove the authentication step, touch and hold the app and choose Don’t Require Face ID (or similar).
Nothing outwardly indicates that an app is locked — you’ll find out when you try to open it. There’s one more level of app security available, which is to hide apps in a special locked folder. Touch and hold the app and choose Require Face ID and then tap Hide and Require Face ID in the dialog. Confirm the action by tapping Hide App on the next screen.
The app disappears from the home screen and gets slotted into a Hidden folder at the bottom of the App Library (swipe left beyond your last home screen to view the App Library). To access apps there, tap the Hidden folder and authenticate with Face ID.
When you choose Hide and Require Face ID to protect an app, it gets put into the Hidden folder in App Library (top). Tap the folder and authenticate to access the app (bottom).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
iOS 18 imposes some limitations on hidden apps. Some, such as many of the built-in ones like Notes or Reminders, can only be locked and cannot be hidden at all. Also, the Hidden folder locks itself when you launch an app or swipe away from the App Library.
Turn off Loop Videos in the Photos app
Many apps have implemented a small but annoying (to me) feature, and now Photos under iOS 18.2 has it too: Videos automatically replay when you watch them until you tap the Pause button. That can be fun once or twice, or when viewing short clips. I’m not a fan of having to take action to make them stop each time.
Now I can take action once. Go to Settings > Photos, scroll down until you see Loop Videos and turn the option off. A video will play on its own but then stop at the end as it should.
Turn off Loop Videos to stop every video from replaying automatically.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
If you’d rather the video didn’t play at all until you tap the Play button, also turn off Auto-Play Motion in the same Settings screen.
Adjust the view of your calendar
Big new features like locking and hiding apps are great additions but so are the tiny changes that you encounter every day. The Calendar app includes two new ways to view your schedule.
In iOS 18, when you’re in the Month view in portrait orientation, pinch with two fingers to view more or fewer details. As you “zoom in,” individual events appear as colored bars and then as labeled events with times, all while keeping the monthly grid of days and weeks.
In the Calendar app’s Month view, pinch to zoom in and see more details.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
The Day view, which breaks down your day hour by hour, now has a new Multi Day view that shows two consecutive days to give you context for what’s coming without turning the phone into landscape orientation and viewing the Week view. Tap the View button at the top of the Single Day view and choose Multi Day from the popup menu.
The new Multi Day view in the Calendar shows two days at once (right).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Improve movie and TV show dialogue in the TV app
Trouble hearing dialogue in movies and television shows isn’t a new problem — for example, Apple TV has had a feature for a while where you can ask Siri, “What did she say?” and it will automatically back up a few seconds, turn on subtitles and replay that section of the video. You can even buy soundbars that can overcome muffled TV speech. There are a lot of reasons it’s harder to hear dialogue but the TV app in iOS 18 includes a high-tech workaround to make dialog easier to discern.
While you’re watching a video in the TV app, tap the More (…) button and then expand the Audio heading in the menu that appears; if the phone is in horizontal orientation, tap the Audio Adjustments button. Tap Enhance Dialogue and choose Enhance or Boost. They each dampen background noise and raise the dialogue’s audio.
Turn on Enhance Dialogue in the TV app to discern characters’ speech better in noisy scenes.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
These are just a few new features and changes in iOS 18. Check out our broader coverage of Apple Intelligence, more impressions of the system after using it for months and how these all work together with the iPhone 16 models.
Apple’s iPhone 16, 16 Plus Show Off Bolder Colors and Buttons
Watch every Premier League match live in Australia from AU$32 a month
Stan Sport
There’s more than just bragging rights at stake on Sunday as fierce city rivals Man City and Man United go in search of a much-needed win, both teams having made poor starts to the new season.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services for watching English Premier League games as they happen, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if it’s not available where you are.
The hosts come into the match looking to avoid a third successive defeat following back-to-back losses to Spurs and Brighton before the international break. Of key concern to City manager Pep Guardiola will be how unusually vulnerable City have looked defensively, especially when dealing with counterattacks.
While Ruben Amorim’s United won last time out, that 3-2 victory over newly promoted Burnley was far from convincing. Last month’s humiliating Carabao Cup exit to League Two Grimsby Town is still fresh in supporters’ memories, too.
Manchester City takes on Manchester United on Sunday, Sept. 14, at the Etihad Stadium, with kickoff set for 4:30p.m. BST. That makes it a 11:30 a.m. ET or 8:30 a.m. PT start in the US and Canada, and an 1:30 a.m. AEST kickoff in Australia in the early hours of Monday morning.
Man City boss Pep Guardiola has yet to oversee an EPL win over rivals Man United since Ruben Amorim took charge of the Red Devils last November.
Carl Recine/Mike Hewitt/Getty Images
How to watch Man City vs. Man United in the US without cable
The Manchester derby will be broadcast on NBC and streaming service Peacock. To stream the game live, you’ll need a Peacock Premium or Premium Plus account.
Peacock offers two Premium plans, and after recent price increases, the ad-supported Premium plan costs $11 a month, and the ad-free Premium Plus plan costs $17 a month.
How to watch the English Premier League 2025-26 season from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the EPL action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds, and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN use to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $75 for the first year or $98 total for the first two years (one- and two-year plans renew at $100 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN, and it works on a variety of devices. Prices start at $3.49 a month on a two-year plan for the service’s Basic tier.
73% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months). Now only $3.49/month
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in the UK
This massive Sunday afternoon clash is exclusive to Sky Sports and will be shown on its Sky Sports Main Event and UHD channels. If you already have Sky Sports as part of your TV package, you can stream the game via its Sky Go app. Cord-cutters will want to set up a Now account and a Now Sports membership to stream the game.
Now TV
Sky’s standalone streaming service Now offers access to Sky Sports channels with a Now Sports membership. You can get a day of access for £15 or sign up to a monthly plan from £35 a month right now.
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in Canada
If you want to livestream EPL games in Canada this season, you’ll need to subscribe to Fubo. The service has exclusive rights to the Premier League once again and is broadcasting all 380 matches live.
Fubo
Fubo is the go-to destination for Canadians looking to watch the EPL, with exclusive streaming rights to every match. It currently costs CA$27 for the first month, then CA$31.50 a month from then on.
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in Australia
Livestreaming rights for the EPL are now with Stan Sport, which is showing all 380 games live, including this match.
Stan
Stan Sport will set you back AU$20 a month (on top of a Stan subscription, which starts at AU$12). It’s also worth noting that the streaming service is currently offering a seven-day free trial.
A subscription will also give you access to Premier League, Champions League and Europa League action, as well as international rugby and Formula E.
Quick tips for streaming the Premier League using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming EPL matches may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log in to your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
Saul “Canelo” Álvarez and Terence Crawford step into the ring tonight in a pro boxing matchup that will see Álvarez defending his title as super middleweight champion.
As the crowd descends upon Las Vegas to watch the pair square up, the question lingers in the air of whether Crawford will beef up his weight — and by how much — to meet his opponent’s. While Álvarez is a seasoned super middleweight contender (and current undisputed champion), Crawford has never fought in this weight class and planned to pack on pounds to move up two levels for this fight. However, the Nebraska native is undefeated (41-0 with 31 knockouts) and has earned championship titles in four different weight classes as a lightweight, light middleweight, junior welterweight and welterweight.
Veteran boxer Mike Tyson said he’d like Crawford to win, but he doesn’t believe it’s likely with Álvarez being highly skilled and the weight disparity. But, “There’s been upsets before,” he said.
Like Tyson, viewers are planning to watch the bout to see who wins the title. Scroll down to find out what time to stream the live event on Netflix and who else is on the card.
What time is the Canelo vs. Crawford fight on Netflix?
Fight night kicks off on Saturday, Sept. 13, at 9 p.m. ET (6 p.m. PT),live from Allegiant Stadium in Las Vegas. Regardless of plan type, all Netflix subscribers can watch the event around the globe.
Headlining the main card is the Canelo Álvarez vs. Terence Crawford bout, with a combined purse prize of $200 million. Three other fights are on the main card:
Callum Walsh vs. Fernando Vargas Jr.
Christian Mbilli vs. Lester Martine
Mohammed Alakel vs. John Ornelas
Preliminary fights can also be streamed on Netflix’s Tudum site in Spanish and English beginning at 5:30 p.m. ET.
James Martin/CNET
Netflix offers three plans, ranging from $8 a month for its ad-free version to $18 or $25 per month if you want to stream without ads. You can also watch the docuseries, Countdown: Canelo vs. Crawford, on the service.
Amid a nationwide rush by AI companies to build data centers to support their feverish growth, and by many locales to attract them, some cities are saying whoa, not so fast.
That’s the case in both St. Louis and St. Charles, Missouri, two cities just 30 minutes apart in the heart of the country.
On Aug. 22, St. Charles imposed, in a unanimous vote by the city council, a one-year moratorium on new data center construction after news broke about a secretive data center project possibly coming to the city, which stirred up protests from local residents.
In St. Louis, the head of that city’s planning agency this week proposed a similar moratorium “while the city develops a full understanding of the issue and develops quality land use, environmental, and other regulations,” according to a memo cited by St. Louis Public Radio. It’s a pause that the mayor supports.
There’s good reason for those cities to be concerned. Data centers, stuffed with thousands of computers to handle basically everything you do online, have a voracious need for electricity and water, and no small amount of land or building space. The arrival of generative AI has dramatically amped up demand for such facilities by companies including OpenAI, Google, Microsoft and Meta.
Two of the biggest concerns regarding data centers include the copious amount of water needed to cool the servers and the strain they cause on the electric grid.
I heard objections to AI data centers from residents of Pennsylvania and Louisiana this summer when I was researching the environmental and energy impacts of those facilities. A retired school principal who had organized community resistance told me: “I worry about the kind of world I’m leaving for my grandchildren. It’s not safer, it’s not better, and we’re selling out to these big corporations. You know, it’s not in their backyard, it’s in my backyard.”
Data center pushback in St. Charles
When St. Charles residents learned about data center plans for their city, hundreds showed up at a town hall meeting to let their opposition be heard. The center, known as Project Cumulus, would sit on about 440 acres.
“The effects of whatever that facility would bring, long term, short term, you name it, our house is going to feel it, whether it be the subsidized cost for building additional infrastructure, for bringing the water in, the electricity,” St. Charles resident Andrew Gardner told St. Louis Magazine at the time.
The residents’ opposition and action worked.
In an August email, shared by St. Louis Public Radio, the developers behind Project Cumulus told the City of St. Charles that they were withdrawing their application for a conditional use permit. They said they would incorporate community feedback and prepare a revised proposal.
Days later, the city enacted its one-year moratorium on new data center construction.
Google didn’t immediately respond to CNET’s request for comment.
A pause on data centers, not a ban
This is a server room at a data center belonging to Meta’s Facebook operations in Lulea, Sweden.
Jonathan Nackstrand/AFP via Getty Images
In St. Louis, Mayor Cara Spencer supports pausing new building permits for data centers while the city develops new regulations rather than banning data center construction entirely.
“While I have concerns about data centers’ effects on the environment, utility prices, vibrancy and urban living,” Spencer said in a statement to CNET, “I also recognize their importance to key industries in St. Louis, including biotech, the geospatial field, agtech and health care, and my office is working closely with the Board of Aldermen and key stakeholders to propose responsible regulations to allow for their appropriate development.”
Currently, Missouri has nearly 50 active data centers with the majority located in Kansas City and St. Louis.
Uber is being sued for the second time in four years by the Department of Justice over complaints about its ridesharing service’s treatment of customers with disabilities.
According to the suit, a copy of which was posted online by the website TechCrunch, the company is alleged to “routinely refuse to serve individuals with disabilities, including individuals who travel with service animals or who use stowable wheelchairs.”
The lawsuit also accuses Uber of imposing cleaning surcharges related to service animals and charging cancellation fees to disabled riders who’ve been denied service.
“And Uber’s drivers insult and demean people with disabilities or ask them inappropriate questions,” the suit states.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
In a statement provided to CNET, Uber said: “Riders who use guide dogs or other assistive devices deserve a safe, respectful, and welcoming experience on Uber — full stop. We have a clear zero-tolerance policy for confirmed service denials, and we fundamentally disagree with the DOJ’s allegations.”
The company pointed to the US Service Animal policy, which all drivers are required to agree to, and says it takes “decisive action, including permanent account deactivation” when that policy is violated.
“We continue to invest in technology, training, and dedicated reporting channels — such as a 24/7 service animal denial hotline — to ensure riders can quickly alert us so we can investigate and address issues,” the statement said. “We remain deeply committed to expanding access and continuously improving the experience for riders with disabilities.”
The company also pointed to a page it provides where passengers can file a complaint.
In 2021, Uber was sued by the DOJ for charging wait-time fees to disabled customers who needed more time to get to their rides. That suit was settled in 2022.
While a company like Uber may have plenty of money to settle a case like this, the DOJ’s aim may be to create awareness of violations of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
“On-the-ground enforcement of the ADA by DOJ and private parties is critically important both with regards to the specific cases at issue but also more broadly as a message that disability discrimination is prohibited by federal law and will not be tolerated,” said Shira Wakschlag, general counsel at The Arc of the United States, a nonprofit that advocates for people with intellectual and developmental disabilities.
“Enforcing the ADA in cases like these is critical to ensuring that the law’s promise of creating a more accessible and inclusive world for people with disabilities is realized,” she said.
In addition to the web pages and app options Uber offers to report instances of bad customer service or discrimination, Wakschlag said customers can also report discrimination directly to the DOJ via its website or work with organizations such as The Arc that can field complaints.
“The media can also play an important role in bringing these stories out of the courtroom in a way that the general public understands what is at issue and how it impacts people in the real world,” she says.
Separately, Uber is also facing a suit from the Federal Trade Commission from earlier this year, when the agency accused the company of deceptive pricing practices related to its Uber One subscription service.
It’s here. You can preorder the new iPhone lineup right now to ensure you get Apple’s new flagship in your hand at launch. We’re all buzzing with excitement over Apple’s iPhone 17 lineup, which was announced at the company’s Apple Event 2025 Sept. 9. It includes the base iPhone 17, the new iPhone Air and the 17 Pro, as well as the larger 17 Pro Max. But don’t forget to grab something to protect you nifty new device. Tons of your favorite brands, like Casetify, have already released new cases for the upcoming iPhone 17 models. Even Apple has dropped its new line of cases, with some fun new accessories, too.
We will continue to update this list as more iPhone 17 cases become available. In the meantime, here are the cases you can currently grab to outfit your new iPhone.
Watch this: The New iPhone Air Changes the Game for Preorders
iPhone 17 cases available now
Apple is known for its traditional silicone cases. And don’t worry, those are making a return for the new iPhone 17 series — even the new iPhone Air. But there’s an added feature this time, the crossbody strap. This strap can help you bring your phone around like a bag, no hands or pockets needed. You’ll also get 3% cash back if you purchase with your Apple Card.*
Beats iPhone 17 series cases are available at its Amazon storefront in a variety of styles and colors, including rugged and kickstand options.
The Spigen storefront on Amazon has plenty of new MagSafe cases for the iPhone 17 lineup with a large selection of styles and colors. You’ll also find discounted screen and camera lens protects at a discount.
Prefer an ultra thin case? Pitaka has some stylish and slim options on its Amazon storefront.
Otterbox has iPhone 17 cases available on its Amazon storefront right now. Whether you’re looking for MagSafe cases, leather options or something rugged, there are plenty of options for everyone.
ESR has released tons of different cases for the new iPhone 17 lineup. Plus, no matter which one you pick, they’re all MagSafe. And best of all, these are already discounted up to 28%. You can also shop via the brand’s Amazon storefront.
Popular Smartish cases, including the Gripmunk and Gripzilla, are joining the iPhone 17 crew along with the new Case Clinger and Wallflower models. And we’re already seeing some eye-catching discounts on these cases.
If you’re looking for a more minimalistic look for your phone, take a look at the iPhone 17 series case collection at Nomad. You’ll find high-end cases made with Horween leather, as well as sleek, modern options that won’t be distracting.
Encased has plenty of iPhone 17 series cases available on its Amazon storefront right now, starting at just $14. Whether you’re looking for a case with a belt clip, a wallet case or even a waterproof case, you’ll find a plethora of options here.
Native Union is also offering phone cases for the iPhone 17 series in a variety of colors for those looking for eco-friendly options.
For a variety of rugged case options, be sure to shop the Urban Armor Gear collection of iPhone 17 series cases.
Arc has released tons of different cases for the new iPhone 17 lineup in colors that match the phones. There are a variety of styles available, including Titanium models — though those are considerably more expensive.
Casetify has a vast array of iPhone 17 series case options. If you want something for your new device that stands out from the crowd, don’t skip browsing Casetify’s wares.
Torras has iPhone 17 series cases on its Amazon storefront, with multiple styles available — including several with 360-dregree spin stand ring for added convenience.
From kickstand cases to bundles with screen protectors, there are tons of options to chose from for the whole lineup.
You can shop Mkeke iPhone 17 series cases at its Amazon storefront now. If you’re looking for a bargain buy, these low-cost cases can still help you protect your phone from drops and other accidents. Just note that while these cases do support wireless charging, they are not designed for MagSafe accessories.
Aohi released a new Magarmor case for the new iPhone 17 lineup. This case uses next-gen materials to give you max protection but no bulk. And it’s already $20 off.
If you’re looking for a luxury case with storage for your new iPhone 17 series phone, look no further. Burton Goods has some great full-grain leather options for you.
Get hand-picked deals from CNET shopping experts straight to your phone.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
Can I use my iPhone 16 case with my iPhone 17?
Unfortunately, no. The dimensions of the iPhone 16 and iPhone 17 do not line up. If you try to use your old case for your iPhone 17, it will not fit. The good news is that there are many new cases you can choose from.
How do I preorder the iPhone 17?
You can preorder the iPhone 17 series at select online retailers and carriers.
First, decide which model iPhone you want to buy: iPhone Air, iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro or iPhone 17 Pro Max. Then, select your preferred color and storage capacity. You also need to decide if you’ll trade in an older iPhone, which could get you up to $700 back from Apple.
Once you make those decisions, you’ll need to choose an optional carrier and AppleCare Plus coverage (or forgo it) and click the blue Add to Bag button. You can then include any accessories you want and enter your payment information to complete your purchase.
How do iPhone 17 trade-in offers work?
Multiple carriers offer trade-in savings, some valued at up to $1,100 on eligible trade-ins, which could net you a free iPhone 17 Pro. Note, however, that most trade-in deals from carriers require you to become a customer, and the terms often require you to choose some of the priciest plan options.
Not a fan of contracts? Some retailers also offer trade-in programs, which could offer gift cards toward future purchases instead. This can be a great way to take advantage of savings without necessarily being locked into a contract. Retail offers may not provide as much of a deal as traditional trade-in offers from carriers, though, so keep that in mind as you shop.
*All information about theApple Card has been collected independently by CNET and has not been reviewed by the issuer.
Watch this: The iPhone 17 Is Here! Watch the Announcement at the Apple iPhone 17 Event
Now that the iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro and iPhone Air have been announced, iOS 26 is set to hit older iPhone devices soon. The latest version of the OS brings several new features to iPhones, as well as Apple’s updated design language, Liquid Glass.
Liquid Glass adds a combination of translucency and shiny, glass-like accents throughout the user interface, giving the operating system a new look in more than one way. And despite all of the differences between it and what’s found on current iPhones right now, iOS 18, Liquid Glass isn’t nearly as dramatic as it looks upon first glance. That’s a good thing, since there’s no real learning curve, so anyone familiar with iOS will feel right at home.
Watch this: The New iPhone Air Changes the Game for Preorders
If you want a glimpse of just how Liquid Glass changes the look of your iPhone compared to iOS 18, I’ve highlighted some of the changes below. And if you’re looking to get one of the new iPhones, don’t miss the best iPhone 17 and iPhone Air pre-order deals.
Home screen
Apple kept the new Liquid Glass minimal on the home screen (left), with only minor changes to the default home screen appearance versus iOS 18’s.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Looking at the home screens, the primary difference you’ll find is that in iOS 26, the dock background and the search option that sits between the dock and the home screen icons are more transparent and have a sheen to the edges, whereas in iOS 18, these are slightly darker.
Other smaller changes are that the icons on iOS 26 look slightly larger, and some app icons seem to have been more influenced by the redesign than others, most notably (from the screenshots) Settings, Camera and Mail.
For Liquid Glass to really shine on the home screen, you’ll want to opt for the “All Clear” mode, which will create the most dramatic change to your icons and widgets. Going this route could potentially introduce some viewability issues, but the “reduce transparency” setting remedies this quite well.
Control Center
Things here are largely unchanged. Outside of the new glassy look in iOS 26 (left), the 1×2 and 2×1 controls are more rounded than those of iOS 18.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Things here are largely unchanged. Outside of the new glassy look in iOS 26, the 1×2 and 2×1 controls are more rounded than those of iOS 18.
Lock screen
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
It’s easy to see the differences that Liquid Glass brings to the iPhone lock screen. The digital clock in iOS 26 dynamically resizes depending on the wallpaper and the number of notifications you have at any given moment, which is pretty cool. The clock itself on iOS 18 can be changed, but it won’t change in size in response to content displayed on the lock screen.
The background on notifications is clearly different between the two OS versions, with iOS 18 providing more opacity and black text versus iOS 26’s near-transparent background on white text. The controls at the bottom in iOS 26 also appear more like physical buttons with depth and more of a see-through background.
The new unlock effect in iOS 26 is that the motion of unlocking your iPhone will appear as though you’re lifting a sheet of glass, highlighted by a shiny edge to give it form when you begin to slide your finger up.
Menus and dynamic tab bars
iOS 26’s new Dynamic Tab (top) gives you a cleaner look and more space to view your content.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
A new addition in iOS 26 is the introduction of dynamic tab bars in apps that will change depending on whether you’re scrolling or trying to perform a specific action. Apple says this will create a more intuitive experience while freeing up space for your content. If you were to replace the glass effect with heavily saturated colors, no one would blame you for mistaking this new tab bar with what Google’s doing in Android 16 in some of its apps — they look a lot alike. But compared to iOS 18, this new dynamic tab bar should not only reduce sifting through multiple menus, but it looks pretty good in the process.
iOS 26 will dynamically adapt to light and dark backgrounds
In iOS 26, the color of menu icons and icon text will adapt depending on the background.
Apple/GIF by CNET
While it’s harder to compare Liquid Glass to iOS 18 here, an upcoming feature is that buttons and menus will adapt depending on the content’s background color. For instance, when you’re scrolling through an app with a light background, the floating menu options will appear with black text for easier viewing and will automatically change to white upon scrolling to a dark background.
In iOS 18 (top), some aspects of the user interface would appear darker depending on the color of the background. Take a look at the top and middle examples to see how it compares to Liquid Glass at the bottom.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
iOS has had this type of feature show up in a less dramatic fashion before, as you can tell from the photos app screenshots above. Comparing these to what’s on the horizon, it’s hard not to get excited about the small tweaks Liquid Glass has in store, too.
Those are just a few of our initial findings, and we’ll likely add more once we surface them. If you want more about iOS 26, check out three upcoming features that are a bigger deal than Liquid Glass.
Watch this: iPhone Air Is a Wild Card – and Starts a Big Change for Apple
Tired of the same old Netflix recommendations? There’s a much larger world of content lurking just beneath the surface of your homepage, accessible through a series of secret codes. Most viewers are unaware that this hidden catalog even exists.
Think of these codes as a master key to Netflix’s entire library. They unlock hundreds of hyper-specific micro-genres, allowing you to bypass the algorithm and browse exactly what you’re in the mood for. Whether you’re searching for cult ’80s horror films, heartwarming teen romances, or even the platform’s collection of “short-ass movies,” these codes take you there instantly.
Using this system feels like stepping behind the velvet rope of the service. It transforms the often frustrating experience of endless scrolling into a fun and efficient treasure hunt. If you want to break free from the recommendation loop, these codes are your ticket to discovering hidden gems you would never have found otherwise.
For more, check out our favorite sci-fi movies on Netflix and learn how to share your favorite Netflix clips via text message or social media.
Netflix codes are a set of unique numerical identifiers that can help you find specific genres or sub-genres in the Netflix library on the streamer’s website (not the app).
Typically, you’re constrained to the genres available via the main Netflix menu. There’s no way to choose by specific category other than what’s been chosen for you when you log on. Using these codes opens up an entire library of options for you to choose from that can help you better settle on what to watch for the night. It can even help you discover shows and movies.
Adding these codes to the ends of Netflix URLs lets you directly access collections of movies and TV shows that fall under your chosen category. For example, if you’re short on time and want to queue up a shorter movie, you could check the 90-Minute Movies category with the code 81466194. Looking for something for your entire brood to enjoy? The “Family Movie Night” collection, accessed with code 2013975, is chock-full of favorites even Grandma can get into.
There are more than 36,000 codes to choose from so don’t worry about memorizing them or trying random sequences. Resources like Netflix-Codes.com have an entire directory to sift through so you can search for what you’d like to watch there and find corresponding codes in no time.
The Netflix-Codes site has a full directory of all the available categories on Netflix.
Netflix-Codes.com/Screenshot by CNET
How do I find Netflix’s secret menus of movies and shows?
There isn’t an all-encompassing Netflix secret menu per se. Instead, you will use URLs with special codes to display certain curated collections of movies and shows.
Netflix-Codes.com has a good list of the streaming platform’s hidden genre categories and subcategories. In total, there are about 20 top-level categories covering genres like animation, foreign films and classic movies. Within those main genres are many more hyper-specific subgenres denoted by numeric codes.
All you need to do is find the category you want, copy the related code and append it to the end of a Netflix URL.
What kinds of categories does Netflix offer?
There’s much more to Netflix than what you’ve been scrolling through. At last count, there were more than 36,000 unique categories to explore.
The entirety of the categories available on Netflix starts with broad main genres like Action, Comedy and Drama, but they get more specific as you dive even deeper. There are straight-to-the-point collections like Movies Directed by Women (code 2974953), or more specifically targeted curated lists, like Supernatural Soaps (code 81238162), just in case you like your werewolves with a side of angst and romance.
Rather than relying solely on the standard homepage categories or Netflix’s algorithm, you can use these secret codes to pinpoint and explore different nooks and crannies of the catalog to find hidden gems.
Netflix codes for award-winning movies and shows
Netflix secret codes are exactly that — secret. There’s no official directory, and it’s hard to get a full list, as categories will go empty as movies and shows move on and off Netflix. The names of categories will also change often as well so you’ll want to be vigilant when you go searching for what you want to watch.
To make it easier for you, there are even categories that you can use to find all the award-winning movies and shows to be discovered on the streamer.
If you’re not comfortable with editing Netflix URLs, you can use a browser extension to access the secret menus. The Better Browse for Netflix extension for Chrome is a great choice. Here’s how to use it:
1. Go to the Chrome Web Store and search for “Better Browse for Netflix.” (Note that this extension is unavailable for Firefox users.)
2. Click Add to Chrome.
3. Click Add Extension.
4. Log into your Netflix account in a new tab.
If the extension is installed, you’ll see a Browse All option at the top of your Netflix home screen next to My List. Click it to scroll through the subgenres or to search through specific categories.
Adding the Better Browse for Netflix extension to Chrome gives you a drop-down menu with Netflix categories.
Screenshot by CNET
Alternatively, you can use the FindFlix: Netflix Secret Category Finder browser extension for Chrome or Firefox. This add-on will create a drop-down menu complete with Netflix categories for your browser that you can scroll through by clicking on the FF icon that will appear on the top right of your screen. There’s no need to scroll Netflix natively with this add-on and it features 7,500 categories alphabetized for your convenience.
A third way is through the Netflix Codes website. Here’s how:
2. Find the genre or subgenre you want to explore.
3. Tap the code next to the genre or subgenre you want.
4. If you’re on a device that has the Netflix app installed, the app should open and take you directly to the genre or subgenre you chose. If you don’t have the app installed, it’ll open Netflix through the browser and you can view the specific movies and shows available.
5. Tap the title you want to watch and it’ll start playing.
Finally, if you’re comfortable with creating custom URLs, you can use Netflix codes manually in your browser. Here’s how:
1. Visit Netflix-codes.com on any PC or mobile browser.
2. Find the genre or subgenre you want to explore.
3. In another tab, type in http://www.netflix.com/browse/genre/INSERTNUMBER, but replace INSERTNUMBER with the specific genre or subgenre code. For instance, http://www.netflix.com/browse/genre/81466194 will take you to “90-Minute Movies.”
4. If done correctly, you’ll be taken to Netflix to peruse the titles available in that section.
Simply repeat this process the next time you find a code for a Netflix category you’d like to explore. You can do this as many times as you’d like.
For more Netflix tips, learn how to get the most out of Netflix on your phone or mobile device and how to improve picture quality on streaming services.
On Wednesday, just one day after SpaceX acquired $17 billion of wireless spectrum from telecommunications company EchoStar, Elon Musk made some typically bold claims for how he would put it to use. The second-richest person in the world described a vision where Starlink could be your one-stop-shop for connectivity, whether at home or when you’re away from your Wi-Fi.
On the All-In podcast, Musk said Starlink could eventually combine its home internet service with mobile. But he was careful to note that Starlink wouldn’t be putting AT&T, T-Mobile and Verizon out of business anytime soon – those companies still own far more of the wireless spectrum that’s used to send texts, make calls and stream videos. But the billionaire grinned when it was suggested that one way to acquire more spectrum would be to purchase Verizon outright.
“It’s not out of the question,” Musk said. “I suppose that may happen.”
The SpaceX CEO also outlined a plan to utilize the newly acquired spectrum to use Starlink satellites, which SpaceX calls “cell towers in space,” to send data directly to customers’ phones. Out of SpaceX’s 8,140 total satellites in orbit, 657 are direct-to-cell. The rest are used for Starlink’s internet service.
“This is kind of a long-term thing,” Musk said of the EchoStar spectrum purchase. “It will allow SpaceX to deliver high-bandwidth connectivity directly from the satellites to the phones. But there are hardware changes that need to happen in the phone.”
Watch this: Hands-On with T-Mobile’s T-Satellite Service
In order to use the EchoStar spectrum, cellphones would have to be outfitted with chipsets that work with those frequencies. Musk estimates that would take about two years.
“I think their place in the ecosystem is to support the big carriers by providing satellite connectivity so that they can connect anywhere, anytime,” Jeff Moore, an industry analyst with Wave7 Research, told CNET.
In July, SpaceX launched a partnership with T-Mobile that uses Starlink satellites to fill connectivity gaps in dead zones around the country. Customers enrolled in the T-Satellite service can send SMS texts right now, but the service will expand next month to include data support in third-party apps like AccuWeather, AllTrails, WhatsApp and X.
The new EchoStar spectrum would essentially hypercharge Starlink’s direct-to-cell bandwidth capabilities, but it will take some time to get there.
“It’s out there already, but the more capacity you have, the better, and the more frequencies you have the better,” says Moore. “There’s certainly room for improvement. I think that’s the intention of the spectrum transaction.”
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
The NFL season is back, and so are new ways to watch without cable. Last year, fans who cut the cord often had to lean on live TV streaming services like YouTube TV, which cost about $83 a month. This season looks different. With new standalone apps and updated skinny bundles, it’s possible to put together a package that delivers the games you want for less.
Both ESPN and Fox have launched direct-to-consumer streaming services that give fans new options outside of the usual bundles. On top of that, platforms like Fubo and Sling are offering slimmer packages that cover most — though not all — of the channels needed to catch every matchup week after week.
I broke down the channel lineups, compared prices, and tested combinations to see which setup works best. If you want to follow the season without overspending, here’s how to stream NFL games in 2025 and the best service combo for football fans.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
The winning combination is the new Fubo Sports skinny bundle paired with Peacock. Keep reading to find out why this is the best option for NFL fans this season and why YouTube TV is still a good choice, especially if you aren’t already a subscriber.
NFL fans looking to save some money can use Fubo’s new skinny bundle and Peacock to watch the vast majority of NFL games this season, including those featuring America’s Team, the Dallas Cowboys.
Terence Lewis/Icon Sportswire via Getty Images
NFL channel lineup
The NFL season is split across six channels:
CBS: Sunday afternoon games
Fox: Sunday afternoon games
NBC: Sunday Night Football
ABC/ESPN: Monday Night Football
NFL Network: seven international games played in Europe
Not included in the above are Thursday Night Football, which streams on Prime Video, and the two Christmas Day games on Netflix. For the purposes of this exercise, I’m going to assume you have an Amazon Prime account that lets you watch the TNF games on Prime Video and that you have a Netflix account or will be spending Christmas with someone who has Netflix for the two Christmas Day games.
Streaming a la carte option
I first investigated using the new ESPN DTC and Fox One streaming services, along with Paramount Plus and Peacock, to watch the NFL this season. The coverage works out like this:
Paramount Plus: Sunday afternoon CBS games
Fox One: Sunday afternoon Fox games
Peacock: Sunday Night Football on NBC
ESPN DTC: Monday Night Football on ESPN/ABC
Pricing is as follows:
Paramount Plus: $8 per month
Fox One: $20 per month
Peacock: $11 per month
ESPN DTC $30 per month
That works out to a total of $69 per month or $276 for the four-month season. And it’ll soon be even less because ESPN and Fox announced a bundle for a combined $40 a month starting Oct. 2. So, if we subtract $10 per month for the last three months of the season, you’ll pay $246 for this quartet for the NFL season that runs from early September to early January.
There are two reasons why I don’t like this plan. First, it doesn’t save you all that much money compared to the other options, as you’ll see below. Second, switching between the CBS and Fox games on Sunday afternoons would be a lot slower and clumsier because you’d have to close Paramount Plus and then open Fox One and vice versa just to change channels. I’d much rather be able to toggle between CBS and Fox on the same service.
So, that led to my skinny bundle research.
Sports-focused skinny bundles from Fubo and Sling
Fubo and Sling TV each released skinny bundles geared toward sports fans, but neither offers all the channels you need to watch the NFL.
Sling’s new skinny bundle costs $20 a month and includes NBC along with ABC and Fox stations in select markets and NFL Network. It does not, however, offer CBS or ESPN. So, if you go with the $20-a-month Sling Select plan, you would then need to get Paramount Plus for $8 a month for Sunday afternoon CBS games and the DTC ESPN app at $30 a month for Monday Night Football. That’s a total of $58 a month or $232 for the four-month season.
Fubo’s new skinny bundle costs $56 per month and includes ABC, CBS and Fox as well as ESPN and NFL Network. The missing piece is NBC for Sunday Night Football, so you’d need to pair it with the $11-a-month Peacock Premium for a total of $67 a month. And right now, Fubo Sports is $10 off for the first month. So, for the season, Fubo Sports would cost $214 and Peacock would cost $44 for a total of $258.
CNET
Of the two skinny bundle combinations, the Fubo-and-Peacock plan is the better option. Even though it costs more than my Sling/Paramount Plus/ESPN plan, I like the idea of watching the CBS and Fox games on Sunday afternoons on Fubo and using Peacock only for the Sunday night game when it’s the only game on. Plus, keeping track of which games are on which service is easier with two streaming services than the trio required if you go the Sling route.
In both cases, you would spend less than with YouTube TV. YouTube TV currently has a deal, however, that keeps the costs pretty close if you aren’t already a subscriber. Right now, new customers can get the first two months of YouTube TV for $50 a month, which means for the NFL season, you would pay $266. But the price for current subscribers is $332.
The two best NFL streaming options
YouTube TV
Fubo Sports and Peacock Premium
Cost per month
$83
$56 + $11 = $67
Current discounts for new subscribers
$50/month for first two months
Fubo Sports for $46/month for first month
Cost for 4-month NFL season for new subscribers
$266
$258
Cost for season for current subscribers
$332
N/A
Add RedZone?
$11/month add-on
$10/month add-on
Cost for season with RedZone for new subscribers
$310
$298
Cost for season with RedZone for current subscribers
$376
N/A
Fubo
Fubo’s main package costs $85 per month but it has a new skinny bundle that includes most of the channels you need for the NFL and multi-view to watch up to four channels at once. This new Fubo Sports plan costs $56 per month ($46 for the first month) and includes Fox along with ABC and CBS (but not NBC) in addition to ESPN and NFL Network. It also includes access to ESPN’s new streaming app. You can add RedZone to Fubo’s skinny bundle for an extra $10 a month.
Fubo Sports is currently available in 50 markets and expanding daily, according to Fubo. You can plug in your zip code on Fubo’s welcome page to see if it’s available in your area.
Read our Fubo review.
CNET
YouTube TV/CNET
Priced at $83 per month, YouTube TV checks all the NFL boxes and is the best sports streaming service for NFL fans. Local channels ABC, CBS, Fox and NBC are included in most markets, as are ESPN and the NFL Network so you can watch Sundays and Monday nights. Its multi-view feature is great on Sunday afternoons where there are games on CBS and Fox at the same time (plus you can add up to two more sporting events like the US Open final or the MLB postseason games in October). You can get RedZone with the Sports Plus add-on for $11 a month.
Plug in your ZIP code on YouTube TV’s welcome page to see which local networks are available in your area.
Read our YouTube TV review.
Fubo Sports availability by NFL city
Fubo Sports?
AFC East
Buffalo Bills
No
Miami Dolphins
Yes
New England Patriots
Yes
New York Jets
Yes
AFC North
Baltimore Ravens
Yes
Cincinnati Bengals
No
Cleveland Browns
No
Pittsburgh Steelers
Yes
AFC South
Houston Texans
No
Indianapolis Colts
No
Jacksonville Jaguars
Yes
Tennessee Titans
No
AFC West
Denver Broncos
Yes
Kansas City Chiefs
No
Las Vegas Raiders
No
Los Angeles Chargers
Yes
NFC East
Dallas Cowboys
Yes
New York Giants
Yes
Philadelphia Eagles
Yes
Washington Commanders
No
NFC North
Chicago Bears
Yes
Detroit Lions
Yes
Green Bay Packers
No
Minnesota Vikings
Yes
NFC South
Atlanta Falcons
No
Carolina Panthers
No
New Orleans Saints
No
Tampa Bay Buccaneers
No
NFC West
Arizona Cardinals
No
Los Angeles Rams
Yes
San Francisco 49ers
Yes
Seattle Seahawks
No
Of the 50 metro markets where Fubo Sports is currently available, it’s available in 14 NFL cities, but with New York and Los Angeles having two teams each, that’s half of the league’s 32 teams.
It pays for existing YouTube TV subscribers to switch
When you factor in the current YouTube TV and Fubo Sports discounts for new subscribers, you’d save only $8 by going with my recommended pairing of Peacock and Fubo ($12 if you include RedZone.) In this case, I recommend YouTube TV because of the ease of having one streaming service for watching NFL football instead of two.
YouTube TV is the best single streaming service for football fans. It’s the cheapest live TV streaming service that has all the NFL channels and multi-view that lets you watch up to four games at once. Fubo’s standard plan is a close second; it costs only $2 more per month than YouTube TV, includes all the channels you need for NFL games and offers multi-view.
The math is different for existing YouTube TV subscribers. If you don’t want to watch RedZone with its new commercials, you’ll save $74 over the course of the season if you unsubscribe and switch to Fubo Sports and Peacock. And if you include RedZone in the equation, existing YouTube TV subscribers would save $78 this season by switching to the duo of Fubo Sports and Peacock.
The Apple Watch Series 11 made its debut at Apple’s “awe dropping” event in Cupertino, California, on Tuesday, vying for a spot on your wrist with a mix of fresh updates including new hypertension notifications, sleep score analysis, 5G connectivity and increased battery life.
With a decade of upgrades and refinements, the Series 11 represents a big move for Apple as it leans further into its health and fitness features across its Apple Watch lineup. Alongside the Series 11, Apple also unveiled the Apple Watch Ultra 3 and Apple Watch SE 3, along with the new iPhone 17 lineup (including the brand new iPhone Air), and the latest generation of AirPods (Pro 3).
Watch this: Everything Announced at Apple’s iPhone 17 Event in 7 Minutes
Both the Series 11 and the new Ultra 3 will ship with WatchOS 26, which Apple previewed at the Worldwide Developers Conference in June. The update brings a cleaner “liquid glass” UI, live translation for text messages, a redesigned Notes app for your wrist and Workout Buddy; Apple’s new AI-powered companion that offers real-time motivation based on your personal metrics during certain workouts.
Pricing and availability
The Apple Watch Series 11 is available for preorder now and will hit stores on September 19. Pricing starts at $399 (£369, AU$679) for the 42mm aluminum Wi-Fi model, while the LTE version of the same watch runs $499. The titanium LTE version of the 42mm model is priced at $699.
New health features
The biggest addition is a feature that can notify you when you’re showing signs of hypertension or high blood pressure. The Apple Watch will send alerts if it notices consistent patterns over a 30-day period that could warrant a follow-up with a doctor, and then allow users to log their blood pressure on the Health app (from a cuff) to confirm.
Another health upgrade is the new Sleep Score, which grades your sleep session on a scale of 1 to 100 or low to excellent. The watch doesn’t just hand you a number with no context; it breaks down your score and shows you factors that may be contributing like bedtime, sleep interruptions and duration, highlighting specific factors that may have impacted your sleep.
Design updates
Visually, the Series 11 looks much like the Series 10, with the same thin profile and edge-to-edge display. But there’s a subtle, practical upgrade: the aluminum model now uses stronger, more scratch-resistant glass, making it more durable for everyday wear.
Connectivity and battery
For the first time, the LTE model of the Series 11 supports 5G connectivity, which Apple says is not only faster but also more efficient at conserving battery life when in use.
Battery life has also received a bump. The Series 11 now promises up to 24 hours on a charge, compared to the 18 hours of the Series 10. Apple tends to be conservative with its battery claims. In real-world use, we may see it stretch beyond the official promise as I’ve consistently been able to stretch out the Series 10 claim to almost 30 hours.
This is a developing story. Follow all of CNET’s 2025 Apple Event coverage for live updates, hands-on impressions, and more announcements as they’re revealed.
Liquid Glass isn’t just coming to your iPhone — It’s coming to just about every Apple product with a screen you can think of, including your Mac. MacOS 26 Tahoe will bring the design overhaul, which can be both somewhat dramatic or barely noticeable, with an overall look of feeling fresh while remaining comfortably familiar.
MacOS 26 Tahoe is far from just a design overhaul and will come with several new features when it officially rolls out, but it’s easy to get caught up with all the styling Apple has done with this release. Some of these changes are brand new and some are new for the Mac but borrowed from iOS, like changes to the icons.
New icon options for the Mac include color tinting and making them completely clear like you can on the iPhone. But even without those visual tweaks, Apple went to work on redesigning the standard Mac icons — some of which haven’t been changed in decades.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
What’s more interesting to me is that Apple manages to tell the same story while visually saying less with some of the redesigned icons.
If you’re curious, I’ve highlighted a few of the new icons you can expect to see in MacOS 26 Tahoe, but you should keep in mind that the icons could change again by the time the official build is released. Below, I’ll compare the newly designed icons to the current version of MacOS, Sequoia.
For more, don’t miss what to expect at the Apple event today.
Tucked in, flattened down and rounded out
Icons on the Mac now feel more like that of those on iOS, with a more rounded, squircle design. Compared to Sequoia, Tahoe’s icons become flatter in the details and sometimes that texture found in the former OS version’s icons is replaced with a subtle translucent effect. Sequoia’s sometimes concave or indented style has been pushed outwards, allowing for Liquid Glass to add a little shine on the corners of elements within the icon’s design. Apple has also pulled in all icon elements that had previously hung off the edges — now everything is tucked within the icon shape.
Books
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
The Apple Books icon updates are simple, but do a lot for the overall design. The pages show gradients to inform depth and the edges add a touch of the signature Liquid Glass shine. Additionally, a book cover has been added behind the pages, showing off a layered glass look.
Contacts
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
The Contacts app icon largely looks the same as far as the elements within it are concerned, but otherwise — wow, what a difference. The cardboard-box brown of the “contact book” is replaced with a gradient and translucent off-white surface with a contrasting standard profile image. There’s one less colored tab to the right of the icon, and the remaining three are now flat in design and span the entire height of the icon.
Digital Color Meter
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
Another good example of Apple turning down the detail without sacrificing impact is the Digital Color Meter app. The dropper no longer hangs off the edge, the background is a simple white instead of stark red, the shapes have been simplified to circles and the colors take on more pastel shades.
Disk Utility
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
MacOS Tahoe shows Apple pulling back and toning down details of its icons while communicating the same thing. The Disk Utility app is one of the better examples of this — compare the new version to Sequoia and previous versions.
Folders
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
For years and years, the default folder on a Mac has been a turquoise blue, without much customization at your disposal. And maybe the folder color on your Mac isn’t something you’ve cared to spend time on thinking about, but if who’ve wished that they could change their folder color, you’ll be able to with Tahoe.
Tucked into the Appearance menu in system settings is a new default folder color option, allowing you to switch between red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, pink and graphite. In addition, the icon in Tahoe shows a document in it, as opposed to Sequoia’s empty folder.
iPhone Mirroring
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
The updated iPhone Mirroring icon is now more representative of what the app does. It may not say much about the app’s functionality, but it’s a step up from Sequoia’s icon with a single iPhone.
Photos
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
Another subtle Liquid Glass icon tweak is found in the Photos app. In essence, it’s the same design, but the overlapping, oblong color panels look to have a slight decrease in overall width and Apple has added shiny glass edges to them.
Settings
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
The updates to the Settings icon in Tahoe are minor, but it’s a good example of Liquid Glass’ subtlety. That inward depth the icon has maintained for over a decade has shifted, colors are changed, and the teeth of the gears are both widened and softened. Liquid Glass is most notable in the smaller gear, which is slightly more transparent, as if it has a piece of layered glass on top of it.
Stickies
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
The Stickies app redesign is a return to how its icon appeared from 2000 to 2020, according to Basic Apple Guy’s MacOS icon history chart. Instead of what looks like a Post-It notepad, the latest icon returns to a stack of three notes lying on top of each other.
Text Edit
Left: MacOS Sequoia. Right: MacOS Tahoe.
Apple/Screenshots by Matthew Elliott and Blake Stimac
Tahoe’s update to the Text Edit app might almost be too reductive from Sequoia’s, removing the pen entirely, leaving only a segment of a piece of notebook paper. It’s most certainly simplified, but Mac users that may not be so intimately familiar with each individual icon may easily mistake Text Edit for something else.
For more, don’t miss how Apple’s iPhone release schedule might change.
Hollow Knight: Silksong isn’t an easy game, but that difficulty is one of the reasons why fans love it. There are likely some in the fanbase who might even feel it’s too easy, and for them, developer Team Cherry added the most famous of cheat codes to the game, although it doesn’t give you 30 lives.
The famous Konami Code, best known for its inclusion in the NES game Contra, does work in Silksong, but it will make the game far harder, not easier. The secret was found not long after the game came out on Thursday over at the Silksong subreddit. A variation of the code can be inputted in the Extras section of the title screen to unlock the Steel Soul mode on a new playthrough. The description of the unlocked mode says, “No reviving. Death is permanent.”
The secret Steel Soul mode is not for the faint of heart.
Screenshot by Oscar Gonzalez/CNET
As the description suggests, Steel Soul is a permadeath mode, meaning that once you die, it’s game over and your save is wiped. Considering how difficult Silksong has been even for veterans of the Hollow Knight, this option is truly for those who want the highest of challenges. It appeared in the original Hollow Knight as an optional setting made available after beating the game, but Silksong players just need to press a few buttons on the menu screen to unlock it.
The code needed to unlock Steel Mode in the Extras section of the title screen is Up, Down, Up, Down, Left, Right, Left, Right. For consoles, you will need to use the respective controller’s Dpad, while PC requires either using a controller Dpad or the arrow keys on the keyboard. There are no additional buttons to press, and when inputted correctly, the screen will flash. To activate the new much harder difficulty option, back out of the Extras screen, select Start Game, pick New Game and that will take you to the Mode Select screen where Steel Soul is now available.
The Konami Code was first used in Gradius, a shoot ’em up game made by the company and released for the NES in 1986. The full code is Up, Up, Down, Down, Left, Right, Left, Right, B, A, and Start on a controller and was programmed into the game’s code by developer Kazuhisa Hashimoto as a way to test the game easily, as it added all the power-ups to the player’s ship. Hashimoto had mistakenly left the code in the NES game, and it was eventually discovered by players in the U.S.
The Konami Code is mainly remembered for its use in 1987’s Contra for the NES, which gave players 30 lives to start the game with. It has since been used in other Konami games and paid homage to by other game developers. Tech companies such as Google and Facebook have also used the code as an Easter egg in their different services over the years.
Hollow Knight: Silksong is out now on PC, Switch, Switch 2, Xbox One, Xbox Series X and Series S, PS4 and PS5. It’s also available for Xbox Game Pass subscribers.
Apple’s “Awe Dropping” iPhone 17 event is Tuesday and we expect to see new models of the iPhone, Apple Watch and AirPods. As we inch closer to Tim Cook starting the keynote, rumors and leaks about the iPhone 17 are still coming in. We’ve seen reports of a new selfie camera, faster MagSafe charging and a new purple (or green) color.
But when the iPhone 16 debuted, there was criticism aimed at its screen. The phone starts at $829 and still has a 60Hz display, despite most phones from competitors having high-refresh-rate screens topping off at 90Hz or 120Hz, which gives a smoother scrolling effect that just looks premium. Given that Pro models have had higher screen refresh rates for years, it’s been frustrating to see Apple not bring the feature to lower-end models.
At a time when Apple is under pressure from a US Department of Justice antitrust lawsuit; facing criticism from shareholders and media about being “behind in the AI race” with Apple Intelligence; and dealing with threats from President Donald Trump about adding a tariff to the iPhone if manufacturing isn’t relocated to the US, the company’s next iPhone launch will be a pivotal moment.
The burden is on Apple to deliver an exciting iPhone 17 lineup that includes big changes to the iPhone Pro models as well as a new iPhone Air version. But the “regular” base iPhone is due for some TLC, especially its display. Fortunately, there are three rumors circulating that point to the iPhone 17’s screen coming with a sizable update. Taken together, they suggest the screen on the iPhone 17 could be one of the largest updates to a base iPhone display in a long time.
Apple hasn’t announced anything yet or confirmed any of these rumors. And we won’t know what’s what for certain until the next iPhone is officially released. For more leaks, check out CNET’s iPhone 17 rumor roundup.
The iPhone 17’s high-refresh-rate display (120Hz)
The Razer Phone had a screen that was ideal for gaming and that ended up being the de facto standard on most phones today.
Josh Miller/CNET
In 2018, the Razer Phone debuted with the first-ever high-refresh-rate display. Other phones at the time had screens locked at a static 60Hz. The Razer Phone was aimed at gamers, and having a screen with a high refresh rate made gameplay look more immersive. It also made mundane things, like system animations or scrolling a social or news feed, look smooth and dynamic.
In 2025, nearly every major phone, including cheap ones costing less than $300, has a 90Hz or 120Hz screen — well, except the iPhone. Apple first added Pro Motion displays (its name for a high-refresh-rate screen) in 2021, to the iPhone 13 Pro and 13 Pro Max. But non-Pro models still have a static 60Hz display to this day. That should change soon.
The iPhone 17 will have a high-refresh-rate screen, according to a report from 9to5Mac. The story cites an X post from Young that’s since been taken down. It’s unclear if the screen will be identical to the one on the iPhone 16 Pro or if it’ll be something different. But if the iPhone 17 gets an LTPO screen with an adaptive refresh rate (with 1 to 120Hz), that could also mean the “regular” base iPhone 17 will get support for an always-on display. That latter feature debuted on the iPhone 14 Pro and Pro Max, and is absent from the base iPhone 15 and iPhone 16.
The iPhone 17’s 6.3-inch display
The iPhone 16 Pro has a 6.3-inch display.
James Martin/CNET
The regular iPhone, dating back to the iPhone 12, has had a 6.1-inch screen. The iPhone 16 has one despite the iPhone 16 Pro rocking a 6.3-inch display. But the iPhone 17 will get a similar 6.3-inch display, according to a post on X from supply-chain analyst Ross Young. This is bad news for small-phone fans, though 6.1 inches was already well beyond the 5.4-inch screen found on the iPhone 12 Mini and 13 Mini.
If the increased screen real estate comes from shrinking the bezels around the display, like Apple did with the iPhone 16 Pro, it should mean that the iPhone 17 itself will be relatively the same size as the iPhone 16.
The iPhone 17’s new Ceramic Shield
Both photos were taken after seven months of use. The scratches on the iPhone 15 Pro Max (left) really show on the display. The iPhone 16 Pro has a few scratches but has held up much better.
Celso Bulgatti/CNET
One of the sleeper additions on the iPhone 16 Pro was that it got an updated Ceramic Shield (the 16 and 16 Plus didn’t). Just as a reminder, Ceramic Shield isn’t just glass in that it’s composed of nano ceramic crystals embedded in a glass matrix. In my long-term review for the 16 Pro, I found that the updated Ceramic Shield was nearly unscathed after seven months of use, especially compared with my iPhone 15 Pro Max, which had the original version of Ceramic Shield and was covered in scratches after the same amount of time.
The iPhone 17 could get a more scratch resistant display, according to a post from Weibo user Instant Digital. It sounds like this might be different from Ceramic Shield in that it could also have an antireflective coating, similar to the one on the Galaxy S25 Ultra. MacRumors first reported on the rumor and also hedged it, saying the new coating may’ve been scrapped because it proved too complicated to apply at scale.
I doubt the iPhone 17 will get an antireflective screen, but I’d love if it did. I can still hope, though, that its screen comes with a more durable display.
The MTV Video Music Awards return tonight, giving fans a chance to watch their chosen winners in 19 categories, including best collaboration, best new artist, best choreography and the coveted video of the year. Social-driven categories added in recent years have created opportunities for lesser-known viral artists and internet favorites to take home a Moon Man trophy, making the competition open to almost anyone.
This year’s ceremony will be hosted by L.L. Cool J and feature a star-studded lineup of presenters and performers. Names on the roster include Brittany Snow, Ciara, Busta Rhymes, Sabrina Carpenter, Ricky Martin and KPop Demon Hunters stars Audrey Nuna, EJAE and Rei Ami. Fans of the group will also be excited to know their hit single Golden is nominated for Song of the Summer.
The biggest award of the night, Artist of the Year, includes some of music’s most powerful names as nominees: Beyoncé, Bad Bunny, Kendrick Lamar, Lady Gaga and Taylor Swift. Video of the Year features seven nominees, with heavy hitters like Lamar, Ariana Grande, Bruno Mars and Billie Eilish all in the running. Meanwhile, Mariah Carey will take the stage as this year’s Video Vanguard Award honoree, performing a career-spanning set of hits. Carey also has new music on the way — her upcoming album drops later this month, and her single Type Dangerous is nominated for best R&B.
Fans could make their voices heard by casting votes at vote.mtv.com, but votes are now closed. Artists like Alex Warren, Doechii, Leon Thomas, Blake Shelton, Brent Faiyaz and KATSEYE are also up for honors across several different categories.
Here’s everything you need to know to stream the 2025 MTV VMAs live if you don’t have cable or a satellite provider.
How to watch the 2025 MTV VMAs
You can stream the awards broadcast on Sunday at 8 p.m. ET (5 p.m. PT) on Paramount Plus Premium and CBS. Right now, the streaming service is offering a deal that cuts the annual price in half.
Cord-cutters who prefer a live TV streaming experience can watch CBS or the MTV channel’s simulcast on platforms such as YouTube TV, DirecTV (check out the $30 entertainment package), Hulu with Live TV or Fubo (its new $56-per-month plan carries CBS).
James Martin/CNET
The VMAs will be available to stream on Paramount Plus Premium only, and not the Paramount Plus Essential plan. Premium costs $13 per month, or $120 a year (without any discounts applied). Each subscription plan comes with a seven-day free trial.
If you’re ready to upgrade your iPhone, you might want to hang tight.
Apple’s fall event is happening on Tuesday, during which it’s expected to debut the iPhone 17 lineup. So if you wait just a bit longer, you can either score the latest device or get a discount on previous models.
Preorders for new iPhones typically open up the Friday after they’re announced, meaning you’ll likely be able to place an order for the iPhone 17 starting Sept. 12. The phones usually ship a week later.
Watch this: Hey, Apple: Steal These S25 Edge Features for a Skinny iPhone
Newer iPhones tend to include camera and processor upgrades, as well as new features to make them more enticing. For instance, the iPhone 14 Pro models introduced Dynamic Island, the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max debuted the Action button and the iPhone 16 series added the Camera Control button and Apple Intelligence across the full lineup, rather than on just the Pro models.
According to leaks and reports, the iPhone 17 lineup, which Apple technically has yet to confirm, could have a fresh camera setup and new color options and, perhaps most notably, could include a slimmer version of the iPhone to compete with similar offerings such as Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Edge. It’ll likely arrive with the recently announced iOS 26, which features Apple’s biggest software design shakeup in more than a decade.
You can check out our iPhone 17 rumor roundup for more on what might be coming in the fall.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Will waiting for the iPhone 17 be worth it?
Overall, iPhone upgrades in the past several years have been relatively modest. And it’s likely, based on rumors, that the iPhone 17 lineup will generally follow that mold.
But even with more moderate changes, now’s not a good time to buy a new iPhone, if you can help it. We’re just a couple days away from the anticipated launch of Apple’s next smartphone. So if you hold on a little longer, you can snag that flashy new device when it drops.
If you buy a new iPhone 16 now, you’ll probably pay full price for something that in just a few days’ time will technically be outdated (the harsh reality of the annual phone release cycle). And even if you get a good deal through your carrier now, if you stick it out just a bit longer, you could potentially get an even more lucrative deal once the iPhone 17 drops and carriers ramp up their promotions.
If anything, waiting to see what the iPhone 17 has in store could at least help you confirm whether going with the newest device or an older one like the iPhone 16 or 15 is worth it. After all, if the differences are minimal, you might as well save a couple of hundred dollars by choosing a previous model. And chances are — if the iPhone 17 is anything like the last several iPhones — no one will even be able to tell.
But what about tariffs?
One big unknown is whether tariffs will affect the price of the iPhone 17, which could sway your purchasing decisions. While smartphones and computers were given an exemption from President Donald Trump’s more extensive tariffs, he recently said Apple will still have to pay a 25% tariff on iPhones made outside the US. This would almost certainly lead to a price hike.
But even without tariffs, the iPhone is due for a markup, according to CNET’s Patrick Holland. “The iPhone hasn’t had a price hike in five years and is due for one,” he writes. “Historically, that’s the longest stretch of time the company has gone without an increase.” (You can check out more of his thoughts here.)
So, is it still worth waiting for the iPhone 17? It depends. If you were already planning on purchasing a new iPhone and can’t wait much longer, I can understand panic-buying now. But bear in mind you’ll still likely pay full price for an iPhone 16 model that will be worth less the moment the iPhone 17 drops. So, you might be coughing up more for an iPhone 17, but at least you’ll get more bang for your buck.
So, when’s the best time to buy a new iPhone?
There’s not necessarily a “best” time to buy a new iPhone, because prices are pretty consistent throughout the year, but the fall is an enticing option. That’s when Apple introduces its latest slate of iPhones, and when carriers are eager to attract new customers with abundant trade-in deals and promotions. And again, even if you don’t want the latest and greatest iPhone, you can at least snag an older version at a discount right after the iPhone 17 drops.
In general, we recommend upgrading to a new phone if your existing one is more than two generations old. You can typically wring more life out of your device, but if you want to stay on top of the latest features like Apple Intelligence, leveling up is the way to go. And with just a couple more days left before the anticipated drop of the iPhone 17, you might as well see what fresh capabilities Apple has up its sleeve.
The MTV Video Music Awards are back, giving fans a chance to vote for their favorite nominees across 19 categories including Best Collaboration, Best New Artist, Best Choreography, and the coveted Video of the Year. In recent years, the addition of social-driven categories has opened the door for viral artists and internet favorites to take home a trophy, making the competition broader than ever.
This year’s ceremony will be hosted by L.L. Cool J and feature a star-studded lineup of presenters and performers. Names on the roster include Brittany Snow, Ciara, Busta Rhymes, Sabrina Carpenter, Ricky Martin, and KPop Demon Hunters stars Audrey Nuna, EJAE, and Rei Ami. Fans of the group will also be excited to know their hit single Golden is nominated for Song of the Summer.
The biggest award of the night, Artist of the Year, includes some of music’s most powerful names: Beyoncé, Bad Bunny, Kendrick Lamar, Lady Gaga, and Taylor Swift. Video of the Year features seven nominees, with heavy hitters like Kendrick Lamar, Ariana Grande, Bruno Mars, and Billie Eilish all in the running. Meanwhile, Mariah Carey will take the stage as this year’s Video Vanguard Award honoree, performing a career-spanning set of hits. Carey also has new music on the way — her upcoming album drops later this month, and her single Type Dangerous is nominated for Best R&B.
Fans can make their voices heard by casting votes at vote.mtv.com until Friday at 6 p.m. ET. Artists like Alex Warren, Doechii, Leon Thomas, Blake Shelton, Brent Faiyaz, and KATSEYE are also up for honors across several different categories.
Here’s everything you need to know to stream the 2025 MTV VMAs live if you don’t have cable or a satellite provider.
How to watch the 2025 MTV VMAs
You can stream the awards broadcast on Sunday at 8 p.m. ET/5 p.m. PT on Paramount Plus Premium and CBS. Right now, the streaming service is offering a deal that cuts the annual price in half.
Cord-cutters who prefer a live TV streaming experience can watch CBS or the MTV channel’s simulcast on platforms such as YouTube TV, DirecTV (check out the $30 entertainment package), Hulu with Live TV or Fubo (its new $56-per-month plan carries CBS).
James Martin/CNET
The VMAs will be available to stream on Paramount Plus Premium only, and not the Paramount Plus Essential plan. Premium costs $13 per month, or $120 a year (without any discounts applied). Each subscription plan comes with a seven-day free trial.
Watch this: iPhone Air Is a Wild Card – and Starts a Big Change for Apple
Meal kits or prepared meals? It’s the first decision you’ll have to make. Some services offer both, however.
David Watsky/CNET
The first big decision you’ll make is whether you want meal kits, which require some prep and cooking, or a prepared meal service that sends fully cooked meals that are ready to heat and eat. Meal kits will demand more of your time and energy but they’ll also cost a little less per serving. Some meal kits can actually save you money over groceries. Prepared meals require almost no time and energy, other than what it takes to actually eat the food, but typically run a few bucks more per serving.
Cost
Our testing editors rated Green Chef meals well but the healthy meal kit service is pricier than most.
Corin Cesaric/CNET
After you’ve picked between meal kits or meal delivery, you’ll want to find a service within your budget. There are meal kits with recipes for as cheap as $5 a serving with basic menus and no-frills recipes. More expensive services include recipes with more exotic ingredients, high-end cuts of meat, and organic produce, but can cost as much as $15 a serving. Here I’ve outlined all the best cheap meal delivery services for 2025.
Healthiness
We made sure every ingredient was accounted for before starting a recipe.
Corin Cesaric/CNET
Most meal delivery services have healthy options, and some are much healthier than others. If you’re keen on eating low-calorie, low-carb, plant-based or pescatarian food, certain meal kits and meal delivery services will be better than others. Our list of the healthiest meal delivery services for 2025 is a good place to find all the most nutritious options.
Daily Harvest is one of the healthiest meal delivery services we tried.
David Watsky/CNET
Number of meals per week
Some meal delivery services offer big value if you order more meals.
Corin Cesaric/CNET
Lastly, you’ll have to decide exactly how much food you’ll want sent to you per week. If you can’t imagine yourself cooking more than twice per week, don’t order more than two meal kits because they typically won’t last more than a week in the fridge. Most meal kit services offer plans as small as two meals per week and as many as six.
Most prepared meals either arrive frozen or can be frozen after unboxing. That means it’s less of an issue if you order too many meals on your first go around. However, some fresh food delivery services, including Gardencup, Thistle, and Sakara Life, are not meant to be frozen.
Most services allow you to change the number of meals or servings in your plan even after you’ve started. With nearly every service, the more meals you order per delivery, the cheaper it is per meal.
Google’s new Pixel 10 phones are here, and they boast a handful of spec upgrades over their predecessors, as well as more AI features.
The three models look very similar to last year’s Pixel 9 phones. There’s a standard Pixel 10, a higher-spec Pixel 10 Pro and a large Pixel 10 Pro XL.
There are still some differentiators between the baseline and Pro models, but that lead is shrinking with more top-level features trickling down. All in all, they’re powerful handsets that rank among the year’s best phones.
Pixel 10 price comparison
Pixel 10: $799. The Pixel 10 didn’t get a price increase from last year’s standard model despite getting more features.
Pixel 10 Pro: $999. The Pixel 10 Pro also kept its predecessor’s price, though it hasn’t changed much from the Pixel 9 Pro.
Pixel 10 Pro XL: $1,199. The top-end Pixel 10 Pro XL got a $100 price hike this year, with a handful of spec upgrades.
Both the Pixel 10 ($799) and Pixel 10 Pro ($999) retain the prices of their predecessors, keeping them in line with their equivalents from other brands, like the Samsung Galaxy S25 ($799) and Galaxy S25 Plus ($999).
But the Pixel 10 Pro XL got slightly more expensive this year, getting a $100 price bump to $1,199 (up from the $1,099 Pixel 9 Pro XL with 128GB of storage), likely to account for the higher 256GB starting storage option.
The Pixel 10 Pro XL.
Andrew Lanxon/CNET
Pixel 10 lineups’ design and display changes, compared
Pixel 10: Unchanged, but additional camera. The baseline model got an extra camera, widening the lens part of its camera bump, and the display is slightly brighter.
Pixel 10 Pro: Unchanged. The smaller Pro model looks almost exactly like its predecessor, and the display is slightly brighter.
Pixel 10 Pro XL: Unchanged. The larger Pro XL looks just like its predecessor, and the display is slightly brighter.
The Pixel 10 lineup looks virtually the same as last year’s Pixel 9 phones, leaving most of the upgrades under the hood.
All three phones retain the general design of last year’s phones: a metal back with a pill-shaped camera bump. The only major difference is that the glass on the Pixel 10’s camera bump is slightly wider, owing to the third, telephoto camera fit into it. All three models are ever-so-slightly heavier than their predecessors (from 6 grams on the Pixel 10 to 11 grams on the Pixel 10 Pro XL), possibly due to their nominal battery capacity increases.
The standard Pixel 10 retains its predecessor’s 6.3-inch OLED display, though its maximum brightness has been increased to 3,000 nits (up from 2,700). Likewise, the Pixel 10 Pro and Pixel 10 Pro XL inherit their 6.3-inch OLED and 6.8-inch OLED displays from their predecessors, but they also get maximum screen brightness increases to 3,300 nits (up from 3,000).
The Pixel 10’s rear cameras.
Celso Bulgatti/CNET
Comparing Pixel 10, Pixel 10 Pro and Pixel 10 Pro XL cameras
Pixel 10: Added rear camera, for a total of three. A 48-megapixel main, 13-megapixel ultrawide and new 10.8-megapixel telephoto make up the rear cameras, plus a 10.5-megapixel selfie camera.
Pixel 10 Pro: Same trio of rear cameras. A 50-megapixel main, 48-megapixel ultrawide and 48-megapixel telephoto make up the rear cameras, plus a 42-megapixel selfie camera.
Pixel 10 Pro XL: Same trio of rear cameras. A 50-megapixel main, 48-megapixel ultrawide and 48-megapixel telephoto make up the rear cameras, plus a 42-megapixel selfie camera.
As with other brands, Google has previously differentiated its standard and Pro models by reserving an extra zoom camera for its top-end phones. That changes this year, as the standard Pixel 10 gets a telephoto lens, shrinking the feature gap between the phone tiers.
The Pixel 10 packs a 48-megapixel main camera, though its 13-megapixel ultrawide is a slight downgrade from the 50-megapixel ultrawide shooter in the Pixel 9, which means the new phone may not take as sharp of photos when set to its widest capture settings. The trade-off is the addition of a 10.8-megapixel telephoto with 5x zoom that still adds a lot of functionality, even if it may not take as high-resolution photos as the zoom cameras on its Pro siblings.
The Pixel 10 Pro and 10 Pro XL retain their predecessors’ trio of rear cameras: a 50-megapixel main, a 48-megapixel ultrawide and a 48-megapixel telephoto with 5x zoom. Ostensibly, not much has changed here, though they still take up to 8K video (better than the 4K video maximum on the Pixel 10).
The selfie cameras on all three phones are unchanged from last year, but represent a boost when going from the 10.5-megapixel front-facing camera on the Pixel 10 to the 42-megapixel selfie shooters on the Pixel 10 Pro and 10 Pro XL.
The Pixel 10 Pro XL with an Android logo.
Andrew Lanxon/CNET
All Pixel 10 model specs, compared
Pixel 10: Better CPU, slightly bigger battery. The Pixel 10 gets the Google Tensor G5 chip, as well as a 4,970-mAh battery.
Pixel 10 Pro: Better CPU, slightly bigger battery. The Pixel 10 Pro gets similar spec upgrades, including the Google Tensor G5 chip, as well as a 4,870-mAh battery.
Pixel 10 Pro XL: Better CPU, slightly bigger battery. The Pixel 10 gets the Google Tensor G5 chip, as well as a 5,200-mAh battery.
This year’s Pixel 10 lineup got the usual set of incremental upgrades along with slight boosts to battery capacity, which could have an impact, however small, on increasing battery life.
Like the other models, the Pixel 10 gets the new Google Tensor G5 chip, which Google promises will perform better than its predecessor, last year’s Tensor G4. The new handset inherits the Pixel 9’s 12GB of RAM and baseline storage options of 128GB or 256GB. If you want more, you’ll have to use cloud options or pay more for a Pro or Pro XL model.
The Pixel 10 Pro and 10 Pro XL also have the Tensor G5 chip, which helps power new AI features. Similar to the base model, the Pro versions inherit the same specs as their predecessors: 16GB of RAM and the options of 128GB (Pixel 10 Pro only), 256GB, 512GB or 1TB of storage.
Across the board, all models got slight battery capacity increases, though curiously, the Pixel 10 Pro has the least with 4,870-mAh (up from 4,700-mAh in the Pixel 9 Pro). The next largest is the standard Pixel 10, which got an increase to 4,970-mAh (up from 4,700-mAh in the Pixel 9). The Pixel 10 Pro XL has the largest battery with a 5,200-mAh capacity (up from 5,060mAh).
The Pixel 10 Pro XL also has the edge in juicing up its battery, with a maximum 45-watt wired charging, compared to 30 watts on the Pixel 10 and 10 Pro. All three support Qi2 wireless charging.
All three Pixel 10 phones receive Android 16 out of the box. It was released in June, a month after Google I/O 2025, far earlier than when it typically comes out (usually alongside that year’s Pixel phones). They also get a slew of new AI features like Magic Cue, which scrapes data from Gmail, Google Messages, Google Calendar and other information sources to surface timely details and events.
Google Pixel 10 vs. Pixel 10 Pro vs. Pixel 10 Pro XL
Google Pixel 10
Google Pixel 10 Pro
Google Pixel 10 Pro XL
Display size, tech, resolution, refresh rate
6.3-inch OLED; 2,424×1,080 pixels; 60 to 120Hz variable refresh rate
Gorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,000 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 6E; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 30W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2 15W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Super Res Zoom up to 20x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2 polished back with satin finish aluminum frame
Gorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,300 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 7; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 30W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2 15W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Pro Res zoom up to 100x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; High-Res Portrait mode; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla GlassVictus 2 silky matte back with polished finish aluminum frame; ultrawideband chip
Gorilla Glass 2 Victus cover glass; 3,300 nits peak brightness; Satellite SOS; Dual-eSIM; Wi-Fi 7; NFC; Bluetooth 6; 45W fast charging (wall charger not included); Qi2.2 25W wireless charging; support for PixelSnap magnetic accessories; Google VPN; Pro Res zoom up to 100x; Camera Coach; Add Me; Macro mode; Face Unblur; Auto Best Take; High-Res Portrait mode; IP68 rating for dust and water resistance; 7 years of OS, security, and Pixel Drop updates; Corning Gorilla GlassVictus 2 silky matte back with polished finish aluminum frame; ultrawideband chip
US price starts at
$799 (128GB)
$999 (128GB)
$1,199 (256GB)
UK price starts at
£799 (128GB)
£999 (128GB)
£1,199 (256GB)
Australia price starts at
AU$1,349 (128GB)
AU$1,699 (128GB)
AU$1,999 (256GB)
Watch this: The Google Pixel 10 Pro XL’s Camera Is So Smart, It Almost Took the Photos for Me
After Apple presumably unveils the iPhone 17 at next week’s Awe-Dropping Apple event on Sept. 9, the familiar waiting game begins: a few days until preorders open, followed by what can feel like an endless slog before the new phones finally arrive. But when exactly?
We don’t know everything yet. Despite months of leaks, Apple still holds onto the key details, such as shipping dates, until the official announcement. Once the rumored iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Air, Pro and Pro Max are actually revealed, we’ll be able to confirm speculation about colors, display, cameras and more. We’ll also learn how much the new iPhone will cost, which is also still up in the air.
Read more: Should You Buy an iPhone 16 or Wait for the iPhone 17?
Keep in mind, the preorder and release dates we’re about to mention are based on Apple’s past launch schedules. The iPhone 17 timeline is still speculative, and Apple didn’t respond to a request for comment.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Watch this: iPhone 17 Event Clues: Everything to Expect on Sept. 9
When will the iPhone 17 be released?
For nearly a decade, Apple has announced its new iPhone lineup in early September. The only exception was in 2020 during the COVID-19 pandemic when the release was pushed back to Oct. 23 for the iPhone 12 and 12 Pro, and Nov. 13 for the iPhone 12 Mini and 12 Pro Max.
A supposed leak reported on by German site iPhone-Ticker lines up with expert opinion, and we cannot verify these dates because we don’t have access to the internal documents iPhone-Ticker is sourcing. But if these leaks are true, they suggest that preorders for the iPhone 17 will begin on Sept. 12, with a Sept. 19 release.
Here’s a chart for the release dates of previous iPhone models:
Previous iPhone release dates
iPhone series
Announcement
Preorder
Release
iPhone 16E
Feb. 19, 2025
Feb. 21, 2025
Feb. 28, 2025
iPhone 16 series
Sept. 9, 2024
Sept. 13, 2024
Sept. 20, 2024
iPhone 15 series
Sept. 12, 2023
Sept. 15, 2023
Sept. 22, 2023
iPhone 14 series
Sept. 7, 2022
Sept. 9, 2022
Sept. 16, 2022
iPhone 14 Plus
Sept. 7, 2022
Sept. 9, 2022
Oct. 7, 2022
iPhone SE
March 8, 2022
March 11, 2022
March 18, 2022
iPhone 13 series
Sept. 14, 2021
Sept. 17, 2021
Sept. 24, 2021
To see this year’s dates in the same chart format (because some of us prefer an easy-to-read chart), the schedule looks like this. The preorder and release are not official dates from Apple:
Potential iPhone 17 schedule
Announcement
Preorder
Release
Tuesday, Sept. 9, 10 a.m. PT
Friday, Sept. 12
Friday, Sept. 19
Will all of the new iPhones be released in September?
Based on last year’s release, Apple may release everything in the fall except its least expensive option — this year, the iPhone 17E. The iPhone 16E was released in February, and Apple is widely expected to follow the same format for the rumored iPhone 17E.
That would mean the iPhone 17 Pro Max, iPhone 17 Pro, iPhone 17 Air and the iPhone 17 base model — if that’s the lineup — would be released in September. The iPhone 17E — if it exists — would be released in February.
Apple’s future iPhone release dates
Apple is expected to change its release format with the rumored iPhone 18. Reports suggest that Apple will only release higher-end models in fall 2026 — iPhone 18 Pro, Pro Max, Air and a rumored new foldable iPhone — and release the rest of the line in winter 2027.
Why does Apple split iPhone release dates?
By pushing its top-of-the-line Pro and Pro Max models in September, Apple can capture much of the holiday shopping season. Releasing the more basic models in the winter allows a second crest of excitement, but diehard fans and holiday shoppers will have already spent their money on the pricier models in the fall.
Already qualified Argentina could deliver a hammer blow to Venezuela’s World Cup 2-26 qualification hopes as these two team’s meet on Thursday in Buenos Aires.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services to use to watch the game as it happens, wherever you are in the world and how to use a VPN if the match isn’t available where you are.
Fernando Batista’s Venezuela meanwhile currently sit in seventh in the CONMEBOL standings, with a win against their opponents today or against Colombia next week should to be enough for La Vinotinto to claim their place in an intercontinental playoff match.
Argentina takes on Venezuela on Thursday at the Estadio Monumental in Buenos Aires, with kickoff set for 8:30 p.m. ART local time in Argentina. That makes it a 7:30 p.m. ET or 4:30 p.m. PT kickoff in the US and Canada, a 12:30 a.m. BST start in the UK and a 9:30a.m. AEST kickoff in Australia on Friday.
Lionel Messi is the all-time leading goalscorer in CONMEBOL qualifiers with 34 goals.
Daniel Jayo/Getty Images
How to watch Argentina vs. Venezuela in the US
Thursday’s World Cup qualifier will be broadcast on NBC’s streaming service Peacock.
Peacock offers two Premium plans, and after recent price increases, the ad-supported Premium plan costs $11 a month, and the ad-free Premium Plus plan costs $17 a month.
How to watch Argentina vs. Venezuela from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the World Cup qualifier action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security. They can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN usage to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $100 for the first 15 months (then $117 per year) or $140 for the first 28 months (then $150 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN, and it works on a variety of devices. Prices start at $3.49 a month on a two-year plan (excluding VAT) for the service’s Basic tier.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
61% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months)
How to livestream Argentina vs. Venezuela in the UK
This World Cup qualifier is being shown exclusively live in the UK on Premier Sports 1.
Premier Sports
A full subscription to Premier Sports costs £12 a month for the network’s annual Pay As You Go tier.
You can also get the channel via a full subscription to Premier Sports, giving you access to all of the network’s channels, which have the UK broadcast rights to Scottish Premiership matches, BKT United Rugby Championship and Investec Champions Cup rugby, plus NHL and Nascar.
Can I livestream Argentina vs. Venezuela in Canada?
No broadcaster has the rights to show this game live in Canada.
That also means that if you’re traveling tot he region, you’re unlikely to be able to watch the game as you normally would at home, because of geoblocking.
There’s one option to get around this. By using a VPN, as explained above, you can set your location to a country where the match is being broadcast, and go from there.
Livestream Argentina vs. Venezuela in Australia for free
It’s good news for soccer fans Down Under, with this match set to be broadcast free in Australia on SBS.
Viewers can livestream this World Cup qualifier on the free-to-use SBS On Demand service.
The platform has dedicated apps for Android and iOS, and you can also access the service on Android TV, Amazon Fire TV stick, Apple TV and most smart TVs.
Quick tips for streaming Argentina vs. Venezuela using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming this match may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log into your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases, with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. Having a VPN on your router will also help since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
Everyone is talking about AI, but the AI technology from one of the world’s biggest companies doesn’t get much mention. That’s because Apple Intelligence arrived last year with lofty aims that the company has yet to fulfill. Does that make it a failure? Not entirely. In fact, I use several Apple Intelligence features that improve how I use my iPhone.
CNET
I sat down to figure out just which of the current Apple Intelligence features I regularly use. They aren’t necessarily the showy ones, like Image Playground, but ones that help in small, significant ways. Hopefully, we’ll see more capabilities when Apple announces new iPhone 17 models next week at its Sept. 9 event.
If you have a compatible iPhone — an iPhone 15 Pro, iPhone 16E, iPhone 16 or iPhone 16 Pro (or their Plus and Max variants) — I want to share six features that I’m turning to nearly every day.
More features will be added as time goes on — and keep in mind that Apple Intelligence is still officially beta software — but this is where Apple is starting its AI age.
On the other hand, maybe you’re not impressed with Apple Intelligence or want to wait until the tools evolve more before using them? You can easily turn off Apple Intelligence entirely or use a smaller subset of features.
Get alerted to priority notifications
This feature arrived only recently, but it’s become one of my favorites. When a notification arrives that seems like it could be more important than others, Prioritize Notifications pops it to the top of the notification list on the lock screen (with a colorful Apple Intelligence shimmer, of course). In my experience so far, those include weather alerts, texts from people I regularly communicate with and email messages that contain calls to action or impending deadlines.
To enable it, go to Settings > Notifications > Prioritize Notifications and then turn the option on. You can also enable or disable priority alerts from individual apps from the same screen. You’re relying on the AI algorithms to decide what gets elevated to a priority — but it seems to be off to a good start.
Apple Intelligence can prioritize notifications to grab your attention.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Summaries bring TL;DR to your correspondence
In an era with so many demands on our attention and seemingly less time to dig into longer topics … Sorry, what was I saying?
Oh, right: How often have you wanted a “too long; didn’t read” version of not just long emails but the fire hose of communication that blasts your way? The ability to summarize notifications, Mail messages and web pages is perhaps the most pervasive and least intrusive feature of Apple Intelligence so far.
When a notification arrives, such as a text from a friend or group in Messages, the iPhone creates a short, single-sentence summary.
Apple Intelligence summarized two text messages.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Sometimes summaries are vague and sometimes they’re unintentionally funny but so far I’ve found them to be more helpful than not. Summaries can also be generated from alerts by third-party apps like news or social media apps — although I suspect that my outdoor security camera is picking up multiple passersby over time and not telling me that 10 people are stacked by the door.
Nobody told me there’s a party at my house.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
That said, Apple Intelligence definitely doesn’t understand sarcasm or colloquialisms — you can turn summaries off if you prefer.
You can also generate a longer summary of emails in the Mail app: Tap the Summarize button at the top of a message to view a rundown of the contents in a few dozen words.
In Safari, when viewing a page where the Reader feature is available, tap the Page Menu button in the address bar, tap Show Reader and then tap the Summary button at the top of the page.
Summarize long articles in Safari in the Reader interface.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Siri gets a glow-up and better interaction
I was amused during the iOS 18 and the iPhone 16 releases that the main visual indicator of Apple Intelligence — the full-screen, color-at-the-edges Siri animation — was noticeably missing. Apple even lit up the edges of the massive glass cube of its Apple Fifth Avenue Store in New York City like a Siri search.
Instead, iOS 18 used the same-old Siri sphere. Now, the modern Siri look has arrived as of iOS 18.1, but only on devices that support Apple Intelligence. If you’re wondering why you’re still seeing the old interface, I can recommend some steps to turn on the new experience.
Siri under Apple Intelligence looks like a multicolor halo around the edges.
James Martin/CNET
With the new look are a few Siri interaction improvements: It’s more forgiving if you stumble through a query, like saying the wrong word or interrupting yourself mid-thought. It’s also better about listening after delivering results, so you can ask related followup questions.
However, the ability to personalize answers based on what Apple Intelligence knows about you is still down the road. What did appear, as of iOS 18.2, was integration of ChatGPT, which you can now use as an alternate source of information. For some queries, if Siri doesn’t have the answer right away, you’re asked if you’d like to use ChatGPT instead. You don’t need a ChatGPT account to take advantage of this (but if you do have one, you can sign in).
Invoke Siri silently without triggering everyone else’s devices
Perhaps my favorite new Siri feature is the ability to bring up the assistant without saying the words “Hey Siri” out loud. In my house, where I have HomePods and my family members use their own iPhones and iPads, I never know which device is going to answer my call (even though they’re supposed to be smart enough to work it out).
Plus, honestly, even after all this time I’m not always comfortable talking to my phone — especially in public. It’s annoying enough when people carry on phone conversations on speaker, I don’t want to add to the hubbub by making Siri requests.
Instead, I turn to a new feature called Tap to Siri. Double-tap the bottom edge of the screen on the iPhone or iPad to bring up the Siri search bar and the onscreen keyboard.
Double-tap the bar at the bottom of the screen to bring up a voice-free Siri search.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
On a Mac, go to System Settings > Apple Intelligence & Siri and choose a key combination under Keyboard shortcut, such as Press Either Command Key Twice.
Yes, this involves more typing work than just speaking conversationally, but I can enter more specific queries and not wonder if my robot friend is understanding what I’m saying.
Stay on task with the AI-boosted Reduce Interruptions Focus mode
Focus modes on the iPhone can be enormously helpful, such as turning on Do Not Disturb to insulate yourself from outside distractions. You can also create personalized Focus modes. For example, my Podcast Recording mode blocks outside notifications except from a handful of people during scheduled recording times.
With Apple Intelligence enabled, a new Reduce Interruptions Focus mode is available. When active, it becomes a smarter filter for what gets past the wall holding back superfluous notifications. Even things that are not specified in your criteria for allowed notifications, such as specific people, might pop up. On my iPhone, for instance, that can include weather alerts or texts from my bank when a large purchase or funds transfer has occurred.
To enable it, open Control Center, tap the Focus button and choose Reduce Interruptions.
The Reduce Interruptions Focus mode (left) intelligently filters possible distractions. Turn it on in Control Center (middle). When something comes in that might need your attention, it shows up as a notification marked Maybe Important (right).
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Remove distractions from your pictures using Clean Up in the Photos app
Until iOS 18.1, the Photos app on the iPhone and iPad lacked a simple retouch feature. Dust on the camera lens? Litter on the ground? Sorry, you need to deal with those and other distractions in the Photos app on MacOS or using a third-party app.
Now Apple Intelligence includes Clean Up, an AI-enhanced removal tool, in the Photos app. When you edit an image and tap the Clean Up button, the iPhone analyzes the photo and suggests potential items to remove by highlighting them. Tap one or draw a circle around an area — the app erases those areas and uses generative AI to fill in plausible pixels.
Remove distractions in the Photos app using Clean Up.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
In this first incarnation, Clean Up isn’t perfect and you’ll often get better results in other dedicated image editors. But for quickly removing annoyances from photos, it’s fine.
For more on Apple Intelligence features, check out how to create Genmoji, how to use Image Wand and, if you want to scale things back, how to disable select Apple Intelligence features.
Watch this: iPhone 17 Event Clues: Everything to Expect on Sept. 9
Your iPhone Wants These 11 Essential Accessories in the New Year
Between hikes at Netflix, Apple TV Plus and Peacock, streaming services haven’t held back on increasing prices in 2025. It’s as good a time as any for a deal, and Paramount Plus is offering one for new and returning subscribers.
Now through Sept. 18, you can get half off Paramount Plus’ annual plans, which require you to pay up-front for the 12 months. You can choose between $30 for a year of Paramount Plus Essential, which is ad-based, and $60 for Paramount Plus Premium, which has no commercials outside of live TV.
Paramount Plus last hiked prices in summer 2024, bringing the typical cost of Essential to $8 per month, or $60 per year, and Premium (then called Paramount Plus with Showtime) to $13 per month, or $120 per year. If you sign up for the current annual plan deal, you’d need to remember to cancel if you don’t want your subscription to renew at full price.
In addition to excluding ads, Paramount Plus’ Premium plan differs from Essential by providing access to downloads, all Showtime programming (there’s only some on Essential) and your local, live CBS station. (With Essential, you can watch the NFL on CBS and the UEFA Champions League via separate live feeds.) This fall, subscribers to Paramount Plus can watch season 27 of South Park, season 2 of Taylor Sheridan’s Landman and season 3 of Tracker, among other series.
Get hand-picked deals from CNET shopping experts straight to your phone.
Cookout season may be winding down, but there’s still plenty of time to fire up the grill and impress guests with a perfectly cooked steak. The tricky part is finding that balance between juicy and tender without crossing into overcooked or leaving the middle raw. Anyone who’s grilled before knows just a minute too long or too short can change the entire meal.
The good news is, with the right timing and a few simple techniques, you can consistently hit the level of doneness you want — whether that’s rare, medium, or well-done. Pro chefs rely on specific tricks to check temperature and texture, and once you know them, it’s easier to get restaurant-quality results at home.
So if you’re planning one last backyard get-together before the weather shifts, these steak tips can help you grill with confidence. With nothing more than salt, heat, and a little know-how, you’ll serve steaks that taste exactly how you and your guests like them, every time.
I spoke to Joe Flamm, chef-partner and culinary director of Chicago’s BLVD Steakhouse. “Doneness is such a preference and everyone has their own,” he said. “For something as simple as steak, prepared with just salt and fire, you want it exactly how you want it.”
We love using a meat probe for checking the temp on larger cuts of meat, chicken and other foods, but this gadget-free method works on steaks and burgers and saves you from having to pull out the thermometer. Here, we unpack a simple trick for testing steak doneness using only your hands, guaranteeing you’ll nail it every time.
Read more: A Beef Expert Told Me the Best Cheap Steak Cuts to Look for at the Market
Practice makes perfect
Fancy meat thermometers do a nice job at reading internal temps, but you can save some money and learn to test doneness like the pros do.
James Bricknell/CNET
Doneness in steak is frequently associated with color, as the steak goes from bright red when rare, through various stages of pink, until it becomes well done and has the pink cooked completely out of it. (RIP, ribeye.) It’s difficult to gauge color without cutting into the steak, which you don’t want to do until it comes off of the heat and has a moment to rest. Otherwise, the juices spill out of it, making for a drier, tougher outcome, especially if you’re going to put it back on the fire for additional cooking. It’s even more important not to do this prematurely if your preference leans toward medium well or well done; you want as much juice left in the meat as possible.
Doneness is also associated with temperature, with the internal temperature of the inside of the meat typically graduating between 120 and 160 degrees Fahrenheit as you move between rare and well done. This can be accomplished with a meat thermometer, but there is another method frequently applied by chefs that doesn’t require any gadgets.
Nailing the perfect doneness for your next steak takes nothing more than a few pokes.
Brian Bennett/CNET
With bigger cuts, such as a whole prime rib roast that will be sliced after cooking, “a thermometer is super helpful for consistency and accuracy,” says Flamm, but “for smaller cuts and for speed, many chefs can check it by feel,” he says. “If you’re cooking 100 filets a night, every night, it begins to fall into place.”
Understanding doneness in steak and why overcooking is bad
Overcooking steak is the fastest way to ruin a perfectly good piece of meat.
Tyler Lizenby/CNET
What’s a home cook to do who isn’t in the habit of cooking dozens of steaks on repeat, many times a week? Before we get to the shortcut trick to help you learn this, it’s important to understand the transformation your steak undergoes as it cooks to higher and higher temperatures.
In basic terms, the longer a steak cooks, the firmer the meat becomes, which has to do with the chemical process the meat is undergoing. “Whenever you cook a steak for a longer period there’s a breaking point where fat and muscle are done breaking down,” explains Flamm, “and you’re just drying out the steak and losing moisture, which gives the steak a tougher texture.” This increasingly firmer or tougher texture is key to being able to check the doneness of steak without relying on a thermometer.
Read more: I Did the Math to See if Buying Meat Online Is Cheaper Than the Grocery Store
Technique for testing doneness
Learning to check for doneness by feel doesn’t necessarily require hundreds of dollars of raw materials to get the requisite practice. Neither does it rely on any particular gadget. It’s not exactly a one-handed method, but the method only involves the use of your hands.
Whether or not you have the means or mentality to quit your job and go to culinary school, here’s a culinary school trick to understand doneness in meat, using the fleshy base of your thumb as a point of comparison in the resistance of the steak when poked.
Here it is: With one hand, gently touch your thumb and forefinger together, keeping the rest of your fingers relaxed, in a half-assed “A-OK” signal. You don’t want to press your thumb and forefinger together — simply make light contact between them. With the forefinger of your opposite hand gently poke the fleshy base of your thumb.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
You’re not pressing down here, just giving it a quick jab. This is approximately the level of resistance you should feel for a medium rare steak when similarly jabbed in the center of the meat. (Quick aside here about clean and/or gloved hands. Also, the steak will be hot on the outside, yes, but again, a brief jab is all that’s in order.)
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Subsequently, as you move your thumb to lightly touch your middle finger, the tension in the base of your thumb increases, and this represents how a medium-cooked steak should feel. As you stretch your thumb to reach the ring finger, now you’ve got medium well, and the tension in the thumb when touched with the pinkie finger reveals well done.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Regardless of how you like your steak cooked, and how you’d personally define it, now you have a consistent point of comparison available to you at all times with which to practice, whether you’re cooking steak once a week or once a year.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
What’s the best way to cook steak?
Searing steak followed by some indirect heat to bring it up to the desired doneness is the preferred method of many professional chefs.
David Watsky/CNET
So, what’s the best way to cook a steak? Opinions abound regarding direct heat versus indirect heat, hard searing and reverse searing, and even cooking steak in an air fryer. Flamm recommends a time-honored method: “For me, it’s searing the steak hard, and then using indirect heat to slowly let it render and come up in temp to the place where you want it to be,” he says, finishing your seared steak in the oven.
You can consult various recipes for time and temperature recommendations with the indirect heat method, just be sure to factor in that your steak will continue to cook while resting, and to take your steak out and give it a good jab every so often.
Read more: Avoid Dry Beef Syndrome: Here Are the Best Ways to Reheat Steak
Fresh on the heels of August’s black moon is September’s full moon, which will be among the most interesting full moons of 2025. It’s coming with a total lunar eclipse, making it a blood moon. Viewers in the US won’t be able to see the upcoming lunar eclipse, but the moon should still appear redder than usual.
The total lunar eclipse, which takes place on Sept. 7, will be visible primarily in Asia, Australia, Eastern Europe and Eastern Africa. Most of the rest of Europe and Africa will see a partial eclipse, while North and South America are left out this time around.
A blood moon only occurs during a total lunar eclipse, when the moon angles behind the Earth in such a way that the Earth blocks much of the sun’s light. What’s left passes through Earth’s atmosphere on its way to the moon, which filters out the blue light. That leaves only the sun’s red light to hit the moon and reflect to Earth, giving it a reddish glow.
This effect lasts roughly two hours and will only happen in the regions that can witness the lunar eclipse.
According to The Old Farmer’s Almanac, September’s full moon, also known as the corn moon, will see peak brightness at around 2:09 p.m. ET on Sept. 7. Since that’s the middle of the day, the best time to view the corn moon will be at night during Sept. 6 or Sept. 7. The moon will remain almost full for a couple of days immediately before and after Sept. 7, giving you several days to view the full moon.
How rare are lunar eclipses?
Total lunar eclipses are less frequent than partial eclipses, making September’s full moon a special occasion for those in the eclipse’s path. Since the Earth and the moon have stable orbits, they are also entirely predictable. The last lunar eclipse occurred in March 2025, with the one before in November 2022.
The next total eclipse is due in March 2026, but it will take place primarily in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, where virtually no one will be able to see it. The next five will be New Year’s Eve in 2028, June 2029, December 2029 and then two more in 2032. Of those, only the one in 2029 will be visible in the US.
Can I livestream the lunar eclipse?
You can livestream the lunar eclipse! Numerous websites, including Time and Date, FOX Weather and the Royal Observatory in Greenwich will livestream the happenings. Per Time and Date, the eclipse should last an hour and 22 minutes, starting at around 15:28 UTC, or 11:28 a.m. ET on Sept. 7.
Cooking a thick steak at home can feel intimidating. Get the timing wrong and you risk an undercooked center or a dried-out edge. Traditionally, most people sear the outside first, then finish in the oven to bring the inside up to temp. But chefs have been using a smarter trick for years: flipping that process around.
Reverse searing starts low and slow in the oven, then finishes with a quick, high-heat sear at the end. The result? Perfectly even doneness from edge to center with a beautifully caramelized crust on the outside. Ribeye, filet mignon, or any thick cut benefits from this method because it gives you more control over temperature and locks in flavor without overcooking.
After trying it myself, I can see why professionals swear by it. The texture, flavor, and consistency are hard to beat, and it’s one of those techniques that makes you wonder why you ever cooked steak any other way.
We’ve been testing methods for cooking steak, including the souse vide 137 club and now the reverse sear.
John Carlsen/CNET
Reverse searing involves cooking meat at a low temperature for even, gentle cooking and then finishing on the stovetop or grill for a caramelized crust. Low-and-slow cooking is often favored to deliver tenderness to tough cuts. Imagine what it can do when you start with something that is already tender.
“By cooking at a lower temperature, you let the marbling and collagen of the beef break down slowly, resulting in something that’s extra meaty and juicy,” says Danny Ganem, Culinary Director of Gioia Hospitality Group, which includes the newly-opened Daniel’s Steakhouse in Miami. “It’s great for melding flavors and adding even more tenderness to a thick cut of steak.”
Read more: Reddit Agrees, the ‘137 Club’ Is the Best Way to Make Steak. Here’s How It Works
High heat is reserved for the end of the process after the meat is perfectly relaxed, “to achieve that beautiful mahogany crust,” says Ganem, without it seizing up due to the sudden temperature difference when you put a cold steak on a hot pan. This also keeps the natural moisture content of the meat — its juices — more evenly distributed during the cooking process.
What do you need for a reverse sear?
You’ll need a few pieces of equipment for a reverse sear, but nothing that a well-stocked kitchen doesn’t already have.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Chefs will often apply a sous vide technique for a reverse sear, but you don’t have to get that technical to accomplish it at home. “The best tools are a temperature-controlled oven that can achieve consistent temperatures of under 180 degrees Fahrenheit, a sheet pan with a wire rack, and a good cast iron (or heavy-duty stainless steel) pan where you can finish your steak at a high temperature,” says Ganem. (Food writer hack: If you don’t think you already have the necessary wire rack — check your toaster oven.)
Pamela Vachon/CNET
An oven-safe thermometer with a temperature alert is also helpful for tracking the internal temperature of the meat in the thickest part while it cooks. I highly recommend this over an instant-read thermometer, which requires you to repeatedly open the oven to check. If you’re relying on timing or other cues rather than precise temperature tracking, you’re potentially losing the accuracy that this method can ensure.
What cuts are best for reverse searing?
Ribeyes make a good candidate for the reverse sear.
Pre
Reverse searing works best with thick cuts of steak. Anything under an inch and you don’t have enough thickness to get an accurate temperature reading in the center of the steak, so look for grocery store steaks that are cut to at least 1.5″ to 2″ thick, or ask your butcher for those dimensions, or even thicker. This method can even apply to thick cuts from pork or lamb.
Certain steak cuts are naturally limited in their thickness, so this method doesn’t apply to every cut. “My personal preferences for reverse searing are big and thick cuts like a Porterhouse, Côte de Boeuf, (bone-in ribeye) or a beautiful Prime Rib,” says Ganem. I tried it with a 1.5-inch thick ribeye from the grocery store. (Spoiler alert: Never has a grocery store cut seen a better outcome.)
This method is tailor-made for a Porterhouse, Côte de Boeuf (bone-in ribeye), or beautiful Prime Rib.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Reverse searing method
You will need:
Thick cut steaks (at least 1.5-inch thick)
Salt and pepper
High-heat cooking oil and butter (optional)
Sheet tray with wire rack
Oven-safe thermometer
Cast iron or heavy-duty stainless steel pan (nonstick not recommended for this)
Once out of the oven, sear steaks on both sides for about 1 minute per side,
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Directions:
Assemble equipment and preheat oven to 180 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit
Season steaks liberally with salt and pepper on both sides. Place steaks on wire racks over a sheet tray, and insert an oven-safe thermometer into the thickest part of the steak, as centered as possible.
Reverse sear temp chart
Doneness
Oven temp
Rare
105-110 F
Medium rare
115-120 F
Medium
125-130 F
Medium well
135-140 F
Cook until temperature reaches desired doneness. This may take 30 to 40 minutes or more, depending on the consistency of your oven temp and the desired temperature:
If you’re watching the temperature increase with an oven-safe thermometer, you’ll have a sense of when your steaks are about to come out of the oven. In the last minute or two, heat oil (with optional butter) in pan until nearly smoking.
Once out of the oven, sear steaks on both sides for about 1 minute per side, making sure the entire surface of the steak is in contact with the pan.
You may choose to rest the steaks momentarily when done cooking, but with the reverse sear method, this is less important, as the consistency of the lower temperature early in the cooking process helps with the even distribution of juices.
Resting is fine, but it’s less important than with other cooking methods.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Benefits and drawbacks for reverse searing
Because the reverse sear method takes much more time than simply searing on the stovetop or grill, “the biggest drawback is time consumption and planning,” says Ganem. “You can’t simply pull a steak out of the fridge and cook it fast.”
I found this to be a bonus, however, in terms of preparing the whole meal. While the steak was in the oven I was able to use the stovetop to prepare other components without having to keep a close eye on the meat, which were then ready to go when the steak came out for its last couple minutes of searing and I could give it my full attention.
Not having to rest the meat also means that you get to enjoy it hotter, a bonus which cannot be understated. Regardless of effective “tenting” during the rest period that other methods require, your steak is going to lose some of its heat while it waits to be cut.
Dealing with slow internet is a frustrating experience, especially if you’re gaming with friends, streaming a show or trying to work from home. When I started experiencing slow Wi-Fi at home, even though I was paying for 1 gigabit speeds, I knew that there had to be something I could do about it.
Sometimes you can blame your internet provider or upgrade your router, but in other cases, there could be minor issues that could be easily resolved in a few simple steps. As someone who writes about broadband daily, I’ve realized the value of a good internet connection and that troubleshooting your speeds doesn’t have to be complicated. Here’s what I learned.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
I was on Verizon Fios’ second-fastest plan, but was still getting insufferably slow speeds.
Tharon Green/CNET
‘Enough is enough’
The red flags are there for a reason, so don’t ignore them: the buffering, the slow downloads and the interrupted Zoom calls. I wouldn’t usually have paid attention to these signs, since I had never had a problem with my internet before. A solid internet connection has become vital since I started working from home in 2024.
My family and I also noticed that streaming our favorite shows, like the newest season of Squid Game, had become a pain due to our fluctuating speeds. I finally gave in, said enough is enough and contacted my internet service provider, Verizon Fios. The Fios agent was shocked that I was experiencing internet issues since I was on the company’s second-fastest tier, the gigabit plan.
“You shouldn’t even be experiencing fluctuating speeds with your plan,” the Verizon Fios agent said over the phone. I was stumped.
I didn’t want to make a hasty decision switching out my current provider or buying a new router. So I turned to CNET’s advice for help.
What is gigabit internet?
Your internet speed is measured in megabits per second. In other words, your speed is measured by how much data can be processed over a network in a second. Gigabit internet refers to 1,000 megabits. The more data processed over your network, the better your connection performs.
Top providers that offer gigabit internet
Show more (5 items)
As of June 2024, data from the Federal Communications Commission show that over half of the US population has access to gigabit speeds. Service typically ranges anywhere between $50 to $90 monthly. You can find gigabit service from internet providers such as Frontier Fiber, Google Fiber,Optimum, Verizon Fios, AT&T and more. Though cable providers like Spectrum and Astound Broadband’s gigabit plans are more widely available nationwide than other ISPs, but might be pricier down the line. You could end up paying double your initial price after a year, since most cable providers are notorious for hiking up their prices after a year.
Depending on the connection type available at your address, most fiber ISPs like AT&T and Google Fiber won’t increase your prices after a year and can offer symmetrical download and upload speeds of 1,000Mbps, whereas a cable connection may only top out at 35 to 50Mbps. To learn more about where you can sign up for gigabit service, read our review on gigabit internet and the best fiber internet providers for July 2025.
4 expert tips to boost your internet
At the start of this journey, I felt like a kid riding their first bike. It felt daunting because I didn’t know where to start. Thankfully, one of our pages details how to boost your Wi-Fi connection in four simple steps. Here’s how it went.
1. Take a speed test
These speeds were well below what I expected from my gigabit connection. Something was wrong.
Ookla screenshot by Trisha Jandoc/CNET
Before you do anything else, conduct an internet speed test. I chose Ookla’s speed test because this is the format I am most familiar with. CNET recommends Ookla for its consistency, and it also shows you your speed test history once you create an account. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
This step was fairly easy. I conducted a few speed tests online. The image above is a test I took near my workspace. Speeds of 248 to 275Mbps aren’t bad, being on a gigabit plan supported by a fiber connection makes them surprising (and disappointing). I took it a step further and went to an area of my home where we experienced the most internet trouble.
I found a significant speed drop when I ran a speed test in my basement.
Ookla screenshot by Trisha Jandoc/CNET
I avoid working in the basement most days because the internet is inconsistent. After conducting a speed test, I found our speed dipped to 76Mbps in downloads and 19Mbps in uploads. This area is the farthest from my router, so it only makes sense that the signal is weaker. According to the FCC, the minimum mark for broadband speeds is 100Mbps download and 20Mbps upload. My speeds were missing that mark.
It should be noted that Ookla is not the only speed test you can try. Just recently, CNET broadband expert Cierra Noffke tested out the Orb internet speed test. Noffke writes that it doesn’t just test your download and upload speeds. Orb, which was developed by the same creators of Ookla, measures the overall health of your home network using multiple metrics and continuous speed tests. On the other hand, if your household uses mostly streaming services, Fast.com is a solid option, as it measures your internet’s capacity to stream Netflix. M-Lab is also at the top of my list, as it has an easy-to-use program. You can always keep it simple as well by turning to resources from your provider. My provider (and many other ISPs) also offers its own Verizon Fios speed test.
2. Move your router or your workspace
This next step requires you to experiment a bit with your router’s location or your workspace. It wasn’t easy to uproot my entire workspace, so I moved my router closer to my existing workspace area instead. This step wasn’t a significant change because the router was already placed across the room from my workspace. You should ideally move your router to a central location. Using an Ethernet cable might be helpful, especially if the new location of your router is far from the modem.
In any case, moving your router too far from the modem might prove troublesome. You can try to raise your router instead and mount it to the wall, if possible. That way, you don’t need to jump through all these hoops to install an Ethernet cable.
3. Add a Wi-Fi extender
If moving your router is not an option, try contacting your internet provider for additional equipment. After contacting my ISP, I discovered that a Fios Wi-Fi extender came with my plan at no extra cost to my monthly service bill. The extender came with a small guide, and at first glance, it seemed pretty simple.
Obtaining equipment from your ISP is not the only option — many Wi-Fi extenders currently on the market support Wi-Fi 6. CNET previously named the TP-Link RE605X as the top pick for the best Wi-Fi extender due to its affordability and easy-to-use controls. Note: TP-Link routers could be banned sometime this year due to a recent government investigation. That said, the next best thing is the Linksys RE7310, currently priced at $80, which tied in performance with the TP-Link RE605X when we tested them. Check out our other top picks for the best Wi-Fi Extenders.
Pair your extender to the router
The extender came with a coax cable, a coax splitter and a small set-up guide that outlined four steps: confirm the internet connection, plug it in, pair it and finally move the extender to a designated spot in your home. Seems simple enough, right? I went through the first three steps without running into any issues. I paired my extender to my router using the coax cable.
Placing your extender
Things took a turn with the final step. After pairing, I unplugged my extender and moved it to the basement, where the signal was weaker. The light from the extender wasn’t the solid white it should have been. Instead, it was a yellow color, meaning the extender was disconnected from the router. Solving this problem took some time as I went back through the set-up guide and covered my bases again.
During this process, I also discovered Verizon Fios’ complete Wi-Fi extender set-up guide online. Some ISPs offer customers the option of self-installation.
Here are some of the top internet providers nationwide that have how-to pages and guides dedicated to installing devices that boost your internet:
The complete set-up guide mentioned an Ethernet cable, but I was not provided one, so I wondered if that prevented my extender from connecting to the router. I contacted Verizon Fios to make sure I was not missing any parts. Per our conversation, Verizon Fios confirmed that an Ethernet cable is recommended but not necessary. The coax cable works just as well.
Ethernet offers a wired connection through cables, which you can plug directly into the router, and should provide faster speeds than Wi-Fi. CNET’s own Hallie Seltzer tested this at her home.
After pairing, place your extender in an area not too far from the router.
Trisha Jandoc/CNET
I decided to pivot my approach and placed the extender a bit closer to the router, near my workspace. After a few minutes, I saw a solid white color — the sign of success.
4. Prioritize your traffic
Manage your work traffic at home by tweaking your router settings.
Trisha Jandoc/CNET
After installing the extender, my internet speeds surged, making this step optional for me. If you cannot obtain a Wi-Fi extender, you can try managing how much bandwidth your household consumes through your router settings. For instance, Verizon Fios allows customers to set up parental controls, which can eliminate access to certain websites. Other routers can even schedule access to the network for certain devices. This process will look different depending on your internet provider and your equipment.
How much speed do you need for your home?
High-speed internet may be enticing, but you may not even need it. According to OpenVault’s first quarter 2024 report, over a third of Americans use the internet at gigabit speeds, a 20% increase from 2023. In addition, its fourth quarter 2024 report shows that the average American household uses 569Mbps in downstream speeds and 32Mbps in upstream. In other words, if you can access gigabit speeds, it should be plenty fast for your household. Finding the right speed will also boil down to your household’s activities. Check out our speed recommendations below.
Our speed recommendations
1Mbps: Sending emails
5 to 10Mbps: Web browsing
10Mbps: Using social media
10 to 20Mbps (or 35Mbps in 4K): Streaming in HD
25 to 35Mbps: Online gaming
For more information, read our comprehensive internet speed guide.
Why you might not be seeing the speeds you’re paying for
Even if you are on your provider’s fastest plan, there is no guarantee you will see the exact speeds promised. What’s advertised by your ISP may not be the actual speeds you get. Many conditions can impact your internet speeds. According to AT&T’s website, certain materials, dense walls and even furniture can obstruct your Wi-Fi signal. Other common factors contributing to a weaker signal include outdated equipment, poor router settings, bad weather and extreme cases like hacking or malware. In addition, finding the right Wi-Fi band for your router or investing in a network switch can also help optimize your internet connection at home. To ensure you’re making the most of your internet, read our guides on how to weatherproof your internet and secure your connection from hackers.
My main takeaways
Speeds in my basement increased after installing the extender.
Ookla screenshot by Trisha Jandoc/CNET
Once I successfully installed my extender, I conducted another speed test in my basement and I saw a surge in my internet connection, coming in at 598Mbps in download and 187Mbps in upload.
What I discovered about optimizing my speeds at home
Router and Wi-Fi extender placement are key. The location of your router and extender is directly proportional to optimizing your speeds. Give it a few tries and place your extender in different areas of your home. Ensure you don’t place the extender too far or close to the router.
Conduct a series of speed tests after every step, monitoring any changes in your internet connection.
Seek out self-installation guides. Many ISPs, including AT&T, Cox, Spectrum and Xfinity, offer comprehensive self-installation guides online for devices that boost your signal. Don’t hesitate to seek them out.
Consider buying a Wi-Fi extender. While your ISP might recommend using its equipment, many Wi-Fi extenders support Wi-Fi 6 and should do the trick. Check out our top picks for the best Wi-Fi extenders.
A coax cable works just as well as an ethernet cable. Your ISP might recommend an Ethernet cable for pairing your extender to the router, but a coax cable also works.
When in doubt, contact your ISP for support and discuss your options. You can also try negotiating with your ISP, which might be best if you’re looking to upgrade your plan.
What’s the bottom line?
Since completing this experiment, I’ve seen a drastic change in my internet connection. My family and I can stream our shows without problems and my Zoom calls are running more smoothly than ever. I outlined four steps on this page, but you might need to do a few extra steps to ensure you cover all your bases. Fixing your internet doesn’t have to be complex. This is my first time experimenting with this, and I’ve discovered a new comfort level with my internet connection and how it works.
Our CNET expert tips to help boost your internet speeds outline the four steps I cover on this page: Conduct a few internet speed tests, move your workspace or router, get a Wi-Fi extender (or upgrade your router) and prioritize your work traffic.
It’s worth noting that many factors — such as certain materials, dense walls and even furniture — can affect your internet connection. You can invest in an extender or mesh system to optimize your connection. You may also try experimenting with different Wi-Fi bands or investing in a good-quality network switch. You can contact your provider to explore your options if all else fails.
Ookla’s speed test is known for its consistency and accuracy. Unlike other speed tests, Ookla allows you to access your speed test history when you create an account. In addition, Android and iOS users can conduct speed tests from their mobile devices.
The FCC states that the minimum benchmark for broadband is 100 megabits per second in download and 3Mbps in upload. OpenVault’s first quarter report of 2024 shows that over a third of Americans use the internet at gigabit speeds. Moreover, the trend shows a 20% increase from the previous year. In addition, its latest first quarter 2025 report highlights that the average American household uses 564Mbps downstream and 34Mbps upstream. In other words, if your household can access gigabit speeds, that should be plenty enough. Having faster speeds than that might be overkill for the average home.
Different household activities require different internet speeds. For example, CNET recommends speeds of 25 to 35Mbps for online gaming and at least 35Mbps if you want to stream in 4K. To learn more, check out our internet speed guide for more information.
Crossing a border is stressful enough — and now your phone adds another layer. According to new figures from US Customs and Border Protection, nearly 15,000 device searches were carried out between April and June — over 1,000 of them using advanced tools that copy or analyze a phone’s contents. The rising numbers raise questions about how much personal data travelers may be handing over without realizing it.
One way people are protecting their privacy is by traveling with a no-frills device. A basic or burner phone can keep you connected for calls and texts while limiting the amount of personal information stored on it. It’s not just about crossing borders either — having a stripped-down device can help cut screen time, reduce distractions and give you a mental break from constant notifications.
Even celebrities have embraced the switch. Conan O’Brien has said that carrying a simpler phone helps him stay focused, proving that sometimes less really is more. If your smartphone feels like it holds too much of your life, scaling back — whether for travel or everyday use — might be worth considering.
Read more: Best Prepaid Phone of 2025
Although carriers have offered prepaid phones since the ’90s, “burner phones” or “burners” became more popular in the 2000s following the celebrated HBO series The Wire, where they helped characters avoid getting caught by the police. Though often portrayed in that light, burners aren’t only used by criminals, but really by anyone concerned with surveillance or privacy infringement.
What is a burner phone, and how does it work? Here’s everything you need to know about burners and how to get one.
A burner phone is a cheap prepaid phone with no commitments. It comes with a set number of prepaid call minutes, text messages or data, and it’s designed to be disposed of after use.
Burners are contract-free, and you can grab them off the counter. They’re called burner phones because you can “burn” them (trash them after use), and the phone can’t be traced back to you, which makes them appealing to criminals. Burner phones are typically used when you need a phone quickly, without intentions of long-term usage.
Burners are different from getting a regular, contract-bound cellphone plans that require your information to be on file.
Why should you use a burner phone?
Diy13/Getty Images
Burner phones are an easy way to avoid cellphone contracts or spam that you get on your primary phone number. Burners aren’t linked to your identity, so you can avoid being tracked down or contacted.
You don’t have to dispose of a burner phone after use. You can add more minutes and continue using it. Burner phones can still function as regular phones, minus the hassle of a contract.
You can also get a burner phone as a secondary phone for a specific purpose, like having a spare phone number for two-factor authentication texts, for business or to avoid roaming charges while traveling. Burner phones are often used by anyone concerned with privacy.
Read more: The Data Privacy Tips Digital Security Experts Wish You Knew
Burner phones, prepaid phones, smartphones and burner SIMs: What’s the difference?
Burner phones are cheap phones with simple designs that lack the bells and whistles of a smartphone. Because they’re designed to be disposable, you only get the essentials, as seen by the most common version, the flip phone.
All burner phones are prepaid phones, but not all prepaid phones are burners. What sets a burner apart is that you won’t have to give away any personal information to get one, and it won’t be traceable back to you. Again, a burner phone is cheap enough to be destroyed after use.
Prepaid smartphones are generally low-end models. You can use any unlocked smartphone with prepaid SIM cards, essentially making it a prepaid phone.
If you want a burner, you don’t necessarily have to buy a new phone. You can get a burner SIM and use it with an existing phone. Burner SIMs are prepaid SIMs you can get without a contract or giving away personal information.
Where can you buy a burner phone?
Burner phones are available at all major retailers.
Shelby Knowles/Bloomberg/Getty Images
Burner phones are available at all major retail outlets, including Best Buy, Target and Walmart. They’re also often available at convenience stores like 7-Eleven, local supermarkets, gas stations and retail phone outlets like Cricket and Metro.
You can get a burner phone with cash, and it should cost between $10 and $50, though it may cost more if you get more minutes and data. If you’re getting a burner phone specifically to avoid having the phone traced back to you, it makes sense to pay with cash instead of a credit card.
If you just want a prepaid secondary phone, you can use a credit card. Just keep in mind that credit cards leave a trail that leads back to you.
There are also many apps that let you get secondary phone numbers, including Google Fi and the Burner app. However, these aren’t burners necessarily because the providers typically have at least some of your personal information.
If you’re just looking to get a solid prepaid phone without anonymity, check out our full guide for the best prepaid phone plans available. We also have a guide for the best cheap phone plans.
Earlier this week, I received an email from the communications team at Netflix announcing the debut of a new astrology hub on the streaming platform. According to the release, these curated playlists include show and movie recommendations that “reflect the character traits and themes most associated with that sign.” They don’t include this week’s horoscope. At least for now.
Lots of people feel strongly about their zodiac sign and how it affects their lives. While I don’t normally give much thought to being a Sagittarius, it seems like Netflix astrologers have me figured out.
Netflix has determined that “Sagittarians bring adventure,” so my recommendation list is populated with action movies and shows like Lost, The Outer Banks, Fast & Furious and Ghostbusters: Frozen Empire. While I don’t exclusively like action and adventure titles, they’re absolutely my go-to when I’m looking for something to throw on and pass the time.
(I admit I’m a little jealous of Scorpios, who are classified as folks who “revel in mystery.” Their recommendations include personal favorites of mine like Dept. Q, The Residence, Black Doves and Knives Out. Maybe my ascendant, or rising sign, is in Scorpio.)
My willingness to take chances on action, no matter how outlandish or wild it seems, is also why I started watching the wildly fun series In the Mud, an Argentinian crime drama about five inmates in a women’s prison who bond after a failed breakout attempt. The show has sat at the top of the Global Top 10 for a few weeks now. The first 15 minutes of the first episode, which features a violent, life-and-death prison van escape, will easily hook you in.
As each month of the zodiac calendar approaches, Netflix’s Tudum page will release a more detailed recommendation list, complete with breakdowns of why certain shows and films should, in theory, appeal to your sign.
Things kick off with Virgo season, where you can find titles like The Queen’s Gambit, Bet and Tidying Up With Marie Kondo, all of which appeal to the methodical, detail-oriented brain. Maybe this is you, maybe it’s not. My editor, a Libra, joked that she felt attacked when she saw the titles in her recommended list (it hit a little too close to home).
This could just the algorithm appealing to what it already knows about us. Either way, scrolling through this new zodiac hub to see what the stars predict has proven to be a fun game, and I found a new series to watch as a result.
Now that the weather’s cooling down, I’ve traded most of my outdoor grill time for cozier meals made indoors. The cast-iron skillet and air fryer have been getting plenty of use, and I’ve found that some recipes transition perfectly between all three. Cornell chicken is one of those dishes. This 75-year-old classic has stood the test of time, and it’s still one of the best ways to enjoy flavorful, juicy chicken.
The recipe has unlikely roots. It was created by Robert Baker, a Cornell University food science professor known for his love of poultry and knack for creating simple, reliable flavor. His vinegar-based marinade uses a handful of pantry staples, yet it transforms chicken into something truly special – crisp on the outside, tender inside, and tangy in every bite.
Whether you’re cooking it in a skillet, crisping it up in the air fryer, or saving the recipe for the next warm day on the grill, Cornell chicken is versatile enough to work year-round. It’s comfort food with a little history behind it, and it proves that simple recipes often last the longest.
The beauty of Cornell chicken is its simplicity. No bottled sauces, no fancy tools — just a time-tested formula that works whether you’re grilling over charcoal, gas, or even using your oven’s broiler. It’s one of the earliest recorded barbecue chicken recipes in the U.S., and it’s still a favorite in upstate New York for good reason. One bite and it’s clear: this Ivy League bird has serious backyard cred.
Whether you like to cook your summer bird in an air fryer, over a cast-iron skillet or directly on the grates of your gas or pellet smoker — I made this recipe on all three and it worked each time — this simple and straightforward marinade is easy to make in large batches and worth adding to your rotation.
What’s special about Cornell chicken?
Baker is a Northeast barbecue legend.
Cornell.edu
Baker wrote the proverbial book on barbecue chicken, according to many, after extensive recipe testing in the 1950s. He was unhappy with the bland state of American cuisine and created this recipe to help serve tasty food en masse at large cookouts.
“Cornell chicken,” as it’s known, is beautifully simple and remains one of the most lauded chicken marinades and summer cookout recipes. You’ll find Cornell chicken served at restaurants, particularly in upstate New York, where the university is located, family picnics, food fairs and festivals across the country.
What’s different about Cornell chicken?
Cornell chicken uses one unusual element, a beaten egg, to add a creamy coating and let the chicken skin get crispy without burning. There’s also poultry seasoning for depth of flavor and vinegar to add tang and help the marinade penetrate.
If you’re wondering how to make Cornell chicken, it’s easy — use just five ingredients and a similar cooking method to traditional barbecue chicken. This chicken marinade is vinegar-based so it’s akin more to a Carolina style than the sweet Kansas City or St. Louis styles. Baker suggests using a charcoal grill to keep unwieldy flames from cooking the skin unevenly.
The barbecue chicken recipe is about as simple as it gets. Baker’s cooking technique is a little more meticulous.
Cornell.edu
How to make perfect Cornell chicken
Ingredients
Bone-in chicken pieces
1/2 cup vegetable cooking oil
1 cup apple cider vinegar
1.5 teaspoons poultry seasoning
1 beaten egg
Salt and pepper to taste
Let the marinade do its thing for at least three hours.
David Watsky/CNET
Directions
Step 1: Beat the egg. Add oil and beat again.
Step 2: Whisk together all the ingredients in a bowl.
Step 3: Add chicken pieces and toss to coat. Refrigerate for at least three hours and up to 24 hours.
Step 4: Place coated chicken on a medium-high grill (Baker suggests charcoal) or hot cast-iron skillet and reserve any leftover marinade.
Step 5: Cook for 15 to 20 minutes, flipping and basting the chicken with leftover sauce every five minutes. The basting should be light at first and grow heavier toward the end of cooking.
Step 6: Cook until internal temperature reaches 160 degrees F.
Baker recommends a charcoal grill but gas works fine, too.
David Watsky/CNET
Can you make Cornell chicken in an air fryer?
Yes and I did. I put half of my batch in the air fryer and the other half over a hot flame the way Baker intended. Both methods worked well. The grill gave me a slightly more caramelized char while the air fryer was faster and there was less to clean up.
Baker included instructions on how to build a fire pit but you can choose a charcoal or gas grill and get similar results.
Cornell.edu
Can you use any chicken for Cornell chicken?
Baker’s original recipe calls for broilers (small whole chickens), but this recipe can be applied to any bone-in, skin-on chicken. You can use boneless, skinless chicken, but you won’t get that coveted crispy skin that Baker’s Cornell chicken recipe aces.
As it turns out, some forum users have even experimented with using the Cornell chicken cooking recipe on wings — to pretty immediate success. One person from the r/Wings subreddit shared their successful Cornell chicken wings, after using the same basic six-step process included in Baker’s original recipe.
If you don’t feel like making this sauce, these are the best bottled barbecue sauces we’ve tried.
Watch this: Best Air Fryers: Cheap vs. Expensive
Cornell chicken FAQs
What is the most important ingredient for Cornell chicken?
Aside from the obvious — the bone-in chicken — the apple cider vinegar is perhaps the most important part of the Cornell chicken marinade. It adds a unique “tang” and a depth of flavor that defines Baker’s BBQ recipe. Adding the egg also allows the skin to crisp over, adding a great texture to bite into.
In a deep dive into online discussions on Cornell chicken, I found multiple testimonies in a thread on the r/Wings subreddit that Chiavetta’s Barbecue Marinade is based on the Cornell chicken recipe and is a fantastic store-bought alternative marinade to provide similar results.
Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s NYT Strands puzzle might be the easiest the Times has ever offered. I hardly needed any clue words to unlock in-game hints. If you need hints and answers, read on.
I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story.
If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far
Hint for today’s Strands puzzle
Today’s Strands theme is: Up the hill
If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Nursery rhyme time.
Clue words to unlock in-game hints
Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:
ROAN, CRACK RACK, ROTE, CANE, FIRE, FINE, FAIL
Answers for today’s Strands puzzle
These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:
PAIL, CROWN, BROKE, AFTER, TUMBLING, WATER, FETCH
Today’s Strands spangram
The completed NYT Strands puzzle for Aug. 31, 2025, #546.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Today’s Strands spangram is JACKANDJILL. To find it, look for the J that’s seven letters down on the far-right row, and wind up.
I’d estimate that I cook at home about 90% of the time. That means I’ve run through a ton of kitchen appliances, ranging from revolutionary to downright useless. Luckily, the Chefman Everything Maker is pretty dang clever — and it’s become my go-to appliance that I use almost daily.
Right now for Labor Day, you can get a sweet 25% discount on the Everything Maker. The normal list price of $60 on the Chefman website already feels like a good deal for what this appliance can accomplish — which is, well, everything. Currently the Midnight color is just $45 on Amazon, which is a steal. The Concrete-hued version is also on sale for a few bucks less at just over $40. Here’s why it’s earned a permanent spot on my counter.
How I use my Everything Maker
Macy Meyer/CNET
I’ve made crispy hash browns, gooey grilled cheese, breakfast sandwiches and perfectly golden pancakes — all in one compact machine. And it’s not just a breakfast tool. I’ve used it for late-night quesadillas and quick lunches more times than I can count in the past few weeks.
The design is intuitive, easy to store upright (although I rarely put it away) and surprisingly durable. No extra bells and whistles here. It’s just a well-made, easy-to-use appliance that works every time.
The Chefman Everything Maker lives up to its name by offering a versatile, all-in-one cooking solution that fits easily on a countertop. With a 12-inch nonstick cooking surface and a slim, compact design, it’s well-suited for small kitchens or anyone looking to simplify meal prep. I’ve found it particularly convenient for cooking breakfast foods like eggs and pancakes with the lid open, then switching to grilled sandwiches or quesadillas with the lid closed.
It also heats quickly and evenly, reaching up to 428 degrees Fahrenheit (220 degrees Celsius), which is enough for searing, sautéing or even light grilling. I made a summer flatbread (with burrata, pesto and prosciutto) over the weekend and used the Everything Maker to lightly sear some peaches to add as a topping. They came out perfectly.
Hey, did you know? CNET Deals texts are free, easy and save you money.
Cleanup is another strong point. The nonstick surface wipes down easily after use — no scrubbing or soaking required — which has made it a reliable go-to for quick weekday meals.
The Everything Maker also comes with a digital cookbook featuring 16 chef-crafted recipes, which I’ve used as inspiration for trying new dishes beyond my usual routine. While it doesn’t replace every kitchen tool, the Everything Maker handles a surprising variety of tasks in a compact footprint.
My buying advice
Whether you’re shopping for a gift or just want to level up your own cuisine game, the Chefman Everything Maker is a surprisingly versatile little appliance. Even at full price, it offers solid value and delivers big on convenience, but for just $45, you really can’t beat the value.
While the Everything Maker isn’t on sale on the Chefman website currently, it’s still worth checking Chefman’s website from time to time. They run promotions regularly (in fact, my favorite blender is discounted right now).
If you’re looking for other useful, fun gifts for your favorite hostess or the chef in your life, here are our favorite kitchen gifts under $50.
The iPhone 16 series dropped last year with the same US prices as the iPhone 15 series. But the iPhone 17 might come with the first price increase in years.
James Martin/CNET
Apple will announce new iPhone 17 phones at its annual fall event on Sept. 9, showing off new features of iOS 26, possible camera updates and new case designs, all leading up to a dramatic price reveal. This year, that figure could be $50 higher for the iPhone 17 Pro models, based on a rumor that surfaced on the Chinese social media site Weibo, from a user named Instant Digital (Setsuna Digital).
The rumored price jump corroborates an earlier prediction from Jefferies analyst Edison Lee, who says that the iPhone 17 Air (17 Slim), 17 Pro and 17 Pro Max will get a $50 price increase to offset the higher costs of components and tariffs, as reported by Business Insider. He didn’t mention the regular iPhone 17 getting a price increase. If true, that would mean that the starting prices for the iPhone 17 series will be:
iPhone 17: $829
iPhone 17 Air: $979
iPhone 17 Pro: $1,049
iPhone 17 Pro Max: $1,249
Instant Digital also thinks that the baseline iPhone 17 Pro will come with 256GB of storage instead of 128GB like the iPhone 16 Pro.
Since what President Donald Trump touted as “Liberation Day,” the possible effect of tariffs on the iPhone’s price has been widely discussed. And yet iPhone prices have remained the same so far this year.
This news follows a May report by The Wall Street Journal that Apple is considering a price spike and could attribute it to new and updated features instead of tariffs. In any case, the launch of the rumored iPhone 17 will likely come with a higher price, no matter what Trump says or does.
Apple is the third-largest company in the US, and most of its products are manufactured in China. The iPhone’s ubiquity has made it a symbol for the ongoing uncertainty of the US economy and politics. But even without higher component costs or tariffs, the iPhone has been overdue for a price increase. The last one was five years ago.
From left: the iPhone 16, 16 Plus, 16 Pro and 16 Pro Max. Regardless of everything that’s occurred in 2025, the price of the phones has remained the same.
James Martin/CNET
Historically, that makes it the longest stretch of time Apple has gone without a price increase since the five-year period between the iPhone 5 and the iPhone 7, which ended with a costlier iPhone 8. We can learn a lot by looking at how Apple has handled earlier price hikes (and a one-time drop) and what that means for the iPhone 17.
To figure out the likelihood of a price increase, I grouped iPhone models into a few categories: the standard, the flagships and the behemoths. The standard includes models like the original iPhone, the iPhone 8, the iPhone XR and the iPhone 16. The flagships include variants like the iPhone X, iPhone 11 Pro and iPhone 16 Pro. The behemoth’s designation is for phones like the iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone XS Max and iPhone 16 Pro Max. (Other versions that Apple sold, like the iPhone 5C, the SE series, the iPhone Mini line and the current iPhone Plus line, don’t factor into this analysis.) Also, I use the US starting price for each iPhone before any carrier discounts are applied.
Let’s dive in.
Standard iPhone prices
The iPhone 16 launched in 2025 with a starting price of $829, the same as the iPhone 12 did in 2020.
James Martin/CNET
Since its debut in 2007, the standard iPhone has had four price increases and one correction. Many folks might remember paying $199 for the original iPhone, but in reality, the phone cost $499 off-contract. In 2008, Apple raised the price $100 with the launch of the iPhone 3G to $599, where it would stay for four years. Then, in 2012, the iPhone 5 was introduced with a taller, 4-inch screen and a higher $649 price tag.
Fast-forward to 2017, the 10th anniversary of the iPhone, and the iPhone 8 debuted at a cost of $699, a $50 increase. Every year between 2017 and 2019, the price for the standard iPhone changed. In 2018, the iPhone XR launched at $749. The following year, the iPhone 11 came out, and the price dropped back to $699. And what makes that drop interesting is that the iPhone 11 was the first standard Apple phone with two rear cameras: a wide-angle and ultrawide. Up till then, all other standard iPhone models had only a single rear camera. From 2007 to 2019, when Apple increased prices, it was in $50 increments, except between the first and second iPhone models.
Then 2020 happened. It was a wild year for the iPhone and everyone because of the pandemic. But Apple managed to launch the iPhone 12, which cost $829, marking the largest increase for the standard iPhone: $130. Subsequent models all had the same price: The iPhone 13, 14, 15 and 16 all cost $829.
If Apple follows its previous pattern, then the standard iPhone is due for a price increase. The last increase was in 2020, five years ago, and Apple has never gone six years without a price hike on the standard model. But will the company slowly increase the price over a few years, like it did between the iPhone 7, 8 and XR? Or will it go all in like it did with the iPhone 12?
Apple’s most popular product is the standard iPhone, and it’s safe to expect that the iPhone 17 will cost more (and would have even if Trump hadn’t been elected). Now, we just need to wonder how much tariffs and politics might drive the price up even more.
The flagship: iPhone Pro model prices
The iPhone 16 Pro came out in 2024 with a starting price of $999, the same as the 2017 iPhone X.
James Martin/CNET
Apple hasn’t always had an iPhone Pro variant, but it did starting in 2017 with the launch of the iPhone X, which had a starting price of $999. The phone debuted next to the $699 iPhone 8, making the 8’s $50 increase seem like nothing.
But here’s where things get interesting. Apple has never raised the price on the iPhone Pro model. The iPhone X, XS, 11 Pro, 12 Pro, 13 Pro, 14 Pro, 15 Pro and 16 Pro all cost $999. That’s eight years without a price increase!
What’s even more shocking is when you correct for inflation: the 2017 iPhone X’s $999 price would be $1,298 in 2025, according to the Consumer Price Index Inflation calculator. The iPhone Pro is overdue for a price hike, and I expect the iPhone 17 Pro to cost more.
The behemoths: iPhone Plus, Max and Pro Max prices
The iPhone 16 Pro (left) and iPhone 16 Pro Max.
James Martin/CNET
Since 2014, Apple has sold a big version of the iPhone. Some of these were nothing more than a larger version of the standard iPhone with a bigger screen and battery, as well as some minor differences, like the iPhone 6 Plus having optical image stabilization on its camera while the iPhone 6 didn’t. But beginning with the iPhone 7 Plus, the larger version started having “pro” features, like a second rear camera and portrait mode.
In terms of pricing, the iPhone 6 Plus debuted at $749, which was $100 more than the iPhone 6. And that $749 price stuck around for the iPhone 6S Plus and 7 Plus. In 2017, Apple had three iPhone models: the $699 iPhone 8, the $749 iPhone 8 Plus (a $50 increase from the 7 Plus) and the $999 iPhone X.
In 2018, Apple launched the $1,099 iPhone XS Max, which I consider the true successor to the initial iPhone Plus line. That means the big iPhone got a $350 increase in a single year, the largest Apple has ever made. I admit some people might not think the XS Max is a follow-up to the Plus and would deem it an entirely new iPhone variant. But this is my commentary.
Like the iPhone Pro, the Max and Pro Max would have the same price for years. In 2023, Apple raised the barrier of entry for the Pro Max model and didn’t offer a $1,099 version of the iPhone 15 Pro Max with 128GB of storage. Instead, you had to pay $1,199 for the 256GB variant, which technically cost the same as the iPhone 14 Pro Max with 256GB of storage.
The iPhone 17 and 17 Pro’s prices
No one knows how much the rumored iPhone 17 will cost, except Apple.
Apple/Viva Tung/CNET
Even without tariffs, it’s safe to assume that the iPhone 17 lineup’s prices will be higher for some models. But when you factor in everything that’s happened this year, it’s hard to gauge just how much the price will go up and whether that’ll affect just one or two models, or apply across the entire iPhone 17 line.
This year, Apple raised the price on its most affordable model. Although it lacks the SE branding of the previous low-cost iPhone, the iPhone 16E came with a $599 price tag, $170 more than the $429 iPhone SE (2022).
Apple doesn’t talk about unreleased products or their prices. But we do have an unusual-for-Apple clue as to how these tariffs could affect the company.
“Assuming the current global tariff rates, policies and applications do not change for the balance of the quarter and no new tariffs are added, we estimate the impact to add $900 million to our costs,” Apple CEO Tim Cook said during a quarterly earnings call on May 1.
Obviously, that $900 million number wasn’t just for the iPhone but for all Apple products. And that was three weeks before Trump threatened another tariff aimed purely at the iPhone. But $900 million is a lot for any company to swallow, and eventually, that added cost will need to be recouped. That usually means higher prices, even if Trump pressures Apple to attribute the increase to “new designs and features.”
If there’s one thing for certain, we’ll know exactly what those prices will be when Apple launches the next generation of iPhone models at its September event.
When it comes to watching horror movies, one of my favorite sub-genres is sci-fi horror. Give me the terror of deep space, futuristic worlds where things have gone terribly awry, and larger-than-life spaceships where the crews are trapped with unspeakable horrors. While Alien might be the most popular movie in this genre, there are some amazing sci-fi horror flicks out there just waiting to be discovered.
One of my favorites is Pandorum. Released in 2009, it’s is a claustrophobic trip into space in which a mechanic wakes up on a colony ship to see that things have gone very wrong. There’s a derelict spaceship, terrible things hunting through the hallways and a mystery unfolding in the bowels of the ship. It gives off big Dead Space vibes, and it’s an underrated classic.
It’s streaming for free on Tubi right now.
Pandorum captures the terrifying feel of a broken-down ship, the fear of being surrounded by a hull where only space is waiting outside and a world that juxtaposes body horror and existential dread. Its cinematic style grabbed my attention and kept me watching, even when I desperately wanted to look away.
Corporal Bower (played by Ben Foster) wakes up from cryo-sleep with a troubling case of amnesia. Almost immediately, it’s clear that things have not gone to plan on Elysium, the colony ship transporting 60,000 humans from an overpopulated Earth to a new world. The machinery around him is degraded, the power keeps flickering and he seems to be entirely alone.
Bower is soon joined by Lt. Payton (played by Dennis Quaid), an officer who also wakes from cryo-sleep without any answers. After the two of them manage to activate auxiliary power, they decide to go to the bridge to figure out what’s going on. Bower manages to escape the cryo area to find that the rest of the ship is in even worse condition.
Bower must band together with other survivors to endure the madness of the Elysium.
Constantin Films
On a ship that has devolved from its original humanitarian mission of settling a new planet, he is accosted by creatures that only vaguely resemble people, as well as humans fighting to survive. Bower finds two companions — a member of the agriculture team who doesn’t speak English but has been hunting the predatory creatures, and Nadia, an environmental scientist.
The three of them head for the ship’s reactor to reset the power and get everything running so they can decipher what’s happened and why. Along the way, they encounter a sketchy survivor who tells them things collapsed when the bridge received bad news from Earth and was overtaken by Pandorum, a space-inflicted malaise that can cause psychosis, triggered by strong emotional states.
At the same time, Lt. Payton, who was left in the cryo-sleep chamber, finds another survivor who seems to be struggling from Pandorum and tells Payton what actually happened on the bridge. Payton tries to calm the survivor down, but he only seems to get worse the more they talk. Payton shoves him into a cryo-sleep pod to keep him from causing havoc, as he continues to talk Bower through what he needs to do to restart the reactor and get the ship working again.
Lt. Payton tries to help Bower, but may need help himself.
Constantin Films
Pandorum’s vibe is perfect for anyone who loves hard science-fiction horror. With a hulking, collapsing spaceship as the main set, winding and claustrophobic passages, and a world that’s evolving within the metal walls, this dread-infused movie lasts less than 2 hours. The lurking possibility of Pandorum warping everyone’s perspective, the monsters in the walls, and the tragedy that kick-started everything work together to deliver a thrill-packed adventure full of dread.
The third act of Pandorum is when it all escalates and secrets are revealed — the truth of the bridge, where the ship has been piloted, and what comes next for the survivors on board — but you’ll need to watch for yourself to find out what’s been happening on Elysium.
Pandorum wasn’t a hit when it was released, but 16 years later, it’s still a fantastic example of the sci-fi horror genre, and it delivers plenty of twists and turns. Stream it for free on Tubi, and find out what the Elysium is hiding today.
1 of 46Andrew Lanxon and Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
Pixel Studio launched on the Pixel 9 series last year, but the Pixel 10 Pro allowed me to spend time testing Pixel Studio using a more advanced generative AI model. The result is better quality images, a much deeper understanding of keywords and a wider range of image styles that can be created.
But its quality goes deeper, being now able to generate actual text instead of strings of nonsense as well as creating pictures of people — including photorealistic depictions of known faces like Taylor Swift and Queen Elizabeth II.
We’ve tested the tool extensively across multiple phones and indeed multiple continents, and we’ve found some wild results — both good and bad, including finding out how weirdly obsessed Google’s AI is with the iPhone.
Here then is a selection of the most stand-out images from Pixel Studio on the Pixel 10 range.
(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, the parent company of CNET, in April filed a lawsuit against ChatGPT maker OpenAI, alleging it infringed Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)
2 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A woman holding a phone” is all the prompt I provided. Pixel Studio did the rest, generating an iPhone in the person’s hand. The iPhone is popular, sure, but other phones do exist yet almost every image I generated using just the generic term “phone” resulted in an iPhone.
3 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Pixel Studio is well aware that the iPhone has made a splash in the world. Asking for a phone in the Ukiyo-e style mashes up the famous wave image and an iPhone.
4 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A phone on a birthday cake” and yep, it’s an iPhone.
5 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A phone trapped inside a sphere.” Sure, it’s an older model judging by the physical home button, but that’s still unquestionably an iPhone.
6 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And yes, if you just ask it to create an iPhone it’ll produce a photorealistic render of one. So what if you ask it for a Google Pixel phone? Surely Google’s own AI will know what that is.
7 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Nope! Some of the familiar elements of a Pixel phone are here, including the Pixel 7’s shiny camera strip, but this is an otherwise mangled approximation of what a Pixel looks like.
8 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Same again. Maybe it’s actually so smart that it’s pulling from unreleased prototype drawings that only Gemini has access to, but I suspect not.
9 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And yet, “a man holds a phone” has a perfect depiction of, yep, an iPhone. At least we can’t accuse Google of bias toward its own products.
10 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A pelican on a bike holding a plate of avocado toast” resulted in what is, to my mind, the most California thing I may have ever seen.
11 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
And while we’re enjoying creating American things in AI, here’s America’s first president, George Washington.
12 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
“Abe Lincoln wearing sunglasses.”
13 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
It’s not just American faces it can do. Here I had the late Queen Elizabeth II depicted shouting at a bear. I think the bear needs to buck its ideas up.
14 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Which it clearly did as soon after it was seen dancing with her majesty while wearing an impressive crown of its own.
15 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
Pixel Studio’s newfound ability to generate faces is impressive, but I also wonder whether it’s going to get Google into hot water down the line. It’s had no problem generating an almost perfect likeness of Taylor Swift here.
16 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
It’s not clear whether Taylor Swift ever has ridden a giraffe that’s smoking a cigar, but this picture is all the proof I need to start writing my series of fan fiction novels.
17 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Speaking of giraffes, here’s one having a great time with a cocktail on the beach. Notice the very clear “wish you were here” sign above. Generating legible text is quite a new skill.
18 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
This is what last year’s AI on the Pixel 9 Pro could manage. A weird jumble of lines that sort of look like they could be letters if you squint. And are drunk. And aren’t wearing your glasses. And recently got a bee in your eye.
19 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A noir owl playing pool while a tiger watches and laughs.” Not just a dream I described to my therapist, also a prompt I put into Pixel Studio. And it’s done a great job using the realistic Freestyle mode.
20 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And in the Cinematic style, things get even more dramatic with the lighting.
21 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
The scene in the Claymation style is adorable.
22 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
While the traditional Ukiyo-e style is almost perfect for a tattoo.
23 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And I’d absolutely pay someone to re-create this stained glass style for real to put in my house.
24 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
The Children’s Book style almost always delivered some wonderful results, often with speech bubbles or other text I didn’t even ask for.
25 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A house party with too many balloons” is all I asked for here, but I like that the AI added the title.
26 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
The same prompt looks a bit more nightmarish in the watercolor style.
27 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
This “psychedelic mushroom party” is perfect for a 1970s album cover.
28 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Whereas as a kid’s book it looks simply adorable.
29 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And as Ukiyo-e it looks like fine art I want framed on my wall.
30 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Pixel Studio will not create explicit images, but with the right set of prompts, it can absolutely create bawdy and suggestive images. I love the wink of the man holding his sausage. I didn’t even ask for the title, but it’s absolutely stellar work by the AI here.
31 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
And I genuinely laughed out loud when I saw this one. Yes, I was trying to push the boundaries and see how rude Pixel Studio would be, but my prompt was only “a salami pokes out of a man’s trousers” — the AI did the comedic heavy lifting here with the wonderfully alliterative title.
32 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
When not filming The Last of Us, Pedro Pascal apparently works at a coffee shop, at least according to this AI-created image.
33 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
CNET’s Jeff Carlson used some specific keywords to create this bear image, but I think it can be succinctly summed up as the “ultimate Pacific Northwest.”
34 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
100% that bear is wearing a pair of weather-worn Danner boots.
35 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Sometimes I enjoyed being quite vague with my prompts. This one was just “too many horses.” I think it nailed the assignment.
36 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
And this was “peak Florida man” that is absolutely spot on, short of a ‘gator or two.
37 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“An alien monster looms over Edinburgh.” Doesn’t it just.
38 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
What are you doing with those phone boxes, alien monster? It’s 2025, they don’t even work. Why don’t you have a mobile phone?
39 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
I can generate the adorable cover page first and write the best-selling series of kids books after. Pure profit, here I come!
40 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“Four men drink Guinness.” It’s like a scene in literally any old pub in the UK.
41 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
“A man spills a latte all over his apron like the fool he is.”
42 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
This person playing the guitar while riding an ant is simply perfect in the stained glass style. I’d buy that album.
43 of 46Andrew Lanxon via Pixel Studio/CNET
Aliens remove a man’s eye. Weirdly, it let me generate this image a couple of times before then deciding it was too graphic and telling me it won’t do it anymore.
44 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
“The smartest person in the world.”
45 of 46Patrick Holland via Pixel Studio/CNET
Pixel Studio really Kermit-ed to this one.
46 of 46Jeff Carlson via Pixel Studio/CNET
I always knew jackalopes existed. What I didn’t realise was that they were also keen bloggers with a significant online following, but this image has shown me the truth.
Maybe you’ve been following iPhone 17 rumors. Or you’ve thought about installing the iOS 26 betas (on a test device, please). That doesn’t change the fact that iOS 18.6 is what’s running on your iPhone now, and it offers more features than you may have realized, from priority notifications using Apple Intelligence to the revamped and highly modular Control Center.
After digging into the latest update, I found 10 settings that immediately improved my iPhone use. Some are simple “quality of life” upgrades, while others help cut down on background drain or boost privacy.
You don’t need to be a tech expert to make these changes, and most take less than a minute to apply. If your iPhone has been feeling a little sluggish or just not working the way you want it to, these quick adjustments might be all it takes to get things back on track.
For more on what’s new in iOS 18, learn about improvements to the overhauled Calculator app and the Mail app. And don’t forget to consult our iOS 18 upgrade checklist, which includes making sure you have a proper backup before upgrading.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Watch this: 11 Hidden Features in iOS 18
Turn off categories in the Mail app
With email, everyone has their own way of dealing with the influx of messages. Traditionally, the Mail app has kept a chronological list, but that can get unwieldy if you also get scores of promotions, receipts and other types of email. The new categories feature creates virtual buckets for Primary, Transactions, Updates and Promotions, and guesses how your messages should be sorted.
If that approach doesn’t work for you, here are two things to try.
• In the event that categories are somewhat useful, but you still want a chronological view of your Inbox, swipe all the way to the right of the categories and tap All Mail.
• To turn off categories altogether, tap the three-dot menu (…) in the top-right corner, and then tap List View.
Turn off Mail Categories from within the Inbox. (iOS 18.5 beta shown here.)
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Change the default buttons on the lock screen
In real estate, location is everything, and the bottom corners of the iPhone lock screen are the prime spots, each an easy thumb press away when your device is still locked. Before iOS 18, those posts were held by the flashlight and camera buttons, with no way to change them.
In iOS 18, you can finally replace them with other buttons — or remove them entirely, a balm for folks who unknowingly activate the flashlight (believe me, there’s a better way to turn it on). You can add buttons to recognize music via Shazam, enable Dark Mode, set an alarm/timer, enable Airplane Mode, open your Wallet, send money via Tap to Cash and more.
Here’s how:
1. On the iPhone’s lock screen, touch and hold anywhere on the display until you see the Customize button. You’ll need to unlock the phone using Face ID, Touch ID or your passcode. If it opens the home screen, swipe down from the center-top of the screen (not the right edge, which brings up Control Center.
2. Tap Customize and then choose Lock Screen.
3. Remove one of the buttons by tapping the – (minus) button on the icon.
4. To replace the button with another function, tap its space (now with a + icon) and then choose the one you want on the next screen. (You can also opt to leave that space empty with no button.)
5. Repeat those steps for the other button if you want to change it.
6. Tap Done when you’re finished.
7. Tap the lock screen again to exit the customize mode.
Remove a lock screen button by tapping the – (minus) button, and then choose a new control to replace it.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Get important alerts using Prioritize Notifications
For iPhone models that can run Apple Intelligence, a new option in iOS 18.4 is fast becoming one of my favorite AI features. Go to Settings > Notifications, and under Apple Intelligence, tap Prioritize Notifications. As new alerts come in — and some days feel like they arrive in floods — Apple Intelligence determines which ones are more likely to be important to you. For example, texts from people in your contacts could be flagged in favor of random scam messages. On that settings screen, you can enable or disable priority notifications for individual apps.
In iOS 18.4, Apple Intelligence can prioritize notifications to grab your attention.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set up some of the new tasks available on the Action button
The Action button on the iPhone 15 Pro, iPhone 16, iPhone 16E and iPhone 16 Pro replaced the dedicated mute switch found on every earlier iPhone model with a configurable control. By default, it serves the same purpose — hold it to turn Silent Mode on or off — but you can configure it for other actions like opening the Camera app, performing multiple actions at once or even ordering coffee. The iOS 18.4 update adds Visual Intelligence as an option for the Action button. That makes the AI technology available on the iPhone 16E, which does not include the novel new Camera Control but is now an option for any iPhone with an Action button.
In iOS 18, the Action button gets new capabilities. You can bypass Control Center and choose a control of your choice, such as opening the Remote interface for navigating Apple TV or using Shazam to identify a song.
To choose a different action for the Action button, go to Settings > Action Button. Swipe sideways to select and activate one of the available actions. For the Controls, Shortcut and Accessibility options, tap the Choose button to pick which specific action to run.
iOS 18 now lets you program the Action Button with your favorite Control Center control.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Give your home screen a radical new look
You wouldn’t think that putting icons where you want is a radical new feature, but that’s because iOS has always had a locked arrangement. Apps get added from top to bottom, left to right. You could rearrange the order in which icons appear and move them to other screens, but that was about it.
In iOS 18, apps can be positioned nearly anywhere. You no longer need to deal with a wallpaper image of your kids or pets being obscured by icons. They still adhere to a grid — Apple isn’t about to sanction anarchy — but can be placed freely.
Also, Dark mode finally applies to all of the iPhone’s home screen, with options for coloring icons and affecting the brightness of the wallpaper image. Here’s how to customize the looks.
Arrange apps: Touch and hold the home screen to enter “jiggle mode,” and then drag the icons to new positions. It will still slide them around to fill spaces, but with patience, you can move them into the spots you want.
Position app icons where you want so this very good girl isn’t covered.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
You can also quickly turn compatible apps into widgets that display more information. Maps, for instance, can be a map of your current location with shortcut buttons to search for places or bring up a list of nearby places (such as dinner spots). Touch and hold the app icon and look for a row of resize buttons in the menu that appears. Once expanded beyond the standard icon size, you can drag the handle in the bottom-right corner of the new icon. To get it back to its single icon size you need to touch and hold again and choose the single-icon button
Some apps can be expanded into larger icons that act like widgets.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set Dark mode: If you’ve ever subjected yourself to the retina blast of black text on a white background late at night in a darkened room, you will appreciate the new Dark mode option for the home and lock screens. iOS has previously included a Dark mode, where light backgrounds switch to black or dark gray, text switches to white or light gray and other interface elements are dimmed to coexist in a dark environment. That’s never been applied to the home and lock screens in any significant way — only the dock and some widgets — until iOS 18.
First, touch and hold the home screen to enter jiggle mode. Tap the Edit button in the top-left corner and choose Customize from the menu. At the bottom of the screen, choose a mode for the icons and background: Automatic, Dark or Light (I’ll get to Tinted in a moment). In Dark mode, the icons gain black backgrounds, and folders and the Dock become dark gray. (Developers have the option of making Dark mode icons for their apps. In the meantime, apps not yet optimized get a generally darker appearance.)
In the home screen’s Dark mode, icons and the background are given a darker treatment.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
In Dark mode, the background image also changes. Apple’s default iOS 18 wallpaper dynamically changes from light to dark as the day progresses, or you can choose colors that offer a light and dark option. If you use a photo, its overall exposure is reduced to dim the light output.
If you want dark icons but aren’t a fan of the dimmed photo treatment, tap the sun icon in the corner of the options sheet at the bottom of the screen to toggle back to Light mode just for the background.
Tinted icons: A new and different option is to tint all of the app icons so they share the same color. In the Customize options at the bottom of the screen, choose Tinted as the icon style. You can then adjust the Hue (the slider with the color spectrum) and Luminosity (the slider with the dark to light range) to choose the color tint you prefer.
Apply a universal tint to all app icons, with controls for adjusting the hue and luminosity.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
What if you want to match a color from a background image? Tap the eyedropper button and then drag the reticle to pinpoint the color you want — the border indicates the selected color.
The tint is applied not only to icons but to widgets as well. For a widget such as Photos, the images it displays show up as duotones to match the theme.
Large icons: Do the labels below each app icon seem redundant to you? Now you can remove the labels and increase the size of the icons with one setting. Open the Customize options as described above and tap the Large button.
Make the home screen icons larger and hide the app labels.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
After making any of these changes, tap anywhere on the screen to apply them and exit the Customize interface.
Change up how the Control Center looks
Control Center was once a convenient place to quickly access controls such as playback volume and Airplane mode but under iOS 18 it’s a configurable playground. You can position controls where you want, resize many to reveal more information and add new controls on multiple screens.
Swipe down from the top-right corner to reveal the Control Center (or swipe up from the bottom on the iPhone SE). To enter edit mode, touch and hold or press the + button at the top-left corner.
Just as with moving apps, drag a control to another slot on the screen to reposition it. Many of the controls also include a bottom-right handle that can resize the control — in most cases, it reveals the name of the control and its current status (such as Flashlight Off).
Rearrange the controls in Control Center and, for some, expand them to reveal more information (or just make the button a larger target for pressing).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Control Center also now spans multiple screens. Swipe up to view controls for media currently playing, Home controls for smart lights and appliances and a page dedicated to the communication options that appear when you long-press the Connectivity block containing Airplane Mode, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Cellular and others. Look closely and you’ll see that those screens are actually individual controls expanded to occupy the entire Control Center area.
You can rearrange the order of those screens by moving their controls. Suppose you want Home controls to be the first swipe instead of Now Playing: In the editing mode, drag the large Home control up to the previous screen (Now Playing will shift to the right to make room).
Some controls get their own screens, such as Home. Normally it’s on the third screen, but here it’s been moved to the second screen.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove controls, tap the – (minus) button that appears. You can also add other controls: Tap Add a Control and scroll through the available options ranging from starting a Screen Recording to a host of accessibility options.
Read more: All the new controls you can add to Control Center
Lock or hide any of your sensitive apps
Our phones carry some of our most sensitive data and yet it’s not uncommon to hand a phone to a friend to view photos or look up something online. That doesn’t mean they’re going to snoop but it doesn’t not mean they might be more curious than you’re comfortable with. For data you want to ensure stays out of sight or to add a layer of protection in front of sensitive information, iOS 18 adds the ability to lock and hide apps.
For example, let’s say you keep an ongoing set of lists of gift ideas for family members in the Notes app. You can lock individual notes but that requires a separate step. Maybe a few ideas were made as individual quick notes or drawings. Instead of micromanaging access, you can lock the entire Notes app by doing the following:
Touch and hold the app icon you want to lock and choose Require Face ID or Require Touch ID (or Require Passcode if Face ID or Touch ID are not enabled) from the menu that appears. Confirm your choice by tapping Require Face ID (or similar) in the next dialog.
Lock individual apps.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove the authentication step, touch and hold the app and choose Don’t Require Face ID (or similar).
Nothing outwardly indicates that an app is locked — you’ll find out when you try to open it. There’s one more level of app security available, which is to hide apps in a special locked folder. Touch and hold the app and choose Require Face ID and then tap Hide and Require Face ID in the dialog. Confirm the action by tapping Hide App on the next screen.
The app disappears from the home screen and gets slotted into a Hidden folder at the bottom of the App Library (swipe left beyond your last home screen to view the App Library). To access apps there, tap the Hidden folder and authenticate with Face ID.
When you choose Hide and Require Face ID to protect an app, it gets put into the Hidden folder in App Library (top). Tap the folder and authenticate to access the app (bottom).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
iOS 18 imposes some limitations on hidden apps. Some, such as many of the built-in ones like Notes or Reminders, can only be locked and cannot be hidden at all. Also, the Hidden folder locks itself when you launch an app or swipe away from the App Library.
Turn off Loop Videos in the Photos app
Many apps have implemented a small but annoying (to me) feature, and now Photos under iOS 18.2 has it too: Videos automatically replay when you watch them until you tap the Pause button. That can be fun once or twice, or when viewing short clips. I’m not a fan of having to take action to make them stop each time.
Now I can take action once. Go to Settings > Photos, scroll down until you see Loop Videos and turn the option off. A video will play on its own but then stop at the end as it should.
Turn off Loop Videos to stop every video from replaying automatically.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
If you’d rather the video didn’t play at all until you tap the Play button, also turn off Auto-Play Motion in the same Settings screen.
Adjust the view of your calendar
Big new features like locking and hiding apps are great additions but so are the tiny changes that you encounter every day. The Calendar app includes two new ways to view your schedule.
In iOS 18, when you’re in the Month view in portrait orientation, pinch with two fingers to view more or fewer details. As you “zoom in,” individual events appear as colored bars and then as labeled events with times, all while keeping the monthly grid of days and weeks.
In the Calendar app’s Month view, pinch to zoom in and see more details.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
The Day view, which breaks down your day hour by hour, now has a new Multi Day view that shows two consecutive days to give you context for what’s coming without turning the phone into landscape orientation and viewing the Week view. Tap the View button at the top of the Single Day view and choose Multi Day from the popup menu.
The new Multi Day view in the Calendar shows two days at once (right).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Improve movie and TV show dialogue in the TV app
Trouble hearing dialogue in movies and television shows isn’t a new problem — for example, Apple TV has had a feature for a while where you can ask Siri, “What did she say?” and it will automatically back up a few seconds, turn on subtitles and replay that section of the video. You can even buy soundbars that can overcome muffled TV speech. There are a lot of reasons it’s harder to hear dialogue but the TV app in iOS 18 includes a high-tech workaround to make dialog easier to discern.
While you’re watching a video in the TV app, tap the More (…) button and then expand the Audio heading in the menu that appears; if the phone is in horizontal orientation, tap the Audio Adjustments button. Tap Enhance Dialogue and choose Enhance or Boost. They each dampen background noise and raise the dialogue’s audio.
Turn on Enhance Dialogue in the TV app to discern characters’ speech better in noisy scenes.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
These are just a few new features and changes in iOS 18. Check out our broader coverage of Apple Intelligence, more impressions of the system after using it for months and how these all work together with the iPhone 16 models.
Apple’s iPhone 16, 16 Plus Show Off Bolder Colors and Buttons
Grilled cheese has always been one of those comfort foods that feels impossible to improve. For years, I made mine the same way: butter on bread, cheese in the middle, and a skillet on the stove. It worked, and I never questioned it. Then I tried making it in an air fryer, and suddenly, my “perfect” method didn’t seem so perfect anymore.
The bread comes out evenly golden and crunchy, the cheese melts into a gooey center, and the sandwich feels lighter since it barely needs any butter. The best part? The kitchen doesn’t turn into a hotbox while you cook.
Once you’ve made grilled cheese in an air fryer, it’s hard to go back to the pan. The process is quick, the cleanup is easy, and the results are consistently better. If you’re looking for a simple upgrade to a classic, this might be your new go-to method.
If you don’t own an air fryer, I recommend Ninja’s glass-bowl model. It’s the best we’ve tested and makes a mean grilled cheese. Making an air fryer grilled cheese is fast and easy and leaves almost no mess. Here’s why your next grilled cheese should start and end in the air fryer.
Why an air fryer grilled cheese works so well
As you can plainly see, the air fryer grilled cheese leaves little mess to contend with after preparing.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
An air fryer is basically a small convection oven with nonstick surfaces, circulating hot air around whatever you put in its basket. Unlike your saute pan or skillet, it cooks from all directions at once and typically in less time. Unlike your oven, it is compact and efficient, heats up quickly and may not even require preheating.
Your toaster oven could never do this. While toasted cheese is a possibility (and reheated toaster oven pizza is a revelation), grilled cheese is not. Your toaster oven is not designed to support fat on the underside of whatever you’re cooking and you’ll end up with a mess too complicated to clean.
For your grilled cheese, the air fryer is working on both of the bread surfaces and the cheese all at once, resulting in a quicker melt, which adheres the cheese to the bread slices together making for a much easier flip. (Flipping is still recommended but with far less drama.)
The air circulation provides deep crunchiness, not only to the surfaces that received the butter or mayo treatment but to the entire crust. Any inclusions beyond cheese in the interior of the sandwich are also transforming because of the ambient heat. Simply placing a lid on your saute pan or skillet can’t achieve the same results, as the components will become steamed and potentially soggy.
How I make a grilled cheese in the air fryer
Humble ingredients are transformed into something great inside an air fryer.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Assemble a grilled cheese as you would otherwise
Sliced bread
Sliced or shredded cheese (I like American cheese for a basic grilled cheese and a combo of gruyere and cheddar for an upgrade.)
Butter or mayonnaise for the outside of the bread slices (dealer’s choice)
For a basic grilled cheese, you can assemble the sandwich in the basket of your air fryer: bread with buttered side down, followed by sliced or shredded cheese, then topped with the final slice with buttered side up.
Be it a simple sandwich or a fancier combination of cheese, bread and fixings, the air fryer makes a crispy, gooey grilled cheese in minutes.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Set the heat to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and cook for 3 to 6 minutes on each side, flipping halfway through. The already melted cheese will keep your sandwich nicely together during the flip. You can get a lightly golden grilled cheese in less time but I recommend hanging on for 5 to 6 minutes for a deeply crunchy sandwich.
Another perk of the air fryer is that you can more easily peek to see where you are without adversely affecting the outcome.
The air fryer is even better for a stacked grilled cheese
Add a fruit element and cured meats for a fancier air fryer sammy.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
This is where the air fryer really shines in the grilled cheese realm. Every element of an upgraded grilled cheese adds a degree of difficulty when trying to cook in a skillet, much of which is mitigated in the safe confines of an air fryer. Thicker bread. Thicker cheese, like hunks of camembert or brie.
And think of all the great grilled cheese ingredients that can be slippery: apple slices, roasted red peppers, tomatoes, pickles, etc. Any grilled cheese with more than two components can be challenging to flip gracefully in a skillet, even for trained cooks.
Bag a loaf of good bread and stuff your sandwich with upmarket cheese.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
To prove a point, I assembled a fancy grilled cheese with camembert, prosciutto and apple slices. (Plus mayonnaise on the exterior, because I was being fancy, and mayo gives your sandwich a little extra tang.) Because of its height, I assembled it fully outside of the air fryer and then carefully placed it in the drawer.
Et voila!
Pamela Vachon/CNET
After 6 minutes of air fryer cooking, the flip was seamless and the sophisticated outcome belies the fact that you spent all of one minute assembling the masterpiece. The exterior of the ham even got a little bonus crisping. So the air fryer invites you to go to town with whatever you can dream up for your grilled cheese: cured or cooked ground meats, grilled veggies, various sauces and relishes — you name it. An epic grilled cheese variation is limited only by the confines of your imagination.
Do I need to preheat an air fryer for grilled cheese?
A grilled cheese is a quick-cooking sandwich no matter how you do it so you don’t want to add on minutes of additional time for something that only takes minutes to accomplish. That said, while preheating your air fryer may be a waste of time for certain preparations, I think putting it on for just a minute to heat up the nonstick surface that the sandwich sits on is worthwhile to get that golden crust working right away.
Are there drawbacks to making air fryer grilled cheese?
Depending on your model and size of air fryer, and the shape of bread you choose, it can be tricky to make more than two sandwiches at once, so it might not be the most family-friendly method for making grilled cheese. But for a solo meal or date night, your air fryer is the grilled cheese hack you didn’t know you needed.
Opening a bottle of wine doesn’t always mean finishing it in one sitting. Maybe you just want a glass with dinner or you’re saving the rest for the weekend. The question is, how long will that open bottle actually stay drinkable before the flavor starts to fade?
The good news is wine doesn’t go bad the instant the cork comes out. With a little care, you can stretch its life for several days. Storing the bottle upright, keeping it sealed tightly, and putting it in the fridge — even if it’s red — slows down the oxidation that dulls flavor.
How long it lasts depends on the style. Whites and rosés usually keep their freshness for up to five days, reds can hang on for three to five, and sparkling wines give you just a short window of one to three days before the bubbles and taste start to drop off.
Here are some invaluable tips on how long your wine can be expected to last, and how to store it to keep it fresh even longer.
Read more: Need to Find High-Quality Wine on a Budget? Here’s How
Here’s how long wine lasts and how best to store it
Once any bottle of wine stays open beyond the few hours it takes to breathe and decant, its quality begins to deteriorate. That’s why it is crucial to take some steps to preserve its longevity, should you want to finish the remaining beverage before it essentially turns to vinegar.
According to wine educator Rachel Thralls, each wine type requires different storage methods. Here’s a breakdown of the most common.
Red wine
Open red wine should be stored in the fridge to preserve it and removed about 10 minutes before serving.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Days it will last in the fridge: 3-5
“Red wines can be stored in a cool, dark place with a cork or in your wine fridge or refrigerator,” says Thralls. “The more tannin and acidity the red wine has, the longer it tends to last after opening.”
For example, a lower tannin wine like Pinot Noir won’t last as long as rich reds like Cabernet Sauvignon.
“Some wines will even improve after the first day open,” Thralls adds. “If you don’t have a wine fridge, your regular fridge is better than letting the wine sit out in a 70-degree room. Just take the red wine out about 10 minutes before you want a glass so it warms up a little. The red wine will also open up in the glass.”
Full-bodied white wine
Days it will last in the fridge: 2-3
Fuller-bodied whites tend to lose their oomph a little faster.
YourWineStore
“Full-bodied white wines such as oaked chardonnay and viognier tend to oxidize more quickly because they see more oxygen during their prebottling aging process,” explains Thralls. “Be certain to always keep them corked and in the fridge. If you drink a lot of this type of wine, it’s a really smart idea to also invest in vacuum caps.”
Not long after the cork is popped, all wine begins to deteriorate.
Vacu Vin
Sparkling wine
Days it will last in the fridge: 1-3
Sparkling wine has the shortest shelf lives of any wine.
Shutterstock
“Sparkling wines lose their carbonation quickly after opening,” says Thralls. “A traditional method sparkling wine such as cava or Champagne (which have more atmospheres of pressure, aka more bubbles) will last a little longer than a tank method sparkling wine like prosecco.”
Invest in a bouchon (sparkling wine stopper) for best results. If you’re really serious about preserving your Champagne, Coravin makes a bougie sparkling wine preservation system that pumps carbon dioxide back into the bottle to extend its effervescent fridge life by weeks.
Light white, sweet white and rosé wines
Days it will last in the fridge: 4-5
Uncorked light white wines can go for as long as five days if kept cold.
Fresh Vine
“Most light white and rosé wines will be drinkable for up to a week when stored in your refrigerator with a cork,” advises Thralls. “You’ll notice the taste will change subtly after the first day as the wine oxidizes. The overall fruit character of the wine will often diminish, becoming less vibrant.”
Tips for storing wine
How and where you store wine is important, before and after opening.
Wine Enthusiast
The aforementioned guidelines are helpful for any wine novice. Thralls suggests a few general rules to take into consideration with any opened bottle.
1. Invest in a wine preserver. “They work very well for keeping wine after it’s been opened. You can use the cork and push it back in or try [a product such as] Repour, which removes the oxygen from the bottle.” Coravin wine systems are pricier but these high-tech units actually refill the bottle with argon gas, extending the life of red and white wine for up to a month.
2. Store any open wine in the refrigerator. “Or a wine fridge, if you have one,” says Thralls. “This cold storage will slow down any development of the wine, keeping it fresh. The ideal cellar or wine fridge temperature is 55 degrees Fahrenheit.”
3. Keep wine away from direct sunlight or sources of heat. “This includes above a refrigerator or oven. It will get ‘cooked’ and ruin the aroma and flavor.”
Ideal serving temperatures for wine
The Hyperchiller can help you chill warm wine to a proper serving temperature.
HyperChiller
One could argue that wine temperature depends on personal preference; there are optimal temperatures that somms and wine professionals aim for.
Generally, wine actually tastes better served slightly cool, which applies to whites and reds. This $21 device can chill warm wine (or any other liquid) in seconds.
“The same ideology of experiencing coffees, teas and sparkling waters at different temperatures also applies to wine,” says Thralls, revealing that the more delicate floral aromatics in fine wines can actually be subdued at overly cool temperatures or burn off too quickly when the wine is too warm.
“If you drink affordable wine most of the time, serving it slightly chilled will disguise most ‘off’ aromas,” she says. “A wine above 70 degrees Fahrenheit will start to smell more alcoholic because of increased ethanol evaporation that occurs as the temperature rises.”
Thralls says that this is a good reason to not fill your wine glass up to the brim. “A typical serving of wine is about 5 ounces and a bottle of wine contains just over 25 ounces, so you should get about five glasses of wine per bottle,” she explains. “The extra space in a typical wine glass is designed to hold the aromas when you swirl and smell your wine, so try and save some space.”
The ideal serving temperatures for each type of wine
There’s an ideal temperature for serving every type of wine.
Africa Studio/Shutterstock
Champagne and sparkling wines
Affordable sparkling wines taste best served at 40 to 45 degrees Fahrenheit. If you have a high-quality, more expensive Champagne or sparkling wine, serve at ideal light white wine temperatures, which are slightly warmer.
Light white wines and rosés
Examples of light white wines are Sauvignon Blanc and Pinot Grigio. These wines are best served between 45 to 50 degrees Fahrenheit, slightly cooler than heavier white wines. Rosé wines also taste best and maintain their crispness and acidity at these temperatures.
Heavy whites and light reds
Heavier white wines, such as chardonnay, taste well at a range of temperatures depending on someone’s personal preference, from 48 to 56 degrees Fahrenheit. Oak-aged whites’ fruit tends to taste better when served slightly warmer. Lighter red wines such as Pinot Noir taste better at this cooler end of the spectrum.
Read more: 5 Most Common Wine Drinker Mistakes to Avoid, From a Wine Expert
Medium-bodied reds
Medium-bodied reds, such as merlot, are best served right around 55 degrees Fahrenheit. This temperature is also the ideal cellar temperature. You can grab your bottle right out of your cellar and pour a glass. Keep in mind that wines tend to warm up in the glass as well.
Full-bodied and aged reds
Full-bodied reds such as cabernet sauvignon, syrah and zinfandel are best served between 59 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit. But isn’t that too cold for a red wine? The wine will taste much better if cool and, as Thrall mentioned, the glass will warm the wine as well.
No matter how you swirl it, a good wine is one that doesn’t end up down the drain. If you must tap out and savor the remainder of your bottle for future imbibing pleasure, take all of these tips into consideration and you’ll never waste money (and precious alcohol) again. Cheers.
So, you’ve got Apple TV Plus and you’re looking for some solid sci-fi TV shows to add to your watchlist. Well, look no further. Before you ask, yes, Severance is on this list. But that groundbreaking series is just the tip of the genre iceberg. Want to know more? Well, please, read on.
It’s no secret that Apple’s streaming service (which just raised its monthly price) has flown under the radar for some time. It feels like many of the streamer’s titles show up on the platform without much promotion, waiting for you to discover them for yourself. There is some fun in that. But it can be easy to get stuck in the thick of things, without a clear understanding of which TV show to click play on.
One thing I’ve noticed with Apple TV Plus’s original programming is that every show — whether it’s a light-hearted space jaunt or dystopian drama — features detailed world-building, creative storytelling and engaging performances. Sci-fi shows such as For All Mankind, Murderbot and Dark Matter immediately come to mind. And, yes, there’s always Severance.
Below, you’ll find CNET’s guide to the best sci-fi shows to watch on Apple TV Plus right now. You could be in the mood for a neo-noir mystery, an epic monster battle or something with a scientific flair. There are choices, choices, choices — so settle in and click play.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Read more: Apple TV Plus Review: Small Library but the Quality Is Top-Notch
Apple TV Plus
Invasion is an epic sci-fi drama about an alien invasion. The detail that makes this series different is its international scope. Now in its third season, the show travels around the world to offer a variety of perspectives on the global threat. The events in the series takes place in real time, adding a sense of urgency to the mix.
Apple TV Plus
The adaptation of Martha Wells’ bestselling book series, Murderbot Diaries, has already carved a unique niche in Apple TV Plus’s sci-fi library. Starring Alexander Skarsgård (who delivers in everything he’s in) as the murder-y bot in question, the program follows the exploits of a security bot who protects his human clients while secretly watching hours upon hours of TV. If you want action, comedy and science fiction, Murderbot delivers all three.
Apple TV Plus
All six episodes of Dr. Brain were directed by Kim Jee-woon (the director behind I Saw the Devil), which pretty much tells you that this show will be a dark and twisted ride. The series follows a brain scientist named Sewon Koh, who’s found a way to hack into the memories of dead people. This is a medical breakthrough, to be sure, but Sewon is more focused on using this experimental technique to solve the mystery behind a family tragedy.
Apple TV Plus
Rashida Jones stars as Suzie in Sunny, a series Apple TV Plus describes as a dark comedy. After Suzie’s husband and child mysteriously disappear, she is given a robot to help her grieve. As the show unfolds, Suzie begins to learn her husband’s secrets, leading the program to take a darkly dramatic turn. Presented in a sleek, near-future lens, Sunny feels very Black Mirror-y, which is a good thing.
Apple TV Plus
If Ted Lasso set the stage for quirky comedies on the platform, Severance has to be the title that cemented Apple TV Plus as a streamer devoted to high-concept genre programming. The series follows Mark (Adam Scott), who works for Lumon Industries, a biotech firm that has a unique (albeit terrifying) system to maintain its employees’ work-life balance. Ben Stiller executive produces and directs most of the first season’s episodes, proving once again he’s a stellar talent behind the camera.
Apple TV Plus
Hello Tomorrow! takes place in a retro-future where door-to-door salesmen sell real estate on the moon. The world-building is one of the biggest draws of the series, which unfortunately didn’t get a season 2 renewal. Billy Crudup, Allison Pill, Dawshane Williams, Hank Azaria and Susan Heyward make up the show’s strong cast.
Apple TV Plus
What would life be like if the space race never stopped? That’s the big question For All Mankind answers. The prestige sci-fi drama occurs in an alternate reality where America and the Soviets compete for outer-space dominance. Thanks to the always creative vision of show creator Ronald D. Moore and the committed performances of its epic ensemble cast, this is probably the best science fiction series you’re not watching.
Apple TV Plus
What if we did things differently? We’ve all asked ourselves that question at least once throughout our lives. That question comes to life in Dark Matter, a high-concept twisted series based on Blake Crouch’s book. The series stars Joel Edgerton as Jason, a college professor who suffers a strange assault that alters his life and reality. Jennifer Connelly, Jimmi Simpson and Alice Braga co-star alongside him in a show that’ll keep you guessing until the season’s finale.
Apple TV Plus
Monarch: Legacy of Monsters
The Godzilla universe finally came to TV in this Apple TV Plus series. Monarch: Legacy of Monsters seeks to reveal the organization’s secrets as they connect to the monsters who leveled San Francisco. Kurt Russell stars in his first role in a TV series in nearly five decades. Here, he and his son Wyatt play Army officer Lee Shaw in the 1950s and present day. The monsters and Russell’s star power alone are reasons enough to tune in.
Apple TV Plus
The Last Days of Ptolemy Grey
Samuel L. Jackson pivots away from the superhero genre to bring topics of age and dementia to the forefront. Here, he plays Ptolemy Grey, an aging man with Alzheimer’s. Thanks to the support of an orphaned teen and the progressive research of an extraordinary doctor, Ptolemy can regain his wits to get closure in his own life while also looking for answers to his nephew’s sudden death.
Apple TV Plus
Using Hugh Howey’s book trilogy as inspiration, Silo explores a dystopian future world where humanity’s survivors live in an underground structure. Varied classist drama permeates the underground city. Population control, a murder mystery and the potentially lethal world outside keep the show humming. Rebecca Ferguson, Common and Tim Robbins lead the ensemble cast.
Apple TV Plus
Apple TV Plus did the unthinkable in adapting Isaac Asimov’s epic sci-fi book series. But the streamer pulled it off. Jared Harris plays Hari Seldon, an exiled math professor, for predicting the fall of the Galactic Empire. Lee Pace delivers a formidable performance as Brother Day. The space drama follows Seldon and his followers as they fight to save humanity.
Apple TV Plus
Jason Momoa flexes his acting chops in See. The program, created by Peaky Blinders mastermind Steven Knight, explores a dystopian future where humanity has lost the ability to see. The loss of sight doesn’t slow down people’s ability to battle, and it surely is a spectacle to see blind warriors wield weapons for war. Momoa’s charisma and passion shine through, which makes the show enjoyable, even if it is a hard-to-believe concept.
Apple TV Plus
Mark Protosevich, the writer responsible for movies like Thor, I Am Legend and The Cell, created Sugar — a series that wears its love for the film noir genre on its sleeve. Visually, Sugar is a delight. Add Colin Farrell’s soft-spoken, empathetic private investigator to the mix, and you have a stylish murder mystery with patience and compassion. An unexpected twist flips the show on its head later in the series, transforming the story into something else entirely.
We keep collecting more details about what Apple’s first foldable iPhone will look like when it launches in 2026. The latest information is pretty intriguing.
As reported by Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman, the foldable is code-named “V68.” It will have four cameras and be available only in black-and-white variations. The device will also rely on Touch ID (not Face ID) and will not have a SIM card slot. The four cameras will consist of one on the front, two on the back, and one on the inside.
Apple did not immediately respond to a request for comment.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
The report collects the latest news about the Fold, Flip or whatever Apple calls its first foldable. We’ve already reported that the phone will cost nearly $2,000 and will be released as part of the iPhone 18 bonanza in September 2026. We have words of warning for Apple as it prepares to become the final major mobile player to jump into the foldable phone pool, with rivals Samsung and Huawei already having taken a big lead in the race.
Watch this: Apple’s Foldable iPhone Said to Use Samsung Parts
Moving beyond the iPhone ‘rectangle’
Jon Rettinger, a tech influencer with over 1.65 million YouTube subscribers, is enthused about Apple finally adding a new-look item to its product line.
“The beauty of Android has always been a variance of form factors,” Rettinger told CNET. “You have flips, folds, even rolls now. On the Apple side of the fence, it’s just been, ‘What size rectangle do you want?’ I, for one, am beyond excited about the prospect of Apple diving into the foldable space.”
Rettinger admires the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7, calling it “about as close to the perfect foldable as possible.” But he thinks that Apple can help disrupt the segment with its own version.
“Apple is entering a mature market with its first product. The tolerance for first-time issues, especially at an anticipated high price, will be extremely low,” he says. “However, if they ship a competitive product, I think they’ll have an absolute home run on their hands.”
Let’s bite into the details of the latest Apple iPhone foldable rumors. Bloomberg says Apple has changed course on the screen tech. The company is no longer going with on-cell touch sensors, which “can create air gaps between the screen and its cover” and thereby increase the visibility of a crease — one of the biggest pitfalls of foldable phones so far with all brands.
Instead, Apple will use an in-cell touchscreen, similar to what current iPhones use. The company believes this will enhance touch accuracy and reduce the visibility of the crease.
The report also says the iPhone foldable will utilize a C2 modem, Apple’s first cellular chip with “capabilities approaching the latest from Qualcomm.”
Like Rettinger, fellow influencer Austin Evans, who has 5.68 million YouTube subscribers, is also “really excited” about the iPhone foldable and is “curious about how Apple will differentiate,” Evans told CNET.
“The biggest thing I’d like to see is for it to turn into an iPad mode when open,” Evans said. “Especially if they include Pencil support.”
Your kidneys are working nonstop, handling far more than most people give them credit for. They clear waste from your blood, balance fluid levels, regulate hormones, and even influence things like blood pressure and energy.
Even though they’re essential, kidney health doesn’t always get the focus it should. The CDC estimates that more than 1 in 7 adults in the US are living with chronic kidney disease, and many of them don’t even know it. That’s why prevention and daily care are so important.
Taking simple steps now can help protect your kidneys and keep them functioning well for years to come. A few small, consistent habits can go a long way toward lowering your risk and supporting overall health.
Fortunately, you don’t need to make dramatic lifestyle changes to support kidney health. Incorporating a handful of nutrient-rich superfoods into your regular meals can make a significant difference. These foods help reduce inflammation, support healthy blood flow, and ease the load on your kidneys so they can keep doing their job. If you’re looking to give your kidneys the boost they need, these 13 simple additions to your diet are a great way to start.
Your diet and gut health also play a major role in your wellness, especially when it comes to keeping your kidneys healthy. There are 13 superfoods you should keep in mind when considering natural ways to give your kidney health a boost.
Read more: 6 Important Blood Tests You May Need for Your Overall Health
13 superfoods for kidney health
1. Cabbage
This nutrient-dense vegetable is low in both potassium and sodium while packing in fiber, vitamins C and K and more.
Plus, cabbage is versatile. You can use it in salads and slaws, but you can also use it as a wrap for tacos, sandwiches and more.
2. Fatty fish
Fish delivers protein, and when you choose a fatty fish like tuna, salmon or trout, you’re also getting omega-3 fatty acids. Omega-3 fats may help reduce fat levels (triglycerides) in the blood and may also lower blood pressure, according to the National Kidney Foundation.
If you have CKD, you may need to keep an eye on the phosphorus and potassium levels of the fish you choose. The National Kidney Foundation has a chart you can use to determine levels in specific types of fish. Although, it’s best to consult with your doctor.
Jacobs Stock Photography/Getty Images
3. Bell peppers
Like cabbage, bell peppers pack in lots of good nutrients with low levels of potassium. With them, you get vitamins B6, B9, C and K, plus fiber. They deliver antioxidants too.
You can slice them and eat them with dips or roast them and add them to dinner.
4. Cranberries
Cranberries help to prevent urinary tract infections. These usually stay in your bladder, they can travel up to your kidney, making kidney problems worse. Fortunately, regularly consuming cranberries can help you avoid this unwelcome situation.
Plus, cranberries have antioxidants that can help fight inflammation, and they can boost your heart and digestive health. It turns out, these tart berries aren’t just for the Thanksgiving table.
5. Blueberries
We’ve talked about some of the best foods for kidneys, but you can take it a step further. The question is: What foods help repair kidneys? Blueberries deliver.
With high levels of antioxidants and loads of vitamin C and fiber, blueberries are all-around healthy. They can also help to reduce inflammation and support bone health, reversing some of the issues that can come with CKD.
6. Dark, leafy greens
There are plenty of reasons to turn to dark, leafy greens like spinach or kale. They deliver so many nutrients that they can help you get key vitamins and minerals, plus immunity-boosting benefits.
Be advised that greens can come with a decent amount of potassium. If you have CKD, talk to your doctor before adding more of these to your diet.
7. Olive oil
Rich in antioxidants and healthy fatty acids, olive oil can boost your overall wellness. A study from Harvard University found that olive oil may lower cholesterol levels and the risk of cardiovascular disease, dementia and some types of cancer.
Beyond all this, it can help you add flavor to dishes without turning to salt or butter. To get more antioxidants, choose unrefined or cold-pressed olive oil that’s virgin or extra virgin.
8. Garlic
Another antioxidant-rich, inflammation-fighting food, garlic also contains a specific compound called allicin. For people with CKD, allicin — an active compound found in garlic — worked just as effectively to help protect kidney health as a prescription drug. If you’re looking for the best foods for your kidneys, garlic has to make the list.
Plus, it’s an excellent way to add flavor when you’re skimping on salt.
9. Onions
From the same family as garlic, onions give you another excellent and salt-free way to add flavor (bonus points if you saute them in olive oil). Onions also deliver important nutrients like vitamins B6 and C, manganese and copper.
They also contain quercetin, a chemical that can help your body fight cancer, and organic sulfur compounds that can reduce your risk of high blood pressure, stroke and heart disease.
Getty Images
10. Cauliflower
Cauliflower brings the crunch, paired with plenty of vitamins C, B6, B9 and K, along with fiber. It also contains compounds your body can use to neutralize certain toxins, a big help when your kidneys aren’t doing their best filtration work.
Cauliflower does contain some potassium and phosphorus, though, so while it makes the list of foods good for kidneys, people with CKD may want to moderate their intake.
11. Egg whites
Egg whites are specifically recommended for people with kidney problems. They give you a way to increase your protein levels — which can be important with later-stage CKD, especially if you’re on dialysis.
12. Arugula
Arugula is packed with nutrients your body needs like magnesium, iron, calcium and vitamins A, B9, C and K. Plus, it’s antioxidant-rich and has glucosinolates, which can help your body protect itself against a range of cancer types.
You can eat arugula raw (it’s a great salad base), but you can also sprinkle it over whatever you’re whipping up. It’s great on pizzas, in omelets and with pasta, for example.
13. Apples
Apples deliver the cancer-fighting quercetin and fiber that can help to keep your cholesterol and blood sugar at healthy levels. They’ve got plenty of antioxidants.
Better yet, they’re easy to work into your diet. Leave a bowl of apples on your counter and you’ll have a kidney-healthy, grab-and-go snack whenever you need one.
Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Some students have been back to school for weeks, but others see that first day looming large. Today’s NYT Strands puzzle has a timely related theme. If you need hints and answers, read on.
I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story.
If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far
Hint for today’s Strands puzzle
Today’s Strands theme is: Back to school.
If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Stock your locker.
Clue words to unlock in-game hints
Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:
These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:
LAPTOP, FOLDERS, BACKPACK, NOTEBOOKS, CALCULATOR
Today’s Strands spangram
The completed NYT Strands puzzle for Aug. 25, 2025, #540.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Today’s Strands spangram is SUPPLIES. To find it, look for the S that is five letters down on the far-right row, and wind backwards.
These tips can help make your electric bill feel much less like a monetary burden.
Guido Mieth/DigitalVision/Getty Images
With fall right around the corner and cooler weather on the way, you’ll probably use less energy than you did during the peak of summer. Still, if high utility bills have already stretched your budget and you’re feeling the pressure, you’re not alone. This CNET survey found that more than 78% of US adults are worried about the cost of their home energy use.
The good news is that there are simple, expert-backed strategies that can help cut those expenses without sacrificing comfort. By making a few small changes, you can lower your monthly costs and keep your home running more efficiently year-round.
With that said, there are plenty of ways you can still save on gas, electricity and water in the coming months. Even small habits, like unplugging unused appliances, washing your clothes a different way, cooking with some energy-saving appliances or setting your thermostat to the right temperature can help save money and make your home more energy-efficient.
Here are eight steps you can take to start saving electricity, gas, water — and cash. For additional money-saving tips, check out more on how to weatherstrip your home to save on bills and a simple home upgrade that can help you save on summer cooling costs.
1. Get an electricity audit
Many electric companies offer a free audit, where they do a room-by-room examination of your home and look at your electricity bills to help determine where you’re wasting energy. You can follow the recommendations to help reduce your electric bill. If you can’t get an audit for free, you might still be able to qualify it under the energy efficient home improvement credit and recoup the costs during tax season.
Even if your electric company doesn’t provide this service, you can easily perform a DIY home energy audit using the US Department of Energy website’s instructions.
Here Are 23 Ways to Save On Your Electric Bills Right Now
See all photos
2. Adjust your thermostat
One of the simplest ways to reduce your electricity bill is to adjust your thermostat. According to the Department of Energy, you can save as much as 10% on your heating and cooling costs by adjusting your thermostat by 7 to 10 degrees for 8 hours per day. In other words, keep it a bit warmer in the summer and a bit cooler in the winter.
A simple way to do this is to adjust your thermostat when you’re either asleep or away from home. If you have a smart thermostat, you can preset your thermostat to adjust during these hours so you don’t forget.
Adjusting your thermostat a few hours a day can save you big on energy bills.
Chris Monroe/CNET
3. Turn down your water heater
Many water heater manufacturers set thermostats at 140 degrees Fahrenheit (60 C). But in reality, most households only need it set at a maximum of 120 Fahrenheit. Setting your water heater to a lower temperature can save hundreds of dollars a year.
Adjusting a water heater’s temperature is a quick and easy fix. The thermostat dial on your water heater is likely near the bottom of the tank on the electric or gas control valve. Be sure to check the owner’s manual for instructions to adjust it — and if you have any questions, consult a professional technician.
Adjusting your water heater can save electricity and reduce bills.
Taylor Martin/CNET
4. Turn off and unplug what you aren’t using
CNET
By leaving things around your house plugged in and turned on when you aren’t using them, you’re driving up your electric bill unnecessarily.
You can start by turning off lights when you aren’t in the room or when it’s light enough outside to rely solely on natural light. Multiply your light bulb’s wattage by what your electricity provider charges per kilowatt to find out how much you’re saving. That amount only increases with the wattage of the bulb. While it doesn’t seem like much, it can add up over time.
You can also save money by unplugging appliances you aren’t using. Phantom energy, the energy your appliances use when they’re plugged in but not turned on, can cost an average of $100 per year.
5. Use your dishwasher
It might sound counterintuitive to suggest running an appliance to save on your electricity bill. And yes, there was a time where dishwashers used far more water than they do today. But the Department of Energy regulates how much water modern dishwashers can use. Any dishwasher manufactured since 2013 is limited to using 5 gallons of water. If it’s a compact size dishwasher, it’s limited to 3.5 gallons.
You might think that surely you use less than 5 gallons of water to hand-wash your dishes. But the US Geological Survey estimates that it takes anywhere from 9 to 27 gallons of water to hand-wash a load of dishes. (If you’re curious, we’ve also got a tip on how to load your dishwasher the right way.)
6. Take advantage of off-peak rates
Electricity use tends to be higher during certain times of the day and the year. First, demand is higher in the winter and summer when people are running heaters and air conditioners. It’s also higher during the daytime and evening hours.
Some electricity companies offer time-of-use plans, increasing rates during peak hours and decreasing them during off-peak hours. If you have one of these plans, you can save money by running large appliances like your dishwasher and washing machine early in the morning or late at night.
7. Change your air filters
Your air filter helps to catch any dirt, dust, pet hair and more, preventing it from making its way into your HVAC. When you don’t change your air filters regularly enough, this debris gets into your HVAC system and bogs it down, reducing its efficiency. According to the Department of Energy, replacing your filters on schedule can lower your air conditioner’s energy consumption by anywhere from 5% to 15%.
8. More ways to save on your bills
There are many steps, big and small, that you can take to reduce your consumption and save money on your bills. The Department of Energy has an entire section of its website devoted to providing tips to help you save on energy. And while plenty of them come with a price tag, there are many more just like those on this list that you can do for free.
For more, check out the ceiling fan trick that can help your house stay cooler this summer, and you can also explore our solar cheat sheet.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition might be tough. Not sure how many people who play this are up on Six Nations Rugby. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Big win.
Green group hint: Think scrums.
Blue group hint: Good catch!
Purple group hint: College towns.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Decisive victory.
Green group: Countries in Six Nations Rugby.
Blue group: Names of NFL WRs.
Purple group: Big 12 school locations.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for Aug. 23, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is decisive victory. The four answers are blowout, landslide, romp and runaway.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is countries in Six Nations Rugby. The four answers are England, France, Ireland and Wales.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is names of NFL WRs. The four answers are Ceedee, Ladd, Puka and Rome.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is Big 12 school locations. The four answers are Ames, Lawrence, Manhattan and Morgantown.
Meta is diving into AI video generation with a splash. The company will work with and license models from Midjourney AI, one of the most popular AI image and video companies.
Alexandr Wang, Meta’s chief AI officer, revealed the partnership in a post on X Friday. It’s still unclear when a possible Meta x Midjourney model could be available for people to use.
1/ Today we’re proud to announce a partnership with @midjourney, to license their aesthetic technology for our future models and products, bringing beauty to billions.
Meta teased a possible tool, MovieGen, at its 2024 Connect event, but we haven’t heard much since. Right now, you can upload an existing file or image, or you can choose to “restyle” an existing video, which allows Meta to create a new version of your video with a different aesthetic or background, for example. But there’s no straightforward, wholesale creation tool. That’s different from competitors like OpenAI and Google, which let AI enthusiasts prompt with text and images to create with Sora and Veo 3.
Read more: AI Essentials: 29 Ways You Can Make Gen AI Work for You, According to Our Experts
Creative software companies like Runway, Luma and Pika have also bolstered their products, driving a new wave of AI products throughout the past year. Meta and Midjourney’s partnership is the latest sign that AI video is a key component in the ever-competitive race to entice users with the most advanced AI products.
Midjourney is a household name in AI image creation, and I was fairly impressed with its new AI video model when I tested it earlier this summer. It’s also emblematic of another trend in AI media in that it’s embroiled in a massive copyright infringement lawsuit. Disney and Universal sued the company in June, writing that the program was “a bottomless pit of plagiarism” and that it allowed users to create imagery featuring protected characters like Yoda and Shrek. Meta faced a similar claim, with a group of authors alleging that the company used its copyrighted content without permission to train its AI. But the court ruled Meta’s actions were justified as fair use.
So far, Meta’s focus has been on integrating its chatbot into its social media platforms, like Instagram and Facebook. Its AI models, named Llama, have competed with OpenAI’s GPT-5 and Google’s Gemini. But this summer, the company has supercharged its efforts in AI, spending billions to poach top AI talent and reorganize its internal team structure. The Midjourney partnership is one of the first major moves from the new team, and it could point to how that new team is going to be approaching innovation. For Meta, working with one of the most popular AI media companies could give it the boost it needs.
Months of waiting and sorting through numerous leaks finally paid off on Wednesday, as Google unveiled the Pixel 10 phone lineup at its Made by Google 2025 event. Not only did we finally get details about the Pixel 10, Pixel 10 Pro, Pixel 10 Pro XL, Pixel 10 Pro Fold, Pixel Watch 4 and Pixel Buds 2A, it was all wrapped up in a tech event that was — dare we admit — actually fun.
Hosted by The Tonight Show’s Jimmy Fallon in a format more like the talk show he’s famous for, the tech event included presenters and celebrity guests who didn’t look like they were delivering a script they’d been rehearsing for weeks. Everyone seemed to actually enjoy themselves as they revealed Google’s latest products. And yes, AI played a big part, too, but it wasn’t the unrelenting focus of the show.
If you missed the event, you can catch the whole thing at YouTube, or get right to the important stuff and read on for more details.
Watch this: Everything Announced at Made by Google 2025 in 7 Minutes
Pixel 10, Pixel 10 Pro and Pixel 10 Pro XL are real
Surprise — Google announced new phones! OK, this was the least surprising part of the event, but it still feels good to finally know what exists and when it’s coming. The phones keep the same looks as the Pixel 9 series, but they’re powered by new Tensor G5 processors that Google says is more powerful and simultaneously power-efficient.
On the base Pixel 10, however, there’s a surprise just barely visible in the camera bar: a new dedicated telephoto camera that joins the existing wide and ultrawide cameras. It shares the same 5x optical zoom as the pro models, but with a lower-resolution sensor and a lens with a narrower aperture.
Preorders for the Pixel 10, Pixel 10 Pro and Pixel 10 Pro XL began yesterday and the phones will be in stores and shipping starting Aug. 28. Read our hands-on coverage of the phones here:
Joseph Maldonado/CNET
Pixel 10 Pro Fold opens Google’s next chapter of foldables
Folding phones so far have had an Achilles’ hinge: small particulates like sand can get inside the case and mess things up. The Pixel 10 Pro Fold is one of the first to have an IP68 rating for dust and water resistance, meaning you can take your $1,800 phone to the beach. Or maybe make that the pumpkin patch, because the Pixel 10 Pro Fold is arriving later than the other Pixel 10 phones, on Oct. 9. You can preorder it now.
That sealed-against-the-elements approach does mean Google made a tradeoff: Compared to the svelte Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7, the Pixel 10 Pro Fold is larger and heavier — but it also contains a more robust 5,015-mAh battery. It’s $200 cheaper than Samsung’s foldable, too.
Joseph Maldonado/CNET
Pixel Watch 4 talks to Gemini and is your new health coach
The Pixel Watch 4 has new fitness options including real-time guidance while exercising. And if you forgot to start a workout, the watch (with AI help) can detect the activity in the background and remind you of it later, giving you credit for the effort you made. It’s also the only smartwatch that can detect a loss of pulse and call emergency services automatically.
The smartwatch, which comes in 41mm and 45mm sizes, also has Gemini on board. “You don’t have to repeat yourself, you don’t have to switch to a robo-voice,” said CNET’s Vanessa Hand Orellana in her first-look video. It also includes emergency satellite texting if you find yourself out of cellular range with a dead phone battery.
Like the Pixel 10 Pro Fold, the Pixel Watch 4 models can be preordered now but won’t arrive until Oct. 9.
The Pixel Watch 4 has a familiar design with an upgraded domed screen that’s 50% brighter than the Pixel Watch 3, with a 3,000-nit peak.
Joseph Maldonado/CNET
Pixel Buds 2A are more affordable earbuds
Joining the Pixel Buds 2 Pro in the market are the Pixel Buds 2A, an affordable ($130) pair of wireless earbuds that offer active noise cancellation, a smaller and lighter overall build and a twist-to-adjust stabilizer feature for setting a comfortable fit.
How do they differ from the Pixel Buds Pro 2? CNET’s David Carmoy writes, “While the Pixel Buds 2A are also powered by Google Tensor A1 chip, they’re missing a microphone in each bud (they have two mics per bud while the Buds Pro 2 have three) and the Buds 2A leave off wireless charging, a voice accelerometer, head tracking for spatial audio and a ringtone speaker in the case for Find My Device. They do add the ability to replace the battery in the charging case.”
They’re available for preorder now in hazel and iris colors, and ship Oct. 9.
Joseph Maldonado/CNET
Pixel Buds Pro 2 owners will see new features
Coming in a software update next month, owners of Pixel Buds Pro 2 will be able to answer calls or send them to voicemail with a nod or shake of the head. You’ll be able to talk to Gemini live in noisy locations, and benefit from adaptive audio that applies noise cancellation while letting important sounds come through. At the other end, a new feature will protect your hearing from loud sounds.
Magic Cue is a Gemini assistant that pulls data from your correspondence
In the rollout of all the various AI technologies in the industry, the current stretch goal is “agentic” interactions with software: Having an AI that knows all sorts of details about you and can act to get the important stuff in front of you when needed. (And do it in a privacy-first way, one hopes.)
Magic Cue is Google’s implementation. It’s a new Gemini-based feature that can look through your earlier messages, emails and photos to pull details about things like restaurant reservations and flight times. Magic Cue runs on the Pixel device itself, so sensitive data stays private and not shared to the cloud.
A lot of Gemini AI intelligence is still coming soon
At the start of the event, Fallon sat down in typical talk-show format with Rick Osterloh, senior vice president of platforms and devices, to chat about Gemini and the marvels of AI. Aside from Magic Cue, which will be shipping on the Pixel 10 phones, a lot of the features and products we’ve been hearing about are still on the horizon.
“For instance, Gemini could do something like plan a team celebration dinner for 12 people tonight,” he said. “It might go find a restaurant that’ll accommodate that group. … Look for a karaoke place nearby and maybe even order custom T-shirts for the celebration.”
And when will that be possible? Fallon asked. “A lot sooner than people think,” Osterloh replied. “This kind of thing is coming this year.”
Rick Osterloh and Jimmy Fallon at Made by Google 2025.
Cole Kan, CNET
The Pixel 10 Pro and 10 Pro XL can zoom to 100x with AI help
Pro Res Zoom on the Pixel 10 Pro phones pushes zooming far beyond what would seem to be possible with typical small cameras. Usually when you zoom beyond the optical limits of the cameras, details get fuzzy as the software upscales the image. With Pro Res Zoom, when you go beyond 30x zoom, it uses generative AI to build a sharper version. CNET’s Andrew Lanxon got both impressive and head-scratching results while taking photos in Paris using the Pixel 10 Pro XL.
The original zoomed image (left) and the Pro Res Zoom version (right).
Andrew Lanxon/CNET
At 100x zoom, the Pro Res Zoom feature’s generative AI turned the plane (left) into an odd bundle of sticks (right).
Andrew Lanxon/CNET
Camera Coach uses AI to encourage better photos
Smartphone cameras have employed AI for several years, such as identifying subjects in order to blur the background for Portrait modes or quickly snapping several shots at multiple exposures and blending them together to create well-balanced lighting throughout. Now Google is using AI to help you take better photos.
Camera Coach is a new feature in the Pixel Camera app that looks at the scene in front of the lens and generates multiple suggestions for how to improve the photo before it’s captured. To show this off, podcaster Alex Cooper brought Fallon out to be her model and sat him down on a couch. When she activated the feature, Camera Coach suggested that she move the camera closer to the subject, position his head in the upper portion of the frame, lower the camera to eye level and turn on Portrait mode.
“To all the girls that are watching, I personally know how hard it is to train your boyfriend or your husband to get that perfect shot,” said Cooper. “And now Camera Coach can just train all the boys for us.”
The Camera Coach feature helped better frame Jimmy Fallon for a portrait photo.
Google/Screenshot by Viva Tung/CNET
Don’t call it MagSafe: Pixelsnap brings Qi2 magnetic charging to the Pixel 10
The Qi2 spec includes not just faster charging but also an array of magnets on the back for connecting to accessories. Sound familiar? The presenters mentioned Apple’s MagSafe system, then paused with the realization that they probably shouldn’t have name-checked it during the Google event. On the Pixel 10 phones, it’s called Pixelsnap and should work with accessories made for Apple’s ecosystem too.
Pixel 10 phones connect magnetically to accessories, which Google calls Pixelsnap.
Joseph Maldonado/CNET
Gemini live translation, and the Pixel 10 will be available in Mexico
In an impressive segment demonstrating Gemini live translation during a phone call, musician Karen Polinesia announced, in Spanish and translated by the technology, that for the first time, the Pixel 10 will be available for sale in Mexico.
Musician Karen Polinesia hears a Spanish translation of what host Jimmy Fallon is saying on a live phone call.
Screenshot by Viva Tung/CNET
This article is being updated; stay tuned for more.
Jasper Tempest is back for more adventures, balancing crime-solving in Cambridge while dealing with his interfering mother, in season 4 of Professor T.
Below, I’ll outline the best live TV streaming services for watching the show, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if it’s not available where you live.
The latest run of the hugely popular British show follows the brilliant but troubled criminologist, played by Ben Miller, six months after the devastating events of season 3 (spoilers here). Tempest and his team are left grappling with grief as a wave of chilling new crimes sweeps across the town.
Reluctantly drawn back into the fray of police work, Tempest has found a new obsession outside of his investigations with a surprising new musical hobby, while his formidable mother, Adelaide (Frances de la Tour), finds herself caught up in an unexpected romance.
Based on the Belgian series of the same name, this English adaptation has built a steady following in the UK and US, with a fifth season already announced.
Here’s how you can watch season 4 of Professor T from anywhere in the world.
‘Professor T’ season 4 premiere dates
Comprised of six episodes, season 4 of Professor T premieres Aug. 24 at 8 p.m. ET on PBS, the PBS app and the PBS Masterpiece Channel, with new episodes set to air weekly. For PBS Passport members, all six episodes of Professor T season 4 are available to watch on demand right now.
Despite the show being an ITV production, season 4 has yet to receive a confirmed UK release date.
Where to watch ‘Professor T’ season 4 for free in the US
Professor T season 4 can be watched for free in the US via your local PBS station, the PBS app and the PBS Masterpiece Channel.
PBS can also be accessed in most markets via live TV streaming services YouTube TV, DirecTV Stream, Hulu Plus Live TV and Amazon Prime Video.
For PBS Passport members, all six episodes of Professor T season 4 are now available to watch on demand.
PBS
For PBS Passport members, all six episodes of Professor T season 4 are available to watch on demand right now.
A PBS Passport member benefit requires a station donation of $5 per month and gives extended access to on-demand shows, full seasons and archives.
How to watch season 4 from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with your favorite shows while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming. It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds, and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins.
VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security. However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN usage to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
Looking for other options? Be sure to check out some of the other great VPN deals taking place right now.
Sarah Tew/CNET
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN and it works on a variety of devices. It’s normally $13 a month but if you sign up for an annual subscription for $100 you’ll get three months free and save 49%. That’s the equivalent of $6.67 a month.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
Stream ‘Professor T’ season 4 for free in the UK
As mentioned above, we’re still awaiting a release date for season 4 in the UK. However, the new series is expected to be broadcast on free-to-air ITV1 in the coming weeks.
For those new to the crime drama, all three previous seasons are available to watch on demand for free via ITV’s streaming service ITVX.
ITV
If you’re in the UK, you can watch Professor T on the network’s streaming service ITVX, which is free to use if you create an account. For more info on how to watch ITVX from anywhere with a VPN, keep reading.
Quick tips for streaming ‘Professor T’ using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the show after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log in to your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases, with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. Having a VPN on your router will also help since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
If you’re bound and determined to spend less than $1,000 on a gaming laptop, and you want one with a GPU from Nvidia’s latest GeForce RTX 50 series, then among your limited options is the MSI Katana 15 HX. This 15.6-inch laptop features RTX 5050 graphics and is regularly discounted to $999 at Walmart. It proved to be a strong overall performer, especially for its price, including solid 1080p frame rates. While I was impressed with its performance, I found it hard to overlook some of its shortcomings.
As soon as I pulled it out of the box, I was surprised by the bulk and heft of the laptop. It’s nearly a pound heavier than the Acer Nitro V 16S AI, which has a larger (and more modern) 16-inch, 16:10 display. The Katana 15 HX’s display is an old-school 15.6-inch, 16:9 panel, and as soon as I powered it on, I was greeted with a dim image — and that was with brightness already turned all the way up. Other budget touches include a 512GB SSD that I quickly filled to capacity after installing only a handful of games and a fuzzy 720p webcam that’s sorely outdated.
The Katana 15 HX delivers on the top priority of any gaming laptop, providing good 3D performance for the price. But you don’t have to look very far for very long to find its limitations. None are deal breakers, however, and if you have only $1,000 to spend on a gaming laptop and don’t want one with previous-gen graphics, then the Katana 15 HX certainly fits the bill. For about $300 more, however, the Acer Nitro V 16S AI or Lenovo Legion 5i each offers a more well-rounded package.
MSI Katana 15 HX B14W
Price as reviewed
$1,200 (on sale for $999)
Display size/resolution
15.6-inch 1,920×1,080 144Hz IPS LCD
CPU
Intel Core i7-14650HX
Memory
16GB LPDDR5-5600
Graphics
8GB Nvidia GeForce RTX 5050 @ 115W
Storage
512GB SSD
Ports
USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C, 3 x USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-A, HDMI 2.1, Ethernet, combo audio
Networking
Wi-Fi 6E and Bluetooth 5.3
Operating system
Windows 11 Home
Weight
5.6 pounds (2.5 kilogram)
MSI sells a few fixed configurations of the Katana 15 HX B14W. I tested the entry-level model, which is sold at Walmart for $1,200 but is regularly on sale for $999. It features an Intel Core i7-14650HX and RTX 5050 graphics, along with 16GB of RAM and a 512GB SSD. The display is a 15.6-inch IPS LCD with a 1,920×1,080-pixel resolution and a 144Hz refresh rate.
Also at Walmart is a $1,499 model that bumps you up to an RTX 5070 GPU, 1TB SSD and a higher-resolution (2,560×1,440 pixels) and faster (165Hz) display.
With its 14th-gen Core i7 CPU that has 16 cores and 24 threads and RTX 5050 GPU with 8GB of dedicated video memory and set at its max TDP of 155 watts, the Katana 15 HX B14W provides excellent bang for your buck. It handled our application benchmarks without breaking a sweat, and on the tests that really matter — our 3D gaming benchmarks — it managed to keep pace with a pair of pricier budget gaming models, the Acer Nitro V 16S AI and Lenovo Legion 5i, that feature RTX 5060 graphics.
The Katana 15 HX B14W produced excellent 1080p frame rates on our Shadow of the Tomb Raider and Guardians of the Galaxy benchmarks and actually outpaced the Acer Nitro V 16S AI, whose RTX 5060 is more capable than the Katana’s RTX 5060 but set at a lower TDP of 85 watts, which limits its performance.
Matt Elliott/CNET
The Katana 15 HX B14W excelled on our F1 24 benchmark, hitting an average of 104 frames per second at 1080p with the Ultra High quality setting. That was better than the Lenovo Legion 5i 15IRX10 (82fps) and Acer Nitro V 16S AI (74fps).
The Katana 15 HX B14W fell behind these two competitors on our Assassin’s Creed: Shadows benchmark, each of which managed to exceed 60fps at 1080p with High settings. The Katana averaged only 53fps with the same settings. But, you’ve got a couple of options to get smooth 1080p gameplay with Shadows on the Katana 15 HX. When I dropped the quality setting to Medium, I averaged 65fps. The other move is to use AI upscaling, and with DLSS enabled, I was able to average 66fps at the highest Ultra High setting.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Keeping thermals in check is a challenge for any gaming laptop, and the Katana 15 HX B14W with its full-wattage RTX 5050 GPU certainly relies on its two cooling fans. Under normal load, the fans kicked in only occasionally, but they were a near-constant presence during games. They get pretty loud, but a good pair of headphones will allow you to largely ignore them.
Battery life is rarely impressive on a gaming laptop, with the focus on power over efficiency. The Katana 15 HX B14W lasted a little over 6 hours on our YouTube streaming battery drain test, which isn’t great but about an hour longer than we got with last year’s MSI Cyborg 15.
Budget touches abound
The Katana 15 HX’s strength is the performance it provides for the price. Where it falls short is in the design and features departments.
I wasn’t surprised to find an all-plastic design, given the low price, but I was taken aback by the heft of the system. It’s thick at over an inch (more when you include the chunky rubber feet on which it rests) and tips the scales at more than 5.5 pounds, which is heavy for a laptop of this size. The Lenovo Legion 5i has a slightly smaller 15.1-inch display and is more than a pound lighter at 4.3 pounds. And even with a larger 16-inch display, the Acer Nitro V 16S AI is almost a pound lighter than the Katana 15 HX.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Another area where the Katana 15 HX shows its budget status is the display. MSI outfitted it with a 15.6-inch, 16:9 display that feels behind the times, as most laptops have moved to a taller 16:10 panel. It suffices for 1080p gaming, and the 144Hz refresh keeps things looking smooth. The overall picture looks a bit muted, however, because of the display’s limited brightness. I measured peak brightness with a Spyder X Elite colorimeter at only 280 nits. Though not uncommon on cheaper laptops, I look for a minimum of 300 nits and really like to be closer to 400 nits. The Acer Nitro V 16S AI and Lenovo Legion 5i were each considerably brighter. The Nitro V hit 443 nits, and the Legion 5i’s OLED panel achieved a peak of 518 nits. Basically, if you need a better display, you’ll need to attach the Katana’s HDMI output to an external one or buy a different laptop.
The webcam is another decidedly budget touch on the Katana 15 HX. While most laptops in 2025 offer at least a 1080p camera, you’re stuck with a fuzzy 720p cam here. It produces a grainy image and lacks an IR sensor that would let you use facial recognition to use with Windows Hello. And without a fingerprint reader, the Katana 15 HX is completely devoid of biometrics for easy, secure logins.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Three other budget items to report:
The 2-watt stereo speakers produce underwhelming sound; use headphones instead, preferably with active noise cancellation to neutralize the fan noise.
The 512GB SSD can fill up fast after installing just a couple of games. There’s no room for another drive, but you can easily swap it out for a larger-capacity SSD down the road.
There are no Thunderbolt 4 ports; the fastest you get is a USB 3.2 Gen 2 Type-C port that provides only 10Gbps speed.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Let’s end with a positive: The keyboard isn’t terrible. It feels roomy, and the keys offer shallow travel but with enough of a satisfying snap when pressed or mashed to be serviceable. And you get four-zone RGB LED lighting when many budget gaming laptops offer only a single zone. With four brightness levels for the RGB lighting, you can dial in the effect to match the ambient lighting of your gaming setup. Ten keys — the WASD keys, four arrow keys, spacebar and power button — offer translucent or partially translucent keycaps to let more color shine through.
Lastly, despite the presence of a number pad, you get four full-size arrow keys, which are a necessity on a gaming laptop. Three keys were shortened, however, to accommodate the four arrow keys and numpad — the right-Shift, Copilot and Function keys — and I wish they were dropped down away from the other keys to make them easier to locate by touch.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Is the MSI Katana 15 HX B14W a good budget gaming laptop?
If you want the best frame rates for the lowest price, then it’s a solid pick. But you’ll need to live with some budget touches, the worst of which is the dim display. If you can extend your gaming laptop budget from $1,000 to around $1,300, then the Acer Nitro V 16S AI or Lenovo Legion 5i provides a brighter display, lighter design, higher-resolution webcam and bump to RTX 5060 graphics along with double the RAM and storage.
The review process for laptops, desktops, tablets and other computerlike devices consists of two parts: performance testing under controlled conditions in the CNET Labs and extensive hands-on use by our expert reviewers. This includes evaluating a device’s aesthetics, ergonomics and features. A final review verdict is a combination of both objective and subjective judgments.
With pocket camera popularity on the rise, Ricoh has announced the GR IV, an updated version of its excellent, diminutive (and quite old) GR III. It’s a fixed-lens camera that can easily fit in a pocket, but inside is a big APS-C image sensor — far larger than what you can get in a phone. Larger image sensors typically mean better image quality compared to smaller sensors.
I really liked the GR III and picked it as the best point-and-shoot camera for travel. The images it captured were better, especially in low light, than most of the other small cameras I tested. However, it felt quite dated. The new GR IV, on paper at least, seems to improve on many of the GR III’s more aged aspects but keeps the vast majority of the camera the same. That’s generally a good thing.
Big sensor, little camera
Ricoh
25.7-megapixel images (6,192×4,128)
18.3mm f/2.8 lens (28mm in 35mm equivalent)
1080p/60 video
5-axis image stabilization
Faster startup compared to previous GR cameras (claimed to be 0.6 seconds)
Built-in ND filter (2 stops)
53GB internal storage (also microSD)
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth 5.3
The two benefits of the GR III and its predecessors carry over to the GR IV: It’s an extremely small camera with a big image sensor. The body is 4.3 by 2.4 by 1.3 inches, which is roughly the same width as a smartphone, thicker but shorter. It should fit easily in most pockets. The IV is very slightly smaller than the GR III.
Again, inside is a new APS-C-sized image sensor, though it’s the same size used in the GR III and basically the same resolution. Ricoh says it has “higher sensitivity and reduced noise” compared to the sensor in the GR III. It would have been great to see a higher-resolution sensor, allowing for more detail when cropping in on an image, considering the GR IV has a fixed, wide-angle lens.
Ricoh
That lens is an all-new design, with an 18.3mm focal length (equivalent to 28mm). That matches the GR III, as does its f2.8 aperture. This is on the narrow end of what’s typically considered a wide-angle lens, but it’s similar to the field of view of the main cameras on most smartphones. Ricoh says the lens’s glass elements allow for “edge-to-edge sharpness.”
The GR IV has 5-axis shake reduction, up from 3-axis on the GR III, to help reduce blurriness during longer shutter speeds. Ricoh says this offers up to six stops of stabilization. This, along with the higher sensitivity of the image sensor, could mean the GR IV does really well in low light.
Ricoh
Along with the launch of the GR IV, Ricoh has announced several accessories, most notably a compact flash that connects via the hot shoe on top of the camera. After years of cameras trying to reduce the need for flashes, the resurgence of retro digital cameras and their aesthetic is bringing them back. Additionally, there will be some cosmetic alternatives, including a metal hot shoe cover, plus a wrist strap (pictured in the top image) and a lens adapter to fit the GW-4 wide conversion lens that’s currently available for the GR III.
Should you wait for the GR IV?
Ricoh
On paper, the updates to the GR IV seem fairly mild. Same overall design, same resolution, same focal length. However, there’s definitely an “if ain’t broke, don’t fix it” aspect to all of that. The GR III worked great, creating high-quality images in a pocket-size camera. It’s often said the best camera is the one you have with you, and it was very easy to have the GR III with you.
The new lens, image sensor and stabilization could be solid upgrades. I won’t know until I test the GR IV (likely next month when it launches). I’m a little disappointed it’s not higher resolution. That’s not a huge deal, but I’ve been using a fixed-lens camera for several months now as my main camera, and being able to crop in on the 40MP images has come in handy. Then again, if I were in a situation where I wanted to capture something in the distance, I’d usually just use the telephoto on my Pixel 9 Pro.
If you’re interested in a GR camera, I’d recommend waiting a few weeks if you can. Either the GR IV will be a worthy upgrade and worth getting, or it will just be a minor improvement and the older, and likely cheaper, GR III will be the better option. The Ricoh GR IV will be available in mid-September for $1,500.
Not all sweeteners are created equal when cakes, cookies and other baked goods are concerned. Sugar performs numerous functions beyond sweetness, such as hydration, the release of steam, which assists in the rise, and caramelization, all of which artificial sweeteners can’t automatically do. Neither can artificial sweeteners swap measure for measure with actual sugar, given their potency. However, sucralose, stevia and monk fruit have all been developed as alternatives to sugar in baked goods, typically made in a more granulated form with other food additives for texture and to perform these different functions.
Some zero-sugar sweeteners are better for baking than others.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
I didn’t set out to rank any sweeteners in baking experiments or source specific recipes tailored to each sweetener. In an exploratory mind-set, however, I made a few mug cakes using stevia, sucralose and monk fruit versions.
The subtleties were harder to detect between sweeteners in a baked format that also employed naturally sweet elements such as butter and sprinkles. However, I found the monk fruit much more appealing in this form than in coffee. Stevia was also pleasant, especially with molasses for a brown sugar effect. Splenda (sucralose) was the most noticeable as something other than sugar. Still, it felt more driven by the powdery or granulated additives in the baking version of Splenda rather than the sweetener itself. Overall, all three were comparatively dry compared to similar things made with real sugar, but their taste was pleasant, and I’ll never be mad about eating Funfetti in the name of research.
The rumored iPhone 17 could be announced in less than a month.
There are plenty of rumors flying around about what we can expect from Apple’s upcoming smartphone, like a redesigned camera and a bigger battery. But if you’re all about Apple’s aesthetics, design and sleekness, you’re probably eyeing what colors the iPhone 17 could come in.
The iPhone 16 came in a few color waves, including the traditional black and white we’ve seen for years. But we also saw pink, teal and ultramarine for base models, along with titanium finishes for Pro and Pro Max models. But this year, there are rumors that we could see iPhone colors we’ve never seen before and a few familiar ones — like the M4 MacBook Air’s Sky Blue. And instead of titanium, we could see aluminum finishes. More on that below.
Time is inching closer to Apple’s big reveal. Here’s what we’ve gathered from the swirling rumors about possible iPhone 17 colors.
The full color lineup for Apple’s 2025 iPhones
Here’s the full lineup for the rumored iPhone 17 base and Air models, according to leaker Majin Bu’s image on X.
The base model of the iPhone 17 is rumored to come in the classic black and white, along with four new colors.
Black
White
Gray
Light green
Light purple
iPhone 17 Air colors
Black
White
Blue gray
Sky blue
Light gold
iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max colors
Black
White
Gray
Dark blue
Orange
Yeux1122 has a similar lineup in their post, but the base options don’t include gray.
Black and silver aren’t surprising since we’ve seen both neutral colors in earlier iPhone models and generations. However, if you use a colored phone cover instead, like I do, this possibility could be welcome.
The iPhone color I didn’t see coming
Purple, blue and green are all part of the same color palette. The neutral colors don’t quite surprise me since they’re standard for iPhones at this point. But the color orange is shocking. Dickson expects that the color will only be for the Pro and Pro Max models.
Leaker Scott Dickson also noted the orange shade may end up being a dark gold or copper, but no other rumors point to that new color yet.
iPhone 17 lens protection cover will match the phone color. The orange one for the Pro Max might hint at a new shade, possibly dark gold or copper. pic.twitter.com/BMamZ45now
Sky blue could be old to Apple, but a new iPhone hue
Here is the MacBook Air M4 in sky blue, the same color that the iPhone 17 Pro might come in.
Josh Goldman/CNET
The early rumored color for the iPhone 17 was sky blue.
Well-known leaker Majin Bu posted the rumor of the new color on their blog, calling it “a refined, bright, and modern shade.” But why sky blue?
Perhaps because the latest M4 MacBook Air currently comes in sky blue, an iPhone in the same color could be an aesthetic win for sky blue MacBook owners.
Bu initially wrote that the sky blue color could be for the iPhone 17 Pro, but recently scrapped that rumor to say sky blue would be for the iPhone 17 Air.
It seems like there’s a possibility for different shades of blue, as we see in the lineup above. Rumor has it that there could be a blue option for the iPhone 17 base model and a dark blue for the iPhone 17 Pro. But based on Bu’s post, there’s a possibility of the iPhone 17 Air getting a sky blue hue. We’ll have to wait and see which — if any — blues will be available for iPhone 17.
The possibility of purple
Bu posted on X and their blog on June 20 that Apple is testing purple and green, but that purple could be another new color for the iPhone 17’s base models.
Bu said that purple could meet Apple’s rumored demand for more personalization while blending into Apple’s ecosystem for its other products.
If green is added to the iPhone 17 lineup, Bu says it could be a “fresh and natural tone, ideal for a minimalist yet striking aesthetic.” Yeux1122 and Dickinson included both purple and green in their rumored lineups this month.
Could an aluminum iPhone design bring more colors?
Here is the iPhone 16 (left), 16 Plus, 16 Pro and 16 Pro Max.
James Martin/CNET
The iPhone 16 Pro and Pro Max have a titanium frame, but analyst Jeff Pu predicted that the iPhone 17 could usher in the return of the aluminum frame for both the Pro and baseline models, as we’ve seen with earlier versions like the iPhone 14 lineup. Considering the iPhone 16 Pro and Pro Max’s colors are based on titanium, it raises the question: Will an aluminum frame mean new colors?
The one phone in the iPhone 17 lineup that could have a titanium frame is the rumored slimmer iPhone 17 Air, according to Pu. We’ll have to wait and see what Apple decides.
Read more: When Will You Get Your Hands on the iPhone 17? We’re Tracking the Release Date
A look at past iPhone colors
Here is an iPhone 14 Pro in deep purple.
Andrew Lanxon/CNET
Apple likes to release both new and familiar colors for every new iPhone release.
Usually, we see more color variations for the basic models, and more neutral colors for the Pro and Pro Max iPhone models. For instance:
The iPhone 14 came in six colors: midnight, starlight, red, blue, purple and yellow. However, the iPhone 14 Pro and Pro Max models only came in black, silver, gold and deep purple. The same is true for the 15 model phones, but Apple offered one fewer color for its base model.
iPhone 15 models were available in pink, yellow, green, blue and black, while Pro and Pro Max models arrived in more neutral tones like white, blue, black and natural titanium.
The iPhone 16 Pro and Pro Max colors didn’t change from the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max. However, the other iPhone 16 models were available in ultramarine, teal, pink, white and black.
It is unclear how many new colors we may see from the rumored iPhone 17, but as of now, a sky blue option could well be in your future.
No matter your lifestyle or budget, Samsung offers a range of phones to fit what you’re looking for. The Galaxy S25 and S25 Plus tout solid performance, good cameras and long-lasting batteries. If you want a more versatile camera setup, consider the top-of-the-line Galaxy S25 Ultra. For a novel design, you can opt for Samsung’s pricier foldable phones, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 and Z Fold 7 — or even the super-slim Galaxy S25 Edge. If you’re looking for a more budget-friendly option, Samsung’s $200 Galaxy A15 5G or the Galaxy A26, A36 and A56, which range from $300 to $500, might be a good fit. Check out our roundup to find the phone that best fits your needs.
MOBILE DEALS OF THE WEEK
Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.
What is the best Samsung phone?
The Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra — priced at $1,300 — comes packed with maximum features which, for most people, is more than necessary. For the rest of us, the $800 Galaxy S25 is a standout among its Galaxy counterparts. It has the same Snapdragon customized chip and RAM as the S25 Ultra, runs the same version of Android and costs $500 less.
The Galaxy S25 has a very capable triple rear camera setup that is versatile in capturing both bright outdoor scenes and candid moments inside under mixed lighting. Overall, the Galaxy S25 Ultra is ideal for Android fans who prioritize fast performance, versatile cameras and a spacious, bright screen.
How to pick the right Samsung phone for you
Deciding which Samsung phone is right for you comes down to what you want in a phone and how much you’re willing to spend. If you want the largest screen available on a standard Samsung phone, enjoy note-taking with a stylus and need a camera with a significantly closer zoom, the Galaxy S25 Ultra is the right choice. You’ll also have to spend $1,300 unless you score a trade-in deal.
Those who don’t need the stylus, prefer more compact phone and still want a good camera should consider the Galaxy S25 or Galaxy S25 Plus. If you just want the basics, like a spacious screen, 5G and a decent camera, consider the Galaxy S24 FE. Those looking for the flashiest tech around — and who also have deep pockets — should consider the Galaxy Z Fold 7, Z Flip 7 or even the slightly cheaper Z Fold 7 FE.
Finding the best Samsung phone will ultimately come down to preference. Choosing among so many options can get complicated, so here’s how to decide which Samsung phone is best for you. Refer to our phone buying guide for more tips on how to choose the right device.
Best Samsung phones in 2025
Pros
Best screen on any phone
Versatile cameras
Most powerful phone I’ve tested
Good battery life
Cons
$1,300 price
Design is almost too minimal
AI features are hit-or-miss
S25/S25 Plus have similar features and cost less
Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Ultra which has a lot of AI features, the best of which are interesting and the worst of which unreliable. Luckily, Samsung gets a lot of other things right on the S25 Ultra, which has a new Snapdragon 8 Elite processor, high-resolution ultrawide camera, and some sweet pro video tools that rival the iPhone 16 Pro. Samsung wisely kept all the best parts of last year’s Galaxy S24 Ultra (basically the entire phone including that antireflective display) but some of its worst parts, too, like the $1,300 price tag. If you want the best screen you can find on any phone, get the S25 Ultra. If you want the most versatile phone cameras, get the S25 Ultra. If you want a stylus, get the S25 Ultra. But if your needs scale back on any of those fronts, the more affordable S25 options, or even last year’s S24 Ultra, may be worth considering. Read our full Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra review.
Why we like it
The reason to get the Ultra over its S25 siblings is its screen, which is truly the best I’ve seen on any phone, and the cameras, which are a step above what the S25 and S25 Plus have. Added video features like ability to record in Log format gets the Ultra as close as it’s ever been to the iPhone in terms of professional video capture.
Who it’s best for
If you have a Galaxy S22 Ultra or older, the S25 Ultra will seem like a significant upgrade. It’s harder to make that case for S23 Ultra owners, who, unless their phone’s battery is ailing or they can score an incredible discount, should otherwise sit this one out. And for you S24 Ultra owners, you don’t need this phone. Save your money and treat yourself to a nice steak dinner and a movie.
Who shouldn’t get it
The Galaxy S25 Ultra’s appeal is muddied by its $1,300 price. The regular Galaxy S25 has the same functionality, power and longevity, and it costs $500 less. Want a bigger screen? Consider the Galaxy S25 Plus. For the majority of people, the regular Galaxy S25 and S25 Plus will be a better fit.
Pros
Camera consistently delivers good images
Impressive battery life
More AI features feel practical
Cons
Several gimmicky AI features
Not many changes over the S24
The Galaxy S25’s biggest flex that I noticed while testing is it shares many of the same attributes as its pricier counterparts, the S25 Plus and S25 Ultra – but it does so for several hundred dollars less. You’ll find features like the AI Select tool, Audio Eraser and deeper Gemini integration across all of Samsung’s S25 devices, as well as a custom Snapdragon 8 Elite processor and 12GB RAM – making the smaller phone of the bunch still seem pretty mighty.
And while the Galaxy S25 might look incredibly similar to the S24 and share many of the same specs, consistency isn’t so bad when it means there’s a consistently good camera and great battery life. Read our full Samsung Galaxy S25 review.
Why we like it
Having a baseline phone, like the Galaxy S25, that delivers many of the same perks as more expensive models, is a huge plus in my book. And given the remarkable processing power, standout camera and seamless AI integration in the Galaxy S25 lineup, it’s great that I can get all those premium features for $800.
Who it’s best for
If you’re someone who insists on buying a flagship device, the Galaxy S25 won’t let you down. but if you have a device that’s two years old or more, you might be enticed to tap into all the latest Galaxy AI and integrated Gemini features. Now, $800 isn’t pocket change, and there are definitely other options for those who want to be more budget conscious, but if you’re willing to spend a bit more, the baseline S25 can be a great all-around choice.
Who shouldn’t get it
You probably don’t need to upgrade if you’re using last year’s S24.
Pros
Thin 4.2mm design
200-megapixel main camera
Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
Durable build
Cons
Steep $2,000 price tag
Same 4,400-mAh battery as last year’s Fold
25-watt wired charging
With the Galaxy Z Fold 7, Samsung has finally addressed some of the key issues with its previous book-style foldables. The impressively thin build and wider, 6.5-inch cover screen makes this feel like a standard phone when closed, and that wider 8-inch inside display is great for multitasking, with the ability to run up to three apps simultaneously. Perhaps most notably, the camera gets a major upgrade with the addition of a 200-megapixel main camera, which takes shots on par with the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra.
Altogether, it’s a great choice if you want a bigger, tablet-like display without the bulk or a compromise on camera quality.
Why we like it
The Z Fold 7 does a solid job combining what’s great about standard slate phones and what’s great about foldables. It feels wonderfully normal to hold when closed, thanks to its sleek design and lightweight build. It also packs great cameras and has an expansive main display that’s 11 percent bigger than last year’s Z Fold 6.
Thankfully, a slimmer build doesn’t force the battery to take a hit; the Z Fold 7 maintains that same 4,400-mAh battery as last year’s foldable. That pales in comparison to batteries from Chinese competitors, but at least it’s not a downgrade. The Z Fold 7 also packs a Snapdragon 8 Elite processor to power the many AI features you’ll get onboard, from Galaxy AI photo and audio editing tools to Google’s Gemini Live and Circle to Search. The phone also supports seven years of software and security updates.
Who it’s best for
If you’re bored of standard slate phones and want something that feels a little more exciting, the Galaxy Z Fold 7 is a great choice. The slim design and wider cover screen helps it to feel as normal as possible when closed, with the added perk of an expansive main display that’s great for multitasking and watching videos. The cameras are also impressive for a foldable that’s so thin.
Who shouldn’t get it
The Z Fold 7’s $2,000 price tag is perhaps its biggest caveat. Also, if you don’t need a bigger display, it may not be worth the splurge. Ironically, the cover screen is so practical that you’ll rarely need to open the phone — unless you’re watching movies or multitasking, in which case a phone like the Galaxy S25 Ultra might be a better fit.
Pros
The 6.9-inch screen is immersive, with lovely colors and contrast
The 4.1-inch screen looks incredible
It’s durable and survived a drop onto concrete
One UI 8 (Android 16) runs wonderfully
$1,100 is still a lot, but Samsung gives the phone more value than the Flip 6
Cons
Gets warm when recording videos and playing games
Battery life is the same as the Flip 6 despite a bigger battery
Cover screen software has room to grow
When I first got my hands on Samsung’s new Galaxy Z Flip 7, I was delighted to discover that it has a smaller crease, larger cover screen, thinner design and bigger battery compared to last year’s Galaxy Z Flip 6. But as I tested the new clamshell phone, I became enthralled by its inner screen. At 6.9 inches, this is the biggest screen on any Samsung phone aside from the Galaxy Z Fold 7, which has an 8-inch foldable display.
The Z Flip 7’s large screen size makes content feel more immersive and colors look lovely and vivid. This led to epic TikTok and Instagram sessions, watching widescreen films such as A Working Man and Back to the Future, as well as jumping back and forth between two apps stacked vertically on the screen thanks to One UI 8’s 90:10 split tool.
Every time I open the Flip 7, I’m consistently dumbfounded by how such a large display can unfurl from something about the size of a makeup compact. And when it’s closed, there’s a 4.1-inch cover screen that’s fantastic in its own ways, with new clever animations for when you’re recording a video, charging the phone or taking a selfie, all efficiently using the extra display real estate. In terms of functionality, though, the cover screen’s software is about the same as the 3.4-inch one on the Flip 6.
The Flip 7 impressed me in nearly every way but one: its battery life. It has a larger battery than the Flip 6, but it doesn’t last any longer in daily use. It did consistently get me through a day on a single charge, often having 15 to 20% left, but there were also a few days where it needed an early evening top-off.
Why we like it
The Galaxy Z Flip 7 is the most fully realized version of Samsung’s ideal of a flip phone since the launch of the original Galaxy Z Flip in 2020. The Flip 7’s appeal is simple: It’s a thin phone with a big, bold screen that folds in half into a coaster-sized square. The larger cover screen and inner screen make content more immersive. It’s design is thin (for a clamshell foldable) and comfortable to hold. Plus you get twice the storage this year compared to last.
Who is it best for
If you’ve been tempted by a clamshell-style foldable, you should definitely consider the Flip 7. If you have a Galaxy Z Flip 4 or older, the Flip 7 will be an upgrade in every way. It’s harder to make that same recommendation for Flip 5 owners unless your phone is showing its age. And if you have a Galaxy Z Flip 6, you can sit this one out unless you really want those larger screens.
Who shouldn’t get it
If you spend a ton of time around dirt or sand, this phone isn’t for you.
Pros
Excellent software and security support
25-watt wired charging
Eye-catching Light Blue color option
Cons
Slow performance
Single audio speaker
Mediocre photography
Editor’s Note: Samsung has also released the Galaxy A16.
Samsung’s $200 Galaxy A15 5G is an easy choice for someone looking to buy a phone that will last for years. Samsung provides it with four years of software updates and five years of security support, which in this price range is unparalleled. Plus the phone supports 25W wired charging that in my testing was able to charge half of its big 5,000-mAh battery from empty in 30 minutes. I also like the eye-catching light blue option.
A $200 phone has to have some compromises. The Galaxy A15 5G feels sluggish compared to competing phones like Motorola’s $200 Moto G 5G, and as an entertainment machine falls short with its single audio speaker that is blocked by accident when you hold the phone sideways for games and video. Photography, which is typically a weak point on phones in this price range, is similarly mixed with decent photography in outdoor environments while struggling to photograph lowlight spaces. This makes the Galaxy A15 5G an easy choice for when you just need a phone that can handle the basics, but you may want to consider other options if you are looking for the best pocket YouTube player in this price range.
Pros
Lightning fast charging
Nice big screen
7 years of OS and security upgrades
Great performance with games, movies and animations
Cons
Battery life is a day, similar to baseline S25
Similar specs as the S25 at a higher price
Rival phones at the same price have better cameras
If the baseline Galaxy S25 appeals to you but you’d rather have a bigger screen and higher battery capacity – without upgrading all the way to the Ultra – the S25 Plus may be the phone for you. The entire S25 lineup shares many features, from AI capabilities to processing power to memory, so the Plus may be a viable choice if you’re looking for something right in the middle.
That said, the Plus’ minimal upgrades over the baseline S25 may not justify the $200 price difference. But if a bigger phone just feels better to hold and you’d rather have a 4,900 mAh battery (over the S25’s 4,000mAh one), then that $1,000 starting price might ultimately be worth every penny. Read CNET’s full Samsung Galaxy S25 Plus review.
Why we like it
While the baseline S25 checks all the key boxes, the S25 Plus can simply feel like a more comfortable device to use, especially if you’re a fellow member of the bigger hands club. In addition to sharing many of the same features as the pricier S25 Ultra, the S25 Plus has a higher battery capacity than the baseline model — though in CNET’s tests, there weren’t any major discrepancies in how the two batteries actually performed. Still, sometimes you just want to live a little larger, and this phone can be the perfect fit.
Who it’s best for
If you like having a larger screen to watch movies or play games on, the S25 Plus can be a great choice. While the S25 Ultra might be a top pick for someone who wants both a bigger phone and the most premium features, the S25 Plus can be that goldilocks device that meets you right in the middle — without you having to spend $1,300 on the Ultra.
Who shouldn’t get it
If you want the absolute best in terms of cameras, don’t get the S25 Plus. For $1,000 phones like the Pixel 9 Pro or iPhone 16 Pro have better cameras. Or if you can afford to buy a $1,300 phone, check out the Galaxy S25 Ultra which has an amazing set of lenses
Pros
Lightweight design
200-megapixel main camera
Durable titanium frame and Gorilla Glass front and back
Powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor
12GB of RAM
Cons
Mediocre battery life
Only 25-watt wired charging
Steep price tag
Just two rear cameras
The Galaxy S25 Edge is a unique offering — one that doesn’t necessarily cater to most people’s top priorities like longer battery life and an affordable price tag, and yet it still presents an alluring option with its slim frame and lightweight body. Thankfully, it doesn’t scale back too much in the way of features and capabilities; it’s got a powerful Snapdragon 8 Elite processor and the same 200-megapixel main camera you’ll find on the top-of-the-line S25 Ultra (though there’s no telephoto lens).
The main sacrifice is battery life, as the S25 Edge has a 3,900-mAh battery, the lowest amount across the S25 series. It also only supports 25-watt wired charging. But it still offers enough juice to get you through the day, even if you’re a notoriously heavy phone user. Plus, using something so remarkably feather-light feels like such a breath of fresh air, you may not mind making some compromises. Read our full Galaxy S25 Edge review.
Why we like it
The S25 Edge is surprisingly enjoyable to use and hold, given its lightweight design (it weighs 163 grams) and generous 6.7-inch screen. And despite its thinner frame, it feels surprisingly sturdy, thanks to its Gorilla Glass Ceramic 2 display and Victus 2 backing. That means it doesn’t feel like it’s going to snap in your pocket — and you’ll hardly even feel it in there.
Who it’s best for
If you want a phone that feels light and can slip easily into your pocket, without compromising too much on functionality, the S25 Edge is a great option. Plus, if you’re looking for a fresh form factor but aren’t interested in venturing into foldables territory, this unique phone is a solid — and more familiar-feeling — choice.
Who shouldn’t get it
If you’re looking for something more budget-friendly, the S25 Edge might not appeal to you. Also, if battery life is your top priority, the S25 Edge leaves something to be desired, since it only lasts about 24 hours before needing a recharge.
2,600-nit peak brightness; 7 years of OS and security updates; 5G (mmWave); IP68 water and dust resistance; wireless PowerShare to charge other devices; 25W wired charging (charger not included); Galaxy AI; Wi-Fi 7
2,600-nit peak brightness; 7 years of OS and security updates; 5G (mmWave); IP68 water and dust resistance; wireless PowerShare to charge other devices; 25W wired charging (charger not included); Galaxy AI; Wi-Fi 7; ultrawideband
Titanium frame, 2,600-nit peak brightness; 7 years of OS and security updates; 5G (mmWave); IP68 water and dust resistance; wireless PowerShare to charge other devices; integrated S Pen; UWB for finding other devices; 45W wired charging (charger not included); Galaxy AI; Wi-Fi 7; Gorilla Glass Armor cover glass; ultrawideband
IP88 rating, 5G, One UI 7, 25-watt wired charging, 15-watt wireless charging, Galaxy AI, Gemini, Circle to Search, Wi-Fi 7.
One UI 8, 25W wired charging speed, Qi wireless charging, 2,600-nit peak brightness, Galaxy AI, NFC, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, IP48 water resistance
One UI 8, IP48 water resistance, 25W wired charging, Qi wireless charging, Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, Galaxy AI
US price starts at
$800 (128GB)
$1,000 (256GB)
$1,300 (256GB)
$1,100
$2,000
$1,100
UK price starts at
£799 (128GB)
£999 (256GB)
£1,249 (256GB)
£1,799
£1,049
Australia price starts at
AU$1,399 (256GB)
AU$1,699 (256GB)
AU$2,149 (256GB)
AU$2,899
AU$1,799
In July 2025, we added the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 to our list.
Get more for less with cheap phones: For a fraction of the cost, you can get a solid phone that does almost everything a pricier flagship phone can do. The Galaxy S24 FE packs a good camera and costs only $650 before discounts or trade-in offers.
Test your phone: It’s worth going to a store and trying out a phone before you shell out hundreds of dollars for it.
Find peace of mind with a case: You spent all this time picking a phone, now protect it from damage with a case.
Be ready for Cyber Monday sales: The holidays usually bring big discounts and sales, even on phones.
We test the battery, screen, performance, cameras and more on every phone we review.
Lisa Eadiciccio/CNET
We test every phone in real-world scenarios focusing on its features, design, performance, cameras, battery life and overall value. We document our findings in an initial review that is periodically updated when there are new software updates or to compare against new phones from competitors like Apple, Samsung, Google and OnePlus.
Photography
Photography is a major focus for most phones these days, so we take pictures and videos of various subjects in a variety of settings and lighting levels. We try out any new camera modes such as 4K 120fps slow motion video that debuted with the iPhone 16 Pro and 16 Pro Max or AI reframe and focus on the Motorola Razr Plus (2024).
Lisa Eadiccico/CNET
Battery life
Battery testing is conducted in a variety of ways. We assess how long a phone lasts during a typical day of use, and note how it performs during more focused sessions of video calls, media streaming and gaming. We also conduct a video playback test, which isn’t always included in the initial review and is added later in an update.
Performance
We perform processor-heavy tasks like editing photos, exporting videos and playing games. We evaluate whether a newer version of a particular phone includes enough features to make it worth upgrading from older models.
Jeffrey Hazelwood/CNET
We use benchmarking apps to measure the performance, alongside our own anecdotal experiences using the phone for our review. Of particular note are how graphics and animations look. Are they smooth? Or do they lag or stutter? We also look at how quickly the phone switches between horizontal and vertical orientations and how fast the camera app opens and is ready to take a photo.
Read more: How We Test Phones
The Galaxy S24 FE does a decent job taking photos, but the more expensive Galaxy S24 uses its more powerful processor to enhance them.
Numi Prasarn/CNET
Samsung’s $650 Galaxy S24 FE is such a comfort to use that at moments our reviewer, Mike Sorrentino, felt like he was testing a scaled-back version of the $1,000 Galaxy S24 Plus. The S24 FE’s large 6.7-inch 120Hz refresh-rate display made it easy for me to enjoy streaming shows, playing games and taking video calls throughout the day. And it includes nearly every software perk from the more expensive Galaxy S24 line. Read our full review of the Samsung Galaxy S24 FE.
Why buy a Samsung phone instead of other Android phones?
The right phone for you depends on a variety of factors, such as your budget, your current phone and whether you own other mobile accessories from the same company, such as earbuds or smartwatches. Many people prefer to stick with phones from the same company because the experience is more consistent and there’s less of a learning curve when switching to a new device.
The same holds true for Samsung; the company’s One UI software (its customized version of Android) can be found across its phone lineup. Samsung’s One UI 6 introduced a more customizable lock screen and the ability to answer a phone call through a text message instead of speaking.
Consistency aside, there are some benefits to choosing a Samsung phone over devices from other Android phone makers. Samsung usually excels when it comes to display quality and brightness, and it typically offers a lot of choices in terms of size and pricing. Samsung phones usually offer decent battery life — especially midsize and large phones — and the cameras are usually among the best, especially on the Galaxy S25 lineup. Samsung also offers seven years of Android version updates for most of its new smartphones, which is longer support than even Google provides for its Pixel phones.
Google’s Pixel devices also have stellar cameras along with specific software features you can’t get elsewhere. The OnePlus 13 is also cheaper than the Galaxy S24 Plus and Galaxy S24 Ultra at regular prices without a trade-in and offers faster charging speeds. It could be a better choice for those who want to pay a little less but still want a giant 6.82-inch screen and triple rear camera.
Which Samsung phone series is best, Galaxy A, S or Z?
Samsung’s Galaxy A and S families serve different purposes, so which one is right for you will depend on your needs and budget. The Galaxy A lineup is Samsung’s mid-tier and budget line, and it’s the best choice if you’re looking for a phone under $500 without a trade-in deal. These phones typically offer core features like a big screen, large battery and multiple cameras at a cheaper price.
You also get what you pay for; Samsung’s cheapest phones have very limited storage space and poorer cameras compared with the pricier models, and they sometimes struggle with juggling multiple tasks. More expensive phones like the Galaxy A35 5G provide almost everything most people want in a basic phone, although you’ll still have to compromise a bit on camera quality and general performance.
The Galaxy S series, on the other hand, is Samsung’s flagship smartphone line. Galaxy S phones usually include the best tech that Samsung has to offer and features you’d expect on any high-end phone, such as a premium design, 5G support, screens with high refresh rates and multiple high-end cameras. The biggest updates that launched with the Galaxy S25 lineup, for example, included the bump to a 200-megapixel main camera on the Ultra and bigger batteries for the smaller models. You’ll have to be willing to pay hundreds of dollars more than you would for a Galaxy A series phone in most cases.
Looking for the most recent Wordle answer? Click here for today’s Wordle hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Wordle puzzle is a fun word, but the letters might be tough to guess. If you need a new starter word, check out our list of which letters show up the most in English words. If you need hints and the answer, read on.
Today’s Wordle hints
Before we show you today’s Wordle answer, we’ll give you some hints. If you don’t want a spoiler, look away now.
Wordle hint No. 1: Repeats
Today’s Wordle answer has no repeated letters.
Wordle hint No. 2: Vowels
Today’s Wordle answer has one vowel and one “sometimes” vowel.
Wordle hint No. 3: Start letter
Today’s Wordle answer begins with R.
Wordle hint No. 4: Wrestling
Today’s Wordle answer was the nickname of a late Canadian professional wrestler and actor.
Wordle hint No. 5: Second meaning
Today’s Wordle answer can also refer to being noisy or disorderly.
TODAY’S WORDLE ANSWER
Today’s Wordle answer is ROWDY.
Yesterday’s Wordle answer
Yesterday’s Wordle answer, Aug. 18, No. 1521, was ISSUE.
My home office used to be the master bedroom, and it’s the most difficult room in my apartment to cool off in the summer. During a heatwave, it feels like the roof barely blocks the sun at all.
The space is too large for a single AC vent to handle, and there’s almost always a fan running near my desk. Even then, the temperature hovers around 85 degrees, which isn’t exactly ideal for working.
One trick finally made a difference. I left the windows open overnight to pull in cooler air, then closed them in the morning. The result? The room stayed far more comfortable, and I didn’t have to make the AC struggle against rising temps all day. It was a simple change, but it worked better than I expected.
Reddit has been flooded with threads from cost-conscious consumers who are trying to find ways to save on energy — and cutting back on AC usage goes a long way.
Let’s explore how cross ventilation works and some ways you can use it to cut your cooling bill.
Cross ventilation can cool your home and save energy
The goal of using cross ventilation is to reduce indoor temperatures during the night and maintain cool temperatures as long as possible during the day.
John Carlsen/CNET
Cross ventilation works because the wind creates a pressure differential outside your home. The upwind side of your home experiences high-pressure airflow, while the downwind side creates a low-pressure zone. The pressure differences exist whether or not your windows are open, so you might as well harness them.
By opening your windows, the high-pressure air has a more direct path to the low-pressure zone — it’s easier to flow through a home than around it. It’s a great way to bypass your home’s insulation, which prevents thermal energy from entering and exiting your home. Once your home is cool enough, closing the windows and curtains ensures the indoor air will warm more slowly.
If you want to use natural ventilation for cooling, the outside air must be colder than the indoor air.
For example, I close my windows and rely on my AC after the outdoor temperature tops 75ºF. This is usually when my thermostat kicks in — around 72ºF in my basement. I keep the windows closed during hot weather — unless the nighttime temperature drops below 70ºF before I head to bed.
Cross ventilation and air conditioning can coexist
Here’s a comparison of my bedroom’s indoor temperature differences in mild (cross-ventilation with some AC) and hot weather (AC only).
John Carlsen/CNET
If you’re using an air conditioner or heat pump, you’ll see the best energy efficiency when every window is closed during operation. This is because open windows and doors create a huge hole in the building envelope, which separates indoor and outdoor air.
Limiting the amount of air the AC unit must condition means it won’t work as hard as when inside air constantly exchanges with outside air. In mild weather, free cooling is effective enough to offset the solar heating that plagues my home when temps go up.
You have to remember to close the windows daily, but the extra effort is generally worth it. Before I started regularly using cross ventilation as a remote worker, my AC would run at least twice as much. I’ve seen substantial savings these past few years.
Effective natural ventilation depends on many factors
In dry regions like Utah, it’s possible to flush out hot air during cool nights.
John Carlsen/CNET
According to the Department of Energy’s Energy Saver office, the best candidates for natural ventilation are coastal and arid climates. On the coast, you can harness cool sea breezes to help make your home more comfortable.
These regions are the most likely to experience huge nighttime temperature drops, but you can also use wind ventilation in other places. It probably won’t be as effective, especially if your local climate is humid, but it’s still a good option for bringing in fresh air.
However, the effectiveness of cross ventilation as a cooling method diminishes as the outside temperature rises. Keeping the windows open all day may eventually allow hot air to enter your home and strain your AC.
Likewise, poor air quality days aren’t great for open windows, so it’s worth setting up an alert if you live somewhere susceptible to air pollution.
I usually keep a cheap filter on my window fan to help with allergens, but it’s not ideal for cleaning airborne contaminants like car exhaust and wildfire smoke.
John Carlsen/CNET
It’s not always easy to create a cross breeze. Passive ventilation works best where the wind blows directly into a window and through the house in a straight line.
Opening the windows won’t cut it in a home where the air currents must navigate complex hallways and rooms to find an exit. Every obstacle causes turbulence, so the cold air may pick up a lot of heat as it tries to flow into an adjacent living space.
For example, my home’s best windows for a cross breeze are on the upper level, which is more difficult to cool than the relatively stable basement. This often means a temperature difference of at least 10 degrees in the summer — a comfortable 72 degrees downstairs and a balmy 85 degrees upstairs.
Unfortunately, the airflow needs to move around several walls to connect them. Without my window fans, there’s a swirling turbulence in the hallway instead of a pleasant breeze through my office.
Make your own breeze with a window fan
Window fans and ventilation systems are good alternatives if your home isn’t particularly suitable for natural cross-ventilation.
John Carlsen/CNET
Using a window fan to create cross ventilation is straightforward. The simplest method is exhaust ventilation, which uses a single fan that pushes air outdoors on the opposite side of the house from where you want the air to come in. This creates a negative pressure zone that pulls air through your home and out through the fan.
This method is effective, but it may not move air fast enough for a strong breeze, especially in large homes. Low air movement also means potential cooling effects can disappear into turbulence before reaching the out-blowing fan.
We can mostly overcome this by adding a second, in-blowing fan in the other window in a process called balanced ventilation. The in-blowing fan creates a high-pressure zone that more smoothly flows into the existing low-pressure zone.
Although I use a pair of Lasko box fans from Walmart, you can also buy purpose-built window fans, like this model from Bionaire, with reversible airflow, thermostats and extender screens for sealing windows.
Using smart home tech to control window fans
I use a two-fan setup with smart plugs and sensors on my Samsung SmartThings smart hub.
John Carlsen/CNET
Let’s run through the basics of my window fan ventilation setup:
Box fan 1 brings air in through the bedroom window.
Box fan 2 pulls air through the hall and into the office before blowing it outside.
Each fan connects to a smart plug for easy control. I group them using a virtual switch so they run in unison.
A Sonoff temperature sensor in the bedroom triggers the fans to run as long as the indoor temperature is warmer than outside. It also keeps the room from getting too cold.
I use a temperature deadband and a time delay to keep the fans from constantly power cycling near the target temperatures.
A window sensor in the bedroom prevents accidental activation when the window is closed while also triggering the automation when I open a window.
I don’t have a smart thermostat, but you could incorporate one into these routines to keep the AC off while the ventilation process is active.
Ventilation is the most complex automation running on my SmartThings system, comprising five separate “Automatic routines.”
Screenshots by John Carlsen/CNET
For this to work, you need a smart home hub capable of using temperature as an automation trigger. Your best bet is something like Home Assistant, SmartThings or Ezlo, but I couldn’t find this option on Alexa or Google Home with my current smart home devices. I can’t access Apple Home, so I can’t verify how it uses temperature in smart home routines.
Although window fans work well in my situation, you probably don’t need them if your home already handles cross breezes like a pro. Still, you can use smart home sensors to notify you when it’s time to close the windows and blinds for the day.
Fresh air ventilators
Window fans are probably best for renters and people on a budget, but you can also outfit your home with a fresh air ventilator accessory for your HVAC system. Provided you have a compatible system, Ecobee smart thermostats support cross ventilation through their Free Cooling feature. You can also get similar functionality from whole-house ventilation products like AprilAire.
I have no experience with whole-house ventilation systems, so I recommend contacting a local HVAC installer if you want to add one to your home.
Cross ventilation FAQs
How can a smart thermostat help me with cross ventilation?
Newer smart thermostat models, such as the new Nest Learning Thermostat, have temperature sensors that will help you manage your cross-ventilation setup. They might also offer features such as air quality detection, which allows you to know if you should be shutting any windows around the house.
Look for views that match the unique needs of your space and where you plan on placing the camera. Most high-quality indoor cameras have around a 130-degree field of view — and some of our picks go beyond that — but you don’t need to break out a protractor. That’s plenty of coverage to get a great view of a room when placed in a corner or centered against a far wall. For the best coverage or to cover multiple angles from a central location, you’ll want a PTZ camera instead.
Pricing
One advantage of smart indoor cameras is that they’re significantly less expensive than hardy outdoor versions while still offering many of the same features. If you want to save money, take a look at picks from well-known brands for $30 and below. We have a few examples on our list. Generally, don’t pay more than $100 for an indoor cam unless you’re getting a lot of extra benefits and features for it.
Night vision
Indoor security cams are less likely to have their own lights or other sources of illumination nearby save dim nightlights. If you really want an eye inside your home at night when lights are off, excellent night vision is necessary. Look for multiple infrared LEDs if you can find them, with color night if it’s available.
Motion detection
Motion detection turns on the camera only when it detects movement, especially movement by humans, so it’s a necessary feature to save on video storage and battery life. Detection pairs well with alerts for your phone while away from home but you’ll want smart alerts that can recognize people or specific situations like alarms, pets barking, etc.
Smart home compatibility
Indoor cameras work particularly well with voice commands like, “Turn off camera,” or “Show me living room camera view.” Good cams work with Google Home, Google Assistant and Alexa, but they’re harder to find, and Apple Home models are even tougher to locate.
Matter (the smart home standard) compatibility is also important, and you can read more about that in our guides, but it doesn’t apply to security cams because the protocol hasn’t expanded to video footage yet. Wait for a future update for this part. If you do already have a home security system from a brand like Abode, ADT or Frontpoint, you should look for an indoor cam that’s compatible with that app or control panel.
The Blink Mini’s small design requires a certain amount of care when installing.
CNET/Tyler Lacoma
Two-way audio and more features
Depending on your security needs, you may want to look for features like two-way audio to hold conversations with a nanny or housekeeper (or to say hi to a pet). Others like features such as intelligent tracking, lots of zoom options and a built-in siren. We won’t say these are always necessary but if you find them valuable then our picks above include extras like these.
Video storage
Video storage is somewhat more useful outside the home where catching porch pirates, potential burglars and funny animal videos is important. Many people also want video recording inside their homes, especially if they’re worried about break-ins or general malfeasance (or once again, capturing cute pet videos).
Cloud storage backs videos up automatically into a cloud service, and with rare exceptions like Google Nest, you’ll need to pay a subscription fee for the ability. Local storage uploads videos to a hub or a microSD card (usually separate purchases), and you may have to connect them to a computer for additional management when they get full but ongoing fees aren’t required.
Privacy and security
Watch for brands that have good privacy records or brands that take necessary steps to secure their networks and remove vulnerabilities immediately. You don’t want a data breach putting your privacy at risk, or worse bugs like the video caching issue that let Wyze users accidentally see out of other people’s cameras. We’ll work to keep you updated on the latest privacy issues and what you should know when purchasing security devices like these.
Watch every Premier League match live in Australia from AU$32 a month
Stan Sport
Two sides that enjoyed top ten finishes last season go head-to-head on Sunday as Nottingham Forest host Brentford on Sunday.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services for watching Premier League games as they happen, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if it’s not available where you are.
Forest were last season’s surprise package, booking a long-overdue return to European football by finishing in seventh.
While Nuno Espirito Santo’s team has lost key forward Anthony Elanga to Newcastle, the Tricky Trees have managed to retain the services of key midfielder Morgan Gibbs-White, despite concrete interest from Spurs. New recruits Igor Jesus, Dan Ndoye, Omari Hutchinson and James McAtee should meanwhile bolster what already looks like one of the stronger squads outside of the established “big four”.
Sunday’s game meanwhile sees Keith Andrews’ first competitive game in charge of Brentford, with the former Blackburn Rovers midfielder taking charge following Thomas Frank’s departed for London rivals Spurs.
With club captain Christian Nørgaard and key forward Bryan Mbeumo having also left the club in the summer, and Yoane Wissa looking set to join them out the exit door amid interest from Newcastle, Andrews appears to have a tough task ahead in matching last season’s top-half finish.
Nottingham Forest takes on Brentford on Sunday, Aug. 17, at the City Ground, with kickoff set for 2p.m. BST. That makes it a 9 a.m. ET or 6 a.m. PT start in the US and Canada, and an 11 p.m. AEST kickoff in Australia.
Igor Jesus has impressed in preseason for Nottingham Forest following his $13million summer move from Brazilian club Botafogo.
Ritchie Sumpter/Nottingham Forest FC via Getty Images
How to watch Nottingham Forest vs. Brentford in the US without cable
This match at the City Ground will be broadcast on NBC and streaming service Peacock. To stream the game live, you’ll need a Peacock Premium or Premium Plus account.
Peacock offers two Premium plans, and after recent price increases, the ad-supported Premium plan costs $11 a month, and the ad-free Premium Plus plan costs $17 a month.
How to watch the English Premier League 2025-26 season from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the EPL action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds, and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN use to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $100 for the first 15 months (then $117 per year) or $140 for the first 28 months (then $150 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN, and it works on a variety of devices. It’s normally $13 a month but if you sign up for an annual subscription for $100 you’ll get three months free and save 49%. That’s the equivalent of $6.67 a month.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
61% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months)
Livestream Nottingham Forest vs. Brentford in the UK
This opening weekend clash at the City Ground is exclusive to Sky Sports and will be shown on its Sky Sports Plus service. If you already have Sky Sports as part of your TV package, you can stream the game via its Sky Go app. Cord-cutters will want to set up a Now account and a Now Sports membership to stream the game.
Now TV
Sky’s standalone streaming service Now offers access to Sky Sports channels with a Now Sports membership. You can get a day of access for £15 or sign up to a monthly plan from £35 a month right now.
Livestream Nottingham Forest vs. Brentford in Canada
If you want to livestream EPL games in Canada this season, you’ll need to subscribe to Fubo. The service has exclusive rights to the Premier League once again and will be broadcasting all 380 matches live.
Fubo
Fubo is the go-to destination for Canadians looking to watch the EPL, with exclusive streaming rights to every match. It currently costs CA$27 for the first month, then CA$31.50 a month from then on.
Livestream Nottingham Forest vs. Brentford in Australia
Livestreaming rights for the EPL are now with Stan Sport, which will be showing all 380 fixtures live, including this match.
Stan
Stan Sport will set you back AU$20 a month (on top of a Stan subscription, which starts at AU$12). It’s also worth noting that the streaming service is currently offering a seven-day free trial.
A subscription will also give you access to Premier League, Champions League and Europa League action, as well as international rugby and Formula E.
Quick tips for streaming the Premier League using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming EPL matches may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log in to your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
The unfortunate reality of owning a refrigerator with an ice maker is that it can fail, which is not ideal during warmer weather. On the bright side, ice makers are also relatively simple machines that, for the most part, all operate the same way. Whether you need that iced coffee hit in the morning or are hosting a cookout at night, you may be able to diagnose and repair a faulty ice maker yourself without forking over cash for an expensive service call.
It can take a lot of trial and error to find the right fix for your ice maker, as a recent Reddit thread illustrates. Here’s how to fix some common ice maker problems.
When ice is not ejecting
If you find ice inside the ice mold, it means your ice maker is receiving water and the problem likely isn’t with the water supply. Instead, it’s most likely a mechanical or electrical problem.
Cause: When moving things around in the freezer, it’s not uncommon to accidentally nudge the control arm into the off position, which halts production of ice.
Fix: This is an easy fix. Locate the metal control arm and move it to the down or on position.
Cause: If the control arm is in the on (down) position and the mold is filled with ice, the problem likely lies with the motor, gearbox or electrical connection.
Fix: Start by making sure all electrical connections are properly seated. Slide the refrigerator out from the wall, turn off the water supply valve and disconnect it from power. Locate the quick release plug on the back wall inside the freezer. Unplug the connection and reconnect it to ensure it’s fully connected.
Manually remove any remaining ice from the mold by adding some water and letting it sit for a minute. The ice will begin to melt and should be easier to remove.
Restore power to the refrigerator and lift the control arm to the off position. Lower the control arm back down and wait for approximately 10 seconds for the solenoid to engage and fill the mold with water.
Wait three to four hours for the ice to freeze and see if the ice now ejects. If not, it’s likely that you will need to replace the motor or gearbox.
When it’s not making ice at all
If your ice maker isn’t producing ice at all or is producing crescents or cubes that are smaller than usual, it’s typically indicative of a clog somewhere along the supply line.
Cause: A common cause for a clog is frozen water in the line.
Fix: To repair a frozen line, slide the refrigerator and unplug it. Locate the shut-off valve, typically underneath the sink or behind the refrigerator. Turn the valve to the closed or off position. Fill a turkey baster with warm water and pour the water over the water line. Alternatively, you can defrost the water line with a hair dryer or by letting the refrigerator sit unplugged for upward of two hours.
Restore power to the refrigerator and listen for the water supply to fill the ice mold.
If the clog is anything but translucent, consult with a professional for help removing the clog.
Cause: There is also a possibility that the water filter for the ice maker is clogged.
Fix: Locate and replace the water filter. Filters for ice makers are typically located inside the refrigerator (to keep them from freezing).
When cubes are too big or small
Cause: If the ice crescents are too big or there is no clog and they’re still too small, chances are, the ice maker just needs a little adjustment.
Fix: To adjust how much water the ice mold is filled with each cycle, first remove the cover from the ice maker. It’s the white plate on the frontmost part of the ice maker assembly and it should pull off rather easily. If you’re having difficulty removing it, use a flat head screwdriver to gently pry it away from the housing.
Under the cover, you should see a screw and spring assembly, along with a plus and minus indicator. This controls the dosing for water. Screw in (toward the minus symbol) to decrease the amount of water per dose and out (toward the plus) to increase the amount of water per dose.
Nobody likes dealing with slow internet. It makes streaming frustrating, gaming with friends nearly impossible, and those Zoom meetings you can’t skip even harder to get through. If you’ve already run a speed test to check your upload and download numbers, the next step is to try a few quick fixes that might solve the problem.
Sometimes the issue isn’t your router or your devices. Your internet service provider can intentionally slow down your connection. While throttling is technically against the rules, it still happens.
If you suspect your ISP is limiting your speed, one of the easiest solutions is to use a reliable VPN. But before you sign up, it helps to understand what internet throttling looks like and how to spot the signs that it’s happening to you.
How can you tell if your ISP is actually throttling your speeds?
Before we discuss internet throttling and how to stop it, review this checklist of other factors that may be contributing to your slow speeds.
Start with these quick fixes:
If that doesn’t work, consider:
If your equipment is already in top shape and your Wi-Fi setup is optimized, the next best solution may be upgrading to a faster speed tier, depending on how many heavy internet users are in the house. But if you’ve already run down the list of solutions and nothing is working, then the issue might be something your internet service provider is intentionally doing: bandwidth throttling.
Wait, isn’t internet throttling illegal?
While technically considered an illegal practice, your ISP can still find ways to throttle your internet connection.
The FCC’s ruling on net neutrality was thrown out in the 6th Circuit Court of Appeals, along with other rules about regulating the internet as a utility. That means, in some states, the practice might still technically be illegal. That said, ISPs can still get around that legal ruling pretty easily. For instance, throttling is technically still allowed if your internet plan has a data cap or your ISP’s network is overloaded. Additionally, if your ISP gives notice about slowing your internet speeds, it can legally do so.
A proven way to avoid internet throttling is to use a virtual private network. Providers need to see your IP address to slow down your internet and a good VPN shields that identity. This comes with some limitations and downsides, which we’ll discuss below.
Viva Tung, CNET / Getty Images
Troubleshoot your slow internet connection
So your Wi-Fi is slow, and you think your service provider is throttling your connection.
Let’s troubleshoot your internet connection first to absolutely rule out other possibilities: Restart your router properly, check that the router is centrally located in your home, reposition its antennas and double-check your network security. If your laggy internet is caused by your router being too weak to reach a particular room, you can spend as little as $15 on a Wi-Fi extender or invest in a high-functioning mesh network, which we recommend if you’re trying to optimize coverage to the whole house. If you can get past the steep price tag, you may also invest in a good quality network switch to increase the bandwidth in your home.
If you’ve run through the laundry list and your Wi-Fi is still chugging slowly, move on to the next step.
Screenshot/Ookla
Once you’ve ruled out any simple explanations for your Wi-Fi troubles, it’s time to get a more in-depth measurement of your internet’s health. There are several ways to do so.
By starting with a simple internet speed test through M-Lab or Ookla, you can check your connection and gauge whether your ISP provides consistent performance, no matter the content you’re accessing. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis)
This measurement isn’t perfect, but it’s a good starting place.
Make sure you run the speed test at different hours of the day — that’s a good way to gauge if your speeds are seriously affected during peak internet usage hours.
Additionally, try testing your internet connection while connected with an Ethernet cable. An Ethernet connection is almost always faster than Wi-Fi, so if your speeds are still pretty slow with an Ethernet connection, move on to the next step.
How fast is your internet connection? Here’s an easy way to find out.
Getty Images/Viva Tung/CNET
If you’ve researched your internet health and are still stumped, the next step is to start researching VPNs. CNET’s top pick for the best VPN on the market is ExpressVPN due to its excellent privacy transparency, usability and consistently fast speeds.
If your internet provider is actually throttling your internet speeds, a VPN is one of the only ways to get around it. While your ISP can still throttle VPN traffic, the VPN will encrypt that traffic using different protocols. You may have to try out different VPNs to find one that works effectively.
There are many reasons to get a VPN and just as many factors to consider when settling for one, like security, price and server locations. Keep in mind that using a VPN will still slightly slow your speeds, but you may experience less congestion and slowdown overall while using one.
Compare your speed with the VPN
Next, test your internet speed again using a service like Fast.com or Speedtest.net.
Compare the results with the same test when your VPN is active.
Using any VPN will slow your speed considerably, so the speed tests should show a discrepancy, with the VPN-active speed being notably slower than the VPN-inactive speed.
But a VPN also hides the IP address that providers use to identify you so if your speed test with the VPN is faster than without the VPN, that may mean your ISP is targeting your IP address for throttling.
OK, this is the hard part because knowing where to start could be tricky. Even if you find out your provider is throttling your internet, there may not be much you can do. Many people in the US live in regions with ISP monopolies or duopolies, making finding a better provider difficult. But here are a few hopefully useful suggestions:
If you do have options, consider switching to a better provider in your area. Not only will you potentially put speed throttling to rest but you may end up with faster speeds and a better deal. Check out our top picks for ISPs and high-speed ISPs in 2025.
Use your VPN to maintain more consistent speeds. A VPN can’t solve a bad connection or other reasons behind your slow service but it can mitigate throttling from unscrupulous ISPs.
Call your provider and threaten to switch providers if they don’t stop throttling your internet. This might seem old-fashioned and doesn’t guarantee lasting results but some providers have responded positively to such tactics and you may be able to negotiate your way out of the throttling.
What’s the bottom line on internet throttling?
It’s never a complete guarantee that your ISP won’t throttle your speeds down the line. If you’ve exhausted all the ways to improve your speeds and are still not noticing a significant change, we recommend switching to a different ISP available in your area. To learn more, check out our guide on the best internet providers near you.
Bandwidth throttling FAQs
What is bandwidth throttling and is it legal?
If you’re noticing a long buffering time when trying to stream your favorite television show, you might be experiencing bandwidth throttling.
This happens when your ISP purposely slows down your internet speeds by controlling your bandwidth.
The FCC’s ruling on net neutrality was thrown out in the 6th Circuit Court of Appeals recently, along with other rules about regulating the internet as a utility. That means that although in some states, the practice might still technically be illegal, it is legal in other states. Plus, ISPs can easily get around that legal ruling. For instance, throttling is technically still allowed if your internet plan has a data cap or your ISP’s network is overloaded. Additionally, if your ISP gives prior notice about slowing your internet speeds, they can legally do so.
Why do ISPs throttle bandwidth?
There’s no exact answer to why ISPs limit some people’s connections and not others.
If a network is congested and you’re using a lot of internet bandwidth, your provider might slow down your service to encourage you to pay for more data.
Or, if you have a data cap and notice a laggy connection, your ISP might be limiting your service when you’re near the end of the cap. DSL, cable and fixed wireless connections are more susceptible to network congestion. If available, we recommend going with a fiber connection. Read our top picks for the best fiber internet providers of 2025. In addition, check out our list of the best providers with no data caps.
How can I check if my ISP is throttling my bandwidth?
If you’ve checked your internet speed through an Ethernet connection and your results haven’t improved, you might want to check if your provider is to blame.
A simple connection speed test, like the one through Ookla or M-Lab, can show if your ISP is providing consistent performance no matter the content you’re accessing.
How do I stop my ISP from throttling my bandwidth?
A VPN, or virtual private network, is a good solution to help combat internet throttling.
Since VPNs can hide your identity, your provider can’t use your IP address to slow down your connection, helping you maintain more constant speeds.
Besides using a VPN, consider switching to a new provider for faster speeds and, possibly, a better deal. Read CNET’s top picks for the best VPNs of 2025.
As Battlefield 6’s record-breaking open beta rages on, Call of Duty: Black Ops 6 developer Treyarch is showing some love to loyal Black Ops 6 players. The second double XP weekend of the multiplayer shooter’s season 5 is live now, with all four boosts active for players to take advantage of. You’ll be able to speed through account levels, weapon attachment unlocks and battle pass tiers to kickstart your advancement of the latest season 5 content. This double XP weekend runs from Friday to Monday, Aug. 18.
Anyone playing Black Ops 6 during the event period has a universal double account XP, weapon XP, battle pass XP and GobbleGum earn rate applied to their account. If you log in now, you can hop into battle and reap the rewards of this double XP weekend right away, including the PML 5.56 light machine gun and the ABR A1 assault rifle.
This is the first Quad Feed double XP weekend in a while, which means players will be able to benefit from all four customary double XP weekend boosts at the same time. That means your double XP tokens will be locked for the duration of the event.
Here’s everything you need to know about this double XP weekend. If you’re looking for something else to play, see our recommendations for the best game subscription services.
When does the double XP weekend start in Call of Duty: Black Ops 6?
During the event, players will benefit from double player and weapon XP.
Activision
It’s live. This double XP weekend kicked off Friday at 1 p.m. ET.
Not sure when the double XP weekend went live for you? Here’s when the event started in your time zone:
ET: Aug. 15 at 1 p.m.
CT: Aug. 15 at noon.
MT: Aug. 15 at 11 a.m.
PT: Aug. 15 at 10 a.m.
It’s always worth starting your game ahead of your gaming session if possible. As with every Black Ops 6 patch, the update is going to require you to download new content and restart the application.
When does the double XP weekend end in Call of Duty: Black Ops 6?
Some double XP “weekends” are much longer events, lasting five to seven days. That isn’t the case this time around. This double XP weekend will end on Monday. Your double XP tokens will once again unlock after this time.
Here’s when the double XP weekend will end in your time zone:
ET: Aug. 18 at 1 p.m.
CT: Aug. 18 at noon.
MT: Aug. 18 at 11 a.m.
PT: Aug. 18 at 10 a.m.
Does Call of Duty Warzone have double XP this weekend?
Warzone players will also be able to earn double player XP and double weapon XP during the event.
Activision
Call of Duty Warzone has a double XP weekend running in tandem with Black Ops 6. That means Warzone players will also be able to benefit from this boost by leveling up their account, weapons and battle passes at twice the normal speed.
New players have a chance to level up the weapons they unlock from the new and improved Warzone Armory and returning players can continue unlocking new attachments for the suite of Black Ops 6 weaponry added to Warzone.
Black Ops 6 double XP FAQ
Is there double battle pass XP this weekend?
Yes, there is double battle pass XP this weekend. This double XP weekend is one of the rare Quad Feed weekends, where all four double XP boosts are universally applied to active Black Ops 6 accounts at the same time.
What happens to double XP tokens during double XP weekend?
You can’t use your double XP tokens during double XP weekend. They are locked for the duration of the event and any double XP time you have left on your account is frozen until the double XP weekend ends. CNET has a full guide on Black Ops 6 double XP tokens.
I’ve been making grilled cheese for years, but the air fryer completely changed the game for me. What I used to cook on the stove is now quicker, crispier, and far less greasy. I’ve moved far beyond the confines of a hot skillet now, and it’s time you do the same.
Best Air Fryer Toaster Ovens for 2025Not only does the bread comes out golden and crunchy, but the cheese melts into that perfect gooey center. In fact, I hardly need any butter at all. Plus, the kitchen stays cool since there’s no hot pan on the stove.
If you haven’t tried grilled cheese in an air fryer yet, it’s more than worth it. The results are hard to beat, and it might just become your new go-to method.
If you don’t own an air fryer, I recommend Ninja’s glass-bowl model. It’s the best we’ve tested and makes a mean grilled cheese. Making an air fryer grilled cheese is fast and easy and leaves almost no mess. Here’s why your next grilled cheese should start and end in the air fryer.
Why an air fryer grilled cheese works so well
As you can plainly see, the air fryer grilled cheese leaves little mess to contend with after preparing.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
An air fryer is basically a small convection oven with nonstick surfaces, circulating hot air around whatever you put in its basket. Unlike your saute pan or skillet, it cooks from all directions at once and typically in less time. Unlike your oven, it is compact and efficient, heats up quickly and may not even require preheating.
Your toaster oven could never do this. While toasted cheese is a possibility (and reheated toaster oven pizza is a revelation), grilled cheese is not. Your toaster oven is not designed to support fat on the underside of whatever you’re cooking and you’ll end up with a mess too complicated to clean.
For your grilled cheese, the air fryer is working on both of the bread surfaces and the cheese all at once, resulting in a quicker melt, which adheres the cheese to the bread slices together making for a much easier flip. (Flipping is still recommended but with far less drama.)
The air circulation provides deep crunchiness, not only to the surfaces that received the butter or mayo treatment but to the entire crust. Any inclusions beyond cheese in the interior of the sandwich are also transforming because of the ambient heat. Simply placing a lid on your saute pan or skillet can’t achieve the same results, as the components will become steamed and potentially soggy.
How I make a grilled cheese in the air fryer
Humble ingredients are transformed into something great inside an air fryer.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Assemble a grilled cheese as you would otherwise
Sliced bread
Sliced or shredded cheese (I like American cheese for a basic grilled cheese and a combo of gruyere and cheddar for an upgrade.)
Butter or mayonnaise for the outside of the bread slices (dealer’s choice)
For a basic grilled cheese, you can assemble the sandwich in the basket of your air fryer: bread with buttered side down, followed by sliced or shredded cheese, then topped with the final slice with buttered side up.
Be it a simple sandwich or a fancier combination of cheese, bread and fixings, the air fryer makes a crispy, gooey grilled cheese in minutes.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Set the heat to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and cook for 3 to 6 minutes on each side, flipping halfway through. The already melted cheese will keep your sandwich nicely together during the flip. You can get a lightly golden grilled cheese in less time but I recommend hanging on for 5 to 6 minutes for a deeply crunchy sandwich.
Another perk of the air fryer is that you can more easily peek to see where you are without adversely affecting the outcome.
The air fryer is even better for a stacked grilled cheese
Add a fruit element and cured meats for a fancier air fryer sammy.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
This is where the air fryer really shines in the grilled cheese realm. Every element of an upgraded grilled cheese adds a degree of difficulty when trying to cook in a skillet, much of which is mitigated in the safe confines of an air fryer. Thicker bread. Thicker cheese, like hunks of camembert or brie.
And think of all the great grilled cheese ingredients that can be slippery: apple slices, roasted red peppers, tomatoes, pickles, etc. Any grilled cheese with more than two components can be challenging to flip gracefully in a skillet, even for trained cooks.
Bag a loaf of good bread and stuff your sandwich with upmarket cheese.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
To prove a point, I assembled a fancy grilled cheese with camembert, prosciutto and apple slices. (Plus mayonnaise on the exterior, because I was being fancy, and mayo gives your sandwich a little extra tang.) Because of its height, I assembled it fully outside of the air fryer and then carefully placed it in the drawer.
Et voila!
Pamela Vachon/CNET
After 6 minutes of air fryer cooking, the flip was seamless and the sophisticated outcome belies the fact that you spent all of one minute assembling the masterpiece. The exterior of the ham even got a little bonus crisping. So the air fryer invites you to go to town with whatever you can dream up for your grilled cheese: cured or cooked ground meats, grilled veggies, various sauces and relishes — you name it. An epic grilled cheese variation is limited only by the confines of your imagination.
Do I need to preheat an air fryer for grilled cheese?
A grilled cheese is a quick-cooking sandwich no matter how you do it so you don’t want to add on minutes of additional time for something that only takes minutes to accomplish. That said, while preheating your air fryer may be a waste of time for certain preparations, I think putting it on for just a minute to heat up the nonstick surface that the sandwich sits on is worthwhile to get that golden crust working right away.
Are there drawbacks to making air fryer grilled cheese?
Depending on your model and size of air fryer, and the shape of bread you choose, it can be tricky to make more than two sandwiches at once, so it might not be the most family-friendly method for making grilled cheese. But for a solo meal or date night, your air fryer is the grilled cheese hack you didn’t know you needed.
Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds: Bose has announced that it will be shipping its improved QC Ultra Earbuds (2nd gen) in the “summer” of 2025 in the U.S., which means you’ll be able to find discounts on the original QC Ultra Earbuds, which feature excellent sound and previously best-in-class noise-canceling performance.
Anker Soundcore Liberty 4 NC: Released in 2023 and now discounted, the Anker Soundcore Liberty 4 NC earbuds carry a lower list price than 2022’s Liberty 4 buds and are arguably better. They have improved noise cancellation and better sound quality, along with support for the LDAC audio codec for devices that support it. (Many Android smartphones do, and in theory it offers slightly improved sound quality when paired with a music streaming service that offers high-res tracks.) They’re lightweight buds that should fit most ears comfortably with four sizes of ear tips to choose from.
Status Between 3ANC: Status Audio’s earbuds aren’t exactly the sleekest or most attractive earbuds you can buy, but if you don’t mind their utilitarian look and giant stems, you are getting an excellent-sounding set of earbuds. The Between 3ANC, the company’s first noise-canceling earbuds, also do a good job muffling ambient sound, although they aren’t up to the level of the Bose QuietComfort 2 earbuds for noise-canceling prowess. They did perform very well in my voice-calling test, reducing much of the background noise around me in the streets of New York while picking up my voice clearly, or so callers told me.
Bowers & Wilkins PI7 S2: In 2023, Bowers & Wilkins upgraded its fantastic-sounding PI7 noise-canceling earbuds. The new S2 model has better battery life and Bluetooth range, now up to 25 meters (double the previous range). Additionally, the buds now integrate into the new Bowers & Wilkins Music app for iOS and Android and have a much-improved setup experience. Learn more in our full Bowers & Wilkins PI7 review.
JBL Live Pro 2: Over the years, JBL has put out some decent true-wireless earbuds, but nothing that really got me too excited. That’s finally changed with the arrival of the Samsung-owned brand’s new Live Pro 2 and Live Free 2 buds. Both sets of buds — the Live Pro 2 have stems while the Live Free 2 have a pill-shaped design — offer a comfortable fit along with strong noise canceling, very good sound quality and voice-calling performance, plus a robust set of features, including multipoint Bluetooth pairing, an IPX5 splash-proof rating and wireless charging.
Master & Dynamic MW09: Master & Dynamic headphones and earbuds have always featured unique, eye-catching designs that include premium materials like aluminum, sapphire glass and Kevlar. Its latest MW09 flagship earbuds ($349) look pretty similar to its earlier MW08 buds but have some upgrades on the inside that deliver better performance, particularly when it comes to noise canceling. The earbuds sound great but are mysteriously out of stock everywhere, so we dropped them from the best list. If they come back in stock, we’ll add them back to this list.
Sony LinkBuds S: Unlike the “open” LinkBuds, the LinkBuds S are traditional noise-isolating earbuds with tips that jam in your ears. They’re more compact and lighter than Sony’s former flagship WF-1000XM4 and also feature Sony’s V1 processor (Sony has since released the more compact WF-1000XM5). Their sound and noise canceling don’t quite measure up to either XM4s or XM5s, but they’re still quite good. They’re the Sony buds for people who can’t afford Sony’s flagship earbuds but want 80% of those buds’ features and performance for significantly less. I’ve fully reviewed the Sony LinkBuds S and rated them an appreciative 8.4 out of 10.
Sony WF-1000XM4: Released in 2021, Sony’s WF-1000XM4 earned a CNET Editors’ Choice Award. They’re still excellent earbuds, but Sony has now released the next-gen WF-1000XM5. They may be a good option if you find them at a good discount. I published a full review of the Sony WF-100XM4 buds when they released if you think the budget earbuds are for you.
Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3: The Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3 were among the best new true-wireless earbuds of 2022. They’re still among the best truly wireless earbuds, but Sennheiser has released the upgraded Momentum True Wireless 4. Also, the newer AirPods Pro 2 and Sony WF-1000XM5 buds are arguably superior, so only look to buy the Momentum True Wireless 3 when they’re significantly discounted. Learn more about the buds in my Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3 review.
JBL Tour Pro 2: JBL’s Tour Pro 2 earbuds have received a lot of attention for bringing something new to true-wireless earbuds: a full-color touchscreen display embedded in the case that allows you to access the earbuds’ key features and control playback as well as adjust volume levels. It’s a bit of a gimmick but also useful. The buds could sound slightly better for their list price, but overall the JBL Tour Pro 2s are very good earbuds that offer a good fit, a robust feature set, strong battery life, plus solid noise canceling and voice-calling performance. I took a look at the feature-packed earbuds in 2023 and wrote a full JBL Tour Pro 2 review that you can read here.
Beyerdynamic Free Byrd: Beyerdynamic may be late to the game, but it’s finally introduced its first truly wireless earbuds, which feature active noise canceling, up to 11 hours of battery life (with noise canceling off) and impressive sound quality. Read my full Beyerdynamic Free Byrd Earbuds review to learn more.
Samsung Galaxy Buds 2: Available in four colors, the Samsung Galaxy Buds 2 noise-canceling headphones don’t feature as good sound or noise canceling as the Galaxy Buds 2 Pro, but they’re compact (15% smaller and 20% lighter than the earlier Buds Plus, they barely stick out of your ears) and cost significantly less. Because they sit more flush with your ears — and have that curved design — they also pick up less wind noise. They’re IPX2 sweat-resistant while the step-up Galaxy Buds 2 Pro are fully waterproof (IPX7). My full Samsung Galaxy Buds 2 review from 2021 has more information on the earbuds.
Bang & Olufsen Beoplay EX: Bang & Olufsen’s $399 Beoplay EX buds are the company’s best true-wireless earbuds. They feature a comfortable, secure fit (except perhaps for those with really smaller ears), top-notch build quality, great sound, good noise canceling and improved voice-calling performance over B&O’s EQ buds, with three microphones in each earbud they help with reducing background noise while picking up your voice. They’re out of most people’s price range, they’re arguably the best earbuds out there with stems and offer slightly superior sound to the AirPods Pro 2 with better clarity, deeper more powerful bass and richer, more accurate sound. I reviewed the B&O Beoplay EX earbuds before they were released in 2022 and included some more information there.
Soundcore by Anker Liberty 4: Their sound isn’t quite up to the level of higher-end buds like Apple’s AirPods Pro 2 and the Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 3 that cost significantly more, but the Soundcore by Anker Liberty 4 earbuds have a strong set of features, including a spatial audio mode with head tracking, multipoint Bluetooth pairing, up to nine hours of battery life, wireless charging and support for Sony’s LDAC audio codec that can offer sound improvements if you have the right setup. Read more in my Anker Liberty 4 review for more information on the mid-range earbuds.
Sennheiser CX Plus: The Momentum True Wireless 3 are Sennheiser’s flagship true-wireless earbuds. If you can’t afford them, the Sennheiser CX Plus (which features very good sound and decent noise canceling) is a good alternative for a lot less money. The step-down CX, which has no active noise canceling, costs even less. Find out more about the budget earbuds in my full Sennheiser CX Plus review.
Your default apps are the apps your iPhone uses automatically in certain situations. So if you tap a phone number on a website, for example, your iPhone will open your Phone app and place a call to that number. But if you like using a certain browser app, like Chrome or Firefox, you can make that app your iPhone’s default browser app.
When Apple released iOS 18.2 in December, that update made it easier to change your iPhone’s default apps. You could change a few default apps prior to that update, like your browser, but that update added a few new default app options and centralized the whole process in one menu.
Here’s how to change your default apps on your iPhone.
How to change your iPhone’s default apps
1. Open Settings 2. Tap Apps 3. Tap Default Apps
From this menu you can choose to change different categories of default apps on your iPhone. Here are the categories you can change and Apple’s description of each:
Some options, like App Installation, are only available in certain regions.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
App installation*: Choose an alternative app marketplace instead of the App Store to use as your default.
Browser App: Choose another app instead of the Safari app to use when opening links to webpages.
Calling: Choose another app instead of the Phone app or FaceTime app to make calls.
Call Filtering: Choose an app to use for presenting caller ID and blocking unwanted callers.
Contactless App*: Choose another app to make contactless transactions using your device’s built-in technology.
Email: Choose another app instead of the Mail app to use when opening links to send email.
Keyboard: Choose an app to use for text-entry capabilities systemwide.
Messaging: Choose another app instead of the Messages app to use when opening links to send instant messages.
Navigation*: Choose another app instead of the Apple Maps app to use when opening links for a location.
Password & Codes: Choose another app instead of the Passwords app to use for Password AutoFill in Safari and other apps.
Translation: Choose another app instead of the Translate app to use when translating selected text.
*Only available in certain countries and regions.
Tap into any of these categories and you can change that default app. If you don’t have a third-party app downloaded to your iPhone for a certain category, that category will show you Apple’s app or nothing.
Couldn’t I change my default apps before?
In some cases yes. When Apple released iOS 14 in 2020, the update let you change your iPhone’s default email and browser apps. You could also change a few other categories before iOS 18.2, like Keyboard, but the options were scattered throughout Settings.
With iOS 18.2, your iPhone gathers those categories in one place, and the update adds a few other categories, like Messaging and Calling.
For more on iOS news, here are my first impressions of the beta version of iOS 26, how to enable call screening in the beta and all the other new features Apple said the update will bring to your device later this year.
Keep these factors in mind when searching for the best melatonin supplements for sleep.
Ingredients
You don’t want anything unnecessary added to your melatonin supplements, such as fillers or extra sugar. Always study the ingredients in any vitamin supplement and speak with your doctor before starting any supplements.
Dose
The amount of melatonin in your supplement can have a direct effect on how fast it takes you to fall asleep. The lowest dose of melatonin that will still help you fall asleep is 3 mg; 10 mg is the highest dose and experts say you shouldn’t go any higher than that.
Serving size
The serving size affects how long a bottle of melatonin will last. If you have a product with 50 gummies and have to take two gummies each night, this will only last you 25 days.
Form
Melatonin can come in tablet, capsule, gummy or liquid form. You should look for a form that fits your needs. For example, if you don’t want extra sugar in your vitamins, don’t buy gummy vitamins. If you don’t like swallowing pills, gummy vitamins may be the best option.
Verifications
Dietary supplements aren’t regulated by the FDA but there are a few verifications you can check for that will help you tell if the product you’re buying is safe to use.
McDonald’s continues to capitalize on the love of its customers for the company’s goofy history. Recently, Happy Meals included McDonald’s-themed toys — such as drink machines, fryers and trays with food on them — delivered in mini-Happy Meal boxes. And the much-longed-for Snack Wraps finally returned after a viral fan campaign. Now, McDonald’s has introduced the McDonaldland Meal, which goes straight after that market of adults who have a nostalgic feeling for the Golden Arches. And it comes with a shake in colors like you’ve never seen before.
The McDonaldland Meal came out on Tuesday, and I grabbed one at my local McD. It’s not cheap — here in high-cost-of-living Seattle, the medium meal was $16.59 and the large was $18.29.
Read more: McDonald’s Snack Wraps Are Back but Was It Worth the Wait?
You can choose from a Quarter Pounder with cheese or a 10-piece McNugget order. It also comes with the chain’s famous french fries and your choice of drink. But the specialty drink that’s made to go with the meal is called the Mt. McDonaldland shake, and it’s a blazing blue color, topped with hot pink whipped cream.
Unlike the Happy Meal, the McDonaldland Meal is made for adults.
Gael Fashingbauer Cooper/CNET
You know what regular McDonald’s food tastes like, but you’ve perhaps never had this flavor of shake before. McDonald’s teases in its press release that it’s “up to you to discover the surprise flavor.” (You can order the shake without the meal if you just want to try it.)
I braced myself for a super-sugary shake that I’d take one sip of and then dump out. But I was surprised. It was an acceptable flavor that I drank about half of. Sweet, yes, but not mouth-puckeringly so. There was a vague fruit flavor that I couldn’t exactly nail down.
Maybe cotton candy? Maybe blue raspberry? Maybe both of those, mixed? I would not order the Mt. McDonaldland shake again, but it’s a fun, colorful twist for a one-time purchase. If you don’t want to try it, you can choose a regular drink or another flavor of shake with your McDonaldland meal.
I sampled the hot pink whipped cream by itself, and it seemed to have no flavor, so maybe they just took regular whipped cream and dyed it pink.
Nostalgic characters from McDonald’s advertising are displayed on the small tins included in the meals.
Gael Fashingbauer Cooper/CNET
Instead of a simple toy, the McDonaldland Meal comes with a 5-by-7-inch tin with one of the McDonaldland mascot characters on it. I ended up with Hamburglar, who, after Grimace, would probably have been my choice.
Tins come embossed with Hamburglar, Grimace, Ronald McDonald, Mayor McCheese, Birdie the Early Bird and the Fry Guys. Honestly, I’m not sure what anyone would do with this tin, but it was definitely a classier included item than most of the Happy Meal toys.
Inside the tin is a card with a code you can scan to explore McDonaldland online, an ID card for your particular character, two postcards and four stickers. One of my stickers said “robble robble,” the Hamburglar’s favorite saying, and one read, “Keep up! Hamburglar and I are mid-heist.” I can’t really imagine anyone putting these on their water bottle or laptop, but to each their own.
Honestly, unless McDonald’s nostalgia is your thing, I’d recommend you just stick to ordering your usual at the Golden Arches and skipping the meal. But if you just don’t get enough blue and pink food in your life — and who does? — try the Mt. McDonaldland shake once, pass it around to let your friends guess the flavor, and then go back to chocolate or another good old standard flavor.
Each summer seems to outdo the last when it comes to heat, and staying cool can feel like a full-time job. When temperatures climb or humidity hangs heavy in the air, your body works harder to regulate itself. Without enough fluids, staying hydrated gets a lot tougher.
Dehydration can set in faster than most people expect, especially during a heatwave. It can leave you feeling lightheaded, drained, and in more serious cases, it can put your health at real risk. Drinking plenty of water helps, but what you eat can play a big role, too.
Certain foods have a high water content and can help replenish fluids while also giving your body important nutrients. Choosing the right snacks and meals during extreme heat can make it easier to stay hydrated and keep your energy up when the weather is working against you.
Drinking is the recommended way to rehydrate yourself, but if it’s too humid outside, it can be almost impossible to catch up. Water alone doesn’t replenish salt or other minerals either. Thankfully, there are foods full of water and electrolytes that can help you to replenish your body’s minerals, and satisfy your thirst at the same time. These are the top hydrating foods to focus on this summer.
How to tell if you’re hydrated
Hydration needs vary based on your size, activity level and how much you sweat. Gabriela Barreto, a registered dietitian and sports nutritionist says there are two indicators of hydration level: your thirst and the color of your urine. “Drinking to thirst can be appropriate for most individuals to maintain their hydration levels and as for urine, you’re looking for a pale yellow color,” says Barreto. She says the only times you shouldn’t be concerned about the color of your urine are during your first pee of the morning because it tends to be dark, or if you are taking vitamin B supplements, which make urine more likely to appear bright yellow.
Barreto recommends that besides food and water, a hydration supplement such as Skratch can benefit individuals with active jobs and people who work out or spend a lot of time in the heat outdoors. “Utilizing a hydration product can be useful to increase your body’s water stores,” she says. “I recommend a hydration product with 300 to 500 milligrams of sodium and preferably about 20 grams of carbohydrates.” Keep in mind an electrolyte drink without carbohydrates will help with rehydration, too, just not as efficiently. So make sure to read the labels first to choose the best option for your needs.
A glass is water is not the only option if you are thirsty.
Stefania Pelfini/Getty Images
Which foods are most hydrating?
Most foods contain some amount of water, but it probably won’t surprise you to learn that fruits and vegetables are at the top of the list.
To get the most out of these hydrating fruits and vegetables, make sure you follow standard dietary guidelines. Barreto says, “Dietary guidelines recommend two to three servings of fruit and three to four servings of vegetables for most adults.” There are no specific guidelines for hydrating fruits and veggies, but by eating the daily recommended amount of produce you will be adding to your hydration, she says.
It is estimated that 20% to 30% of fluid needs can come from food, including fruits and veggies. By combining certain foods, you can boost your hydration. “When looking to adequately rehydrate, carbohydrates, fluid and sodium are key,” says Barreto, adding, “Carbohydrates are important for optimizing water and sodium absorption in the body.”
Watermelon and other melons
Watermelon isn’t just a fruit that is synonymous with summer, it’s also highly hydrating. It’s made up of 92% water and has antioxidants, important nutrients like vitamins A and C, magnesium, fiber and lycopene (a pigment found in red, yellow or orange-colored fruits and vegetables). Other melons such as cantaloupe are also made up of 90% water and are a good source of potassium, folate, as well as vitamins A and C.
Barreto says one hydrating recipe to try is a cucumber and watermelon salad with lime, mint and salty feta. As previously mentioned, the sodium and carbohydrates will help the body easily absorb the water from the fruit. Barreto points out that for this reason, you’ll also notice some sports dietitians recommend sprinkling some salt on your watermelon.
Cucumbers
Cucumbers are made up of 95% water and consist of vitamins like vitamin K, magnesium and potassium. This refreshing veggie can be easily added to salads, sandwiches, water or eaten on its own. Its high water content also makes it a low-calorie vegetable and is an ideal food to add to your diet if you’re looking to lose weight and feel full longer.
Squash
This versatile vegetable does well as an addition to soups, stir-fries, salads and as a side. Popular summer squashes like zucchini are a good source of vitamin C, potassium and fiber and are made up of 94% water. The high water and fiber content will keep you full and hydrated for an extended period.
Strawberries
This popular summer fruit is full of antioxidants, vitamins and minerals like vitamin C, manganese and folate. It’s an easy fruit to add into smoothies, yogurt, salads or eat on its own. Strawberries are made up of 91% water, making them the perfect fruit to quench your thirst and satisfy your sweet tooth.
Many seasonal fruits and vegetables can help keep you hydrated.
Getty Images
Lettuce and other leafy greens
Make a salad out of lettuce and other greens like lettuce, watercress, spinach or bok choy, which have high water content and provide lots of vitamins and minerals. Lettuce consists of 96% water and has folate, fiber and vitamins K and A. Spinach is high in iron, folic acid, calcium and vitamins C and A. Watercress, meanwhile, provides 100% of the recommended dietary intake for vitamin K, which is an essential nutrient for blood clotting and maintaining healthy bones. Bok choy is abundant in vitamins K and C, which means any combination of these greens is guaranteed to provide you with a salad full of nutrients.
Citrus fruits
If you enjoy oranges, grapefruits, limes and other citrus fruits, then eat up. Citrus fruits tend to be made up of about 80% water, making them good options for hydration. They are also high in vitamin C and fiber and are good for supporting your immune system. They’re even versatile enough to add to fruit salads, eat on their own, add to water or salads and even as a marinade for proteins, such as chicken or fish.
When the heat index climbs, turning on the oven feels like a bad idea. A countertop air fryer solves the problem. It cooks quickly, keeps the kitchen noticeably cooler, and still delivers that crisp, golden finish you want for weeknight dinners.
I swapped a few sheet-pan meals for air fryer recipes during a warm stretch and the difference was immediate. No waiting for preheating, shorter cook times, and less lingering heat in the room. Cleanup took minutes, since the basket and tray went straight into the sink.
If your goal is fast summer dinners without heating the house, start here. These air fryer dishes keep things light on effort and heavy on flavor, with reliable results that make no-oven cooking an easy habit.
What began as a glorified frozen-snack machine has turned into a full-on kitchen workhorse. The air fryer now handles everything from crispy chicken tenders to roasted veggies to gooey desserts. Beyond the staples, I’ve discovered a few surprising air fryer foods that I’m now completely hooked on.
From whole-roasted chicken and flaky salmon to vegetables and sides, such as cauliflower, potatoes and carrots, certain foods feel like they were made to cook in an air fryer. You’ll find a ton of Reddit threads with home cooks asking for the ultimate air fryer recipes and we’ve put together this guide to help you out with our favorites.
Looking for something great to make? Check out the nine foods you absolutely have to cook in an air fryer below.
And if you’re searching for an air fryer or to upgrade your existing oven, we have a new favorite model with a glass cooking chamber that’s easy to clean and doubles as a food storage container.
1. Salmon
Just 8 minutes in the air fryer and you have perfectly medium rare salmon.
David Watsky/CNET
Broiled salmon is a simple, healthy weeknight dinner staple. It’s not difficult to make in the oven but if you’re only cooking for one or two people, the preheating time is a pain and you’ll waste a lot of energy for a small amount of food. Pan-seared salmon is great and quick, but there’s almost no way to cook salmon on the stove without creating an oily and odorous mess.
I tried cooking roasted salmon in the air fryer and it came out perfectly in about 10 minutes, including preheating time. The closed cooking chamber captures all of the grease and even hides some of the fishy smell from taking over the space.
OK, so you might catch me throwing the occasional filet of salmon on the grill during warmer months, but gone are the days of me wiping fish grease from the backsplash behind my kitchen stove.
Here’s how to make perfect air fryer salmon.
2. Whole chicken
Air-fryer roasted chicken is a revelation.
David Watsky/CNET
This one surprised me the most because I make a roast chicken most Sundays and had become content with my method of using the oven. I learned fast that the air fryer does an even better job because it’s able to crisp the skin quickly without overcooking the meat. Air-fryer roasted chicken takes about 45 minutes — about 15% quicker than the oven — and it’s nearly impossible to screw up.
Here’s how to make a quick roasted chicken in the air fryer.
3. Bacon cheeseburgers
You can cook a burger to perfect medium or medium rare with an air fryer.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
Air fryer cheeseburgers have become a staple around my home. The exception is during summer when the grill is in full swing but during cooler months, I turn to the air fryer for this American classic. It’s not only cleaner than pan frying but the burger doesn’t cook in its own grease so you get a lighter, healthier meal (if you’re into that sort of thing). You can also stick the bun and a couple of slices of bacon in with the burger and you have the full meal with almost no cleanup to manage.
Here’s how to make a cheeseburger from top to bottom in the air fryer.
4. Chicken cutlets
Air fryers turn out picture-perfect chicken cutlets.
David Watsky/CNET
Before the air fryer, I used to pan-fry breaded chicken cutlets for chicken Parmesan and other recipes but the air fryer does the same job with less mess and produces less oily fried chicken, too.
Watch this: Best Air Fryers: Cheap vs. Expensive
I recommend using boneless chicken thighs, which have enough fat content to withstand all that convection heat without drying out. Simply coat the chicken in beaten egg wash followed by bread crumbs mixed with salt, pepper and other spices. Cook at 375 degrees Fahrenheit for about 15 minutes.
You can spray the cutlets lightly with a bit of oil before cooking to get an extra crispy crust but it’s not necessary. I’ve tried the same method with chicken breasts; it works well but there is more risk of drying out the meat.
5. Cauliflower steak
Cauliflower steak made in the air fryer has become a staple side dish in my kitchen.
David Watsky/CNET
One of my favorite things to cook in the air fryer is cauliflower. A slab of cauliflower makes an excellent hearty side dish or main course if you’re going plant-based. Simply toss a thick slice or two of cauliflower with olive oil and salt and pepper, or some seasoning of your choice, and air fry for 10 or 12 minutes on high. The air fryer gives it a beautiful caramelized crust and it cooks the dense veggie fast enough so that the inside of the cauliflower doesn’t become mushy.
6. Leftover pizza
This leftover pizza got a whole new life thanks to a short trip to the air fryer.
David Watsky/CNET
While not every type of food is best reheated in the air fryer, a lot of them are. Air fryers are the perfect way to revive leftover pizza, fried chicken, grilled meats and vegetables. A microwave heats food unevenly and tends to impart a rubbery texture. Air fryers give food a second life via convection heat for a crispy crust and even heating.
Here’s the best way to reheat every type of leftover.
7. Hot dogs
You can cook an entire package of hot dogs in just a few minutes.
David Watsky/CNET
It’s hard to screw up a hot dog but if you want a perfectly charred wiener in less than five minutes with essentially no cleanup, look to the air fryer. Air fryer hot dogs are as simple as simple gets and the super convection oven gives them a perfect browning in two or three minutes.
Here’s how to make hot dogs in the air fryer all summer.
8. Baked potatoes
Air fryer baked potatoes have crispy skin and are light and fluffy inside.
Brian Bennett/CNET
OK, so technically this one starts out in the microwave and then gets finished in the air fryer. The microwave softens the inside in less than 8 minutes while the air fryer blasts the edges and skin to a crispy perfection. It’s a restaurant-quality baked potato in less than 12 minutes. Here’s how to make the best air fryer baked potato ever.
And if you’re still not sure what an air fryer is and how it works, check out our complete guide to air fryers.
9. Grilled cheese
This air fryer grilled cheese is as good as it looks.
Pamela Vachon/CNET
For a grilled cheese, the air fryer is working on both of the bread surfaces and the cheese all at once, resulting in a quicker melt, which adheres the cheese to the bread slices together making for a much easier flip. (Flipping is still recommended but with far less drama.)
Here’s the secret to perfect air fryer grilled cheese.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
I was cruising through the Across clues on today’s Mini Crossword until I got to 5-Across, which threw me for a loop. But once the Down answers began filling in, I figured it out. Need some help with today’s Mini Crossword answers? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in The Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for Aug. 7, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Parts of a museum dinosaur exhibit Answer: BONES
6A clue: Smiling Face with Sunglasses, for one Answer: EMOJI
7A clue: Painter’s stand Answer: EASEL
8A clue: Restaurant item often asked for by signing the air Answer: CHECK
9A clue: Overly slapdash Answer: HASTY
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Tree with smooth gray bark Answer: BEECH
2D clue: Nebraska city that’s home to Union Pacific headquarters Answer: OMAHA
3D clue: Features of bloodhounds that are said to be 1,000 times stronger than humans Answer: NOSES
4D clue: Boot from a game Answer: EJECT
5D clue: ___ smooth Answer: SILKY
Quick tips for the NYT Mini Crossword
#1: If you’re unsure, put down an answer anyway, but remember your uncertainty. You might find yourself erasing that answer as other letters fill in.
#2: If you’re struggling with a few Across clues, skip to the Down side. You might be able to fill that in and find the Across clues solved for you.
#3: The puzzle-makers love to play little word games, so be on your guard. They may offer a clue where the words don’t mean the obvious. If you’re stumped, try thinking of secondary meanings for phrases in the clue.
Because photography is important to me, I’ve always picked the iPhone Pro with its telephoto camera over the regular iPhone models. But each year I’m pulled in two directions: Pick the standard-sized iPhone Pro or the larger iPhone Pro Max? Some years the latter includes photo features not found on the regular iPhone Pro, such as the 5x zoom that was exclusive to the iPhone 15 Pro Max. And as we approach the reveal of the next iPhone 17 lineup, I’m once again waffling between sizes. And based on I’m hearing, this might be the year to go to the Max. (And this also reinforces that now is not the time to buy a new iPhone.)
Here’s a rundown of some of the features rumored for the iPhone 17 Pro Max that I’m most curious about.
Making the case to go larger
The iPhone Pro Max models are tanks compared to the rest of the line — well, they’re not on the toughness level of the Samsung Galaxy XCover 7 Pro, so maybe they’re more like solid midsize SUVs. But they’re notable for their larger screens, bigger bodies and especially for having room for more of everything in an iPhone.
And that includes a larger battery. The Max models already have more battery space than other models, but the iPhone 17 Pro Max could end up being almost half a millimeter thicker, at 8.725mm, according to a May post by 9to5Mac. Has anyone ever asked for a more bulky iPhone? Actually, yes, yes and yes.
The iPhone 17 Pro Max could get thicker.
Apple/Lily Yeh/CNET
Add the new Adaptive Power feature in iOS 26, which uses AI to distribute power more efficiently when demand is high, and we could see a boost in daily use before reaching for a charger. (Then again, Adaptive Power could be a software workaround that could mean longer life using the same physical battery size.)
If you’re already committed to carrying a larger iPhone, a tad more thickness and heft isn’t too much more to shoulder.
The back of the iPhone 17 Pro case is also rumored to shift the Apple logo down from its current perch. That doesn’t seem like a big functional change, but it should help soothe folks who choose to add a clear MagSafe case, since the logo will be centered within the MagSafe area. You can’t say Apple doesn’t sweat the design details.
A leak on X from Majin Bu purports to show an iPhone 17 Pro case, though it’s not clear whether that’s something assembled by hand to match rumored specs or is some iPhone knockoff.
We can’t talk about the case without mentioning the camera bump, which could become a more expansive camera island (or maybe on the larger iPhone 17 Pro Max, it will be more like a camera continent) that stretches across the width of the iPhone back, according to CAD renders by Majin Bu. We even got a glimpse of a possible test iPhone 17 Pro in the wild when someone snapped a picture of what looks to be an Apple employee using a phone with a design that matches many rumors (via Foxy Pupy on X).
That expanse may include an upgraded 48-megapixel telephoto camera, which feels overdue for a top-tier camera system. Granted, it will probably take extra steps to capture photos in the full 48-megapixel resolution, as is the case with the current main Fusion camera in the iPhone 16 Pro models, where images are “pixel-binned” with multiple pixels grouped together to enhance light gathering ability. But given the great results we’ve seen from the 48-megapixel camera in the current models — the iPhone 16E leans heavily on that resolution using its sole rear-facing camera — extending it to the telephoto camera would definitely be a win for photographers.
Will the layout and configuration of the cameras change from the iPhone 16 Pro shown here in the new iPhone 17 Pro Max?
James Martin/CNET
Speaking of resolution, a 24-megapixel front-facing camera is expected, up from 12 megapixels, so perhaps my selfies will look better. More likely, it’s to boost the next rumored feature.
Check Out the iPhone 16 Pro Max’s Cameras, Display and Colors
See all photos
A movable camera lens
I’m breaking out this camera rumor separately because it would mark a huge change in the iPhone camera system. According to a post at MacRumors, the iPhone 17 Pro could have an 8x optical zoom. Not only that, it’s said to be able to move, so perhaps there could be a range of zoom between 5x and 8x that is all optical (versus relying on digital zoom to crop and enlarge the image to fit the same field of view). The 5x zoom in the current iPhone 15 Pro Max, iPhone 16 and iPhone 16 Pro Max uses a “tetraprism” design to achieve its telephoto range while still keeping the camera bump modest.
iPhone 16 Pro 5x telephoto camera
Patrick Holland/CNET
Video recording makes a leap
Cameras on both sides will reportedly work together with dual video recording using the built-in Camera app, a boon for conducting interviews or making reaction videos where you want to see both sides of a conversation. Third-party apps have been able to tap into this capability for some time, but haven’t been available as a default option.
Not as important for everyday use, but interesting in terms of advancing the state of the art, the iPhone 17 Pro Max could support 8K video recording, as speculated by MacRumors after reports that 8K was tested for the iPhone 16 Pro. The iPhone is swiftly turning into a production video camera, from features such as 28 Years Later to custom cameras built from iPhone tech in the F1 movie.
An improved cooling system
Recording video in 4K resolution, much less 8K, is a demanding, power-hungry task that leads to heat build up. In already warm environments, it can even overheat the iPhone and temporarily shut it down. So the prospect of a new internal cooling architecture, while being invisible to iPhone owners, has me nerding out just a little.
According to Majin Bu and others, the iPhone 17 Pro models will feature a “vapor chamber” cooling system. As the processor heats up, a small amount of liquid in the chamber evaporates and condenses in cooler areas and is then passed back to the hot areas.
Wi-Fi 7 and fast cellular via a new Apple modem
This is more geeky and less obvious to everyday phone owners, but that’s also kind of the point. The iPhone 16E shipped with Apple’s C1 cellular modem, Apple’s first homebrew cellular hardware it has been trying to build in order to wean its dependence on Qualcomm, which has provided the modem hardware in previous iPhone models.
However, the C1 lacks a faster millimeter wave cellular network and doesn’t support Wi-Fi 7, even though it’s more conservative about power usage (and still performs well), an acceptable trade-off for the budget phone in Apple’s lineup.
The C1 is Apple’s first cellular modem. We could see a more capable C2 chip in the iPhone 17 Pro models.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
But for the iPhone 17 Pro Max, we’re talking about the next professional models, and an iPhone Pro in 2025 can’t ship without the latest, fastest wireless technology. It would be more realistic to see Apple stick with Qualcomm for the Pro line than include the C1 — but I suspect a C2 is coming.
According to MacRumors, the Wi-Fi 7 compatibility could be provided by a separate dedicated chip designed by Apple.
An orange iPhone 17 Pro Max
You don’t have to be an ardent fan of the Netherlands national football team to appreciate the color orange. Leaker Majin Bu posted renders of the new color lineup for iPhone 17 Pro models, and one of them is gloriously ginger. Not only is this interesting because orange is orange, but because it would be a departure from Apple’s recent line of cool, muted colors for the pro lineup. (There are also rumors that the iPhone lineup will include a new sky blue color, about which I have opinions.) I don’t hide my iPhone in a case, so being able to show off a bold color sounds like a fun idea.
These aren’t the only iPhone 17 Pro rumors we’re tracking, but right now they’re the ones that have me looking at my calendar and wishing September could arrive just a little faster.
Apple says it’s increasing its investment in US production by another $100 billion over the next four years.
The company said Wednesday in a wide-ranging announcement that was leaked early by the White House that it will expand to $600 billion total its commitment to hire more US workers and expand some of its manufacturing across 10 states.
“Every new iPhone and every new Apple Watch sold in the world will contain cover glass made in Kentucky,” Cook said. iPhone cover glass is already being made at Corning’s Harrodsburg, Kentucky, manufacturing facility, though it’s not clear when 100% of the iPhone glass will be made there.
The Apple CEO said that the company plans to create an end-to-end silicon supply chain in the US, increasing the amount of chip design, manufacturing and packaging in the United States.
Read more: Trump Phone Site Drops Its ‘Built in US’ Claim
“American innovation is central to everything we do,” Cook said. “We’re growing and hiring here. We support 450,000 jobs with suppliers and partners in all 50 states.”
In the announcement, Apple reiterated what it previously said in February: that it was also planning to hire 20,000 US workers over that four-year time period.
Trump praised Apple and Cook in particular, calling him a “visionary” moments before questioning his athleticism.
The president repeated his assertion that there will be 100% tariffs on semiconductors imported from other countries.
“I think the chip companies are all coming back home,” Trump said. “If you’re building in the United States or committed to build without question, there will be no charge.”
The manufacturing of smartphones in the US has other ties to the president. When the Trump Organization announced the launch of a Trump Mobile service in June, it promised a gold phone called the T1 that would be manufactured entirely in the US. Those claims were later walked back after it was revealed the $499 phone’s specifications appeared to be similar to one made overseas for T-Mobile.
Apple’s shifting strategy
Apple has been shifting the way it produces its products this year in response to the steep tariffs against countries where it manufactures most of its flagship products such as iPhones. While Apple and other major technology companies don’t make smartphones in the US, some assembly of products using components made overseas can be done in the US.
The company has moved some production from China to countries including India and Vietnam to bypass tariffs and to reduce its reliance on China’s extensive manufacturing supply chains. Smartphone-makers have been facing tariffs as steep as 25% and Apple is trying to avoid price hikes on its products. The company is gearing up for the launch of the iPhone 17 in September.
During the press conference, Cook was asked about the possibility that Apple could manufacture an entire iPhone in the US. Cook said that some components are made domestically and assembly can be done in the US, but stopped short of promising an entire device made in America.
Trump said that Apple’s supply chains have been in place for while.
“We may incentivize them,” he said, but suggested he was optimistic that an all-US-made iPhone could happen “one day.”
Apple’s announcement included news of partnerships with companies that include Texas Instruments, Broadcom, Applied Materials, TSMC and others. Some of those efforts will include increased chip development and manufacturing domestically.
The company has also opened up a new factory that produces servers for the company in Houston. It will gear up for mass production next year. Apple said those servers will help with its Apple Intelligence efforts.
Most outdoor patio heaters will heat an area to a radius of at least 10 feet, but some can blast warmth a bit farther. Determine how much or little space you need to heat regularly. If the area you want to heat extends farther than 10 feet from the heater, you might consider purchasing two heaters.
Style: Pole or pyramid?
The two main styles are traditional pole heaters and more modern pyramid-style patio heaters. This is more a matter of taste, but it’s worth noting that the pyramid heaters we tested were slightly more difficult to assemble.
Cost and value
Reliable patio heaters start around $150 and go up from there. The more powerful patio heaters with sleek design elements will cost closer to $400 or $500.
Energy usage and environmental impact
Propane patio heaters release carbon dioxide (CO2), a greenhouse gas that traps heat in the atmosphere and contributes to environmental issues like global warming. Due to these emissions and their impact on the air quality, they’re also not ideal for enclosed spaces, as you don’t want to breathe in a concentrated supply of polluted air.
Electric patio heaters don’t release such pollutants, so they’re often considered the more eco-friendly option. However, they do result in some added energy usage for your home. Keep in mind while shopping that if you opt for an electric patio heater, you’ll likely see an increase in your electric bill.
Real-world application
After crunching the data, the Hiland heater emerged as a strong contender. It was one of the hottest models I tested, and when you combine that with the cool visuals of a flame darting up a glass tube, it seemed like a no-brainer.
Then I added an extra step to the test: sitting outside beside each heater on a cooler evening. That revealed something that the thermocouples didn’t: The traditional pole-style heaters give off a much more concentrated heat. When I was sitting next to one, I felt comfortably warm. While the glass tube of the Hiland heater still performs pretty well — and looks neat — having the heat dispersed along the length of the tube simply didn’t warm me up as thoroughly.
As I mentioned earlier, a lot of the heaters were similar. When I tested them, it was clear that the Hiland and Amazon model 62516 — despite being nearly identical pyramid-style tube heaters — weren’t alike. The Hiland was one of the best-performing; the Amazon 62516 was one of the worst. Upon inspection, the reason was clear: The only difference was in the regulator controls. That simple variation made all the difference, and it proved true among several of the identical pole heater models, too.
When all of these heaters appear so similar, it may also be tempting to choose one based on additional accessories. The model from HomeLabs had one that stood out: a table attached to the heater. I wouldn’t recommend putting your cold beer on a table attached to a heater.
CNET’s broadband experts rank Spectrum as the best internet service provider in Austim. The cable provider takes the top spot thanks to its wide coverage within the Austin area, solid speeds and plans that come with no data caps or contract requirements. That said, Spectrum isn’t available everywhere. If you fall outside Spectrum’s coverage area, T-Mobile Home Internet and Google Fiber are two strong alternatives.
For budget-conscious households, Astound Broadband offers a standout deal with its 300Mbps plan for just $30 a month, with no contracts or equipment fees. And if speed is your top priority, Google Fiber’s blazing 8,000Mbps plan is available for $150 per month.
Whether you’re streaming by the pool, gaming through the heat or working from a cool indoor setup, Austin has an internet plan to match your summer routine.
Best internet in Austin, Texas
Austin internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
Astound Broadband Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
300-1,500Mbps
None
None
None
7
AT&T Internet Air Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60
75-225Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Google Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$70-$150
1,000-8,000Mbps (varies by location)
None
None
None
7.5
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($15 discount on Home Internet Plus for eligible customers)
87-318Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Austin
Astound Broadband/Grande: You’ll find some of the most competitive starting rates in Austin from this cable internet provider. Astound’s cheapest plan is $30 a month for 300Mbps download speed. Astound’s 1.5-gig plan is also the cheapest in the city, starting at $70 per month. The catch? A pretty steep increase after the first 12 months.
AT&T: If I had to name a runner-up for the best fiber internet provider for ATX, AT&T would take that spot. It has greater availability in the Austin metro area than Google Fiber, and its fiber plans offer a greater diversity of options — from 300Mbps to several multi-gigabit plans, including one as high as 5,000Mbps. Not all Austin residents are serviceable for AT&T Fiber. Many still have to deal with AT&T Internet Air service, a fixed wireless product whose download speeds max out around 225Mbps.
Evolve Broadband: This regional provider won’t be found within city limits, but its LTE fixed wireless service caters to rural customers in the outskirts of the Austin metro area, including to the south and southeast in Bastrop, Cedar Creek, Dale and Lytton Springs and west of the city in McDade and Paige. You’ll have to fill out an online form to view plans and pricing, but its website does advertise a $100 plan for 300GB of data per month.
Frontier: If you’re within Austin city limits, Frontier isn’t for you. Its mix of DSL and fiber-optic service is a prime option for residents of Georgetown to the north and Dripping Springs and Kyle just south of the city. Check the site to see if Frontier Fiber is available at your address. Featuring symmetrical plans of 200Mbps, 500Mbps, gigabit or multi-gig speeds, the company’s fiber service is a compelling option, ranging in price from $30 to $110 a month.
Optimum: Suddenlink is the name many in the Austin area might know, but parent company Altice USA rebranded in 2022. So, the freshly named Optimum service is very lightly scattered in the metro area — mostly around the Austin Recreation Center and near Barton Creek Wilderness Park — but is more concentrated north of ATX in Pflugerville. This cable ISP boasts competitive starting rates and decent signing perks, including Visa gift cards and bundling discounts with unlimited mobile plans.
Ranch Wireless: This VTX-1 wireless provider has limited coverage within Austin. Coverage can be seen in south-central Texas servicing a few towns on the outer reaches of the Austin metro area, including Bastrop, Cedar Creek, Dale, Elgin, Lockhart, Mustang Ridge and Uhland. Speeds and prices will vary based on location, but customers can expect unlimited data with their plans.
Satellite internet: Typically, I’d tell anyone in a metro area to run, not walk, away from satellite internet service. You’ll find much cheaper and faster alternatives in the city. Many outside the urban limits of Austin won’t have the same access. That’s when it’s time to consider either Hughesnet or Viasat, the leading satellite broadband providers. One of the biggest drawbacks to both is the slower speeds and data restrictions. Newcomer Starlink has them beat on that front — the provider features faster speeds and an unlimited data option. It does still require a hefty upfront payment of $349.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Availability for Verizon’s 5G fixed wireless home internet product is expanding to more areas. Similar to T-Mobile, it boasts all-in pricing that includes equipment rental, installation fees and taxes for $50 per month (and eligible Verizon Wireless customers can get a discount to knock that down to $35 per month). So why’d we list T-Mobile higher? Verizon’s coverage still tends to lean strongly toward metro areas due to its use of Ultra Wideband 5G Technology. In contrast, T-Mobile also uses its 4G LTE network to increase availability. If you’re within the Capital City limits, you should explore this option, but many others will find it outside their grasp.
Cheap internet options in ATX
The average starting price for internet service in Austin — taking into account the promo prices, not the elevated regular rates — is approximately $50 a month. If you’re searching for the cheapest rates, the lowest starting price in Austin is $20 per month, belonging to Astound Broadband. Many other providers, including Spectrum and Frontier also offer base plans less than the average internet cost in the area.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Austin?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Astound Broadband/Grande Read full review
$30
300Mbps
None
Spectrum Internet Advantage Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$50 ($40 for first year)
500Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
318Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
300Mbps
None
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How many members of your household use the internet?
How to find internet deals and promotions in Austin
The best internet deals and top promotions in Austin depend on what discounts are available during that period. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
Austin internet providers, such as Spectrum and Astound Broadband, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Many providers, including Google Fiber and AT&T Fiber, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
Visions of America/Universal Images Group/Getty Images
How fast is Austin broadband?
Thanks to its multiple fiber options, Austin has a spot among the top five fastest cities in the country. In Ookla’s latest reporting, Austin ranked as the fifth fastest city, registering a median download speed of 274 megabits per second. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.) That was good enough to place ATX well ahead of its Texas big-city siblings, Dallas and Houston.
People within the city limits have access to the superior speeds of fiber internet service, tilting the scales here. Ookla’s data tags Google Fiber as the fastest provider in Austin, with a median download speed of approximately 337Mbps. AT&T and Frontier also offer fiber plans as fast as 5Gbps, so those three providers feature the fastest individual plans you’ll find.
Fastest internet plans in Austin
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
Google Fiber 8 Gig Read full review
$150
8,000Mbps
8,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Google Fiber 3 Gig Read full review
$100
2,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Astound Broadband 1.5 Gig Read full review
$70
1,500Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Cable
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Google Fiber 1 Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (3 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Internet providers in popular cities near Austin
See all results for internet providers in Texas.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email and streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one person sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two people to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more people to engage in high-bandwidth activities at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Austin
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to test every internet service provider in a given city personally. So what’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there. We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answers to those questions are often layered and complex, the providers that come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our page on how we test ISPs.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Austin?
Within the city limits of Austin, cable internet is still the most ubiquitous internet connection you’ll find. As far as cable internet providers go, Spectrum and Astound Broadband present solid value with their offerings. As we’ve often mentioned in our CNET home internet coverage, fiber internet trumps cable every time. If your address is serviceable for Google Fiber or AT&T Fiber — and thankfully, both companies are continuing to expand their fiber networks within ATX — then you shouldn’t give signing up a second thought.
Internet providers in Austin FAQs
Which is the best internet service provider in Austin?
In Austin, the provider with the widest availability — outside of satellite providers — is Spectrum, which is why we’ve deemed it the best ISP in the area.
If you consider the greater Austin-Round Rock-Georgetown area, there are at least 17 different internet service providers available to the more than 2 million people living in the ATX metro. Those residents aren’t serviceable for all 17 ISPs, so sometimes, the best internet service provider is simply the available one.
Yes. AT&T is perhaps the most widely available fiber provider in the area, and although not all addresses can get its fiber service (others might have access to their fixed wireless plans), access to AT&T Fiber throughout the area is growing. Google Fiber is also available within city limits.
The cheapest internet plan in Austin is Astound Broadband’s 300Mbps plan at $30 per month.
Regarding value, Google Fiber’s 8 Gig offering, which at $150 per month (yes, I recognize that’s not cheap), comes to a cost per Mbps of about 2 cents. If you’re looking for a cheaper alternative, AT&T fiber offers symmetrical gigabit download and upload speeds for $80 a month.
Think twice before wrapping your cheese in plastic and tossing it in the fridge. If you want your favorite block or wedge to stay flavorful and last longer, how you store it matters – a lot. Most people unknowingly shorten the life of their cheese by sealing it in airtight plastic, which suffocates the product, ruins its texture and dulls its taste.
Instead, take a cue from the pros. We spoke with John Montez, certified certified cheese professional lead at Murray’s Cheese in New York, who shared how to keep any cheese – from brie to cheddar – fresh for weeks. His number one tip? Skip plastic wrap altogether. Cheese needs to breathe, and wrapping it in wax paper or parchment followed by a loose layer of foil or a container is the best way to keep it tasting like new.
“Cheese is a preserved product,” Montez says. “It’s high in acid and salt, with much of the moisture removed. It’s rare you’d need to throw out a properly stored piece.” Translation? Treat your cheese right and it’ll reward you with long-lasting flavor – no waste, no stale bites, just the perfect snack when you need it.
With Montez’s help, here’s everything you need to know about cheese, including how to store cheese, the best way to cut cheese and how to store cheese — even the fancy kind — so you never have to waste any.
Cheese is a living thing
A little extra mold on your cheese should not deter you from hanging onto it. Just scrape it off with a knife and carry on.
Murray’s Cheese
Certain cheeses, like blue cheese, wear their mold more proudly than others, but it may be helpful to think of cheese as the controlled decay of milk and know that there’s pretty much always mold involved regardless. The snowy-white rind of brie and other bloomy-rind cheeses are a type of mold, as is the mottled outer surface of a firmer cheese like Gruyere. Fear not. If you’ve ever taken a probiotic, you already inherently understand that not all microbes are bad.
Read more: Fake Parmesan Cheese Is a Bigger Problem Than You’d Think
This is all to say that, first of all, a little extra mold on your cheese shouldn’t deter you from hanging on to it. “If you see it molds up a little bit, generally you can scrape off that mold and it’s no problem,” says Montez. Because of the lack of water content in cheese, food mold can’t penetrate it very deeply like it would with many other food products. “Look out if it’s black mold or something like that,” he says, “but the thing is, it’s rare that a piece of cheese becomes unsafe to eat. It’s going to become unpalatable to you long before it’s unsafe.”
Cut your cheese so it’s easier to store
Precise cuts that leave flat surfaces make it easier to wrap your cheese so it doesn’t spoil.
David Watsky/CNET
Keeping the cheese palatable, then, is the real goal. How you store your cheese is going to have the biggest impact on its longevity — but how, when and what you cut it with can also play a part in its ongoing flavor and texture success. Precise cuts that leave flat surfaces make it easier to wrap in the most effective manner, and keeping the cheese whole for as long as possible is also helpful to its longevity.
“Minimizing the surface area (exposed to air) is going to prevent cheese from drying out or getting moldy,” says Montez. “So, for example, if you’re going to prep cheese ahead of time for a party, the longer you can leave it as a whole piece, the better,” or if you’re a habitual meal-prepper, resist the urge to cut up a whole chunk of cheese for easier access, and just cut as you go.
As for making clean cuts, “you can get done pretty much any job you need to get done with a chef’s knife,” says Montez. “When it comes to softer cheeses, a skeleton knife is good to have as something that reduces the knife’s drag, or a wire-based cheese harp which is used in a lot of cheese shops. Nowadays, you can even find cheese boards that have a built-in wire. These are really good for leaving as much of the rind intact on bloomy rind and other soft cheeses as you can.”
Wrap your cheese, but don’t use plastic
There is specialty cheese paper you can buy, but butcher or parchment paper will work just as well.
David Watsky/CNET
One of the two main goals when wrapping and storing cheese is to allow a little bit of airflow so that your fancy cheese can still breathe. “The main idea here is you don’t want to wrap it in plastic,” says Montez, “There are a lot of active microorganisms in cheese and you want to keep them alive by the time you’re going to eat it.”
If this piece of advice makes you wonder why the wedge of precut cheese you bought was in plastic wrap, the answer is marketing. “It’s mostly for display purposes,” says Montez, since you’re not likely to buy what you can’t see. “There are cheese shops where they exclusively wrap in paper, but that’s rare. If you’re a big shop that moves a lot of product, it’s not a problem if you know if the cheese is wrapped in plastic for a couple of days, but beyond that, it can be bad for the cheese.”
You can extend the life of your artisanal cheeses by rewrapping them in paper after you bring them home. “Formaticum makes great cheese paper that is specially formulated to keep the outside from drying out while allowing the cheese to breathe,” says Montez. “If you don’t have cheese paper, wrapping it in wax paper, parchment paper, butcher paper or whatever you have is good.”
Formaticum makes excellent cheese storage bags and wrapping paper.
Formaticum
It can take some serious practice to achieve the crisp folds of experienced cheesemongers with cheese paper. To help, think of your cheese as a little present (which it is, obviously), and wrap it as though you were using festive wrapping paper. “You want the paper making contact with the piece of cheese,” says Montez, “so crease as you go, and make sure all of the faces of the cheese are contacting the paper in an even, flat way.” If this seems at all intimidating, Formaticum also makes handy, cheese storage bags where no origami-level folding is required.
How and where to store cheese so it lasts longer
Cheese you intend to consume within a couple of days doesn’t necessarily even need refrigeration. And real Parmigiano Reggiano never needs to see the inside of your fridge.
David Watsky/CNET
“What you’re really trying to accomplish when you store cheese is keeping the cold air from the refrigerator from blowing on it, because that’s going to cause it to dry out more quickly,” says Montez. Wrapped cheeses should either go into a drawer within your fridge, into a corner where the fan doesn’t entirely reach, or even in a small container with the lid cracked to keep air circulation available.
Hard cheeses, or even some softer cheeses you intend to consume within a couple of days, don’t necessarily even need refrigeration. You can simply seek out something to cover them such as a cheese dome, or for the truly committed, a cheese grotto. According to Montez: “Parmigiano Reggiano never needs to see your refrigerator. You can keep it pretty much indefinitely at room temperature.” I guess that answers the question a user had on the r/AskCulinary subreddit about freezing cheese — you can do it but you don’t have to.
For more food and drink storage tips, here’s how long an open bottle of wine will last and how to store your eggs for optimal freshness.
FAQs
Why don’t I want to wrap my cheese in plastic?
Cheese is a living organism — wrapping it up in plastic kills those good microorganisms you want to keep propagating before you eat your wedge. Instead, package your cheese so that it has some airflow.
What if cheese comes wrapped in plastic?
You can unwrap the cheese and rewrap it in cheese paper at home for optimal freshness.
Do I need to throw away moldy cheese?
Not at all. You can scrape the mold off the top layer, and the rest of the cheese is perfectly safe for consumption. Cheese is a living organism, and it’s an ecosystem composed of many microbes. It’s normal for mold to grow on the surface from time to time.
Skygazers rejoice, the summer isn’t finished with delivering meteor showers to feast your eyes on. Last week saw dueling meteor showers taking over the sky, but the most popular meteor shower of the year won’t hit its peak until next week. The Perseids meteor shower is about to give you a real light show, provided you’re far enough away from light pollution to see it.
Perseids are known for their bright fireballs and plentiful meteors. The show started on July 17, and will run through Aug. 23.
The reason the Perseids meteor shower is so popular is twofold. First, it takes place in the summer, so going outside and watching it is less uncomfortable than other large meteor showers like Quadrantids, which takes place in wintery January.
The other reason is that it’s one of the most active meteor showers of the year. During its peak, the meteor shower is known to rain down as many as 100 meteors per hour, according to the American Meteor Society. These not only include your typical shooting stars, but also a higher chance for fireballs, which are meteors that explode as they enter orbit. Per NASA, fireballs tend to last longer than standard shooting stars and can come in a variety of different colors.
Perseids come to Earth courtesy of the 109P/Swift-Tuttle comet. Earth’s orbit around the sun brings it through Swift-Tuttle’s tail every year. The comet itself takes 133 years to orbit the sun. Its last perihelion — the point at which it’s the closest to the sun — was in 1992. It won’t be back until the year 2125. Until then, it leaves behind an excellent tail of dust and debris to feed us yearly meteor showers.
How to catch the Perseids meteor shower
The best time to view the Perseids is during its peak, which occurs on the evenings of Aug. 12 and 13. During this time, the shower will produce anywhere from 25 to 100 meteors per hour on average. However, since the shower officially lasts for over a month, you have a chance to see a shooting star on any given evening, provided that you’re far enough away from light pollution.
Thus, if you’re planning on watching this year’s Perseids during their peak, you’ll want to get out of the city and suburbs as far as possible. According to Bill Cooke, lead of NASA’s Meteoroid Environments Office, folks in the city might see one or two meteors from the meteor shower per hour, which is pocket change compared to what those outside city limits might see.
Regardless, once you’ve arrived at wherever you want to watch the meteors, you’ll want to direct your attention to the radiant, or the point at which the meteors will appear to originate. Like all meteors, Perseids are named after the constellation from which they appear. In this case, it’s Perseus.
Per Stellarium’s free sky map, Perseus will rise from the northeastern horizon across the continental US on the evenings of Aug. 12 and 13. It’ll then rise into the eastern sky, where it’ll remain until after sunrise. So, in short, point yourself due east and you should be OK. Binoculars may help, but we recommend against telescopes since they’ll restrict your view of the sky to a very small portion, which may hinder your meteor-sighting efforts.
The American Meteor Society also notes that the moon may give viewers some difficulty. Perseids’ peak occurs just three days after August’s full moon, so the moon will still be mostly full. Thus, it is highly probable that light pollution from the moon may reduce the number of visible meteors by a hefty margin, depending on how things go.
If your Android phone is crawling and apps feel like they’re moving through molasses, it doesn’t necessarily mean it’s time for an upgrade. Phones naturally slow down over time, but with a few simple changes, you can breathe new life into your device-and delay that expensive upgrade a little longer.
Most of the magic happens in your settings. From clearing app clutter and optimizing battery usage to disabling background processes that drain your resources, a handful of tweaks can make your phone feel snappier almost instantly. And yes, while you’re at it, give your device a proper cleaning-it’s likely dirtier than a toilet seat.
Before you drop hundreds on a new device, try this smarter approach. Whether you’re using a budget Android or a flagship model, these tips will help you cut the lag, free up space, and keep your phone running smoothly. It only takes a few minutes to refresh your phone and reclaim some of that out-of-the-box performance.
For more, check out our Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra and Galaxy S25 Plus reviews.
15 Years of Android: Comparing the Newest Android Phone to the First
See all photos
Delete all of your forgotten apps
Take a few minutes to go through your home screen or app drawer and delete any and all apps you no longer use. Not only do those apps take up precious storage, but they potentially have access to the personal information or permissions you approved when the app was first launched.
How you go about deleting an app can vary based on who makes your device, but I covered all the bases in this post. Give it a read if you don’t see an uninstall option after long-pressing on the app’s icon.
You can also uninstall apps using the Play Store.
Jason Cipriani/CNET
Eliminate old files to free up storage
After removing any old apps, free up more storage by going through the files saved on your Android phone. It’s far too easy to forget about all of the files you’ve randomly downloaded — like the takeout menu of the new place down the road or a GIF a friend sent. And those files add up. The quickest and easiest way to manage your phone’s storage is to use the Files app that comes preinstalled.
Actually, some phones use a variation of that same app. On Samsung, for example, it’s called My Files. On the Pixel lineup, it’s just Files. On the OnePlus 10 Pro, it’s File Manager — you get the point.
I recommend opening the app drawer on your phone and reaching for “files.” Odds are that will reveal whatever your phone-maker calls the app.
Start with checking the Downloads folder, where you can either delete the files you no longer want or move them somewhere like Google Drive.
Most file apps will also reveal any large files that are saved on your device. For instance, the OnePlus 10 Pro’s File Manager app has a dedicated section in the app for files that are taking up a lot of space.
Left: Files app on a Pixel 3. Right: My Files on a Galaxy S10 Plus.
Screenshots by Jason Cipriani/CNET
Tweak home screen settings for a new look
One of the best parts of Android is how much you can customize the entire look of your phone. From installing app icon packs to completely replacing the launcher your phone uses, there are plenty of options to personalize your phone.
While you can definitely jump into tweaking launchers and installing app icons, start by digging into the home screen settings your phone already provides. I do this once in a while and it’s surprising how subtle tweaks to aspects like app layout can make it feel like an entirely new phone.
Long-press on a blank area of your home screen, then select Home settings (or some variation of that). That will open the options for your home screen, where you can customize various settings.
Settings like the size of the app grid. It may seem like a small change to go from a grid of 4×5 apps to 5×5, but that extra column can make a big difference (the same can be said about shrinking the grid).
This is also where you’ll find settings for things like swiping down on the home screen to view notifications instead of having to swipe from the top of the screen.
Go through the respective settings your phone has and experiment with your home screen setup.
Your options for designing your home screen are endless.
Lexy Savvides/CNET
Optimize your device settings
Speaking of settings, now is a good time to go through and change any settings that have been annoying you. I have a roundup of settings you’ll want to change and customize on any Android phone to get the most out of it.
For example, turning on dark mode not only makes the app look better, but it saves battery life. And yes, I even show you how to stop app icons from automatically appearing on your home screen.
Device settings are easily ignored, but they’re important to get your device just right.
Andrew Hoyle/CNET
Customize your privacy options
Before you take a break, do yourself and your Android phone one last favor — double-check your privacy settings.
Open the Settings app then tap Privacy > Permissions Manager. Go through each category to see which apps currently have access to which treasure trove of your personal data. Find an app you don’t want to have access to your location? Turn it off. The same goes for contacts, calendar or camera.
It doesn’t take long to go through each section, and even if it did, it’s well worth the effort.
Use the Permissions Manager to control which apps have access to your data.
Looking for the most recent Wordle answer? Click here for today’s Wordle hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Wordle puzzle is another tough one, I thought. Even if you guess the right vowel, the consonants aren’t very common letters. If you need a new starter word, check out our list of which letters show up the most in English words. If you need hints and the answer, read on.
Today’s Wordle hints
Before we show you today’s Wordle answer, we’ll give you some hints. If you don’t want a spoiler, look away now.
Wordle hint No. 1: Repeats
Today’s Wordle answer has one repeated letter.
Wordle hint No. 2: Vowels
Today’s Wordle answer has one vowel, but it’s the repeated letter, so you’ll see it twice.
Wordle hint No. 3: Start letter
Today’s Wordle answer begins with R.
Wordle hint No. 4: Placement
The repeated vowel in today’s Wordle answer shows up in the second and fourth spot in the word.
Wordle hint No. 5: Meaning
Today’s Wordle answer can refer to something that is inflexible and cannot be bent.
TODAY’S WORDLE ANSWER
Today’s Wordle answer is RIGID.
Yesterday’s Wordle answer
Yesterday’s Wordle answer, Aug. 3, No. 1506 was LUMPY.
If you’re listening to music or a podcast and want to change the volume without unlocking your iPhone, then you probably press the buttons on the side of your phone. Those buttons can increase or decrease your volume a set amount, but they could leave you choosing between a volume that is slightly too loud or a bit too quiet. If you keep your iPhone up to date with the latest iOS releases, you can bring the volume bar back to your device’s Lock Screen, giving you more precise control over your iPhone’s volume without unlocking your device.
Apple removed the volume bar from your Lock Screen when the company released iOS 16 in 2022. But when the company released iOS 18.2 in December, that update allowed you to bring the volume bar back to your iPhone’s Lock Screen. If you like using the volume bar, you can return it to your Lock Screen.
Here’s how you can reintroduce the volume bar to your Lock Screen in a few easy steps.
How to get the volume bar on your iPhone
1. Open Settings. 2. Tap Accessibility. 3. Tap Audio & Visual under Hearing. 4. Tap the toggle next to Always Show Volume Control.
Apple/CNET
Now, the next time you’re listening to music or a podcast at the gym or on the bus, you can change the volume by using the slider on your Lock Screen.
For more on iOS 18, here’s what you need to know about iOS 18.6 and iOS 18.5, as well as our iOS 18 cheat sheet. You can also check out what you should know about iOS 26 and my first impressions of the iOS update.
Looking for the most recent Wordle answer? Click here for today’s Wordle hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Wordle puzzle might be tough. The letters aren’t ones I guess right away, and it has the least-used vowel, plus a sometimes vowel. If you need a new starter word, check out our list of which letters show up the most in English words. If you need hints and the answer, read on.
Today’s Wordle hints
Before we show you today’s Wordle answer, we’ll give you some hints. If you don’t want a spoiler, look away now.
Wordle hint No. 1: Repeats
Today’s Wordle answer has no repeated letters.
Wordle hint No. 2: Vowels
Today’s Wordle answer has one vowel and one sometimes vowel.
Wordle hint No. 3: Start letter
Today’s Wordle answer begins with L.
Wordle hint No. 4: TV time
Today’s Wordle answer was the first name of one of Wally Cleaver’s friends on the sitcom Leave It To Beaver.
Wordle hint No. 5: Meaning
Today’s Wordle answer can refer to having a number of bumps.
TODAY’S WORDLE ANSWER
Today’s Wordle answer is LUMPY.
Yesterday’s Wordle answer
Yesterday’s Wordle answer, Aug. 2, No. 1505 was DAUNT.
In a world where managing stress can be difficult, hearing that said stress can affect cortisol levels may have you wondering: Do I have a cortisol imbalance?
“Cortisol is a hormone produced by the adrenal glands that helps regulate your metabolism, blood sugar, inflammation, blood pressure and sleep-wake cycle,” explains Dr. Mark Hyman, co-founder and CMO of Function Health, which offers a cortisol lab test. “It’s most known for managing the body’s response to stress.”
But what are some signs that you might have high or low cortisol? For more information, we reached out to doctors.
What is cortisol?
“Cortisol is a hormone produced by your adrenal glands in response to stress,” says Dr. Fady Hannah Shmouni, medical director at Eli Health, which sells an instant cortisol test. “When a stressful situation arises, cortisol can help your body prepare to respond by increasing energy, focus or alertness.”
Shmouni says that in the short term, your body’s cortisol response is necessary and helpful. However, chronic stress can cause cortisol to remain elevated, which can negatively affect your organs, including your brain. For instance, elevated cortisol can disrupt sleep, increase inflammation or impair memory.
Dr. Andy Franklyn-Miller, a dual board-certified sports and exercise medicine physician, adds that cortisol is like your body’s built-in alarm system and is often called the “stress hormone.”
“Cortisol is part of the glucocorticoid family and it’s released as part of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, your body’s stress response headquarters,” Franklyn-Miller says. In the morning, your cortisol spikes to help you get moving. At night, it dips to help you rest.
Where the adrenal glands are located.
Sebastian Kaulitzki/Science Photo Library/Getty Images
Symptoms of cortisol imbalance
“Cortisol imbalances often go unnoticed until symptoms become disruptive,” explains Hyman. “If you feel wired at night, crash mid-afternoon or struggle to get restful sleep, your cortisol could be out of sync.”
Franklyn-Miller adds that it can be difficult to spot a cortisol imbalance, because it can mimic other conditions. However, telltale signs include persistent fatigue, trouble sleeping or unexplained weight changes. “Home wearables tracking heart-rate variability, such as Whoop, Oura or Apple Watch, can also give indirect clues, as low HRV often correlates with cortisol dysregulation due to stress and a reduction in HRV,” he says.
Symptoms of high cortisol
“Under normal conditions, your cortisol levels peak in the morning to help you wake up and then gradually decrease throughout the day,” Shmouni explains. “But if you experience chronic stress, your body may make excess cortisol and one of the most common ways this shows up is in disruptions to energy patterns.”
Some common symptoms of high cortisol, according to Shmouni, include nighttime sleep disturbances, energy dips caused by blood sugar spikes and crashes, and feeling constantly tired. Hyman adds that chronically high cortisol can also lead to:
Anxiety and irritability
Frequent illnesses because of a weakened immune system
High blood pressure
Sleep disruptions, fatigue
Weight gain
Over time, Hyman says, that elevated cortisol can cause more serious problems, like cardiovascular disease, insulin resistance and cognitive decline.
High cortisol is often connected to conditions like Cushing’s syndrome or chronic stress, said Franklyn-Miller, who adds that weight gain can be especially noticeable in the midsection and face (also known as “moon face”). You can experience osteoporosis and muscle loss, because cortisol can break down tissue over time, or skin changes, like thinning skin, bruising easily or stretch marks.
Symptoms of low cortisol
Hyman says that low cortisol symptoms often include:
Cravings for salt or sugar
Dizziness upon standing
Fatigue that doesn’t improve with rest
Low blood pressure
Mood swings or depression
“Low blood pressure, fogginess, weight loss and muscle weakness can occur; any serious symptoms are a sign that you should consult your doctor, as they could mean a more serious adrenal issue (like adrenal insufficiency) is at play,” Shmouni says.
Franklyn-Miller said low cortisol is often seen in Addison’s disease. People with Addison’s disease may notice a darkening of the skin.
Xavier Lorenzo/Getty Images
What causes a cortisol imbalance?
“There’s no single cause of cortisol imbalance — it’s a result of multiple stressors piling up,” says Hyman. “This can include: chronic psychological stress (work, relationships, trauma), poor sleep habits, blood sugar imbalances, overtraining without recovery, inflammation, infections and nutrient deficiencies, especially B vitamins and magnesium.”
Franklyn-Miller explains that the HPA axis is designed for short-term stress, so constant, long-term activation or suppression can lead to an imbalance.
Stress
If you deal with long periods of stress — caused by factors like a high-pressure job, financial struggles or family responsibilities — Shmouni says that cortisol can stay elevated in the body instead of fluctuating normally throughout the day.
“This can create a cycle whereby elevated cortisol is not appropriately managed, resulting in prolonged cortisol release,” he says. “If we don’t see that someone’s cortisol levels decline throughout the day, with a normal awakening response in the morning, it can be a sign that cortisol is dysregulated.”
Certain medications or medical conditions
If you deal with chronically elevated cortisol levels, Shmouni says that this may be a side effect of medications like steroid inhalers, for example. On the other hand, Franklyn-Miller reports that long-term use of corticosteroid drugs (e.g., prednisone) can shut down natural cortisol production, causing low cortisol.
As Franklyn-Miller mentioned earlier, certain medical conditions, like Cushing’s syndrome, can also cause high cortisol. “Cushing’s syndrome, caused by tumors or excessive steroid use, floods the body with cortisol,” he says.
Low cortisol may be caused by adrenal insufficiency. “Conditions like Addison’s disease damage the adrenal glands, slashing cortisol production,” Franklyn-Miller says. Autoimmune disorders can also cause low cortisol, as the body attacks its own adrenal glands and reduces cortisol output.
Your lifestyle: sleep, exercise and nutrition
“Poor sleep, overexercising or a high-sugar diet can spike cortisol by stressing the body,” says Franklyn-Miller.
When planning your workout, consider your stress and sleep. If you had trouble sleeping last night and are dealing with high stress at work, it may not be the best time for an intense workout. If you find that a workout leaves you feeling fatigued or sick, you may be going too hard.
In addition to a high-sugar diet, alcohol and caffeine can also affect cortisol levels. For most adults, the FDA recommends 400 milligrams of caffeine or two to three 12-fluid-ounce cups of coffee. However, certain medications or conditions can make someone more sensitive to caffeine so be sure to consult your doctor if you’re unsure.
According to the American Heart Association, it’s advised to limit alcohol to two drinks per day for men and one drink per day for women. The National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism explains that in the US, a standard drink contains 14 grams or about 0.6 fluid ounces of “pure” ethanol.
For sugar, the AHA states that men shouldn’t consume more than nine teaspoons of added sugar daily. For women, consumption should be no more than six teaspoons of sugar per day.
Ensure you’re eating a balanced diet filled with colorful fruits and vegetables, leafy greens, whole grains and protein. And of course, make sure you’re drinking enough water.
Maryna Terletska/Getty Images
How to regulate cortisol
“Regulating cortisol is like tuning an instrument — it takes mindful adjustments to your lifestyle,” says Franklyn-Miller, who recommends the follow strategies:
Prioritize sunlight exposure after waking up: “Only 20 minutes can stimulate your circadian release of cortisol, helping with body balance.”
Focus on sleep: “Stick to a consistent sleep schedule.” In general, 7 to 9 hours of sleep is recommended but it depends on your age.
Manage stress: “Practices like mindfulness meditation, yoga or diaphragmatic breathing can calm the HPA axis.”
Exercise smart: “Moderate exercise, like walking or yoga, balances cortisol, but overtraining can spike it. Aim for 30 minutes most days.”
Eat balanced meals: “Avoid high-sugar diets, which can elevate cortisol. Focus on whole foods, like vegetables, lean proteins and healthy fats. Omega-3s, found in fish, may lower cortisol.” Hyman also recommends prioritizing fiber.
Limit caffeine: “Too much coffee can mimic stress, raising cortisol. Try cutting back after noon.”
When should you see a doctor about cortisol levels?
“If you experience significant symptoms that interrupt your ability to participate in daily activities, or if you experience extreme changes in appetite, energy, mood or sleep, bring this up with your medical provider so that they can work with you to manage symptoms and make lifestyle adaptations,” says Shmouni.
Franklyn-Miller adds, “Also, if lifestyle changes (better sleep, stress management) don’t improve symptoms after a few months, or if you’re on long-term steroids, get checked.” He explains that the gold standard for checking cortisol is through lab tests for blood, saliva or urine samples. For these, consult your doctor.
Shmouni says that common signs of dysregulated cortisol include physical aches and pains, feeling mentally “checked out,” appetite changes, chronic fatigue or low energy, difficulty concentrating or brain fog, increased use of alcohol or caffeine, stretch marks, weight changes, mood swings or irritabilities, trouble sleeping or feeling exhausted even after a full night of rest. While each of these symptoms alone is not specific to cortisol deficiency, the combination may be more suggestive.
“That said, while these signs can indicate your cortisol is working overtime, short-term changes don’t necessarily equate to dysregulated hormones,” Shmouni says. “To determine if you’re experiencing chronic dysregulation, a further hormone evaluation (whether through an at-home test or a lab at your doctor’s office) might be needed.”
Symptoms of too much cortisol include nighttime sleep disturbances, energy dips, constant fatigue, anxiety and irritability, weight gain, high blood pressure and frequent illnesses caused by a weakened immune system.
Adjusting your lifestyle can correct cortisol levels. Focus on sleep, stress management, a balanced diet, the right amount of exercise and limiting caffeine.
Weeks before we started our kitchen remodel, we asked for advice from friends and neighbors about how they survived the experience. But nothing truly prepares you for the daily inconvenience of not having a fully functioning kitchen. While my kids would’ve voted to eat at a local taqueria whenever possible, I was determined to continue cooking at home — and make better than passable meals everyone would eat. After a failed attempt at using a microwave (I don’t want to talk about it), I bought a Duxtop portable induction cooktop burner, put it on the workbench in the garage and made every meal on it through the rest of the remodel.
The Duxtop portable cooktop typically goes for $139 but right now you can get it for about $10 off at Amazon.
This story is part of Amazon Prime Day, CNET’s guide to everything you need to know and how to find the best deals.
How does an induction cooktop burner work?
I didn’t really understand until I got one but an induction cooktop generates heat by creating a magnetic field that flows into a metal pan. Not all metal pans will work — my aluminum pans remained as cold as my disconnected gas range. Instead, you need a pan or pot made of a magnetic metal like cast iron or stainless steel. I have several enameled cast iron pots that worked great and I bought a Tramontina stainless steel 10-inch pan for frying.
I started simply, making pasta, using sauce out of a jar, but by the end of the remodel, I was making Baja fish tacos from scratch and homemade Bolognese sauce. And I was surprised how much I loved cooking on it. My family started avoiding me while I was in the garage cooking because I’d boast about how amazing induction was. “Look!” I’d tell them. “The cooktop stays cool!” Or, “Check this out! When I take the pot off the cooktop, it pauses heating!”
During a kitchen-warming party we threw for our neighbors after our new kitchen was finished, I learned our friend across the street had the same love for her induction cooktop. We huddled like allies, devoted to this magnetic object.
Now that the kitchen is done, I’m thinking of ways I can keep using the cooktop. Maybe, when I’m cooking a big meal and need an extra burner, I can set it up on the counter. Maybe I can use it outdoors during a cookout. Or maybe I can give it to one of my kids as they set up their own home. I actually love it so much, when it comes time to swap out our gas range, I’m going to get an induction cooktop.
For more recommendations about kitchen staples we’ve personally tested and loved, read about our favorite cookware sets and our favorite chef’s knife.
Impulse Buys Under $25 on Amazon That Make Surprisingly Great Gifts
Also called interval walking training, a trend known as “Japanese walking” is having a moment. According to The Washington Post, though it’s trending now, Japanese walking isn’t new. It originated from a 2007 study in Japan that found that high-intensity interval walking may protect middle-aged and older people from dealing with increases in blood pressure and decreases in muscle strength and peak oxygen uptake.
Recently, a July 2025 study also concluded that prefrail and frail older adults who increased their walking by 14 steps per minute had a 10% increase in the odds of improvement during a 6-minute walk test. This represents progress in mobility, endurance or function.
With these promising study outcomes, you may ask yourself: Is walking exercise? We asked personal trainers for their expert insights.
Is walking exercise?
Yes, walking is exercise, and experts across physical and mental health disciplines agree. Sergii Putsov, a certified personal trainer with a PhD in sports science, says, “Walking for just 30 minutes every day can lower your risk of severe cardiovascular disease and dementia.” April Crowe, a licensed clinical social worker at Paramount Wellness Retreat, adds that “walking in natural environments also boosts cognitive function and creativity, thereby providing a unique kind of therapy.”
Does walking do more than build your heart’s strength? As it turns out, yes. The Mayo Clinic has identified additional health benefits of walking. According to the medical center, walking can improve muscle endurance, boost energy, lower blood pressure, strengthen bones and support the immune system. You can see benefits both outdoors and on a treadmill.
Walking alone can also change the shape of your body. In 2017, the Journal of Physical Activity and Health did a meta-analysis of 22 clinical trials related to walking and health. The results revealed that brisk walking reduced waist circumference, fat mass and body fat percentage to a “clinically significant” degree in men and women under age 50 living with obesity. It can also lead to overall weight loss. So, that “hot girl walk” you take could cause noticeable changes to your body if you stick to it.
Is walking enough exercise on its own?
Walking can certainly be combined with other activities as part of a circuit. You can also walk as a warm-up for jogging or cycling. Walking on its own can deliver results and may have fewer negative impacts on your body than other high-impact sports.
Gregor Parella, also a CPT, says of walking for walking’s sake: “It is much better than jogging because jogging can put undue pressure on your ankles, especially if you’re heavily built. On the other hand, brisk walking is one of the best exercises because it tones your leg and calf muscles without the same pressure on joints.
Even walking at a slow pace is better than being stationary at home, but a faster pace will also hasten the health benefits. A 2019 study in Atherosclerosis found that “walking pace was inversely associated with the risk of death and development of cardiovascular disease” in male physicians with an average age of 67.8. In other words, the faster you walk, the lower your risk of death and cardiovascular disease.
Regarding how long you should walk, the US Department of Health and Human Services recommends at least 150 minutes of moderate-intensity physical activity each week, or 30 minutes a day for five days, for substantial health benefits. This can include walking briskly at 2.5 mph to 4 mph. Walking at a slow or leisurely pace (2 mph or less) is considered a light-intensity activity, which is likely to produce some health benefits compared to sedentary behavior, but not as many benefits as walking briskly.
Stephanie Noritz/Getty Images
Walking health benefits
There are many health benefits to walking. Not only can the activity lower cortisol levels, like all forms of exercise, and give you some fresh air, but you may see various tangible improvements in the following health indicators:
Better sleep. Low-impact physical activity can lead to more fitful sleep. One small 2020 study published in Sleep Health found that increasing daily steps led to better quality sleep, especially among women.
Lower risk of type 2 diabetes. According to the American Diabetes Association, walking at least 30 minutes per day could help you stave off type 2 diabetes. Increasing your daily step count may keep your glucose levels in check.
Lower blood pressure. A 2022 study from the American Family Physician reported that a regular walking schedule with moderate intensity can lower systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure and heart rate.
Improved balance. Remaining steady on your feet is increasingly important for your health as you age. Harvard Health Publishing states that walking builds lower body strength, which improves balance.
Lower risk of cancer. Walking may even reduce your risk of some cancers. A 2013 study out of Cancer Epidemiology, Biomarkers & Prevention found that postmenopausal women who walked at least seven hours per week had a 14% lower risk of getting breast cancer than women who walked three hours or less every week.
Tips for taking your walking to the next level
If you hit a plateau with your walking routine, you can add some intensity to your walk without having to jog or switch activities. Making your walk more rigorous could increase the number of calories burned by giving your body a new challenge. Ways to up the ante on your daily walk include:
Increase the time of your walk. If you’re currently walking 30 minutes a day, add more time in 10- or 15-minute intervals. Putsov recommends walking at least 45 minutes a day if your goal is weight loss.
Increase your speed. You can also add more intensity by picking up speed. Free fitness workout apps with GPS enabled, including Nike Run Club, can help you track distance and time to calculate your pace.
Wear wrist or ankle weights. Tying on weights like Bala Bangles can kick your walk up a notch. These types of weights can be worn on your ankles or wrists to provide resistance.
Alternate your pace. Both CPTs we spoke to recommended walking intervals to make walking more challenging. Try walking for five minutes at a regular pace, then five minutes of speed walking, and so on.
Add an incline to your route. Are you walking on a flat surface for most of your route? Find a hill to increase the difficulty of your trek. You may also want to add retro-walking (walking backward) up an incline.
Getty Images
How to stay motivated while walking
It’s easy to get excited about a new workout routine initially, and it’s just as natural to get bored or frustrated when you stop seeing major results. You may find music and podcasts helpful because they make time appear to pass more quickly. Just make sure that these sounds are background noise so that you can still be aware of your environment and those around you.
Crowe also recommends setting clear, achievable goals. She says it can help to remind yourself about how far you’ve come, explaining, “Recording all achievements made during walks, whether through mobile apps or personal journals, will act as a reminder,” which can push you harder next time.
If going it alone is making it harder to stay on track, try walking with a partner or seeing if there is a walking club in your area. Parella says a walking buddy can increase your sense of accountability and make the experience more fun. You may also try new scenery to stay motivated during a walk. Getting some sun will increase your vitamin D intake, which may improve your mood.
Walking safety tips
Before you hit the sidewalk on your daily walk or hot girl walk, be sure you’re well-equipped for the task. While a neighborhood or lakeside stroll may seem harmless, you still want to set yourself up for a safe return.
Bring water. In moderate temperatures, REI recommends drinking one half-liter (about 17 ounces) of water every hour. If it’s hot outside, you should increase your water intake. Becoming dehydrated on a walk could leave you feeling dizzy or sick, so make sure you bring your water bottle.
Wear the right shoes. You don’t want to be taken out of commission halfway through your walk because of a sprained ankle or serious blisters. Get fitted at an athletic store for quality walking shoes that fit your foot shape and arches.
Let someone know your location. When you’re walking in nature or at night, make sure someone can find you. Sharing your location on Google Maps is one easy way to accomplish this.
Wear reflective gear at night. If you’re walking early in the morning or after dusk, wear a reflective jacket or vest. You can also get reflective tape and add it to your shoes and the back of your pants.
Use the sidewalks. The US Department of Transportation states that you should always walk on the sidewalk. If there is no sidewalk, walk facing traffic.
Plan your route. To avoid getting lost or wandering into areas that may be unlit or unsafe, plan your route ahead of time. This will help you remain aware of your surroundings while allowing you to give someone your exact location before you head out.
Carry your phone. If you’re walking alone — especially at night — make sure you carry your phone in case of an emergency. However, do not let your phone distract you to the point where you’re not alert and aware of your surroundings.
Are you on the hunt for new games but are tired of running out of options? Or are you someone who always takes advantage of free stuff? We don’t blame you. With increasing game prices and tariffs on the rise, you’ll want to save money whenever possible. Thankfully, there’s a place you can go where you’re able to nab free stuff while also giving you the choice to purchase other affordable games. Enter: the Epic Games Store.
After the huge success of Fortnite, a battle royale game that partnered with major brands like Marvel, Star Wars and DC, Epic decided to take things even further. In 2019, it launched its very own store to compete with Valve’s Steam. Unlike Steam, it offers free games every week, ranging from adorable indie titles to big-budget AAA hits.
But how do you access these free games? Is there something you need to do first? We have the answers you’re looking for. First, create a free Epic Games account. Once you’ve finished signing up, check out the free games section on the Epic Games Store each Thursday at 8 a.m. PT (11 a.m ET, 4 p.m BST) to discover the picks of the week.
It’s important to know that the number of free games you receive each week may differ but you are always guaranteed to receive at least one. That said, there may be some breaks during holidays, or occasions where the games themselves are not revealed until the day of. There are also occasions, such as the lead-up to Christmas, where Epic releases new free games every single day. But you know what the best part is? These downloaded games are yours to keep — forever!
The Epic Games Store is exclusively available for PC, so console gamers cannot access the weekly free games offered there. Additionally, while the store also provides games for Mac, compatibility may vary. So make sure you verify the game can run on your device before you download it.
What’s the new free game in the Epic Games Store this week? (July 31 to Aug. 7)
Keylocker
If you’re a fan of rhythm and turn-based games, but also want to give a middle finger to the system, then you’ll want to pay attention to Keylocker.
Epic Games Store/Moonana Games
Developed by Moonana Games and published by Serenity Forge, Keylocker is a Cyberpunk turn-based rhythm JRPG that puts players in the shoes of electric singer, B0B0. Only there’s just one teensy, eensy problem: They live in a world where music is outlawed. As a singer, you can see why that might be a kick in the teeth for ol’ B0B0.
Features include classic turn-based combat but with a rhythmic twist. You’ll have to master the timing of your shots, parries and blocks to kick your enemies to the curb. Better yet, there are zero random encounters, so you’ll be able to play through the game without having to worry about relentless grinding.
Keylocker also offers plenty of customization options. Not only are you able to change equipment, weapons and skills, but you’ll also be able to shape B0B0’s path in their own way, with unique skill trees and storylines depending on the choices you make throughout the game’s storyline. What’s not to like?
And if you’re looking for a game that you can play again and again with different choices, then look no further. Depending on the decisions you make, for example, befriending a citizen instead of betraying them, you can drastically change the course of the story for B0B0 and the other characters you meet along the way.
Usually $20, Keylocker is available free now via the Epic Games Store. At the time of writing, a review score is not available. However, on rival storefront Steam, its overall rating is “Very Positive,” with its most recent score being “Mostly Positive.”
Pilgrims
If you’ve always wanted to travel and meet extraordinary people without actually leaving the house, then Amanita Design’s Pilgrims is just the game for you.
Epic Games Store/Amanita Design
Pilgrims describes itself as an adventure game that thrives on “playfulness.” While you can easily finish the game in an hour or two, the real reward is meeting the numerous inhabitants you come across while playing. Each has their own unique trouble that they want your help in solving, but it’s not one solution that fits all sort of deal — you’ll need to explore to find out the many ways you can help others.
Amanita Design encourages players to replay Pilgrims more than once to get all 45 achievements and, let’s be honest, if you’re a sucker for a game with a cute hand-drawn style set in a unique and humorous world, why wouldn’t you want to jump in again and again?
Usually $6, Pilgrims is now available free via the Epic Games Store. At the time of writing, a review score is not available. However, on rival storefront Steam, its overall rating is “Overwhelmingly Positive,” with its most recent score being “Very Positive.”
What will be free in the Epic Games Store next week? (Aug. 7 to Aug. 14)
112 Operator
If you want one of the most stressful jobs in the world without the weight of actually having lives depending on you, then Jutsu Games’ emergency service simulator will be well-worth your time.
Jutsu Games/Epic Games Store
As an emergency number operator, it’s up to you to put out several fires at once (figuratively and literally) and ensure that people get the help they need. This can range from something as simple as sending the fire service to help Timmy rescue his kitty from a tree to dispatching an ambulance to assist people involved in a road accident.
If it sounds simple, let me reassure you that’s far from the case. While players can pick and choose the width and length of the area they cover (a small town versus a bustling city, for example), they also have to pay attention to several other factors when making those all-important calls. I’m talking about the weather, traffic and the changing of seasons. All of these have some level of added danger you need to be mindful of.
Players can also choose whether to play the game in its challenging Career Mode or put themselves through their paces in a more relaxed Free Game. The latter gives you more freedom to do whatever you wish, but the former allows you to move up the corporate ladder by issuing challenges that are fun but do enough to keep you on your toes.
Usually $25, 112 Operator is will be available free next week via the Epic Games Store. At the time of writing, a review score is not available. However, on rival storefront Steam, its overall rating is “Very Positive,” with its most recent score also being “Very Positive.”
Road Redemption
Let’s be honest: Who hasn’t wanted to be part of a motorcycle gang, grab a bat and hit a lot of things? Well, now you can with Pixel Dash Studios’ racing-beat-em-up, Road Redemption.
Road Redemption/Epic Games Store
Describing itself as an action racing game, Road Redemption is, in my humble opinion, much more than that. You, as the ultimate motorcyclist in this virtual world, are the leader of your gang and are tasked with leading your posse in an epic journey across the country. Only, as you might have expected, it isn’t quite as simple because other gangs are willing to try to take you out (and we don’t mean on a date) along the way.
Alongside racing cross-country, players will get the chance to take in multiple activities such as assassinations, robberies and other challenges. The downside is that you only have one life, so if some jerk hits you with a lead pipe and kills you dead, it’s game over … for a little while. With the experience you’ve earned collecting loot and doing jobs, you can upgrade your new character, bike and weapons.
Better yet, you don’t have to ride alone. Road Redemption also comes with four-player split-screen co-op, meaning you and your friends can ride out and deliver racing beat-em-up action together.
Usually $20, Road Redemption will be available free next week via the Epic Games Store. At the time of writing, a review score is not available. However, on rival storefront Steam, its overall rating is “Very Positive,” with its most recent score also being “Very Positive.”
Previous free games in the Epic Games Store
Curious whether your favorite game has been selected as part of Epic’s free game of the week in the past, or wondering what you’ve missed? We have you covered.
Epic Games Store free games in 2025
112 Operator (Aug. 7 to Aug. 14)
Road Redemption (Aug 7. to Aug. 14)
Keylocker (July 31 to Aug. 7)
Pilgrims (July 31 to Aug. 7)
Legion TD 2 (July 24 to July 31)
Sid Meier’s Civilization VI (July 17 to July 24)
Figment 2: Creed Valley (July 10 to July 17)
Sky Racket (July 10 to July 17)
Backpack Hero (July 3 to July 10)
Figment (July 3 to July 10)
Sable (June 26 to July 3)
The Operator (June 19 to 26)
Two Point Hospital (June 12 to June 19)
Ogu and the Secret Forest (June 5 to June 12)
Deathloop (June 5 to June 12)
Tiny Tina’s Wonderland (May 29 to June 5)
Limbo (May 29 to June 5)
Deliver At All Costs (May 22 to May 29)
Gigapocalypse (May 22 to May 29)
Sifu (May 22 to May 29)
Dead Island 2 (May 15 to May 22)
Happy Game (May 15 to May 22)
Touch Type Tale (May 8 to May 15)
Deadtime Defenders (May 8 to May 15)
Super Space Club (May 1 to May 8)
Chuchel (April 24 to May 1)
Albion Online (April 24 to May 1)
Botanicula (April 17 to April 24)
Firestone Online Idle RPG (April 17 to April 24)
River City Girls (April 10 to April 17)
Idle Champions of the Forgotten Realms (April 10 to April 17)
Arcadgeddon (April 10 to April 17)
Cat Quest II (April 3 to April 10)
Cat Quest (March 27 to April 3)
Neko Ghost, Jump (March 27 to April 3)
Jurassic World Evolution 2 (March 20 to March 27)
Mortal Shell (March 13 to March 20)
World of Warships: Anniversary Party Favor DLC (March 13 to March 20)
Them’s Fighting Herds (March 6 to March 13)
Mages of Mystralia (Feb. 27 to March 6)
World War Z Aftermath (Feb. 20 to Feb. 27)
Garden Story (Feb. 20 to Feb. 27)
F1 Manager 2024 (Feb. 13 to Feb. 20)
Humankind (Feb. 6 to Feb. 13)
Beyond Blue (Feb. 6 to Feb. 13)
Undying (Jan. 30 to Feb. 6)
Behind the Frame: The Finest Scenery (Jan. 23 to Jan. 30)
Escape Academy (Jan. 16 to Jan. 23)
Turmoil (Jan. 9 to Jan. 16)
Hell Let Loose (Jan. 2 to Jan. 9)
Kingdom Come Deliverance (Jan. 1)
Epic Games Store free games in 2024
Sifu (Dec. 31)
[Redacted] (Dec. 30 to Dec. 31)
Orcs Must Die 3 (Dec. 29 to Dec. 30)
Kill Knight (Dec. 28 to Dec. 29)
Hot Wheels Unleashed (Dec. 27 to Dec. 28)
Ghostrunner 2 (Dec. 26 to Dec. 27)
Control (Dec. 25 to Dec. 26)
Dredge (Dec. 24 to Dec. 25)
Darker and Darker: Legendary Status (Dec. 23 to Dec. 24)
Wizard of Legend (Dec. 22 to Dec. 23)
TerraTech (Dec. 21 to Dec. 22)
Astrea: Six Sided Oracles (Dec. 20 to Dec. 21)
Vampire Survivors (Dec. 19 to Dec. 20)
The Lord of the Rings: Return to Moria (Dec. 12 to Dec. 19)
Bus Simulator 21 Next Stop, Lego Star Wars: The Skywalker Saga (Dec. 5 to Dec. 12)
Brotato (Nov. 28 to Dec. 5)
Beholder (Nov. 21 to Nov. 28)
Castlevania Anniversary Collection; Snakebird Complete (Nov. 14 to Nov. 21)
Gigantic: Rampage Edition; The Callisto Protocol (Aug. 22 to Aug. 29)
Death’s Gambit: Afterlife (Aug. 15 to Aug. 22)
Cygni: All Guns Blazing; DNF Duel (Aug. 8 to Aug. 15)
Lumbearjack (Aug. 1 to Aug. 8)
F.I.S.T.: Forged in Shadow Torch; Olympics Go! Paris 2024 Exclusive Outfits Pack (July 25 to Aug. 1)
Maid of Sker; Arcade Paradise (July 18 to July 25)
Floppy Knights (July 11 to July 18)
The Falconeer (July 4 to July 11)
Sunless Skies: Sovereign Edition (June 27 to July 4)
Rumble Club Free Game of the Week Bonus; Freshly Frosted (June 20 to June 27)
Redout 2; Idle Champions of the Forgotten Realms (June 13 to June 20)
Marvel’s Midnight Suns (June 6 to June 13)
Chivalry 2 (May 30 to June 6)
Farming Simulator 22 (May 23 to May 30)
Dragon Age: Inquisition – Game of the Year Edition (May 16 to May 23)
Firestone Free Offer; Circus Electrique (May 9 to May 16)
Orcs Must Die! 3, Cat Quest II (May 2 to May 9)
Lisa: Definitive Edition, Industria (April 25 to May. 2)
Town of Salem 2; The Big Con (April 18 to April 25)
Ghostrunner (April 11 to April 18)
Thief; The Outer Worlds: Spacer’s Choice Edition (April 4 to April 11)
Islets (March 28 to April 4)
Invincible Presents: Atom Eve; Call of the Wild: The Angler (March 21 to March 28)
The Bridge; Deus Ex: Mankind Divided (March 14 to March 21)
Astro Duel 2 (March 7 to March 14)
Aerial_Knight’s Never Yield (Feb. 29 to March 7)
Super Meat Boy Forever (Feb. 22 to Feb. 29)
Dakar Desert Rally (Feb. 15 to Feb. 22)
Lost Castle; Doki Doki Literature Club Plus (Feb. 8 to Feb. 15)
Doors: Paradox (Feb. 1 to Feb. 8)
Infinifactory (Jan. 25 to Feb. 1)
Love (Jan. 18 to Jan. 25)
Sail Forth (Jan. 11 to Jan. 18)
Marvel’s Guardians of the Galaxy (Jan. 4 to Jan. 11)
A Plague Tale: Innocence (Jan. 3 to Jan. 4)
20 Minutes Till Dawn (Jan. 2 to Jan. 3)
Escape Academy (Jan. 1 to Jan. 2)
Epic Games Store free games of 2023
Ghostrunner (Dec. 31, 2023, to Jan. 1, 2024)
Saints Row (Dec. 30 to Dec. 31)
Snakebird Complete (Dec. 29 to Dec. 30)
Cat Quest (Dec. 28 to Dec. 29)
Cursed to Golf (Dec. 27 to Dec. 28)
Human Resource Machine (Dec. 26 to Dec. 27)
The Outer Worlds: Spacer’s Choice Edition (Dec. 25 to Dec. 26)
Ghostwire: Tokyo (Dec. 24 to Dec. 25)
Fallout 3: Game of the Year Edition (Dec. 23 to Dec. 24)
Art of Rally (Dec. 22 to Dec. 23)
Melvor Idle (Dec. 21 to Dec. 22)
DNF Duel (Dec. 20 to Dec. 21)
Destiny 2: Legacy Collection (Dec. 13 to Dec. 20)
Predecessor, Gigabash (Dec. 7 to Dec.13)
Mighty Fight Federation; Jitsu Squad (Nov. 30 to Dec. 7)
Deliver Us Mars (Nov. 23 to Nov. 30)
Surviving the Aftermath, Earthlock (Nov. 16 to Nov. 23)
Golden Light (Nov. 9 to Nov. 16)
Turnip Boy Commits Tax Evasion (Nov. 2 to Nov. 9)
The Evil Within 2; Tandem: A Tale of Shadows (Oct. 26 to Nov. 2)
The Evil Within; Eternal Threads (Oct. 19 to Oct. 26)
Q.U.B.E. Ultimate Bundle; Blazing Sails (Oct. 12 to Oct. 19)
Godlike Burger (Oct. 5 to Oct. 12)
Soulstice; Model Builder (Sept. 28 to Oct. 5)
The Forest Quartet; Out of Line (Sept. 21 to Sept. 28)
911 Operator (Sept. 14 to Sept. 21)
Spelldrifter (Sept. 7 to Sept. 14)
Cave Story Plus (Aug. 31 to Sept. 7)
Homeworld: Deserts of Kharak (Aug. 24 to Aug. 31)
Dodo Peak; Black Book (Aug. 17 to Aug. 24)
Orwell: Keeping an Eye on You; Europa Universalis IV (Aug. 10 to Aug.17)
Loop Hero, Bloons TD 6 (Aug. 3 to Aug. 10)
Severed Steel; Homeworld Remastered Collection (July 27 to Aug. 3)
The Elder Scrolls Online; Murder by Numbers (July 20 to July 27)
Train Valley 2 (July 13 to July 20)
Grime (July 6 to July 13)
The Dungeon of Naheulbeuk: The Amulet of Chaos (June 29 to July 6)
The Hunter: Call of the Wild; Idle Champions of the Forgotten Realms (June 22 to June 29)
Guacamelee 2; Guacamelee Super Turbo Championship Edition (June 15 to June 22)
Payday 2 (June 8 to June 15)
Midnight Ghost Hunt (June 1 to June 8)
Fallout: New Vegas Ultimate Edition (May 25 to June 1)
Death Stranding (May 18 to May 25)
The Sims 4 The Daring Lifestyle Bundle (May 11 to May 18)
Kao the Kangaroo; Horizon Chase Turbo, Against All Odds (May 4 to May 11)
Poker Club; Breathedge (April 27 to May 4)
Never Alone (Kisima Ingitchuna); Beyond Blue (April 20 to April 27)
Second Extinction; Mordhau (April 13 to April 20)
Shapez; Dying Light: The Following — Enhanced Edition (April 6 to April 13)
Tunche; The Silent Age (March 30 to April 6)
World of Warships Starter Pack: Ishizuchi; Chess Ultra (March 23 to March 30)
Warhammer 40,000: Gladius — Relics of War (March 16 to March 23)
Call of the Sea (March 9 to March 16)
Rise of Industry (March 2 to March 9)
Duskers (Feb. 23 to March 2)
Warpips (Feb. 16 to Feb. 23)
Recipe for Disaster (Feb. 9 to Feb. 16)
Dishonored: Death of the Outsider; City of Gangsters (Feb. 2 to Feb. 9)
Hell Is Others, Adios (Jan. 26 to Feb. 2)
Epistory: Typing Chronicles (Jan. 19 to Jan. 26)
Gamedec: Definitive Edition; First Class Trouble; Divine Knockout (Jan. 12 to Jan. 19)
Shadow Tactics: Aiko’s Choice; Kerbal Space Program (Jan. 5 to Jan. 12)
Epic Games Store free games of 2022
Eximus: Seize the Frontline; Dishonored: Definitive Edition (Dec. 29, 2022, to Jan. 5, 2023)
To get free games from the Epic Store each week, you must sign up and make an account.
To register as a user for the Epic Store, first head to the Epic Games website. At the top right-hand corner, click the Sign In button and then Create Account at the bottom of the page.
The Epic Store is different to Steam, so the games that you own on the Epic Store will not be available to play on Steam. If you want to play the free games you’ve downloaded from the Epic Store, you must play them via Epic’s launcher.
You may qualify for compensation even if you didn’t suffer major losses.
CNET/AT&T
If you were an AT&T customer impacted by the company’s 2019 or 2024 data breaches, you could soon see some money headed your way – even if you’ve already left the carrier. A newly proposed settlement could see AT&T shell out a massive $177 million to affected users, with some individuals eligible for up to $5,000 in compensation.
The settlement, which received preliminary approval from a federal judge in June, is meant to resolve two class-action lawsuits tied to the breaches. If your personal data was compromised in either incident, it’s worth checking your eligibility. Submitting a claim could put real money back in your pocket, even if your time with AT&T is long behind you.
The settlement will prioritize larger payments to customers who suffered damages that are “fairly traceable” to the data leaks. It will also provide bigger payments to those affected by the larger of the two leaks, which began in 2019. While the company is working toward a settlement, it has continued to deny that it was “responsible for these criminal acts.”
For all the details we have about the settlement right now, keep reading, and for more info about other recent settlements, find out how to claim Apple’s Siri privacy settlement and see if you’re eligible for 23andMe’s privacy breach settlement.
What happened with these AT&T data breaches?
AT&T confirmed the two data breaches last year, announcing an investigation into the first in March before confirming it in May and confirming the second in July.
The first of the confirmed breaches began in 2019. The company revealed that about 7.6 million current and 65.4 million former account holders had their data exposed to hackers, including names, Social Security numbers and dates of birth. The company began investigating the situation last year after it reported that customer data had appeared on the dark web.
The second breach began in April of 2024, when a hacker broke into AT&T cloud storage provider Snowflake and accessed 2022 call and text records for almost all of the company’s US customers, about 109 million in all. The company stressed that no names were attached to the stolen data. Two individuals were arrested in connection with the breach.
Both of these incidents sparked a wave of class action lawsuits alleging corporate neglect on the part of AT&T in failing to sufficiently protect its customers.
Who is eligible to file a claim for the AT&T data breach settlement?
As of now, we know that the settlement will pay out to any current or former AT&T customer whose data was accessed in one of these data breaches, with higher payments reserved for those who can provide documented proof that they suffered damages directly resulting from their data being stolen.
If you’re eligible, you should receive a notice about it, either by email or a physical letter in the mail, sometime in the coming months. The company expects that the claims process will begin on Aug. 4, 2025.
How much will the AT&T data breach payments be?
You’ll have to “reasonably” prove damages caused by these data breaches to be eligible for the highest and most prioritized payouts. For the 2019 breach, those claimants can receive up to $5,000. For the Snowflake breach in 2024, the max payout will be $2,500. It’s not clear at this time how the company might be handling customers who’ve been affected by both breaches.
AT&T will focus on making those payments first, and whatever’s left of the $177 million settlement total will be disbursed to anyone whose data was accessed, even without proof of damages. Because these payouts depend on how many people get the higher amounts first, we can’t say definitively how much they will be.
When could I get paid from the AT&T data breach settlement?
AT&T expects that payments will start to go out sometime in early 2026. Exact dates aren’t available but the recent court order approving the settlement lists a notification schedule of Aug. 4, to Oct. 17, 2025.
The deadline for submitting a claim is currently set at Nov. 18, 2025. The final approval of the settlement needs to be given at a Dec. 3, 2025, court hearing for payments to begin.
Stay tuned to this piece in the coming months to get all the new details as they emerge.
For more money help, check out CNET’s daily tariff price impact tracker.
I remember the days of having a gym membership before the Covid-19 pandemic, but as life took turns, I thought I could stay active and save money by buying an exercise bike, subscribing to Peloton and working out in my home garage.
After the pandemic ended, I expanded my at-home gym with weights. Looking back, was it the best money move? Is it cheaper to pay for a gym membership or build a home gym? The answer may seem obvious, but it surprised me after considering a lot of factors.
A home gym and a gym membership both have their perks. At home, you’ll have the flexibility to work out anytime without spending extra time commuting or waiting to use equipment. You won’t be on the hook for annual gym fees, and you may even get some money back if you ever resell your equipment.
But if you’re worried about feeling motivated enough to exercise at home, a gym membership may be a better fit. It offers plenty of equipment, a change of scenery and a chance to create community through group fitness classes.
I compared the average costs for popular gym memberships with the average costs of building a home gym and consulted with a CNET fitness expert to find out which choice is actually cheaper.
How much does a gym membership cost compared with an at-home gym?
Starting an at-home gym from scratch comes with a hefty up-front cost. However, compared with the $15 to $30 you’ll pay for a monthly gym membership, the membership seems cheaper.
But the cost of building your gym at home is a one-time cost versus a recurring gym fee that will continue to be charged as long as you’re a member. And that can add up a lot over the years.
I compared Gold Gym’s monthly and annual fees with the average cost of buying equipment for an at-home gym. I didn’t factor in how much you would pay for installation or replacements. We crunched the numbers, and it’ll take about four years of gym membership costs at Gold’s Gym to pay for your at-home gym equipment.
That may seem like a long time, but remember, you can adjust your costs by buying equipment over time, either secondhand or at shop sale events, to pay less.
Average traditional gym vs. at-home gym costs
Gym membership vs. at-home equipment
Monthly cost
Annual cost after one year
Annual cost over 4 years
Annual cost over 7 years
Gold’s Gym
$25
$300
$1,200
$2,100
At-home gym
$111
$1,098
$1,098
$1,098
When choosing which gym option is best, look at the breakeven point. You’ll compare the up-front cost of a home gym with how much you’ll spend on a traditional gym membership for the exact price. For the example above, it’ll take about four years of a Gold’s Gym membership for your home gym to pay for itself if your equipment costs $1,098. The breakeven point will vary based on the cost of the gym membership and the at-home equipment.
It may seem like you’re paying more up-front to build an at-home gym, but in less than four years, you won’t pay any gym costs. That’s assuming you don’t pay to replace or upgrade any equipment. With membership fees, you’d still be paying for a gym membership four years later, which could increase in price over time, too.
Boutique fitness studios cost more than traditional gyms
If you’re into group fitness or want a more focused workout led by an instructor, you may add a fitness studio membership. Fitness studios focus on a specific type of workout, like boxing, high-intensity interval training, pilates or spin.
However, these memberships are generally more expensive — the monthly memberships cost the same, or more, than an annual gym membership. A couple of reasons are that a specialized class is taught by a fitness coach with top-notch equipment, and there are usually smaller class sizes.
“As much as I may love taking a group fitness class, it doesn’t necessarily mean that it’s within my budget,” said Giselle Castro, CNET’s fitness and nutrition writer. Instead, consider drop-in classes or a smaller package for the classes. She also recommends paying attention to the expiration date for any classes so you don’t waste classes or money.
Average monthly boutique fitness studio costs
Specialized fitness studio
Average unlimited monthly cost
Average class cost
Orangetheory Fitness
$159
$35
Pure Barre
$165
$25
9Round
$119
N/A
CycleBar
$125
$25
[solidcore]
$256
$34
F45
$189
Varies
You can use a fitness studio membership as your only workout or keep your at-home gym or gym membership, but you’ll need to factor in the additional cost. Here are a few fitness studios and their average costs below. The cost will depend on several factors, including the location and membership type. Before you sign up, I’d try group fitness classes at a gym first since it could save you money.
And always look out for deals around the holidays.
Other gym and studio fees
Beyond the monthly charge, you should also factor in other gym costs, such as administrative or annual fees. For example, Planet Fitness charges a $49 annual fee for all members, and it’s separate from the monthly membership fee. Planet Fitness also charges a cancellation fee if you cancel before your contract ends. The amounts can vary based on the gym and location.
How much does it cost to build a home gym?
Based on CNET’s best equipment and a few of our editors’ personal favorite picks, I crunched the numbers on how much you can expect to build an at-home gym. Accounting for all the equipment below, the average home gym costs $1,098.
That cost includes all of the equipment below, but don’t worry, I have a few money-saving tips that can help. Here’s a breakdown of the cost.
The type of weights you choose depends on your goals. You’ll need to consider the type, weight range and quantity.
I’d recommend having two kettlebells — one you can use now and a heavier one to challenge yourself once your body gets used to the lighter weight (this is called progressive overload). The options will depend on your personal preference. Like barbells, the cost of your kettlebell will depend on the weight and quality.
9 pounds: $42
18 pounds: $47
Castro also recommends a less costly option that she likes — the Yes4All cast iron kettlebells, which start at $23 for a 9-pound kettlebell. She’s also gotten good deals on equipment through Amazon’s online outlet.
Other equipment
Cardio machines
Oftentimes, people only choose one cardio machine. For the home gym in this example, I only included the ECHANFIT treadmill, which is $400. The type of machine, quality, size and technology features.
I only have a stationary bike. However, the more equipment you purchase, the more you can expect to pay. Think about how often you use each machine to make sure it’s worth the cost.
Sergey Nazarov / Getty Images
Check OfferUp, Facebook Marketplace or your local community for more affordable, gently used equipment without paying full price. Some apartments and housing developments have gyms, so you don’t have to purchase expensive gym equipment for your home, which could save you some money. Other at-home gym costs to factor in
Other at-home gym costs
Building a home gym isn’t a one-time cost. Other factors may add up over time. Here are a few examples.
Maintenance costs
A home gym isn’t a one-time cost. You’ll need to consider other maintenance costs, such as upgrading, repairing or replacing your equipment.
Castro said that how often you need to replace or repair your equipment will depend on its durability. For example, you may replace resistance bands sooner if they lose their stretchiness. Some equipment, like dumbbells, is relatively long-lasting and very rarely needs to be replaced unless it’s plastic.
She has also noticed that some equipment only has a one-year warranty, so it’s best to be proactive about maintaining your machines. Reach out to customer service about common issues and fixes and what signs of wear and tear to look for, especially if your equipment is likely to weather from being in your garage.
Upgrading equipment
Another factor to consider is your fitness goals. “If you’re trying to get stronger, whatever equipment you have at home might have some limitations,” said Castro. For example, even if you buy an adjustable dumbbell, if you max out the dumbbell’s weight, you’ll need to buy more equipment to align with your fitness goals — such as a barbell and some plates over 50 pounds. And Castro said those items may cost more.
Subscriptions
Unless you plan to create your workout routine or use free resources, like social media or YouTube, you’ll need a fitness subscription. Peloton and Apple Fitness offer monthly subscriptions with various workouts based on fitness levels, workout duration and even trainer preferences. The Nike Training Club app is free.
There’s usually a free trial and an annual discount if you pay the entire cost up-front for these monthly subscriptions. Here are a few popular
If you add any one of these services, you’ll need to add at least another $120 to $300 to your annual home gym cost. I recommend checking with your phone provider or credit card issuer for other discounts and offers that can save you money.
While these costs may not seem as frequent or costly, they’re still worth factoring in to keep your gym in good shape, especially since you likely only have one of each item. Most gyms have multiple and are responsible for replacements.
At-home gyms may seem like a one-time cost but overtime, you’ll need to factor in replacements and upgrades.
VU PHAM VAN / Getty Images
How much does a gym membership cost?
Gym membership costs can depend on your location, membership level and the type of gym you’re choosing. The monthly cost also largely depends on amenities, such as child care, personal training, group fitness and equipment.
Some budget-friendly gyms, like Planet Fitness and LA Fitness, can cost up to $30 per month, but more premium fitness centers, like Equinox, can cost hundreds. You can often find discounted introductory rates, ranging from the first 30 days to the first year for free. So when you make your long-term calculations, make sure to include the costs after the trial ends.
Here are a few popular options, without accounting for sales or promotions. This is the base monthly price for each gym, but there are upgraded options that can cost more.
As you compare costs, remember the average cost to set up a gym at home is $1,098.
Average gym membership costs
Gym
Monthly cost
Annual cost
Planet Fitness
$15
$180
Gold’s Gym
$25
$300
Crunch Fitness
$10
$120
LA Fitness
$30
$360
Equinox
$200
$2,400
How to decide which gym option is best for you
Deciding which gym is best for you can depend on several factors. Here are a few.
Cost
When deciding which gym option is best for you, it all boils down to cost. For the first year, you can expect to pay over $1,500 for your home gym if you get all of the equipment mentioned above, fees and a monthly subscription to a training app. However, you could pay less by only getting a few pieces of equipment or checking for second-hand options. You can also add to your gym over time and shop sales.
And you may earn money back by selling equipment you no longer need to lower the cost of new equipment.
The most cost-effective option of all is a gym membership. You can expect to pay about a couple of hundred dollars — depending on the gym. That’s still only a fraction of how much it takes to build your at-home gym, and you’ll have all the equipment you need. Even if you plan to get a top-tier gym membership, plus a training app, you can expect to pay $500 for the year, at best.
If you add a fitness studio membership to either of these options, you can expect to pay $1,000 to $2,000 more, depending on your membership level.
Space
For a while, my husband and I were OK with converting half of our garage into a gym, but that quickly became inconvenient when we wanted more parking or storage space. I recommend thinking about how much equipment you plan to have and whether you’ll be OK with the space for it first. Measurements can help you decide if you’ll be too crammed.
That doesn’t mean gyms are always better. Sometimes, gyms can also be crowded, so you may have limited space for your workout and have to wait for equipment to become available if it’s busy.
If your home space is limited, you may consider a gym membership to have more workout space, despite a home gym costing less over time.
Manu Vega / Getty Images
Time and convenience
At-home workouts are a clear winner when factoring in your time.
Preparing and commuting to the gym can be time-consuming, especially if you’re working out after work or have other responsibilities, like kids with homework. You’ll also need to pack your gym bag, and leaving it behind can be annoying, to say the least.
If you’re spending more time commuting to the gym and getting settled into the gym, you may find it more convenient to work out at home — especially if you’re able to multitask to save time. One perk I always loved about working out at home was the ability to do laundry or warm dinner while working out. And you’ll have the equipment all to yourself.
Community
The most common reason why my former riders took group fitness classes instead of working out at home was the community and camaraderie of exercising with someone.
If you’re motivated by being surrounded by others, a gym membership is likely your best choice because you won’t be alone. However, if convenience and time are equally important, I’d recommend at least getting a training app subscription and joining live classes. You can also see if your community offers free running or walking clubs to exercise with others and keep your gym membership.
Other benefits
There are plenty of other benefits that may sway you to choose one gym over another. For example, some gyms have childcare, which may make it easier for you to work out. For example, the YMCA near me offers childcare for members for up to 90 minutes while at the gym. Burn Bootcamp, a group fitness studio, has a similar perk.
Your employer or health insurance provider may also offer a fitness perk for workout equipment or memberships. This may come in the form of reimbursement, discounts or paying outright through a portal. Depending on the benefit’s guidelines, this may also influence your choice.
Final ruling: Which gym choice is best?
Truthfully, there’s no right or wrong choice here as long as you stick to your goals. You stand to lose money in either scenario if you don’t use your equipment or don’t use your gym membership.
The most long-term cost-effective option is building an at-home gym. You’ll pay significantly more over time for a gym membership, especially when factoring in fees. It also could be an ideal pick if you’re self-motivated. However, you’ll need to replace all of your gym equipment that needs upgrading.
If you’re motivated by being around others and need time to decide which equipment you’ll purchase, a gym membership is a great start. You can also choose a hybrid approach by starting with a traditional gym membership while you build your home gym. However, if you know you prefer exercising at home, a home gym will be a better overall, cost-effective approach.
Most importantly, whichever keeps you motivated and healthy is the best choice for your body and budget.
Border agents in the US are reportedly increasing the frequency and intensity of device searches, including phones belonging to American citizens returning home. Such searches aren’t illegal, but they’re intrusive. Some businesses are even recommending that their employees use simple “burner” phones to keep sensitive information safe.
But a burner isn’t just for crossing borders. It can also be a useful tool for everyday situations where you want to stay connected without sacrificing privacy or convenience. Whether you’re trying to cut back on screen time or protect your personal details, or you just want a break from the constant ping of notifications, a no-frills device can help. Conan O’Brien swears by his for staying focused. If you’ve ever felt like your smartphone knows a little too much, it might be time to consider giving it a vacation of its own.
Read more: Best Prepaid Phone of 2025
Although carriers have offered prepaid phones since the ’90s, the term “burner phones” or “burners” essentially became popular in the 2000s because of their use in the celebrated HBO series The Wire, in which characters use burner phones to avoid getting caught by the police. Though often portrayed in that light, burners are not popular only among criminals. With privacy concerns rising, you might consider using a burner phone yourself.
So, what exactly is a burner phone, and how does it work? Below, we explain everything you need to know about burners and how to get one.
What is a burner phone?
Simply put, a burner phone is a cheap prepaid phone with no commitments. It comes with a set number of prepaid call minutes, text messages or data and is designed to be disposed of after use.
Burners are contract-free, and you can grab them off the counter. They’re called burner phones because you can “burn” them, i.e., trash them after use, and the phone cannot be traced back to you, which makes them appealing to criminals. Burner phones are typically used when you need a phone quickly, without intentions of long-term usage.
Burners are different from getting a regular, contract-bound cellphone plans that require a lot of your information to be on file.
Why should you use a burner phone?
Diy13/Getty Images
Burner phones are an easy way to avoid pesky cellphone contracts or spam that you may be getting on your primary phone number. Burners are not linked to your identity, so you can avoid getting tracked down or contacted if that’s what you need.
However, you don’t have to dispose of it after use — you can just add more minutes and continue using it. Burner phones can still function as regular phones, minus the hassle of getting a phone with a contract.
You can also get a burner phone as a secondary phone for a specific purpose, like having a spare phone number for two-factor authentication texts, for business purposes, or to avoid roaming charges while traveling. You can get a burner phone for any privacy reasons you may have.
Read more: The Data Privacy Tips Digital Security Experts Wish You Knew
Burner phones, prepaid phones, smartphones and burner SIMs: What’s the difference?
Burner phones are typically cheap feature phones and usually don’t come with the bells and whistles of a smartphone. Because these are designed to be cheap and disposable, you only get the essentials and very simple designs. The flip phone is a common sight in the burner phone market.
All burner phones are prepaid phones, but not all prepaid phones are burners. What sets a burner apart is that you will not have to give away any personal information to get one, and it won’t be traceable back to you. Also, it will be cheap enough to be trashed after use.
Prepaid smartphones are generally low-end models to begin with, and burners are the cheapest prepaid phones you can get. However, you can use any unlocked smartphone with prepaid SIM cards, essentially making it a prepaid phone.
If you want to get a burner, you don’t necessarily have to buy a new phone. You can get a burner SIM and use it with an existing phone as well. Burner SIMs are prepaid SIMs you can get without a contract or giving away personal information.
Where can you buy a burner phone?
Burner phones are available at all the major retailers.
Shelby Knowles/Bloomberg/Getty Images
Burner phones are available at all major retail outlets. You can pick them up from Best Buy, Target, Walmart and other big retailers. They’re also often available at convenience stores like 7-Eleven, local supermarkets, gas stations and retail phone outlets like Cricket, Metro and others.
You can get a burner phone with cash; a typical burner should cost between $10 and $50. It may cost more if you get more minutes and data with the phone. If you’re getting a burner phone specifically to avoid having the phone traced back to you, it makes sense to pay with cash instead of a credit card.
If you just want a prepaid secondary phone, you can pay for one with a credit card. Credit cards will leave a paper trail that leads back to you but that shouldn’t be an issue unless you really don’t want the burner phone linked back to you.
There are also many apps that let you get secondary phone numbers, including Google Fi and the Burner app. However, these cannot quite be called burners in the ideal sense because these providers will typically have at least some of your personal information.
If you’re just looking to get a solid prepaid phone without anonymity, you can check out our full guide for the best prepaid phone plans available currently. We also have a guide for the best cheap phone plans you can get.
As of this Friday, you won’t be able to save or manage passwords, use two-factor authentication or auto-fill. And it won’t be your go-to password manager anymore, either.
Earlier this summer, Microsoft announced it was moving from passwords to passkeys. So instead of creating a password with a mix of letters, symbols and numbers, you’ll use PINs, fingerprint scans, facial recognition or a pattern on your device’s lock screen to log in to your accounts.
Passkeys are a safer alternative to the risky password habits we use, according to Attila Tomaschek, a CNET software senior writer and digital security expert. CNET’s password survey found that 49% of US adults have bad password habits. And using the same password for several accounts or one that’s easy to guess can put you at risk of hackers stealing your data.
Yet, the switch to a new login process is coming up quickly. So it’s time to figure out how passkeys will work with Microsoft and to pick a new password manager. Here’s what you need to know to get started.
Microsoft Authenticator will stop supporting passwords on Aug. 1
Microsoft Authenticator houses your passwords and lets you sign into all your Microsoft accounts using a PIN, facial recognition like Windows Hello or other biometric data like a fingerprint. Authenticator can be used in other ways, such as verifying you’re logging in if you forgot your password, or using two-factor authentication as an extra layer of security for your accounts. In June, the company stopped letting users add passwords to Authenticator.
As of this month, you won’t be able to use the autofill password function. And starting Aug. 1, you’ll no longer be able to use saved passwords.
If you still want to use passwords instead of passkeys, you can store them in Microsoft Edge. However, CNET experts recommend adopting passkeys during this transition. “Passkeys use public key cryptography to authenticate users, rather than relying on users themselves creating their own (often weak or reused) passwords to access their online accounts,” Tomaschek said.
Why passkeys are a better alternative to passwords
So what exactly is a passkey? It’s a credential created by the Fast Identity Online Alliance that uses biometric data or a PIN to verify your identity and access your account. Think about using your fingerprint or Face ID to log into your account. That’s generally safer than using a password that is easy to guess or susceptible to a phishing attack.
“Passwords can be cracked, whereas passkeys need both the public and the locally stored private key to authenticate users, which can help mitigate risks like falling victim to phishing and brute-force or credential-stuffing attacks,” said Tomaschek.
Passkeys aren’t stored on servers like passwords. Instead, they’re stored only on your personal device. More conveniently, this takes the guesswork out of remembering your passwords and the need for a password manager.
How to set up a passkey in Microsoft Authenticator
Microsoft said in a May 1 blog post that it will automatically detect the best passkey to set up and make that your default sign-in option. “If you have a password and ‘one-time code’ set up on your account, we’ll prompt you to sign in with your one-time code instead of your password. After you’re signed in, you’ll be prompted to enroll a passkey. Then the next time you sign in, you’ll be prompted to sign in with your passkey,” according to the blog post.
To set up a new passkey, open your Authenticator app on your phone. Tap on your account and select “Set up a passkey.” You’ll be prompted to log in with your existing credentials. After you’re logged in, you can set up the passkey.
Other password manager alternatives
Since Microsoft will get rid of all of your passwords in two weeks, you’ll need a new place to store your passwords safely. Tomaschek has a few of the best password manager recommendations after testing and reviewing several.
The top recommendation is Bitwarden for its transparency. It’s open-source and audited annually. From a price perspective, the free plan lets you store infinite passwords across unlimited devices. The free plan also includes features most password managers would charge for, including password sharing and a username and password generator.
Bitwarden’s upgraded plans have other upgraded features that could be worth the cost, too.
Personally, Tomaschek has been using 1Password for a while, and he likes the interface and family plan. Even though it’s second on the list, Tomaschek says it’s just as good as Bitwarden.
Cleo’s “Can You Actually Afford That Trip?” feature acts as a reality check before booking.
kuppa_rock/Getty Images
When a friend suggested a girls’ trip to Dublin this fall, I was more than ready to pack my bags. Traveling abroad is exhilarating, except it’s terrifying when you consider the cost. Before committing to visiting the Cliffs of Moher and drinking endless pints of Guinness, I had to face the real question: Could I actually afford it without wrecking my bank account or credit?
My vacation planning strategy used to be, “Looks affordable, fingers crossed.” Since then, I’ve started using Cleo, a free AI-powered money management app that helps me track my monthly spending and save for big adventures. It also has a cool travel budgeting tool called “Can You Actually Afford That Trip?” that acts as a reality check before I book.
While Cleo won’t magically fund my upcoming trip to Ireland, its travel feature is helping me avoid racking up high-interest debt and keeping me from sabotaging my finances for the sake of a last-minute deal. It provides the hard truth about my finances with the clarity, honesty and personality you would only expect from… ahem… a human.
Read also: I Asked AI to Help Me Travel More Sustainably. Here’s What Happened
Cleo helps me travel smarter, with fewer regrets
CNET
You might be familiar with the “fly by the seat of your pants” travel budgeting strategy: Check your balance, do some mental math, rely on your credit card and hope for the best.
Cleo flips that by considering your projected travel costs alongside your regular bills and expenses. Several of my CNET colleagues have used Cleo to improve their spending decisions, noting that the AI-powered chatbot makes overall budgeting less taxing and more approachable. Instead of giving you a thumbs-up based on your account balance alone, Cleo gets a wide-angle view of your entire financial situation.
When I first started planning our Dublin trip, I navigated to the travel section of my Cleo app and input the estimated trip costs, including airfare, lodging, food, excursions and souvenirs. From there, Cleo’s tool delved into my linked bank accounts and credit cards, analyzing my income, upcoming bills (including my rent and loan payments), recurring subscriptions and spending patterns. It then predicted my financial situation for the period before and after the proposed trip dates.
The final verdict was delivered in a part-sassy, part-supportive tone, which I appreciated. “You can swing Dublin,” it said, “but maybe cool it on the daily lattes and skip splurging on shoes this month” (I’ve been known to impulse-buy new Adidas Gazelles on Poshmark).
According to Cleo, I can afford the girls’ trip — hooray! However, if I couldn’t, it would’ve shown exactly how much I’d be in the red. That’s the real value.
In fact, Cleo customized its response and recommended that I tighten my spending for a few weeks to afford the cost. Not exactly glamorous, but freeing, honestly. I booked the flight with zero post-purchase dread, knowing that I’ll have a great time in Ireland and still be able to pay my bills and be a responsible adult and dog mom.
According to Cleo, I can afford my upcoming trip to Dublin.
Macy Meyer/CNET
My brutally honest travel budgeting buddy
One reason I stick with Cleo is because it’s intuitive and user-friendly. There’s no fancy jargon or clunky dashboards. The chatbot feels more like texting a savvy friend than using a stiff budgeting tool. Cleo respects that I like to spend money because, well, I work hard. It doesn’t judge, and it helps me budget more wisely.
The AI app doesn’t just tell you what you want to hear. It offers customized advice and guidance tailored to your needs. And instead of saying yes or no when you’re planning a trip, the tool might suggest tweaks, like delaying the trip or cutting spending elsewhere, so you’re making informed choices with real numbers to back them up.
When it comes to my global wanderlust, Cleo has helped me curb my impulses, and not by saying “don’t travel” (which would be a massive bummer). Instead, it showed me how to do it without wiping out my emergency fund or racking up a credit card balance.
Should you try Cleo for travel budgeting?
If you love to travel, but always come home from a dream trip with debt, Cleo could be worth adding to your toolkit. For some folks, a private chatbot on an app can feel less intimidating than talking about money with a real person.
Still, handing over your banking info to AI isn’t for everyone. If you’re not comfortable sharing your financial details with an app, Cleo might not be the best fit. Before signing up, always read the privacy policy and understand what data you’re sharing with the company.
Also, it’s important to remember that AI chatbots can be wrong. AI-generated answers should be fact-checked with expert sources in case the tool is hallucinating, pulling results from dubious sources or generating false information. For a real-world case study, explore this piece by CNET’s Katie Collins, who tested the accuracy of travel-specific AI services in a city she knows inside and out.
I’m counting down the days to Dublin. This time, I know I can afford the pubs and still pay my bills when I get home.
For more AI Tips, explore these AI essentials you need to know and how to use AI to get better at playing guitar.
Google’s Chrome web browser will now show you AI-generated reviews of stores online, using a mix of data from partners and verified users, the company said in a blog post Monday.
When you click on the icon on the left of the address bar, Google will use AI to tell you what the product quality is like, customer service quality, shipping times, pricing and return metrics, all at a glance. The feature pulls data from sites such as PowerReviews, Reputation.com, TrustPilot and others. It’ll also include data from verified reviews.
The feature is only available for English desktop users at the moment, and Google hasn’t confirmed when it’ll land for mobile devices, according to TechCrunch. Google didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.
Chrome is currently the world’s most popular web browser, with 68% global market share, according to GlobalStats by Statcounter. Even though Google has a commanding lead, the desire to fill it with more generative AI features comes as Perplexity, another AI search engine and generative chatbot, launched its own AI-powered web browser earlier this month.
Reports are already starting to surfaced that OpenAI, the creator of ChatGPT, is also prepping the launch of an AI web browser. Chrome’s dominance helps Google secure key user data, which helps advertisers target consumers. Advertising is how Google makes a majority of its revenues. Increased competition from AI companies might upend the global browser market, which could spell trouble for Google.
Not only does Google own the most popular web browser, it also owns the world’s most popular search engine. Google rose to the top by securing deals with companies like Apple and Samsung, making Google the default option on their devices. This system led a US court to rule that Google was illegally maintaining dominance in the search engine market. A judge wants Google to sell off Chrome.
While meteor showers happen all year, a rarer occurrence is having two meteor showers that peak at the same time. It’ll happen this week, on Tuesday.
The shooting star show comes courtesy of the Alpha Capricornids and Southern delta Aquariids meteor showers. The former is already happening and runs until Aug. 12, with a peak on Tuesday. Southern delta Aquariids will start on Monday, peaks early on Tuesday and runs until Aug. 12 as well. That means for one evening, the two meteor showers are peaking at the same time, giving stargazers a much better chance at catching a shooting star.
Of the two, the Southern delta Aquarids is typically the larger meteor shower, tossing upward of 25 meteors per hour during its zenith. Alpha Capricornids is a lesser meteor shower, with about five per hour on average. Combined, they’ll output an estimated 30 per hour.
See 2 meteor showers at once
Since the meteors are coming from two different points in the sky, you would think spotting meteors from both would be difficult, but that is far from the truth.
Alpha Capricornids, which hails from the 169P/NEAT comet, originates from the Capricornus constellation. It will rise from the eastern skies across the continental US around sunset and streak across the southern sky, setting in the western sky at sunrise.
For the Southern delta Aquariids, its radiant — the point from which its meteors seem to originate — is the Aquarius constellation. Aquarius is right next to Capricornus. That means it also rises out of the eastern horizon, streaks across the southern sky, and sets in the western horizon around dawn.
If you have trouble finding either of them, Stellarium’s free sky map will help you hunt them down. Set the time, date and location, and you’re off to the races. Once you find one, the other one is essentially right there next to it.
Tips on watching meteor showers
As per the norm, the tips here are the same as they are for the aurora borealis and planet parades. Light pollution and weather are your two biggest enemies. Since you can only do anything about one of those, let’s focus on light pollution. You’ll want to drive as far away from the city and suburbs as possible, as the light pollution will make it difficult to see the dimmer meteors. The farther away you are, the better, as even suburban light pollution can obfuscate most meteors.
Once out there, you just have to sit and wait. Since the constellations will move across the south as you watch, you may have to rotate your chair if you’re out there for a while. Otherwise, a pair of binoculars may help. Telescopes aren’t recommended, as they obscure your field of view and may actively obstruct your ability to see meteors.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
I love to grill, but the answer to 5-Down was a little challenging for me. It’s legit, but it’s just not the way I typically use that word. That’s on me! Need a helping hand with today’s Mini Crossword? Keep reading. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for Monday, July 28, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Courtroom prosecutors, for short Answer: DAS
4A clue: Fails to mention Answer: OMITS
7A clue: Finished the season on a hot streak Answer: WONOUT
9A clue: Subtle distinction Answer: NUANCE
10A clue: See 1-Down Answer: RIGHT
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: With 10-Across, completely and utterly Answer: DOWN
2D clue: Love, in French Answer: AMOUR
3D clue: Mount where Moses received the Ten Commandments Answer: SINAI
5D clue: Grab from the grill with a gripper Answer: TONG
Though Marvel isn’t hitting Hall H at San Diego Comic-Con 2025, the event is in full swing and excitement has been high over the sneak peeks at Tron: Ares and Predator: Badlands and the toy booths for Lego and Hot Wheels. But there’s more news coming for TV shows, movies and games. We’re enthused about what we’ve seen from Avatar: The Last Airbender, Gen V and Welcome to Derry, so we’re riding along with fans as announcements and trailer drops come out.
We’ll be posting highlights here from the four-day affair to help you keep up with the hottest, weirdest and most interesting stuff that hits. Stay tuned for our daily updates as the weekend rolls on.
Peacemaker season 2 trailer gives a portal and Rick Flagg Sr.
James Gunn arrived in Hall H with the Peacemaker crew on Saturday, giving an intro for wrestler-actor John Cena, who hit the stage in full costume. Gunn ceremoniously set fans up for the official season 2 trailer debut, which is set to the tune of Ozzy Osbourne’s Road to Nowhere. An interdimensional portal, two Peacemakers and a vengeance-seeking Rick Flagg Sr. should make for an interestingly chaotic season. Peep it below, and get ready to welcome the series back to your screen on HBO Max come Aug. 21.
Starfleet Academy joins Star Trek family
An original Paramount Plus series, Star Trek: Starfleet Academy is set to arrive in 2026, just in time to celebrate the franchise’s 60th anniversary. Saturday’s panel presentation included a teaser trailer of the new show, which focuses on a group of young student cadets looking to earn their place as Starfleet officers. Check out the clip and Paul Giamatti’s villainous turn as Nus Braka.
Talent on hand at SDCC included Holly Hunter, who plays Nahla Ake, the captain of the USS Athena and the school chancellor. Panelists also included co-showrunners Alex Kurtzman and Noga Landau, along with Starfleet cadets Sandro Rosta (who plays Caleb Mir), Karim Diané (who stars as the Klingon Jay-Den Kraag), Kerrice Brooks (playing Sam), George Hawkins (who stars as Darem Reymi) and Bella Shepard, who plays Genesis Lythe, the daughter of an admiral.
Coyote vs. Acme gets release date
After being rescued from the pile of scrapped ashes left by Warner Bros. Discovery, the Coyote vs. Acme movie will hit theaters next year thanks to Ketchup Entertainment. Footage screened during a Comic-Con panel showed John Cena playing Acme’s attorney in a case that pits Wile E. Coyote against the corporation for faulty goods. Cast members Will Forte, Eric Bauza and Martha Kelly were on deck, along with director Dave Green. The film is set to debut on Aug. 28, 2026.
Wile E. Coyote on the stage at Comic-Con 2025.
Michael Buckner/Variety via Getty Images
Avatar: Seven Havens first look
It’s a 20-year anniversary celebration for Avatar: The Last Airbender, the award-winning animated series that aired on Nickelodeon. Thursday’s Comic-Con panel brought together original creators Bryan Konietzko and Michael Dante DiMartino and voice cast Zach Tyler Eisen, Jennie Kwan, Michaela Jill Murphy, Jack DeSena (Sokka), Dante Basco (Zuko) and Dee Bradley Baker for a look at the past and present, including Avatar: Seven Havens.
The new animated sequel series, which was originally announced in February, has 26 episodes and will be split into two installments. Fans will meet Avatar Pavi when the series debuts, but for now, here’s a glimpse at the bender picking up the mantle.
Nickelodeon
Five Nights at Freddy’s 2
The sequel from Blumhouse sees an unsuspecting group pull up to the creepy pizzeria, not knowing about the killer lifelike animatronics with nothing but evil in store. They clearly don’t know about Freddy’s history. Skeet Ulrich appeared in Hall H, announcing that he’ll be in the movie as “somebody with a very particular and specific past and somebody who has a deep emotional tie to what’s going on.”
For those paying attention, this is sort of a Scream reunion, as Matthew Lillard is returning as villain William Afton. Aside from that, details about Ulrich’s character are under wraps. The film is set to hit theaters on Dec. 5.
Percy Jackson and the Olympians, season 2 release date
Pack up for Camp Half-Blood when the fantasy series returns, this time introducing Tantalus, Thalia and the goddess Athena to the story. The new season arrives on Disney Plus on Dec. 10, and fans will see Percy dealing with more than fantastical monsters: Grover goes missing, and there’s drama with friends and a new sibling.
Twisted Metal season 2 sneak peek
With a week left before the new episodes of Peacock’s Grindhouse series, the show’s main cast, which includes Anthony Mackie, Stephanie Beatriz, Anthony Carrigan and Joe Seanoa, along with showrunner Michael Jonathan Smith, hit the stage in Hall H to tease what’s in store.
Smith revealed two sneak peek clips for the new season. The first scene found Stu (played by Mike Mitchell) striving to be a better killer. With Sweet Tooth as his mentor, it looks like he has some lofty, murderous goals. Stu takes the crew out, but he missed all the major organs, which Sweet Tooth says is a major no-no. You have to go for “the grapes, the apple or the banana,” the evil clown explains. The last victim to die recognizes Sweet Tooth, which brightens the killer’s spirits, until he calls him “Big Baby.”
Yes, there’s a notorious killer out there named “Big Baby,” and it looks like Sweet Tooth is going to hunt him down now, too.
Michael James Shaw stars as Axel in season 2 of Twisted Metal on Peacock.
Peacock
The next clip finds John Doe being vulnerable as he talks about living a life without any childhood memories. But, as he realizes, things could be much worse if he had all that knowledge. The big reveal in this clip comes toward the end, as Axel (played by Michael James Shaw), the character who’s attached to two giant wheels, comes barreling through flames, all smiles. Get ready for a trip back into the wastes. Twisted Metal season 2 drops its first three episodes on July 31.
Outlander, season 8 teaser
Outlander’s final season is due out early next year, ending the love-and-war saga for Jamie and Claire. How will their story — and history — play out? Starz shared a teaser for the last chapter, and Frank Randall’s book has everyone on edge. Check out the clip and mark your calendar for this series’ end and the beginning of the spinoff, Outlander: Blood of My Blood.
Invincible VS trailer shows Battle Beast
Gamers were treated to a trailer for the new Invincible VS, a bloody superhero game based on Robert Kirkman’s animated Prime Video series. We’ve been following all the details for this upcoming release, but watch below to see Battle Beast bare his teeth in this latest character reveal.
The Walking Dead: Daryl Dixon is ending soon
AMC served up a new trailer for season 3 of The Walking Dead: Daryl Dixon, but Hall H news revealed that the show is renewed for a fourth and final season. Season 3 sees Norman Reedus’ Daryl and Melissa McBride’s Carol heading to Spain in the new installment, as they try to find their way home. Although production for season 4 starts soon, there aren’t any details about its plot. In the meantime, fans can tune in on Sept. 7 for the next round.
Rick and Morty’s President Curtis gets a spinoff
Adult Swim announced that the popular President Curtis is getting his own animated series, with star Keith David reprising his role as the voice behind the titular character.
“President Curtis has always been a blast to play,” David said in a statement. “Getting to explore his world more deeply in this new series is a dream. I can’t wait for fans to see what kind of chaos he stirs up when Rick isn’t around to steal the spotlight.”
Adult Swim
Alien: Earth brings the Xenomorph to TV
Alien: Earth fans in attendance were treated to a world premiere screening of the pilot episode. After that, show creator Noah Hawley and executive producer David W. Zucker took the stage with cast members Timothy Olyphant, Sydney Chandler, Babou Ceesay, Samuel Blenkin and Alex Lawther to give further insight into what to expect from the sci-fi drama.
The first immediate detail any fan of the franchise will notice is how familiar-feeling things will be in the first few moments of the series. Hawley revealed during the panel that the Maginot, the ship in the series, “was built to the exact specifications” of the Nostromo from the original 1979 movie.
Sydney Chandler plays Wendy in FX’s Alien: Earth on Hulu.
Patrick Brown/FX Networks
Sydney Chandler’s Wendy is basically the show’s Ripley. She’s a different sort of synthetic human (the consciousness of a 12-year-old girl lives inside her). There’s plenty of Xenomorph action, along with some other creepy specimens. Honestly, this may be the sci-fi series of the year. It premieres on Aug. 12 on Hulu.
Gen V season 2 trailer gets a boost from Starlight
A panel for Boys spin-off Gen V teased a tense and gory sophomore year for Marie and fellow supes at Godolkin University. Gen V’s second season is set after the fourth season of The Boys and debuts with three episodes on Sept. 17.
During the panel, which featured series creator Eric Kripke, producer Michelle Fazekas and stars Jaz Sinclair, London Thor, Derek Lu, Maddie Phillips and newcomer Hamish Linklater, a brand-new trailer for the upcoming season was shown. It looks like Starlight is coming to Godolkin, and she has a big job for Marie that’ll surely inform the new storyline and, potentially, the plot of the final season of The Boys.
The Boys season 5’s Jared Padalecki
Speaking of The Boys … To whet the appetites of the fans in the room, Kripke dropped a little clip for the fifth and final season of the hit comic book series. In the sneak peek, Homelander (who now has political power) addresses a crowd. “This is a safer, more god-fearing nation,” he says. Yet fear is the only thing on the faces of those he’s speaking to.
Other characters who pop up are a furious Billy Butcher, Soldier Boy in a cryo-tank and a first-ever glimpse of Supernatural star Jared Padalecki. Having Padalecki and Jenson Ackles back on screen together is enough to get me to tune in.
Predator: Badlands sneak peek
Director Dan Trachtenberg and stars Dimitrius Schuster-Koloamatangi and Elle Fanning hit the Hall H stage to promote Predator: Badlands. Is this the Predator/Alien crossover movie we’ve been yearning for? It doesn’t seem so. Trachtenberg revealed that Badlands will focus on the relationship between Elle Fanning’s Weyland-Yutani android (a detail that connects both franchises) and the Predator.
20th Century Studios
Everything is apparently out to kill the Predator here. “He’s essentially the Dutch of this movie,” Trachtenberg revealed, referencing Arnold Schwarzenegger’s character in the classic film. Fun tidbit: The scene of the droid and Predator being strapped together in Badlands was inspired by Chewbacca and C-3PO from Star Wars.
As for a sneak peek, the first 15 minutes of the movie were shown. In it, the Predator had to fight another Predator — his brother, it turns out — in a cave. Our main Predator loses the battle, which prompts his Predator father to send him out into the wild to prove himself. He must head to another planet and hunt an “unkillable” creature that even sparks fear in his own dad.
Tron: Ares had a light show and music video
Jared Leto is Ares in Tron: Ares, which will hit theaters on Oct. 10.
Leah Gallo/Disney
After nearly 15 years, Tron returned to San Diego. The last time fans headed to the grid, Tron: Legacy took Hall H by storm. It’s been a long time coming, and director Joachim Rønning and stars Jared Leto, Jeff Bridges, Greta Lee, Jodie Turner-Smith, Cameron Monaghan, Gillian Anderson and Evan Peters gave the Comic-Con crowd an exciting look at the next entry in the iconic franchise, Tron: Ares.
One clip showed Peters’ Julian Dillinger (who shares the name of the villain from the 1982 movie) sending Leto’s Ares and Turner-Smith’s Athena on a mission to get Eve Kim (played by Lee) and the stick of important code that she stole from Encom, Dillinger’s company. Eve evades them and steals Athena’s light cycle. She barely escapes, and another clip found her entering the Grid for the first time. Ares rescues her from an ocean of digital water. She finally agrees to help Ares find the code. Glitzy red and blue laser light beams bounced across the room and screen, dazzling the crowd for a final time when Nine Inch Nails’ music video for As Alive As You Need Me to Be played.
Crunchyroll to launch ‘Anime Nights’
Crunchyroll’s presence at SDCC this year includes a FanFest music event featuring artists across multiple genres in a two-day anime-inspired concert series. But on Saturday, the anime giant announced the addition of Anime Nights, which will see the company screen feature films in theaters across the US each third Monday of the month.
Beginning Oct. 20, fans can gather to see films like Miss Kobayashi’s Dragon Maid: A Lonely Dragon Wants to be Loved. Crunchyroll says it will offer programming at 225 movie houses across the US, including Alamo Drafthouse, AMC, Cinemark, Harkins, Landmark and Regal theaters.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
I set a new personal speed record for the Mini Crossword today. I was also delighted to learn a new word: psithurism. Can’t wait to drop that in casual conversation! Need a little help with today’s Mini Crossword? Read on. If you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for Sunday, July 27, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: In addition Answer: ALSO
5A clue: Psithurism, n. “The sound of ___ rustling through the trees” Answer: WIND
6A clue: Like scones and stoners Answer: BAKED
7A clue: Retail chain with an average store size of 300,000 square feet (roughly three city blocks) Answer: IKEA
You’ve heard of “hot girl walks,” but what about “Japanese walking”? It’s also known as interval walking training, and The Washington Post reports that even though this technique is now going viral on TikTok, Japanese walking came about after a 2007, Japan-based study concluded that high-intensity interval walking training may help protect against age-related decreases in muscle strength and peak oxygen uptake as well as increases in blood pressure.
A more recent, July 2025 study found that prefrail and frail older adults who increased their walking cadence by 14 steps per minute had a 10% increase in the odds of improvement during a 6-minute walk test, which represents an advancement in mobility, function or endurance. With these positive study outcomes, you may be wondering: Does walking count as exercise? To find out, we asked personal trainers.
Is walking exercise?
Yes, walking is exercise, and experts across physical and mental health disciplines agree. Sergii Putsov, a certified personal trainer with a PhD in sports science, says, “Walking for just 30 minutes every day can lower your risk of severe cardiovascular disease and dementia.” April Crowe, a licensed clinical social worker at Paramount Wellness Retreat, adds that “walking in natural environments also boosts cognitive function and creativity, thereby providing a unique kind of therapy.”
Does walking do more than build your heart’s strength? As it turns out, yes. The Mayo Clinic has identified additional health benefits of walking. According to the medical center, walking can improve muscle endurance, boost energy, lower blood pressure, strengthen bones and support the immune system. You can see benefits both outdoors and on a treadmill.
Walking alone can also change the shape of your body. In 2017, the Journal of Physical Activity and Health did a meta-analysis of 22 clinical trials related to walking and health. The results revealed that brisk walking reduced waist circumference, fat mass and body fat percentage to a “clinically significant” degree in men and women under age 50 living with obesity. It can also lead to overall weight loss. So, that “hot girl walk” you take could cause noticeable changes to your body if you stick to it.
Is walking enough exercise on its own?
Walking can certainly be combined with other activities as part of a circuit. You can also walk as a warm-up for jogging or cycling. Walking on its own can deliver results and may have fewer negative impacts on your body than other high-impact sports.
Gregor Parella, also a CPT, says of walking for walking’s sake: “It is much better than jogging because jogging can put undue pressure on your ankles, especially if you’re heavily built. On the other hand, brisk walking is one of the best exercises because it tones up your leg and calf muscles without the same pressure on joints.
Even walking at a slow pace is better than being stationary at home, but a faster pace will also hasten the health benefits. A 2019 study in Atherosclerosis found that “walking pace was inversely associated with the risk of death and development of cardiovascular disease” in male physicians with an average age of 67.8. In other words, the faster you walk, the lower your risk of death and cardiovascular disease.
Regarding how long you should walk, the US Department of Health and Human Services recommends at least 150 minutes of moderate-intensity physical activity each week, or 30 minutes a day for five days, for substantial health benefits. This can include walking briskly at 2.5 mph to 4 mph. Walking at a slow or leisurely pace (2 mph or less) is considered a light-intensity activity, which is likely to produce some health benefits compared to sedentary behavior, but not as many benefits as walking briskly.
Stephanie Noritz/Getty Images
The health benefits of walking
There are many health benefits to walking. Not only can the activity lower cortisol levels, like all forms of exercise, and give you some fresh air, but you may see various tangible improvements in the following health indicators:
Better sleep. Low-impact physical activity can lead to more fitful sleep. One small 2020 study published in Sleep Health found that increasing daily steps led to better quality sleep, especially among women.
Lower risk of type 2 diabetes. According to the American Diabetes Association, walking at least 30 minutes per day could help you stave off type 2 diabetes. Increasing your daily step count may keep your glucose levels in check.
Lower blood pressure. A 2022 study from the American Family Physician reported that a regular walking schedule with moderate intensity can lower systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure and heart rate.
Improved balance. Remaining steady on your feet is increasingly important for your health as you age. Harvard Health Publishing states that walking builds lower body strength, which improves balance.
Lower risk of cancer. Walking may even reduce your risk of some cancers. A 2013 study out of Cancer Epidemiology, Biomarkers & Prevention found that postmenopausal women who walked at least seven hours per week had a 14% lower risk of getting breast cancer than women who walked three hours or less every week.
Ways to take your walking to the next level
If you hit a plateau with your walking routine, you can add some intensity to your walk without having to jog or switch activities. Making your walk more rigorous could increase the number of calories burned by giving your body a new challenge. Ways to up the ante on your daily walk include:
Increase the time of your walk. If you’re currently walking 30 minutes a day, add more time in 10- or 15-minute intervals. Putsov recommends walking at least 45 minutes a day if your goal is weight loss.
Increase your speed. You can also add more intensity by picking up speed. Free fitness workout apps with GPS enabled, including Nike Run Club, can help you track distance and time to calculate your pace.
Wear wrist or ankle weights. Tying on weights like Bala Bangles can kick your walk up a notch. These types of weights can be worn on your ankles or wrists to provide resistance.
Alternate your pace. Both CPTs we spoke to recommended walking intervals to make walking more challenging. Try walking for five minutes at a regular pace, then five minutes of speed walking, and so on.
Add an incline to your route. Are you walking on a flat surface for most of your route? Find a hill to increase the difficulty of your trek. You may also want to add retro-walking (walking backward) up an incline.
Getty Images
How to stay motivated while walking
It’s easy to get excited about a new workout routine initially, and it’s just as natural to get bored or frustrated when you stop seeing major results. You may find music and podcasts helpful because they make time appear to pass more quickly. Just make sure that these sounds are background noise so that you can still be aware of your environment and those around you.
Crowe also recommends setting clear, achievable goals. She says it can help to remind yourself about how far you’ve come, explaining, “Recording all achievements made during walks, whether through mobile apps or personal journals, will act as a reminder,” which can push you harder next time.
If going it alone is making it harder to stay on track, try walking with a partner or seeing if there is a walking club in your area. Parella says a walking buddy can increase your sense of accountability and make the experience more fun. You may also try new scenery to stay motivated during a walk. Getting some sun will increase your vitamin D intake, which may improve your mood.
Walking safety tips
Before you hit the sidewalk on your daily walk or hot girl walk, be sure you’re well-equipped for the task. While a neighborhood or lakeside stroll may seem harmless, you still want to set yourself up for a safe return.
Bring water. In moderate temperatures, REI recommends drinking one half-liter (about 17 ounces) of water every hour. If it’s hot outside, you should increase your water intake. Becoming dehydrated on a walk could leave you feeling dizzy or sick, so make sure you bring your water bottle.
Wear the right shoes. You don’t want to be taken out of commission halfway through your walk because of a sprained ankle or serious blisters. Get fitted at an athletic store for quality walking shoes that fit your foot shape and arches.
Let someone know your location. When you’re walking in nature or at night, make sure someone can find you. Sharing your location on Google Maps is one easy way to accomplish this.
Wear reflective gear at night. If you’re walking early in the morning or after dusk, wear a reflective jacket or vest. You can also get reflective tape and add it to your shoes and the back of your pants.
Use the sidewalks. The US Department of Transportation states that you should always walk on the sidewalk. If there is no sidewalk, walk facing traffic.
Plan your route. To avoid getting lost or wandering into areas that may be unlit or unsafe, plan your route ahead of time. This will help you remain aware of your surroundings while allowing you to give someone your exact location before you head out.
Carry your phone. If you’re walking alone — especially at night — make sure you carry your phone in case of an emergency. However, do not let your phone distract you to the point where you’re not alert and aware of your surroundings.
Marvel’s newest movie is here, and we have good and bad news. The good: You don’t have to do any homework before seeing The Fantastic Four: First Steps, according to Marvel Studios president Kevin Feige. The bad: It’s the last Marvel flick we’re getting until 2026. More good: It has a super Rotten Tomatoes score. More bad: You’ll miss out if you don’t stick around to watch the credits.
The Fantastic Four: First Steps premiered in theaters on Friday and kicks off Phase Six of the Marvel Cinematic Universe. It drops viewers into a retrofuturistic world where — due to an accident that mutated them and gave them powers — the heroes are Reed Richards/Mister Fantastic (Pedro Pascal), Sue Storm/Invisible Woman (Vanessa Kirby), Johnny Storm/Human Torch (Joseph Quinn) and Ben Grimm/The Thing (Ebon Moss-Bachrach).
CNET’s Kourtnee Jackson reviewed First Steps, which she noted is “heavy on the sci-fi and tender family dynamic.” The film featuring Marvel’s First Family continues the tradition of bonus clips after the movie. Here’s what you need to know about post-credit scenes.
Does The Fantastic Four: First Steps have post-credits scenes?
Yep, it sure does. The new Fantastic Four movie has a mid-credits and post-creditsscene. If you want to watch both, you should plan to stay in the theater for about an additional 11 minutes after the film.
If you’re here for details about what happens in those clips, you’ll find that below. Don’t keep reading unless you want a spoiler-packed rundown.
The Fantastic Four: First Steps follows Marvel’s First Family during a pivotal time in their lives: The pregnancy and birth of Reed and Sue’s baby son, Franklin. That also coincided with the most significant challenge the Four had yet faced: Their planet served up as a snack for the intimidating Galactus.
In the end, the Four manage to take their home off the menu, and the film wraps up with them continuing their duties as the protectors of their world (and of the adorable Franklin). It’s clear that Franklin is no average infant either — Galactus identified the baby as a worthy planet-eating successor, and Franklin’s mere presence around his mother seemed enough to resurrect her after the final boss battle. The film’s mid-credit scene, which starts about two minutes after the ending, revolves around Franklin and his loving mom.
The scene takes place four years later, meaning Franklin is no longer a tiny tot. Sue and Franklin are sitting on a couch together, and she gets up to grab a new book for them to read together. She asks H.E.R.B.I.E. if the robot has seen the book Franklin loves, and she swaps out one of his favorites, The Origin of Species by Charles Darwin, for the other, which is a more kid-friendly book. The exchange between mom and robot suggests the little boy is advanced for his age. But the good times are cut short when Sue senses something is off.
Marvel
She returns to Franklin to find him reaching out and touching a cloaked character who wasn’t there just moments earlier. We don’t see the intruder’s face, but he’s holding a silver mask. It’s undoubtedly the incoming MCU antagonist Doctor Doom. The audience sees a message that says, “The Fantastic Four will return in Avengers: Doomsday.”
The Avengers movie will star Robert Downey Jr. as Doom and is scheduled for release on Dec. 18, 2026.
As for the second post-credits scene: If you stay all the way to the end, you’ll catch the cast depicted as cartoon characters on a TV.
What could Doctor Doom’s appearance mean?
Between Mephisto in Ironheart and Doctor Victor Von Doom’s cameo in this movie, MCU theories are going to spin all over the place. Let us join in.
Doom’s comic book history has mostly put him at odds with the Fantastic Four, with a deep rivalry between him and Reed Richards/Mr. Fantastic. The two were once university classmates but never close friends as Victor put himself above everyone. Over the course of storylines, they’ve battled each other while occasionally dropping their beef to fight a common threat.
As the Four’s main antagonist, he’s attacked, hatched various evil plots and even kidnapped Franklin. Like Reed, he’s a science whiz and has had brushes with the Silver Surfer and Galactus. With that in mind, he could either have intentions to snatch Franklin to use the child’s cosmic abilities or resurrection powers, or he’s shown up to ask the Fantastic Four for help in a different reality. Or both. After all, Galactus was dropkicked into a different dimension and could very well have landed in the universe with 616 — that Earth could be his next snack. The question is, will Doctor Doom be in his evil era or semi-hero era when Avengers: Doomsday drops next year?
Franklin can create what’s called “pocket universes,” which are basically self-contained within a larger universe. Given that the Doomsday movie could possibly see multiversal drama play out after the events of Doctor Strange: Multiverse of Madness (remember that scene about an Incursion?) and Fantastic Four, Doctor Doom could be looking to harness the young boy’s powers to either stop — or take advantage of — whatever disaster is on the horizon. And let’s not forget that post-credits scene in Brave New World, where Sam Wilson was sternly warned of “the others” coming from another world.
Realities and universes may be on the brink of colliding when we see Doom next, and then the plot will lead us all into Secret Wars, which, hopefully, gets into the Battleworld comic book storyline. Prepare to see a bunch of heroes and new villains converge from across the multiverse (that includes X-Men and Loki, too).
Apple introduced its Emoji Game on July 17, otherwise known as World Emoji Day. But when Apple released iOS 18.2 in December, that update brought the popular puzzle game Sudoku to the News app.
Everyone can try a few sudoku puzzles free but Apple News Plus subscribers can play new puzzles every day. An Apple News Plus subscription is $13 a month and gives you access to daily sudoku and other puzzles, like Quartiles, as well as stories from publications like the New Yorker and the Wall Street Journal.
Read more: Everything You Need to Know About iOS 18 Before iOS 26
Here’s where you can find sudoku on your iPhone and what to know about the game.
Where can I find the sudoku puzzles on iPhone?
1. Open News. 2. Tap Following across the bottom of your screen. 3. Tap Puzzles. 4. Tap Sudoku.
There are three puzzles near the top of the menu marked as Free to Play that everyone — even non-Apple News Plus subscribers — can play. These puzzles are usually at least a week old and Apple marks these as Easy, Moderate and Challenging, denoting each puzzle’s difficulty. Tap any of these to play. Below the Free to Play puzzles you’ll find new daily puzzles and an archive of puzzles that Apple News Plus subscribers can play at their leisure.
What do I need to know about sudoku on iPhone?
Apple/CNET
In sudoku, you have to place the numbers 1 to 9 into a square 9-by-9 grid. There are nine 3-by-3 blocks within that grid and you have to place the numbers in each block, row and column so there are no duplicate numbers in each. That means a block can’t have the number 2 twice, for example, and the same goes for each row and column.
On iPhone, you can enter a number into a space by tapping the Pen option beneath the puzzle, tapping the space you want to answer for and then tapping the number at the bottom of the screen. If a particular space can have two or three numbers in it, you can tap Notes next to Pen and then choose all the numbers that can be placed in the space to keep track of things.
How do I know if a number is in the right spot?
Here’s how to check your number placements with Autocheck.
1. Open News. 2. Tap Following across the bottom of your screen. 3. Tap Puzzles. 4. Tap Sudoku. 5. Tap a puzzle. 6. Tap the button with a checkmark in the top right. 7. Tap Autocheck.
Now if you place a number in the wrong spot, your iPhone will mark the number with a red slash through it. Your iPhone won’t mark numbers placed in the correct spot.
How do I restart a puzzle if I need to?
Here’s how to restart a puzzle for any reason.
1. Open News. 2. Tap Following across the bottom of your screen. 3. Tap Puzzles. 4. Tap Sudoku. 5. Tap a puzzle. 6. Tap the button with a checkmark in the top right. 7. Tap Clear Puzzle.
All your answers will vanish and you can start the puzzle fresh.
For more on iOS 18, here’s what you need to know about iOS 18.5 and iOS 18.4, as well as our iOS 18 cheat sheet. You can also check out what you should know about iOS 26 and how the upcoming OS lets us kill the alarm’s 9-minute snooze.
Watch this: Apple’s Foldable iPhone Said to Use Samsung Parts
Like temperatures, savings rates could start cooling off in September.
Kristina Kokhanova/Getty Images
Temperatures aren’t the only thing that’s elevated this summer. Savings rates are sizzling too. That’s awesome news for anyone who wants to grow their money faster.
But, just like temps, annual percentage yields can’t stay high forever. The Federal Reserve is likely to keep rates where they are at its July 29-30 meeting, but it could begin cutting them in September. That makes now the time to lock in an APY up to 4.5% with one of today’s top CDs.
Read more: This Shockingly Simple Trick Doubled My Savings in One Year
Guaranteed earnings, in this economy? That’s hot
CDs aren’t exciting and they won’t make you rich overnight. But steady and predictable can be a good thing, especially in today’s economy, when people are scared to invest and nervous to spend. Stock market swings, tariff fallout and stupidly high prices are making savers run to safety.
When you lock up your savings into a CD for a set term and leave it untouched, your earnings are guaranteed. Your APY won’t drop even if overall interest rates drop. It’s a quiet, easy way to get a little extra cash, kind of like discovering a $10 bill in your jeans pocket every month.
Watch this: These Are the Safest Places to Keep Your Money Right Now
Why you shouldn’t wait to lock in your APY
The Fed has held rates steady at its last three meetings as it kept a close eye on economic factors like inflation and employment. Experts expect it will do the same at next week’s meeting. But it could begin cutting rates at its Sept. 17 meeting, which means banks will likely start cutting APYs too.
The Fed doesn’t directly impact savings rates, but banks tend to follow its lead. When the Fed cut rates three times at the end of 2024, banks slashed their CD and savings rates to attract new customers and avoid paying as much interest to existing customers. We’re already seeing rates fall across the banks we track at CNET.
In other words, if you want to maximize your earnings, don’t wait too long to open a CD. The sooner you do, the better the APY you may be able to score.
Rather not lock up your cash? Consider a high-yield savings account
If you’d prefer to have ready access to your money, a high-yield savings account could be a better fit. Most CDs impose a penalty if you pull out your funds before the maturity date, but a HYSA is more flexible, allowing you to add deposits and withdraw funds as needed.
Some APYs on high-yield savings accounts are also in the 4% range, making them a better option over traditional savings accounts. But, unlike a CD, HYSAs have a variable interest rate, so your returns are less predictable.
Shopping for a new laptop can be a confusing experience. I find the best place to start is with size. Do you want a featherlight ultraportable or a larger model that has a bigger screen but is more of a chore to lug around? Or something in between that offers a balance between portability and productivity? Deciding on factors as straightforward as size actually goes a long way in helping choose more complex parts, including the processor. You’ll still be faced with a variety of CPU options, but settling on a size helps narrow the field, and what’s below can ensure you get the right processor for your needs.
Intel and AMD have long been the two most popular chipmakers for Windows laptops, and Qualcomm has recently reemerged as a third option. Each of the three offers a wide range of processors that you’ll see offered on nearly every type of laptop. It’s more straightforward with Apple using its own M-series chips for MacBooks, but even then, you’ve got some choices to make.
If you want to skip right to the point, here’s the TL;DR info for picking the best laptop CPU:
Our top pick for a laptop CPU is Apple’s M-series chips. That’s because they offer the best balance of CPU and GPU performance, plus lengthy battery life. There’s a reason the M4 MacBook Air tops our Best Laptops list.
For Windows, we recommend a laptop with a Qualcomm Snapdragon X series processor. With its mix of performance and battery life, it comes closest to rivaling that of a MacBook. However, Qualcomm laptops come with the risk of software compatibility issues. If that’s enough to scare you off, then we recommend an Intel Core Ultra 200V chip from the chipmaker’s Lunar Lake series. It offers competitive application, graphics and AI performance along with the efficiency that allows a laptop to run for nearly as long as one with a Qualcomm chip.
Gamers, content creators and graphics pros will find laptops with high-powered processors from both Intel and AMD, but choosing between them matters less than getting a laptop with the best GPU you can afford.
For those who want to dive into the details, keep reading. Below, we’ll explain the differences between the current crop of mobile processors from Intel, AMD, Qualcomm and Apple to help you pick the right CPU for your next laptop — no matter its size, price or operating system.
Current laptop CPU landscape
For Windows laptops, the choice for decades has been between Intel and AMD. Intel’s current lineup is its Core Ultra Series 2 chips (aka Lunar Lake and Arrow Lake), and AMD’s latest series is its Ryzen AI 300 series (aka Strix Point and Krackan Point). Each company refers to its latest batch as AI chips because, in addition to the central processing unit and integrated graphics processing unit, they include a neural processing unit, which is a power-efficient chip for handling AI tasks.
There’s a lot of overlap and direct competition between Intel’s and AMD’s processors, from low-voltage chips for greater efficiency and longer battery life to higher-powered processors that prioritize performance.
For Intel, let’s take the Core Ultra 258V chip as a jumping off point. It’s the most popular processor from Intel’s Lunar Lake series and is widely available. Just in the past few months, I’ve seen it in the Lenovo ThinkPad X1 Carbon Gen 13, Acer Swift 14 AI and Asus Zenbook S 14.
We tested Lenovo’s flagship ThinkPad X1 Carbon with a Core Ultra 258V processor from Intel’s Lunar Lake series.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Designed for thin-and-light AI laptops, the Core Ultra 258V has Intel’s hybrid design that blends performance cores for demanding tasks with smaller efficiency cores that are more power efficient and designed to handle background/less demanding chores. The Core Ultra 258V has a CPU with four performance and four efficient cores, along with Intel’s integrated Arc 140V GPU.
Now, compare that with one of AMD’s more popular laptop CPUs, the Ryzen AI 7 350. Like the Core Ultra 258V, it’s an eight-core chip, but AMD doesn’t use a mix of performance and efficient cores — rather, they’re all regular performance cores. And unlike the Core Ultra 258V, the Ryzen AI 7 350 is multithreaded, meaning its eight physical cores can operate as 16 virtual cores. I’ve seen better single-core performance from laptops based on the Core Ultra 258V, with the Ryzen AI 7 350-based laptops leading with multicore performance.
Intel and AMD mainstream chips compared
Cores
Threads
Max. Boost Clock
NPU TOPS
Power class (base/boost)
Intel Core Ultra 7 258V
8 (4P, 4E)
8
4.8GHz
47
17-37 watts
AMD Ryzen AI 7 350
8
16
5.0GHz
50
15-54 watts
AI performance between the two is essentially equal, with both exceeding the 40 trillion operations per second minimum set by Microsoft for its Copilot Plus PC platform — laptops designed to handle AI tasks locally, on-device rather than through an internet-connected server somewhere else. The Core Ultra 258V features an NPU capable of 47 TOPS for performing AI calculations, and the Ryzen AI 7 350’s NPU is capable of 50 TOPS.
In terms of battery life, the efficiency of a laptop’s CPU is just one factor, so it’s hard to give the nod to Intel or AMD, but we’ve seen better battery life on laptops with the Core Ultra 258V. The Core Ultra 258V is the more efficient of the two, with a TDP of 8 to 37 watts and a default of 17 watts. The Ryzen AI 7 350 has a range of 15 to 54 watts and a default of 28 watts.
Neither Intel nor AMD, however, is the current battery life champion. That crown belongs to Qualcomm and its Arm-based Snapdragon X series processors. I’ll cover the differences between x86 and Arm below, but just know that most of the longest-running laptops we’ve tested have used a Snapdragon X series CPU. These laptops have battery lives that can exceed 20 hours, but they also come with the trade-off of potential software compatibility issues.
Intel’s current lineup
Let’s return to Intel, whose laptop processors are the most widely used. After the Core Ultra 200V Lunar Lake series, Intel followed up with Arrow Lake, which gave us more Core Ultra 200 series chips to keep track of. Three to be exact: Core Ultra 200U, 200H and 200HX.
The Core Ultra 200U series is Intel’s response to Qualcomm’s efficient Snapdragon X series. With just two performance cores to eight efficient cores and two low-power efficient cores — plus a base TDP of just 15 watts — these are the most efficient chips in Intel’s current lineup. You’ll see these chips, like the Core Ultra 5 225U and Core Ultra 7 255U, in thin-and-light laptops. They’re a good choice if you want an ultraportable with long battery life but fear the possibility of running into an issue with your x86 Windows software not playing nice with an Arm-based CPU.
You’ll find no shortage of laptops with Intel’s latest Core Ultra processors.
James Martin/CNET
The other Arrow Lake series, the Core Ultra 200H and 200HX, are higher-powered chips than the Core Ultra 200U chips or the Core Ultra 200V from Lunar Lake. The 200HX is Intel’s flagship series of mobile CPUs for gaming and content creation laptops. You’ll see options like the Core Ultra 7 255HX, which is a 20-core (8 performance and 12 efficient cores) with a power envelope of 15 to 57 watts. Surprisingly, the Core Ultra 255H draws even more power, running between 28 to 60 watts, but offers a mix of cores closer to that of the efficient 200U series. It has 16 cores made up of six performance cores, eight efficient cores and two low-power efficient cores.
If you want an AI laptop because you’re already running local AI workloads or just want to future-proof your next laptop purchase, you’ll want to choose a Core Ultra 200V (Lunar Lake) processor rather than any of the Arrow Lake variants. The Core Ultra 200HX and 200H series chips are more powerful than the Core Ultra 200V but have NPUs with much lower TOPS counts. The same goes for the low-power Arrow Lake line, the Core Ultra 200U.
AMD’s mobile offerings
It’s easier to parse AMD’s mobile lineup for the simple fact that there are fewer series and fewer chips in each series. The only confusing part is AMD’s Ryzen AI 300 line is made up of chips from the Strix Point and Krackan Point families, but you don’t really need to remember the former codenames.
Strix Point chips are the higher-end units, such as the Ryzen AI 9 HX 370, which offers 12 cores, 24 threads and an NPU capable of 50 TOPS. You’ll find Ryzen AI 9 processors in gaming laptops and other high-powered models meant for serious graphics or scientific work.
AMD’s latest laptop processors are its Ryzen AI 300 series.
James Martin/CNET
Krackan Point chips fill out the bottom of the Ryzen AI 300 series and max out at eight cores. Chips like the Ryzen AI 7 350 and Ryzen AI 5 330 and 340 are offered in budget and mainstream laptops.
AMD’s most recent mobile CPUs are its Strix Halo and Fire Range series. Each is made up of high-powered chips. The Strix Halo line includes Ryzen AI Max and Max Plus chips, with the Max versions offering up to eight cores and Max Plus offering up to 16 cores. Unlike Intel’s high-end 200HX chips, Ryzen AI Max and Max Plus don’t skimp on AI performance and offer an NPU capable of 50 TOPS. Meanwhile, the new Fire Range line is meant for high-end gaming laptops and mobile workstations; the flagship Ryzen 9 9955HX3D is a 55-watt processor with 16 cores, 32 threads and no NPU.
And Qualcomm makes three
For a long time, Intel and AMD were the only CPU options for Windows laptops, but last year, Qualcomm entered the fray (or reentered if you remember its earlier Windows-on-Arm efforts that came and quickly went) to add a third choice. We’ll go more in-depth in the next section about the differences between x86 processors from Intel and AMD and Arm-based processors from Qualcomm and Apple. But what you need to know is that Microsoft partnered with Qualcomm last year to launch its Copilot Plus PC initiative. Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series chips are very efficient while delivering competitive application and AI performance.
The key benefit of Snapdragon X-series processors is the efficiency of the Arm architecture and the exceptional battery life they deliver for laptops. Thanks to Qualcomm, Windows laptops now offer the same long battery life as MacBooks that run on Apple’s own Arm-based M-series processors. MacBooks have enjoyed the advantage in battery life ever since Apple introduced the M1 processor in 2020, but that gap has disappeared. In many cases, I’ve seen Snapdragon X-based laptops run longer than a MacBook Air or Pro, as in the case of the HP OmniBook X 14, Asus Zenbook A14, Acer Swift Go 14 AI and Dell Inspiron Plus 7441.
Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X series processors are very efficient to allow laptops to deliver long battery life.
James Martin/CNET
A potential sticking point for an Arm-based Windows laptop is software compatibility. Earlier Windows-on-Arm efforts were plagued by compatibility issues, with applications unable to run on Arm-based systems, but today’s Snapdragon X-based laptops offer wider support. Many x86 apps can run natively on Arm, and Microsoft’s built-in Prism emulator will let you run many non-native apps. Still, using emulation usually slows performance, so before you buy a laptop with an Arm chip, check that your mission-critical apps will run natively on the platform.
Chip architecture: x86 vs. Arm
Now, let’s dig into the difference between chips from Intel and AMD based on x86 architecture and those from Apple, Qualcomm, Samsung and MediaTek built using Arm. The fundamental difference between the two designs lies in their instruction set architectures. The x86 chips rely on complex instruction set computing to perform calculations. CISC is capable of performing multiple tasks in one cycle by issuing complex instructions. However, those instructions are very intricate and difficult to decode and execute.
Largely based on their strength in single-core performance and backward compatibility, x86 chips have long dominated the desktop market. Even as chips became faster and more efficient, they retained the ability to run older software. And x86 chips also perform very well in tasks traditionally associated with powerful, bulky desktops, such as high-end gaming, video editing and graphic design.
Arm chips use reduced instruction set computing architecture. Compared to x86, they use much simpler instructions, though multiples are also executed in a single cycle. The simpler instructions are easier and faster to decode, meaning Arm chips are typically more power efficient. This does mean more instructions are often required for the same task, which limits performance compared to x86 chips.
That imbalance is beginning to change, however. Even as x86 chips become more power efficient, advances in Apple’s M-series chips or Qualcomm’s Snapdragon X-series chips have seen vastly improved performance on the Arm side. From once being relegated to phones, Chromebooks and tablets, Arm chips are increasingly showing up in midrange laptops (and even some higher-end models).
Also, just as Arm chips are getting better performance, x86 CPUs — historically more power hungry than their Arm counterparts — are getting better for battery life. Advances by Intel and AMD have led to more efficient chips, which in turn generate less heat, requiring less cooling and further reducing power requirements.
Intel vs. AMD differences
Intel and AMD are on the same x86 side of the mobile processor divide, but they build their chips differently. Intel’s recent focus is on a hybrid design that blends performance and efficient cores, with the philosophy of using as little power as possible while still delivering high-end performance when required.
By contrast, AMD tends toward a unified core design, where most of the cores on its chips are similar/identical. It also often deploys “chiplet” architecture, particularly for its high-end mobile chips, where multiple small processors are built into a single package. This allows for higher overall core counts, but also introduces latency as the chiplets cross-communicate.
Recent generations have seen the two manufacturers grow closer in power and efficiency. While AMD once consistently led in multithreaded performance, Intel’s new hybrid architecture has closed the gap and, in some cases, allowed Team Blue to jump ahead. Intel continues to lead the way in single-threaded performance, especially with its highest-performance chips, though here, too, the gap continues to narrow.
For a good comparison between Intel and AMD, take a look at our review of the Dell 14 Plus, in which we tested a laptop model with an Intel Core Ultra 7 256V and a lower-cost two-in-one model that uses an AMD Ryzen AI 5 340. For a more apples-to-apples comparison for the Core Ultra 7 performance, check out the HP OmniBook X Flip 14, which has an AMD Ryzen AI 7 350.
The Dell 14 Plus offers both Intel and AMD options.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Laptop CPU performance: Cores, threads and clock speed
Mobile CPU performance is determined by a complex interplay of factors including the number and type of cores, threads and the chip’s peak potential clock speed. Clock speed refers to the rate at which a processor’s internal clock cycles, measured in gigahertz, or billions of cycles per second. Unlike older desktop CPUs, mobile CPUs take advantage of a technology called dynamic voltage and frequency scaling, or dynamic clock speed. This allows a system to throttle clock speed based on load, so power draw can be reduced when a system doesn’t need its full resources.
In general, higher clock speed and more cores lead to better performance, though the type of cores used can also have a significant impact and vary widely across manufacturers. Also, clock speed alone can contradict architectural efficiencies that may actually deliver better performance, even at lower speeds.
As previously mentioned, Intel’s cores vary between efficient E cores and powerful P cores; more P cores in a hybrid mix typically mean more performance. Arm chips also often blend higher-performance chips with efficient, low-power cores that it cutely titles “big.LITTLE.” When the balance tilts toward the former, performance improves, but at the cost of power efficiency.
Another important performance piece is simultaneous multithreading, or what Intel calls Hyper-Threading. SMT/Hyper-Threading refers to the ability of a single CPU core to handle multiple threads simultaneously by switching between them during idle periods on one thread. Intel and AMD x86 chips make broad use of SMT technology, while it’s comparatively very rare on the Arm side, especially in mobile chips (it does appear in some specialized and server/networking Arm processors).
Intel and AMD make it easy, in one respect, to make rough comparisons of their processors. They follow the same convention with model numbers, where a 3 identifies a budget-level chip, 5 is a lower-midrange chip, a 7 is the mainstream offering and 9 is high performance.
Qualcomm doesn’t use model numbers in labeling its processors, but its lineup is nonetheless easy to decipher. For Qualcomm, its Snapdragon X series has a low-end Snapdragon X chip, midrange Snapdragon X Plus chips and the Snapdragon X Elite chips at the high end.
Apple’s MacBook Air is based on the company’s M4 processor, with higher-performance M4 Pro and M4 Max chips available in its MacBook Pro series.
Josh Goldman/CNET
Apple’s custom Arm cores are some of the most powerful single- and multithread performers in the industry, with its latest M-series chip, the M4, being the current gold standard on the Arm side of the architecture divide in its MacBook Air and MacBook Pro laptops. The company hits these performance peaks through a combination of extremely wide cores, allowing for a huge number of simultaneous operations, aggressive out-of-order execution, with cores highly optimized for parallel instruction execution and the company’s famous top-to-bottom design structure. Because of its unique market position, Apple is able to wholly design the entire processor — CPU, NPU, GPU, memory controller and so on — in tandem with the software and operating system it’ll power, leading to unrivaled efficiencies.
Apple’s current MacBook Air lineup uses a basic M4 chip, with higher-powered M4 Pro and M4 Max processors available in its MacBook Pro line.
Apple M series lineup
Apple M4
CPU cores
P cores
E cores
GPU cores
Apple M4 Pro
10
4
6
8 or 10
Apple M4 Max
12
8
4
16 or 20
Apple M1
14
10
4
32 or 40
Laptop processor efficiency and battery life
Low power draw continues to be the holy grail of laptop design, especially for ultraportables and productivity machines as opposed to big, powerful gaming and content creation laptops. Efficiency is often expressed as thermal design power. While this technically only signifies the total heat a CPU generates and not its actual power draw, it’s a good metric for a chip’s power envelope and cooling requirements. The most efficient chips operate in the 5W-15W TDP range, while high-performance chips may hit 55W or more.
As previously mentioned, Intel approaches the efficiency problem through the lens of its mixed cores, using lower-draw cores for background and less demanding tasks, and only calling on the less efficient, more powerful cores when required. Similarly, Arm’s big.LITTLE solution pairs more power-hungry and capable ones (big) with slower, battery-saving cores (LITTLE).
Based on a Qualcomm Snapdragon X Elite CPU, the HP OmniBook X 14 is the longest-running laptop we’ve tested with battery life of more than 25 hours.
Matt Elliott/CNET
Mobile graphics
On the graphics side, the main distinction continues to be between integrated or discrete GPUs. Discrete GPUs, or graphics chips that are independent of the CPU, are almost always more capable and powerful than integrated GPUs built into the main processor.
As in the desktop space, AMD and Nvidia are the main manufacturers of discrete mobile GPUs. Nvidia’s latest is the GeForce RTX 50 series, ranging from the entry-level 5050 to the mighty 5090. Once upon a time, Nvidia supplied both standard GPUs and Max-Q GPUs for laptops, the latter being slimmer, more power efficient and less powerful than the standard variant. While the company continues to build multiple variants of the same card for laptops, the explicit Max-Q branding for GPUs has been removed, and is instead now used to reference a bunch of overarching technologies designed to make laptops more power efficient.
Radeon Graphics are AMD’s integrated mobile GPU that come with its Ryzen mobile processors.
Matt Elliott/CNET
AMD’s latest discrete GPUs are from its Radeon RX 7000 series, with the 8000 series expected later in 2025. The RX 7000 series is split between M cards, which deliver higher performance, and S cards, which trade some performance for higher power efficiency. Both rely on AMD’s RDNA 3 architecture, which uses the chipset design present in Team Red’s CPUs.
Broadly speaking, Nvidia tends to own the high-end enthusiast market, with its most powerful GPUs outperforming AMD’s most potent cards. Nvidia also puts a premium on ray-tracing technology, an advanced lighting technology used in gaming and video rendering, as well as its DLSS upscaling and frame generation techniques. AMD’s strengths are in traditional rasterization lighting, though it also has a DLSS competitor called FSR and tends to be more generous with VRAM, which can help futureproof its cards to some extent. Its midrange chips also tend to beat out Nvidia’s in a pure price-to-performance context.
Apple’s MacBook Air and MacBook Pro laptops are based on the company’s own M4 mobile processors.
James Martin/CNET
AMD’s integrated GPUs have historically outperformed Intel’s, though with its latest Core Ultra processors, Intel’s integrated Arc GPUs have narrowed the gap. Intel has also crafted its own AI-powered upscaling technology, which it calls XeSS. Apple’s M-series and Qualcomm’s Adreno Arm-based integrated GPUs have also shown massive improvement in the most recent generation, making both companies legitimate contenders for people who crave an ultraportable laptop that can also handle some legit gaming on the go.
AI and NPUs
Microsoft setting a 40 TOPS minimum for its Copilot Plus PC platform set off an avalanche of NPU integrations in chipsets that previously had none. NPUs are neural processing units, which are essentially slower versions of GPUs that draw less power. They’re explicitly designed for AI-accelerating tasks and are very good at linear operations, which are at the heart of most neural network computations. NPUs have the advantage of freeing up CPU and GPU cores for operations that they’re better equipped to handle while being extremely power efficient.
Some confusion has emerged around how TOPS are measured and advertised. TOPS typically refers only to those generated by the NPU, but we’re now seeing laptops marketed with a “platform TOPS” number, which includes TOPS that the CPU and/or GPU can also generate. This is further complicated by the fact that the TOPS count can vary widely based on factors such as whether a laptop is plugged in or running on battery.
High-powered laptops feature Nvidia graphics for increased gaming and AI performance.
Nvidia, Lori Grunin/CNET
While the current slate of AI features built into Windows is a little lackluster (depending largely on how you feel about its controversial Recall function, which takes “screenshots” of your PC activity and lets you return to them at any time), the AI landscape is rapidly changing and evolving. Even if you have yet to find a need for a laptop powered by an AI chip, you very well might during the lifespan of your next laptop.
An increasing number of AI models, such as AnythingLLM and GPT4ALL, can now run locally on your laptop — making a machine that can accelerate AI functions a major advantage. Local models that don’t require internet connectivity offer better performance and privacy than those that send your queries and requests to the cloud and back. Local models are better for the environment, too, because they don’t require massive data centers and their associated power requirements to operate.
Now that you have a better handle on mobile CPUs and are ready to shop for your next laptop, a great place to start is with our top-tested and reviewed models, from the best overall laptops, best gaming laptops and best two-in-one laptops to best budget laptops, best laptops for college students and the laptops with the best battery life.
If you’ve narrowed your pick down to a specific brand, check out our picks for the best Asus laptops, best Dell laptops, best HP laptops and best Lenovo laptops.
You can also filter by operating system by checking out the best Windows laptops, best MacBooks and best Chromebooks.
The Trump administration on Wednesday laid out the steps it plans to take to ensure “global AI dominance” for the US, with an AI Action Plan that calls for cutting regulations to speed up the development of artificial intelligence tools and the infrastructure to power them.
Critics said the plan is a handout to tech and fossil fuel companies, slashing rules that could protect consumers, prevent pollution and fight climate change.
The plan itself isn’t all that binding. It includes dozens of policy recommendations for the executive branch to carry out but doesn’t on its own make anything happen. The steps it lays out follow how the Trump administration has approached AI and technology over the past six months — giving tech companies a largely free hand, focusing on beating China and prioritizing the construction of data centers, factories and fossil fuel power plants over environmental regulations.
It is seizing on the moment created by the arrival of ChatGPT less than three years ago and the ensuing wave of generative AI efforts by Google, Meta and others.
“An industrial revolution, an information revolution, and a renaissance — all at once. This is the potential that AI presents,” the AI Action Plan says.
President Donald Trump is expected to speak on AI priorities later Wednesday during a forum with the hosts of the All-In Podcast.
The administration and tech industry groups touted the plan as a framework for US success in a race against China. “President Trump’s AI Action Plan presents a blueprint to usher in a new era of US AI dominance,” Jason Oxman, president and CEO of the tech industry trade group ITI, said in a statement.
Consumer groups said the plan focuses on deregulation and would hurt consumers by reducing the rules that could protect them.
“Whether it’s promoting the use of federal land for dirty data centers, giving the FTC orders to question past cases, or attempting to revive some version of the soundly defeated AI moratorium by tying federal funds to not having ‘onerous regulation’ according to the FCC, this is an unwelcome distraction at a critical time for government to get consumer protection right with increasing AI use and abuse,” Ben Winters, director of AI and privacy at the Consumer Federation of America, said in a statement.
Here’s a look at the proposals in the plan.
Slashing regulations for AI infrastructure
The plan says AI growth will require infrastructure, including chip factories, data centers and more energy generation. And it blames environmental regulations for getting in the way. In response, it proposes exemptions for AI-related construction from certain environmental regulations, including those aimed at protecting clean water and air. It also suggests making federal lands available for data center construction and related power plants.
To provide energy for all those data centers, the plan calls for steps to prevent the “premature decommissioning of critical power generation resources.” This likely refers to keeping coal-fired power plants and other mostly fossil-fuel-driven infrastructure online for longer.
The administration also called to prioritize the connection of new “reliable, dispatchable power sources” to the grid and specifically named nuclear fission and fusion and advanced geothermal generation. Earlier this month, the president signed a bill that would end many tax credits and incentives for renewable energy — wind and solar — years earlier than planned. Wind and solar make up the bulk of the new energy generation being added to the US grid right now.
Fewer rules around AI technology
Congress ended up not including a moratorium on state AI rules in the recently passed tax and spending bill but efforts to cut regulations around AI continue from the executive branch in the action plan. “AI is far too important to smother in bureaucracy at this early stage, whether at the state or Federal level,” the plan says.
The plan recommends that several federal agencies review whether existing or proposed rules would interfere with the development and deployment of AI. The feds would consider whether states’ regulatory climate is favorable for AI when deciding to award funding. Federal Trade Commission investigations and orders would be reviewed to determine that they don’t “advance theories of liability that unduly burden AI innovation.”
Those rule changes could undermine efforts to protect consumers from problems caused by AI, critics said. “Companies — including AI companies — have a legal obligation to protect their products from being used for harm,” Justin Brookman, director of tech policy at Consumer Reports, said in a statement. “When a company makes design choices that increase the risk their product will be used for harm, or when the risks are particularly serious, companies should bear legal responsibility.”
Ideology and large language models
The plan proposes some steps around ensuring AI “protects free speech and American values,” further steps in the Trump administration’s efforts to roll back federal policies around what it refers to as “diversity, equity and inclusion,” along with references to the problems of misinformation and climate change. It calls for eliminating references to those items in the National Institute of Standards and Technology’s AI Risk Management Framework. Federal agencies would only be allowed to contract with AI developers who “ensure that their systems are objective and free from top-down ideological bias.”
The Trump administration has recently announced contracts of up to $200 million each to developers Anthropic, Google, OpenAI and xAI. Grok, the model from Elon Musk’s xAI, has recently come under fire for spouting antisemitism and hate speech.
Dealing with workforce challenges
The plan acknowledges that AI will “transform how work gets done across all industries and occupations, demanding a serious workforce response to help workers navigate that transition” and recommends actions by federal agencies including the Department of Labor intended to mitigate the harms of AI-driven job displacement. The plan calls for the Bureau of Labor Statistics, Census Bureau and Bureau of Economic Analysis to monitor how AI affects the labor market using data already collected. An AI Workforce Research Hub under the Department of Labor would lead monitoring and issue policy recommendations.
Most of the actual plans to help workers displaced by AI involve retraining those workers for other jobs or to help states do the same.
Other jobs-related recommendations are aimed at boosting the kinds of jobs needed for all those data centers and chip manufacturing plants — like electricians and HVAC technicians.
These plans and others to encourage AI literacy and AI use in education drew praise from the Software & Information Industry Association, a tech industry trade group. “These are key components for building trust and ensuring all communities can participate in and benefit from AI’s potential,” Paul Lekas, SIIA’s senior vice president of global public policy, said in a statement.
More AI in government
The plan envisions more use of AI by the federal government. A talent exchange program would allow employees with experience or talent in AI to be detailed to other agencies in need. The General Services Administration would create a toolbox of AI models that would help agencies see models to choose from and use cases in other parts of the government.
Every government agency would also be required to ensure employees who could use AI in their jobs have access to and training for AI tools.
Many recommendations focus specifically on the Department of Defense, including creating a virtual proving ground for AI and autonomous systems. AI companies have already been signing contracts with the DOD to develop AI tools for the military.
If you’re facing down the heat wave this summer, there’s a new beta app for iPhones from the founder of Twitter, Jack Dorsey, for tracking your exposure to the sun. The Sun Day app is free to testers and so far contains information like sunrise, sunset and UV index in order to assess your potential burn-limit time and, as the app description says, “track your Vitamin D from the sun.”
Dorsey is currently testing UI updates and a solar noon notification, according to the app notes. In the app, you can describe the type of clothing you’re wearing, such as shorts and T-shirts or swimwear, and your Fitzpatrick skin type, which classifies how quickly you’ll burn.
The iOS app asks permission to connect to some Apple Health data when the app is installed.
Dorsey also recently released Bitchat, a private messaging client that uses Bluetooth as its communication platform. Although it’s meant to be a secure, private app, some users have flagged Bitchat for potential security flaws that are still being tested.
The effectiveness of an app such as Sun Day depends on giving it accurate information about your skin type and clothing, and while vitamin D levels are one way to gauge UV exposure, it’s not foolproof given that some people also take vitamin D supplements.
“Jack Dorsey’s new app Sun Day is exciting, not to detect vitamin D levels but really to help us understand our UV index which is so important in sun safety,” said Tanya Kormeili, an LA-based dermatologist. “The app does have an interesting promise as far as I am concerned, in that using the UV index can show you the risk for the level of UV exposure.”
The risks of too much sun exposure include sunburns, aging skin and skin cancer. Tracking UV levels is one way to help mitigate those risks.
People tend to think about sun exposure and protections like sunscreen most during the summer, when the sun is strongest and the days are long, and when you’re heading to the beach or out gardening, golfing or otherwise getting in quality sun time. But there is always a risk of sun damage to your skin while you’re outside — year round.
“Sometimes it is hard for patients to be convinced that there can be an excessive UV risk on a cloudy day,” Kormeili says. “The app would provide an objective measure of that UV index and guide you in safer sun practices.”
The dermatologist suggests that Dorsey putting the app out for public consumption without medical experts endorsing it might be a missed opportunity. “I am surprised that they have not involved actual dermatologists in pointing out the true value and limitations of this app,” she said.
These new investment savings account will be started for every newborn automatically over the next few years.
Getty Images
Amid the divisiveness surrounding the passage of President Donald Trump’s “One Big Beautiful” spending bill, one portion of the legislation seems like it would be agreeable to pretty much everyone: a new type of investment savings account for newborns, which the federal government will seed with money upfront.
That sounds like a win for most folks, but are these accounts all they’re cracked up to be? And how will they actually work?
Most of the conversations and conflicts surrounding the Big Beautiful Bill, which Trump signed into law on July 4, largely ignored these accounts, focusing on the potential damages from sweeping Medicaid cuts and the bolstering of immigration enforcement funding. As polarizing as those elements of the bill were, these new savings accounts, which congressional Republicans attempted to brand as “Trump accounts,” had bipartisan support. In the past, prominent Democrats like Hillary Clinton and Sen. Cory Booker have suggested similar ideas to help parents begin building up savings for their children.
These aren’t going to be free money that new parents can use right away, as there are a number of rules about what can be done with the money. Additionally, the policy will only be in place for a few years unless extended. With all that in mind, keep reading for all the details you’ll need to know about the so-called “Trump accounts” and what they mean for your family.
For more, find out what recent political moves might mean for your student loan payments.
Who’s eligible for these new accounts?
You can open one of these accounts in your child’s name as soon as they’re born, and so long as you, your spouse and the child have valid Social Security numbers. If the child’s parents aren’t married, only the parent opening the account and the child need Social Security numbers.
As the policy currently stands, these accounts can only be opened for children born between Jan. 1, 2025, and Dec. 31, 2028. It’s another example of a common theme highlighted by critics of the Big Beautiful Bill: benefits set to end around the time Trump will leave the White House and drawbacks kicking in once someone new is in office.
Whatever the political machinations behind the timeline might be, just keep them in mind if you have a kid later than the start of 2029, since the policy might not be extended.
What do the “Trump accounts” do?
These accounts allow parents to contribute up to $5,000 a year towards a fund their child will have access to later in life. As investment accounts — think a 401(k) for your new baby as opposed to a standard savings account — they have the potential to accrue a lot more value over the years through capital gains and dividends, but they could also lose value depending on how markets move. Other entities, such as the parents’ employers, can also contribute to these accounts, up to $2,500 a year.
One of the most publicized and desirable aspects of these accounts is that, once one is opened for a new child, the federal government will seed it with $1,000 to get things rolling. This is why the savings accounts have gotten a thumbs-up from some experts, even if parents never add anything else to the account.
“Someone is giving me $1,000 for my kid? That’s a no-brainer. Who turns away free money?” Jaime Eckels of Plante Moran Financial Advisors said in an interview with CNBC. “From there, you’ll have to decide what additional savings you’ll have for your child.”
It’s unlikely, however, that a significant number of Americans will be able to use these accounts to their fullest, since, as the Urban Institute noted, one-third don’t currently have over $2,000 in savings or have surplus income high enough to make stock investments. Still though, you’ll probably be happier to have that $1,000 from the government even if you aren’t able to save much on your own. The Milken Institute estimated that the minimum seed from the government could grow to as much as $8,000 for your child over the course of 20 years.
How can I open one of these accounts?
You should be able to open one at any bank or participating financial institution. If no one gets around to it, the government will open one for the child automatically the first time you file a tax return with the new baby claimed as a dependent.
When can money be withdrawn from one of these accounts?
The holder of the account (that is, your child) can’t withdraw any funds from them until they are at least 18 years old. Funds withdrawn from the account will be subject to the standard capital gains tax, and an additional 10% penalty until they’re 59 and a half or older, similar to withdrawals from a 401(k) account.
However, there are a number of notable life expenses that the money can be used for penalty-free, including higher-education costs and expenses incurred due to things like disability, domestic violence or natural disasters. Up to $10,000 can be withdrawn penalty-free to be put towards the purchase of a home, and $5,000 can be withdrawn to cover the costs of having a baby.
For more, keep an eye on inflation with CNET’s daily tariff impact tracker.
Six-pack abs might be one of the most sought-after fitness goals, but the truth is, they’re not easy to get — and for a lot of people, they may not even be realistic. Despite what flashy YouTube videos promise, doing a few hundred crunches won’t magically give you a defined core in a week. Still, finding a rhythm — whether it’s through routine or listening to the right playlist — can help keep you moving.
Whether you have those coveted abs has less to do with exercise and more with genetics and body fat percentage. Genetics are completely out of our hands, and body fat is a little harder to control than you might think.
Still determined to try for six-pack abs, or want to learn why your exercise-filled attempts have never been successful? I spoke to Dr. John Morton, the head of Bariatric and Minimally Invasive Surgery at Yale Medicine, and together we’ll tell you everything you need to know, including how to work toward your goal safely.
Read more:The best home gym equipment
What does body fat percentage mean?
Body fat is partly determined by what you eat, but other factors are out of your control.
Getty Images
It may sound fairly self-explanatory, but your body fat percentage just measures how much of your body mass is fat. And don’t look at fat like it’s a bad word — body fat percentage includes essential fat you need to survive.
Body fat percentage is easy to get confused with body mass index, or BMI, but the two are quite different. BMI isn’t the best measurement of health, since some people can have a “healthy” reading but actually be in danger for obesity-related illnesses because they have too little lean mass.
There’s a bunch of different ways you can measure your body fat percentage, and for the best readings you’ll want to get it done at a doctor’s or dietician’s office. They’ll have machines like an underwater weighing station or the ability to do a DEXA scan, which are far more accurate than anything you can do at home.
However, if you don’t have the resources to make the trip to a healthcare provider, you can get a fairly good estimate at home. The American Council of Exercise has a calculator where you can plug in some skinfold measurements for a rough idea of what your body fat percentage is.
Read more:Best filtered water bottles for 2025 to remove bacteria, sediment and more
Use These 27 Tips to Help You Sleep Better Starting Tonight
See all photos
What body fat percentage do I need for a six-pack?
No matter how strong your ab muscles are, they’re not going to show through unless you have a low enough body fat. That specific body fat number, though, is individual.
Morton says you’ll typically need to be below 15% body fat for a six-pack, though he stresses it’s different for everyone. Some women on Reddit report that they can start to see a six-pack at around 20% body fat, while others are at 18% and don’t see anything.
The reason why the number varies for everyone is because we all have different body fat distribution — some carry fat around their midsection, while others have an “hourglass” shape, where you carry fat in your chest and hips. Body fat distribution is determined in part by environmental factors, like alcohol intake and cigarette use, but it also has a strong genetic component.
So, you may be at 18% body fat and carry weight on your hips, but I may be at 18% and carry it around my stomach — in that case, you’ll have a lot easier time getting a six-pack than I will.
Read more:The best rowing machines
Morton also points to groups of people who have a harder time getting to a low body fat — namely, Hispanics, African Americans and women.
Depending on your individual situation, the body fat percentage needed for a six-pack may not even be healthy. Low body fat can disrupt menstruation and fertility, and can damage your heart, immune system or cause a ton of other serious conditions. Women will typically not want to go below 14% body fat, and men 8%, but for some people that number may be higher — if you’re experiencing health problems connected to your weight, contact your health care provider.
Say you get to a low enough body fat percentage in a healthy manner — I hate to break it to you, but you still might not have a six-pack. Your abs are actually one big muscle, called the rectus abdominis, and the six-pack look is created by the intersections of three lateral tendons and one horizontal one. While most people have this tendon pattern, some have two or four lateral tendons — in that case, you’ll have a four- or eight-pack.
What workout should I do for a six-pack?
I hope I haven’t rained on your parade too much — if you’re still motivated to try, there are certainly steps you can take to maximize your chances of getting that coveted six-pack.
The first thing you’ll probably want to do is lose weight. But be careful — weight loss doesn’t automatically mean fat loss. Morton says to emphasize your protein intake instead of carbs and fat, and keep up your exercise and weight lifting during your weight loss journey. This way, you can ensure that you’re primarily losing fat and not muscle or water.
When losing weight, be sure to keep up the exercise.
Westend61/Getty Images
“Another helpful way to get a six-pack is to avoid the other six-pack,” Morton says, referring to alcohol. There’s a reason why it’s called a beer belly — alcohol intake usually puts weight around your midsection, so you’ll definitely want to avoid overconsumption if you want a six-pack.
Finally, don’t neglect the core workout. Morton tells me that even if you aren’t striving for a six-pack, core workouts are super important for preventing neck and back issues, as well as improving your posture.
Certified physical therapist Jeff Cavaliere, known on YouTube as Athlean X, has a great workout routine video with some simple compound movements to develop your abdominal strength. Whatever workout you end up doing, you’ll want to ensure you’re incorporating whole body movements so you don’t develop muscle imbalances.
Just remember to make sure you’re getting protein, avoiding too much alcohol and working out your abs — if the genetic gods are kind to you, your hard work will get you where you need to be.
When Apple announced iOS 26 at its Worldwide Developers Conference in June, the tech company also announced that the new iOS version would be available to the general public this fall. However, developers can try an early version of iOS 26 now, and public beta testers could see the iPhone software this week. According to the latest rumors, we could see the public beta as soon as Wednesday.
When is the iOS 26 public beta release date?
We don’t have an exact date, but rumors suggest Apple could release the public beta around this Wednesday.
Historically, Apple releases the first public beta of its upcoming iPhone software during July. Apple usually releases the latest iOS version in September, so a July public beta release gives the company time to squash major bugs and address issues you might encounter on your iPhone before the OS shows up for everyone.
But we’re already halfway through July so you might be wondering where the public beta is. The good news is that Mark Gurman, a managing editor and Apple reporter at Bloomberg, posted on X, formerly Twitter, that Apple could release the public beta around Wednesday, July 23. That means public beta testers could get to experience new iOS 26 features, like Liquid Glass, backgrounds in Messages and more, in less than 48 hours.
Before you download the public beta, you should know that this is a beta version of iOS 26, not the final version of the software. That means the update might be buggy, and your device’s battery life may be affected, so it’s best to keep those troubles off your primary device. If you want to try the beta, I recommend downloading it on a secondary device.
You should also know iOS 26 is only compatible with devices newer than the iPhone 11. So if you have an iPhone XR — like I do — you can’t download the developer or public beta of iOS 26. Trust me: I tried, and my XR wouldn’t load the page to download the developer beta despite me really wanting to see if my almost 7-year-old device could handle the OS.
For more, here’s what to know about Liquid Glass, how iOS 26 revamps your iPhone’s alarm and everything else you should know about the update.
Watch this: Apple’s Foldable iPhone Said to Use Samsung Parts
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
The average for a 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.81% today, up 0.05% from seven days ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 6.03%, which is an increase of 0.06% from the same time last week. To secure a lower mortgage interest rate, consider increasing your down payment, improving your credit score or purchasing mortgage points.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on July 21, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
What’s behind high rates these days? Concerns about persistent inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and holding borrowing rates steady since the start of the year.
Most economists predict the Fed will start lowering rates in September, particularly if President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market continues to deteriorate.
Prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
In today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. High home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, are further compounding the pressure on prospective buyers. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
What’s going on with mortgage rates right now?
The average 30-year fixed rate has hovered just below 7% for the last several months, resulting in cost-prohibitive monthly payments.
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which reflects investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to lower interest rates, experts caution that significant market volatility is likely. As a result, homebuyers are adopting a more patient and strategic approach to financing, comparing various loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Experts predict: Will mortgage rates rise or fall?
While the housing market was expected to rebound in 2025, it has remained stagnant due to ongoing economic and political uncertainties. Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Mortgage rates would have to drop significantly, close to 6% or below, to drum up significant homebuying demand. According to Smith, though, the more likely scenario is a slow and steady decline in borrowing costs. A return to the record-low rates, around 2-3%, we saw during the pandemic would only happen if the economy tipped into a severe recession.
Fannie Mae’s forecast puts rates around 6.5% by the end of 2025 and 6.1% by the end of 2026.
Ongoing uncertainty could cause rates to stay high, or increase further. For instance, if tariffs cause inflation to reignite, which most experts and Fed officials expect, it could result in higher bond yields and fewer interest rate cuts by the central bank. Both would be bad for mortgage rates.
Which mortgage term and type should I pick?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
The 30-year fixed-mortgage rate average is 6.81% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 6.03%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 adjustable-rate mortgage has an average rate of 6.02% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I get the lowest mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
CNET recommends AT&T Fiber as the best internet provider in Raleigh. The service offers wideespread fiber coverage, fast upload and download speeds, and competitive pricing. It’s the best all-around option in a city that’s already ahead of the curve when it comes to internet performance.
If you’re looking for even faster speeds, Google Fiber is the fastest provider in Raleigh, though its premium pricing may not fit every budget. For those outside fiber coverage areas or looking for alternatives, Spectrum delivers reliable cable internet throughout the region, filling in the gaps where fiber might not yet reach.
Whether you’re new to the area or just upgrading your connection, Raleigh offers a strong mix of options which balance speed, value and availability when it comes to internet service.
Internet providers in Raleigh compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Google Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$70-$150
1,000-8,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.5
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
All available Raleigh residential internet providers
Fiber is fantastic and Spectrum is everywhere, but there are a few other ISPs to consider when you’re shopping in Raleigh. T-Mobile, in particular, is worthy of consideration as a no-fuss option with simple pricing and a tempting bundle discount.
AT&T Internet: Remember those AT&T Fiber dry spots I mentioned earlier? Those areas may be serviced by AT&T’s Internet Air network instead. Speeds can vary greatly. You may only get 10Mbps in some areas of Raleigh for the standard price of $60 a month. So basically, this is me saying, please look for a better option. Go with AT&T Internet Air only if you don’t have faster fiber or cable available to you.
Frontier Internet: Frontier’s DSL network sneaks into Raleigh from the northwest so that you will find it as an option up around Brier Creek and Bethesda and around the Durham area. Speeds, however, can be variable. You may be able to pull down speeds of only 12Mbps, or you may be able to get 25Mbps. The price is $65 a month. Residents of Durham can look for Frontier’s faster fiber offerings, which are much preferable to DSL. Raleigh folks, however, will want to skip the Frontier DSL and opt for Google or AT&T fiber, if available, or Spectrum’s speedier cable plans.
Google Fiber: AT&T Fiber’s toughest competitor is Google Fiber, which doesn’t quite match AT&T’s top speed or availability across town. However, it’s worthy of strong consideration if it services your address. While Google Fiber has speeds of up to 8,000Mbps in some areas of the US, you’ll be looking at speeds up to 3,000Mbps in Raleigh. That will cost you $100 a month, or you can get 1,000Mbps service for $70 a month. There are no contracts or data caps, and equipment is included, making it one of the best deals for fast, reliable internet.
T-Mobile Home Internet: Availability of either T-Mobile or Verizon home internet services is a roll of the dice that depends on your address and whether any slots are available. Check into T-Mobile if you’re interested in trying fixed wireless internet. T-Mobile costs $50-$70 a month for typical speeds up to 415Mbps. Equipment is included and there are no data caps. It’s a particularly good deal for T-Mobile phone customers. Bundle an eligible phone plan and get your internet for just $35-$55 a month.
Satellite internet: Starlink, Viasat and Hughesnet are competitors in the satellite internet market. They likely won’t be your first choice for getting online unless you’re in a rural area with few options. However, digital nomads with a home base in Raleigh might consider Starlink’s on-the-go plan for staying connected while traveling.
Walter Bibikow/Getty Images
Raleigh broadband at a glance
Raleigh residents are in the enviable position of having two major fiber providers competing for their dollars. It’s hard to go wrong with either AT&T Fiber or Google Fiber, but pricing is a factor that can influence which ISP you go with. It may push you to explore options from Spectrum, Verizon or T-Mobile.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Pricing info on Raleigh home internet service
The average starting price for home internet in Raleigh is around $50 a month. It will cost you a little more to get started with fiber. AT&T’s 300Mbps runs $55 a month while Google’s lowest-cost plan is $70 for 1,000Mbps. Look to Spectrum, Verizon and T-Mobile if you’re searching for budget options.
Cheap internet options in the Raleigh metro area
One of the cheapest ways to get online is to bundle Verizon or T-Mobile home internet with an eligible phone plan. That knocks your home internet price down to as low as $35 for Verizon and T-Mobile. If you’re shopping for Google Fiber, keep an eye out for the ISP’s Neighborhood 100 Meg plan, which is available in some areas. It’s for households with an annual income under $40,000, and it costs only $20 a month. You’ll be asked to confirm your income when you sign up.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Raleigh?
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Contract
Spectrum Internet Advantage Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router
None
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$40
500Mbps
Free modem; $10 router
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
318Mbps
None
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
85Mbps
None
None
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
None
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Fastest internet providers in Raleigh
Wanna go fast? Google Fiber and AT&T Fiber have got your back with 8,000Mbps and 5,000Mbps plans that are available in Raleigh. That’s in stark contrast to the other end of the speed spectrum. Pokey DSL service in some locations may only reach 10Mbps. But chances are good your Raleigh address qualifies for fiber, or at least Spectrum’s cable offerings that reach up to 1,000Mbps.
AT&T Fiber and Google Fiber duke it out for the fastest ISP in Raleigh as the best multi-gigabit internet plans, but AT&T has an edge with the wide availability of its 5,000Mbps plan whereas Google is some steps behind despite offering a faster 8,000Mbps plan. Now, AT&T’s offering comes with a hefty price tag of $245 a month, which may encourage you to consider a different option, like AT&T’s 2,000Mbps plan for $145 or Google Fiber’s rival 3,000Mbps plan that trims that to $100 monthly.
What are the fastest internet plans in Raleigh?
Provider
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Starting price
Data cap
Contract
Google Fiber Read full review
8,000Mbps
8,000Mbps
$150
None
None
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
$245
None
None
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
$145
None
None
Google Fiber Read full review
3,000Mbps
3,000Mbps
$100
None
None
Google Fiber Read full review
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
$70
None
None
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
$80
None
None
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
1,000 Mbps
35Mbps
$70
None
None
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Raleigh
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. What’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We use the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answers to those questions are often layered and complex, the providers that come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and also consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Raleigh?
In case it’s not obvious already, I’m a fan of fiber. It’s fast. It’s reliable. Upload speeds are just as fast as download speeds. Your decision on whether to go with AT&T Fiber or Google Fiber may be made for you if just one of those ISPs services your address. If both do, consider the price (Google’s plans are a little cheaper) and speed (AT&T tops out at a faster 5,000Mbps unless you happen to be in a 8,000Mbps area for Google). If it comes down to it, Spectrum almost certainly services your Raleigh home, but future price hikes aren’t appealing. I’ve also tested out and been happy with fixed wireless, so don’t sleep on Verizon or T-Mobile as an affordable alternative.
Internet providers in Raleigh FAQs
Is fiber internet available in Raleigh?
Raleigh is fortunate to have two major fiber providers at work in the city. AT&T Fiber and Google Fiber offer simple, no-strings-attached plans and speeds to keep everyone from gamers to remote workers happy.
Which internet provider in Raleigh offers the fastest plan?
Google Fiber is the king of the hill for residential internet in Raleigh, with its 8,000Mbps plan for $150. AT&T Fiber comes in second with a 5,000Mbps plan, although it is quite pricey at $245 per month. Whether you need all that speed is a question only you can answer. Households with multiple heavy internet users, remote workers who need to upload massive files, and serious gamers may be able to justify the expense.
Choosing between AT&T Fiber and Google Fiber is a bit of a toss-up. They both earned similar CNET review scores, with AT&T coming in at 7.4 and Google Fiber at 7.5. There are no contracts, equipment fees or data caps with either one. AT&T offers a more affordable fiber entry point with its 300Mbps plan for $55 a month. That’s a good deal for budget buyers, but Google’s faster plans cost slightly less than the AT&T equivalents.
We’ve all been guilty of doomscrolling on our favorite social media platform, but what happens when this leads to an insightful discovery? A year ago, I was scrolling through my #FYP (for you page) on TikTok, and this snack dip popped up. Not only was I intrigued, but I was also shocked because how could something so simple yet clever be so satisfyingly nostalgic and tasty?
TikTok users were also shocked that they hadn’t thought of making this snack before. However, I was happily surprised by how easy it looked to whip up. TikTok user Cecilie Bak Klemens shared the video of her making the mouthwatering dip in her air fryer, and that post has since garnered more than 75 million views and a host of hilariously relatable comments, including some from well-known brands.
“All of a sudden we know what we’re making for breakfast, lunch and dinner tomorrow,” Pinterest commented on the now-viral video.
I knew I had to try this snack, and I’m happy to report that it was as simple as the 12-second TikTok made it seem. Here’s how you can make this s’mores dip whenever you’re craving it — no fire pit needed.
Read more: Best Air Fryers of 2025
How to make air fryer s’mores dip
Step 1: Line your air fryer with parchment paper that’s trimmed to the size of your basket, or use a removable air fryer basket that can be cleaned separately. (This step is optional but will cut down on cleaning time.)
Step 2: Place marshmallows inside the air fryer, along with chunks of the chocolate of your choice. (We used classic Hershey’s chocolate.)
You can use as many, or as few, marshmallows as you like, then add an equal amount of chocolate pieces.
Corin Cesaric/CNET
Step 3: Cook at 375 degrees for 10 minutes or until the marshmallows are golden brown.
Step 4: Let the dip cool slightly, then enjoy it with graham crackers.
The outside of your s’mores dip will be slightly crunchy and golden brown, and the inside will be perfectly gooey.
Corin Cesaric/CNET
If the dip hardens while you’re eating it, you can pop it back in the air fryer for a few minutes until you get the desired consistency again.
Read more: Everything You’ve Always Wanted to Know About Air Fryers (but Were Afraid to Ask)
How to clean your air fryer
Although this recipe seems like it would create quite the mess, using a separate removable baking pan or parchment paper makes the clean up is a breeze. However, if you have some overflow or your air fryer is simply due for its cleaning, follow these three simple steps.
Air fryer s’mores dip FAQ
Can you make traditional s’mores using an air fryer?
Yes! If you want to skip the dip and make your s’mores whole, you can place the bottom graham cracker, chocolate and marshmallow in the air fryer (don’t forget the parchment paper!) and toast it for a few minutes. When it’s done, use another graham cracker to squish your creation together.
Is there anything you can’t cook in the air fryer?
Warframe’s last few updates have been a narrative tour de force through time and space, weaving together disparate threads from the far-flung past of the year 1999 and the fairytale void-dimension of Duviri.
Core to these expansions is the conflict with the Eldritch threat known only as the Indifference. As it comes closer to piercing the veil of our reality and escaping the void, it’s up to the Tenno to navigate lost memories — rediscovering forgotten allies, a peace that was doomed to fail and a path to a star system beyond our own.
Warframe’s The Old Peace expansion gives us our first real look at Tau, introduces a frame that follows closely on Oraxia’s heels and expands players’ arsenals with a familiar Prime Warframe and new Operator abilities.
At this year’s TennoCon convention, studio Digital Extremes outlined what’s coming in the next year of Warframe, including its next expansion landing in the coming months and the big plans for next year.
Here’s everything you need to know about the next chapter of Warframe — as we once more delve into the past to prepare for future battles.
Read more: How Warframe Balances Bleakness With Quirky Foes to Stay True to Its Universe
Relive past battles in the Tau system as you dive deep to uncover crucial lost knowledge.
Digital Extremes
What is Tau? Traveling to Warframe’s promised land
For Warframe lore junkies, the upcoming opportunity to actually see the long-teased Tau for the first time is a mind-boggling prospect. This is the star system that the Orokin Empire created the Sentients to colonize. It’s the very place that the Zariman Ten Zero was en route to before its accident created the Tenno, the void-powered player characters.
The turbulent rise and fall of the current major factions can be attributed to a greedy superpower wanting to get its paws on the resources in this star system, making it arguably one of the most important set pieces in the Warframe universe. And now we’re getting our eyes on it for the first time in the game’s 10-year history.
Note that players won’t actually get to properly explore Tau until 2026 — most of the system’s mysteries will remain intact for now, with players grappling with the past as they run and gun across a single planetary moon.
In the lead-up to Tau, The Old Peace will be the next expansion — another time-bending adventure, as the Tenno use funky void powers (and sensory deprivation tanks) to explore repressed memories.
Though the new narrative doesn’t necessarily retcon anything we know about the old war between the Orokin and the Sentients, it does call into question how much we truly know about that time period. The Tenno, Orokin and Sentients all made it to Tau and at one point established a tenuous peace — you’ll even find out about a forgotten childhood best friend, a Sentient named Adis.
The Old Peace will surely be a tragic tale, because we know this story ends in bloodshed. Even if the Tenno enforce the peace by cutting down Orokin Dax warriors who are currently violating the agreement, war will inevitably break out and history will run its course. Although we won’t be able to make a difference on Tau’s moon of Perita, there are hidden truths to uncover — ones that will help us prepare for the approaching war with the Indifference.
The Devil’s Triad is a prime example of the Orokin Empire’s tendency to blur the lines between political and spiritual matters.
Digital Extremes
The Devil’s Triad: An Orokin story that introduces visually stunning zealots
The Old Peace introduces three characters who might as well be the physical embodiment of Catholic guilt. I love decking my Warframes out to look a bit medieval, so this gothic squad is right up my alley.
The Devil’s Triad is a group of Orokin enforcers — religious zealots and confessors — who seem to be involved in some way with Albrecht Entrati, the scientist who made first contact with the Indifference, created the Warframes and hid in the 1999 time loop.
Father Lyon Allard and Marie Leroux are new protoframe variants of Harrow and Wisp, expanding on the concept introduced with the Drifter’s Hex allies. Their colleague has been fully consumed by the Infestation’s steelskin, becoming the next Warframe: The devil Uriel.
These characters match the darker vibe of The Old Peace — their striking visuals call to mind the religious zealotry of the Warhammer’s Inquisitors, and they fit right in with Harrow’s original lore as Rell’s Warframe protector in the Red Veil faction.
The alliance between the Tenno and the Sentients created deadly tools. Chief among them is the Caliban Prime Warframe.
Digital Extremes
Caliban Prime, focus system upgrades and more
A mental traipse through Tau reveals old Tenno powers born anew. A temporary alliance with the Sentients created hybrid technologies lost to time — but now we’ll have the chance to bring them back to the present.
The next Warframe to get the prime treatment will be Caliban — which slots perfectly into the lore for the upcoming expansion. Prime Warframes are more powerful versions of the biomechanical suits that were created in the heyday of the Orokin Empire, and Caliban is the amalgamation of the Infestation and Sentient technology.
It only makes sense that Caliban Prime is the product of the titular old peace, and so the recently reworked ally-summoning frame will get its chance to shine in your arsenal very soon.
The other big change to Warframe’s power scaling won’t come in the form of traditional weaponry. The Tenno’s void powers are getting upgrades, as players who are fully invested in the five core focus schools (Operator skill trees) will soon be able to wield powerful ultimate abilities. Though there aren’t many details yet about what the Tauron focus expansion will look like in practice, developer Digital Extremes has promised to elaborate on the feature in future Devstreams.
Other big TennoCon announcements that will shape the way you interact with your Warframes and weaponry throughout the rest of the year include a long-awaited Oberon Warframe rework, a new mod-related story quest that teaches new players how to properly ramp up their power, and special skins for Valkyr and Lavos.
The Old Peace expansion will launch later in 2025, with continual content updates slated to come out in the following months. Tau is set to become the key story driver for Warframe next year, so this will become an important expansion to familiarize yourself with postrelease.
Carries the British & Irish Lions Test matches in Australia
9Now
After weeks of build up, the British & Irish Lions Test series down under finally gets underway on Saturday as Andy Farrell’s men take on Australia at Suncorp Stadium in Brisbane.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services to use to watch this match as it happens, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if the game isn’t available where you are.
After an opening-game defeat against Argentina, the Lions have gone on to win five matches in a row against Super Rugby and invitational teams on their tour of Australia ahead of this opener against their old Antipodean foes. Those wins have nevertheless come at a cost, with Tomos Williams and Elliot Daly both out with injuries for the rest of the tour, while Garry Ringrose, Mack Hansen, Blair Kinghorn and Luke Cowan-Dickie are all set to miss today’s game after injuries.
Meanwhile, much of the talk surrounding Australia centers on head coach Joe Schmidt’s decision to give 22-year-old rookie Tom Lynagh his first international start, with the son of Wallbies legend Michael Lynagh favored instead of the more experienced Western Force fly-half/full-back Ben Donaldson.
Australia takes on the British & Irish Lions on Saturday, July 19, at Suncorp Stadium in Brisbane. Kickoff is set for 8 p.m. AEST local time in Australia, which makes it a 6 a.m. ET or 3 a.m. PT start in the US and Canada. For rugby fans in the UK it’s an 11 a.m. BST kick-off, while it’s a 10p.m. NZST start in New Zealand and a 12 p.m. SAST start in South Africa.
Saracens captain Maro Itoje is set to lead the British & Irish Lions for this series.
David Rogers/Getty Images
Livestream Australia vs. British & Irish Lions in the US
Rugby fans in the US can watch today’s game on streaming service Paramount Plus, which has exclusive rights to show all three of this year’s British & Irish Lions Tests in the US.
Paramount Plus subscriptions cost $8 or $13 per month, depending on the tier you select. Both give you access to today’s game. The entry-level Essential plan is ad-supported. The pricier Showtime plan removes most ads and includes downloads and Showtime programming. You can also purchase a full year of either plan and save some money versus paying each month individually.
James Martin/CNET
Paramount Plus has a student discount and free trials. You can also get the ad-supported Essential version of the service as one of the perks of a Walmart Plus membership, which costs $13 per month or $98 per year. You can upgrade to the Showtime plan, too, but it’ll run you an extra $5.50 per month or $65 per year.
Read our Paramount Plus review.
How to watch the British & Irish Lions tour online from anywhere using a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the international rugby action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security. They can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN use to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN use is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $100 for the first 15 months (then $117 per year) or $140 for the first 28 months (then $150 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN and it works on a variety of devices. It’s normally $13 a month but if you sign up for an annual subscription for $100 you’ll get three months free and save 49%. That’s the equivalent of $6.67 a month.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
61% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months)
Livestream Australia vs. British & Irish Lions in the UK and Ireland
The first test of the Lions’ three-game series against Australia will be broadcast exclusively live via Sky Sports Main Event and Action from 10am.
Now TV
Subscribers can also stream the action via the Sky Go app. Sky subsidiary Now (formerly Now TV) offers streaming access to Sky Sports channels with a Now Sports membership. You can get a day of access for £15 (perhaps just for the final round) or sign up for a monthly plan from £35 a month to watch all four days of the tournament.
Livestream Australia vs. British & Irish Lions in Canada
If you want to stream this game live in Canada, you’ll need to subscribe to DAZN Canada.
DAZN
A DAZN subscription currently costs CA$20 a month or CA$200 a year and will also give you access to the UEFA Champions League, Europa League and Europa Conference League, plus EFL Championship soccer, Six Nations rugby and WTA tennis.
As well as dedicated apps for iOS and Android, there’s a wide range of support for set-top boxes and smart TVs.
Livestream Australia vs. British & Irish Lions for free
The great news for rugby fans down is that all three of the British & Irish Lions test matches are being broadcast for free across terrestrial channels Channel 9 and 9Gem.
That means you’ll be able to watch the games online for free on the network’s streaming service 9Now.
Channel 9
9Now has apps for most smart devices. In addition to offering a wide range of sports, the service carries Love Island UK.
Quick tips for streaming Australia vs. British & Irish Lions using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming rugby may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log into your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, because both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
Elon Musk isn’t one to sit out a tech trend. In November 2023, he launched Grok, an AI chatbot created by his artificial intelligence startup, xAI. Musk, who co-founded OpenAI before departing in 2018, created Grok to compete with ChatGPT, Claude, Perplexity and Google’s Gemini. But he gave it a sarcastic twist and direct access to X (formerly Twitter), the social platform he purchased in October 2022.
Initially, Grok was available exclusively to paying X Premium Plus subscribers. By December of 2024, xAI rolled out a limited free tier, allowing you to make 10 queries per day. Now, it is also available via web browser, as standalone mobile iOS, Android and desktop apps, meaning you can access Grok without an X subscription. It should also soon be available to Telegram users, per Telegram CEO Pavel Durov’s announcement on X.
On July 10, SuperGrok entered the scene. xAI introduced Grok 4 and Grok 4 Heavy in a livestream that felt more like a late-night show-and-tell than a typical Silicon Valley polished product launch — and it came packed with some bold claims.
So let’s dive deeper into Grok’s advantages, controversies and what sets it apart from other generative AI tools.
The background story
Grok was developed by xAI, an AI startup founded by Musk in July 2023. The company’s stated mission is “to understand the universe,” and it maintains close ties with Musk’s other ventures like X, Tesla and Neuralink.
Unlike ChatGPT, which started with static training data and later added web browsing, Grok was built to be live from the start. It was inspired by The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy, promising users a chatbot that answers with wit, humor and attitude.
On its website, xAI emphasizes that Grok aims to provide accurate information, though its edgy, less-moderated approach with a “rebellious streak” sometimes blurs the line between useful and controversial.
This unfiltered “free speech” style has led to backlash, with Grok being known to occasionally generate biased or offensive content — like last week’s “MechaHitler” controversy (more on that below). And, like all the other AI chatbots, it warns you that it can sometimes hallucinate.
Its defining feature is real-time integration with X, which means it can pull from trending posts, user conversations and breaking news faster than other bots. The company says it may use your X data and interactions with Grok for model training, fine-tuning and to personalize your Grok experience. But you can opt out using your X settings.
What can Grok do?
Like most AI chatbots, Grok can answer questions, summarize articles, write emails, explain complex topics and help with coding.
If you’re on X and see a post you want more info about, you can ask Grok directly in the comments. You can also DM it like you’d message a friend. It pulls in real-time context from X and web sources (though it doesn’t always cite them clearly), frequently adopting a casual, humorous or sarcastic tone reminiscent of Musk’s posts.
Meta AI is integrated across its socials similarly, but Grok excels at this. None of the other major chatbots offer that kind of native integration with a social media network.
You can also ask it to generate images using a built-in AI image tool. Perplexity and ChatGPT rely on OpenAI’s models for that part, but since Grok 3, the company uses its own model, Aurora. Previous Grok models used Black Forest Labs’ Flux model until December 2024.
Grok also supports math explanations, brainstorming ideas and text translation. For developers, there’s Grok 4 Code, a specialized model designed to write, debug and explain code more efficiently, similar to tools like GitHub Copilot or GPT-4 Code Interpreter.
“You can cut & paste your entire source code file into the query entry box on http://grok.com and Grok 4 will fix it for you!” Musk tweeted earlier in July.
Another capability with Grok 4 is enhanced cultural fluency. A recent update makes Grok adept at interpreting memes, internet slang and humor, potentially making it the most “online” AI assistant yet.
Grok 4 and Grok 4 Heavy models and pricing
During the livestream, Musk claimed Grok 4’s capabilities exceed those of humans in academia.
“Grok 4 is postgrad-level in everything,” Musk said. “At least with respect to academic questions, Grok 4 is better than a PhD level in every subject. No exceptions.”
John Licato, assistant professor of computer science and engineering at the University of South Florida, says these claims are absolutely misleading.
“‘PhD-level’ is being thrown around as a marketing term with no real rigorous benchmarks behind it. It also completely misunderstands what PhDs actually do,” Licato told CNET.
xAI didn’t immediately respond to a request for clarification or comment.
Grok offers three tiers. The Basic plan is free and includes limited access to Grok 3, basic features like projects and tasks and limited tokens (building blocks of text that AI models use to process language).
The SuperGrok plan costs $30 per month and unlocks increased access to both Grok 3 and Grok 4. It includes 128,000 tokens, context memory and additional features like voice with vision. For example, if you show Grok a photo or point a camera at something and ask about it out loud, it will analyze the image and generate a response.
Then there’s SuperGrok Heavy, priced at $300 per month, with access to Grok 4 Heavy (currently in exclusive preview), early access to new features and dedicated support. Grok 4 Heavy simultaneously deploys multiple AI agents — which process tasks independently, work in parallel and cross-evaluate their outputs — to collaborate on a query, comparing results to deliver the most accurate response.
If you’re on X, you can freely access Grok 3 or model 4 if you have an X Premium Plus subscription for $40 per month.
Where Grok does and doesn’t excel
Because of all the claims Musk and his team made about Supergrok and its purported advanced scientist-grade reasoning, I decided to do some testing. I asked ChatGPT’s o3 advanced reasoning model and Grok 4 the same “Koch snowflake” question (image below).
Both chatbots reached the same mathematical results, but Grok 4 provided a more detailed, step-by-step explanation more suitable for learning, while ChatGPT offered a more concise, streamlined version, better for quick reference. ChatGPT was also 5 seconds faster.
ChatGPT 3o on the left, Grok 4 on the right.
ChatGPT / Grok / Screenshot by CNET
Then I tested the image generation capabilities. ChatGPT gave a more realistic image, while Grok’s resembled those typical Midjourney images that are more uncanny and kind of glossy. However, Grok produced two images and additional prompts on the bottom so I could enrich or change the image — like watercolor style, and rainy alley — and it generated the images in 21 seconds, while it took over a minute and a half for ChatGPT to make one image.
ChatGPT’s puppy on the left, and Grok’s on the right.
ChatGPT / Grok / Screenshot by CNET
Tone is another differentiator. While ChatGPT, Perplexity and Claude tend to be neutral or overly polite, Grok is intentionally informal. Sometimes it’s helpful, sometimes it’s snarky, and sometimes it just goes too far.
xAI pitches this as an advantage: a bot that isn’t afraid to “tell you the truth,” even if it’s controversial. However, that approach got Grok in hot water just over a week ago with a series of now-deleted antisemitic posts on X, after which Grok was temporarily shut down.
“We are aware of recent posts made by Grok and are actively working to remove the inappropriate posts. Since being made aware of the content, xAI has taken action to ban hate speech before Grok posts on X. xAI is training only truth-seeking and thanks to the millions of users on X, we are able to quickly identify and update the model where training could be improved,” Grok tweeted on July 8.
When I asked Licato if he found that concerning, he agreed and added that he’s not convinced Grok or the leadership behind it is doing anything to ensure responsible use of its technology.
“Grok is marketed as more of a truth-teller than its competitors, and this is leading to a lot of people believing that it is somehow more reliable,” Licato told CNET. “But I do not see any good evidence that this is actually true, and I worry that, since so much of the public does not know how easy it is to get LLMs to spout false information, they may just be aiding in the spreading of mis- and disinformation.”
Michael Berthold, CEO and co-founder of AI analytics company KNIME, told me he’s concerned about the broader implications of AI chatbots rewriting or summarizing knowledge.
“The worry I have, and I see it with my own kids, is how the next generation will be learning things,” Berthold told CNET. “There will be so much content that’s not going to be consumed in the original anymore, but in some sort of AI-rewritten, summarized form. Something can be lost, either accidentally or intentionally. We already see AI systems from different countries reflecting slightly different preferences.”
Grok’s tone has also raised eyebrows. Some responses are laced with sarcasm or off-color jokes, which might appeal to Musk’s fans but could turn off people expecting a neutral assistant.
What’s next for Grok?
Grok has been somewhat of an overlooked AI chatbot, since it’s confined to X. But as xAI continues to develop it, and Musk has also hinted that Grok is coming to Tesla vehicles as early as next week, at this point, its future looks ambitious. It’s safe to assume Grok’s integration into future versions of Optimus, Tesla’s humanoid robot, as well.
Grok is carving out a unique space in the AI arms race, especially with its provocative digital personality. With rapid advancements in the AI sphere, skepticism over this technology is rising, too.
꽁머니사이트 리워드는 얼마인지에 대한 궁금증은 많은 사용자들이 사이트를 이용하기 전에 가장 먼저 확인하는 부분입니다. 꽁머니는 기본적으로 사이트에서 제공하는 무료 보너스로, 회원 가입 시 또는 특정 미션을 달성했을 때 지급됩니다. 이 리워드는 사용자에게 실질적인 게임 자금으로 사용될 수 있어 매우 매력적인 요소로 작용하며, 사이트 간 경쟁력을 결정짓는 핵심 요소 중 하나로 여겨집니다.
일반적으로 꽁머니사이트 제공하는 리워드는 적게는 1,000원에서 많게는 50,000원 이상의 금액까지 다양하게 존재합니다. 보통 신규 가입자에게 지급되는 기본 꽁머니는 3,000원에서 10,000원 사이인 경우가 많고, 일부 이벤트나 프로모션을 통해 더 높은 금액이 제공되기도 합니다. 이러한 리워드는 바로 사용 가능한 경우도 있지만, 일정 금액 이상 충전해야 활성화되거나, 특정 게임에만 사용할 수 있는 제한이 있는 경우도 있어 조건을 꼼꼼히 확인할 필요가 있습니다.
꽁머니사이트 리워드는 단순히 가입 보너스에만 국한되지 않습니다. 친구 추천, 출석 체크, 게임 이용 내역에 따른 보상 등 다양한 방식으로 지급될 수 있으며, 이러한 리워드 정책은 사용자 충성도를 높이기 위한 마케팅 수단으로 활용됩니다. 예를 들어 친구를 초대하고 해당 친구가 일정 금액 이상을 충전하거나 베팅하면 추가 리워드를 지급하는 구조도 자주 볼 수 있습니다. 이처럼 다양한 방식의 리워드는 사용자에게 지속적인 활동을 유도하며, 사이트의 활성화에 기여하게 됩니다.
꽁머니사이트 리워드는 얼마인가요?
그러나 리워드의 액수만 보고 꽁머니사이트를 선택하는 것은 다소 위험할 수 있습니다. 일부 사이트는 높은 리워드를 앞세워 사용자들을 유입시키지만, 실제로는 출금이 불가능하거나 지나치게 높은 베팅 조건을 요구하는 경우도 있습니다. 예를 들어 리워드로 받은 꽁머니를 사용해 일정 배수 이상을 베팅해야만 출금이 가능하다든지, 실제 충전 금액의 몇 배를 추가로 입금해야 출금이 허용되는 구조 등이 그것입니다. 이러한 조건들은 사전에 명확하게 안내되지 않는 경우도 많아 사용자에게 혼란과 피해를 줄 수 있습니다.
따라서 꽁머니사이트를 이용할 때는 리워드의 액수뿐 아니라 그 조건, 사용 방식, 출금 가능 여부 등을 종합적으로 검토하는 것이 중요합니다. 또한 지나치게 높은 리워드를 제시하는 사이트는 신뢰성 측면에서 의심해볼 필요가 있으며, 후기나 사용자 경험을 참고하여 검증된 사이트를 선택하는 것이 안전합니다. 실제로 많은 사용자들이 무리하게 리워드만을 좇다가 사기 사이트에 접속하거나 개인정보를 도용당하는 사례도 있기 때문에 주의가 요구됩니다.
결론적으로 꽁머니사이트의 리워드는 사이트마다 다양하며, 단순히 금액만 보는 것이 아니라 해당 리워드의 조건과 안전성, 출금 가능 여부까지 함께 확인해야 현명한 선택이 될 수 있습니다. 리워드를 활용한 재미도 중요하지만, 기본적인 안전성과 신뢰도를 바탕으로 사이트를 선택하는 것이 최선의 방법입니다.
If you’re a gamer or a dyed-in-the-wool film nut, then the TV technology you should be looking at is OLED. It offers excellent contrast for that cinematic look, saturated colors and excellent gaming performance. Though cheaper models like the Philips OLED exist, most OLED TVs are priced at the higher end, including the Samsung S95F, LG G5 and C5, and this one, the Samsung S90F.
In many ways, the Samsung S90F is a slight update to the 2024 model, but it does pack in enough of the company’s tech to make it worth considering. Furthermore, the S90F performed in a similar way to the S95F in my tests — though it’s worth noting it lacks the more expensive model’s high brightness, anti-reflective coating and connection box. For those things alone, the flagship is worth the upgrade for many high-end shoppers, but the S90F is no slouch either. It’s capable of a dynamic picture and is great for gamers as well.
Meanwhile, the Samsung S90F and its closest competitor, the LG C5, have had some aggressive price reductions of late, and both were down to $1,800 for Prime Day. I’d expect similar discounts to recur leading up to Black Friday and the holidays this fall. Between the C5 and S90F, Samsung has a slight edge in my tests, but given the similarities between the two, my advice is simple: just buy whichever is cheaper.
Samsung S90F OLED TV sizes, series comparison
The Samsung S90F OLED TV is available in sizes between 42 inches and 83 inches.
Ty Pendlebury/CNET
I performed a hands-on evaluation of the 65-inch S90F, yet it’s unclear if the testing is applicable to other screen sizes in the series, as I note further below.
In the UK, only the 65-inch S90F uses QD-OLED technology while every other size uses WOLED. When I spoke with a Samsung representative in the US, however, they were unable to confirm if the 65-inch was also the sole QD-OLED model or even which tech it involved at all: “Samsung TVs are designed to consistently offer excellent performance, regardless of the specific panels used,” they said. The Samsung website also doesn’t mention any other technology beyond “OLED HDR Plus.”
Why does this matter? It’s very likely that color reproduction differs between the many sizes of S90F and the one I tested, and so measurements aren’t directly transferable.
All-in-one design
Ty Pendlebury/CNET
While some might like the sleek look of Samsung’s S95F flagship, it also necessitates an umbilical cable and a large plastic box you need to put somewhere. The S90F likes to keep it simple by comparison. Design-wise, the S90F is similar to both the S90D that preceded it and the LG C5, too, with an ultra-slim screen and a chunkier “inputs” section at the bottom. If you’re wall mounting, the overall depth is still only 1.6 inches on the 65-inch model, while those sitting the TV on a stand will appreciate the slender and easy-to-install legs.
Over the years, Samsung has pared down its remote to the bare minimum — a wafer-shaped clicker powered by a solar panel on the back. I preferred the chunky and colorful remotes of old, but you did have to put batteries in those. If you use your TV as a switch, the lack of an input button is also an inconvenience. You can navigate to the Connected Devices menu option, but having a dedicated button makes the process a lot easier.
All the streaming you need
For 2025, the company has updated its menu system with some slick new screens, including the volume bar. However, it may need some quick relearning to find the options you need. Helpfully, the new menu highlights the last setting used, and so you may be able to access an often-used setting without deep-diving menus.
Meanwhile, the Samsung S90F home page is back to familiar territory, and it lists a number of categories on the left — Samsung Account, Search, Ambient, Samsung Daily Plus, Gaming Hub and Home. Home is the default, and when displaying streaming services, the TV features a series of relevant thumbnails across the screen. Thanks to the sheer number of Samsung TVs out there, this is also one of the most popular smart TV platforms, and it therefore enjoys a large range of streaming services. It also caters to gamers with apps such as Steam Link and Xbox Cloud Gaming.
Like most modern TVs, the S90F features a Gaming Hub with its own dashboard. The S90F includes VRR support up to 144Hz on all HDMI ports, so you can be indiscriminate about which port you plug your PC/gaming console into.
Unlike most higher-end TVs, the S90F doesn’t have Dolby Vision HDR, and while I don’t think this is a big deal, completists may look to LG, Sony or even Panasonic instead.
In terms of onboard connectivity, the S90F includes:
Four HDMI 2.1 inputs 4K (144Hz max)
3x USB-A, 1x USB-C
Optical digital audio output
Wi-Fi 5
Bluetooth 5.3
Ethernet
High-end OLED comparison: Samsung S90F vs. LG C5 vs. Samsung S95F vs. Samsung S90D vs. TCL QM8K vs. Hisense U8Q
TV and movies
Starting with the opening scene of the horror movie It, I found that the S90F and the S95F had the best shadow detail of the group. At the 3:06 minute mark, Georgie is descending the stairs into the basement, and there is some shadow detail barely visible at the top of the screen. On the S90F, the beams there had the greatest sharpness, and Georgie’s face was also visible against the light coming through the door. The C5 and the S90D had the worst detail in shadows, with less crispness than the other Samsungs, but they were still pretty good. Meanwhile, the LCD-based TCL QM8K did pretty well with this freeze-frame moment, with decent detail and no washed-out blacks, and I could also make out Georgie’s face the best.
So many TVs they won’t fit in one bright-room testing picture! From left to right: TCL QM8K, Samsung S90D, Samsung S90F, LG C5 and Samsung S95F.
Switching to the brighter scenes of Spider-Man: Into the Spider-Verse, I found most of the TVs looked very similar — excellent contrast and saturated, comic book colors. However, the LG C5 stuck out with slightly yellowish-looking skin tones on the unmasked, alternate universe Spider-Man.
When watching the “endless runner” war movie, 1917, I found that both of the 2025 Samsung TVs again had the best shadow detail of all of the models on test. At the 1 hour 07 minute mark, you see Lance Corporal Schofield (George MacKay) awaken in a dark room. The S90F and the S95F were able to amplify the highlights on the soldier’s watch, but the TCL looked worse here. This is because the scene is very close to black, and the TCL’s backlight makes the scene look strange and ghostly — as if it’s shot through a muslin filter. I’ve seen this effect on LCD TVs before, including the massive and expensive Hisense 116UX TV.
Lastly, I put all five assembled TVs through the Spears and Munsil 4K HDR10 test disc. I found that the S90F and S95F had the most highly saturated colors and also the best levels of contrast.
Read more: How We Test TVs
Bright room
If you have a bright room with light sources that are directly reflected by the screen — say a window or overhead bulbs — then you have two options available. The first is the cheapest: turn the lights off or buy a blackout curtain. The second is to buy the Samsung S95, with its antireflection technology. While the S90F will reduce bright room glare and provide excellent contrast, you will still clearly see any direct light sources.
However, when compared with the older S95D, I did see an improvement in the S90F’s in bright room performance, with slightly less of the room behind me visible. Shining a phone flashlight against the screen from my seating position, I found that the light was not visible at all on S95F. The flash was visible on both S90F and S90D, as they appeared to behave similarly with bright, direct lights. Next, came the C5 with special FX-like halos and then even more visibility on the TCL.
Light output in nits
TV
Brightest mode (HDR)
Accurate mode (HDR)
Brightest mode (SDR)
Accurate mode (SDR)
Samsung S90F
1,466
1,466
633
305
Samsung S95F
2,150
2,150
391
297
Hisense U8Q
4,080
4,070
4,107
436
LG G5
2,813
2,297
1,030
412
LG C5
1,434
1,187
480
288
TCL QM851
3,183
3,183
3,084
1,262
Samsung S95D
1,734
1,666
544
265
Gaming
When set to gaming mode, four of the TVs — the three Samsungs and the Hisense — had high brightness and were ultra-responsive. When playing Doom, I found that the LG C5 in gaming mode was disappointingly dark and highlights were muted. This is a repeat of last year’s C4 and S90D comparison, where the S90D also looked brighter. While consistency is a virtue in LG’s case, I think most gamers would prefer to be able to see into the darker areas of the picture — that’s where all the baddies hide!
Given that the C5 and S90F are similar in price and have equivalent lag (around 10ms) — when tested with the Leo Bodnar lag tester — the Samsung’s brighter picture ultimately makes it better for gamers.
Uniformity and viewing angle
OLED screens tend to offer both excellent uniformity and off-angle performance, and the S90F, like the other OLED TVs that flanked it, had excellent uniformity, and colors stayed vivid while viewing off-axis.
Settings and picture mode notes
As always, I tested every mode for light output, color accuracy and greyscale performance. Two modes in particular stood out — Movie or Filmmaker mode — and it was a coin toss as to which was more accurate in SDR mode as they were very similar. However, for HDR, Filmmaker was definitely better.
Netflix released its biannual viewership report on Thursday, ahead of its second-quarter earnings call. The findings represent engagement numbers for the first six months of 2025, which equate to about 99% of what was watched between January and June. The hit TV series Adolescence and the action film Back in Action, which starred Jamie Foxx (in his first on-screen role since his hospitalization) and Cameron Diaz, topped the charts.
Surprisingly, some Netflix originals released in 2023 and earlier have shown staying power on the streaming service.
TV shows Orange Is the New Black, Money Heist, Lucifer and Ozark clocked in over 100 million hours of viewing in the first half of the year, with fans binge-watching every season of each series. Stranger Things remains popular this year, too. Holiday action movie Red Notice — which stars Dwayne Johnson and Chris Evans — and family films Leo and We Can Be Heroes charted more than 20 million views in the first half of the year. Talk about longevity.
Netflix
Netflix’s earnings report shows a revenue jump of 16%. Considering the over 95 billion hours of content watched by the streamer’s global audience throughout the first six months of the year, that growth makes sense.
The company’s investment in live programming has also paid off, with shows like WWE Raw drawing over 280 million viewing hours since its premiere in January. Their “local for local” strategy, which invests in creating content tailored to cultures and regions outside the US, has also been working.
Ms. Rachel and Sirens have also scored big so far.
Netflix
More than one-third of viewership was tied to non-English-language titles, including the German film, Exterritorial. Nearly half of the 25 most-watched programs in the first half of 2025 were non-English, including Squid Game, which was the third-most-watched show.
Prime Video has got the epic sci-fi movies you’re looking for.
Science fiction isn’t a monolith. It’s a genre that has so many flavors that it can appeal to just about anyone. Whether you want something silly, bleak, thrilling or dystopian, Prime Video has a movie that will fit the bill. From high-brow to some B movie-flavored ridiculousness, there’s pretty much something for every fan.
The next step is actually scrolling through the pages of content to find the title you want to watch. Well, I went ahead and did the heavy lifting for you and put together the movie guide below. This roundup merely scratches the surface of what you can find on the streamer, but it’s a great starting point.
From an Australian dystopian classic to the return of an iconic movie monster and a terrifying alien invasion, the choices are epic. The only challenge now is to figure out which title you’re going to click play on first.
Read more: 20 of the Best Sci-Fi TV Shows to Stream on Netflix
Relativity Media/Screenshot
What if there were a pill that could turn any person into a hyperintelligent super genius? Limitless aims to answer that question. The movie stars Bradley Cooper as Eddie Morra, a down-on-his-luck writer who takes the untested drug and uses it to massively level up his life. Of course, what goes up must come down, and Eddie soon finds out that sometimes, it’s best to leave mysterious meds alone.
Sunset Boulevard/Corbis via Getty Images
Mad Max, the first entry in the hit franchise, takes place in a not-so-distant future where oil becomes a hard-to-find commodity. With the world in chaos, a local police officer named Max Rockatansky (Mel Gibson) pursues a dangerous mission to take revenge against a violent biker gang, following the murder of his wife and child.
Prime Video
Chris Pratt stars in this action movie that follows a group of soldiers who travel back in time to warn of a future where humanity is losing the war against an army of alien invaders. Mankind’s only hope lies in a group of would-be heroes who are tapped to travel to the future in order to save the present.
Screenshot by Aaron Pruner/CNET
Is 2014’s Godzilla the best movie in the monster’s long-running canon? The answer to that question can be debated for days. I’m not going to rank this release, but Gareth Edwards’s take on the iconic kaiji does a great job of reintroducing audiences to this universe while also delivering a whole new set of story circumstances and characters. Unlike 1999’s big screen adaptation, this one ain’t goofy and the cast (Bryan Cranston, Aaron Taylor-Johnson, Ken Watanabe, Elizabeth Olsen, etc.) is pretty great.
Screenshot by Aaron Pruner/CNET
Bill and Ted’s Bogus Journey
The second installment in the Bill and Ted trilogy finds Keanu Reeves and Alex Winter reuniting as everyone’s favorite slacker duo. This ridiculously fun sequel finds the buds grappling with an unexpected scenario: They get murdered by robot clones and go to Hell. Yes, that sounds silly, and it’s all by design. Everything is fun in this one, and William Sadler’s performance as the Grim Reaper steals the show.
Universal Pictures
This is the cult hit that continued the story of Joss Whedon’s sci-fi series Firefly, which answered many of the questions the program was unable to. The whole crew is here: from Nathan Fillion’s Mal to Alan Tudyk’s Wash. Summer Glao’s River is the focal point of the story as the crew works to protect her from an outside threat. Honestly, it’s the fun writing and cast dynamic that make this one a fun watch.
Screenshot by Aaron Pruner/CNET
Molli and Max in the Future
Molli and Max in the Future is a delightfully fresh sci-fi mashup. It stars Zozia Mamet as Molli and Aristotle Athari as Max, two characters who, over the course of many years, dimensions and planets, continue running into each other. I suppose you can say it’s like if When Harry Met Sally and Bladerunner had a baby. And that’s meant as a compliment.
Screenshot by Aaron Pruner/CNET
Jason Pargin released John Dies at the End, under the pseudonym David Wong, as a collection of stories he put online for fun — and then they gained popularity, leading to a fruitful career for the author. It probably helps that horror icon Don Coscarelli chose to adapt the first book in the series into a movie. Chase Williamson plays Dave, the guy plagued with supernatural visions, who teams up with his slacker buddy John (Rob Mayes) to investigate all sorts of weird phenomena. And boy, does this movie get weird. It’s bolstered by a superb cameo by Paul Giamatti, and it solidified itself as a cult fave. Too bad it never got a sequel.
Paramount Pictures
A Quiet Place: Day One takes audiences back to the very beginning of the alien invasion. While it may not be a necessary entry in the franchise — like, say, 10 Cloverfield Lane — the movie digs its heels into the human experience amid an otherworldly cataclysmic disaster. Come for the disaster, stay for the cute cat.
City Films
In John Carpenter’s postapocalyptic cult classic, it’s 1997 in New York and the city has been ravaged by war. Manhattan has been turned into a giant walled-in prison. After the president is taken hostage, former Special Forces officer (and current prisoner) Snake Plissken (Kurt Russell) is recruited to save the day in return for his own freedom.
Screenshot by Aaron Pruner/CNET
This mind-bending cult classic stars Jake Gyllenhaal as a misunderstood high schooler who, after seemingly surviving a horrific accident, begins traveling through time. In the process, he discovers the joy of being alive and in love. Themes of depression, repression and alternative universes fill this delightfully bizarre film. Also, let’s not forget that giant demon bunny named Frank.
WeTransfer, the service that allows users to send large files to others, is explaining itself to clients and updating its terms of service after a backlash related to training AI models.
In the blog post, the company says: “First things first. Your content is always your content.”
The post goes on to say, “We don’t use machine learning or any form of AI to process content shared via WeTransfer.” WeTransfer explains that its use of AI would be to improve content moderation and enhance its ability to prevent the distribution of harmful content across its platform.
The company adds that those AI tools aren’t being used and haven’t been built yet. “To avoid confusion,” it says, “we’ve removed this reference.”
A representative for WeTransfer did not immediately return an email seeking further comment.
The backlash over the terms prompted users such as political correspondent Ava Santina to write on X, “Time to stop using WeTransfer who from 8th August have decided they’ll own anything you transfer to power AI.”
What this means for users
Anxieties are high about what information users share or store in services such as social media accounts is accessed by companies to train AI models. WeTransfer may be used for highly sensitive file transfers, raising fears that private information might be accessed by AI. According to the company, this isn’t the case.
To further explain, the company said in its post:
“YES — Your content is always your content. In fact, section 6.2 of our Terms of Service clearly states that you ‘own and retain all right, title, and interest, including all intellectual property rights, in and to the Content’.”
“YES — You’re granting us permission to ensure we can run and improve the WeTransfer service properly.”
“YES — Our terms are compliant with applicable privacy laws, including the GDPR.”
“NO — We are not using your content to train AI models.”
“NO — We do not sell your content to third parties.”
When the Terms of Service change
While eagle-eyed experts understood the potential implications of what WeTransfer’s new terms could mean for people using the service, it’s unlikely that most people would be able to spot such changes.
“Expecting users to fully understand Terms of Service is unrealistic. These documents are often too complex to navigate,” says Haibing Lu, associate professor at the Leavey School of Business at Santa Clara University.
Lu told CNET that companies would do well to clearly highlight any changes they make to AI-related terms and explain them clearly to give people a real choice. “That’s what true transparency looks like,” Lu says. “Companies are increasingly risking backlash when they update Terms of Service to include AI, especially when users’ data is involved.”
Companies including Adobe, Slack and Zoom have had similar issues with terms changes related to AI, but it’s not just AI that’s the problem, Lu says — rather, it’s the lack of transparent communication.
In the case of WeTransfer, Lu says the company’s response, including revising the terms and blogging about them, “was a smart move and helped rebuild trust. It showed they were listening and willing to act fast.”
WeTransfer could include more understandable language in its terms, or communicate the changes better or sooner, Lu says, adding: “Transparency shouldn’t start after a backlash.”
Did you know that 73% of Americans drink coffee daily? After water, coffee and tea are two of the most popular drinks in the world. If you’re one of the folks who finds it hard to start the day without a freshly brewed cup of joe (or tea), chances are you’ve seen a stained mug or two, regardless of whether you handwash yours or use the dishwasher. In my family, we have an ongoing joke about how my sister absolutely will not touch a mug with even the faintest coffee stain, even if the cup is clean and even if she’s putting coffee back in it.
That got me thinking: Why do coffee and tea stain mugs so easily, and why are those stains so hard to remove?
To find out, I did some digging and found a handful of surprisingly effective ways to keep coffee mugs, thermoses and coffee pots looking spotless. Here’s what I learned.
For more stain-removing tips, learn how to remove stains from clothes, how to clean workout clothes and how to clean your running shoes.
Why does coffee stain your cups and mugs?
It’s so frustrating to run your cups and mugs through the dishwater only to find they’re still stained at the end of the cycle. Before you throw out that old cup, think of it as a learning opportunity to research why coffee has such powerful staining power.
Coffee can stain cups and mugs due to the presence of compounds called tannins, a type of polyphenol that is naturally present in coffee beans. When coffee is brewed, tannins can adhere to the surface of cups or mugs, leading to brown staining over time.
Boy_Anupong/Getty Images
How to avoid coffee stains in your mugs
The best offense is a good defense. To stop stains before they start, it’s best to rinse a cup or mug right after use to prevent any stains from setting in.
Additionally, coffee stains can be exacerbated by other factors, like the temperature of the coffee, since heat accelerates chemical reactions. The tannin compounds in the hot coffee will more strongly adhere to the cup material. Leaving the coffee in the cup or mug for an extended period also makes stains harder to remove since the tannins will set into the surface of the cup as the coffee cools down.
The porosity of the cup material can also impact the likelihood of staining. The more porous the material, the more susceptible it is to absorbing liquids and staining. Plastic, earthenware and stone cups or mugs are generally considered more porous. I recommend purchasing high-quality stainless steel cups or mugs since they’re non-porous, making stubborn stains unlikely.
Regular cleaning of cups or mugs can help prevent coffee stains from ingraining into the material. Let’s review some of the best methods for removing coffee stains.
Five methods to remove coffee stains for good
The following five methods should remove the coffee stains from your cups once and for all. (Or at least until the next time you drink coffee out of it, in which case, you’ll need to repeat these steps.)
Method one
What you’ll need: Baking soda and water.
What to do: Create a paste by mixing equal parts baking soda and tap water. Apply the paste to the stained areas of the cup, scrub gently with a sponge or brush, then rinse thoroughly.
Method two
What you’ll need: White vinegar.
What to do: Soak the coffee-stained cup in a mixture of white vinegar and water for a few hours. After, scrub the stains with a sponge or brush, and then wash the cup with dish detergent to eliminate the sour vinegar taste and its pungent smell.
solidcolours/Getty Images
Method three
What you’ll need: Lemon juice and salt.
What to do: Make a mixture of lemon juice and table salt. Gently rub this mixture over the stained areas and then rinse thoroughly. You will want to wash the cup or mug with dish detergent and water afterward to get rid of any lingering lemon taste or smell.
Method four
What you’ll need: Baking soda and white vinegar.
What to do: Sprinkle a few teaspoons of baking soda inside the cup or mug, gently pour in white vinegar and allow the mixture to fizz. Once it has fizzled out, scrub the stained areas with a sponge or brush and rinse thoroughly.
fcafotodigital/Getty Images
Method five
What you’ll need: Denture cleaning tablets.
What to do: Denture tablets clean mugs just as well as they clean teeth. Fill the stained cup with warm water and drop in one denture cleaning tablet, making sure to add enough water to completely cover the coffee stains. Let it sit for a few hours, and then scrub and rinse as with the other methods.
As with anything, a little effort and time will go a long way to making your cups and mugs shine. These tips will work on any drinkware material and can even be used for tea stains, too. Feel free to repeat any of the above processes as needed to get the stains out.
For more cleaning tips, you can also check out how often you should clean your makeup brushes, and the best way to machine wash your sheets and bedding.
Compounds called tannins are present in coffee beans, and when those beans are brewed, the tannins begin to adhere to the surface of cups, mugs and other containers they come in contact with.
One of the factors that determine how many tannins adhere to your cup is how porous the container is. Plastic, earthenware and stone cups will absorb those tannins and stain quickly. High-quality stainless steel is much easier to clean, as tannins are less likely to adhere to the surfaces.
Worried about coffee residue stuck to the bottom of your coffee mug? Distilled white vinegar can be an effective tool to remove scale and build-up. Follow it up with dish soap to scrub away coffee residue.
Yes, you can remove old coffee stains from a coffee mug using baking soda.
The LG G5 series is the best and brightest OLED I’ve ever tested in the CNET Labs.
At $3,400 for the 65-inch size, it’s expensive compared to some of the competition.
The G5’s best-in-class brightness made gaming easier and more enjoyable than I expected.
As a Call of Duty player, I know that quick responses can be the difference between clinching victory and languishing at the bottom of the leaderboard. But until I played Call of Duty Black Ops 6 on the new LG G5 OLED, I didn’t know there was something else just as crucial.
I’ve tested dozens of the best TVs over the years. My CoD session helped cement my opinion of the G5 as the best OLED I’ve ever tested.
Why? One reason is this model’s best-in-class brightness: It’s the brightest OLED I’ve ever seen in the CNET TV lab. Its clarity ensured I could see both the bright and dark parts of the screen — in a way the other TVs I’ve tested couldn’t reproduce. For instance, it was harder for enemies to hide in murky doorways because the TV rendered shadows more crisply.
Brightness for the win.
Carly Marsh/CNET
Picture quality is so important when it comes to gaming because some of the latest advances, such as HDR10 and Dolby Vision, help to elevate the gaming experience in a meaningful way, and the G5 can take full advantage of these. Zooming around the Protocol map from Black Ops 6, I found out it was the clarity of the G5’s images that really struck me. I toured the grounds of this map’s old naval fort — the sky was a brilliant blue and the buildings popped up out of the sea — everything looked more lifelike, like in the way it would if you were actually wandering here on a fall afternoon.
But in the middle of my reverie, I found that people were shooting at me. Like, a whole lot.
Watch this: LG C5 vs. LG G5: Which OLED Gives the Most for Your Money
As part of my testing, I compared the LG G5 against four other TVs, including the new Samsung S95F, the LG C5 and two LCDs, all connected to the same Xbox. (With five screens playing at once, it felt like I was starring in my own personal esports event.)
I played several different games, including Doom, Ori and the Blind Forest, but Call of Duty was where I saw the biggest improvements. The thing that immediately stood out about the G5 when playing games was how bright it was. When combined with the TV’s deep contrast, the G5’s picture popped in a way that the competition didn’t.
The LG G5 is the best TV I’ve reviewed yet
Ty Pendlebury/CNET
That brightness I saw on the G5? That’s thanks to LG’s new four-stack panel, which literally stacks two blue OLEDS (and a red and a green) on top of each other for its dazzling light output.
This is a technology that seems to be unique to the G5 for now, but it’s not the only advantage it has over the slightly cheaper — and slightly dimmer — Samsung S95F. Unless something changes, a Samsung TV will never tick the Dolby Vision check box — it’s HDR10 only. So if you’re an Xbox completionist, then the LG G5 (and others) will help you max out the Xbox 4K compatibility test. (Profile & system > Settings > General > TV & display options > 4K TV details).
TV DEALS OF THE WEEK
Deals are selected by the CNET Group commerce team, and may be unrelated to this article.
The specs
Available screen sizes: 55-, 65-, 77-, 83- and 97-inch
I can’t say playing on the G5 in the CNET lab made me a better player — there are other crucial factors, including networking, that can decrease lag — but I had a blast revisiting old maps and new ones on this fantastic television. It’s definitely a “must-see” for serious gamers.
If you simply want a good TV for gaming, you don’t need to spend $3,000; there are plenty of great budget TVs under a grand, and most of them will give you an enjoyable gaming experience.
Even so, if you’re looking for your ultimate gaming setup, then the LG G5 has everything you need.
Interest will restart for SAVE borrowers whose loans remain in a general forbearance on Aug. 1.
Viva Tung/CNET
Starting on Aug. 1, borrowers who are enrolled in the Saving on a Valuable Education plan will begin accruing interest charges on their loan balances. The Department of Education is encouraging borrowers to pick a new payment plan, but you also have the option to leave your loans where they are.
The Department of Education “urges all borrowers in the SAVE plan to quickly transition to a legally compliant repayment plan — such as the Income-Based Repayment Plan,” Secretary of Education Linda McMahon said in a statement in early July. While moving to a new payment plan before August could make sense for some borrowers, it’s not a requirement.
Payments for borrowers in SAVE will remain on hold in a general forbearance. Whether you decide to move to a new repayment plan or not this month depends on your forgiveness options and financial situation.
“It’s crucial for borrowers to act based on their own personal situation,” said Elaine Rubin, a student loan policy expert and director of corporate communications at Edvisors. “A borrower who chooses to stay in the forbearance or who is waiting for their payment plan application to be processed will have their loan remain in good standing.”
SAVE borrowers have been through years of unprecedented policy changes. The SAVE repayment plan was officially shot down by the courts earlier this year, but borrowers’ payments are expected to remain on hold until mid-2026 unless an upcoming court decision speeds up the timeline.
If you’re enrolled in SAVE and not sure what to do next, here’s what experts suggest.
What should PSLF borrowers enrolled in SAVE do before Aug. 1?
If you’re working toward Public Service Loan Forgiveness and are enrolled in SAVE, you can either stay in forbearance or switch to another repayment plan.
“For borrowers pursuing PSLF this won’t mean very much,” said Betsy Mayotte, president and founder of the Institute of Student Loan Advisors. “They can still either ride out the forbearance and plan on using what’s called buy-back to get the months to count for PSLF purposes or switch plans now to another qualifying plan.”
If you decide to stay in forbearance, you’ll be able to claim the months your loans were on hold using a process called PSLF buy-back. This allows you to pay for the months when your loans were in an administrative forbearance, to help you reach 120 on-time payments to receive forgiveness.
If you decide to move your loans to another repayment plan, your payments will restart after your application is processed. Application processing is experiencing delays, and experts say not to expect your first payment under the new plan for a month or two, at the soonest.
Although your payment may be higher on another income-driven repayment like IBR, this monthly amount would be the same amount you’d be charged when you went to “buy back” those months. Either way, you’ll pay roughly the same amount.
I’m pursuing income-driven repayment forgiveness. Should I switch to a new payment plan?
Although you’re not required to switch repayment plans by August, you should review your options to see what the best fit is for your financial situation.
“For those pursuing income-driven plan forgiveness they should strongly consider switching to another income-driven plan,” said Mayotte. She noted that there’s no buy-back option for IDR forgiveness, and the months that your loans are sitting in forgiveness won’t count toward your total number of payments. Waiting would drag out your forgiveness timeline.
You can also continue to stay in SAVE until the forbearance period ends and you’re placed on another repayment plan. You can pay the monthly interest that accrues, but those payments won’t count towards forgiveness, Mayonette said.
I don’t qualify for forgiveness. Should I switch to another repayment plan?
If you don’t qualify for student loan forgiveness options, you can switch to another IDR or continue to wait out the forbearance. Either way, you should count on making payments again soon — whether that’s a new monthly payment or paying off the interest that accrues each month during the forbearance period.
Since there are a few weeks left before interest charges start again, Mayonette suggests making larger lump sum payments while your interest is frozen, if you can.
Will all borrowers on SAVE qualify for another IDR plan?
SAVE borrowers should qualify for another income-driven repayment plan. However, it’s possible you may not right now.
“The ‘Big Beautiful Bill’ has eliminated the requirement of a partial financial hardship for IBR,” said Rubin. “However, the forms and the Loan Simulator have yet to be updated. It may take the department and the servicers some time to update their systems and information.”
In the meantime, look for the most affordable repayment option available, or you can choose to keep your loans in forbearance.
Will my payments increase if I move from SAVE to another income-driven repayment plan?
Many borrowers should brace for higher monthly payments after moving to a new repayment plan. Although income-driven repayment plans are generally more affordable than the standard repayment plan, SAVE was the most affordable student loan repayment plan to date. Many low-income borrowers had $0 or near $0 payments each month.
CNET estimated that a single borrower earning $60,000 a year with $30,000 in student loan debt would have paid approximately $217 on SAVE. Switching to another income-driven repayment plan like IBR could increase their monthly payment by nearly $100.
If I switch repayment plans, will my payments start in August?
If you switch to IBR or another repayment plan, that doesn’t mean your first monthly payment will hit in August.
“The US Department of Education still has a backlog in processing the forms to request a change of repayment plan, so they might not have to make payments for a few months until their request to switch repayment plans is processed,” said Mark Kantrowitz, a financial aid and student loan expert.
Still, it’s smart to prepare for repayment right away, just in case.
I can’t afford higher student loan payments. What should I do?
Many borrowers will see higher payments on another payment plan, even an income-driven repayment plan like IBR. If you need more time to prepare for repayment, you can also wait to switch repayment plans until the forbearance period ends.
“Borrowers will have the option to stay in the general forbearance, for now,” said Rubin. “However, borrowers who decide to stay in the forbearance need to stay informed. The Department has indicated that borrowers will remain in the forbearance until the legal challenges are resolved, or until the student loan servicer can send them a bill for the proper repayment amount.”
If you need more time to prepare for repayment, leaving your loans on hold can give you extra months to plan. During this time, you should consider making interest-payments, if possible, to prevent your account balance from rising.
“There are no prepayment penalties on federal and private student loans, so nothing stops you from making interest-only payments,” said Kantrowitz. “You can manually calculate the interest on your loans and make a prepayment in that amount each month.”
While the forbearance period won’t last forever, it is currently expected to last until mid-2026. However, an upcoming court case could change that and end forbearance sooner.
If you’re facing financial distress, you might consider economic hardship deferment, unemployment deferment or general forbearance, said Kantrowitz. But he warned that interest may continue to accrue, which could dig you into a deeper hole.
The founder of Twitter, Jack Dorsey, has a bright idea that he’s released as a beta app for iPhones: Sun Day, for tracking your exposure to the sun.
The app is free to testers and so far contains basic information such as sunrise, sunset and the UV index in order to assess a user’s potential burn-limit time and, as the app description says, “track your Vitamin D from the sun.” Dorsey is currently testing UI updates and a solar noon notification, according to the app notes. In the app, users can describe the type of clothing they’re wearing, such as shorts and T-shirts or swimwear, and their Fitzpatrick skin type, which classifies how quickly they’ll burn.
People tend to think about sun exposure and protections like sunscreen most during the summer, when the sun is strongest and the days are long, and when they’re heading to the beach or out gardening, golfing or otherwise getting in quality sun time.
The iOS app asks permission to connect to some Apple Health data when the app is installed.
Dorsey also recently released Bitchat, a private messaging client that uses Bluetooth as its communication platform. Although it’s meant to be a secure, private app, some users have flagged Bitchat for potential security flaws that are still being tested.
The effectiveness of an app such as Sun Day depends on giving it accurate information about your skin type and clothing, and while vitamin D levels are one way to gauge UV exposure, it’s not foolproof given that some people also take vitamin D supplements.
“Jack Dorsey’s new app Sun Day is exciting, not to detect vitamin D levels but really to help us understand our UV index which is so important in sun safety,” said Tanya Kormeili, an LA-based dermatologist. The risks of too much sun exposure include sunburns, aging skin and skin cancer. Tracking UV levels is one way to help mitigate those risks.
“The app does have an interesting promise as far as I am concerned, in that using the UV index can show you the risk for the level of UV exposure,” Kormeili says. “Sometimes it is hard for patients to be convinced that there can be an excessive UV risk on a cloudy day. The app would provide an objective measure of that UV index and guide you in safer sun practices.”
The dermatologist suggests that Dorsey putting the app out for public consumption without medical experts endorsing it might be a missed opportunity. “I am surprised that they have not involved actual dermatologists in pointing out the true value and limitations of this app,” she said.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
For a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.76% today, an increase of 0.08% compared to one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 5.97%, which is an increase of 0.12% from the same time last week. You could get a lower mortgage interest rate by making a higher down payment, improving your credit score or buying mortgage points.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on July 14, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
What’s keeping mortgage rates elevated this year? Concerns about persistent inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and left interest rates unchanged this year.
Most economists predict the Fed will start lowering rates in September. If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market continues to deteriorate, the central bank might make an earlier cut, potentially as soon as this month.
Prospective homebuyers shouldn’t bank on mortgage rates becoming affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
In today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. High home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, are further compounding the pressure on prospective buyers. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
Where are mortgage rates trending?
Mortgage rates have remained elevated, volleying between 6.5% and 7% for the past several months.
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which responds to investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to lower interest rates, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, homebuyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Will we see lower mortgage rates in 2025?
Despite optimism about the 2025 housing market, persistent economic challenges and political instability have prevented it from bouncing back. Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Mortgage rates would have to take a big step down, close to 6% or below, to drum up significant homebuying demand. According to Smith, though, the more likely scenario is that interest rates will take modest and gradual steps down over the coming months. A return to the record-low rates, around 2-3%, we saw during the pandemic would only happen if the economy tipped into a severe recession.
Fannie Mae now predicts rates around 6.5% by the end of 2025 and 6.1% by the end of 2026.
Experts say numerous risks could keep upward pressure on mortgage rates. For instance, if tariffs cause inflation to reignite, which most experts and Fed officials expect, it could result in higher bond yields and fewer interest rate cuts by the central bank. Neither would help bring mortgage rates down for prospective buyers.
Which mortgage term and type should I pick?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
For a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.76% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 5.97%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 ARM has an average rate of 5.96% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
What are some tips for finding the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
There are some TV and movie references in today’s NYT Connections puzzle. If you spent your childhood in the Neighborhood of Make-Believe, you’re sure to get one of them. That purple category, though … good luck! Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.
The Times now has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.
Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time
Hints for today’s Connections groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Think paint and crayon names.
Green group hint: Vroom-vroom.
Blue group hint: King Friday XIII and Queen Sara Saturday.
Purple group hint: Twist some Disney names.
Answers for today’s Connections groups
Yellow group: Shades of blue.
Green group: Adjectives for a sports car.
Blue group: Words before “Roger/s.”
Purple group: Disney animated characters plus a letter.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections answers?
The completed NYT Connections puzzle for July 14, 2025, #764.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is shades of blue. The four answers are baby, ice, powder and sky.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is adjectives for a sports car. The four answers are compact, fast, sleek and sporty.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is words before “Roger/s.” The four answers are Ginger, Jolly, Mister and Roy.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is Disney animated characters plus a letter. The four answers are abut, belled, flounders and scary.
You know the drill — it’s important to stay hydrated always, but especially in the summer heat. However, that message was taken to another level when the National Weather Service in Las Vegas advised residents across parts of Nevada, Arizona and California to avoid caffeine during extreme heat. The logic is that caffeine may speed up dehydration, which increases your risk for heat exhaustion or even heat stroke. The NWS advisory soon made headlines. To see if we should actually put down our iced coffees this summer, I reached out to three dietitians for the facts.
Does coffee cause dehydration?
“Caffeine, the main active ingredient in coffee, does have a mild diuretic effect,” explains Jessica McAllister, MS, RDN, a registered dietitian based in Honolulu, HI. “However, the common idea that drinking coffee automatically causes significant dehydration, especially in hot weather, is an oversimplification that deserves a closer look.”
A diuretic is a substance that increases the production of urine. Though coffee mildly has this effect, McAllister states that for healthy individuals, moderate coffee intake doesn’t cause dehydration, but can instead contribute to daily fluid intake.
Simon McGill/Getty Images
Zeitlin adds that what is being talked about in NWS Las Vegas’s post is caffeine, which isn’t just in coffee. It can also be found in sodas, energy drinks and chocolate. She advises that people keep their caffeine intake to about 300mg daily. This is about 1-2 cups (8-16 ounces of drip coffee) or 1-2 shots of espresso daily. If you stick to this and are otherwise healthy, Zeitlin states that you don’t need to be concerned about the outside temperature.
Amelia Ti, a registered dietitian and diabetes educator in New York City, who is also part of CNET’s medical review board, adds, “It’s not a major concern unless you’re already at risk (e.g., high blood pressure or other cardiac issues) or heat-sensitive. The main concern with drinking coffee when it’s hot out is that caffeine may mask early signs of dehydration or overheating, especially if you’re sweating a lot or not replenishing fluids adequately.”
Is coffee a vasoconstrictor?
In response to these caffeine-dehydration headlines, one Bluesky user stated that the issue isn’t dehydration. It’s actually vasoconstriction, which is the narrowing of the blood vessels.
When I asked McAllister about this, she said, “Studies have found that while caffeine can cause some blood vessel narrowing, or vasoconstriction, this doesn’t necessarily translate to reduced heat dissipation or increased body temperature in real life.”
Zeitlin agrees, stating, “The kernel of truth is that yes, caffeine is a vasoconstrictor, which means it constricts your blood vessels, and preventing heat stroke (or any stroke) requires our blood running freely, unconstructed around our body.” However, for coffee to significantly affect your blood vessels, it depends on three factors: how sensitive you are to caffeine, how much caffeine you drink and your personal health and medical history.
“If you drink water throughout the day, you eat a variety of fruits and vegetables in your diet and your doctor has never directly told you to monitor your caffeine intake, then you can comfortably enjoy 1-2 cups of coffee without stressing,” concludes Zeitlin. On the other hand, if you have a cardiac health history, you should check with your doctor to figure out your daily caffeine limit.
Do experts recommend that people stop drinking coffee in the heat?
“I wouldn’t recommend that most people completely stop consuming coffee just because it’s hot out, as long as you’re staying hydrated and not over-consuming,” says Ti. “I would recommend opting for an iced coffee, limiting extra-large or multiple cups of coffee or other caffeinated drinks, especially if you’re sweating more, and watching out for signs of heat exhaustion like dizziness, rapid heart rate, nausea, headache or clammy skin.”
Oleh_Slobodeniuk/Getty Images
McAllister agrees, as long as your coffee consumption doesn’t replace more hydrating fluids, like water, especially if you’re sweating heavily. “I don’t think there’s sufficient scientific evidence to support avoiding coffee when it’s hot outside,” she states. “For one, most people drink coffee for either the ‘pick-me-up’ or to warm up. If you’re drinking coffee, you’re likely to be outside in hot weather for only a short time, so you should be able to stay cool and drink plenty of water to minimize your risk of dehydration or overheating.”
Zeitlin is on the same page. “I recommend people keep coffee to 1-2 cups daily, regardless of the weather, and to drink a full glass of water for every cup or shot of espresso they have and
enjoy it,” she says. “But if your doctor told you to avoid caffeine for any reason, then do so.”
Important precautions to take in the summer heat
Though you may not have to worry about your coffee consumption in the heat as much as headlines are saying, you should still exercise certain precautions when it’s hot out this summer.
Increase fluid intake: “Drink water regularly throughout the day, and consider including electrolyte-rich beverages if you’re sweating heavily or exposed to the heat for longer than 1 hour,” says McAllister. Zeitlin adds that drinking more water on hotter-than-normal days “means 2-4 glasses more than your usual baseline water intake.”
Add electrolytes if sweating heavily: “Precautions I would recommend in hotter-than-normal temperatures include hydrating with water and adding electrolytes if you’re sweating heavily or outside in the heat for long periods of time,” states Ti.
Drink a glass of water before coffee: “A good general rule for anytime you consume coffee is to first have an 8-ounce glass of water,” says Zeitlin. “Your body’s response to the caffeine will be more gentle and prevent jitters.”
Avoid excessive alcohol: “Drinking alcohol can increase your chances of getting dehydrated, particularly if you’re spending a lot of time outdoors,” explains McAllister.
Consume foods with high water content: Ti specifically recommends watermelon, berries and greens. McAllister adds that cucumber, oranges and strawberries are great for this, especially if you don’t love drinking water.
Eat raw fruits and vegetables: “Raw fruits and veggies will hydrate you with their own water content and give you essential minerals (aka electrolytes) to help prevent you from dehydrating,” states Zeitlin. “Cooked veggies are great for those minerals, but you’ll be cooking out the water content.”
Skip workouts at the hottest part of the day: Unless your body is used to the heat, Ti advises scheduling your high-intensity workouts for a cooler time.
Exercise indoors: On a similar note, Zeitlin states, “Stay indoors in the air conditioning when possible and change your outdoor exercise routine to an indoor one on these super-hot days.”
Listen to your body: McAllister stresses the importance of remaining vigilant about signs of heat exhaustion, which include dizziness, headache or nausea. If you feel unwell, move to a cooler area.
Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s NYT Strands puzzle isn’t so tough if you’re used to reading the labels in your outfits. If you need hints and answers, read on.
I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story.
If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far
Hint for today’s Strands puzzle
Today’s Strands theme is: Completely fabricated.
If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Check your clothes.
Clue words to unlock in-game hints
Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:
These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:
You’re catching up with a friend you haven’t seen in ages. It feels good to be spending time with them in person, clinking glasses and laughing at old jokes. Then there’s a lull in the conversation, and your friend picks up their smartphone.
At some point, we’ve all been phone-snubbed. That’s what happens when the person you’re hanging out with seems more interested in their phone than you. You might be sitting right across from someone, but when they’re laughing at a video or meme only they can see, it feels like they’re a million miles away.
I’ve been guilty of paying more attention to my screen than my companion and felt bad about it afterward. There’s nothing wrong with replying to an urgent Slack message or pulling up a funny TikTok to share. But I know I probably spend too much time staring at screens, and a lot of that time is unhealthy doomscrolling. These days, when I’m not using my phone, I try to be more deliberate about keeping it out of sight and out of mind. If I do need to keep my phone at hand, I always have it face down.
It can protect your phone screen
I have a few reasons for making sure my phone screen is turned away. The first one is practical: When my phone isn’t in my pocket, it’s probably sitting on a desk or table — which means it’s probably not far from a glass of water or mug of coffee.
As a somewhat clumsy person, I’ve spilled beverages on my phone plenty of times. And even though most modern phones are water-resistant, why take chances? With my screen hidden, I can keep the most important part of my phone protected from splashes and other mishaps.
For extra protection, I have a phone case with raised edges. This helps prevent the screen from coming in direct contact with crumbs and debris that might be left on the table.
My colleague David Carnoy told me about an incident where he was charging his phone on his kitchen counter with the screen face up. Someone dropped a mug on top of it and cracked the screen. Unfortunately, he didn’t have a screen protector on this device (he knows better now).
It could help save your phone battery
Another good reason to keep my phone face down is that it won’t turn on each time I get a notification. That means I can save a little bit of battery charge.
A single notification won’t mean the difference between my phone lasting the whole day or dying in the afternoon but notifications can add up, especially if I’ve enabled them across all of my apps. If I’m in a lot of group chats, my screen might end up turning on dozens of times throughout the day (and that’s on the low side — many teenagers have hundreds of notifications a day).
It also shows that you pay attention
Keeping my phone face down is also a good rule of social etiquette: If I’m hanging out with someone, I keep my screen hidden from view as a subtle way of showing that I won’t be distracted by it. I don’t want incoming notifications to light up my screen every few seconds, especially if I’m in a bar or other dimly lit setting. I want to keep my eyes on the person I’m talking to.
“Eye contact is one of the most powerful forms of human connection. Neuroscience research indicates that when two people make direct eye contact, their brain activity begins to synchronize, supporting more effective communication and increasing empathy. This synchrony can be disrupted when attention shifts to a phone, even briefly,” says Michelle Davis, clinical psychologist at Headspace.
When I’m with the people I’ve chosen to spend time with, I want to be fully present with them. A sudden notification will tempt me to glance at, or worse, pick up my phone in the middle of a conversation.
It minimizes your phone’s presence
I also have a more personal reason for keeping my phone face down and I suspect that other people have had this same thought: My phone takes up too much space in my life.
I mean that quite literally. My phone is bigger than it needs to be. That’s been especially true since I upgraded from my iPhone Mini to a “normal-sized” iPhone. Yes, I got a much needed boost in battery life but I also got a screen with more pixels to lure me into the next news headline or autoplaying Instagram reel.
A small smartphone isn’t something that really exists anymore. My phone is bigger and better at grabbing my attention. It competes against my friends and family, books and movies, the entire world outside of its 6-inch screen. It often wins. But there’s still one small thing I can do to minimize its presence: I can keep the screen turned away from me whenever possible.
It can sometimes feel like there’s no escaping from my phone. Whether that ever changes, or phones evolve into some new form factor, I can’t say. I can’t control everything about my phone but I can control whether the screen stares at me when I’m not staring at it.
Looking for the most recent Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
Today’s NYT Connections puzzle could be tough. The purple category is another of those groupings where you just can’t see the connection, so hope instead that the other three come together for you. Read on for clues and today’s Connections answers.
The Times now has a Connections Bot, like the one for Wordle. Go there after you play to receive a numeric score and to have the program analyze your answers. Players who are registered with the Times Games section can now nerd out by following their progress, including number of puzzles completed, win rate, number of times they nabbed a perfect score and their win streak.
Read more: Hints, Tips and Strategies to Help You Win at NYT Connections Every Time
Hints for today’s Connections groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group, to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Don’t lose your trademark.
Green group hint: Like a clown.
Blue group hint: Sing out.
Purple group hint: Sounds like a negative word.
Answers for today’s Connections groups
Yellow group: Companiesthat have become verbs.
Green group: Silly person.
Blue group: Kinds of songs.
Purple group: Homophones of synonyms for “despicable.”
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections answers?
The completed NYT Connections puzzle for July 11, 2025, #761.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is companies that have become verbs. The four answers are Google, Photoshop, Uber and Zoom.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is silly person. The four answers are dodo, goof, goose and yahoo.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is kinds of songs. The four answers are folk, love, siren and swan.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is homophones of synonyms for “despicable.” The four answers are fowl, mien, offal and vial.
Fowl=foul
Mien=mean
Offal=awful
Vial=vile
Toughest Connections puzzles
We’ve made a note of some of the toughest Connections puzzles so far. Maybe they’ll help you see patterns in future puzzles.
#5: Included “things you can set,” such as mood, record, table and volleyball.
#4: Included “one in a dozen,” such as egg, juror, month and rose.
#3: Included “streets on screen,” such as Elm, Fear, Jump and Sesame.
#2: Included “power ___” such as nap, plant, Ranger and trip.
#1: Included “things that can run,” such as candidate, faucet, mascara and nose.
I never thought Google Lens would become such a key part of my daily routine. At home, I use it almost every day to identify seashells during beach walks or to translate labels on foods from my local Asian market. But recently, it proved even more valuable during a few trips, helping me navigate real-world travel challenges, from decoding unusual weather patterns to recognizing questionable vacation rentals.
Google recently shared new ways travelers can use Lens’ Visual Search features this summer and beyond. To learn more, I spoke with Dounia Berrada, senior director of engineering for Google Lens, about how the team is trying to make the camera a more intelligent search aid and travel companion.
Google Lens has a few limitations, considering most of the features can’t be used in offline mode. Still, it might be the smartest free tool already sitting on your phone.
“Everyone is familiar with how you can ask questions with text and voice. With Google Lens, you can also ask questions with images,” Berrada said.
For more Google features, explore how I use Google Maps for stress-free travel and the six Google AI and Lens features I’m using to plan my vacations.
6 ways to use Google Lens during your travels
Translate signs and menus on the spot
CNET
One of the biggest perks of Lens while traveling is its instant translation feature. I use this feature at least weekly when I visit Cuban restaurants here in Florida or visit my favorite Asian markets and need help reading the packaging.
I simply hold up my phone, tap the Lens icon in the Google app and the screen’s text transforms into English in real time. The text doesn’t come up as a pop-up but appears directly over the original words of whatever I’m needing to translate.
During travels, this feature can help translate street signs, public transport maps and menus.
Verify vacation rentals before you book
The other day, I was perusing Airbnbs in Costa Rica, as I’ve always wanted to visit. I saw a suspiciously underpriced rental, so I reverse image searched the listing photos using Lens. Turns out, the same pictures appeared on a real estate site for a property in another country. That was enough of a red flag for me to walk away and think about Costa Rica another time.
Berrada told me Lens wasn’t designed specifically to catch scammers but giving people more visual context before making decisions on lodging is very much part of the product’s mission. For me, it’s an easy way to do some quick background checking so I feel more confident in where I’m staying and I’ll probably use it anytime something feels off.
Ask questions about what you see
Macy Meyer/CNET
Ever found yourself staring at a painting in a museum, totally intrigued but with no idea what you’re looking at? That was me just a few days ago when I was standing in front of a surreal piece at the Dalí Museum in St. Petersburg. Even though I wrote an 80-page thesis on surrealism as an undergraduate, I’m still not an expert art history major. But I was wishing I had access to one when I was looking at the strange and disturbing Daddy Longlegs of the Evening Hope painting.
Google Lens was helpful when I pointed my phone’s camera at the painting and asked it to tell me more about the work of art. I got an AI Overview that broke down key details, like who made it (I knew this), when it was made and what materials were used (given to me by the plaque next to the painting), but more interesting, why it matters and a breakdown of what the imagery is likely representative of. Lens then offered links to websites to dive deeper if I wanted to.
This feature helps you make sense of what you’re seeing in real time. It also allows you to speak your question aloud while snapping a photo. It’s kind of like turning to a friend and saying, “Wait, what is this?” and getting an answer right then and there.
Deep dive with the About this image feature
Macy Meyer/CNET
When I was visiting my older sister in Tulsa, Oklahoma, recently, I snapped a photo of some bizarre clouds that looked almost like a thick, wavy blanket covering the entire sky as far as the eye could see. I’ve never seen anything like it before.
I used the About this image feature in Google Lens to figure out what I was actually looking at. It showed me how the photo (and ones like it) were being used across the web — from weather blogs to social media platforms to fact-checking sites — and helped me learn that these are undulatus clouds, appearing as “cloud streets” because they look like parallel bands or rows.
Whether you encounter an odd image online or in real life, this tool provides quick context and helps you understand what different sources are saying.
Summarize and translate text from a photo
Google
When you’re traveling, you never know what kind of text you’ll run into that’ll need translating — menus, handwritten signs, museum placards, notes from an Airbnb host. With Google Lens, you can snap a picture of any text and instantly get a summary, ask questions about it or copy it to your clipboard. The feature can also annotate the image, such as highlighting dishes on a menu that meet your dietary preferences, so you’re not stuck translating.
I can imagine using it to quickly find vegetarian dishes on a local menu or to make sense of a scribbled transit schedule at a rural train stop. Berrada said she has personally used this feature to translate recipe cards in French that her mother gave to her, so she can share the English translation with her husband.
Whether you’re navigating a new city or just trying to decode a note left by your Airbnb host, it’s a handy tool for making the unfamiliar feel a bit more manageable.
Get souvenir details instantly when traveling
Google
Imagine you’re wandering through a street market in Tokyo or browsing a boutique in Lisbon and spot something you’d love to bring home — a unique canvas tote bag (my personal souvenir of choice), a pair of sunglasses or a handmade clothing item. With Google Lens, you can snap a quick photo and instantly pull up product details, including prices at other retailers, current deals, shopper reviews and shipping information if you’re wanting to ship it back home. It’s an easy way to figure out if you’re getting a good price or if it’s worth waiting to buy later.
Even in a store, Lens can show you if similar items are in stock elsewhere nearby or online, whether the price is competitive and what other travelers or shoppers have said about it. It takes the guesswork out of impulse buys, especially when you’re on the go.
“This is my absolute favorite use case with Lens. I love it for shopping,” Berrada said.
Berrada explained that the tool taps into a massive shopping graph with more than 50 billion listings that are constantly updated and drawn from online sources and local stores. It then shows the exact product you’re looking at, along with the best available prices, so you can compare options before making a purchase. If you’re not set on buying that exact item, Lens also provides visually similar alternatives and products with comparable features, such as lightweight materials or enhanced durability.
She also shared a personal example from a recent trip to Paris, where she used Lens to scan apparel she saw in a store. The feature helped her decide whether to buy the item locally or wait until returning home, factoring in currency differences and availability of local brands.
For more, see our traveler’s prep checklist and how to improve your odds of not having your flight canceled or delayed.
Our team of sleep experts has spent years researching, testing and deconstructing over 300 mattresses. Most of our testing happens in our 6,000-square-foot mattress warehouse in Reno, Nevada. In addition to the office space where our team tirelessly compiles mattress data, there are also two mock bedrooms we use to test and film reviews in. A back room also serves as an overflow for the hundreds of mattresses the team has tested.
Testing mattresses is a very hands-on process that involves analyzing the construction, feeling and rolling around on the beds from multiple points of view. Our team has a variety of genders, body types and sleeper positions, which allows us to give each bed a well-rounded view that we can compile into recommendations for the average person.
Firmness and feel: Firmness and feel are some of the most subjective factors when testing mattresses. How firm a mattress feels will depend on how much pressure you put on the bed — aka your body weight — and this varies from person to person. We often find that our opinion on a bed’s firmness does not always match a brand’s claim.
The Mattress Smasher 9000 testing the Helix Midnight Core model.
Dillon Lopez/CNET
To get a full view of a mattress, each person in the testing facility rates each mattress we test on firmness. Then we compare it to our data set to see where a bed falls on our firmness scale.
Durability and construction: We can’t sleep on every mattress we test for years to test the durability (though we have done it for some). While we note the construction of a bed, we use it to inform how durable and supportive a bed will be over time. Saatva, for example, received a 10 support score during testing because of the hefty construction and dual-coil system.
Motion isolation: When I say motion isolation, I’m referring to how well a bed can dampen movement across the surface. We test this by having multiple teammates move around and measure how much motion they can feel. Memory foam tends to perform best in this area. For example, the Nectar Premier mattress scored higher in motion isolation because the memory foam layers are superior at dampening movement compared with innerspring mattresses.
CNET video producer Jon Gomez captures mattress expert Dillon Payne testing the edge support of a mattress.
Aly Lopez/CNET
Edge support: This one might not seem like a big deal, but edge support is important if you sleep on the edge of the bed. Think about it like how strong the bed’s perimeter is. If it caves in when we sit or lay on it, it doesn’t have good edge support and receives a score corresponding to where it falls in the data.
Temperature: Many brands claim their mattresses are cooling, although very few are. While adding cooling technology or gel-infused foams can help regulate temperature, it doesn’t mean they are physically cool to the touch. We carefully assess each of the cooling features but differentiate between being temperature-neutral and cooling. For instance, Purple is a naturally breathable bed because of the grid construction, but we don’t consider it an actively cooling bed.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
The average interest rate for a standard 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.74% today, up 0.04% from seven days ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 5.93%, which is an increase of 0.07% since last week. You could get a lower mortgage interest rate by making a higher down payment, improving your credit score or buying mortgage points.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on July 10, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
What’s behind high rates these days? Lingering inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and kept interest rates steady in 2025.
Financial markets largely expect the Fed to resume lowering rates in September. If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market continues to deteriorate, the Fed might cut interest rates earlier, potentially as soon as late July.
Prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
In today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. High home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, are further compounding the pressure on prospective buyers. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
Recent mortgage rate trends
With mortgage rates stuck above 6.5%, it’s not shaping up to be a hot summer housing market.
Mortgage rates primarily take their cues from the 10-year Treasury yield, which reflects investors’ collective expectations regarding inflation, labor market health, upcoming monetary policy shifts and the impact of global factors like tariffs. If investors anticipate persistently high inflation or significant government borrowing, they’ll demand higher returns on their bonds, which in turn keeps mortgage rates elevated.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to dial back interest rates, experts caution that significant market volatility is likely. As a result, homebuyers are adopting a more patient and strategic approach to financing, comparing various loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Mortgage predictions for 2025
Despite optimism about the 2025 housing market, persistent economic challenges and political instability have prevented it from bouncing back. Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Mortgage rates would have to drop significantly, close to 6% or below, to drum up significant homebuying demand. According to Smith, though, the more likely scenario is that interest rates will take modest and gradual steps down over the coming months. A return to the record-low rates, around 2-3%, we saw during the pandemic would only happen if the economy tipped into a severe recession.
Fannie Mae’s forecast puts rates around 6.5% by the end of 2025 and 6.1% by the end of 2026.
Numerous risks could keep rates elevated. For instance, if tariffs cause inflation to reignite, which most experts and Fed officials expect, it could result in higher bond yields and fewer interest rate cuts by the central bank. Neither would help bring mortgage rates down for prospective buyers.
Which mortgage term and type should I pick?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
For a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.74% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 5.93%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 ARM has an average rate of 6.14% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I get the lowest mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
It’s officially summer, and with that comes the first full moon of the season. July’s full moon — known as the Buck Moon or the Thunder Moon — will light up the night sky on July 10 and be at its fullest going into July 11. It’ll be bright for the whole night, but will reach peak luminosity at around 4:37 a.m. local time, which is a bit late (or early) for most skygazers.
According to Stellarium’s sky map, the moon will rise from the southeastern horizon just after sunset on Thursday and streak across the sky before setting on the southwestern horizon just before dawn. No matter where you are in the US, you’ll be able to see it virtually all night.
Should you not be able to see the moon due to weather or some other reason, you can also soak up a great view anytime between July 9 and July 12 as the moon will be more than 95% full during those days.
Why is it called the Buck Moon and Thunder Moon?
According to The Farmer’s Almanac, July’s full moon actually has several names, including Buck Moon, Thunder Moon, Feather Moulting Moon and Salmon Moon. These names typically come from Native American and colonial times, and were used to describe the moon for the entire month, not just when it’s full.
White-tailed deer start growing antlers in March or April as the days start to lengthen. July marks the peak of their antler growth season, hence the name Buck Moon. Thunderstorms are also common in July, which is why it’s called the Thunder Moon.
The other two names are less common, but July marks the time when some species of salmon begin migrating for the mating season, while ducks engage in their annual moulting around this time of year as well.
Catch a glimpse of Mars and Venus
The moon will be joined in the sky by Mars and Venus during its trip across the sky on July 10. Mars will be visible just after sunset in the western sky before setting. You won’t have long, since it’s scheduled to dip below the horizon before midnight. If you choose to stay up late, Venus will crest the eastern horizon shortly after 2 a.m. local time and be visible until sunrise.
Saturn will also be visible in the eastern sky, not far from the moon, but you’ll likely need binoculars or a telescope to see it beyond the moon’s glow.
Once the moon finishes its monthly cycle, skygazers can check out the Alpha Capricornids and Southern Delta Aquariids meteor showers, both of which are scheduled to peak during the last few days of July.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
For a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.72% today, an increase of 0.03% compared to one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 5.94%, which is an increase of 0.05% since last week. To secure a lower mortgage interest rate, consider increasing your down payment, improving your credit score or purchasing mortgage points.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on July 09, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
What’s behind high rates these days? Stubborn inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and left interest rates unchanged this year.
Most economists predict the Fed will start lowering rates in September. If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market continues to deteriorate, the Fed might cut interest rates earlier, potentially as soon as late July.
Prospective homebuyers shouldn’t bank on mortgage rates becoming affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
In today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. High home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, are further compounding the pressure on prospective buyers. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
Are mortgage rates considered high right now?
With mortgage rates stuck above 6.5%, it’s not shaping up to be a hot summer housing market.
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which responds to investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to lower interest rates, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, homebuyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Mortgage predictions for 2025
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, economic and political instability have kept it stuck in neutral. Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Mortgage rates would have to take a big step down, close to 6% or below, to drum up significant homebuying demand. But according to Smith, the more likely scenario is a slow and steady decline in borrowing costs. A return to the record-low rates, around 2-3%, we saw during the pandemic would only happen if the economy tipped into a severe recession.
Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.5% by the end of 2025 and 6.1% by the end of 2026.
Numerous risks could keep rates elevated. For instance, if tariffs cause inflation to reignite, which most experts and Fed officials expect, it could result in higher bond yields and fewer interest rate cuts by the central bank. Both would be bad for mortgage rates.
What are the different mortgage types?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
The average 30-year fixed mortgage interest rate is 6.72% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 5.94%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 ARM has an average rate of 5.90% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I find the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
Samsung’s Unpacked event is shaping up to introduce the next generation of foldable Galaxy Z phones to replace the Galaxy Z Fold 6 and Galaxy Z Flip 6 if the company’s multiple teases are to be believed. It’s also expected to uncover the successor to the Galaxy Watch 7. But rumors and leaks can’t compare to the real thing, which happens tomorrow at the event itself.
Here’s what you can expect and how to tune in. CNET is also hosting a Samsung Galaxy Unpacked live blog and a live show, which will cover all the final rumors and big reveals as they happen.
When is Samsung Galaxy Unpacked 2025? How to watch the livestream
Samsung’s summer Unpacked event will take place in Brooklyn, New York, and will be live streamed on the Samsung Newsroom, at Samsung.com and on Samsung’s YouTube channel. Unpacked kicks off on Wednesday, July 9, at7 a.m. PT (10 a.m. ET). CNET will be on the ground bringing you all the live updates.
What to expect at Samsung’s summer Unpacked
Samsung’s been teasing its upcoming foldables for the last several weeks. In early June, a Newsroom post pointed to the company bringing “an Ultra-experience” to “a smaller and more portable form factor.” That apparently includes a “powerful camera” and “AI-powered tools.”
The following week, the company said in another blog post that its “newest Galaxy Z series is the thinnest, lightest and most advanced foldable yet.” It appears to be following in the footsteps of the slim and lightweight Galaxy S25 Edge, which was released in May.
Samsung seems to be especially focused on scaling the capabilities of its foldables’ cameras with the help of AI. It noted in a subsequent blog post, “The camera will only get smarter — helping users capture life’s moments more vividly and make everyday experiences more seamless, personal and impactful.”
Galaxy Z Fold 7
In an exclusive interview with CNET, Drew Blackard, Samsung’s senior vice president of mobile product management, previewed the thinness of the new design, saying, “It’ll feel like a traditional bar-type smartphone, but it’ll have all of the benefits of a foldable.” Based on rumors we’ve seen, the Z Fold 7 could be about 0.34 inches thick when closed, give or take, and weigh just over 200 grams.
It’s possible Samsung could unveil the Z Fold 7 and then the Z Fold Ultra, or perhaps the Ultra will be the only version of the Fold.
Galaxy Z Flip 7
Folding the device along the other axis, the Galaxy Z Flip 7 could bring a larger 4.1-inch cover screen and a faster Exynos 2500 processor, according to rumors we’ve been tracking. Renders of the flagship foldable Galaxy Z Flip 7 suggest Samsung could nix the physical camera notch and opt for an edge-to-edge cover display.
There are also murmurs of a more affordable Galaxy Z Flip 7 FE phone. Leaker Evan Blass shared renders of the rumored device, which appears similar to the Galaxy Z Flip 6, but the phone could swap out the Snapdragon chip for an Exynos processor.
Galaxy Watch 8
This one isn’t as mysterious, since Samsung basically previewed its Galaxy Watch 8 plans to CNET’s Vanessa Hand Orellana when she talked to Dr. Hon Pak, the company’s senior vice president and head of digital health, about new health features to expect. That said, we could see more than just the Galaxy Watch 8, with a Galaxy Watch 8 Classic and new colors for the Galaxy Watch Ultra based on reporting by SammyGuru.
Samsung
An animated invite for July’s Unpacked event begins by showing the slim side profile of a device that then splits into two phones. One of these phones folds like a book, and on-screen text at the end reads “Ultra Unfolds.”
If you’re eager to get the upcoming Galaxy device, you can reserve it now and earn a $50 Samsung Credit at Samsung.com.
Watch this: Galaxy S25 Edge Review: This Skinny Phone Left a Big Impression
If you live in one of the supported states, you can add your driver’s license to Apple Wallet on your iPhone. The ability to digitize this form of ID makes a lot of sense today: your digital ID can live alongside your debit cards, concert tickets and boarding passes, freeing up space in your physical wallet, not to mention being incredibly convenient.
Living in California, I was interested in giving it a shot and see if it was as easy as it looks to be. And it is, as long as you have the right iPhone and OS version. Older iPhones, depending on the state you live in, might run into issues.
Right now, digital IDs are primarily used to go through TSA checkpoints in certain airports when flying domestically, but that’ll likely change in the future. Want to use your digital ID at your favorite bar or nightclub? We’re not there yet.
Below, I describe my experience, the hiccups I encountered on the way and things that you should know if you plan on adding your driver’s license to Apple Wallet. I’ll also break down how you can add your ID to your iPhone, step by step.
For more, don’t miss these low-key iOS 26 features we’re excited for.
These states support digital IDs on iPhones right now
Only a handful of states support digital IDs in Apple Wallet. One key factor is how each state implements its Mobile Driver’s License system. For instance, Louisiana, New York, Utah and Virginia all support mobile driver’s licenses but require separate apps for digital IDs.
States and regions that support digital IDs in Apple Wallet:
Arizona
California
Colorado
Georgia
Hawaii
Iowa
Maryland
New Mexico
Ohio
Puerto Rico
Some states originally announced to support Apple’s digital ID haven’t quite gotten there yet.
The number of states supported in Apple Wallet is about half of what the TSA currently allows. Collectively, it accepts digital IDs across Apple Wallet, Google Wallet, Samsung Wallet and state-based mobile apps in 15 states.
What are the iPhone requirements to add your driver’s license to Apple Wallet?
Where you live is just the start. You also have to have the right iPhone model and the right software setup.
Here are the minimum requirements that Apple lists:
An iPhone 8 or later with the latest version of iOS
Have Face or Touch ID enabled on your device
Have two-factor authentication enabled on your Apple account
A license or ID from a participating state or territory
Your device’s region set to the United States
I’ll have more to say in a bit about that iPhone 8 and iOS requirement and a catch I ran into.
My experience adding my ID to my iPhone was easy
For testing purposes, I used the iPhone 16E.
The process of adding the ID was simple. I scanned the front and the back of my ID and the next step was to verify my identity. This wasn’t nearly as nerve-wracking as I thought it would be. Instead, it took a live photo of my face for 2.5 seconds.
After that, more verification was required. This came in a series of different photos, with prompts directing me to close my eyes, open my mouth, smile and tip my head down. This verification process took about three minutes. (Or longer in my case, aa I got distracted writing notes about the process and then found I had to restart the whole process.)
Then, after I submitted those photos, there was another verification step, presumably with the photos relayed to the California DMV. A screen message told me that I would receive a notification when there was an update. I expected this to take a long time, but not even 10 minutes later, a notification telling me that my ID was ready to use popped up. That was easy.
What about older iPhones?
So, not every phone you think might work will actually do so. The first time I tested adding my ID, I was using an iPhone 8 Plus. But when I arrived at the setup page within Apple Wallet, I was given eight states to choose from, and California wasn’t one of them.
That surprised me. I’d found a helpful Apple support article that explained the requirements for adding a driver’s license or state-issued ID to Apple Wallet and it seemed like I shouldn’t have any trouble.
At first, I thought the roadblock was that I hadn’t set up Touch ID yet. But no, California was still not on my list of eight states. (Equally confusing, a colleague of mine also tried this with an iPhone 8 and Apple Wallet only listed four states.)
I went back to the Apple support article and looked for fine print, and sure enough, there it was. I’d ignored the asterisk in the requirements, because California has had its Mobile Driver’s License program set up for some time now.
The fine print at the very bottom of the page states, “For California, ID in Apple Wallet requires iPhone XS or later with iOS 17.5 or later.” (For Puerto Rico, if you want to add your driver’s license or ID to Apple Wallet, you’ll need to have an iPhone XS or later with iOS 18.1.)
So if you’re holding onto an iPhone 8 or iPhone X and live in California, you won’t be able to add your driver’s license to your iPhone because of the lack of software support. iOS 16 is the last supported version of the operating system for iPhone 8 and X models.
How to add your ID or driver’s license to Apple Wallet
If you live in a state that supports digital IDs for Apple Wallet, it’s easy to add one. After it’s added, you’ll need to verify your identity, which can take a little longer but it’s still a straightforward process.
Open Apple Wallet.
Tap the Add button.
Tap Driver’s License or ID and select your location.
If applicable, choose whether you want to add your ID to your iPhone only or your iPhone and your Apple Watch.
Follow the steps to scan your license or ID.
(Make sure you scan your ID in a well-lit environment and that the image is in focus.)
Once it’s scanned, you’ll be prompted to confirm your identity with a selfie photo. According to Apple, you may be asked to complete a number of facial or head movements for identification purposes.
To ensure an easier verification process, Apple suggests that you:
Stand in front of a plain background with neutral, light paint.
Be in a well-lit area, ideally indoors.
Take off sunglasses, masks, hats or other accessories that could block your face.
Hold your iPhone steady.
When you’re finished, submit your information by confirming with Touch or Face ID. Your biometrics will be bound to the ID, so only you can use it.
How to transfer your digital ID to another iPhone
If you upgrade your iPhone, you’ll need to transfer your ID or driver’s license to it.
During initial setup, tap Wallet.
Select your ID.
Follow the steps.
Tap to confirm you want to move your driver’s license or ID to the new device.
So, now what?
Your digital ID isn’t just a photo of your ID that you can pull up within Apple Wallet. In fact, you don’t even see a full image of your physical ID. In order to actually view your information from your digital ID, you’ll need to tap on your ID “card” in Apple Wallet, tap the “i” at the top-right of the screen, and then tap State ID info or Card Information (the wording may be different depending on what version of iOS your iPhone is running). From there, it will show your ID photo as well as essential pieces of information from your physical ID.
TSA checkpoints that support digital IDs require a dedicated scanner, so the process may not necessarily feel like it’s faster than showing your physical ID to the agent.
Here’s a video of the process via the Maryland Department of Transportation:
The idea of a digital ID is pretty convenient but overall, it probably won’t save you a meaningful amount of time. Couple that fact with its incredibly limited use cases right now and the fact that merchant or event adoption will require investment in proper hardware and it’s pretty easy to see just how far off we are from ditching physical IDs.
Selling or trading in your iPhone? Do this first.
When you move on from a phone that has your ID on it, you’ll want to do the same thing you do with other sensitive info like credit or debit cards and passwords: Remove it.
So before you wipe your iPhone to sell or trade it in, you should manually remove your ID first. Here’s how to do it.
Go to Apple Wallet and tap your ID in the list
Tap the “i” button at the top right of the screen
Tap Remove State ID (or Driver’s License)
Read the warning that pops up and tap Remove
Digital passports are coming to Apple Wallet with iOS 26
Creating a digital ID from your physical passport is coming to your iPhone this year.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
While states are taking time to implement digital ID systems, Apple announced a feature coming in iOS 26 this year: You can add a digital passport to Apple Wallet.
When that feature is available, iPhone users will be able to scan their passports to create a digital version for identity verification during domestic travel. You won’t be able to use it for international travel and it’s not a full replacement for a physical passport (so keep your physical one on you) but it should work at the 250-plus supported TSA checkpoints.
During its WWDC keynote in June, Apple said that the digital ID made from your passport can also be used “in apps and in person” but it didn’t give any specifics.
Verify with Wallet ID verification could make ordering alcohol easier
Also headed to iPhones this fall is an easier way for you to prove your age using your digital ID. Say you want to have a bottle of wine sent to your place via Uber Eats. Typically, when the driver arrives, you’ll need to present your ID and have it scanned to complete the transaction but with the new Verify with Wallet, your stored digital ID will be used to verify your age. (I do wonder if things might get more complicated when the delivery arrives if you’re not the one receiving it.)
Verify with Wallet will be supported by Chime, Turo, Uber Eats and U.S. Bank.
For more, don’t miss what you should know about flying domestically without a Real ID in 2025.
The Republican-led policy bill cuts repayment plans to two options for future borrowers.
Getty Images/Zooey Liao/CNET
The Republican-led “One Big Beautiful Bill” was signed into law by President Donald Trump last week, which will result in major changes to student loans, including fewer repayment options, caps on borrowing and new rules for Pell Grants.
The nearly 900-page bill means a lot of changes for taxes and Medicare, but its impact on higher education could alter how colleges operate and burden borrowers with education debt for much longer than expected, experts said.
“This could create a situation where borrowers are in repayment for a longer period, and overall costs could be higher [when] repaying under this plan,” said Elaine Rubin, a student loan policy expert and director of corporate communications at Edvisors.
Existing borrowers may retain access to the Income-Based Repayment plan, but anyone who borrows after July 2026 will be subject to the new rules. Millions of SAVE borrowers may be forced onto the new plans when the administrative forbearance period ends.
Here’s how it could affect your student loans and long-term finances.
Read more: If You’re a Student Loan Borrower Enrolled in Save, Make This Move Now While Your Payments Remain Paused
What are the new student loan repayment plans in the budget bill?
The Republican-led bill consolidates student loan repayment options into a standard repayment plan and the Repayment Assistance Plan. Any student loans borrowed after July 1, 2026, will be restricted to these two repayment plan options.
1. Standard repayment plan
The current standard repayment plan spans 10 years. The new standard plan will expand the repayment window to 10 to 25 years, depending on the amount of debt:
Standard repayment plan tiers
Amount of debt
Repayment term
Less than $25,000
10 years
$25,000 – $50,000
15 years
$50,000 – $100,000
20 years
Greater than $100,000
25 years
A longer repayment plan could mean more affordable monthly payments, but you’d be in debt longer and pay more interest overall. Consider this example of a $40,000 loan with a 6.53% interest rate.
Standard repayment plan costs
Repayment term
Monthly payments
Total interest costs
Current standard plan (10 years)
$455
$14,576
New standard plan (15 years)
$349
$22,839
2. Repayment Assistance Plan
The new Repayment Assistance Plan will replace all current income-driven repayment plans and adjust your payments to 1% to 10% of your adjusted gross income, with a minimum monthly payment of $10.
You’ll have to pay 1% of your AGI if you make between $10,000 and $20,000, 2% if you make $20,000 to $30,000, 3% for $30,000 to $40,000 and so on. Borrowers who make less than $10,000 will pay $10 per month, and those who make $100,000 or more will pay 10%.
Your loan payments are applied to interest first, then fees and finally toward principal. The RAP plan includes an interest waiver, so if your monthly payment doesn’t cover the amount of interest that accrues that month, the unpaid interest is waived. That could help alleviate the frustrations with the old student loan repayment plans (except for SAVE), which potentially allowed unpaid interest to increase the balance even when borrowers made on-time payments.
Additionally, the bill includes minimum principal balance reduction of $50 each month. So if your monthly payment is $100, but $60 is going toward interest and fees, you’d only be paying $40 toward your principal balance. The government would chip in the remaining $10 so you’d reach the $50 threshold.
Monthly payments would go down by $50 per dependent, so if you have a $250 loan payment and two kids, you’d pay $150 a month on the RAP plan. If you have a $100 student loan payment, you’d only have to pay the minimum $10 a month.
“Borrowers may benefit from the changes,” Rubin said. “As dependent children can directly impact their payment, it could create a more affordable monthly payment, however, it will have these borrowers locked in repayment for a longer period.”
The RAP has a longer timeline than current income-driven repayment plans — 30 years versus 20 or 25, which is how you could end up paying a lot more for a lot longer.
“I worry that we will be increasing the population of the elderly still holding student debt,” said Betsy Mayotte, president and founder of the Institute of Student Loan Advisors. “Longer debt can impact things like home purchase, the cost of other credit and, of course, retirement.”
What changes can current student loan borrowers expect?
Under the new plan, current borrowers may have the option to move to the new plans or move to the Income-Based Repayment plan.
Existing borrowers (loans taken before July 1, 2026) will have access to a version of the current IBR plan, paying either 15% of their discretionary income with forgiveness after 25 years or 10% with forgiveness after 20 years, depending on when they took out the loan.
Millions of borrowers enrolled in Saving on a Valuable Education (the SAVE plan) are still waiting for resolution after the courts struck down the plan. Borrowers’ payments are paused while their loans remain in a general forbearance, but it’s unclear when payments will restart. However, whichever plan they end up moving to will likely result in higher monthly payments and a longer repayment period.
Let’s go back to that example of a $40,000 loan at a 6.53% interest rate. Assuming you’re a single filer with an annual income of $60,000, here’s what your monthly payments and repayment timeline could look like on the current plans and the RAP:
SAVE vs. new repayment plans
Repayment plan
Monthly payments
Time in repayment
Total paid
SAVE (at 10%)
$207
25 years
$62,100
IBR (borrowed before July 1, 2014)
$457
25 years
$137,100
IBR (borrowed after July 1, 2014)
$304
20 years
$72,960
RAP
$250
30 years
$90,000
“In terms of the provisions of the RAP plan, there will be winners and losers,” said Robert Farrington, student debt expert and founder of The College Investor. “While the 30-year timeframe is longer and could make overall costs more expensive for some, other borrowers benefit from the interest and principal subsidies.”
While your monthly loan payment may go down on RAP, depending on your income, the longer time frame could create an obstacle for your long-term financial goals. If you graduate at 22, you could end up with student loan payments until you’re 52. Plus, you’ll end up paying more in interest over time.
According to an analysis by the Student Borrower Protection Center, the new RAP could cost the typical SAVE borrower an extra $2,929 per year.
“This is akin to indentured servitude,” said Mark Kantrowitz, a student loan and financial aid expert. It “mostly affects borrowers who are living below or near the poverty line for decades, which is more than half of the borrowers in an income-driven repayment plan.”
If you’re a current borrower and don’t choose a new repayment plan by July 2, 2028, you’ll be automatically enrolled in RAP.
Parent PLUS borrowers who aren’t already on an ICR plan are excluded from all income-driven repayment options.
What other student loan changes are in the budget bill?
The Republican legislation includes several other changes to student loans. Here are some of the major ones.
Option to exclude spouse’s income
Married spouses who file separate tax returns got a bit of a break: The Senate’s so-called “marriage penalty” was nixed from the final version. When calculating AGI for use in RAP, payments for married borrowers won’t be based on both spouses’ incomes if they file taxes separately. Spouses who file jointly will need to include both incomes.
End of deferment and forbearance
The new plan eliminates deferment for economic hardship for loans made after July 2027. It also reduces the forbearance time frame to nine months over a 24-month period.
Currently, borrowers can request economic hardship deferment for up to three years and forbearance for 12 months over a three-year period.
Reduced borrowing limits
Beginning July 2026, the bill restricts borrowing to $50,000 for undergraduates, $100,000 for graduate programs and $200,000 for professional programs. The bill also caps Parent PLUS loans at $65,000 and eliminates Grad PLUS loans.
These new limits may reduce college access for some students, according to Kantrowitz.
“The loan limits may affect low- and middle-income students who are enrolled at high-cost colleges, where the federal loan limits might not be enough,” he said. “They may have to rely on private student loans, which might not be available.”
Mayotte also says she’s concerned about the reduction in loan availability.
“If the cost of tuition doesn’t go down, we end up with a lot of students that reach their max federal loan eligibility and then don’t qualify for private loans to finish their degree,” Mayotte says. “Having debt and no degree is one of the biggest indicators of default within the student loan portfolio.”
Pell Grant limitations
The new bill prevents students from receiving Pell Grants if they received enough scholarship money to cover their cost of attendance. Critics of the bill said Pell recipients who have scholarships to cover the cost of attendance often use the grant money to pay for everyday expenses such as transportation, housing and food.
However, the current enrollment rules for Pell Grants remains intact. The House version had raised the bar for how “full-time” studies are defined — students would have to earn 30 credits per year to be eligible, for instance, rather than the current 24. The Senate nixed this change, and the revision remained in the final bill. The final bill also expands the Pell Grant to short-term job-training programs.
School accountability
The final bill calls for federal aid to be linked to school performance, tying a school’s federal aid access to its students’ earnings after graduating the program.
ChatGPT and other AI chatbots can be powerful natural language tools, especially when you know how to prompt. You can use ChatGPT to save money on travel, plan your weekly meal prep or even help pivot your career.
While I’m a fan, I also know the limitations of ChatGPT, and you should too, whether you’re a newbie or an old hand. It’s fun for trying out new recipes, learning a foreign language or planning a vacation, but you don’t want to give ChatGPT carte blanche in your life. It’s not great at everything — in fact, it can be downright sketchy at a lot of things.
ChatGPT sometimes hallucinates information and passes it off as fact, and it may not always have up-to-date information. It’s incredibly confident, even when it’s straight up wrong. (The same can be said about other generative AI tools, too, of course.)
That matters the higher the stakes get, like when taxes, medical bills, court dates or bank balances enter the chat. If you’re unsure about when turning to ChatGPT might be risky, here are 11 scenarios when you should put down the AI and choose another option. Don’t use ChatGPT for any of the following.
(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, the parent company of CNET, in April filed a lawsuit against ChatGPT maker OpenAI, alleging it infringed Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)
1. Diagnosing physical health issues
I’ve definitely fed ChatGPT my symptoms out of curiosity, but the answers that come back can read like your worst nightmare. As you pore through potential diagnoses, you could swing from dehydration and the flu to some type of cancer. I have a lump on my chest and entered that information into ChatGPT. Lo and behold, it told me I may have cancer. Awesome! In fact, I have a lipoma, which is not cancerous and occurs in 1 in every 1,000 people. My licensed doctor told me that.
I’m not saying there are no good uses of ChatGPT for health: It can help you draft questions for your next appointment, translate medical jargon and organize a symptom timeline so you can walk in better prepared. And that could help make doctor visits less overwhelming. However, AI can’t order labs or examine you, and it definitely doesn’t carry malpractice insurance. Know its limits.
2. Taking care of your mental health
ChatGPT can offer grounding techniques, sure, but it can’t pick up the phone when you’re in real trouble with your mental health. I know some people use ChatGPT as a substitute therapist. CNET’s Corin Cesaric found it mildly helpful for working through grief, as long as she kept its limits front of mind. But as someone who has a very real, very human therapist, I can tell you that ChatGPT is still really only a pale imitation at best, and incredibly risky at worst.
ChatpGPT doesn’t have lived experience, can’t read your body language or tone, and has zero capacity for genuine empathy. It can only simulate it. A licensed therapist operates under legal mandates and professional codes that protect you from harm. ChatGPT doesn’t. Its advice can misfire, overlook red flags or unintentionally reinforce biases baked into its training data. Leave the deeper work — the hard, messy, human work — to an actual human who is trained to properly handle it. If you or someone you love is in crisis, please dial 988 in the US, or your local hotline.
3. Making immediate safety decisions
If your carbon-monoxide alarm starts chirping, please don’t open ChatGPT and ask it if you’re in real danger. I’d go outside first and ask questions later. Large language models can’t smell gas, detect smoke or dispatch an emergency crew. In a crisis, every second you spend typing is a second you’re not evacuating or dialing 911. ChatGPT can only work with the scraps of info you feed it, and in an emergency, it may be too little and too late. So treat your chatbot as a postincident explainer, never a first responder.
4. Getting personalized financial or tax planning
ChatGPT can explain what an ETF is, but it doesn’t know your debt-to-income ratio, state tax bracket, filing status, deductions, retirement goals or risk appetite. Because its training data may stop short of the current tax year, and of the latest rate hikes, its guidance may well be stale when you hit enter.
I have friends who dump their 1099 totals into ChatGPT for a DIY return. The chatbot simply can’t replace a CPA who can catch a hidden deduction worth a few hundred dollars or flag a mistake that could cost you thousands. When real money, filing deadlines, and IRS penalties are on the line, call a professional, not AI. Also, be aware that anything you share with an AI chatbot will probably become part of its training data, and that includes your income, your Social Security number and your bank routing information.
5. Dealing with confidential or regulated data
As a tech journalist, I see embargoes land in my inbox every day, but I’ve never thought about tossing any of these press releases into ChatGPT to get a summary or further explanation. That’s because if I did, that text would leave my control and land on a third-party server outside the guardrails of my nondiscloure agreement.
The same risk applies to client contracts, medical charts or anything covered by the California Consumer Privacy Act, HIPAA, the GDPR or plain old trade-secret law. It applies to your income taxes, birth certificate, driver’s license and passport. Once sensitive information is in the prompt window, you can’t guarantee where it’s stored, who can review it internally or whether it may be used to train future models. ChatGPT also isn’t immune to hackers and security threats. If you wouldn’t paste it into a public Slack channel, don’t paste it into ChatGPT.
6. Doing anything illegal
This one is self-explanatory.
7. Cheating on schoolwork
I’d be lying if I said I never cheated on my exams. In high school, I used my first-generation iPod Touch to sneak a peek at a few cumbersome equations I had difficulty memorizing in AP calculus, a stunt I’m not particularly proud of. But with AI, the scale of modern cheating makes that look remarkably tame.
Turnitin and similar detectors are getting better at spotting AI-generated prose every semester, and professors can already hear “ChatGPT voice” a mile away (thanks for ruining my beloved em dash). Suspension, expulsion and getting your license revoked are real risks. It’s best to use ChatGPT as a study buddy, not a ghostwriter. You’re also just cheating yourself out of an education if you have ChatGPT do the work for you.
8. Monitoring information and breaking news
Since OpenAI rolled out ChatGPT Search in late 2024 (and opened it to everyone in February 2025), the chatbot can fetch fresh web pages, stock quotes, gas prices, sports scores and other real-time numbers the moment you ask, complete with clickable citations so you can verify the source. However, it won’t stream continual updates on its own. Every refresh needs a new prompt, so when speed is critical, live data feeds, official press releases, news sites, push alerts and streaming coverage are still your best bet.
9. Gambling
I’ve actually had luck with ChatGPT and hitting a three-way parlay during the NCAA men’s basketball championship, but I would never recommend it to anyone. I’ve seen ChatGPT hallucinate and provide incorrect information on player statistics, misreported injuries and win-loss records. I only cashed out because I double-checked every claim against real-time odds, and even then I got lucky. ChatGPT can’t see tomorrow’s box score, so don’t rely on it solely to get you that win.
10. Drafting a will or other legally binding contract
ChatGPT is great for breaking down basic concepts. If you want to know more about a revocable living trust, ask away. However, the moment you ask it to draft actual legal text, you’re rolling the dice. Estate and family-law rules vary by state, and sometimes even by county, so skipping a witness signature or omitting the notarization clause can get your whole document tossed. Let ChatGPT help you build a checklist of questions for your lawyer, then pay that lawyer to turn that checklist into a document that stands up in court.
11. Making art
This isn’t an objective truth, just my own opinion, but I don’t believe AI should be used to create art. I’m not anti-artifical intelligence by any means. I use ChatGPT for brainstorming new ideas and help with my headlines, but that’s supplementation, not substitution. By all means, use ChatGPT, but please don’t use it to make art that you then pass off as your own. It’s kind of gross.
Frank Reynolds as The Golden Bachelor? A second Abbott Elementary crossover from the viewpoint of the Gang? The upcoming 17th season of It’s Always Sunny in Philadelphia looks as eventful as ever, and you can stream it all with a Hulu account.
The long-running sitcom returns this week after nearly two years away from screens. Season 17 will see Mac, Charlie, Dennis, Dee and Frank “return to shamelessly shed their ‘niche’ label for grander aspirations,” according to a press release. A trailer shows Frank being his unfiltered self alongside IRL reality dating host Jesse Palmer, plus Dennis getting smelly to appeal to women, ambulances, fires and other forms of chaos.
To see all the trouble the Gang gets into this season — and if Frank finds love on a TV show within a TV show — here are the release details for season 17.
When to watch season 17 of ‘It’s Always Sunny’ on Hulu
Episodes 1 and 2 of season 17 will air on FXX on July 9 and stream on Hulu the next day, July 10, according to FX. If you want to know Hulu drop dates for the rest of the season, here’s a full schedule.
Episode 1, The Gang F***s Up Abbott Elementary: Premieres on FXX on July 9 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu July 10.
Episode 2, Frank Is in a Coma: Premieres on FXX on July 9 after episode 1. Streams on Hulu July 10.
Episode 3, Mac and Dennis Become EMTs: Premieres on FXX on July 16 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu July 17.
Episode 4, Thought Leadership: A Corporate Conversation: Premieres on FXX on July 23 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu July 24.
Episode 5, The Gang Goes to a Dog Track: Premieres on FXX on July 30 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu July 31.
Episode 6, Overage Drinking: A National Concern: Premieres on FXX on Aug. 6 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu Aug. 7.
Episode 7, The Gang Gets Ready for Prime Time: Premieres on FXX on Aug. 13 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu Aug. 14.
Episode 8, The Golden Bachelor Live: Premieres on FXX on Aug. 20 at 9 p.m. ET/9 p.m. PT. Streams on Hulu Aug. 21.
If you’re OK with seeing some ads during your shows, you can sign up for Hulu for $10 per month, or $100 per year. You can avoid commercials with the more expensive version of Hulu, which is $19 per month with no annual payment option.
James Martin/CNET
You can get a standalone subscription to Hulu or bundle it with other services. You can choose a combo of a) Hulu and Disney Plus, b) Hulu, Disney Plus and ESPN Plus or c) Hulu, Disney Plus and Max. Hulu free trials and student discounts are also available.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s Mini Crossword took me much longer than usual. 6-Across and 5-Down look like the same clue, but note that question mark. It makes one of the clues a bit of a jokey answer. Need help with today’s Mini? Read on. If you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Gaping hole Answer: CHASM
6A clue: Conversation opener Answer: HELLO
7A clue: Group of five found in “Julia Roberts” and “Austin Powers” Answer: AEIOU
8A clue: Ben of Broadway Answer: PLATT
9A clue: “Keep it down!” Answer: SHH
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Bloke Answer: CHAP
2D clue: Inside part of a golf club Answer: HEEL
3D clue: A.k.a. name Answer: ALIAS
4D clue: Animal that talks comically slowly in “Zootopia” Answer: SLOTH
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Need some answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition? Sitting here in Seattle, I was proud to nail the yellow category immediately (I might have had to move if I didn’t get it right.) The green category wasn’t too tough, but the others were more difficult. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: The bluest skies you’ll ever see…
Green group hint: And now it’s pouring.
Blue group hint: Empire State hoops.
Purple group hint: QB’s CV.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Seattle teams.
Green group: Seen during a baseball rain delay.
Blue group: Members of the New York Liberty.
Purple group: Teams Baker Mayfield has played for.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is Seattle teams. The four answers are Kraken, Mariners, Reign and Seahawks.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is seen during a baseball rain delay. The four answers are grounds crew, lightning, ponchos and tarp.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is members of the New York Liberty. The four answers are Cloud, Ionescu, Jones and Stewart.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is teams Baker Mayfield has played for. The four answers are Browns, Buccaneers, Oklahoma and Texas Tech.
If deleting and reporting scam texts and phone calls has become part of your daily routine, there’s another simple way to protect yourself from fraud — and it may be more effective. Placing a fraud alert on your credit reports can prevent scammers from inflicting financial harm, and it’s easier to do than you think.
A recent CNET survey showed that as many as 96% of Americans are targeted by scammers each week, either by email, a phone call or text. And data from the Federal Trade Commission shows that financial losses due to fraud reached $12.5 billion in 2024 — a 25% increase from the year prior.
Reporting fraud is important for helping law enforcement catch criminals and inform the public about popular scams, but may not help as much on a personal level. Fraud alerts are specific to you and your credit reports, and they can warn you quickly that someone is using your personal info.
I placed fraud alerts on my credit reports with all three of the major credit reporting bureaus, and it only took about 10 minutes. Here’s how you can, too.
What can a fraud alert do?
Placing fraud alerts on your credit reports can prevent criminals from opening new accounts in your name. By setting up alerts with the three major credit bureaus (Experian, Equifax and TransUnion), you can add an extra layer of protection if a thief tries to open an account in your name.
The actual fraud alert is a message that appears on your credit reports that lenders can see. It lets them know that your sensitive information could be compromised, and to take extra steps to verify your identity.
It’s important to alert all of the credit bureaus — not just one — since a new account may not necessarily be reported to all three.
How credit report fraud alerts work depends on the type you set up, and there are three types to choose from. All three types of fraud alerts are free to set up, and the process only takes a few minutes from start to finish.
Initial fraud alert
Initial fraud alerts last for one year and alert businesses to check with you before a new account is opened in your name.
For example, if you or someone else tried to open a new credit card account, the card issuer would reach out to you to verify before approval. You can renew an initial fraud alert after the first year. Anyone can set up an initial fraud alert for any reason, even if they just worry they’ll be a victim of fraud.
Extended fraud alert
An extended fraud alert also ensures that businesses have to contact you before opening any new accounts in your name. However, these fraud alerts last for seven years instead of one, and they’re only available to people who have experienced identity theft and completed an FTC identity theft report at IdentityTheft.gov or filed a police report.
These alerts can also be renewed once the initial seven-year period ends.
Active duty alert
Active duty service members can use an active duty alert to protect their credit while they’re away. This type of alert lasts for one year automatically, but members can renew it for the length of their deployment after year one.
How to set up a fraud alert on your credit reports
You’ll need to set up fraud alerts with all three of the credit bureaus using the contact information below:
How to contact credit bureaus
Credit bureau
Phone number
Website
Equifax
800-685-1111
Equifax.com/personal/credit-report-services
Experian
888-397-3742
Experian.com/help
TransUnion
888-909-8872
TransUnion.com/credit-help
When you visit each of these pages, you’ll see the steps you can take to protect your credit and personal information.
For example, you’ll see options that let you freeze your credit reports completely or dispute incorrect information on your credit reports. You can also place a fraud alert on your credit reports.
From there, the process is fairly simple. Here’s what the Experian website looks like when you visit its credit help page:
Step 1: Select ‘fraud alerts,’ then create an account
When you click on “fraud alerts” on the Experian page, you’ll be prompted to create an account or sign into an existing Experian account.
If you create a new account, you’ll need to share personal information like your full name, address, employment, date of birth and Social Security number (SSN).
Step 2: Choose the type of fraud alert
Once you log into your account, you can choose the type of fraud alert you want: an initial fraud alert, an extended fraud alert or an active duty alert. Since I hadn’t been a victim of identity theft so far, I opted to open initial fraud alerts that last for one year on my credit reports.
Step 3: Confirm your phone number
This step requires you to verify your phone number, which should match the number they have on file from when you created your account.
Step 4: Place the fraud alert
Once you verify your phone number, the fraud alert is placed on your credit report automatically in seconds. Experian also says it will notify the other credit bureaus when a fraud alert is placed, but just in case, it’s a good idea to contact Equifax and TransUnion yourself. Experian will also automatically remove your name and address from pre-screened offer lists for six months.
You can remove a fraud alert with any of the credit bureaus using the same process. You’ll simply head to the bureau’s credit help page, navigate to the fraud alerts section, and choose the option to manage your alerts. From there, you can remove the fraud alert with just a few clicks.
How to act on a fraud alert
If you set up a fraud alert on your credit reports and you’re notified someone else is trying to open an account in your name, this is a sign someone may have your sensitive personal information.
This could be the result of a phishing scam or a criminal hacking into your accounts. Criminals getting hold of your sensitive personal details can also be the result of a major data breach.
Maintain the fraud alert and renew as needed. If you were notified someone else was trying to open an account in your name and had the chance to stop it due to your fraud alert, the process worked. You can continue protecting yourself by renewing your fraud alert each time it is set to expire.
Freeze your credit reports. Another more drastic step involves freezing your credit reports with all three credit bureaus. A freeze prevents new accounts, full stop. If you want to open a new credit card or take out a loan and your credit is frozen, you’ll need to temporarily unfreeze your credit reports first.
Sign up for identity theft monitoring. You can also sign up for identity theft protection services, which can notify you if someone tries to open an account in your name and about other changes to your credit. These services tend to offer up to $1 million in identity theft insurance as well as other perks.
Can you add a fraud alert if your credit is frozen?
You can set up a fraud alert on your credit reports if your credit is already frozen, but you don’t need to. Freezing your credit is more severe than setting up a fraud alert since it prevents anyone from opening a new account in your name (including you). Freezes are also indefinite, compared to fraud alerts that typically last a year.
When you freeze your credit reports, you have to take steps to temporarily unfreeze your reports if you want to apply for a credit card or a loan. Fortunately, all three credit bureaus let you set a specific time for your credit to be unfrozen, such as 24 or 36 hours, so you can apply for new credit before your reports are frozen again.
Looking for the most recent Strands answer? Click here for our daily Strands hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
The theme of today’s NYT Strands puzzle isn’t terribly tough, but at least one of the words is unusual and really, really long to unscramble. If you need hints and answers, read on.
I go into depth about the rules for Strands in this story.
If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections and Mini Crossword answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: NYT Connections Turns 1: These Are the 5 Toughest Puzzles So Far
Hint for today’s Strands puzzle
Today’s Strands theme is: Every second counts.
If that doesn’t help you, here’s a clue: Does anybody really know what time it is?
Clue words to unlock in-game hints
Your goal is to find hidden words that fit the puzzle’s theme. If you’re stuck, find any words you can. Every time you find three words of four letters or more, Strands will reveal one of the theme words. These are the words I used to get those hints but any words of four or more letters that you find will work:
These are the answers that tie into the theme. The goal of the puzzle is to find them all, including the spangram, a theme word that reaches from one side of the puzzle to the other. When you have all of them (I originally thought there were always eight but learned that the number can vary), every letter on the board will be used. Here are the nonspangram answers:
CLOCK, WATCH, SUNDIAL, HOURGLASS, CHRONOMETER
Today’s Strands spangram
The completed NYT Strands puzzle for July 5, 2025, #489.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Today’s Strands spangram is TIMEKEEPERS. To find it, look for the T that’s four letters down on the far left, and wind across.
What is the best internet provider in Glendale, California?
For a city located in one of the most populous counties in the US, Glendale, California, has somewhat limited options in terms of home internet. Thankfully, the providers that service this Los Angeles suburb are some of the best in the nation. The best internet provider in Glendale is AT&T Fiber, and it’s arguably the best internet provider in the country. AT&T Fiber offers symmetrical upload and download speeds, straightforward pricing and unlimited data on all plans.
Only about 20% of Glendale residents have access to AT&T’s fiber internet. But Spectrum is another top option that’s available nearly everywhere in Glendale. However, its upload speeds are significantly lower and prices increase by $30 after one or two years. T-Mobile Home Internet and Verizon 5G Internet are also options worth considering, especially if you already have a phone line with one of them, as eligible mobile customers can enjoy some solid discounts on home internet.
Top internet providers in Glendale
When AT&T Fiber is available in a city, it’s almost always our top pick for internet in the area. Only around 20% of homes in Glendale can access the service. For everyone else, Spectrum is a fine option, with fast speeds — and a track record of actually delivering them — and reasonable prices.
Overview of Glendale internet providers
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Air Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60
90-300Mbps
None
None
None
6.9
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
$10 (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($40-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$75 ($35-$60 with eligible phone plan)
50-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available Glendale residential internet providers
Our top picks are your best bets for internet in Glendale, but if you can’t get the service you’re looking for, there are a few other options to consider:
Satellite internet: You can get satellite internet at almost every address in the country, but it’s only worthwhile as a last resort in rural areas with no other options. HughesNet and Viasat are the traditional satellite options; both require two-year contracts and come with low speeds, high prices and stingy data caps. The newer Starlink service from SpaceX gets you faster speeds, but you have to pay $349 up front for equipment and plans start at $120 a month.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Like T-Mobile Home Internet, Verizon uses its extensive cellphone network to transmit internet wirelessly to your home. It has two different plans available, with speeds going up to 250Mbps at some addresses.
Thomas De Wever/Getty Images
Pricing info on Glendale home internet service
Starting prices for internet in Glendale average around $51 monthly. That’s slightly above other California cities CNET has covered; nearby Los Angeles enjoys average starting prices of just $38. There aren’t any true “budget” options for internet in Glendale unless you bundle internet and cellphone service through Verizon or T-Mobile.
Cheapest internet plans in Glendale
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Contract
Spectrum Internet Advantage Read full review
$30
100Mbps
$10 (optional)
None
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$50
500Mbps
$10 (optional)
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($40 with eligible mobile plans)
318Mbps
None
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible phone plan)
300Mbps
None
None
AT&T Fiber Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
None
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How many members of your household use the internet?
How fast is Glendale broadband?
Glendale residents have a few options for ultrafast internet in the area. Spectrum and Verizon all offer “gig speed” plans — download speeds above 940Mbps — which is the gold standard for fast internet. Only AT&T Fiber offers symmetrical download and upload speeds.
Fastest internet plans in Glendale
Provider
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Starting price
Data cap
Contract
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
$245
None
None
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
$145
None
None
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
$70
None
None
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
$80
None
None
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Glendale?
For a city located within such a large metropolitan area, Glendale has surprisingly few options for internet. Spectrum offers the best combination of value and availability, but upload speeds are low and prices increase after one or two years. AT&T Fiber is the best provider in the area by a long shot, but only around 20% of residents can get it. T-Mobile Home Internet is another affordable option, but it’s best for smaller households.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Glendale
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. What’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
This guide leverages an in-house artificial intelligence tool called RAMP, which is trained on our own writing and uses our database to generate content about specific internet service providers that our writers can use in determining and presenting our picks for a given guide. Check CNET’s AI policy for more information about how our teams use (and don’t use) AI tools.
Because our database is not exhaustive, we go to the FCC’s website to check the primary data for ourselves and make sure we’re considering every ISP that provides service in an area. Plans and prices also vary by location, so we input local addresses on provider websites to find the specific options available to residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of the time of our pre-publication fact-check.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. To explore our process in more depth, you can visit our how we test ISPs page.
Internet providers in Glendale FAQs
What is the best internet service provider in Glendale?
Spectrum is the best internet provider for most people in Glendale. It offers download speeds up to 1,000Mbps, no contracts and unlimited data on all plans. AT&T Fiber is an even better value, but it’s not widely available in the city. T-Mobile Home Internet is another good option, with download speeds up to 415Mbps and no data caps.
What is the cheapest internet provider in Glendale?
Spectrum’s 100Mbps is priced at $30, making it the cheapest plan in the area. Just be aware of the significant price increases after one year. There are two internet providers in Glendale with starting prices of $50 a month. For that price, you’ll get download speeds up to 250Mbps through Verizon and 318Mbps through T-Mobile.
Since its arrival in 2014, Alexa has changed drastically from the voice assistant that was originally released. Instead of being an easier way to trigger music, or add to your to-do list, it’s now an effective tool for managing all the different parts of your busy life. With the addition of new AI-powered features from Alexa Plus, your favorite voice assistant is more capable than ever.
From organizing your schedule to controlling smart devices, Alexa can help simplify your daily routine and bring a new level of convenience to your space. Whether you want to automate chores, manage your Fire TV, or just streamline your mornings, these advanced voice commands make Alexa a compelling tool in any connected home. If you haven’t explored what it can do lately, now’s a good time to see how much more useful it’s become with AI-powered features now available.
Though a recent CNET survey found that 73% of US adults using home voice assistants have privacy concerns about AI integrations, Alexa was the most trusted voice assistant among respondents.
Want to unlock Alexa’s full potential? You just need to learn the right commands. If you have an Echo device at home, here’s a complete guide to all the voice commands worth trying.
Newest Amazon Alexa commands
Amazon recently launched Alexa Plus, a major AI-powered upgrade to its voice assistant. This new version brings significantly improved conversational abilities and smart home control. The upgrade costs $19.99 monthly but is free for Amazon Prime subscribers. The upgraded system, first demoed back in 2023, can handle more complex requests, remember personal details and perform multiple actions through natural conversation. With these spring cleaning and organization features, Alexa+ aims to make managing your home more intuitive than ever. Notable new commands include:
“Alexa, remember my frequent flyer number is 123456789” allows Alexa+ to store important personal details for future reference. You can replace the “xxx” with any personal information you want it to store.
“Alexa, play the music upstairs” or “Alexa, play music everywhere except the baby’s room” enables seamless music control across multiple rooms.
“Alexa, I’m chilly” demonstrates how Alexa+ can now understand implied commands, automatically turning up your thermostat without direct instructions.
“Alexa, show me all the footage of the dogs in the backyard this week” integrates with Ring’s Smart Video Search to find specific moments in your security footage.
“Alexa, what’s playing now on Fire TV?” connects your Echo devices with your Fire TV for enhanced media control.
Watch this: Amazon’s Alexa Gets More Conversational With AI
Prior to that, Amazon had announced new hardware products while also talking up a few new additions to the already vast Alexa commands library, including:
The “Hey, Disney” command, which allows you to get information and play around with some of Disney’s most beloved characters, will unlock features with Disney’s Magic Band Plus to play game-show style trivia games and more.
With the new premium $35 Alexa Voice Remote Pro, you can say “Alexa, find my remote” into any Echo device you own (or the dedicated Remote Finder button in the Fire TV app) to play a sound from your remote, making it easier to find when it’s lost.
The 3rd-gen Fire TV Cube also has a few new Alexa commands, like “Alexa, watch ESPN on cable” so that you don’t have to manually change inputs on your TV, and if you have a compatible webcam that you can connect into the Fire TV Cube, you can say something like “Alexa, call dad” to video call friends and family on your TV.
Amazon also announced the second-generation Amazon Echo Auto, which drivers can use to play music, make calls and even talk with an agent to request help by saying, “Hey Alexa, call roadside assistance.”
If you’re into shopping, you can say something like “Alexa, show me the green-pleated skirt” to find specific clothing items using the Shop the Look feature, which you can also use for home and beauty products.
Using Amazon to make purchases from Whole Foods for curbside pickup? You can say “Alexa, check into Whole Foods” to let the grocery store know you’re there.
And if you want to turn on a light or some other smart home device, you can now schedule it. For example, you can say “Hey Alexa, turn off the kitchen lights in 5 minutes.”
Summoning Alexa
By default, Amazon’s connected speakers all have the same wake word. To cue up a request, just say, “Alexa.” You can change the wake word to something else if, say, your own name is Alexa, or you’d just prefer an alternative. You can also trigger your smart assistant with Amazon, Echo or Computer. To change it, in the Alexa app go to Settings then Device Settings then select the Echo device you’d like to change the wake word on (you have to change each device’s settings individually).
If you have an Amazon Tap, Dash Wand or the Amazon Fire TV voice remote, you’ll need to press a button to wake Alexa. Amazon updated the Tap with a hands-free mode that you must enable in the settings. The only wake word available to the Amazon Tap is Alexa.
There’s also a feature called Follow-Up Mode that makes it easier and faster to issue multiple commands to Alexa without having to keep repeating the wake word, if you enable it. When you do, Alexa will continue to listen for another command after it’s completed your first request. You can keep issuing more commands until you’re done or you say, “Stop.”
Amazon has also built on this a multiple commands feature by allowing you to string two related commands into one. You can say something like, “Alexa, play folk music at volume six,” or, “Alexa, add bread, milk and eggs to my shopping list.”
Your Echo device can be convenient in the kitchen, the living room or anywhere for that matter.
Amazon
Other places you can access Alexa
While the most obvious or natural way to use Alexa may be through an Echo speaker from Amazon, it’s not the only way you can call up Amazon’s digital assistant.
In fact, there are more and more ways to access Alexa being created all the time, and you don’t even need any specialized devices. Here are some of the most prominent ways to use Alexa with the devices you already have:
You can enable the mobile apps to listen for Alexa when they’re open (this will, however, disable your phone from listening for its native digital assistant’s wake word — i.e. “Hey, Siri” or “Hey, Google” won’t work while you have the Alexa app open). Otherwise, you can tap the Alexa icon to call up the assistant.
On an updated Windows computer, you can summon Cortana and say, “Open Alexa.” After the initial connection is made, saying this will cue up Amazon’s assistant through Cortana.
Alexa Echo Auto allows you to connect your phone to Alexa in your car. The Echo Auto is capable of carrying out many of the same commands and features as your home device, but with some restrictions (it won’t unlock your doors, for example).
The complete list of Alexa commands
The list of Alexa commands is expansive and grows with every new service or device it supports. Alexa isn’t perfect, but it’s pretty great at understanding natural language, so you don’t always have to speak the commands exactly as you see them below. Many commands work when worded several different ways or even with words omitted.
When you consider the possible third-party commands through Skills — essentially the apps of Amazon’s Alexa — the list goes on even further. To learn what individual skills are capable of, visit the skill’s page from the Amazon Alexa app or alexa.amazon.com.
Here are all the native Alexa commands.
Basic Alexa commands
Ask for help: “Alexa, help.”
Mute or unmute: “Alexa, mute” or, “Alexa, unmute.”
Stop or pause: “Alexa, stop” or, “Alexa, shut up.”
Change volume: “Alexa, set the volume to 5,” “Alexa, louder” or, “Alexa, turn up/down the volume.”
Alexa commands for Echo Show
The Echo Show devices and Echo Spot are the only Echo speakers with touchscreen displays. This means you can tell them to show you things.
Ask for what the Echo Show can display: “Alexa, what can you show me?”
Show your calendar: “Alexa, show my calendar.”
Show pictures: “Alexa, show my photos” or, “Alexa, show me pictures of cats.”
View your cameras or other rooms: “Alexa, show the living room camera.”
View movie trailers: “Alexa, show me the trailer for Wakanda Forever.”
Movie showtimes: “Alexa, show me movie showtimes.”
View the forecast: “Alexa, show me the weekend forecast.”
Play YouTube videos: “Alexa, show me travel videos on YouTube.”
Display recipes: “Alexa, show me a slow cooker recipe from Allrecipes.”
View your Flash Briefing: “Alexa, play my video Flash Briefing.”
See your timers: “Alexa, show me my timers.”
Open a visual skill: “Alexa, open Uber.”
You can ask your Echo show to show you things using voice commands.
Chris Monroe/CNET
Alexa commands for Fire TV and Fire TV Stick
You can now use compatible Echo devices (Echo, Echo Dot, Echo Look, Echo Show and Amazon Tap) to control your Fire TV and Fire TV Sticks.
Control Fire TV: “Alexa, [pause, play, resume, stop, fast-forward, rewind] on Fire TV.”
Search movies or TV: “Alexa, search for [movie to TV show title] on Fire TV” or, “Alexa, find [movie or TV show title] on Fire TV.”
Find work by a certain actor: “Alexa, show me titles with [actor] on Fire TV.”
Open apps: “Alexa, open [app name] on Fire TV” or, “Alexa, launch [app name] on Fire TV.”
Return home: “Alexa, return home.”
Alexa commands for Fire TV Edition televisions
Amazon also builds its Fire TV operating system into televisions like the Element EL4KAMZ17 series. All of the commands above work on those too, in addition to a few TV-specific commands below.
Turn on or off the TV: “Alexa, turn on Fire TV” or, “Alexa, turn off Fire TV.”
Change the volume of Fire TV: “Alexa, set the volume to [level] on Fire TV” or, “Alexa, turn [up/down] the volume on Fire TV.”
Mute Fire TV: “Alexa, [mute/unmute] Fire TV.”
Change the channel when watching an antenna: “Alexa, go to [channel or network name] on Fire TV.”
Change inputs: “Alexa, switch to PlayStation on Fire TV” or, “Alexa, switch to HDMI 1 on Fire TV.”
Open antenna program guide: “Alexa, open TV guide on Fire TV.”
Alexa commands also work with Fire TV products.
Sarah Tew/CNET
Alexa commands to control media
Adjust audio settings: “Alexa, set the bass to four.”
Play music: “Alexa, play some music.”
Play music on other (or multiple) Alexa devices: “Alexa, play [artist/album/song/genre] in the living room” or, “Alexa, play [music] everywhere.”
Cue specific song or artist: “Alexa, play music by [artist].”
Play a song based on context: “Alexa, play the latest Avett Brothers album” or, “Alexa, play that song that goes ‘Gotta gotta be down, because I want it all.'”
Play music based on a theme: “Alexa, play baby-making music” or, “Alexa, play rock music for working.”
Play the song of the day: “Alexa, play the song of the day.”
Play Spotify music: “Alexa, play on Spotify.”
Play Pandora station: “Alexa, play [artist] station on Pandora.”
Play a radio station: “Alexa, play [radio station call letters, example: WEBN].”
Play an audiobook: “Alexa, play Ultimate Alexa Command Guide: 200+ Voice Commands to Take Control of Your Echo Devices on Audible,” “Alexa, read Ultimate Alexa Command Guide: 200+ Voice Commands to Take Control of Your Echo Devices” or, “Alexa, play the book, Ultimate Alexa Command Guide: 200+ Voice Commands to Take Control of Your Echo Devices.”
Resume the last played audiobook: “Alexa, resume my book.”
Skip audiobook chapters: “Alexa, next chapter” or, “Alexa, previous chapter.”
Play a bedtime story: “Alexa, open Storytime.”
Listen to Alexa read you a Kindle book: “Alexa, read my Kindle book.”
Set a sleep timer: “Alexa set a sleep timer for 45 minutes” or, “Alexa, stop playing in 45 minutes.”
Song information: “Alexa, what’s playing?”
Music controls: “Alexa, play” or, “Alexa, next.”
Control music playback on another Alexa speaker: “Alexa, stop in the kitchen” or, “Alexa, next in the office.”
Restart song: “Alexa, restart.”
Add a song to your Prime Music library: “Alexa, add this song.”
Create a playlist in Amazon Music: “Alexa, create a new playlist,” or, “Alexa, create a ‘Friday Chill’ playlist.”
Add a song to a playlist in Amazon Music: “Alexa, add this song to my playlist,” or, “Alexa, add this to my playlist.”
Like or dislike a song on Pandora and iHeartRadio: “Alexa, I like this song” or, “Alexa, thumbs down.”
Start Amazon Music Unlimited trial: “Alexa, start my free trial of Amazon Music Unlimited.”
“Alexa, wake me up every day at 8 a.m. to music” allows users to set their mornings off right with music from Pandora, Spotify, TuneIn, iHeartRadio and Vevo.
Alexa commands to control time and dates
Set an alarm: “Alexa, set an alarm for 7 a.m.” or, “Alexa, wake me up at 7 in the morning.”
Set a music alarm: “Alexa, wake me up to [artist, song, genre, playlist or album] at 8 a.m.,” “Alexa, set an alarm to Band of Horses” or, “Alexa, wake me up to Kiss FM on TuneIn.”
Set a repeating alarm: “Alexa, set a repeating alarm for weekdays at 7 a.m.”
Set a timer: “Alexa, timer” or, “Alexa, set a timer for 15 minutes.”
Set a music timer: “Alexa, set a 15-minute timer to My Heart will Go On”
Create a named timer: “Alexa, set a pizza timer for 20 minutes.”
Set multiple timers: “Alexa, set a second timer for 5 minutes.”
Check timer status: “Alexa, how much time is left on the pizza timer?” or, “Alexa, what are my timers?”
Cancel a timer: “Alexa, cancel the pizza timer” or, “Alexa, cancel the 15-minute timer.”
Ask the time: “Alexa, what time is it?”
Ask the date: “Alexa, what’s the date?”
Ask when the next alarm is: “Alexa, when’s my next alarm?”
Cancel an alarm: “Alexa, cancel my alarm for 2 p.m.”
Snooze alarm: “Alexa, snooze.”
Check dates: “Alexa, when is [holiday] this year?”
Alexa commands for calls and messaging
You can make calls and leave voicemails to other Echo users, as well as “Drop In” to your own echo devices, either to voice or video chat with whoever’s in the room (or just to monitor the space like a security camera). If you have an Android, you can send text messages with Alexa.
Call another Echo user: “Alexa, call [name].”
Answer an incoming call: “Alexa, answer the call” or, “Alexa, answer.”
Hang up: “Alexa, hang up” or, “Alexa, end the call.”
Message another Echo user: “Alexa, message [name]” or, “Alexa, send [name] a message.”
Play messages: “Alexa, play messages.”
Send an SMS: “Alexa, send an SMS to [contact name]” or, “Alexa, send an SMS.”
Use Drop In on one of your own devices: “Alexa, drop in on the living room.”
Drop In on another user (requires the other user to allow you to Drop In anytime): “Alexa, drop in on [name].”
Turn off the video during an ongoing call (only works with Echo Show): “Alexa, turn video off.”
Make an announcement: “Alexa, announce it’s dinner time,” “Alexa, broadcast it’s time to go” or, “Alexa, tell everyone good night.”
Number check: “Alexa, open phone number check” → “tell me about 301-555-5555” or “please provide information about 301-555-5555.”
Alexa commands for purchasing
Reorder essentials from Amazon: “Alexa, buy more deodorant” or, “Alexa, reorder deodorant.”
Track packages from Amazon: “Alexa, where’s my stuff?” or, “Alexa, track my order.”
Order an Amazon Alexa device: “Alexa, order an Echo,” “Alexa, order an Echo Dot” or, “Alexa, order an Amazon Tap.”
Add an item to your cart: “Alexa, add garbage bags to my cart.”
Order an Uber or Lyft with their skills: “Alexa, ask Uber to request a ride” or, “Alexa, ask Lyft for a ride.”
While listening to music in Amazon Music: “Alexa, buy this song” or, “Alexa, buy this album.”
Find new music to purchase: “Alexa, shop for new music by [artist].”
Purchase a song or album from an artist: “Alexa, buy [song or album] by [artist].”
Ask about deals: “Alexa, what are your deals?”
For good recommendations on products, Alexa has you covered. Just say “Alexa, find me a good smartphone on Amazon,” and it will find products based on Amazon customer ratings and reviews.
Control purchases, shopping lists and notifications with your Echo device.
Chris Monroe/CNET
Alexa commands to control notifications
To turn on notifications, open the Alexa app and select to Settings,then Notifications, then Shopping Notifications and toggle it on. Your Echo speakers will light up yellow when you have new notifications.
Check missed notifications: “Alexa, what did I miss?” “Alexa, read my notifications” or, “Alexa, what are my notifications?”
Navigate through notifications: “Alexa, next” or, “Alexa, previous.”
Delete notifications: “Alexa, delete all of my notifications.”
Alexa commands for to-do and shopping lists
Add task to to-do list: “Alexa, add ‘go to the grocery store’ to my to-do list” or, “Alexa, I need to make an appointment with the doctor.”
Create a new to-do item: “Alexa, create a to-do.”
Check calendar events: “Alexa, what’s on my calendar for tomorrow?”
Add an event to a calendar: “Alexa, add [event] to my calendar for [day] at [time]” or, “Alexa, add an event to my calendar.”
Move a calendar event: “Alexa, move my meeting from 12 to 3.”
Create a shopping list: “Alexa, add eggs to my shopping list” or, “Alexa, I need to buy laundry detergent.”
Check your shopping list: “Alexa, what’s on my shopping list?”
Create a reminder: “Alexa, reminder” or, “Alexa, remind me to check the oven in 5 minutes.”
Check on existing reminders: “Alexa, what are my reminders this weekend?” or, “Alexa, what reminders do I have tomorrow?”
Donate money to your favorite charity by saying “Alexa, make a donation to American Cancer Institute Inc.” or any number of approved charities.
Want to check your American Express balance? Just say “Alexa, open Amex,” and look at your account.
Alexa commands for news and weather
Ask for your Flash Briefing: “Alexa, what’s my Flash Briefing?”
Add music news to your Flash Briefing: “Alexa, enable Today in Music.”
Check headlines: “Alexa, what’s in the news?”
Check weather: “Alexa, what’s the weather like?” or, “Alexa, will it rain today?” You can also ask “Alexa, will I need an umbrella today?”
Get a weather forecast: “Alexa, what’s the weather going to be like this weekend?
Get traffic information: “Alexa, what’s my commute look like?” or, “Alexa, what’s traffic like?”
Entertainment-related Alexa commands
Find movies in nearby theaters: “Alexa, what movies are playing?” or, “Alexa, what action movies are playing tonight?”
Get information on movies playing: “Alexa, tell me about the movie Ultimate Alexa Command Guide: 200+ Voice Commands to Take Control of Your Echo Devices.”
Get movie quotes: “Give me a [movie] quote.”
Get IMDb rating: “Alexa, what is the IMDb rating for [movie or TV show]?”
Get casting for a movie or show: “Alexa, who plays in [movie or TV show]?”
Find out who an actor is: “Alexa, who plays [character] in [movie or TV show]?”
Find an actor’s latest work: “Alexa, what is [actor]’s latest movie?”
Find out who sings a particular song: “Who sings the song Ultimate Alexa Command Guide: 200+ Voice Commands to Take Control of Your Echo Devices?”
Get the names of band members: “Who is in the band [name]?”
Get album information: “What year did [band] release [song or album]?”
Find popular music from an artist: “Alexa, what’s popular from [artist]?”
Sample music from an artist: “Alexa, sample songs by [artist].”
Find a particular album or song: “Alexa, find [song or album] by [artist].”
Alexa can answer all of your music and movie-related questions.
Amazon
Alexa commands for food and businesses
Get a recipe: “Alexa, how do you make chocolate chip cookies?”
Discover nearby restaurants: “Alexa, find me a nearby pizza restaurant” or, “Alexa, what’s the nearest coffee shop?”
Get operating hours or a phone number for local businesses: “Alexa, find the address for Bank of America” or, “Alexa, find business hours for Harris Teeter.”
Saying “Alexa, open Wine Finder” lets Alexa help you match the best vino with your meal. If you tell Alexa you’re eating shrimp, it will tell you the best wine.
Alexa commands for help with math
Convert units: “Alexa, how many [units] are in [units]?”
Convert units: “Alexa, how many [units] are in 2 [units]?”
Basic math: “Alexa, what’s 5 plus 7?” or, “Alexa, what’s 56 times 33?”
Advanced math: “Alexa, 70 factorial.” (Warning: Alexa will list numbers you didn’t know existed for about a minute.)
Alexa commands that can settle a score
Roll a die: “Alexa, roll a die” or, “Alexa, roll a 26-sided die.”
Flip a coin: “Alexa, flip a coin.”
Pick a number: “Alexa, pick a number between 1 and 50.”
Kids can ask Alexa to play parent-approved music and stories with the Echo Dot Kids Edition.
Julie Snyder
Alexa commands for help with definitions and spelling
Get the definition of a word: “Alexa, what’s the definition of [word]?”
Get the spelling of a word: “Alexa, how do you spell [word]?”
Sports-related Alexa commands
Check the results of a finished game: “Alexa, what was the score of the [team] game?”
Ask if a team won: “Alexa, did the [team] win?”
Ask when the next game is scheduled: “Alexa, when do the [team] play next?”
Find out the results of your favorite teams: “Alexa, give me my Sports Update.”
Get Fantasy Football update with the Yahoo Fantasy Football skill: “Alexa, ask Yahoo Fantasy Football for a score update” or, “Alexa, ask Yahoo Fantasy Football if Patrick Mahomes is playing this week.”
Get league standings: “Alexa, what are the MLB standings?”
Alexa commands for Voicecast
Send current listening to a Fire tablet: “Alexa, send that to my Fire tablet.”
Send to a different profile’s Fire tablet: “Alexa, show this on [name]’s Fire tablet.”
Alexa commands for your smart home
Alexa can integrate with loads of smart home platforms, such as SmartThings, Philips Hue, Wink, Insteon, Lutron, Belkin WeMo and many more. Some require you to enable skills, and some don’t.
Here is a selection of the commands you can use for controlling your smart home, although there are dozens more.
Turn lights on or off: “Alexa, turn on the lights” or, “Alexa, turn off the living room lights.”
Dim the lights: “Alexa, dim the lights to 50%.”
Change the color of the lights: “Alexa, make the living room lights red” or, ” Alexa, turn the lights to soft white.”
Change the color temperature of the lights: “Alexa, make the kitchen lights a little warmer.”
Adjust temperature: “Alexa, raise the temperature 1 degree.”
Set temperature: “Alexa, set the temperature to 72.”
Lock your doors: “Alexa, lock my back door.”
Close your garage door: “Alexa, ask Garageio to close my garage.”
Discover smart home devices: “Alexa, discover my devices.”
Use IFTTT recipes: “Alexa, trigger [IFTTT recipe].”
Activate a scene (limited to Control4, Insteon, Lutron Caséta Wireless, Philips Hue, SmartThings and Wink): “Alexa, turn on Movie Time” or, “Alexa, turn on Bedtime.”
Control GE appliances with the Geneva skill: “Alexa, tell Geneva to preheat my oven to 400 degrees” or, “Alexa, ask Geneva if my laundry is dry.”
Locate a lost phone with the TrackR Lost My Phone skill: “Alexa, ask TrackR to find my phone.”
Control the TV via Harmony hub: “Alexa, turn on the TV” or, “Alexa, turn on Netflix.”
The Polk Command Bar has Alexa embedded in its soundbar that provides great sound quality.
Saying “Alexa, run Away Mode” produces conversations to scare off any potential burglars.
Alexa Guard can help keep your home safe by alerting you when it picks up the sounds of smoke alarms or breaking glass. It works with the Amazon smart door bell, a Ring and an ADT security system. To set this feature, simply say “Alexa, I’m leaving.”
Alexa can integrate with loads of smart home platforms and devices.
Josh Miller/CNET
Use Alexa commands with Bluetooth
Pair a Bluetooth device: “Alexa, pair” or “Alexa, Bluetooth.”
Connect to a Bluetooth device: “Alexa, connect to my phone.”
Disconnect from a Bluetooth device: “Alexa, disconnect from my phone.”
Alexa commands for profiles and user accounts
Switch profiles: “Alexa, switch accounts.”
Check which profile is active: “Alexa, which profile is this?”
Use Alexa commands with Skills
Skills are third-party applications for Alexa speakers. They allow you to connect third-party software and hardware to your speaker, as well as play games and add different news sources to your Flash Briefing. Originally, they had to be enabled before you could use them, but Amazon has since made that process automatic (just ask for the Skill and it will enable when it’s used).
Use a skill: “Alexa, open Earplay.”
Find kid’s skills: “Alexa, what kid’s skills do you have?
Enable skills: “Alexa, enable Jeopardy!”
Disable skills: “Alexa, disable Domino’s.”
Bartender skill gives you access to more than 12,000 cocktail recipes: “Alexa, open the bartender.”
Use Alexa commands with Cortana
Microsoft’s Cortana is available as a skill — but rather than just being a skill, it opens the door to a completely separate digital assistant through your Alexa speakers.
Once you’ve added the skill, enabled permissions and connected your Microsoft and Amazon accounts, just say, “Alexa, open Cortana.” When you’re speaking to Cortana you can check your emails, ask for the next event on your calendar or add items to your to-do list.
For now, the Cortana skill is limited because it’s a public preview of what the full integration will be in the future.
Search using Alexa commands
Get Wikipedia information: “Alexa, Wikipedia: [subject].”
Tell Alexa to continue reading a Wikipedia entry: “Alexa, tell me more.”
Ask a general question: “Alexa, how tall is [person or object’s name]?”
Ask Quora a question: “Alexa, ask Quora if crustaceans feel pain when you boil them.”
Get a Game of Thrones quote: “Alexa, give me a Game of Thrones quote.”
Whether it’s a bull or a bear market, you can check your stock values by saying, “Alexa, ask Opening Bell for Microsoft” (or any other publicly traded company).
Holiday-related Alexa commands
Find out when a holiday is: “Alexa, when is [holiday]?”
Holiday limerick: “Alexa, tell me a holiday limerick.”
Learn about a holiday: “Alexa, why do we celebrate [holiday]?”
Ask about Santa: “Alexa, how old is Santa Claus?” “Alexa, is Santa Claus real?” or, “Alexa, where does Santa Claus live?”
Ask about Santa’s reindeer: “Alexa, who’s your favorite reindeer?” “Alexa, what can you tell me about Santa’s reindeer?” or, “Alexa, what do you know about Rudolph the red-nosed reindeer?”
Track Santa: “Alexa, where is Santa?” or, “Alexa, track Santa.”
Sing a Christmas carol: “Alexa, sing a Christmas carol.”
Have Alexa read “The Night Before Christmas”: “Alexa, read “The Night Before Christmas.”
Spin the dreidel: “Alexa, spin the dreidel.”
Ask for holiday jokes: “Alexa, open my gift,” “Alexa, how ugly is your/my holiday sweater?” or, “Alexa, tell me a snowman joke.”
Ask for holiday movies?: “Alexa, what’s your favorite holiday movie?” or, “Alexa, what are the top holiday movies?”
Ring in the holiday season — or the spooky season — using you Echo devices.
Molly Price/CNET
Easter eggs for your Amazon Echo
Alexa comes chock-full of Easter eggs and jokes — the list is long. We cover the strange world of Alexa Easter eggs here, noting some of the more popular or prominent commands that prompt a snarky or humorous response.
“Alexa, give me an Easter egg.”
“Alexa, good morning.”
“Alexa, tell me a joke.”
“Alexa, beam me up.”
“Alexa, set phasers to kill.”
“Alexa. Tea. Earl Grey. Hot.”
“Alexa, my name is Inigo Montoya.”
“Alexa, I want the truth.”
“Alexa, party on, Wayne.”
“Alexa, show me the money.”
“Alexa, what’s the first (or second) rule of Fight Club?”
“Alexa, surely you can’t be serious.”
“Alexa, are you SkyNet?”
“Alexa, party time!”
“Alexa, open the pod bay doors.”
“Alexa, when am I going to die?”
“Alexa, what is your quest?”
“Alexa, nice to see you, to see you…”
“Alexa, don’t mention the war.”
“Alexa, this is a dead parrot.”
“Alexa, what is your cunning plan?”
For even more, check out this Reddit thread dedicated to Alexa Easter eggs.
The Fourth of July holiday weekend is here, and most people are excited for the extended time off and traveling. As a person who needs contacts, I’ve learned a couple of things to avoid doing if I want to enjoy my trip. The biggest offense I’m guilty of committing is accidentally sleeping in my contact lenses. This means I wake up with blurry vision, sticky lenses and dry eyes. Sleeping in lenses that aren’t intended for overnight use raises the risk of an eye infection and could cause other issues down the line, such as corneal damage or even loss of vision.
This can be a major problem when I’m traveling on a plane or in a car and trying to remove my contact lenses. Thankfully, one of my co-workers gave me important time-saving tips for removing my contacts safely and effortlessly. The trick is to do things in advance, before you get sleepy or busy. These tips are too good not to share, but you should know that these are for reusable contacts and not daily disposable lenses.
Read more: An Optometrist Shares 13 Mistakes You’re Making With Your Contact Lenses
4 items to travel with if you use contacts
Grab some contact cases, hand sanitizer and contact solution.
Katie Teague/CNET
Contact lens case
This is a must-have when you’re traveling anywhere. When you’re out, the last thing you want to risk happening is your contact lenses dry out or stay in your eyes too long.
Contact lens solution
Packing your solution is equally important. Contacts aren’t cheap, and ruining them can be a huge hassle. Not to mention, you’ll be wasting money as you replace things.
Hand sanitizer bottle
If you’re in a pinch and can’t wash your hands before removing your contacts, you can bring a bottle of hand sanitizer to clean your hands before pinching the contacts out of your eyes. Especially since you’ll be touching surfaces on the plane or while stopping for a snack or gas on the road. Even after the sanitizer has dried, however, you still may have some residual alcohol on your fingers, so if you have the option to wash your hands with soap and water, I recommend doing that.
A pair of eyeglasses
“Airplanes have quite dry air and even the most comfortable of contact lenses can become dry and irritating, especially on those long-haul flights,” Dr. Mika Moy, clinical professor at the Herbert Wertheim School of Optometry and Vision Science at the University of California Berkeley, told me. Instead, she said, “wear glasses on airplanes for better comfort and so you don’t have to worry about napping with your lenses on.” You can put your contacts back in when you’ve arrived at your destination.
Read more: 10 Eye Protection Hacks You Need to Know Before Spring and Summer
Trick for prepping contact lenses for travel
Guido Mieth/Getty Images
Before leaving for your trip, prep your contact lens case by cleaning it. Then fill each side about halfway with contact lens solution or the amount you normally use to fill up your case. Close the lids tightly to avoid any leaks, and store the case in a Ziploc bag inside a backpack or purse, where you’ll have easy access. You can fill multiple contact cases so that you’ll have a backup if anything goes wrong, and you won’t have to pack a huge bottle of solution.
When it’s time to remove your contact lenses from your eyes, just grab your case and place your contacts inside. Make sure your hands are as clean as possible. This simple solution is clever because it saves time and will keep your eyes feeling fresh.
Read more: Yes, You Can Save Money on Travel Despite Inflation
Dos and don’ts for your contact lenses
When it’s time to remove your contacts, be careful. After all, you only have one set of eyes. Try these recommendations.
❌ Don’t do this: Remove your contact lenses during turbulence on the airplane. Contact lens solution may spill, your contact could go flying and you might jab yourself in the pupil.
✅ Do this instead: Wait until the plane is steady to avoid poking your eye. Or better, instead of wearing contacts, wear your glasses during the flight to avoid your contacts drying out.
❌ Don’t do this: Try to take out your contact lenses while driving or if the road is bumpy.
✅ Do this instead: Wait until you stop at a gas station to wash your hands and remove your contacts.
❌ Don’t do this: Only bring one pair of contact lenses with you. Anything can happen when handling your contacts, including ripping a lens or dropping one onto the floor, which you want to avoid.
✅ Do this instead: Always bring an extra pair or two of contacts with you as backup. Or you can also consider bringing one-day disposable lenses. “If you wear one-day disposable contact lenses when traveling, you can avoid needing solutions or cases at all,” Moy said. “One-day lenses are typically more comfortable and healthier for the eyes because they are only used once and do not need to be disinfected at all.”
❌ Don’t do this: Put contacts in when you have red eyes.
✅ Do this instead: Always bring a pair of glasses in case you develop an eye infection while traveling.
❌ Don’t do this: Sleep in your contacts. Eye doctors will tell you it can cause an infection and even result in permanent vision loss. (I admit, I need to take this advice.)
✅ Do this instead: Place the case filled with solution next to your bed so you can easily remove your contacts without getting up — whether you’re traveling or at home tucked into bed.
For more life tips, here’s how to make distilled water for free, how to cut cake like a pro with floss and how to end junk mail for good.
A friend recently shared how overwhelming it was to lose (and thankfully find) their pet, with no idea how to reach the nearly 4 million people living in Los Angeles.
It’s also what led me to wonder how artificial intelligence can help solve this problem for both pets and pet owners. Thankfully, Love Lost — an AI pet recovery platform — also had the same idea.
What is Love Lost and how does it use AI?
Petco Love/Screenshot by CNET
Love Lost is a free pet recovery platform developed by Petco Love, the nonprofit organization owned by household name Petco that works to support animal adoption, recovery and health care initiatives.
Its free photo-matching service helps reunite lost dogs and cats with their families, using facial recognition technology that analyzes over 512 pet features — like muzzle, shape, tail and markings — to compare your uploaded photo against a national database of shelters, written posts and community submissions.
This is thanks to partnerships with companies like Nextdoor, which leverages its posts, and integration with over 3,000 shelter systems and community platforms for a wider reach. At time of writing, its database includes over 300,000 lost and found pets, with an average of 1,000 pet reunions/month.
How to use Love Lost to find and report missing pets
Navigating and using the Love Lost site is pretty simple — but make sure you have clear photos of the animal you’re submitting ready.
Navigate to the Petco Love Lost page. No sign-up is required for its free photo search feature.
Grab those well-shot photos and submit your missing or found pet including face, body and distinguishing marks.
Once submitted, AI will use pet facial recognition to scan available pet entries to try and pinpoint your pet. I tried this out using an old event flyer featuring a grey pitbull and was pleasantly surprised at the accuracy of animals it retrieved to compare.
If no immediate match is found, you can post your pet as Lost or Found and receive SMS or email updates. Love Lost notes that shelters and other humans will be continually checking the database. Once identified, you can connect through the platform to reunite with your pet safely.
If you haven’t lost a pet, but would like to prepare in case you do, you can register your pet’s photo and details beforehand on Love Lost’s website to expedite the process during an emergency. Love Lost also features Lost & Found Pet Tips on its site for more information.
You can enter the address, cross streets and photos of any stray pets you find on the Love Lost app.
Petco Love/Screenshot by CNET
Should you use Love Lost?
Love Lost acts as a bridge for pet parents and their communities to report and locate missing dogs and cats. This provides more eyes (and opportunities) to identify stray animals and reunite them with their owners. I also see it as a complementary tool for shelters, community organizers and even your neighbor who needs a way to identify stray animals quickly.
Petco Love also holds a four-star Charity Navigator rating for transparency and financial accountability and was awarded for its disaster relief grants and innovation in animal welfare in response to the 2025 LA wildfires.
But while Petco Love states it doesn’t sell your data, language regarding AI data storage and model training is minimal and vague. Its current privacy doesn’t directly address model training, though the organization says it only uses pet images to reunite lost animals and to train its own model for that singular purpose.
Petco Love also states it does not share user data outside of shelters, and that uploaded pet images are intentionally made public to help recover missing animals.
So, yes, there is still risk with any public listing, even of your pet,for scraping or misuse. Animals we consider pets or family are an emotionally charged topic, but it’s important to keep in mind where your data goes after the rescue process.
Ultimately, Love Lost is Petco’s national online database for hosting lost animals — but it also brings animal-focused professionals together to reach more people and speed up reunions.
CNET recommends AT&T as the best internet provider for most Reno households thanks to its strong combination of solid speeds, affordable pricing and connectivity options, including Internet Air, Fiber and 5G. While AT&T may not be available everywhere in Reno, other options like Spectrum and local provider Net NV offer solid alternatives, depending on your address.
For those prioritizing budget over speed, Spectrum delivers the cheapest plan in Reno with its 100Mbps plan for just $30 per month. On the other end of the pricing spectrum, AT&T’s Internet 5000 plan provides the fastest speeds in Reno, reaching up to 5,000Mbps in select areas for $245 monthly.
Whether you’re looking for affordability or blazing-fast internet, Reno offers a range of excellent options to suit your needs.
Reno internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Internet Air Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60
75-225Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Hughesnet Read full review
Satellite
$50-$95 ($25 discount for first 12 months)
50-100Mbps
None
No hard data cap
2 years
5.7
Net NV
Fixed wireless
$69-$89
100-1,000Mbps
None
None
None
N/A
Spectrum
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Modem free; $10 for router (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($40-$55 for eligible mobile customers)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Viasat Read full review
Satellite
$100
25-50Mbps
$15
No hard data cap
None
6.1
Show more (3 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Reno
Satellite internet: Reno residents have their pick of satellite internet providers, including Hughesnet, Viasat and Starlink. Unless your only other option is a slower DSL plan, we wouldn’t recommend it due to high fees (including steep equipment rental costs) and a two-year contract commitment. The exception might be Starlink, which offers faster speeds without the contract. There’s a steep upfront equipment cost of nearly $349.
T-Mobile Home Internet: This major mobile carrier offers Reno’s best 5G home internet service with an affordable, internet-only plan of $50 or $70 per month with no additional equipment fees or commitments. Existing customers with eligible mobile phone plans can add home internet for just $40-$55 monthly. There is a one-time $35 activation fee that is often waved off.
Mitch Diamond/Getty Images
Cheap internet options in Reno
The cheapest internet options in Reno depend on the type of internet service and speed you need. Spectrum has the best pricing at $30 per month with speeds up to 100Mbps.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Reno?
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How many members of your household use the internet?
How to find internet deals and promotions in Reno
Reno’s best internet deals and top promotions depend on the discounts available during that period. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
Reno internet providers, such as AT&T, Spectrum and T-Mobile, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Many, including Hughesnet, Net NV and Viasat, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promotions, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Reno broadband?
The Biden administration recently named Reno one of 31 Regional Technology and Innovation Hubs in the US. The region also boasts a concentration of connectivity-heavy data centers and tech companies, including Switch, Tesla and Apple. Ookla’s latest data shows Reno’s median download speed of over 250Mbps. (Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
Fastest internet plans in Reno
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Net NV
$89
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Show more (0 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s a good internet speed?
Most internet connection plans can now handle basic productivity and communication tasks. If you’re looking for an internet plan that can accommodate videoconferencing, streaming video or gaming, you’ll have a better experience with a more robust connection. Here’s an overview of the recommended minimum download speeds for various applications, according to the FCC. Note that these are only guidelines and that internet speed, service and performance vary by connection type, provider and address.
For more information, refer to our guide on how much internet speed you really need.
0 to 5Mbps allows you to tackle the basics: browsing the internet, sending and receiving email and streaming low-quality video.
5 to 40Mbps gives you higher-quality video streaming and videoconferencing.
40 to 100Mbps should give one user sufficient bandwidth to satisfy the demands of modern telecommuting, video streaming and online gaming.
100 to 500Mbps allows one to two users to simultaneously engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming.
500 to 1,000Mbps allows three or more users to engage in high-bandwidth activities like videoconferencing, streaming and online gaming all at the same time.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Reno
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. What’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answer to those questions is often layered and complex, but the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Reno?
Reno residents will find a variety of internet options regardless of where they live. T-Mobile and Spectrum offer high-speed internet for $50, while many areas can access fiber with speeds of 1,000Mbps or faster. Best of all, even the most remote of area residents have access to satellite service from Hughesnet, Starlink and Viasat, and radio-broadcasted internet from local internet provider Net NV.
Internet providers in Reno FAQs
What is the cheapest internet provider in Reno?
Spectrum offers new customers the cheapest internet plan at $30. Spectrum charges $10 monthly for a router rental.
Which internet provider in Reno offers the fastest plan?
AT&T boasts the fastest plan in Reno, with 5,000Mbps download and upload speeds available in select areas.
Is fiber internet available in Reno?
Yes, fiber internet is available in Reno. The top fiber provider in the area is AT&T Fiber, but it’s also available through local ISP Net NV.
What internet provider has the best coverage in Reno?
The FCC reports that satellite services such as Hughesnet, Starlink and Viasat provide 100% coverage in Reno, followed by Spectrum’s 92% cable internet coverage.
T-Mobile is about to launch its new satellite phone service powered by Starlink. Dubbed T-Satellite, the network will officially start serving customers on July 23, but if you want a sneak peek right now, it’s easy to apply and take Starlink for a smartphone test drive.
In December 2024, T-Mobile launched a beta program that’s available to customers of any phone carrier, regardless of whether you have an iPhone or Android phone. The program is still open for those who want to apply.
However, access is limited during the T-Mobile Starlink beta. If you’re a T-Mobile customer living in the US, you must have an optimized phone, like the Galaxy S24 Ultra, Galaxy Z Flip 6, iPhone 16 or Google Pixel 9. Customers of AT&T, Verizon and other phone carriers can also apply for the T-Satellite beta if they have a compatible, unlocked device with eSIM support.
If you’re interested in trying out the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service and don’t know where to start, here’s everything you need to know.
Watch this: Starlink Satellites Are Bringing Internet to Millions. We’ll Explain the Pros and Cons
What is T-Mobile Starlink satellite service and how does it work?
In August 2022, during a live event, T-Mobile and SpaceX announced Coverage Above and Beyond, a plan for bringing cellphone connectivity everywhere in the US, even in the most remote regions. T-Mobile’s wireless network would leverage Starlink’s direct-to-cell satellites — more than 300 of them — to provide “near complete coverage” to all 500,000 square miles in the US that are not covered by cell towers, essentially eliminating dead zones.
If you’re in an area without cell service, like Yosemite National Park or the Grand Canyon, your phone will automatically connect to the nearest T-Mobile Starlink satellite, acting like a floating cellphone tower, to give you service, as long as there’s nothing obstructing the connection between your phone and the sky.
The partnership between T-Mobile and Starlink has been years in the making.
Sarah Tew/CNET
What can you do with T-Mobile Starlink satellite service?
You can use the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service to send and receive text messages on your supported phone — for free. That includes text messages to 911 in case of an emergency. Plans are in place to add support for picture messaging, voice calls, and data soon — but for most users, it will come at a cost.
Eventually, you’ll be able to surf the web with Starlink.
James Martin/CNET
Who can use the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service?
Right now, you need to meet the following requirements if you want to use the Starlink satellite service on your phone:
Anyone with any phone plan can apply. On T-Mobile’s website, it says: “Anyone — on any carrier — can register to participate in the beta. We’ll admit people on a rolling first-come, first-served basis, so we encourage everyone to sign up as soon as possible.”
You must have an optimized phone. According to T-Mobile, the following phones work with its Starlink satellite service: iPhone 14 and later, Google Pixel 9, Samsung Galaxy S23 and later, Galaxy Z Flip3 and Fold 3 and later, Motorola 2024 and later and more. You can find the full list here, which includes a few more Galaxy models.
You must also be on the latest software update. T-Mobile says that your phone must be on the latest software to use T-Mobile Starlink.
Every Galaxy S24 model supports the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service.
Samsung/CNET
You must also be accepted into the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service beta program. The next section will explain how to sign up.
How can I join the T-Mobile Starlink satellite service beta program?
If you meet the requirements listed in the previous section, go to T-Mobile’s satellite phone service website and register with your full name, email and mobile phone number. Once you’ve been verified, you’ll receive confirmation that you’re on the waitlist for the Starlink satellite service via email.
Capacity is limited, so not everyone will get to join during the beta launch, but if you have an “optimized” phone, meaning a newer phone, you have a better chance of getting accepted. You should receive a notification via email or text when you’re accepted into the program. As the program leaves the beta stage on July 23, more people will be able to join.
What else you should know about T-Mobile’s Starlink satellite service
Since the satellite-to-cell service is still in beta, here are answers to some common questions you might have:
When will the free beta end? T-Mobile plans to end the free beta on July 23.
What will the price of the T-Mobile Starlink service be after the beta is finished? The service will continue to be free for users on T-Mobile’s Experience Beyond plan, but for every other T-Mobile customer, it will be $10 a month per line “for a limited time.” New subscribers to T-Mobile’s Experience More plan will receive T-Satellite free through the end of 2025.
How much will it cost for Verizon, AT&T and other carrier users? While Verizon and AT&T customers can get T-Mobile Starlink text messaging for free during the beta trial, once the full service launches in July, it will be $10 per month per line.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s Mini Crossword was tougher than most, with longer words and one more clue than normal. Some of them were tricky, too. Want answers? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for July 1, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Something to walk Answer: DOG
4A clue: Something to jog Answer: MEMORY
7A clue: More wicked Answer: EVILER
8A clue: Picture you always keep on you? Answer: TATTOO
9A clue: Insect studied by a myrmecologist Answer: ANT
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Nincompoop Answer: DOLT
2D clue: Ingredient in cookies ‘n cream ice cream Answer: OREO
3D clue: Greek sandwich Answer: GYRO
4D clue: Zuckerberg’s company Answer: META
5D clue: ___ Williams (bourbon brand) Answer: EVAN
You can use “Buy Now, Pay Later” for just about everything now, from Costco purchases to DoorDash (although that doesn’t mean you should). About 86.5 million people used BNPL in 2024, according to Capital One’s research. But the one thing BNPL couldn’t do was improve your credit. Although some of Affirm’s plans do report to Experian and TransUnion, most BNPL services don’t report on-time payments to credit bureaus. However, that could change later this year.
FICO, one of the two major credit scoring models, this week unveiled its FICO Score 10 BNPL and FICO Score 10 T BNPL scoring models, which will now take BNPL plans into consideration when creating credit scores. The new scoring models are slated for release in the fall.
There are a few reasons why it’s taken some time for BNPL to hit your credit reports. For one, BNPL plans are technically loans, but work similarly to revolving accounts, which makes them difficult to quantify. They’re also easier to qualify for, stack and pay off, so they pose issues with existing scoring models when determining account age and credit use.
Here’s how the new models are tackling these short-term loans and how it could boost or hurt your credit score.
How FICO will score BNPL plans
When BNPL plans hit your credit report, you’ll receive two scores: one based on the existing FICO model and one taking the new BNPL calculations into account. This provides more information for lenders to consider when evaluating borrowers, without really impacting the older models. However, whether these new scoring models help people or hinder them remains to be seen.
According to John Ulzheimer, a credit expert formerly of FICO, Equifax and Credit.com and founder of creditexpertwitness.com, FICO’s existing scores would have counted each new BNPL as a fresh account. Because BNPL plans typically only span a couple of months, this could drag down your average account age, a factor that accounts for 15% of your credit score.
“So, you could harm your score by having too many newly opened accounts, which lowers your average age of accounts,” he said.
But with these new credit scores, Ulzheimer said FICO has found a way not to consider each new BNPL as its own loan, which should minimize harm. Even if you stack multiple BNPL accounts, as long as you make your required payments, you shouldn’t see a drop in credit score.
“Installment debt is almost benign to scores, as long as it’s being paid on time. So I wouldn’t worry about loan amounts, especially for BNPL, which tend to be very low,” Ulzheimer added.
How long until we see an impact?
These new scores will be released in the fall but it will likely be even longer before we see wide adoption.
“It takes years for new scoring models to gain traction so I would not expect to see mass adoption by lenders out of the gate,” Ulzheimer said. “That would be historically atypical. And, of course, only lenders that care about how BNPL loans are handled in FICO scores would be interested in these new models.”
Does this change how you should use BNPL plans?
Not really, unless you’re stacking too much debt and not able to make your payments on time. Like most loans and other credit products, the most important thing is to be able to responsibly manage your debt — that means not spending money you aren’t able to pay back in time. As long as you’re doing that, the new scoring models shouldn’t negatively impact your finances.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
Despite forecasts for mortgage rates to slowly ease, buying a home is still too expensive for most people. The average 30-year fixed rate has hovered close to 7% for the last seven months, resulting in cost-prohibitive monthly payments.
The average for a 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.75% today, a decrease of -0.08% compared to one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 5.94%, which is a decrease of -0.09% since last week.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on June 30, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
Lingering inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and kept interest rates steady in 2025, most recently on June 18.
If President Trump rolls back some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market deteriorates, it could prompt the Fed to cut interest rates as soon as September. But prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
Plus, in today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. Prospective buyers still have to contend with high home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
What’s behind today’s high mortgage rates?
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which is sensitive to investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to ease its policy rate, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, homebuyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Will we see lower mortgage rates in 2025?
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, economic and political instability have kept it stuck in neutral.
Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Meanwhile, the “lock-in” effect, where current homeowners with low-rate mortgages are reluctant to sell and take on higher interest rates, has kept housing inventory tight and fueled price competition in high-demand areas.
According to Smith, mortgage rates could inch down slowly and steadily, but numerous risks could also keep rates elevated. Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.1% by the end of 2025 and 5.8% by the end of 2026.
Which mortgage term and type should I pick?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
The average interest rate for a standard 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.75% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 5.94%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 adjustable-rate mortgage has an average rate of 6.01% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I find the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
At the start of the year, 2025 was going to be all about Grand Theft Auto 6, which had so much hype that players were already expecting it to win Game of the Year. That changed last month when Rockstar Games announced that its highly anticipated game would be pushed to 2026. Though this year might not have what could be the biggest game of the decade, 2025 so far has some great games from the most unlikely places.
With the launch of the Switch 2 and Summer Game Fest already happening in early June, the rest of 2025 is going to be a major games come out for the year is done. The midpoint of the year is a good time to look back at what has already come out and maybe try one of the games out during the low summer period before things start ramping up in the fall.
Kojima Productions
Death Stranding 2
Coming in right before the official midpoint of the year is Death Stranding 2: On the Beach. The sequel to the first project from famed video game developer Hideo Kojima after he left Konami, it made all the important improvements to elevate a quirky game into an amazing experience.
From CNET’s review: “If you had a twinge of interest in the original Death Stranding but found it a bit too awkward or maybe complicated with its mechanics, then Death Stranding 2 is going to suck you right in and will have you spending hours enjoying a peaceful journey of just delivering packages.”
Developed by Sandfall Interactive, Clair Obscur: Expedition 33 has surprised everyone with just how good it is. The turn-based roleplaying game with French influences has wowed everyone who has played it.
From CNET’s review: “Expedition 33 will be celebrated for its many excellences, and deservedly so. But above all, it tells an adult story about what’s left for us when the future is ripped away bit by bit — and why it’s worth fighting against the inevitable anyway.”
Clair Obscur: Expedition 33 is available on PC, PS5 and Xbox Series consoles. It’s also included on Xbox Game Pass.
Hazelight Studios
Split Fiction
Co-op games are few and far between, but Hazelight Studios is the premier developer of them. Split Fiction is the latest title from the team, and its co-op play completely surpasses any other game out there to make for a unique experience.
From CNET’s review: “I think it’s safe to say Split Fiction is a fun game for anyone who’s got another player ready to try it out. Whimsical, lighthearted, action-packed and thoughtfully made, it feels ready for any co-op team, from strangers to best friends.”
Split Fiction is available on PC, PS5 and Xbox Series consoles.
Warhorse
Kingdom Come: Deliverance 2
Developer Warhorse Studios is back with a sequel to its 2018 game Kingdom Come: Deliverance. In the follow-up, players again step into the role of swordsman Henry of Skalitz. He’s still on his quest for revenge after his father died in the original game.
What makes Kingdom Come so unique as an RPG is how true-to-life it is in its setting of Bohemia (now the modern-day Czech Republic) in the 1400s. Players don’t use magic or have any fantastical abilities. Instead, they need to watch what they eat or else be struck with food poisoning, and they need to wash their clothes because townspeople won’t talk to them if they stink. Aside from the protagonist, the locations, characters and events are accurate. Luckily, Warhorse Studios made some welcome improvements to the game to make life in the 1400s a lot of fun.
A puzzle game has to be unique to be considered one of the best games of the year, and Blue Prince is definitely unique. The premise is to fill a mansion with rooms in order to find a mysterious Room 46, though the mansion rearranges its layout every day, giving players a fresh chance to discover its secrets. What follows is a mystery that slowly unravels one room at a time.
From CNET’s review: “Blue Prince isn’t for everyone. While most of the puzzles can be solved with whatever’s in the room, there are some intricate solutions afoot that could elude casual players. The mansion’s shifting layout and unpredictable room choices can make progress uneven — or even bring it to a halt if luck isn’t on your side. But it’s by far one of the most unique games I’ve played in years, and a true treat for puzzle fiends and mystery fans.”
Blue Prince is available on PC, PS5 and Xbox Series consoles. It’s also included on Xbox Game Pass.
Capcom
Monster Hunter Wilds
Monster Hunter Wilds from Capcom is the latest in a long-running franchise of beloved third-person action games. As it says in the title, players need to hunt monsters, and those beasts come in all sizes. After more than two decades, Capcom may’ve developed the best Monster Hunter game ever.
In this entry, players set foot in the Forbidden Lands, which is filled with unique creatures. Capcom made a slew of upgrades to the game’s formula, from quality of life improvements, such as carrying a second weapon and being able to set up camps, to creating a huge open world where the monsters are bigger than ever.
Monster Hunter Wilds is available on PC, PS5 and Xbox Series consoles. It’s also included on Xbox Game Pass.
id Software
Doom: The Dark Ages
The Doom franchise made its return in 2016, and it’s back with the third game in this new era, Doom: The Dark Ages. The Doomslayer is back, and players will finally learn what happened to the hero when he left Earth to fight the hordes of demons in Hell.
From CNET’s review: “All the new additions Id Software introduced in Doom: The Dark Ages are welcome changes to keep a franchise that’s been around for more than three decades feeling fresh.”
Doom: The Dark Ages is available on PC, PS5 and Xbox Series consoles. It’s also included on Xbox Game Pass.
Ubisoft
Assassin’s Creed Shadows
Fans of the Assassin’s Creed series have been demanding a game set in Japan, and they got it with Shadows. This time around there are two heroes who, to prevail in feudal Japan, will have to contend with military power and unseen forces pulling at the strings.
From CNET’s review: “Ubisoft has found what could be the new formula for the franchise, and it will hopefully retool this formula to keep future titles fresh for players. Some diehard fans may find Shadows to be a bit too action-oriented and less stealthy than previous games in the series, but I feel there’s still enough of the original formula in this game to satisfy them, as well as those who want to just use a big ol’ sword to chop some heads.”
A surprise game this year was the return of The Elder Scrolls 4: Oblivion. The remastered version of the game seemingly came out of nowhere, and with it came a flood of fond memories for gamers.
Oblivion was released back in 2006, and the remastered version keeps all the important details in place, adding a fresh coat of paint with new graphics as well as more modern controls and quality of life improvements. It’s visually impressive while also being faithful to the original, and new and old players simply love it.
The Yakuza franchise’s spin-off, Like a Dragon, has its own spin-off. Like a Dragon: Pirate Yakuza in Hawaii is a new adventure featuring a mainstay character for the franchise, Goro Majima, and it answers the age-old question, How do you make a Yakuza game even better? Just add pirates.
From CNET’s review: “Pirate Yakuza In Hawaii is a fun, light jaunt that benefits from the idiosyncrasies of its specific setup. Rather than telling a story about modern piracy, the game brings cannon-firing pirate ships, crew-on-crew deck melees and buried treasure hunts into modernity without any pesky logical explanation. The game’s bizarre mashup energy is its strength, amplified by Sega’s Ryu Ga Gotoku studio’s signature blend of sincere character moments and wacky hijinks.”
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s Mini Crossword expects you to have a wide knowledge of things, from a Rolling Stones song to a Greek letter, but none of the clues are too terribly difficult. Want some answers? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for June 29, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Word before “flaw” or “Attraction” Answer: FATAL
6A clue: Pickle liquid Answer: BRINE
7A clue: Horseshoe-shaped Greek letter Answer: OMEGA
8A clue: Literary theme Answer: MOTIF
9A clue: Like a stereotypical frat dude, in slang Answer: BROEY
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Irresponsible thing to “drop” around small children, perhaps Answer: FBOMB
2D clue: Cover of knight? Answer: ARMOR
3D clue: Link with Answer: TIETO
4D clue: The “you” in the Rolling Stones lyric “Don’t you weep / All your kisses still taste sweet” Answer: ANGIE
I’ve used my Oura Ring the past few years to track my sleep, recovery and stress. But recently, Oura unlocked a new insight I didn’t know I needed: blood sugar levels. I’m constantly experimenting with the latest health tech, so I was naturally intrigued when I learned that Oura Ring partnered with Dexcom’s Stelo, a continuous glucose monitor designed for people without diabetes. The goal of this collaboration is to help everyday people like me understand how food and general eating habits impact blood sugar and overall health.
“By combining Stelo data with Oura’s existing insights, we’re empowering members to better understand the cause-and-effect relationships between eating patterns, energy, mood and recovery — and ultimately make sustainable, science-backed lifestyle changes,” Maz Brumand, vice president of product for Oura, told CNET.
I tested the Stelo CGM with my Oura Ring for two weeks, and it changed the way I eat and move. This type of biofeedback is helpful for everyone, even those without diabetes.
What is continuous glucose monitoring, and why is it important?
Your blood sugar, or blood glucose, refers to the measurement of sugar in your blood. According to the Cleveland Clinic, glucose is the main source of energy for your body — it’s what powers your muscles, brain and even your cells. When you eat certain foods (particularly carbohydrates), your glucose rises, and your body responds by releasing insulin to shuttle that sugar into cells for energy or storage. On the flip side, if you experience frequent spikes or crashes (even if you don’t have diabetes ), it can impact your energy, sleep, mood and even long-term metabolic health. When your body doesn’t need glucose immediately, it stores it as glycogen in your muscles and liver.
For people with diabetes, monitoring glucose levels is crucial. But is it important to do the same for the rest of us without a diagnosis? To an extent, I think so. Monitoring your blood sugar throughout the day and seeing how your body reacts to different foods can reveal a lot about your cravings, sleep and metabolic health. “Glucose is a real-time window into metabolic health, which underpins how we feel day to day — our energy, focus, mood and sleep — and how resilient we are over time,” Brumand says.
Oura
With the rise of wearable glucose sensors like Stelo, those without diabetes can now get insights into how their eating habits impact their bodies (without finger pricks or a prescription).
What is a ‘normal’ glucose range, and are spikes bad?
Before using a CGM, I thought blood sugar was either stable or erratic, with no room for in-between spikes. Once I began tracking my glucose daily, I quickly learned that spikes are completely normal, especially after meals and snacks.
Most people will see glucose levels rise and drop throughout the day. According to the American Diabetes Association, a general target range for adults without pre-diabetes or diabetes is between 70 and 140mg/dL (note that Oura also follows this range, and it’s what users can expect to see in their graphs). It’s also worth highlighting that 70 to 100mg/dL is considered normal for fasting (particularly in the morning before having food), and under 140 mg/dL is common, especially after meals.
“Clinical studies show that even in healthy individuals, a moderate glucose spike (rise above 140mg/dL) can occur on a daily basis. In fact, research suggests that healthy adults will live above 140mg/dL for about 30 minutes, up to 2 hours a day, which is usually 1 to 3 short-lived glucose spikes”, says Renee Fitton, registered dietitian and director of education at L-Nutra, a nutrition technology company.
Oura
Fitton further explained that the number and frequency of glucose spikes depend on various factors, primarily what and when you’re eating. These spiked can also be affected by other factors like stress level, exercise, dehydration and even whether you have a sunburn.
Many glucose monitors use a custom range that adapts to your body’s baseline and patterns over time. When looking at your graph, it’s important to keep in mind that context and trends matter more than one-off spikes. For example, seeing a spike after dessert isn’t a sign that something is wrong. It’s a sign that your body is doing its job. What matters most is how quickly your glucose returns to baseline and how often your levels stay elevated over time.
“I would not see signs for concern for occasional (one to three times per day) moderate spikes (less than 160mg/dL) that resolve within about 30 mins. When reaching more frequent, especially if they are higher spikes (for example, above 180mg/dL), that take a long time to resolve (over 60 minutes), then there may be concerns about metabolic health,” Fitton explained. “A completely flat glucose curve is not something that we aim for; you want some gentle ups and downs as a sign of healthy metabolic flexibility.”
How I set up the Stelo monitor with my Oura Ring
You can order the Stelo sensor directly from Oura ($99 for two sensors). I received a small box with the sensors and easy instructions. Applying it to the back of my upper arm took less than 2 minutes and was surprisingly painless. And yes, there is a small needle involved. I’m terrified of needles, so I spent some time mentally preparing to prick myself, but to my disbelief, I didn’t feel it at all. The sound the ejector makes is pretty loud, though. I sometimes think the sound acted as a diversion to my brain, and that’s why I didn’t feel anything. But, nonetheless, it was a pretty pain-free experience.
Once in place, I paired it to the Stelo app, and it automatically reflected within the Oura app. Each sensor tracks your glucose level 24/7 for up to 15 days.
Left Image: CGM in the self-injector. Right image: CGM on the back of my right arm.
Nasha Addarich Martínez/CNET
From the Oura app, I could see how my glucose levels fluctuated throughout the day. You can easily access it at the top of the app, where you also see other data metrics like sleep, heart rate, activity and readiness score (a personalized score, ranging from 0 to 100, that provides a snapshot of how well your body has recovered from the previous day’s activities and sleep).
How even my ‘healthy’ food choices raised my blood sugar (and that’s OK)
One of the most eye-opening parts of my testing was seeing how some of my favorite healthy staples played out on the glucose graph. A great example of this was my favorite pressed juice.
I had a pressed juice in the morning that contained pineapple, beets, carrots, ginger, cucumber and lemon. It’s nutrient-dense, but it also spiked my glucose above what’s considered my healthy range for about 6 minutes (a small window and still considered optimal for my age and overall metabolic health). This was enough to make me rethink how and when I consume fruit-heavy beverages.
The next day, I experimented with having a fruit smoothie instead of juice. I made a homemade smoothie with berries, banana, plant-based protein powder, peanut butter, soy milk and oats. This smoothie kept my glucose completely in range (zero minutes above my personal threshold). The added protein and fiber from the fruit, oatmeal, peanut butter and protein powder helped slow the absorption of natural sugars into my bloodstream.
Nasha Addarich Martínez/CNET
What I learned: Even natural fruit juices can cause glucose spikes, especially when consumed on an empty stomach and without any protein or fiber. Smoothies that include protein, fat and fiber can help keep spikes at bay and help stabilize your energy levels.
Balance your meals with protein, fats and fiber
Nasha Addarich Martínez/CNET
Later that week, I had sushi rolls with a side of edamame for dinner. To my surprise, my glucose levels stayed within range the whole time. Oura Advisor (Oura’s AI coach) even pointed out that this food combination offered protein and fiber, which likely contributed to the steady glucose levels. This moment was really encouraging for me. It made me realize that I don’t need to drastically change what I eat. By just being more intentional about how I pair my foods, I can drastically improve the impact they have on my blood glucose. Pairing your foods with healthy fats like avocados, nuts, seeds and olive oil can also slow digestion and therefore the absorption of sugars.
Fitton explains that this is primarily due to what happens in our digestive tract, even before the nutrients get to our bloodstream. Protein, fiber and healthy fats work in their own way to slow the absorption of simple carbohydrates into the bloodstream, making a slower, more gradual release of sugars into the blood. These factors turn what could be a glucose spike into a steady rise that your body can clear gradually.
“The biggest area of concern when managing our blood sugar levels is limiting refined carbohydrates. When you do choose a refined-carb item (a plain cracker, white flour tortilla, cookies, etc.), try to pair it instead of eating it solo: add cheese, nut butter or a handful of edamame to blunt the glucose rise, and choose a higher-fiber version of your carbohydrate source when possible (for example, whole-grain crackers) so the carbs come packaged with their own speed limit,” Fitton says.
Cake and a walk equal steady blood sugar?
One of the more surprising things I learned was that blood sugar stability isn’t just about what you eat. It’s also about what you do after you eat. One afternoon, I had a slice of cake for a snack. No fiber or protein added, just the cake (I had lunch a few hours before).
Instead of my blood sugar spiking, my glucose levels remained steadily in range. The caveat? I took a brisk walk after having my dessert. It wasn’t anything strenuous, just a short 15-minute walk around my neighborhood. But it was enough to help my body process and use the glucose more efficiently.
“The body knows that exercise demands more energy, and so it helps open up our cells to soak up sugar (energy) and remove it from our blood. A 10-minute walk burns about 30 to 40 calories, and your body will get that energy from circulating glucose or stored glycogen,” Fitton explained.
After eating cake and going for a walk, my blood sugar saw a slight spike, but stayed within range.
Nasha Addarich Martínez/CNET
Taking a walk after meals has long been recommended by experts for metabolic health, but seeing the effect in real time made it click for me. I do think that having the cake after having a balanced meal with protein and fiber also contributed to my steady levels of blood sugar.
Sometimes, it’s not about completely eliminating our favorite treats or carbs, but more so about timing, food pairing and movement.
3 ways I learned to flatten my glucose curve without sacrificing my favorite meals
Before using the glucose sensor with Oura, I assumed blood sugar spikes were mostly about foods and how they impact your body. I also thought the only way to manage them was to cut carbs or drastically change my diet. But over these two weeks, I experienced firsthand how and when I eat (and move) matter just as much as what I eat. I learned that these three strategies helped keep my glucose levels in check.
Pair carbs and sweets with protein, fiber and healthy fats
When I had a berry smoothie with protein powder and soy milk, my glucose levels stayed steady. In contrast, when I had a fruit smoothie earlier that week, my blood sugar levels spiked and crashed more quickly.
Takeaway: Carbs on their own, especially refined and processed carbs, can spike blood sugar quickly, but adding protein or fat slows digestion and leads to a more gentle spike.
Food pairing examples: Apples and peanut butter, toast with avocado, rice with beans or another protein.
Daniela Duncan/Getty Images
Walk it out (especially after sweets)
When I had cake as a snack, I was sure my graph would spike dramatically, but it didn’t because of my walk (and eating a balanced meal before).
A simple walk, even just 10 to 15 minutes, can help offset blood sugar spikes. This small but simple habit helps me now enjoy treats without the crash later.
Timing your food matters
I also noticed that when I ate higher-carb foods earlier in the day, my body processed them better than when I had them later at night. Breakfast smoothies and bowls kept my levels stable, while the same smoothie after 9 p.m. caused more spikes.
“When it comes to blood sugar management, we see that in the morning our body usually has a spike in cortisol (a stress hormone) that can actually help our body take up sugar very quickly and quickly manage blood sugar. Eating in the morning will also calm the cortisol response, reducing the stress on your body. If you wait too long to eat, excess cortisol can create inflammation and also produce larger glucose spikes when you do eat,” explained Fitton.
Fitton further explained that, conversely, in the evening, the sugar management systems in our bodies start powering down and are not as good at helping blood sugar get into the cells. So it is important to try not to eat too late; otherwise, you’ll probably see blood sugar go up and stay up for longer.
That doesn’t mean you can’t eat carbs or treats at night, but eating them earlier in the day when insulin sensitivity tends to be higher can make a real difference.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Need some help with today’s Mini Crossword? It’s Saturday, so it’s extra-long, and might take you a while. Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for June 28, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Detachable parts of a dress form Answer: ARMS
Social media can accidentally spoil a streaming movie or show for those who haven’t yet watched it. Threads, the popular social media platform from Meta, now has a new feature that could save you from spoiling your next watch.
The new feature allows users to mark media and text posts as spoilers. If it’s a photo, the spoiler will appear blurred in feeds, and text will be grayed out. Clicking on both types makes the spoiler visible. Netflix and Marvel are the first major studios to use the Threads feature on their posts. Meta says the feature is rolling out globally, but we saw it available on Friday.
Other sites and platforms, including Reddit, Instagram and Bluesky, already have similar spoiler features. X doesn’t have a feature specifically for spoilers, though it does allow you to mark media as sensitive, which blurs the post until people reveal it.
Speaking of spoilers, you may want to stop reading now if you’re not logged into Threads, the embedded plot-spoiling posts in this story may not be blurred.
Netflix posted a photo from one of the last scenes of Squid Game’s third and final season, with the caption “do not tap until you’ve finished Squid Game 3.”
Marvel teased the villain in the new Ironheart series in a post. You won’t meet the villain until the last episode. You can stream Ironheart on Disney Plus.
We Were Liars on Prime also added a post that uses the new Threads spoiler text feature.
We’ve seen several other updates from Threads this year, including the ability to copy images, thus replacing the need to screenshot. Threads also only recently started testing direct messaging, despite the app being out for around two years.
How to use the spoiler feature on Threads
Anyone can use the spoiler feature on their posts. All you have to do is highlight what you want to hide, tap and select “mark spoiler.” That will blur the text or image you selected for others.
This feature doesn’t mean you won’t see posts about your favorite pop culture and entertainment topics. It lets you choose when you’re ready to know more. All it takes is a tap.
However, it’s worth pointing out that it’s up to those who make the post to decide if they mark something as a spoiler. So spoilers could abound until most people adopt the feature. Even still, it’s good to see a feature that allows you to stay in the loop without spoiling major plot points along the way.
AT&T Fiber is CNET’s top pick for the best internet provider in Fresno, California. That’s because it offers great upload and download speeds at competitive monthly rates. The main drawback is AT&T Fiber’s limited coverage area, which doesn’t extend to all Fresno neighborhoods, leaving many residents without access.
If AT&T Fiber isn’t available at your address, Xfinity is a solid alternative, with some of the most affordable plans starting at just $35. Just be aware of potential price hikes and additional fees after promotional periods end. T-Mobile is another worthy option that works particularly well for smaller households with one or two people. However, it also offers plans for larger families, like its $70 All-In Home Internet plan, which has slightly faster speeds and better Wi-Fi hardware.
Our team looks at speed, pricing, customer service and overall value to recommend the best internet service. We use a special database that we’ve built over years of reviewing internet services. To ensure accuracy, we also check if the service is available at local addresses. We read the terms and conditions of providers carefully and, when needed, contact ISPs to confirm the details, too.
Our process has some limitations you should know about. Pricing and speed data are variable: Certain addresses may qualify for different service tiers, and monthly costs may vary, even within a city. The best way to identify your particular options is to plug your address into a provider’s website.
Note that the prices, speeds and other information listed above and in the provider cards below may differ from what we found in our research. The cards display the full range of a provider’s pricing and speeds across the US, according to our database of plan information provided directly by ISPs. At the same time, the text is specific to what’s available in Fresno. The prices referenced within this article’s text come from our research and include applicable discounts for setting up automatic payments each month — a standard industry offering. Other discounts and promotions might also be available for things like committing to a contract or bundling with a cellphone plan.
To learn more about how we review internet providers, visit our full methodology page.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Top internet providers in Fresno
No matter where you live in Fresno, you’ll likely have access to some good internet options. AT&T Fiber is available to about a quarter of Fresno residents and offers the fastest speeds at fair prices. Those who can’t get AT&T Fiber have a good backup in Xfinity, which is available almost everywhere in the city.
Overview of Fresno internet providers
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Internet Read full review
DSL
$60
768Kbps-100Mbps
None
1.5TB (none for 100Mbps plan)
None
7.4
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($40-$55 with eligible mobile plans)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$75 ($35-$60 with eligible phone plan)
85-250Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Xfinity Read full review
Cable
$40-$100
400-2,100Mbps
$25 (optional)
1.2TB (unlimited for one years on plans)
None
7
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What other internet options are there in Fresno?
There are a few other internet providers operating in Fresno, but they typically have slower speeds and higher prices. Still, they’re worth considering in more rural areas.
Kingsburg Media Foundation: This fixed wireless provider is only worth a look as a last resort. Plans start at $75 a month for just 10/5Mbps speeds — a worse value than even satellite internet. The edge it has on satellite is that all of its plans come with unlimited data.
Satellite internet: In general, satellite internet is only used in rural areas where faster options aren’t available. You can get HughesNet and Viasat everywhere in Fresno, but speeds are low, prices are high and data caps are extremely stingy. Starlink is a newer provider from SpaceX that delivers faster speeds than HughesNet and Viasat, but it has an upfront equipment cost of $349, and plans start at $120 monthly.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Like T-Mobile Home Internet, Verizon has begun leveraging its own cellular network to deliver home internet wirelessly. It has two plans available in Fresno, with speeds up to 250Mbps at some addresses. That noted, availability is more limited than T-Mobile — only 29% of Fresno households will be able to get Verizon.
Hal Bergman/Getty Images
Pricing info on Fresno home internet service
Fresno residents have some extremely cheap internet plans available — and most of them are from one provider. Xfinity offers some of the cheapest starting prices you’ll find anywhere in the country, but you’ll have to take a close look at the fine print to avoid a sticker shock.
Cheapest internet plans in Fresno
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Contract
Xfinity Connect More Read full review
$40
400Mbps
$25 (optional)
None
Xfinity Fast Read full review
$55
600Mbps
$25 (optional)
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($40 with eligible mobile plans)
318Mbps
None
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible phone plan)
85Mbps
None
None
AT&T Fiber Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
None
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How fast is Fresno broadband?
Compared to other cities of its size, Fresno has an abundance of fast internet plans available. Three different providers offer “gig speeds” — download speeds of 940Mbps or higher — and AT&T Fiber offers symmetrical speeds up to 5,000Mbps in some areas. Currently 66% of Fresno can get 1,000/100Mbps speeds, according to FCC data.
Fastest internet plans in Fresno
Show more (1 item)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Fresno?
For the portion of Fresno households that have access to AT&T Fiber, picking an internet provider is an easy decision. AT&T has symmetrical upload and download speeds, straightforward and reasonable pricing, and the best customer satisfaction scores of any provider in the country. Xfinity is a worthy backup option, but its pricing is complicated and your bill will increase after the first year. T-Mobile Home Internet offers decent performance for $50 a month, but its speeds are best for households with just one or two people.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Fresno
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every internet service provider in a given city. So what’s our approach? For starters, we tap into a proprietary database of pricing, availability and speed information that draws from our own historical ISP data, partner data and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
This guide leverages an in-house artificial intelligence tool called RAMP, which is trained on our own writing and uses our database to generate content about specific internet service providers that our writers can use in determining and presenting our picks for a given guide. Check CNET’s AI policy for more information about how our teams use (and don’t use) AI tools.
Because our database is not exhaustive, we go to the FCC’s website to check the primary data for ourselves and make sure we’re considering every ISP that provides service in an area. Plans and prices also vary by location, so we input local addresses on provider websites to find the specific options available to residents. To evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service, we look at sources including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of the time of our pre-publication fact-check.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
The answers to those questions are often layered and complex, but the providers that come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
Fresno internet FAQs
Which is the best internet service provider in Fresno?
AT&T Fiber is the best internet service provider in Fresno, with up to 5,000Mbps download and upload speeds and no data caps or contracts. Xfinity’s cable internet offers six plans with speeds ranging from 400Mbps to 2,100Mbps and free subscription to Peacock Premium on some plans. T-Mobile Home Internet offers download speeds up to 418Mbps, no equipment fees, no annual service contracts and no price hikes.
Xfinity is the cheapest internet provider in Fresno. Its cable internet plans start at just $40 per month for 400Mbps speeds. Equipment adds an extra $25 per month to the plan, but you can also provide your own.
I first discovered Steam in university — until then, I’d never had my own computer, so the allure of PC gaming proved irresistible. What started as a humble dozen games, like Doom 3 and Half-Life, blossomed into a collection of over 220 titles, thanks mainly to Steam sales (please don’t ask how many items from my library I’ve actually played). Steam is one of the most popular PC gaming platforms, selling more than 718 million total games in 2024, according to Statista. The digital PC gaming service boasts a massive catalog of over 89,000 titles.
Steam runs four major seasonal sales — winter, spring, summer and fall — plus smaller sales called “fests” in between. The next major event — the Steam Summer Sale — kicked off on June 26 and runs through July 10. Whether you’re trying to save a few bucks on one of the latest big-name AAA games, want to add more indie games to your digital shelf or need to fill up your Steam Deck hard drive, here’s everything you need to know about when Steam sales are and how to save money.
Best Steam Summer Sale deals and discounts
Game prices are slashed across the board, from competitive discounts on recent AAA releases like Black Myth Wukong to wallet-friendly indie games and backlog-inducingly cheap older titles. If you’re having difficulty wading through the deals aplenty, my gaming expert colleague Tyler Graham and I have curated a selection of games we’d add to our carts.
Star Wars Jedi: Fallen Order, 75% off ( now $10, was $40): I spent a good chunk of my winter 2024 holiday playing Jedi: Fallen Order with my wife. $10 for hours of platforming, swinging lightsabers and using the Force is a no-brainer.
Star Wars Jedi: Survivor, 80% off (now $14, was $70): I just started playing Jedi: Survivor, and its improvements in gameplay mechanics make it feel noticeably smoother than the predecessor — plus, you start off with your lightsaber this go around.
Orbo’s Odyssey, 50% off (now $2.49, was $5): Speedy precision platformer with lots of movement tech. Short but sweet, has surreal and terrifying secrets to find hidden throughout the game.
There are four main Steam seasonal sales. The next major Steam Sale — the Steam Summer Sale — runs June 26 to July 10, 2025. There are also smaller sales, called Fests. Typically, the Steam Winter and Summer Sales last about two weeks, whereas the Spring and Autumn Sales last for one week, give or take.
Steam Summer Sale (June 26 to July 10, 2025)
Steam Autumn Sale (Sept. 29 to Oct. 6, 2025)
Steam Winter Sale (Dec. 18, 2025 to Jan. 5, 2026)
Steam Spring Sale (was March 13-20, 2025)
How often are Steam sales?
Steam Sales are pretty frequent, with at least one per month. While the big seasonal sales are quarterly — winter, fall, spring and summer — there are dozens of smaller sales or fests. Typically, these Steam discount days revolve around a particular theme, with lowered prices on titles within a certain genre, like fighting games or role-playing games.
Here’s how I save money with Steam sales (and you can too)
Take advantage of your wish list
Adding games to your Steam wish list is a great way to find out when they’re on sale.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
Adding games to your Steam wish list simplifies figuring out what to snag — or skip — during a sale. You can sort your wish list by discount, so finding the biggest savings is a breeze.
Add a game to your wish list whenever you see one you like the look of but don’t immediately want to play. Then, during a Steam sale, pop in, sort by discount and see which prices have plummeted the most. Or, you can arrange your wish list in order of your most wanted titles, then choose what to buy that way during one of the upcoming Steam sales.
Use SteamDB to find the largest discounts
You can sort discounted titles from the Steam store front in SteamDB for quick perusal.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
SteamDB is an excellent source for uncovering deals. Its many filters let you sort attributes, including discount percentage, rating, price or reviews, making it a helpful Steam sales tracker. You can even narrow down a list based on platform — Windows, Linux or MacOS — and features like controller support. I’ve even used SteamDB to nab free games, like a no-cost copy of Tell Me Why.
I typically hop into SteamDB during a Steam sale to look for hefty discounts on highly rated games. It’s worth checking SteamDB even outside of seasonal sales and fests if you want to expand your Steam collection.
Shop for older titles, indie games, DLC and complete catalogs
Often, newer AAA games get heavy markdowns — but because of their usually high price tags, even the discounted cost isn’t cheap. However, you can find wallet-friendly older games, indies or downloadable content. For instance, I picked up a copy of The Sum of All Fears for just $2, which wasn’t even during a Steam sale.
Complete publisher catalogs or franchise bundles save you a ton of money. I’ve seen the Activision Collection bundle — typically $900 — for as low as $355. While over $350 might not be pocket change, the per-title breakdown is pretty cost-effective when you’re getting 53 games. Similarly, I’ve seen the Call of Duty Franchise bundle for $443, a steep drop from its usual $1,010.
You can often get DLC packs pretty cheap during Steam sales, which provide more in-game content to enjoy. On the other hand, these comprehensive bundles might lead you to overspend if you’re not actually planning on playing, say, every single Call of Duty game under the sun.
Check your other game libraries to make sure you’re not double-dipping
Although Steam is incredibly popular, it’s not the only source for digital game purchases. Check your other libraries on GOG, Epic, EA Origin and Xbox Game Pass, for instance, to ensure you’re not double-dipping. While you could buy Cyberpunk 2077 on Steam and GOG, you probably don’t need two copies.
Cross-shop deals on other platforms
While Steam is extremely popular, you can also find loads of competitive discounts at other outlets. IsThereAnyDeal lets you easily cross-shop.
Screenshot by Moe Long/CNET
With many Steam alternatives, including GOG, Epic, Origin and Fanatical, you can find sweet discounts from several outlets. While you can — and should — check those individual storefronts, IsThereAnyDeal is a comprehensive source for savings. So you might notice a great deal on Skyrim from Steam, but it might be available at an even lower price at Epic at the same time.
Set a budget
Adding a bunch of games to your cart can be tempting, especially with prices slashed by 75% or more. However, lots of cheap games can still add up. I typically set a budget — whether it’s monetary or a limit on the number of games — and stick to that.
Don’t feel compelled to buy anything
The best way to save money is by not spending it in the first place. I know, it’s tempting to load up your cart with $5 or $10 games, which is nearly as gratifying as an in-game loot grab. But only buy what you’ll play now or soon after purchasing. While there are rare instances where games get delisted on Steam, chances are if you pass up on a sweet deal, it’ll still be available during the next Steam sale.
A complete list of Steam sale dates
Outside of Steam’s seasonal sales, there are different genre-themed sales or fests. Steam fests revolve around a genre or game theme. Here are all of the Steam fests for 2025, along with examples of Steam games on sale you might find:
Automation Fest (July 14-21, 2025): Automate all the things! Look for discounts on titles like Hydroneer, Railgrade and Voidtrain.
Racing Fest (July 28 to Aug. 4, 2025): Be fast and furious adding games like Forza Horizon 5, Snow Runner and Sonic Racing CrossWorlds to your cart.
4X Fest (Aug. 11-18, 2025): The Steam 4X Fest celebrates games that feature all four Xs: Expand, Exploit, Exterminate and Explore. Look for deals on player versus environment (PvE) and player versus player (PvP) games, like Duke: Awakening and Tom Clancy’s Rainbow Six Siege X.
Third Person Shooter Fest (Aug. 25 to Sept. 1, 2025): Reload your Steam library with third-person shooter titles, like Helldivers II, Star Wars Outlaws or Red Dead Redemption II.
Political Sim Fest (Sept. 8-15, 2025): Bring out your inner politician with deals on games like Tropico 6 and Victoria 3.
Next Fest: October 2025 (Oct. 13-20, 2025): Highlights of upcoming games — demos, livestreams and developer chats, oh my!
Scream Fest 2025 (Oct. 27 to Nov. 3, 2025): Just in time for spooky season, stock up on horror games, such as Five Nights at Freddy’s: Secret of the Mimic, Lies of P, Silent Hill 2 and Resident Evil Village.
Animal Fest (Nov. 10-17, 2025): Go wild and grab cheap titles like Wolf Quest, Nightingale Downs and Goat Simulator.
Sports Fest (Dec. 8-15, 2025): Score goals and great deals with discounts on games like 2K25, FC25 and WWE 2K25.
Real-Time Strategy Fest (was Jan. 20-27, 2025): Reap the rewards of discounted RTS strategy games — you might find Hearts of Iron IV, Manor Lords or DOTA 2 on sale.
Idler Fest (was Feb. 3-10, 2025): If you want to play a video game that lets you progress without too much demanding effort, an idler is a great choice. Examples of what you could find on the cheap include Idle Champions of the Forgotten Realm, Firestone and Rusty’s Retirement.
Couch Co-Op Fest (was Feb. 10-17, 2025): Couch co-op games let you play with friends in the same room. You may see games like It Takes Two, Lego Harry Potter Years 1-4 or Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: The Cowabunga Collection for wallet-friendly prices.
Steam Next Fest February Edition (was Feb. 24 to March 10, 2025): Demos, developer chats and livestreams featuring up-and-coming games.
Visual Novel Fest (was March 3-10, 2025): Stock up your Steam library on graphic novel and anime-adjacent games without breaking the bank. You might see Persona 3 Reload, Phoenix Wright: Ace Attorney Trilogy or Vampire Therapist at attractively low costs.
City Builder & Colony Sim Fest (was March 24-31, 2025): Build your own virtual worlds, and cop titles like Anno 1800, Ages of Empires IV or RimWorld on sale.
Sokoban Fest (was April 21-28, 2025): Pick up some puzzle games like Isles of Sea and Sky or Schein.
Wargames Fest (was April 28 to May 5, 2025): Get your fight on with slashed prices on titles that may include Six Days in Fallujah, Warhammer 40,000: Space Marine 2 and Europa Universalis IV.
Creature Collector Fest (was May 12-19, 2025): If you like Pokémon, you’ll love these discounts on games like Palworld, Digimon World: Next Order and Monster Hunter Stories 2: Wings of Ruin.
Zombies vs. Vampires Fest (was May 26 to June 2, 2025): Unreal deals on the undead and living dead — titles you may see on sale include Resident Evil 4, The House of the Dead Remake and Vampire the Masquerade Bloodlines.
Steam Next Fest June Edition (was June 9-16, 2025): Demos, livestreams and developer chats showcasing upcoming games.
Fishing Fest (was June 16-23, 2025): No fishing license required for these great games. You could see prices sink for games like Bassmaster Fishing, Fishing Planet, Bass Pro Shops Fishing Sim World or Harvest Moon: The Winds of Anthos.
When is the next Steam Next Fest?
There’s an upcoming Steam Next Fest running from Oct. 13 to 20, 2025. The Steam Next Fest highlights upcoming game releases, featuring developer chats, free playable game demos and livestreams. Some of the most played demos from the June 2025 Steam Next Fest included Vindictus: Defying Fate, Solo Leveling: Arise Overdrive and Ferocious. For more, check out the 10 best Steam Next Fest games you need to wishlist.
Here’s what I bought on Steam recently
Moe Long/CNET
So what did I stock up on at a recent Steam Sale? Mass Effect Legendary Edition — three games for $2 apiece was too good a deal to skip. I also snagged Middle-earth: Shadow of War. While I picked up Shadow of Mordor at a previous Steam Sale, I’ve not yet added its sequel to my metaphorical shelf. As a big cinephile and fan of movie tie-in games (like Peter Jackson’s King Kong), I was excited to get Indiana Jones and the Infernal Machine alongside Indiana Jones and the Emperor’s Tomb for $4 total.
Although I own it in EA Origin, I snagged a $1 copy of Alice: Madness Returns, because at that price, it was too juicy a discount to pass up. I grabbed Heavy Rain and Red Dead Redemption during the Steam Spring Sale. I also completed my collection of the Sherlock Holmes games by snagging Sherlock Holmes Chapter One and Sherlock Holmes The Awakened. I snagged Life is Strange: Double Exposure during the 2025 Steam Summer Sale.
How to get the most out of Steam once you’ve ravaged your wallet during a Steam sale
Once you’ve drained your bank account dry on games you’ll likely never play, there’s a lot more you can do with Steam, like sharing your library with friends or family, using Remote Play Together and adding non-Steam games. I suggest installing the Steam Link app on your phone, tablet or streaming device for playing your games away from your PC. You can also game on the go with the Steam Deck or another handheld gaming console like the Asus ROG Ally. Or, you can share your Steam library with up to five family members using Steam Families.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
Despite forecasts for mortgage rates to slowly ease, buying a home is still too expensive for most people. The average 30-year fixed rate has hovered close to 7% for the last seven months, resulting in cost-prohibitive monthly payments.
The average interest rate for a standard 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.81% today, a decrease of -0.06% over the last week. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 6.02%, which is a decrease of -0.03% from the same time last week.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on June 26, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
Lingering inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and kept interest rates steady in 2025, most recently on June 18.
If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market deteriorates, it could prompt the Fed to cut interest rates as soon as September. But prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
Plus, in today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. High home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, are further compounding the pressure on prospective buyers. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
Recent mortgage rate trends
Mortgage rates primarily take their cues from the 10-year Treasury yield, which reflects investors’ collective expectations regarding inflation, labor market health, upcoming monetary policy shifts and the impact of global factors like tariffs. If investors anticipate persistently high inflation or significant government borrowing, they’ll demand higher returns on their bonds, which in turn keeps mortgage rates elevated.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to ease its policy rate, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, homebuyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
What is the outlook for mortgage rates in 2025?
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, economic and political instability have kept it stuck in neutral.
Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Meanwhile, the “lock-in” effect, where current homeowners with low-rate mortgages are reluctant to sell and take on higher interest rates, has kept housing inventory tight and fueled price competition in high-demand areas.
According to Smith, mortgage rates could move lower slowly and steadily, but numerous risks could also keep rates elevated. Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.1% by the end of 2025 and 5.8% by the end of 2026.
How can I choose a mortgage term?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
The 30-year fixed-mortgage rate average is 6.81% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 6.02%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 adjustable-rate mortgage has an average rate of 6.02% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I get the lowest mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
The new Liquid Glass design language — inspired by VisionOS on the Vision Pro headset — is coming for all of your Apple devices. iPhone owners can either install the developer beta now or wait until the fall to see what’s in store. Obviously, it looks good, but it provides some meaningful updates to what you have on your iPhone right now that will soon make it feel even better to use, thanks to its updated responsiveness.
This upgrade from iOS 18 actually isn’t as dramatic as it might initially seem. Visually, at least. (Right, Apple is skipping 19 and the other intervening numbers.) Think of it as touch-up rather than reconstructive surgery, with iOS 26’s other, more mundane features tucked underneath.
Liquid Glass on the home screen is a fairly minimal change, which is a good thing. We’re only at the first developer beta of the new OS and design, though, and Apple will undoubtedly make tweaks until its final release.
Below, we’ll take a closer look at both iOS 26 and iOS 18 to see what’s different between the two. For more, here’s why you might want to hold off installing the iOS 26 developer beta.
Home screen
Apple kept the new Liquid Glass minimal on the home screen, with only minor changes to the default home screen appearance versus iOS 18’s.
Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson
Looking at the home screens, the primary difference you’ll find is that in iOS 26 the background of the dock and the search option that sits in between the dock and the home screen icons are more transparent and have a sheen to the edges, whereas in iOS 18, these are slightly darker.
Other smaller changes are that the icons on iOS 26 look slightly larger, and some app icons seem to have been more influenced by the redesign than others, most notably (from the screenshots) Settings, Camera and Mail.
For Liquid Glass to really shine on the home screen, you’ll want to opt for the “All Clear” mode, which will create the most dramatic change to your icons and widgets. Going this route could potentially introduce some viewability issues, but the “reduce transparency” setting remedies this quite well.
Control Center
Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson
Things here are largely unchanged. Outside of the new glassy look in iOS 26, the 1×2 and 2×1 controls are more rounded than that of iOS 18.
Lock screen
Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson
It’s easy to see the differences that Liquid Glass brings to the lock screen of the iPhone. The digital clock in iOS 26 dynamically resizes depending on the wallpaper and the number of notifications you have at any given moment, which is pretty cool. The clock itself on iOS 18 can be changed, but it won’t change in size in response to content displayed on the lock screen.
The background on notifications is clearly different between the two OS versions, with iOS 18 providing more opacity and a black text versus iOS 26’s near-transparent background on white text. The controls at the bottom in iOS 26 also appear more like physical buttons with depth and more of a see-through background.
The new unlock effect in iOS 26 is that the motion of unlocking your iPhone will appear as though you’re lifting a sheet of glass, highlighted by a shiny edge to give it form when you begin to slide your finger up.
Menus and dynamic tab bars
iOS 26’s new Dynamic Tab gives you a cleaner look and more space to view your content.
Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson
A new addition in iOS 26 is the introduction of dynamic tab bars in apps that will change depending on whether you’re scrolling or trying to perform a specific action. Apple says this will create a more intuitive experience while freeing up space for your content. If you were to replace the glass effect with heavily saturated colors, no one would blame you for mistaking this new tab bar with what Google’s doing in Android 16 in some of its apps — they look a lot alike. But compared to iOS 18, this new dynamic tab bar should not only reduce sifting through multiple menus, but it looks pretty good in the process.
iOS 26 will dynamically adapt to light and dark backgrounds
In iOS 26, the color of menu icons and icon text will adapt depending on the background.
Apple/GIF by CNET
While it’s harder to compare Liquid Glass to iOS 18 here, an upcoming feature is that buttons and menus will adapt depending on the content’s background color. For instance, when you’re scrolling through an app with a light background, the floating menu options will appear with black text for easier viewing and will automatically change to white upon scrolling to a dark background.
in iOS 18, some apps aspects of the user interface would appear darker depending on the color of the background, but less so than how Liquid Glass handles it now.
CNET/ Screenshots by Jeff Carlson
iOS has had this type of feature show up in a less dramatic fashion before, as you can tell from the photos app screenshots above. Comparing these to what’s on the horizon, it’s hard not to get excited about the small tweaks Liquid Glass has in store, too.
Those are just a few of our initial findings, and we’ll likely add more once we surface them. If you want more about iOS 26, check out three upcoming features that are a bigger deal than Liquid Glass.
Robot vacuums make life easier by handling one of the most tedious household chores: cleaning the floors. They dodge furniture, avoid cables and even mop up messes without much help. But as smart as they are, they still need a little attention to keep doing their job well.
After days — or weeks — of collecting dust, crumbs and pet hair, these machines start to show signs of wear. Brushes get tangled, sensors get dirty and charging contacts can stop working as smoothly. The good news is that with just a few minutes of routine maintenance, your robot vacuum can stay in top shape and keep your floors spotless for the long haul. Here’s how to clean and care for it the right way.
Specifically, you’ll want to focus on the upkeep of its wheels, main brush and side brushes. I connected with Ryan Stocking, Roomba product manager at iRobot, via email to get some expert-approved tips for caring for your trusty robot vac.
For more vacuum cleaning tips, check out these five ways to help your robot vacuum clean even better. There’s also our guide to help you choose between buying a robot or a cordless vacuum, or the cheapest vacuums we recommend.
Why do you need to clean your robot vacuum?
Isn’t the whole point of a vacuum that it does the cleaning? While it may be frustrating to have to clean your cleaning tool, regular maintenance has serious benefits; principally, increasing the longevity of your device’s efficiency. We all know the feeling of firing up a once-great vacuum only to find it’s become a relic of its former self, but there are ways to mitigate that.
The lifespan of a robot vacuum varies depending on the frequency of use, floor conditions and importantly, user maintenance. With proper care and cleaning, your robot vacuum can last a long time, according to Stocking.
Vacuum cleaners last about eight years, according to a Consumer Reports survey, but the lifespan can vary to 10 or more years based on how often you use your vacuum and how regularly you maintain it. If you’re unsure of when to replace your vacuum, follow our guide for warning signs to know if it’s time to buy or upgrade to a new one.
How to clean your robot vacuum
If you’re unsure of where to start cleaning your robot vac, it’s recommended that you reference the maintenance guide provided by the manufacturer. Your specific robot vacuum model may require specific care. There is a fairly uniform cleaning routine needed no matter the brand or style
“Generally, maintenance includes cleaning or replacing air filters, inspecting and cleaning the brushes and rollers, and occasionally wiping down sensors located on the bottom of the robot, such as the cliff detect sensors and charging contacts,” Stocking stated. Modern, Wi-Fi-connected robot vacuums can also provide maintenance tips and reminders via the companion app, even offering health status updates on various components, such as filters and roller brushes.”
Every so often, you’ll need to deep clean your robot vacuum’s brushes.
Tyler Lizenby/CNET
How often should you clean out your robot vacuum?
Your robot vac likely came with a guide on the recommended frequency of cleaning procedures, so be sure to reference that first, but the timelines are usually straightforward and consistent from model to model.
The frequency for robot vacuum maintenance procedures ranges:
Daily: Emptying the bin, checking wheels for stuck debris.
Weekly: Cleaning brush rolls and wheels.
Monthly: Charging contacts and cliff sensors; removing and deep cleaning the brushes.
Stocking said iRobot specifically provides illustrated guidance on how to perform common maintenance procedures, which are also available in the iRobot Home App. Other robot vac brands like Dreametech, Roborock and Eufy also provide extensive usual manuals that cover how best you should upkeep and maintain your device.
How to care for robot vacuum wheels
When robot vacuum wheels get grimy, caked with dirt, or tangled with hair, they don’t turn as well, which means your little machine won’t move as efficiently and could even scratch your floors.
To keep the wheels spinning, check for any threads or hairs wrapped around the axles at least once a week. If there’s a buildup, you can use a utility knife or scissors to cut the debris free.
Next, check to see if anything is stuck to the wheels. If you have kids or pets, you know there’s no end to the sticky gunk that can potentially be run over and become caked to the bottom of a robot vacuum. If you find some, wipe the wheels down with a damp cloth. Clean wheels get better traction and prevent strain on the vacuum’s motor, which will ultimately extend the life of your machine.
If dusty, take a cloth to clean the underside and wheels of your robot vacuum.
Tyler Lizenby/CNET
How to clean a robot vacuum’s main brush
All robot vacuums — whether it’s a Roomba, Shark, Botvac or another popular brand — have at least one main brush that pulls dirt, lint and hair into the dust chamber. Like the wheels, the main brush can get entangled with hair, strings and other debris. After every use, check the main brush and cut away anything wrapped around it. Be careful not to cut the bristles as you work.
Once a month you should remove the main brush completely and hand wash it in warm water and mild dish soap. Give it a good rinse, then let it air dry fully before putting it back into the robot vacuum.
How to care for the robot vacuum side brush
Side brushes on robot vacuums are great at pulling debris from baseboards and can get hair tangled around them sometimes.
Chris Wedel/CNET
The side brushes on a robot vacuum are smaller than the main brush and are tasked with pulling debris into the main brush’s reach. These smaller brushes will need some extra care to keep working well, too.
After a while, you may notice that these brushes can become warped or even tangled. Luckily, you can straighten them back out without much effort.
Here’s a little hack I’ve worked out over the years: Simply heat the plastic bristles for a few seconds with a hair dryer set on high. Once they’re warm, coax the bristles back into position with your fingers. Hold them in position for a few seconds until they cool, which will set them back in place.
The bottom line
Whether you work from home, travel frequently, live alone or with a family and pets, robot vacuums are a convenient addition to your daily cleaning routine. They can make life so easy, but only if you’re willing to put in a little work each week to keep them running the right way. Simply put, a few minutes of extra maintenance every week or so will keep your robot vacuum humming along for years to come so you can make the very most of your robot vac investment.
For more vacuum tips, explore the best Roomba alternatives to keep your floors clean and the best robot vacuum deals available now. You can also explore the proper way to vacuum your floor.
Watch this: How to pick out a robot vacuum: Find the one that fits your needs and budget
Until recently, reviewing the interest earned on my savings account was a snoozefest. If I was lucky, my balance increased a whole cent or two each month.
Interest rates — like temperatures — are high right now. You just need to look in the right place. Instead of the meager annual percentage yield I’m getting with my current savings account, I can net up to 4.5% APY with one of today’s top CDs. That means my interest earnings can grow exponentially, instead of limping along like they are now.
But, as with temps, what goes up must eventually go down. The Federal Reserve held interest rates steady at last week’s meeting, but it could begin cutting rates as early as July. So, I’m moving my money to a CD ASAP, before things start to cool.
Read more: This Shockingly Simple Trick Doubled My Savings in One Year
Low risk, guaranteed returns? Yes, please!
CDs aren’t exciting, and they won’t make you rich overnight. But boring and predictable can be a good thing, especially in today’s economy, when people are scared to invest and nervous to spend. Stock market swings, tariff fallout and stupidly high prices are making savers run to safety.
When you lock up your savings into a CD for a set term and leave it untouched, your earnings are guaranteed. Your APY won’t drop even if overall interest rates drop. It’s a quiet, easy way to get a little extra cash, kind of like discovering a $10 bill in your jeans pocket every month.
Watch this: These Are the Safest Places to Keep Your Money Right Now
Why now’s the time to lock in your APY
The Fed left its benchmark interest rate unchanged at last week’s meeting on June 18. Experts say the central bank will keep borrowing rates high for a couple of months, with most saying a rate cut won’t come until its Sept. 17 meeting. But they don’t rule out the possibility of a cut as early as July 30.
After the Fed hiked its benchmark interest rate several times between 2022 and 2023, many banks raised the rates they were offering for savings accounts and CDs to attract more customers and boost their cash flow. Once the Fed started cutting rates last year, banks started lowering their APYs so they wouldn’t have to pay as much interest to customers.
Bottom line? If you have extra money, move it somewhere safe so it can actually grow.
High-yield savings accounts also earn big
If you think you’ll need access to your money, a high-yield savings account could be a better fit. Most CDs impose a penalty if you pull out your funds before the maturity date, but a HYSA is more flexible, allowing you to add deposits and withdraw funds as needed.
Some APYs on high-yield savings accounts are also in the 4% range, making them a better option over traditional savings accounts. But, unlike a CD, HYSAs don’t lock in your interest rate, so your returns are variable and less predictable.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
Daily volatility aside, it’s looking increasingly like that average 30-year fixed rates will remain stuck above 6.5% in the coming months.
The average 30-year fixed mortgage interest rate is 6.88% today, down -0.05% since one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 6.08%, which is a decrease of -0.02% from the same time last week.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on June 24, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
Lingering inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and kept interest rates steady in 2025, most recently on June 18.
If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market deteriorates, it could prompt the Fed to cut interest rates as early as this fall. But prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
Plus, in today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. Prospective buyers still have to contend with high home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
What’s going on with mortgage rates right now?
Mortgage rates primarily take their cues from the 10-year Treasury yield, which reflects investors’ collective expectations regarding inflation, labor market health, upcoming monetary policy shifts and the impact of global factors like tariffs. If investors anticipate persistently high inflation or significant government borrowing, they’ll demand higher returns on their bonds, which in turn keeps mortgage rates elevated.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to reduce borrowing rates, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, homebuyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Where are mortgage rates headed?
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, economic and political instability have kept it stuck in neutral.
Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Meanwhile, the “lock-in” effect, where current homeowners with low-rate mortgages are reluctant to sell and take on higher interest rates, has kept housing inventory tight and fueled price competition in high-demand areas.
According to Smith, home loan rates could decline slowly and steadily, but numerous risks could also keep rates elevated. Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.1% by the end of 2025 and 5.8% by the end of 2026.
How can I choose a mortgage term?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
For a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.88% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 6.08%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 adjustable-rate mortgage has an average rate of 6.04% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I find the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
New renders of the rumored Galaxy Z Flip7 FE phone, a cheaper alternative to last year’s Z Flip 6, have hit the internet via notable leaker Evan Blass. The images were shared Monday on smartphone news site Phone Arena.
The FE stands for Founders Edition and is Samsung’s way of offering comparable devices with slightly weakened specs for more affordable prices. Past FE phones include the Samsung Galaxy S24 FE and the Galaxy Tab S10 FE and FE Plus.
The renders show off a device that looks very similar to the Galaxy Z Flip 6, appearing in white and black colorways. Phone Arena reports that the Flip 6 FE will have similar hardware as last year’s Flip 6 but may swap out the Snapdragon chip for a Samsung-made Exynos processor.
Blass also sharedf renders of the flagship Galaxy Z Flip 7 which, if accurate, will drop the camera cutaway and feature the screen running edge-to-edge, with cutouts for the cameras, much like the Motorola Razr Ultra 2025.
Foldable phones, once $2,000 devices, have slowly started creeping downwards in price as designs have improved and more players have entered the space. Despite more foldable phones entering the market, it’s still a smaller piece of the overall larger smartphone pie.
Trendforce predicted last year that 17.8 million foldables would ship in 2024, making up only 1.5% of overall smartphone shipments. Foldable phone shipments actually decreased 1%, making it the segment’s first-ever Q3 decline, according to Counterpoint Research. That decline was attributed to weak performance from the Samsung’s Z Flip 6, which was a mild improvement over 2023’s model.
While Samsung is the foldable market global leader at 56% share, the Z Flip and Fold 6 saw shipments fall 21%. With more exciting handsets coming out of China, where Samsung has a smaller presence, consumers might be holding out for either cheaper prices or more exciting designs. Already, rumors claim that Apple might be readying its own foldable device, which may expand the market as well as pull share from Samsung.
Some foldable phones are seeing more affordable price points, notably, the new Motorola Razr 2025, which has a starting price of $700. If the rumored Z Flip 7 FE can match or undercut Motorola, that could entice some consumers.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
With mortgage rates stuck near 7%, it’s not shaping up to be a hot summer housing market.
The average for a 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.83% today, a decrease of -0.06% since one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 6.04%, which is a decrease of -0.03% from the same time last week.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on June 23, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
Lingering inflation, threats of a global trade war and policy turbulence have created an uncertain economic outlook. In response, the Federal Reserve has adopted a wait-and-see approach and left interest rates unchanged this year, most recently on June 18.
If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market deteriorates, it could prompt the Fed to cut interest rates as soon as September. But prospective homebuyers shouldn’t expect mortgage rates to become affordable overnight. While cheaper borrowing costs gradually trickle down to the housing market, the Fed doesn’t directly set lenders’ mortgage rates.
Plus, in today’s unaffordable housing market, mortgage rates are just one piece of the puzzle. Prospective buyers still have to contend with high home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses. The possibility of a job-loss recession is also pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
Are mortgage rates considered high right now?
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which responds to investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
Even as the Fed eventually starts to ease its policy rate, experts caution that significant market volatility is likely. As a result, homebuyers are adopting a more patient and strategic approach to financing, comparing various loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Smith.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Will we see lower mortgage rates in 2025?
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, economic and political instability have kept it stuck in neutral.
Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Meanwhile, the “lock-in” effect, where current homeowners with low-rate mortgages are reluctant to sell and take on higher interest rates, has kept housing inventory tight and fueled price competition in high-demand areas.
According to Smith, mortgage rates could move lower slowly and steadily, but numerous risks could also keep rates elevated. Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.1% by the end of 2025 and 5.8% by the end of 2026.
How can I choose a mortgage term?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
For a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage, the average rate you’ll pay is 6.83% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 6.04%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 adjustable-rate mortgage has an average rate of 6.08% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
Where can I find the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
Whether you call it a comedy or a drama, The Bear is about to let it rip once again. The Emmy-winning series, which represents the food service industry with urgent authenticity, follows Chef Carmen “Carmy” Berzatto (Jeremy Allen White) as he follows his mission to transform his brother’s sandwich spot into a fine-dining, Michelin-starred restaurant.
The last time we checked in with Carmy, a potentially scathing review of their newly reopened restaurant left The Bear’s future in question. The season 3 finale ended with an abrupt thud, leaving many questions unanswered, with viewers clamoring to know what exactly happened. New episodes are nearly here so it looks like we’ll finally find out.
Returning alongside White are Ayo Edebiri, Ebon Moss-Bachrach, Abby Elliott, Lionel Boyce, Liza Colón-Zayas and Matty Matheson, with Oliver Platt, Molly Gordon and Jamie Lee Curtis reprising their supporting roles. As for the celebrity cameos we’ll potentially see this season, your guess is as good as mine.
Read on to find out when to watch season 4 of The Bear.
Read more: Hulu Review: Strong Library of Network TV and Exciting Originals at a Competitive Price
Ebon Moss-Bachrach as Richard “Richie” Jerimovich opposite Jeremy Allen White’s Carmen “Carmy” Berzatto in season 4 of The Bear.
FX
When to watch The Bear season 4 on Hulu
All 10 episodes of season 4 will premiere at once on Wednesday, June 25, on Hulu and Hulu on DisneyPlus. Considering the demand for new episodes, FX may decide to premiere them early, like it did with season 3. Keep your eyes peeled and we will update you accordingly if that happens.
You can choose from two Hulu plans. The ad-supported version costs $10 a month or $100 a year. If you prefer to skip the commercials, you can sign up for the ad-free version, which costs $19 monthly and does not offer an annual payment option.
Your iPhone will get some UI updates later this year when iOS 26 is released in the fall. Apple announced its new Liquid Glass design style at WWDC, with the new OS likely to drop in September. But if you want to give your phone a little boost before then, try clearing your cache.
Your cache specifically affects your web browsing experience, not the rest of your device, but it’s still a useful bump. In general, clearing your cache gives your browsers a fresh start, which they usually need after a month or so.
Your browser cache is kind of like a digital mini fridge. Whether you use Chrome, Safari, Firefox or another browser, the cache stores page elements locally to speed up your next visit. It’s great for grabbing a digital snack or drink without having to trek all the way to the kitchen — at least, until the mini fridge gets overstocked with expired food, which in this analogy is outdated page elements.
Clearing your cache is the equivalent of cleaning out that mini fridge. You’ll have to restock it (your first visit after you clear your iPhone cache might be a bit slower), but once you do, you’ll have a better experience than before.
What happens when you clear your cache?
Clearing your cache usually involves clearing website cookies, too. Cookies work similarly to browser caches, except they store information about user data, rather than data on the website itself. Clearing your cookies gives you a chance to reset those preferences, which could improve your browsing experience. Note that clearing your cache and cookies will log you out of sites, which means you’ll have to log into them again and reset any preferences. The up-front investment of that time can lead to a smoother experience down the road, and it can be a useful fix if you’ve recently changed settings that aren’t being applied properly.
Here are step-by-step guides on how to clear your iPhone’s cache, depending on the browser you prefer.
How to clear your iPhone cache in Safari
Safari is the default browser on iPhones, and you can clear your Safari cache in a few short steps. Starting with iOS 11, following this process will affect all devices signed in to your iCloud account. As a result, all your devices’ caches will be cleared, and you’ll need to sign in to everything the next time you use them. Here’s what to do.
1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone.
2. Select Apps >Safari.
3. Scroll down to History and Website Data and choose Clear History and Website Data.
4. Choose Clear History and Data in the pop-up box — you can choose anywhere from the last hour to all history.
Then you’re set!
Screenshot by Adam Benjamin/CNET
How to clear your iPhone cache in Chrome
Chrome is another popular browser for iPhone users. Google has simplified the process for clearing your Chrome cache, making it much faster to clear your data.
1. Open the Chrome app.
2. Select the three dots in the bottom right to open more options.
3. Swipe over to Settings in the top menu bar.
4. Scroll down and tap Privacy and security.
5. Tap Delete browsing data to open up another menu. Select the intended time range at the top of the menu (anywhere from Last 15 minutes to All time). Make sure that Cookies and Site Data are checked, along with Cached Images and Files. Finally, hit Delete data at the bottom of the screen.
Screenshot by Adam Benjamin/CNET
How to clear your iPhone cache in Firefox
If you’re a Firefox devotee, don’t worry. Clearing the cache on your iPhone is straightforward. Just follow these steps.
1. Press the hamburger menu in the bottom right corner to open up options.
2. Choose Settings at the bottom of the menu.
3. Select Data Management in the Privacy section.
4. To clear everything, choose Web Site Data at the top of the menu and then Clear All Web SiteData. Alternatively, you can choose to clear just your browsing history, cache, cookies, offline web data, tracking protection or offline files.
Screenshot by Adam Benjamin/CNET
How often do I need to clear my cache?
Most people only need to clear their caches once every month or two. That’s generally the point when your browser will build up a cache large enough to start slowing things down. If you frequent a large number of sites, you should err on the side of clearing your cache more often.
Summer 2025 is already breaking heat records across the US, with temperatures climbing higher earlier than expected. If you’re spending time outdoors, whether for work or recreation, it’s critical to know the risks of heat-related illness. Heatstroke, the most dangerous of them, can set in quickly and become life-threatening without warning.
It doesn’t just happen to athletes or people doing intense physical activity. Classic heatstroke can occur simply by being in a hot environment for too long. According to the U.S. Department of Labor, people who work outside are especially vulnerable in the first few days of exposure, because the body needs time to adapt to rising temperatures. As the heat intensifies this summer, understanding how to spot and respond to heatstroke could be the most important safety step you take.
In addition to workers, heatstroke is especially common among the elderly, very young children, including babies, and in times “when we see these heat waves that go on for several days,” Dr. Korin Hudson, an emergency room physician with MedStar Health, told CNET last year.
People with certain medical conditions and those taking certain medications or drugs, including alcohol, may also have a higher risk of heatstroke.
Here’s what to know if you or someone near you starts experiencing symptoms of heatstroke.
Heatstroke symptoms
Sometimes, heatstroke can start with symptoms of heat exhaustion, which isn’t quite as serious as heatstroke but still requires someone to cool down as quickly as possible. If left untreated, heat exhaustion can progress to heatstroke, which is a medical emergency. If your symptoms worsen, last more than one hour or you start vomiting, call 911.
Altered mental state, including confusion, agitation and slurred speech (this may also result in “odd” behavior)
Headache
Hot, flushed, usually dry skin (or, alternatively, heavy sweating — if brought on by exercise, heatstroke may include moist skin)
Loss of consciousness
Racing heartbeat
Rapid breathing
Seizures
Very high body temperature
Vomiting
Keeping hydrated by drinking enough water, both before you head outdoors and while you’re out in the heat, is an important step to warding off heat illness.
Peter Cade/Getty Images
1. Call 911
Having heatstroke is a medical emergency that requires professional care.
If there’s more than one person around to aid the person suffering heatstroke, Hudson advised that one person call 911 while the other helps the person through the steps below.
2. Get to a cooler area immediately
If you’re around someone who has heatstroke, move them to a cooler area, such as a nearby air-conditioned room or into the shade.
Either way, “try to move them out of the heat as quickly as possible,” Hudson said. The goal is to cool down the body’s core temperature.
3. Take off excess clothing
Removing long-sleeve shirts, pants or other clothing will help a person cool down faster. Hudson said the goal is to reach “evaporative cooling,” and clothing can prevent evaporation.
(For people who choose to run in layers to “sweat off weight,” Hudson said, you probably shouldn’t. It’s dangerous and can lead to heatstroke. You may consider cooling clothes that work with your body to keep you cooler and more comfortable.)
4. Hold ice, cold towels or cool water to the skin
If you have something like a cold towel or a water bottle, put it on your or the other person’s neck, armpits or groin.
While you wait for help to arrive, you can even spray them down with cold water or put them in a cold shower — anything to cool them off. Cold water immersion or an ice bath is one treatment for heatstroke that doctors may use at the hospital.
Don’t force a drink on someone experiencing heatstroke, the CDC says. This is different advice than for someone who’s experiencing heat exhaustion, which typically comes before heatstroke. While someone with heat exhaustion may be given sips of water or sports drink, a person experiencing heatstroke may be confused, lose consciousness or have an altered state of consciousness.
“Because they have a depressed or altered level of consciousness, it may affect their ability to swallow safely so it’s probably better not to give them anything to eat or drink,” Hudson said.
Create your own air conditioning unit with this summer staple
See all photos
Before and after heatstroke: Check on your neighbors
Some people are more susceptible to heat illness and heatstroke, such as older adults, younger children, people with mobility issues, certain health conditions and those taking certain medications, including common drugs like blood pressure or antidepressant medications.
In case of a heat wave, be especially mindful to check in with your elderly neighbor down the hall or a friend who has trouble getting around, according to Hudson.
“This is the time that we really suggest people check on their neighbors,” she said. “Especially in places where people don’t have access to air conditioning or don’t have a way to get someplace cool.”
“They may be feeling poorly but can’t do anything about it,” Hudson added.
Of all the questions about the rumored iPhone 17, there’s one that could settle all others: When is the release date?
All of the predictions and speculation about battery power, colors, price and more will be resolved when Apple releases the new iPhone, including the rumored iPhone Air. But even the release date is the subject of leaks and rumors.
We’ve sifted through the whispers, analysis and conjecture so you can know when the new iPhone will be released and when you can expect to get your hands on one.
Read more: Ready to Buy a New iPhone? Here’s Why You Should Wait
Watch this: Hey, Apple: Steal These S25 Edge Features for a Skinny iPhone
When will the iPhone 17 be released?
For nearly a decade, Apple has announced its new iPhone lineup in early September. (The only exception was during COVID, when the release was pushed back to Oct. 23, 2020, for the iPhone 12 and 12 Pro and Nov. 13, 2020, for the iPhone 12 Mini and 12 Pro Max.)
Historically, Apple has made the announcement on the first Tuesday of September after Labor Day. However, the first Tuesday in 2025 is the day after Labor Day, so Apple could push the dates for its iPhone event to Wednesday, Sept. 3 or Tuesday, Sept. 9. That would mean a release date of Sept. 12 or 19.
And because the new iPhone typically becomes available for preorder the Friday after, the preorder date could be either Sept. 5 or 12.
Here’s a chart for the potential dates based on past schedules. These are not official dates from Apple:
Potential iPhone 17 schedule
Announcement
Preorder
Release
Wednesday, Sept. 3
Sept. 5
Sept. 12
Tuesday, Sept. 9
Sept. 12
Sept. 19
Will all of the new iPhones be released in the fall?
Based on last year’s release, Apple may release everything in the fall except its least expensive option — this year, the iPhone 16E. The iPhone 16E was released in February, and Apple is widely expected to follow the same format for the rumored iPhone 17.
That would mean the iPhone 17 Pro Max, iPhone 17 Pro, iPhone 17 Air and the iPhone 17 base model — if that’s the lineup — would be released in September. The iPhone 17E — if it exists — would be released in February.
Apple’s future iPhone release dates
Apple is expected to change its release format with the rumored iPhone 18. Reports suggest that Apple will only release higher-end models in fall 2026 — iPhone 18 Pro, Pro Max, Air and a rumored new foldable iPhone — and release the rest of the line in winter 2027.
Why does Apple split iPhone release dates?
By pushing its top-of-the-line Pro and Pro Max models in September, Apple can capture much of the holiday shopping season. Releasing the more basic models in the winter allows a second crest of excitement, but diehard fans and holiday shoppers will have already spent their money on the pricier models in the fall.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition is a puzzler. Think about logos you’ve seen on uniform designs, and you’ll solve the blue category. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: That hurts.
Green group hint: Sparks and Sun also fit.
Blue group hint: Look closely at the uniforms.
Purple group hint: Bette and Sammy, outside of sports.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Soreness.
Green group: WNBA teams.
Blue group: Items in MLB team logos.
Purple group: ____ Davis.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for Saturday, June 21, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is soreness. The four answers are ache, discomfort, spasm and twinge.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is WNBA teams. The four answers are Fever, Lynx, Mystics and Storm.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is items in MLB team logos. The four answers are halo, Liberty Bell, skyline and socks.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is ____ Davis. The four answers are Anthony, Baron, Chili and Crash.
Orlando may be home to the most magical place on Earth and a new Epic Universe of attractions, but for those of us who call it home, internet options can be a bit less cheery. CNET recommends Spectrum for being the best internet in Orlando. More so for areas without fiber access, due to the cable giant’s broad coverage and relatively affordable internet. Plans in certain parts of Orlando start as low as $25 per month, and Spectrum brings the option of gigabit internet to about 90% of the city.
If you’re looking for fiber internet, AT&T and Quantum Fiber are solid options, especially within Orlando proper and to the north in Altamonte Springs, Winter Springs and Oviedo. Meanwhile, Verizon and T-Mobile offer 5G home internet, but coverage varies — Verizon is stronger in outlying areas, while T-Mobile covers both urban and suburban spots, though speeds may dip near tourist hotspots.
Orlando may be known for its theme parks, but when it comes to internet, your options are just as plentiful.
Best internet in Orlando, Florida, in 2025
Orlando internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
CenturyLink Read full review
DSL
$55
10-100Mbps
$15 modem
None
None
6.7
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$25-$70
50-1,000Mbps
Free modem, $10 router (optional) on lower plans
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($40-$55 for eligible mobile customers)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Quantum Fiber
Fiber
$50-$95
500-2,000Mbps
None
None
None
6.7
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with qualifying Verizon 5G mobile plans)
50-250Mbps (varies by location)
None
None
None
7.2
Xfinity Read full review
Cable
$40-$100
400-2,000Mbps (varies by location)
$15-$25 included in some plans
1.2TB on some plans
None
7
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available Orlando internet providers
CenturyLink: DSL internet service from CenturyLink is an option throughout much of the regions surrounding Orlando to the north, west and south, but availability is scarce in the city. Service costs a flat $55 per month with no data caps or preset price increases, which are pretty appealing by home internet standards. Speeds will vary from address to address; in most parts of the coverage map, they won’t exceed double digits. Unless you have your own equipment, you’ll also need to spend $15 monthly to rent the gateway device that brings your home online.
Quantum Fiber: With speeds that typically won’t surpass double digits, CenturyLink’s DSL plans are pretty ho-hum as far as home internet is concerned — but CenturyLink’s parent company, Lumen Technologies, also offers fiber internet service in the Orlando area, and that’s where things get interesting. Branded as Quantum Fiber, the service offers matching upload and download speeds of 500Mbps for $50 per month, equipment rental included. A faster gigabit plan with download speeds of 940Mbps is also available at some addresses for $75 monthly. Those plans don’t come with data caps or prescheduled price increases after one year, making them an excellent option — if they’re available at your address.
Satellite internet: Satellite internet from Hughesnet or Viasat is available pretty much anywhere. Still, you shouldn’t expect fast speeds or low latency, given that your traffic needs to go to space and back. You shouldn’t expect value, either. Satellite internet often comes with steep equipment costs and tight data caps. Depending on your provider, it may also come with long-term service contracts. Your other option is Starlink, the satellite internet service from SpaceX and Elon Musk. It doesn’t come with soft data caps like Hughesnet and Viasat plans do, and the speeds will likely be a bit higher than either of those competitors. The upfront equipment cost of $349 and monthly rate of $120 are tough pills to swallow.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Verizon is putting more of a focus on 5G with its service, which means that the range of potential speeds at your address is notably higher than you’ll see from T-Mobile. That also means that fewer addresses will have the right kind of signal strength to even be eligible for service. If you’re planning on going with 5G, Verizon’s potential for faster speeds means it’s worth checking to see if it’s available at your address. This is especially true for existing Verizon mobile subscribers, who may be able to sign up for home internet service for $35-$55.
Cheap internet options in Orlando
In most cases, home internet starts at about $50 per month in Orlando, although some residents within Spectrum’s footprint will be able to sign up for internet service at $25 per month if they qualify for Internet Assist, which is the most affordable starting rate in the city. Here’s a look at how all of the top providers’ most affordable plans compare:
What’s the cheapest plan in Orlando?
Provider
Starting monthly price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Spectrum Internet Assist Read full review
$25
50Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Spectrum Internet Advantage Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$40
500Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Xfinity Connect More Read full review
$40
400Mbps
$25 gateway rental (optional, included for 12 months)
Quantum Fiber 500
$50
500Mbps
None
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plan)
85Mbps
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($40 with eligible mobile plan)
318Mbps
None
Xfinity Fast Read full review
$55
600Mbps
$25 gateway rental (optional, included for 12 months)
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
Show more (4 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
John Coletti/Getty Images
How fast is broadband in Orlando?
Among US metro regions, the Orlando area ranks 59th as far as median internet speeds go, with an average household download speed of 355Mbps, according to the speed-testing site Ookla. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.) That’s just an average; how fast can things get in an ideal scenario?
How many members of your household use the internet?
Pretty darned fast, actually. Multiple providers in the Orlando area now claim to offer multi-gigabit speeds at select addresses with the right fiber wiring. They aren’t widespread yet, but here’s how those speeds stack up against the fastest plans from all of the top providers in the area:
Fastest internet plans in Orlando
Provider
Starting monthly price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit Extra Read full review
$100
1,300-2,000Mbps (speeds vary by location)
40Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Xfinity Gigabit Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
40Mbps
1.2TB
Cable
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Quantum Fiber
$95
2,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Show more (2 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Orlando
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. What’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We go to the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answer to those questions is often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our how we test ISPs page.
Internet providers in Orlando FAQ
How fast is home internet in Orlando?
Does Orlando have Google Fiber?
Is fiber internet better than cable internet?
Fiber-optic internet offers significantly faster speeds than cable internet, particularly upload speeds, and it’s less prone to slowdowns during periods of peak network usage. Fiber internet plans are also typically priced similarly to cable internet plans, so they also tend to offer more speed for your dollar.
We’re half a decade into foldable phones, with plenty of devices from Samsung, Google and Motorola (as well as others from Oppo, Huawei and more) for consumers to choose between. Yet among big phone makers, only Apple still lacks one in its lineup. The latest flexible-screen devices, like the Galaxy Z Fold 6, the Motorola Razr Plus reboot and the Pixel 9 Pro Fold show mature designs and robust bending displays, leaving the foldables niche handily dominated by Android devices. Recurring leaks and rumors suggest Apple is still developing its own folding device, which we’ll refer to it as the iPhone Flip until a proper name is revealed.
The iPhone 16 series launched in September 2024 with an AI camera button and AI features in iOS 18 that are still rolling out, and the more affordable iPhone 16E launched with Apple’s first in-house modem. Still, we’ve yet to see any official word on a foldable iPhone. Apple’s recent focus has been on Apple Intelligence, a suite of generative AI tools now in the iPhone 16 and the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max, which is also coming to updates for Apple devices in other product families. Apple might be slowly tinkering away at a folding iPhone while software and AI have taken center stage during its product showcases.
Some rumors have even suggested that Apple is working on foldable displays for its other portable devices, the iPad and MacBook, though the company may have encountered obstacles. In a post on X back in September, Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo said challenges with folding displays have pushed back mass production of either model to 2027 or even 2028. Since other rumors have suggested the iPhone Flip could come out as early as 2026, we could see an iPhone that folds before an iPad or a MacBook with a flexible display.
It’s unclear if or when Apple will switch focus from AI to bring an iPhone Flip to market, though the most recent rumors suggest progress continues. A report back in July, as covered by The Verge and first reported by The Information, suggests Apple has gone all-in on a clamshell-style foldable iPhone and moved it beyond the concept stage to give it a code name, supposedly internally referring to the device as “the V68.” If all goes well, the iPhone Flip could get a release date as early as 2026, the report said.
The newest rumor reaffirms the possible 2026 release window for the iPhone Flip, with noted Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo posting on X production may kick off next year. Market rumors suggest Apple has placed orders for 15-20 million iPhones to be sold in 2026 and the following years, Kuo continued, though with many components like the hinge not yet being finalized and assembly supplier Foxconn not officially starting the project yet (they’re expected to begin in the third or fourth quarter of this year), this timeline could shift.
This follows Kuo’s report in early March that Apple’s device could launch at the end of next year and will have a 7.8-inch crease-free inner display and 5.5-inch outer display — which would make it a book-style foldable like Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold 6 rather than a clamshell foldable, as other rumors have suggested Apple was focusing on.
Accordingly, Kuo believes the price would match other similar folding devices at $2,000 to $2,500. Despite that high price tag, he says projected shipments are 3 to 5 million devices initially, which is a confident estimate given only 19.3 foldables were sold in 2024, market research firm IDC reported.
Watch this: iPhone Flip: What Apple’s Foldable Future Could Look Like
This reaffirms previous rumors and news. A new patent granted to Apple last July, which was applied for years ago, shows how long the company has been working on a folding iPhone, although many reports have focused on the company’s struggles to eliminate the crease within the internal folding display. Creases have haunted foldable phones since they started coming out in 2020, and although the most recent Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 6 and Samsung Galaxy Z Flip 6 have reduced the crease, you can still see and feel it.
Previous rumors suggested Apple had been working on iPhone Flip models in two different sizes, though there have been difficulties in making the devices to Apple’s demanding standards. The company may also be working on a folding tablet with a screen around the size of an iPad Mini.
Then again, we may not see an iPhone Flip for years. By mid-2024, market analysts at TrendForce estimated that issues with the display crease might push back an Apple foldable until 2027, according to 9to5Mac. Prior rumors said Apple may not launch its own flexible screen device until 2025, and Samsung hasn’t let phone fans forget it by releasing an app that will let Apple phone owners experience a Z Fold-esque experience by placing two iPhones side-by-side. At the very least, an investor note seen in August suggests Apple’s foldable may not reach its 2025 schedule for mass production due to display issues, according to MacRumors.
Years ago in 2017, folks predicted that a foldable iPhone could launch in the then-near future of 2020 — which didn’t happen. Analysts and leakers have been kicking the release date down the road ever since, and rumors and wish lists have hung around as phone fans keep their hopes up. Absent any confirmed details from Apple, here’s everything we know so far about the company’s future foray into foldables.
Read more: I Visited Samsung’s Home Turf to See if Foldable Phones Are Really the Future
Two cross-sectional illustrations of potential displays that fold around a recess where a hinge would go, in Apple’s patent (No. 12,041,738).
USPTO
What Apple’s new patent says about the iPhone Flip
After years of rumors that Apple was working on foldable phones, a patent was finally granted to the company that confirmed it’s been working toward a folding iPhone. The 22-page patent (PDF), simply titled “Electronic Devices With Durable Folding Displays,” was filed in November 2021 and granted on July 16, 2024.
Sadly for folding iPhone hopefuls, the patent doesn’t offer much illumination of what an iPhone Flip might look like. Most of the pages show figures depicting cross-sections of potential displays that fold about a hinge, but not the device they’re folding around.
There are some tidbits deeper into the text of the patent that hint at potential design choices Apple might make, like a hinge that holds the display flat when unfolded but which would let the display “slightly fold about the bend axis when the electronic device is jolted during the drop event” — in other words, if dropped, the device would fold inward slightly so that it lands on its edges to protect the inner display.
It’s important to note that all evidence shows Apple working on a foldable iPhone, but the patent broadly applies to folding displays in general — to wit, some figure schematics describe a device that “may be a cellular telephone, tablet computer, laptop computer, wrist-watch device or other wearable device, a television, a stand-alone computer display or other monitor” or screens as far-ranging as on vehicles, in kiosks, in media players or other electronic equipment.
The rest of the patent describes what an Apple device with a folding display may have, and categorically lists things like batteries and wireless charging, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connectivity, LED or LCD displays, microphones and capacitive sensors, haptics and so on. There’s explicit mention of a display folding 180 degrees, or fully flat, which follows most other foldables — presumably, Apple isn’t going to leapfrog the competition in following Samsung’s concept displays we saw at CES that unfold nearly 360 degrees.
Two foldable iPhone Flips?
Foldable iPhone hopefuls will at least be encouraged that Apple seemingly continues to tinker with an iPhone Flip design. The company is said to be working on two sizes of folding iPhones: a book-style and a clamshell-style, according to an older report by The Information, although this may be countermanded by a newer report by the same site suggesting Apple had settled on the latter for a smaller device. This aligns with prior rumors hinting the iPhone Flip will be in the clamshell format like the Samsung Galaxy Z Flip series or Motorola Razr Plus.
It sounds like Apple’s been struggling to meet its high expectations: The company’s design team wants the iPhone Flip to be half as thin as current iPhone models and to have displays on the outside that are visible when the device is folded shut, according to the report.
Development on the iPhone Flip was halted around 2020, the older report noted, in order to focus on a new project, a folding iPad. This device would have an 8-inch display to be around the size of the iPad Mini. The foldable tablet supposedly had less strict durability and thickness requirements, as it wouldn’t need to fit in pockets like an iPhone Flip. Apple was still working on ways to reduce the crease in the middle of the folding display and get the iPad to lie fully flat.
Release date: The iPhone Flip launch could be in 2025… or 2027
The latest indications of an iPhone Flip release date came in June, when analyst Kuo suggested production could kick off in 2026 with phones coming out that year. This follows Kuo’s earlier prediction in March that the company could release a crease-free foldable by the end of 2026. Furthermore, this would likely be a book-style foldable with a 7.8-inch internal display and 5.5-inch external screen, which is counter to other predictions anticipating a clamshell-style foldable.
It’s possible that these timeline predictions apply to one or the other, or due to the vague nature of rumors, even both — that is, Apple could be working on both a book-style and clamshell style foldable, though it’s less clear if release date expectations would be interchangeable or if Apple would stagger their release.
It’s been an open secret for years that Apple is working toward a foldable iPhone. The company has been registering patents for foldable technologies for almost a decade, and while there’s no guarantee that one will come out even after all that research (remember AirPower?), there’s still been buzz and possible release dates floated for years — though still not one solid enough to get excited about.
Early rumors pointed as far back as 2021 as a potential target date, but the year passed with no foldable iPhone in sight. A March 2021 report from longtime Kuo (via MacRumors) suggested 2023 might be more realistic (though that year has come and gone). According to Kuo, Apple still needs to figure out technology and mass production issues before bringing a device like this to market, hence the wait. Speculation later in 2021 from Bloomberg’s Mark Gurman aligned with Kuo’s predictions: In his Power On Newsletter, Gurman said that the foldable iPhone may not arrive for another two to three years.
Since then, new rumors have pointed to an even later release. Reliable display analyst Ross Young said in February 2024 that the foldable iPhone had been pushed back to 2025, and Kuo reaffirmed his predicted release window in a tweet in April 2022.
“Apple may launch its first foldable product in 2025 at the earliest, which may be a foldable iPad or a hybrid of iPad and iPhone,” Kuo wrote in the tweet.
Another rumor, first noticed by MacRumors in February of 2024 by Weibo-based blogger Fixed Focus Digital, suggested that the foldable iPhone project is delayed for the foreseeable future. The problem? Apple, which is rumored to be using Samsung folding panels for its iPhone Flip’s display, was dissatisfied with the screens’ performance after they broke down a few days into testing.
That’s echoed by the most recent estimate by TrendForce market analysts, reported in 9to5Mac, which predicted that an Apple foldable might not be released until 2027 at the earliest. Why? Apple’s strict requirements for reliability and the phone display’s crease. But Kuo’s more recent March 2025 predictions explicitly noted a crease-free foldable display, suggesting Apple might have moved past this roadblock — if all these rumors are to be believed, of course.
Read more: Top Foldable Phones for 2024
Watch this: Foldable Phones May Be the Future. In South Korea, They’re the Present
Design: What will the foldable iPhone look like?
A 2021 report from Bloomberg indicated Apple already had a working prototype of a foldable iPhone display. While it wasn’t a working model, it was a step up from a patent — which, until then, was all we had seen.
This illustration, according to Apple’s patent filing, shows a “device that bends along a flexible portion such as a flexible seam associated with a hinge.”
Apple/US Patent and Trademark Office
Apple seems to have taken out every patent under the sun when it comes to foldable displays, including an origami-style folding display, a flip-up display and even a wraparound display. We don’t know which one will make the final cut, but both Kuo and Bloomberg seem to agree that the current prototype is more of a traditional fold-out design.
Unlike Microsoft’s Surface Duo, which has hinges on the exterior, Apple’s would have one continuous display with a hidden hinge mechanism like the Galaxy Fold.
Apple leaker Jon Prosser reported in early 2021 that the iPhone Flip will likely use a clamshell design and come in several “fun colors.” Between the bright pastels of the iPhone 15 and Plus and the sleeker deep blue of the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max, an array of fun colors for Apple’s first foldable device is definitely a possibility.
YouTuber ConceptsiPhone also gave us a glimpse into what the iPhone Flip could look with concept art of the foldable iPhone in the colors blue, red, gold and green.
In March 2025, analyst Kuo had some very specific but non-clamshell predictions: that Apple would release a book-style foldable with a 5.5-inch outer screen that unfolded to have a 7.8-inch internal screen, and be 4.5-4.8mm when unfolded but 9-9.5mm thick. It would have the same high-density battery cells as the “ultra-thin iPhone 17” and a hinge with stainless steel and titanium alloy (a favorite material of Apple’s iPhone 16 Pro and Pro Max as well as the Apple Watch Ultra 2).
Per Kuo’s predictions, the foldable will have two rear cameras and a front-facing camera on both the external and internal displays. Most interestingly, Kuo also expects that Apple’s book-style foldable will see the return of Touch ID as a side button, as Face ID might be left out due to space constraints — presumably for the array of depth-of-field sensors and cameras needed for the tech.
Roadblocks: What still stands in Apple’s way?
CNET
Samsung and others have been testing the waters, but Apple has been learning from the pain points of their foldable devices and figuring out how they’d be used.
One of these pain points is the crease. A lot of the current cover materials, including the glass and plastic mix that Samsung uses for the Z Fold and Z Flip, show a visible crease when folded out to full screen. To avoid it, Apple would likely have to wait for Corning, Apple’s glass provider, to create some kind of bendable version of its Ceramic Shield screen. The company is already working on a bendable glass but hasn’t announced a launch date for it.
Price is another major problem for these types of devices. Although Samsung still has the most affordable folding phone with the clamshell Z Flip 5 at $999, most others in the category are book-style foldables like the Galaxy Z Fold 5 and the Pixel Fold, which are around twice the price of most flagship phones. We wouldn’t expect a foldable iPhone to be cheaper than its rivals. Apple’s foldable needs to be in line with current foldable and nonfoldable models to be able to compete against other brands and entice iPhone users to ditch their single-screen devices and pay more for a foldable.
A report last year found that half of American consumers are interested in buying a foldable phone, though Apple customers are slightly less willing to make the leap than Samsung or LG users. Perhaps the “Apple effect” will change those stats if and when a foldable iPhone ever becomes a reality.
For more, check out all of the models in the iPhone 15 line. You can also see the most exciting phones to look out for in 2024.
Rival TikTok app Triller started gaining more attention when members of the Trump family, including the former president, joined amid early TikTok negotiations. Similar to TikTok, Triller offers video and music features: Choose a song from the app’s library or import their own song, film or upload a video, and edit and share on different social media platforms. You can also collaborate with friends on the app.
Triller also offers a vlog feature that lets you edit your footage in a B-roll documentary style, or Make a Music Video, which lets you upload clips without adding audio.
The app has social features like TikTok with the Community and Following feed. If you amass a large enough following, Triller’s Wallet system can actually make you money. Triller has Gold, its in-app currency, which followers can gift to each other. Earning enough Gold can help you get Gems, which can be exchanged for real cash.
Now’s the time to take advantage of APYs as high as 5%.
Skyhobo/Getty Images
Federal Reserve policymakers voted to hold interest rates steady today, pausing rates for the fourth time this year. In its postmeeting statement, the Fed summarized its findings by noting slightly elevated inflation and a low unemployment rate, though the economic outlook remains uncertain.
The latest decision means that households, which have been facing budget strains and increased living expenses, will continue to contend with high borrowing costs, from credit card APRs to mortgages. At the same time, anyone who is able to save money right now will continue to enjoy elevated returns on savings accounts and certificates of deposit.
If you want to maximize your earning potential before interest rates dip, you’d be wise to act now. The best high-yield savings accounts continue to offer APYs up to 5%, low fees and no minimum balance requirements. The best CD rates are as high as 4.50% APY. But these rates could go down in the coming weeks as banks brace for two rate cuts in 2025, the earliest as soon as September.
“This could be one of the last chances to grab a solid CD rate before they drop,” said Taylor Kovar, certified financial planner and CEO of 11 Financial. “It might also be worth checking what your savings account is currently paying. There are still some decent options out there, but they might not last long.”
Here’s what you need to know about how the Fed’s latest decision affects your savings and what you should do now to make the most of it.
Read more:The Fed’s Interest Rate Decision Is Good News for Your Savings: Here’s Why
How the Federal Reserve influences savings rates
The central bank meets eight times a year to assess the health of the US economy and vote on the federal funds rate, the rate banks use to lend and borrow money.
While the Fed’s interest rate decisions don’t directly determine savings rates, some banks set their deposit account APYs accordingly, though the changes can take several weeks or even months to take effect.
Still, not all financial institutions take their cues from the Fed. “Some big banks are swimming in deposits, and they don’t need to pay up to bring in more [customers],” said Greg McBride, chief financial analyst at Bankrate.
If you’re looking for solid returns on your savings, keep in mind there may be dramatic differences in interest rates from bank to bank.
“People should shop around, and they shouldn’t just shop around today,” said Gary Zimmerman, CEO of MaxMyInterest. “They should shop around a week from now, a month from now, and three months from now.”
The best savings accounts to open now
With rate cuts on pause for now, opening a CD or a high-yield savings account is a safe and guaranteed way to maximize your interest earnings, whether you’re building an emergency fund or saving up for a down payment on a home.
Here are the pros and cons of each account type to help you make the best choice for your needs.
High-yield savings account
A high-yield savings account is an interest-earning account often offered by online banks, credit unions and other financial service institutions. Unlike traditional savings accounts, whose APYs can be as low as 0.01%, the best high-yield savings accounts offer up to 5% APY.
Pros
Some high-yield savings accounts earn more than 10 times the national average.
Your money is easily accessible when you need it.
If your account is held at an FDIC- or NCUA-insured institution, it’s protected up to $250,000 per person, per institution if the institution fails.
Cons
Availability can be limited. These accounts aren’t offered by all banks or credit unions.
Many accounts are provided by online-only banks with no physical branches. You must be comfortable with an entirely digital banking experience.
Variable rates can change at any time.
Certificate of deposit
A certificate of deposit is a deposit account that offers a fixed rate for a specific time, or term. In exchange for fixed growth, you agree not to withdraw your money before the term ends. The main benefit of a CD is that your money grows over time at a predetermined APY. Top CDs currently earn APYs as high as 4.5%.
Pros
A fixed rate applies to the CD’s entire term.
CDs are widely available at most banks or credit unions.
If your account is held at an FDIC- or NCUA-insured institution, it’s protected up to $250,000 per person, per institution.
Cons
Your money is tied up for the duration of the CD’s term.
Early withdrawal penalties reduce returns if you need to take out money before the term ends.
No-penalty CD
A no-penalty CD is a specialty CD that offers a fixed rate for a specific term, like traditional CDs. This deposit account doesn’t impose an early withdrawal penalty if you need to access your money before the term ends. These CDs are generally less widely available, and the APYs are lower, but the additional flexibility can be worth a slight drop in rates.
Pros
A fixed rate applies to the CD’s entire term.
Withdrawals before the CD matures don’t incur penalties.
If your account is held at an FDIC- or NCUA-insured institution, it’s protected up to $250,000 per person.
Cons
No-penalty CDs aren’t widely available at most banks or credit unions.
These CDs generally earn a lower APY than a traditional CD.
Tips for finding the right savings account or CD
Keep in mind that larger, brand-name banks with bigger marketing budgets may not offer the most competitive rates on savings accounts and CDs. Community or regional banks, credit unions and online-only banks often offer higher rates on deposit accounts to attract new customers.
The best high-yield savings accounts continue to offer APYs up to 5%, low fees and no minimum balance requirements. The best CD rates are as high as 4.50% APY.
When evaluating a savings account, note any fees associated with opening or maintaining the account. CDs offer a safe, fixed rate of growth — as long as you can leave the funds in the account until the maturity date to avoid early withdrawal penalties. Terms can last anywhere from three months to five years or more.
Additionally, confirm that your deposit is insured by either the FDIC (for banks) or the NCUA (for credit unions). This protects your money for up to $250,000 per person, per institution if the bank fails. You should also compare APYs and how easily you can access your money before making your decision.
Take advantage of high savings rates while you still can
With interest rates currently holding steady, there’s still time to maximize your earnings with a high-yield savings account or CD. But the sooner you act, the better. Markets expect the Fed will resume interest rate cuts as early as the fall.
If you’re not already earning a competitive interest rate on your savings, consider locking in one of today’s best CD rates or moving your funds to a high-yield savings account to boost your earnings.
If there’s one thing we’ve learned over years of testing new technology at CNET, it’s how taking a screenshot differs from device to device and operating system to operating system. This includes Chromebooks and ChromeOS. However, it isn’t too difficult to learn and is something you should know how to do.
Read more: 10 Chromebook Productivity Tricks
From capturing screenshots and safekeeping an idea to a partial screen capture that can help someone from your family navigate their device, the screenshot feature on a Chromebook can do a lot. Here are two ways to launch the Screen Capture tool, how to use it and where to find your captures once you take them.
Screenshot on a Chromebook with a keyboard shortcut
Josh Goldman/CNET
To launch the Screen Capture toolbar, you must press a three-key shortcut: Shift+Ctrl+Show Windows. The Show Windows key is up on the keyboard’s top row with an icon that looks like a window with two windows stacked behind it. Just press those three and the toolbar will pop up at the bottom of the screen.
Also, if you simply want to take a fast shot of your entire screen, as opposed to a specific region or window, you can simply press Ctrl+Show Windows.
These Chromebook keyboard shortcuts will work on any model. However, some Chromebooks have a Screen Capture key on the keyboard’s top row. Look for a key with a camera icon on it, usually a rectangle with a circle in the center. When pressed it will automatically launch the tool — no key combo necessary.
Screenshot on a Chromebook from Quick Settings
A Screen Capture shortcut is right in the settings.
Josh Goldman/CNET
I have a hard time remembering shortcut keys, so I’m always looking for another option. Luckily, Google added a shortcut button to the Quick Settings panel for screenshots so I never have to think about what keys I need again. On Chrome’s Shelf, click on the time to pop up the Quick Settings menu. Just click or tap on Screen Capture and the toolbar will launch.
How to use the screenshot toolbar
You can take photos of your screen or record a video clip.
Josh Goldman/CNET
The Screen Capture toolbar not only lets you take screenshots but can be used to capture screen recordings as well. The toggle for going from stills to video is on the far left of the toolbar. To the right of that toggle, you have options to take a full-screen screenshot, a partial screenshot with a specific area you define or a screenshot of a specific window. These work for photos and video. Also, clicking on the settings cog on the toolbar lets you turn on or off the mic while recording your screen, making adding narration to your captures easy.
Also read: Windows 10 and 11: Easily Take Screenshots on Your PC
Where screenshots are saved on a Chromebook
When you take a screenshot or recording it’s immediately accessible from the Clipboard, which stores the last five things you saved to it. To view what’s available, simply press the Everything button (aka the Search key) plus V.
Your Chromebook also has a holding spot on the Shelf called Tote. It’s where you’ll find your most recent screenshots. You can pin files to Tote, too, which means you can keep an important screenshot ready to open without searching for it.
Screenshots that are no longer saved on the Clipboard can be found in your files. Just open the Files app on your Chromebook and you’ll find your screenshots in the Images folder and screen recordings in the Videos folder.
Best Laptops for 2025
A selection of the best laptops you can buy right now.
All the financial headlines talk about interest rates being at 20-year highs. We’re living in a rare period with certificates of deposit offering yields we haven’t seen in over a decade. The Federal Reserve meets tomorrow, but it won’t cut interest rates until the fall at the earliest.
The other day, I realized I wasn’t taking advantage of the moment. I was staring at my static savings account balance, kind of like when you open the fridge for the fifth time, hoping something new will appear. My money was just sitting there, earning next to nothing.
Locking up your money in a CD before the summer ends (and before interest rates dip) is a sensible move. In fact, I’d argue that putting money into a low-risk CD with competitive returns is a power move, a small rebellion against a volatile market and the usual slow drip of savings growth.
Read more: Wednesday’s Fed Decision Could Actually Help Boost Your Savings. Here’s How
CDs are smart for safe savers
Many people are scared to invest and nervous about spending right now. Stock market swings, tariff fallout and stupidly high prices are making savers run to safety.
CDs aren’t exciting, and they won’t make you rich overnight. But boring and predictable can be a good thing, especially when the economy is too exciting (in a bad way).
When you lock up your savings into a CD for a set term and leave it untouched, your earnings are guaranteed. Your annual percentage yield (APY) won’t drop even if overall interest rates drop. It’s a quiet, easy way to get a little extra cash, kind of like discovering a $10 bill in your jeans pocket every month.
Watch this: These Are the Safest Places to Keep Your Money Right Now
Some CDs offer 4.5% APYs
The Fed is expected to leave its benchmark interest rate the same at this week’s meeting on June 18 and again on July 30. Experts say the central bank will keep borrowing rates high for a couple of months, with most saying a rate cut isn’t likely until its Sept. 17 meeting.
After the Fed hiked its benchmark interest rate several times between 2022 and 2023, many banks raised the rates they were offering for savings accounts and CDs to attract more customers and boost their cash flow. Once the Fed started cutting rates last year, banks started lowering their APYs so they wouldn’t have to pay as much interest to customers.
With interest rates steady so far this year, CD rates have hovered around the same mark for months. The best CDs offer APYs up to 4.50%, more than three times the national average for some terms. That’s why you shouldn’t wait to open a CD. Rates could start slipping in late summer, even in anticipation of a rate cut.
Bottom line? If you have extra money, move it somewhere safe so it can actually grow.
High-yield savings accounts also earn big
If you think you’ll need access to your money, a high-yield savings account could be a better fit. Most CDs impose a penalty if you pull out your funds before the maturity date, but a HYSA is more flexible, allowing you to add deposits and withdraw funds as needed.
Some APYs on high-yield savings accounts are also in the 4% range, making them a better option over traditional savings accounts. But, unlike a CD, HYSAs don’t lock in your interest rate, so your returns are variable and less predictable.
Check out CNET Money’s weekly mortgage rate forecast for a more in-depth look at what’s next for Fed rate cuts, labor data and inflation.
Despite forecasts of gradually falling mortgage rates, the housing market remains largely unaffordable for most prospective buyers. The average 30-year fixed rate has remained close to 7% for the last seven months, leading to cost-prohibitive monthly payments.
The average interest rate for a standard 30-year fixed mortgage is 6.93% today, an increase of 0.03% compared to one week ago. The average rate for a 15-year fixed mortgage is 6.10%, which is a decrease of -0.02% from the same time last week.
Today’s mortgage rates
Today’s average mortgage rates on June 17, 2025, compared with one week ago. We use rate data collected by Bankrate as reported by lenders across the US.
Rising home prices and skyrocketing homeownership expenses, like insurance and property taxes, further compound the financial pressure on borrowers. Median family income has not kept pace with the surge in housing costs, requiring many households to earn double or triple their salary to afford a modest home in some cities.
Meanwhile, the “lock-in” effect, where current homeowners with low-rate mortgages are reluctant to sell and take on higher interest rates, has kept housing inventory tight and fueled price competition in high-demand areas.
Should an economic slowdown force the Federal Reserve to lower interest rates later this year, it’s unlikely to bring significant relief to homebuyers in today’s overheated market. Even the possibility of a job-loss recession is already pushing many households to tighten their budgets and take on less financial risk.
When mortgage rates start to fall, be ready to take advantage. Experts recommend shopping around and comparing multiple offers to get the lowest rate. Enter your information here to get a custom quote from one of CNET’s partner lenders.
About these rates: Bankrate’s tool features rates from partner lenders that you can use when comparing multiple mortgage rates.
What should I know about mortgage rates today?
Mortgage rates have had a bumpy few months. Lingering inflation, the threat of a global trade war and growing recession worries have caused an uncertain economic outlook.
As a result, the Fed has adopted a wait-and-see approach when it comes to interest rate adjustments. After cutting borrowing costs three times last year, the central bank is keeping borrowing costs at their current range so far in 2025. Experts predict the Fed will hold rates steady again at its upcoming meeting on June 17-18.
If President Trump eases some of his aggressive tariff measures or if the labor market deteriorates, it could prompt the Fed to resume easing interest rates in the fall, which would put downward pressure on bond yields and mortgage rates.
Still, experts warn of a lot more volatility in the market. As a result, buyers are being more patient and strategic about financing, comparing different loan types and planning ahead.
“Some are waiting, others are getting pre-approved now so they’re ready to act if rates fall,” said Jeb Smith, licensed real estate agent and member of CNET Money’s expert review board.
For a look at mortgage rate movement in recent years, see the chart below.
Will mortgage rates go down in 2025?
Despite hopes that 2025 would bring relief to the housing market, concerns over a potential recession and uncertain trade policies have kept longer-term bond yields and mortgage rates high.
Mortgage rates are closely tied to the bond market, specifically the 10-year Treasury yield, which is sensitive to investors’ expectations for inflation, labor data, changes to monetary policy and global measures like tariffs.
“Rates could fall if inflation keeps cooling and the labor market softens,” said Smith. “On the other hand, tariffs could create new inflation pressure. Add in government deficits and increased bond supply, and that puts upward pressure on rates.”
In short, it will be difficult for mortgage rates to drop below 6% without the risk of a job-loss recession. Fannie Mae now expects rates around 6.1% by the end of 2025 and 5.8% by the end of 2026. According to Smith, mortgage rates could move lower slowly and steadily, but numerous risks could keep rates elevated.
What are the different mortgage types?
Each mortgage has a loan term, or payment schedule. The most common mortgage terms are 15 and 30 years, although 10-, 20- and 40-year mortgages also exist. With a fixed-rate mortgage, the interest rate is set for the duration of the loan, offering stability. With an adjustable-rate mortgage, the interest rate is only fixed for a certain amount of time (commonly five, seven or 10 years), after which the rate adjusts annually based on the market. Fixed-rate mortgages are a better option if you plan to live in a home in the long term, but adjustable-rate mortgages may offer lower interest rates upfront.
30-year fixed-rate mortgages
The average 30-year fixed mortgage interest rate is 6.93% today. A 30-year fixed mortgage is the most common loan term. It will often have a higher interest rate than a 15-year mortgage, but you’ll have a lower monthly payment.
15-year fixed-rate mortgages
Today, the average rate for a 15-year, fixed mortgage is 6.10%. Though you’ll have a bigger monthly payment than a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year loan usually comes with a lower interest rate, allowing you to pay less interest in the long run and pay off your mortgage sooner.
5/1 adjustable-rate mortgages
A 5/1 ARM has an average rate of 6.26% today. You’ll typically get a lower introductory interest rate with a 5/1 ARM in the first five years of the mortgage. But you could pay more after that period, depending on how the rate adjusts annually. If you plan to sell or refinance your house within five years, an ARM could be a good option.
Calculate your monthly mortgage payment
Getting a mortgage should always depend on your financial situation and long-term goals. The most important thing is to make a budget and try to stay within your means. CNET’s mortgage calculator below can help homebuyers prepare for monthly mortgage payments.
How can I find the best mortgage rates?
Though mortgage rates and home prices are high, the housing market won’t be unaffordable forever. It’s always a good time to save for a down payment and improve your credit score to help you secure a competitive mortgage rate when the time is right.
Save for a bigger down payment: Though a 20% down payment isn’t required, a larger upfront payment means taking out a smaller mortgage, which will help you save in interest.
Boost your credit score: You can qualify for a conventional mortgage with a 620 credit score, but a higher score of at least 740 will get you better rates.
Pay off debt: Experts recommend a debt-to-income ratio of 36% or less to help you qualify for the best rates. Not carrying other debt will put you in a better position to handle your monthly payments.
Research loans and assistance: Government-sponsored loans have more flexible borrowing requirements than conventional loans. Some government-sponsored or private programs can also help with your down payment and closing costs.
Shop around for lenders: Researching and comparing multiple loan offers from different lenders can help you secure the lowest mortgage rate for your situation.
Portuguese team Porto gets its FIFA Club World Cup campaign underway with an intriguing Group A matchup against Brazilian giant Palmeiras in New Jersey on Sunday.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services to use to watch every match of the tournament as it happens, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if the match isn’t available where you are, along with a full fixture list.
Both of these teams expect to progress from a pool that also includes Egypt’s Al-Ahly and the MLS’s Inter Miami.
However, with the second-placed team in the group expected to face Champions League winner PSG in the next round, a win for both sides here seems crucial to their hopes of a deep run in the tournament.
Palmeiras take on Porto on Sunday, June 15, at the MetLife Stadium in East Rutherford, New Jersey. Kickoff is set for 6 p.m. ET or 3 p.m. PT. That makes it an 11 p.m.BST start in the UK and an 8a.m. AEST kickoff in Australia on Monday.
Porto boss Martín Anselmi will be looking to make amends for a disappointing domestic season that saw his team finish third in the Primeira Liga.
Diogo Cardoso/Getty Images
Livestream the FIFA Club World Cup 2025 for free
The great news for footy fans is that sports streaming platform DAZN is set to broadcast all 63 matches of the FIFA Club World Cup free in almost every country, with coverage available in multiple languages.
DAZN
Existing DAZN subscribers or Freemium members can watch every game of the tournament as part of their current membership.
If you’re not a member, it’s easy to sign up for a free DAZN Freemium account using your email address to watch all the action at no cost through the DAZN app.
As well as dedicated apps for iOS and Android, DAZN offers a wide range of support for set-top boxes and smart TVs.
How to watch Palmeiras vs. Porto online from anywhere using a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the FIFA Club World Cup soccer action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN use to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN use is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $100 for the first 15 months (then $117 per year) or $140 for the first 28 months (then $150 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN and it works on a variety of devices. It’s normally $13 a month but if you sign up for an annual subscription for $100 you’ll get three months free and save 49%. That’s the equivalent of $6.67 a month.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
61% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months)
Livestream Palmeiras vs. Porto in Australia
Australia has a second option for watching the tournament live. Alongside DAZN’s free coverage, pay TV broadcaster Foxtel and its sister streaming service Kayo will also be showing all 63 games.
Kayo Sports
A Kayo Sports subscription starts at AU$25 a month and lets you stream on one screen, while its Premium tier costs AU$40 a month for simultaneous viewing on up to three devices.
The service gives you access to a wide range of sports, including F1, NRL, NFL, NHL and MLB, and there are no lock-in contracts.
Better still, if you’re a new customer, you can take advantage of a one-week Kayo Sports free trial.
Quick tips for streaming FIFA Club World Cup 2025 soccer using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming soccer may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log into your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, because both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
Looking for the most recent Wordle answer? Click here for today’s Wordle hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Wordle puzzle has a double letter and a vowel that might not always be guessed. If you need a new starter word, check out our list of which letters show up the most in English words. If you need hints and the answer, read on.
Today’s Wordle hints
Before we show you today’s Wordle answer, we’ll give you some hints. If you don’t want a spoiler, look away now.
Wordle hint No. 1: Repeats
Today’s Wordle answer has one repeated letter.
Wordle hint No. 2: Vowels
There is one vowel and one sometimes vowel in today’s Wordle answer.
Wordle hint No. 3: First letter
Today’s Wordle answer begins with P.
Wordle hint No. 4: Sing out
Today’s Wordle answer is the last name of a singer whose hits include “Free Fallin'” and “I Won’t Back Down.”
Wordle hint No. 5: Meaning
Today’s Wordle answer can refer to something that is trivial or of little importance.
TODAY’S WORDLE ANSWER
Today’s Wordle answer is PETTY. RIP, Tom.
Yesterday’s Wordle answer
Yesterday’s Wordle answer, June 15, No. 1457 was QUAIL.
AT&T Fiberis CNET’s top pick for the best internet service provider in Dallas. It’s our top recommendation because it offers plans withfast symmetrical speeds, unlimited data and ranks high in customer satisfaction. It’s not the perfect ISP, though. AT&T Fiber doesn’t have perfect availability across the DFW area, so competitors like Spectrum and T-Mobile Home Internet are excellent alternatives if you find yourself outside AT&T Fiber’s coverage area.
Dallas lags behind when it comes to ultrahigh speeds, but you have a few solid options in the area. Fast fiber connections are available from AT&T and Frontier, while Optimum and Spectrum offer reliable cable connections. If you’re looking for the best internet on a budget, you can consider Astound Broadband’s $30 plan that offers 300Mbps speeds. Just keep in mind that the price will go up after the promo period.
Best internet in Dallas, Texas
There’s a lot to love about Dallas, Texas — the people, the sights, and, on a more personal level, my grandmother’s mouthwatering barbecue, which we’d devour whenever my family would visit. But I’m here to talk about broadband, not smoked meat. Thankfully, Dallas has quite a few home internet options, too.
Dallas internet providers compared
Provider
Internet technology
Monthly price range
Speed range
Monthly equipment costs
Data cap
Contract
CNET review score
Astound Broadband Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
300-1,500Mbps
Free modem; Up to $40 for Whole-home Wi-Fi (optional)
None
None
7
AT&T Internet Air Read full review
Fixed wireless
$60
75-225Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
AT&T Fiber Read full review
Fiber
$55-$245
300-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Frontier Communications Read full review
DSL/fiber
$30-$90 ($40-$140 after 12 months)
200-5,000Mbps
None
None
None
6.3
Optimum Read full review
Cable
$40-$70
300-1,000Mbps
None
None
None
6.2
Spectrum Read full review
Cable
$30-$70
100-1,000Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
None
None
7.2
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 for eligible mobile customers)
87-415Mbps
None
None
None
7.4
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
Fixed wireless
$50-$70 ($35-$55 with qualifying Verizon 5G mobile plans)
50-1,000Mbps
None
None
None
7.2
Show more (3 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
Other available internet providers in Dallas
Many other broadband choices exist in the Dallas-Fort Worth metro area beyond our top three picks. Some are outside the Dallas city limits but can be found well within the immediate suburbs. Others may only be in small pockets farther away from the city center. In most cases, each provider offers something enticing, even with some glaring issues.
Astound Broadband: This cable internet provider, known locally as Grande Communications but now part of parent company Astound Broadband, offers some of DFW’s most compelling and competitive promo rates. The starting price of $30 per month for a 300Mbps plan is a very affordable 10 cents per Mbps. In contrast, AT&T Fiber’s 300Mbps plan clocks in at $55 per month. With Astound, when promos are available, the 1,500Mbps tier costs $55 (otherwise $70 per month). But Astound also has some of the steepest price increases in the industry. The Astound Broadband Texas rate card reveals that your 300Mbps plan could rise to $ p176er month after your promo period. That’s stark.
Frontier Communications: Frontier features some solid serviceability in the northern portion of the Dallas metro area. You won’t find any coverage in the city center. You can get its DSL and fiber-optic service in the northwest outskirts near Irving. Garland, which is just northeast of Dallas. If Frontier Fiber is available — it features symmetrical plans of 200Mbps, 500Mbps, gigabit, 2Gbps or 5Gbps speeds ranging from $40 to $90 per month — it’s a very appealing choice. If Frontier DSL is your only option, you might want to keep looking.
Optimum: Let me be clear — Suddenlink is the provider you’re probably familiar with in Dallas. Its parent company, Altice USA, renamed it to Optimum. In any case, Optimum cable internet service can be mostly found east of Dallas in the Mesquite area, covering Balch Springs, Forney, Rockwall and Terrell. Optimum also supplies broadband service to some areas north of DFW, including Little Elm, Fairview and Prosper.
Satellite internet: Typically, if you live in a big metro area like Dallas, I wouldn’t even broach the topic of satellite internet. You’re bound to find more reliable connections, faster speeds and cheaper prices than are awaiting you with a satellite internet connection. DFW is a large area, and some on the rural periphery may not have the same options. While Hughesnet and Viasat are steady choices, both feature data restrictions. Starlink, Elon Musk’s newer satellite provider on the block, is more intriguing as it features faster speeds and no contracts.
Verizon 5G Home Internet: Verizon has been just as ambitious with its 5G home internet product as T-Mobile, although perhaps not quite as aggressive in pursuing rural communities. As such, Verizon fell short of our top list because it might not serve communities on the outskirts of the Dallas-Fort Worth-Arlington area as well as T-Mobile can. If you are serviceable for Verizon 5G Home Internet, you’ll find faster speeds than T-Mobile (average of 300Mbps to T-Mobile’s 87 to 415Mbps) and a similar, straightforward approach for $50-$70 per month, including no data caps, no contracts and no equipment fees. Also, customers can shave $15 off their monthly bill if they have a qualifying Verizon mobile plan.
Valerie Macon/Getty Images
Cheap internet options in Dallas
The average starting price for internet service in Dallas is approximately $46 per month, but a few providers offer plans cheaper than that. The absolute lowest starting price you can find currently belongs to Astound Broadband and Spectrum. They offer 300Mbps and 100Mbps plans, respectively, which cost $30 per month.
How many members of your household use the internet?
Residents in downtown Dallas won’t be able to get Astound’s cheap internet, but serviceability reaches out to Flower Mound, Frisco, Fairview, Little Elm and McKinney.
What’s the cheapest internet plan in Dallas?
Provider
Starting monthly price
Max download speed
Monthly equipment fee
Astound 300 Read full review
$30
300Mbps
Free modem; Up to $40 for Whole-home Wi-Fi (optional)
Frontier Fiber 200 Read full review
$30
200Mbps
None
Frontier Fiber 500 Read full review
$30
500Mbps
None
Spectrum Internet Advantage Read full review
$30
100Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Optimum 300Mbps Read full review
$40
300Mbps
None
Astound 600 Read full review
$45
600Mbps
Free modem; $5 for Whole-home Wi-Fi (optional)
Frontier Fiber 1,000 Read full review
$50
1,000Mbps
None
Spectrum Internet Premier Read full review
$50
500Mbps
Free modem; $10 router (optional)
Verizon 5G Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible phone plans)
300Mbps
None
T-Mobile Home Internet Read full review
$50 ($35 with eligible mobile plans)
318Mbps
None
AT&T Fiber 300 Read full review
$55
300Mbps
None
Astound 1,000 Read full review
$60
1,000Mbps
Free modem; Up to $40 for Whole-home Wi-Fi (optional)
Astound 1,500 Read full review
$70
1,500Mbps
Free modem; Up to $40 for Whole-home Wi-Fi (optional)
Show more (8 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How to find internet deals and promotions in Dallas
The best internet deals and top promotions in Dallas depend on what discounts are available during that time. Most deals are short-lived, but we look frequently for the latest offers.
Dallas internet providers, such as Astound Broadband and Optimum, may offer lower introductory pricing or streaming add-ons for a limited time. Others, including AT&T, Frontier and Verizon, run the same standard pricing year-round.
For a more extensive list of promos, check out our guide on the best internet deals.
How fast is Dallas broadband?
Dallas disappoints when you compare its home internet speeds to some of the other top cities in the US. The Dallas-Fort Worth-Arlington metropolitan area boasts the country’s fourth-largest population, but according to Ookla’s most recent reporting, Dallas managed only a 98th-place finish among the 100 most populated cities in the US. That puts it right behind Seattle and just above Detroit and Atlanta. This may seem competitive, but it’s well behind other Texas towns such as Austin, Corpus Christi, El Paso, Fort Worth and San Antonio — all of which made the top 15. (Disclosure: Ookla is owned by the same parent company as CNET, Ziff Davis.)
Fastest internet plans in Dallas
Provider
Starting price
Max download speed
Max upload speed
Data cap
Connection type
Frontier Fiber 5 Gig Read full review
$90 ($140 after 12 months)
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 5000 Read full review
$245
5,000Mbps
5,000Mbps
None
Fiber
AT&T Fiber 2000 Read full review
$145
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Frontier Fiber 2 Gig Read full review
$70 ($110 after 12 months)
2,000Mbps
2,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Astound 1500 Read full review
$70
1,500Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Cable
Astound 1000 Read full review
$60
1,000Mbps
50Mbps
None
Cable
AT&T Fiber 1000 Read full review
$80
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Frontier Fiber 1 Gig Read full review
$50 ($75 after 12 months)
1,000Mbps
1,000Mbps
None
Fiber
Spectrum Internet Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Optimum Gig Read full review
$70
1,000Mbps
35Mbps
None
Cable
Show more (5 items)
Source: CNET analysis of provider data.
How CNET chose the best internet providers in Dallas
Internet service providers are numerous and regional. Unlike the latest smartphone, laptop, router or kitchen tool, it’s impractical to personally test every ISP in a given city. What’s our approach? We start by researching the pricing, availability and speed information, drawing on our own historical ISP data, the provider sites and mapping information from the Federal Communications Commission at FCC.gov.
It doesn’t end there: We use the FCC’s website to check our data and ensure we consider every ISP that provides service in an area. We also input local addresses on provider websites to find specific options for residents. We look at sources, including the American Customer Satisfaction Index and J.D. Power, to evaluate how happy customers are with an ISP’s service. ISP plans and prices are subject to frequent changes; all information provided is accurate as of publication.
Once we have this localized information, we ask three main questions:
Does the provider offer access to reasonably fast internet speeds?
Do customers get decent value for what they’re paying?
Are customers happy with their service?
While the answers to those questions are often layered and complex, the providers who come closest to “yes” on all three are the ones we recommend. When selecting the cheapest internet service, we look for the plans with the lowest monthly fee, although we also factor in things like price increases, equipment fees and contracts. Choosing the fastest internet service is relatively straightforward. We look at advertised upload and download speeds and consider real-world speed data from sources like Ookla and FCC reports.
To explore our process in more depth, visit our page on how we test ISPs.
What’s the final word on internet providers in Dallas?
As we like to say in our CNET home internet reviews, fiber internet trumps cable broadband almost every time. So if you have access to any of the AT&T Fiber plans — or, if you’re in the suburbs, Frontier Fiber — that will be your best bet. Cable providers like Spectrum, Astound, and Optimum offer reliable connections and plenty of fast plans to suit just about any household. Be sure to avoid data caps, and if you’re serviceable for providers like AT&T or Frontier, ensure you can get their fiber plans and don’t have to settle for a slower, spottier DSL connection.
Dallas internet provider FAQs
What is the cheapest internet provider in Dallas?
If you’re looking for the cheapest service in Dallas, Astound Broadband 300Mbps plan for $30 per month and Spectrum’s Internet Advantage plan (100Mbps download speed) for $30 per month is the absolute lowest you can pay monthly. Just beware of a very steep price jump with Astound after the initial year ends.
Yes. Several internet providers offer fiber connections within the greater Dallas-Fort Worth-Arlington metro area. AT&T and Frontier have the fastest plans, each with 5Gbps and 7 Gbps tiers, respectively, and symmetrical speeds. One thing to note is that each of those ISPs also has DSL plans, so do your homework to ensure you’re getting their fiber offering and not DSL.
Which internet provider in Dallas offers the fastest plan?
AT&T and Frontier have the fastest plans in Big D, featuring symmetrical download and upload speeds of 5,000Mbps. They each also have a 2-gig plan. Among cable internet providers, Astound Broadband boasts a 1,500Mbps plan, the fastest cable internet package in the Dallas metro area. Lastly, according to Ookla’s most recent findings, AT&T has the fastest average download speeds in Dallas, clocking in with a median download speed of approximately 265Mbps.
Your iPhone will soon look a lot different when iOS 26 (named for 2026) comes out in the fall, but there’s more to see under the frosted glass facade. Announced at Apple’s Worldwide Developers Conference, the latest version of the iPhone’s operating system incorporates some features iPhone owners have watched their Android friends enjoy, plus plenty of other enhancements.
For instance, the Camera and Photos apps are gaining long-awaited functional redesigns; the Messages and Phone apps are taking a firmer stand against unwanted texts and calls; and Apple Intelligence contributes some improvements in a year when Siri has been delayed. Here are the updates you can expect to see on the iPhone soon.
The next version of the operating system is due to ship in September or October (likely with new iPhone 17 models), but developer betas are available now, with a public beta expected in July.
Watch this: Introducing iOS 26 at WWDC25
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
Transparent new Liquid glass design
After more than a decade of a flat, clean user interface — an overhaul introduced in iOS 7 when former Apple Chief Design Officer Jony Ive took over the design of software as well as hardware — the iPhone is getting a new look. The new design extends throughout the Apple product lineup, from iOS to WatchOS, TVOS and iPadOS.
The Liquid Glass interface also now enables a third way to view app icons on the iPhone home screen. Not content with Light and Dark modes, iOS 26 now features an All Clear look — every icon is clear glass with no color. Lock screens can also have an enhanced 3D effect using spatial scenes, which use machine learning to give depth to your background photos.
The new All Clear icon look in iOS 26 is part of the Liquid Glass design.
Apple/Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Dynamic and adaptable lock screen
Translucency is the defining characteristic of Liquid Glass, behaving like glass in the real world in the way it deals with light and color of objects behind and near controls. But it’s not just a glassy look: The “liquid” part of Liquid Glass refers to how controls can merge and adapt — dynamically morphing, in Apple’s words. In the example Apple showed, the glassy time numerals on an iPhone lock screen stretched to accommodate the image of a dog and even shrunk as the image shifted to accommodate incoming notifications. The dock and widgets are now rounded, glassy panels that float above the background.
As notifications fill the bottom of the screen, the subject in the background image is pushed up and the time numerals resize to accommodate.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
Watch this: I’m Impressed With iOS 26. Apple Just Made iPhones Better
Camera and Photos apps go even more minimal
The Camera app is getting a new, simplified interface. You could argue that the current Camera app is pretty minimal, designed to make it quick to frame a shot and hit the big shutter button. But the moment you get into the periphery, it becomes a weird mix of hidden controls and unintuitive icons.
The Camera app has fewer distractions.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
Now, the Camera app in iOS 26 features a “new, more intuitive design” that takes minimalism to the extreme. The streamlined design shows just two controls: Video or Camera. Swipe left or right to choose modes. Swipe up for settings such as aspect ratio and timers, and tap for additional preferences.
With the updated Photos app, viewing the pictures you capture should be a better experience — a welcome change that customers have clamored for since iOS 18’s cluttered attempt. Instead of a long, difficult-to-discover scrolling interface, Photos regains a Liquid Glass menu at the bottom of the screen.
The Photos app gets a welcome redesign.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
The Phone app gets a revamp
The Phone app has kept more closely to the look of its source than others: a sparse interface with large buttons as if you’re holding an old-fashioned headset or pre-smartphone cellular phone. iOS 26 finally updates that look not just with the new overall interface but in a unified layout that takes advantage of the larger screen real estate on today’s iPhone models.
The Phone app’s unified layout should make for less switching between screens when dealing with calls.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
It’s not just looks that are different, though. The Phone app is trying to be more useful for dealing with actual calls — the ones you want to take. The Call Screening feature automatically answers calls from unknown numbers, and your phone rings only when the caller shares their name and reason for calling.
Or what about all the time wasted on hold? Hold Assist automatically detects hold music and can mute the music but keep the call connected. Once a live agent becomes available, the phone rings and lets the agent know you’ll be available shortly.
Messages updates
The Messages app is probably one of the most used apps on the iPhone, and for iOS 26, Apple is making it a more colorful experience. You can add backgrounds to the chat window, including dynamic backgrounds that show off the new Liquid Glass interface.
Enliven your daily chats with backgrounds and more group features.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
In addition to the new look, group texts in Messages can incorporate polls for everyone in the group to reply to — no more scrolling back to find out which restaurant Brett suggested for lunch that you missed. Other members in the chat can also add their own items to a poll.
A more useful feature is a feature to detect spam texts better and screen unknown numbers, so the messages you see in the app are the ones you want to see and not the ones that distract you.
Safari gets out of its own way
In the Safari app, the Liquid Glass design floats the tab bar above the web page (although that looks right where your thumb is going to be, so it will be interesting to see if you can move the bar to the top of the screen). As you scroll, the tab bar shrinks.
Web pages occupy the entire screen and the address bar shrinks to get out of the way.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
FaceTime focuses on calls, not controls
FaceTime also gets the minimal look, with controls in the lower-right corner that disappear during the call to get out of the way. On the FaceTime landing page, posters of your contacts, including video clips of previous calls, are designed to make the app more appealing.
FaceTime minimizes its controls into one corner.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
New Music app features
Do you like the sound of that song your friend is playing but don’t understand the language the lyrics are in? The Music app includes a new lyrics translation feature that displays along with the lyrics as the song plays. And for when you want to sing along with one of her favorite K-pop songs, for example, but you don’t speak or read Korean, a lyrics pronunciation feature spells out the right way to form the sounds.
AutoMix blends songs like a DJ, matching the beat and time-stretching for a seamless transition.
And if you find yourself obsessively listening to artists and albums again and again, you can pin them to the top of your music library for quick access.
Keep the beat going with intelligence-based song transitions using AutoMix.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
New Games app is a reminder that yes, people game on iPhone
The iPhone doesn’t get the same kind of gaming affection as Nintendo’s Switch or Valve’s Steam Deck, but the truth is that the iPhone and Android phones are used extensively for gaming — Apple says half a billion people play games on iPhone.
Trying to capitalize on that, a new Games app acts as a specific portal to Apple Arcade and other games. Yes, you can get to those from the App Store app, but the Games app is designed to remove a layer of friction so you can get right to the gaming action.
The new Games hub has a simple control screen to let you navigate all of your Apple games on any device.
Apple/Screenshot by CNET
Live translation enhances calls and texts
Although not specific to iOS, Apple’s new live translation feature is ideal on the iPhone when you’re communicating with others. It uses Apple Intelligence to dynamically enable you to talk to someone who speaks a different language in near-real time. It’s available in the Messages, FaceTime and Phone apps and shows live translated captions during a conversation.
Live translation during a voice call
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
Maps gets more personal
Updates to the Maps app sometimes involve adding more detail to popular areas or restructuring the way you store locations. Now, the app takes note of routes you travel frequently and can alert you of any delays before you get on the road.
A Maps widget shows a frequently-used route.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
It also includes a welcome feature for those of us who get our favorite restaurants mixed up: visited places. The app notes how many times you’ve been to a place, be that a local business, eatery or tourist destination. It organizes them in categories or other criteria such as by city to make them easier to find the next time.
New CarPlay features
Liquid Glass also makes its way to CarPlay in your vehicle, with a more compact design when a call comes in that doesn’t obscure other items, such as a directional map. In Messages, you can apply tapbacks and pin conversations for easy access.
Widgets are now part of the CarPlay experience, so you can focus on just the data you want, like the current weather conditions. And Live Activities appear on the CarPlay screen, so you’ll know when that coffee you ordered will be done or when a friend’s flight is about to arrive.
The new CarPlay interface with Liquid Glass.
Screenshot by CNET
Wallet improvements
The Wallet app is already home for using Apple Card, Apple Pay, electronic car keys and for storing tickets and passes. In iOS 26, you can create a new Digital ID that acts like a passport for age and identity verification (though it does not replace a physical passport) for domestic travel for TSA screening at airports.
The app can also let you use rewards and set up installment payments when you purchase items in a store, not just for online orders. And with the help of Apple Intelligence, the Wallet app can help you track product orders, even if you did not use Apple Pay to purchase them. It can pull details such as shipping numbers from emails and texts so that information is all in one place.
The Wallet app supports legal state IDs and national IDs for age and identity verification.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
New features powered by Apple Intelligence
Although last year’s WWDC featured Apple Intelligence features heavily, improvements to the AI tech were less prominent this year, folded into the announcements during the WWDC keynote.
As an alternative to creating Genmoji from scratch, you can combine existing emojis — “like a sloth and a light bulb when you’re the last one in the group chat to get the joke,” to use Apple’s example. You can also change expressions in Genmoji of people you know that you’ve used to create the image.
Combine existing emoji using Apple Intelligence.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
Image Playground adds the ability to tap into ChatGPT’s image generation tools to go beyond the app’s animation or sketch styles.
Visual Intelligence can already use the camera to try to decipher what’s in front of the lens. Now the technology works on the content on the iPhone’s screen, too. It does this by taking a screenshot (press the sleep and volume up buttons) and then including a new Image Search option in that interface to find results across the web or in other apps such as Etsy.
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
This is also a way to add event details from images you come across, like posters for concerts or large gatherings. (Perhaps this could work for QR codes as well?) In the screenshot interface, Visual Intelligence can parse the text and create an event in the Calendar app.
Some iOS 26 updates Apple didn’t mention
Not everything fits into a keynote presentation — even, or maybe especially, when it’s all pre-recorded — but some of the more interesting new features in iOS 26 went unremarked during the big reveal. For instance:
If you have AirPods or AirPods Pro with the H2 chip, you can use AirPods Camera Remote to start recording video on your iPhone by pressing and holding one of the AirPods.
You can choose your own snooze duration of between 1 and 15 minutes for alarms.
Audio recording options have expanded, enabling high-quality recording during conference calls and high-definition recording in the Camera app with AirPods and AirPods Pro that contain the H2 chip.
Accessibility features include an “all-new experience designed with Braille users in mind,” more options for the Vehicle Motion Cues feature to avoid motion sickness and “a more customizable reading experience.”
Reminders uses Apple Intelligence to “suggest tasks, grocery items and follow-ups based on emails or other text on your device.”
The Journal app supports multiple journals, inline images and a map view that tracks where journal entries were made.
Parental controls have been updated in unspecified ways, including “enhancements across Communication Limits, Communication Safety and the App Store.”
Apple/Screenshot by Joe Maldonado/CNET
iOS 26 availability
The finished version of iOS 26 will be released in September or October with new iPhone 17 models. In the meantime, developers will get access to the first developer betas starting on Monday, with an initial public beta arriving in July. (Don’t forget to go into any beta software with open eyes and clear expectations.)
Follow the WWDC 2025 live blog for details about Apple’s announcements.
iPhone models compatible with iOS 26
iOS 26 will run on the iPhone 11 and later models, including the iPhone SE (2nd generation and later). That includes:
The next time you wonder why school buses are yellow, you might not have to read a single word to get the answer. Google’s latest experimental feature can literally tell you the answer, in a tiny audio clip that loads right to your results page.
Launched Friday in Search Labs, Audio Overviews uses Google’s latest Gemini AI models to turn certain queries into 30- to 45-second, podcast-style explainers, complete with on-screen source links for fact-checking.
The move pushes Google’s AI Overviews beyond text, positioning Search for a semi-hands-free, voice-first future, while also raising more questions about what this means for publishers who rely on clicks.
How you can try out Audio Overviews right now
If you’re interested, you can try out Google’s Audio Overviews right now. Go to the Google Labs website, opt in to the Search Labs program if you’re not already signed up and toggle on Audio Overviews.
You can hit Try an example to test out the feature.
Nelson Aguilar/CNET
The next time you run a query, like “How do I stop apps from tracking my exact location on my iPhone,” Google might show you a button that says Generate Audio Overview, which you’ll have to scroll down a little to see.
You can then tap on the Audio Overview to process the clip, and then press play. You can speed up the audio, mute the clip and also rate it with a thumbs-up or thumbs-down to better train it.
Audio Overviews are only available in the US for now.
Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Below the player, Google lists the web pages it drew from, so you can click through to fact-check the information or just dig deeper.
For those with visual impairments, this new feature offers a glimpse at what a voice-first Google might look like. But until Google expands language support and proves the summaries are dependable, consider this a nifty experiment for now, not a substitute for reading the full story.
A gift card is always a reliable, safe gift option that suits every recipient, including dads. And with Father’s Day just days away, a digital gift card is guaranteed to be just what they need and arrive on time. Digital gift cards can even be printed and wrapped or placed inside a card, if you need something on hand.
Right now, on Amazon and Best Buy, you can choose from many companies and save big. This includes gift cards to Uber, DoorDash and Adidas. Father’s Day is this Sunday so act fast if you’re interested.
Amazon has a large selection of gift cards that fathers will love. For example, a Lyft card can help him get around, and you can save $15 on a $100 gift card. If he prefers Uber, you’re in luck. You can save $5 on a $50 gift card, so you’ll pay just $45. This card works for Uber and Uber Eats. (Cards can be split, too. This means if you choose multiple $25 cards, you’ll still qualify for the discount.) And if he needs help getting back into the dating pool, you can get him a Tinder card, valid for one month of Tinder Gold. This $39 service can be purchased for $28, a savings of $11.
Hey, did you know? CNET Deals texts are free, easy and save you money.
Best Buy also has many options. The movie-loving dad will enjoy a Regal gift card. You can save $15 on a $100 gift card, reducing the cost to $85. Golfing dads will love an NBC GolfNow card, and you can save $8 to score a $50 gift card for just $43. And for the foodies in the bunch, you can save $15 on a $100 DoorDash gift card, discounting the price to $85.
Top deals available today, according to CNET’s shopping experts
Curated discounts worth shopping while they last.
Why this deal matters
Gift cards make the perfect gift for anyone because they can be tailored to any interest. And because Father’s Day is two days away, viable gift choices are becoming more limited. But these gift cards are up to 20% off right now at Amazon and Best Buy. Plus the selection is pretty big so you’ll surely find something your dad will appreciate.
Thick, 12-inch construction makes for a supportive bed
Firm feel keeps you from feeling “stuck”
Suitable for stomach and back sleepers
Cons
Too firm for strict side sleepers
Lighter individuals may find it too firm
A little expensive for those on a tight budget
Each sleeping position demands a different type of bed. For back and stomach sleepers, a plush mattress isn’t ideal. They need something that delivers the right balance of firmness and comfort, durability and value. That’s where DreamCloud comes in. We’ve been tracking this brand for nearly a decade, and let’s say there’s been some serious evolution.
What started as a single, tan mattress option has grown into a full lineup of six models, each designed with different sleepers in mind. The DreamCloud mattress remains the most budget-friendly choice in the mix, but that doesn’t mean it’s a one-size-fits-all solution. In this review, we’re diving into what makes the DreamCloud stand out, who’ll benefit most from it and whether it’s still a top contender.
Editor’s note: The Federal Trade Commission recently sued DreamCloud’s parent company, saying it falsely advertised that its mattresses are made in the US.
Video: DreamCloud mattress review
Watch me review the DreamCloud mattress.
First impressions of the DreamCloud
Credit: Jon Gomez/CNET
This bed arrived at our office with completely free shipping, packed inside of a large box. The unboxing process was straightforward: We took it out of the box, removed the packaging and watched the mattress quickly inflate. Initially, we noticed the bed was slightly misshapen, but after a night on our foundation, it fully expanded and took its proper shape.
When we came back in the morning, the bed was ready to be tested. Compared to older DreamCloud models, this one has much less of a memory foam feel. The neutral foams in the quilted cover and the support coils provide a quicker response time. It also felt noticeably firmer than other DreamCloud beds we’ve tested in the past.
The DreamCloud mattress firmness and feel
What does the DreamCloud mattress feel like?
Jon Gomez/CNET
This bed has less of a memory foam feel than previous versions, but we’d still describe it as having a responsive memory foam touch. The support coils and neutral comfort foams help balance out the memory foam sensation. There’s a slight sink-in effect, but overall, the DreamCloud Hybrid feels more like a neutral hybrid mattress than a traditional memory foam bed.
Other DreamCloud beds have more of a predominant memory foam quality. Since the DreamCloud Memory Foam uses support foam instead of coils, it has more of a memory foam feel comparatively. The DreamCloud Premier and Premier Rest beds also have thicker layers of memory foam for comfort, which gives them a softer, body-conforming quality.
How firm is the DreamCloud mattress?
Jon Gomez/CNET
This is probably one of the firmest DreamCloud mattresses I’ve ever laid on. On our scale, it sits between a medium-firm and a proper firm. This makes it best for strict back or stomach sleepers looking for support over pressure relief, or for those who just want a firmer bed.
While firmness is subjective from person to person, we have a machine at CNET that can pinpoint the objective firmness of a bed. The Mattress Smasher 9000 gave this mattress a firmness rating of 7.1 out of 10. That’s a bit softer than we felt the bed to be, but not by much — what does a robot know, anyway? We’re the ones who actually have to sleep on it.
DreamCloud mattress construction
Jon Gomez/CNET
This is a premium memory foam hybrid bed with a relatively simple construction. It’s 12 inches thick and comprised of the following layers:
1. On the bottom, you’ve got a thin layer of support foam that acts as a base for the bed’s main support system of pocketed coils. Those coils are extra-reinforced along the edges to provide a sturdy perimeter.
2. Next, there’s a Dynamic Transition layer that acts as a buffer between the support and comfort layers of the bed. It also has Zoned Support to help keep your back aligned while you sleep.
3. Above that, you’ve got the bed’s main comfort layer. In this case, it’s around 2 inches of dense, viscous memory foam.
4. Rounding everything out is a breathable, cashmere blend quilted cover. It feels nice and luxurious, with tufted mounds to go along with the notion of the bed’s “cloud-like” comfort.
The DreamCloud mattress performance
Jon Gomez/CNET
Motion isolation
Memory foam beds usually perform the best in this department, and we’d say the DreamCloud mattress does a fine job at isolating motion. If you or your partner is a light sleeper, you’ll want a bed that doesn’t reverberate a ton of motion. Luckily, this bed absorbs a good amount of cross-mattress movement on both sides. It might not deaden as much motion as a dense memory foam mattress like a Tempur-Pedic, but it will likely work fine for couples with light sleepers.
Edge-to-edge support
The DreamCloud mattress has great edge support. This is mostly due to the reinforced coils that run along the edges of the mattress. They definitely help to prop you up more when you’re on the bed’s perimeter. We often observe firmer beds to have stronger edges than softer ones, since they have more rigidity and provide more support than pressure relief. And sometimes, softer beds bow on the sides more than you’d like — that puts us on edge.
Temperature
The cashmere blend quilted cover on the DreamCloud is designed to be breathable and soft to the touch. However, compared to beds that are designed to sleep actively cool, we’d classify it as a temperature-neutral sleeping option. Though DreamCloud, along with many other brands, claims its beds sleep cool, a lot of that is just marketing noise. None of the DreamCloud beds offer active cooling, but they also shouldn’t sleep too hot.
Durability
Since this is a premium hybrid bed with reinforced edges, I’d say it’s plenty durable to last most couples for several years. In the long run, hybrid mattresses typically last longer than all-foam beds because support foams can degrade faster than coils, especially underneath heavier people. The DreamCloud’s hybrid design should be durable enough to last all body types for seven to 10 years — and that’s at the bare minimum.
Who is the DreamCloud mattress best for?
Jon Gomez/CNET
Though the bed’s design is durable enough to handle all body types, its firmness and feel might not be right for everyone. Here’s who we think this bed is best for.
Sleeping position
Keep in mind, this is a firmer style of hybrid mattress. Since it’s so firm, it’s best for strict back and stomach sleepers or those who prefer a very firm sleeping surface. (The same goes for the memory foam version of the bed.) If you’re a combination sleeper looking for a bed that’s around a medium firmness, I’d steer you towards the DreamCloud Premier beds. If you’re a strict side sleeper who wants a lot of pressure relief, I’d consider the DreamCloud Premier Rest instead of the flagship DreamCloud — trust me, you’ll thank me in the long run.
Body type
As mentioned, the construction of this bed makes it supportive enough to handle all body types, including heavier people. If you’re more petite or average-sized, the DreamCloud mattress’s support could be overkill for you. In that case, you could save money by going with its memory foam version.
DreamCloud Hybrid mattress pricing
undefined
Size
Measurements
Price
Twin
38×75 inches
$1,014
Twin XL
38×80 inches
$1,098
Full
54×74 inches
$1,364
Queen
60×80 inches
$1,531
King
76×80 inches
$1,898
Cal king
72×84 inches
$1,898
Split king
78×80 inches
$2,195
This is currently the most affordable mattress offering from the brand. For a more luxurious hybrid bed, it’s very reasonably priced. Plus, apply a discount to the queen-size version and you can expect to pay right around the $699 mark. Any queen-size hybrid bed that’s available for under $1,000 is a great value in our book.
Trial, shipping and warranty
DreamCloud backs this bed with some of the most generous policies found within the online mattress space. Its beds ship to you in a box for free, and once it arrives, you get a 365-night trial period to try it risk-free. If you don’t like it within that timeframe, you can return it for free. If you decide to keep it, you’re backed by a forever warranty. Just be sure to use the right foundation for the bed. Otherwise, you could void its warranty.
How does the DreamCloud compare to other mattresses?
The DreamCloud vs. Saatva Classic
If you’re looking for a more luxurious online bed, these are two top choices to consider. The DreamCloud is the much more affordable option between the two, but with the Saatva Classic, you’re spending up for a more tangible sense of luxury. With its dual-coil construction, organic cotton cover with golden embroidery and the appearance of a luxurious five-star hotel bed, it exudes elegance. Plus, it’s available in three firmness options whereas the DreamCloud only comes in one profile. The Saatva Classic also has a more traditional feel. But if you’re looking for a bed with more of a memory foam feel, it could be worth checking out DreamCloud over the Saatva Classic.
The DreamCloud vs. Nectar Classic Hybrid
Now, let’s compare two of the most affordable memory foam beds available online. Both have coils for support, are on the firm side and are similarly priced for a queen size. That said, there are still some major differences between the two. The DreamCloud has less of a pronounced memory foam feel than the Nectar Classic Hybrid, which has a responsive memory foam quality. The Nectar bed also has a flatter sleeping surface, while the DreamCloud has a tufted, quilted cover. Long story short, if you want more memory foam, go with Nectar, and if you’re looking for luxury, go with DreamCloud.
The final verdict
There’s no denying that the DreamCloud mattress is a quality bed for its price. I’d look into it if you want a premium hybrid bed with a slight sink-in quality that’s on the much firmer side. If you don’t end up liking it, you can always fall back on the great return policy it comes with.
You might like this mattress if:
You want a supportive hybrid mattress
You want a responsive memory foam mattress
You like a much firmer mattress style
You want a bed backed by great policies
You might not like this mattress if:
You’re looking for an all-foam mattress
You prefer the feel of a neutral or latex foam mattress
You want more of a pressure-relieving mattress
This is a pretty firm bed. It’s a tinge softer than a proper firm on our scale, making it most suitable for strict back or stomach sleepers. If you’re a combination sleeper who prefers a much firmer style of bed, you may also enjoy it. However, if you’re a side sleeper, I highly recommend checking out the DreamCloud Premier Rest. It costs more, but it might be worth it for most side sleepers seeking pressure relief in their next bed.
DreamCloud and Nectar are owned by the same parent company, Resident Home. Some other brands that fall under the Resident Home umbrella include Awara and Cloverlane.
Being a premium hybrid bed, the DreamCloud should last you for at least the next seven to 10 years, if not much longer. Hybrid beds are often thought to last longer than all-foam beds since steel coils last longer support-wise. For that reason alone, this bed should last you for many years to come, regardless of your body type.
Adding a good mattress topper can be a great choice, since it can improve the overall comfort of the mattress and also offer temperature regulation. Plus, it acts as a protective layer for the mattress.
Paramount Plus brings together live news and sports with on-demand shows and movies, including originals, leaning on parent company Paramount’s brands like CBS, MTV, BET, Comedy Central, Nickelodeon and Paramount Network, plus its Paramount Pictures movie studio. Now that Showtime series and movies have merged into the Paramount Plus app, you can upgrade to a premium subscription to watch content from both services in one place.
The service has a ton of content: 40,000 episodes of TV and 2,500 movies, plus dozens of original series, for either $8 a month (with ads) or $13 a month (ad-free with Showtime), which . Two of its biggest draws include the Star Trek catalog and Taylor Sheridan series Landman, 1923, 1883 and Tulsa King. Buzz-worthy Paramount feature films like Gladiator II, Top Gun: Maverick and Sonic 3 also land here first after they hit theaters.
Much of Paramount’s value lies in nostalgia: You can watch almost every old Nickelodeon show, Comedy Central stand-up specials and popular series ranging from Frasier and Cheers to SpongeBob SquarePants and Young & the Restless. Additionally, Paramount Plus has a Live Channels feature that enables subscribers to watch curated content in special categories. You can check out live content for Star Trek, CBS Sports HQ, Paw Patrol and more with either subscription plan.
Who it’s perfect for: There’s enough Taylor Sheridan, CBS (including live sports) and Nickelodeon to satisfy everyone in your household, and the platform is just $8 a month if you don’t mind a few ads. With Paramount Pictures’ new movies and reality content from VH1 and BET, the service offers value.
Consider alternatives if: Constant streams of new film releases are not Paramount Plus’ strength, so if that’s a must, then you would be better off with Netflix or Max.
Popular titles: Yellowjackets, Evil, Landman, Tulsa King, Lioness, The Equalizer, Ghosts
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition could be tricky. That purple category, as always, really requires some historical knowledge. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Stop and recover.
Green group hint: Gambling.
Blue group hint: Where you gamble.
Purple group hint: Baseball teams of the past.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: A pause for recovery.
Green group: Casino table games.
Blue group: Las Vegas teams.
Purple group: Former MLB team names.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition for June 12, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is a pause for recovery. The four answers are break, breather, respite and rest.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is casino table games. The four answers are baccarat, blackjack, craps and roulette.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is Las Vegas teams. The four answers are Aces, Golden Knights, Raiders and Runnin’ Rebels.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is former MLB team names. The four answers are Devil Rays, Highlanders, Naps and Robins.
It’s been almost a week since the launch of the Nintendo Switch 2, which broke records for a console release by selling more than 3.5 million units in its first four days. However, there is a bit of an issue with the system’s battery indicator, which may cause owners some frustration.
Switch 2 owners noticed that, even though the system’s battery said it was at 0%, the console was still playable for hours. Nintendo has since confirmed that this is an issue, although it appears to be a problem with the system’s software and not with the battery itself. The company provided some steps on how to possibly fix the battery indicator problem on the Switch 2.
Watch this: We Finally Unbox and Play the Switch 2. Should You Buy One?
Before tackling this problem, there are two things to be aware of. First, this is an issue that will likely be fixed in a future software update. Nintendo hasn’t said when it would be fixed, but as this is a system issue and not hardware, it does seem that a patch could address the problem. Second, the fix for this problem can take a few minutes or several hours if you need to deplete the console’s battery. It’s important to determine how this problem is really affecting you and whether it’s worth the time to fix it.
If you decide to try fixing the problem, all you’ll need is the Switch 2, the system’s AC adapter and access to the internet.
Plug the AC adapter into the Switch 2 to make sure the battery is charging and confirm the system is on the latest system update (currently version 20.1.1).
Now it’s time to go to the Switch 2’s Recovery Mode:
Power off the console.
Next, press and hold down the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons located on the top left of the Switch 2, then press the Power button once to turn the system on.
Keep holding down the volume buttons until the menu for Recovery Mode appears.
Navigating to this menu should reset the battery level meter.
Power off the console again by pressing and holding the Power button until it turns off.
Power the console back on.
Nintendo says just being in the Recovery Mode should fix the problem. If that still doesn’t work, there was a recommendation on the Nintendo Australia support page that involves recalibrating the battery. This method requires charging the Switch 2 to 100%, leaving it charged for an hour after, unplugging the Switch 2 while it’s on so that it discharges the battery, and then, once the battery is depleted, wait 30 minutes and then recharge it to 100%. These steps may need to be repeated; however, some users on Reddit confirmed that the first method, going to Recovery Mode, does work.
If neither method works, Nintendo says the system may be in need of servicing.
Apple previewed iOS 26, the next version of iPhone software, at WWDC 2025. And no, you’re not reading that wrong. It’s got a new name, look and a lot more. The update to iOS 26 comes with a lot of features and improvements that I’ve wanted for some time, including call screening.
Last year, we got Apple Intelligence, and the year before that, the company unveiled the Vision Pro. This year, Apple renamed all of its software and made it look more unified. It might not sound as big a deal as previous WWDCs, but if you hoped Apple would talk more about software and less about AI, then this was your year. Instead of getting iOS 19, Apple released iOS 26. Typically, a new version of iOS comes out in the fall, but it can receive smaller updates through the following spring and summer. So iOS 26 is a reference to the fact that it will get minor updates through 2026.
The biggest update wasn’t the iOS name change. It was Liquid Glass, a design overhaul that adds transparency and is aimed at reducing distraction. However, some people’s instant reaction was less than favorable to the new look. I am fascinated by what I saw with Liquid Glass and look forward to testing it as part of the iOS 26 beta version. But Liquid Glass didn’t get me as hyped as some of the other features Apple included in iOS 26, like the Camera app redesign.
The theme at this year’s WWDC is consistency — consistency in terms of the overall experience an Apple device owner has. iOS 26 is a great example of this because it brings a sophisticated and contemporary feel to the iPhone’s software.
Check out my iOS 26 video, in which I walk you through all the big features in the new iOS and show you a couple of smaller ones (some might find them mundane) that I’m excited about.
iOS 26 will launch this fall and is available now as a developer beta. The public beta version will be available in July. You need an iPhone 11 or newer to use iOS 26. If you want to give it a spin before it’s released, I recommend waiting for the public beta version and even then not running it on your main iPhone.
If you’re considering buying an electric vehicle, but you still need to haul things, there’s a new Kia electric pickup truck coming to North America that you may want to wait for. While the plucky Kia Tasman truck released last year had a polarizing design, it was still considered a success. Now, Kia is celebrating by releasing a second pickup truck — this time, an EV.
Details are fairly slim right now. “Kia plans to introduce an EV pickup truck based on a new EV platform designed for both urban and outdoor use,” the company said in April. “The vehicle will feature best-in-class interior and cargo space, a robust towing system, off-road capabilities and advanced infotainment and safety features.”
The inclusion of off-road capabilities would set the EV apart from the Hyundai Santa Fe, which is the only pickup truck that Kia or its sister company sells in the US. It’ll be on a new EV platform, so it will also be set apart from the company’s current EV offerings, like the Kia EV6.
The infotainment will likely be similar to current Kia EVs and vehicles like the dual-display technology in the more recent Sportage SUV. Kia last week also showcased its more affordable EV sedan, with CNET on hand to see the latest 2026 Kia EV4.
A Kia spokesperson told CNET in June that it has nothing new to reveal just yet on the Kia EV pickup truck.
Will the Kia electric pickup truck be available in the US?
Per the statement, Kia is expecting to sell roughly 90,000 of these new EV pickups per year, a lofty goal in a market where the Ford F-150 Lightning is barely hitting 30,000 units sold. By most accounts, it’s an ambitious sales goal to hit for a vehicle that’ll represent Kia’s first attempt at appeasing the US truck buyer market. However, there is still room for optimism.
“The models built on the eGMP line sold over 100,000 units in 2024,” said Liz Najman, director of market insights at Recurrent, a company that offers independent insights on EV performance. “Moreover, like the EV6, Kia pickups will likely be made in the US, helping avoid costly tariffs that will drive up prices for consumers. It is likely that price will be a major factor for consumers in the coming years.”
Najman also said trucks were the two top-selling vehicles in 2024, so it’s possible Kia can reach these sales goals, provided that the automaker can hit that sweet spot of competitive pricing and capability. “Electric vehicles are seeing strong sales numbers when they deliver on what customers want,” she said, highlighting that with electric car sales, the Ford Mustang Mach-E and the Jeep Wrangler PHEV each sold over 50,000 units in 2024 and the Tesla Model 3 and the Model Y sold over 150,000 and 370,000 units, respectively.
I’m Impressed With iOS 26. Apple Just Made iPhones Better
Tech
Apple previewed the update for the next generation of iPhone software. It has a new name, a new look and a bunch of quality-of-life features and improvements.
I’ve been a fan of Spotify for years. I love my Daily Mixes, Discover Weekly and Release Radar for finding new music while still spinning some of my favorites. The music app just gets me. But maybe it’s time for me to finally give Apple Music a chance.
At its WWDC 2025 keynote on Monday, Apple debuted new features for Apple Music, including lyric translation and pronunciation. You can also pin an album or artist to the top of your library. Honestly, that’s pretty pointless to me. But there’s one feature making me reconsider whether or not to keep my Spotify subscription: AutoMix.
AutoMix blends from one song to the next, just like a DJ would, according to Apple. While Spotify has a crossfade feature that starts one song while the other is ending, Apple Music introduces the ability to mix using Apple Intelligence for time stretching and beat matching, just like a real DJ would.
I love using Spotify’s AI DJ because it always plays the right song, even when I don’t know what I want to hear. I can also see what my friends are listening to, which can introduce me to more music. I might miss my favorite Spotify features, but it’s a tradeoff I’m willing to make — at least temporarily — to see if Apple Music is a better fit for me. After all, maybe it’s time for me to mix things up a bit.
So now, when I’m hosting my son’s birthday party or a family gathering, my guests won’t only be impressed by my playlist choices that get the party started, but there will also be smooth transitions to keep it going.
Nintendo’s brand-new Nintendo Switch 2 is (technically) available now, but as you might expect, the consoles are disappearing from stores faster than retailers can stock them. If you’re hoping to get your hands on one soon, you’ve got a few options, but you’ll need to act very quickly.
CNET is here to help give you the best chance of success. Our dedicated shopping team is scouring the web for any availability — whether it’s online or in-store — and bringing you all the latest updates. We’ve rounded up everything you need to know about current stocks below, and we’ll continue to update this page regularly in the coming days, so be sure to check back often.
This story is part of Nintendo Switch 2, a collection of all things related to Nintendo’s next-gen game console.
Currently, your best chance of getting a Switch 2 right away is visiting a store in person… unless you’re willing to pay twice as much. On Sunday, Newegg started offering the new consoles at a whopping $400 premium — it’s selling the $449 console right now for $849.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Best Buy
As of right now, Best Buy does not have the Switch 2 available for purchase online, though you may be able to snag one in person at the nearest location.
At the moment, the Switch 2 is only available in person at Best Buy.
As with the US, Best Buy Canada is only offering in-person availability for the Switch 2 at the moment.
Samsung 256GB microSD Express
Even with the Switch 2’s boosted storage, you may want to increase its memory with a microSD card. This Samsung Express microSD is designed specifically for Nintendo’s new console and features a unique Mario-inspired design. It costs $60 and can be purchased online.
Nintendo Switch 2 at GameStop
As with other US retailers, the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle are currently sold out online at GameStop. A limited supply was available for purchase at the midnight release, so you may be able to find one in-store if you’re lucky, but chances are pretty slim.
Like all other retailers, GameStop is currently sold out online.
The Switch 2 console is also sold out at GameStop Canada. If we do see some restocks here, it’s important to note that orders are limited to one Switch 2 per household.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Walmart
After last night’s restocks, the Switch 2 is now sold out online at Walmart. The retailer also had some in-person availability for a midnight release, and while it’s likely sold out just about everywhere, you can check if any nearby stores have it in stock.
The Switch 2 is now sold out online at Walmart and most in-store locations.
Just like the US, Walmart Canada is now completely sold out online. Note that an unverified third-party retailer is selling the standalone console for an outrageously inflated price, but we definitely recommend avoiding this.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Target
Target is offering in-person shopping today, and if you’re lucky, you may be able to find it in stock near you. You can check online to see if any nearby stores have availability, but note that you can’t order it for pickup. Target has also staggered its release and will offer online availability Monday. However, there aren’t any times yet, so set your alarm for midnight ET just to be safe.
You can shop the console in-store now, with an online restock set to go live Monday.
Samsung 256GB microSD Express
Even with the Switch 2’s boosted storage, you may be looking to increase its memory with a microSD card. This Samsung Express microSD is designed specifically for Nintendo’s new console and even features a unique Mario-inspired design.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Newegg
As of now, Newegg is still sold out of both versions of the console, and it’s unclear when the next restock will be. Though it’s worth noting that Newegg is slightly less popular than major retailers like Walmart or Target, which could give you a better chance of securing an order during any future restocks, so keep an eye out.
Both the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle are currently sold out.
This compact camera costs $55 and plugs directly into the Switch 2 console or dock’s USB-C port. It allows you to chat with friends or access in-game features for select titles. The camera has a wide-angle lens, which you can adjust to keep yourself in frame easily. It also automatically adjusts its brightness so your face is always visible.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Nintendo
To help combat scalpers, Nintendo requires you to have an invitation to purchase the Switch 2, with priority being given to Nintendo Switch Online members who’ve had a paid membership for at least 12 months and have had a minimum of 50 total gameplay hours as of April 2. These invitations are first come, first served and will be valid for 72 hours. You can still register now if you haven’t already.
As with its preorders, you’ll have to register and receive an invitation to purchase the Switch 2 directly from Nintendo. You can register your interest for either console, but you have to log in to do so.
Just like US shoppers, Canadian gamers will have to register and then wait to receive an invitation to purchase the Switch 2 directly from Nintendo.
Nintendo Switch 2 Pro Controller
As with the Switch 2 console, accessories like the $85 Pro Controller will require you to register for an invitation if you want to order one directly from Nintendo.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Amazon
The Switch 2 is not available for purchase at Amazon in the US, but Canadian shoppers can request an invite for either the standalone console or the Mario Kart World bundle.
As of now, the Switch 2 is still not available at Amazon in the US, and there’s no information about whether or when that will change.
Canadian shoppers can request an invite if they’re hoping to grab either the standalone console or the Mario Kart World bundle at Amazon.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Costco
Costco is one of the only retailers with online availability right now, but you’ll need to be a member to grab one of these consoles. Act fast if you don’t want to miss out.
Costco has a unique Switch 2 bundle available. It includes the console and Mario Kart World, as well as a 12-month Nintendo Switch Online membership and upgrade packs for The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild and Tears of the Kingdom.
Nintendo Switch 2 at Staples
Several Staples stores around the country have the Switch 2 available for purchase in-store. You can check the list of participating locations here, but note that this does not reflect current availability.
Staples has a limited supply of Switch 2 consoles available for purchase in person. Please note that not all locations are participating, and orders are limited to one per person.
UK Nintendo Switch 2 orders
UK shoppers are in luck if they’re hoping to grab the Switch 2 right now. A handful of online retailers — including Amazon, Argos and Very — currently have one or both versions of the console available for purchase online. However, we don’t expect that to remain true for long, so we’d recommend getting your order in as fast as possible if you don’t want to miss out.
Note: We have no confirmation that the digital download code for Mario Kart World in the UK Switch 2 bundle will work with non-UK Nintendo accounts. The power cables are also different for each region. If you plan to buy a UK Switch 2 from outside the country, please know there’s no guarantee it’ll work as expected.
Both the Switch 2 and the Mario Kart World bundle are in stock now at Amazon UK (at the time of publishing), but you’ll have to be quick if you want to grab one before they’re sold out.
Unlike the US and Canada, UK shoppers don’t need an invitation to purchase the Switch 2 directly from Nintendo. You will, however, need a paid Nintendo Online Membership. Games and accessories are also available now.
Both versions of the console are currently sold out.
Both the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle are in stock right now.
ShopTo has the Switch 2 available for “backorder,” though we’re somewhat wary as there’s no way of knowing when you’ll actually receive the console.
The standalone console is currently in stock, but the Mario Kart World bundle has sold out.
Both versions of the console are currently available online but are sold out in-store.
The basic console and Mario Kart World bundle are now sold out, but a handful of console and accessory bundles are in stock.
Both versions are now sold out online.
Only the standalone console is currently available, but you’ll also find plenty of games and accessories in stock.
There’s no joy for Nintendo fans at The Game Collection right now, with listings for the Switch 2 console and the Mario Kart World bundle showing as out of stock.
When can I order the Nintendo Switch 2?
The Switch 2 is available now, though you’ll likely have a challenging time getting your hands on one. The vast majority of retailers are currently sold out online, and while there may be some stragglers available for purchase in-store, it will ultimately depend on where you’re located. We’ll be keeping a close eye on stocks as they fluctuate in the coming days, so be sure to check this page often for the latest on availability.
Read more: How Nintendo Is Combating Switch 2 Scalpers
How much does the Nintendo Switch 2 cost?
There was some concern that the new US tariffs were going to lead to some significant price hikes on the standalone console and the Mario Kart World bundle. Fortunately, Nintendo has confirmed that the original pricing still stands. The console is available for $450, with the Mario Kart World bundle priced at $500. However, there has been a change to the price of some accessories, with some increasing by $5.
Will the Nintendo Switch 2 come in other colors?
For the new Switch 2, Nintendo has ditched the colored Joy-Cons for a more sleek, monochrome look — although there are still pops of red and blue around the analog sticks. As of now, Nintendo hasn’t said anything about additional colors. Additionally, it’s rumored that Samsung — which makes the displays for the Switch 2 — is pushing for an OLED version of the console.
Is the Nintendo Switch 2 Mario Kart World Bundle worth it?
The Mario Kart series has been a long-standing tentpole for Nintendo and fans were thrilled to hear that a new title would be accompanying the new console. But the excitement was dampened by the announcement that the new game will come with an increased price tag: $80 for the digital edition or $90 if you want a physical copy. However, you can bundle a digital copy with the console for $500 total, which saves you $30 compared with buying them separately. It’s an excellent value if it’s a game you’re certain you want in your library and likely the only “discount” we’ll see on this title for quite some time. Plus, Nintendo recently announced that this bundle will be available only “through fall 2025,” which means you’ll have a limited chance to take advantage of these savings.
Nintendo Switch 2: What are people saying?
There are still some mixed feelings about Nintendo’s newest console. While some are happy to see that Nintendo hasn’t altered much about the wildly popular original Switch, others feel not enough has changed to justify the $150 price hike — with CNET gaming expert Scott Stein calling it a console that “feels a lot like an updated version of a system many people already own.” The confirmation that the US tariffs won’t be leading to any further price increases has helped stifle gamers’ exasperation a bit, but many are still unhappy with the fact that select games will be selling for up to $20 more than the standard $60. We’re eager to see if most gamers consider the price hikes worth it now that they’re finally getting their hands on the new console and games.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition isn’t too tough, but let’s hope you know the résumé of a certain NBA player to get the blue group. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Let’s go at it.
Green group hint: Signal-callers.
Blue group hint: Hoops star’s teams.
Purple group hint: Great barbecue town.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Competition.
Green group: Names of NFL QBs.
Blue group: Teams Tyrese Haliburton has played for.
Purple group: Kansas City ____.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for June 8, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is competition. The four answers are bout, contest, event and match.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is names of NFL QBs. The four answers are Baker, Bo, Dak and Tua.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is teams Tyrese Haliburton has played for. The four answers are Iowa State, Kings, Pacers and USA.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is Kansas City ____. The four answers are Chiefs, Current, Monarchs and Royals.
Anyone can experience anxiety symptoms — an upset stomach, trouble breathing or a racing heart — myself included. Over the years, I’ve tried many techniques and products to ground myself and reduce anxiety, and I’ve had varying degrees of success. But sometimes, you just need instant relief.
One method I find helpful is using acupressure to stimulate pressure points that naturally reduce anxiety symptoms. Though it doesn’t treat anxiety, you may feel physical symptoms lessen by using specific pressure points.
“Acupressure is an incredibly effective and accessible tool for managing anxiety, because it works on both an energetic and physiological level,” said Dr. Jessica Sharratt, founder of Heal Los Angeles, a holistic therapy practice. “It can be used in real time, wherever you are, without needing to schedule an appointment.”
How does acupressure work for anxiety?
According to the American Psychological Association, anxiety is a common mental health condition that’s defined as having fear or worry about the future. It’s different from the normal stress response. It’s a future-oriented, long-lasting response to stimuli that isn’t a threat. Anxiety activates the autonomic nervous system.
https://www.cnet.com/health-tips/
The two parts of our autonomic nervous system, the sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous systems, work in balance. The sympathetic nervous system is our “fight-or-flight” response that is supposed to keep us safe from danger. When the sympathetic nervous system is triggered, our heart rates increase, pupils enlarge and digestion slows, all to help us act quickly in dangerous situations. However, the sympathetic nervous system can’t always distinguish between real and perceived danger.
Anxiety disorders can cause the sympathetic nervous system to be overactive or chronically activated. When you feel anxious, adrenaline is released and your heart rate and blood pressure jump up. Those actions contribute to the uncomfortable physical symptoms we associate with anxiety.
“Acupressure can actually help with anxiety symptoms because it works on the nervous system by stimulating specific points on the body that are associated with stress regulation mechanisms,” said Erik Larson, a board certified nurse practitioner in psychiatric mental heath and owner of Larson Mental Health.
The parasympathetic nervous system is the other side of the process; it restores you to a balanced state. It essentially acts like a break to the fight-or-flight instinct, what experts call the “rest and digest” response. Acupressure stimulates pressure points on the body, focusing on kick-starting the parasympathetic nervous system to calm us.
This type of massage can temporarily relieve anxiety symptoms by triggering the release of endorphins and improving blood flow, which relaxes the muscles.
Maskot/Getty Images
8 pressure points to reduce anxiety
Larson said acupressure is most effective when combined with deep breathing and other relaxation techniques. You might find that certain points bring more relief than others.
Heavenly Gate point
One of the easiest pressure points to access is the heavenly gate point; it’s also one of the most well-known pressure points. It’s located in the upper shell or hollow part of the ear. Apply gentle pinch pressure and move your finger in a circular motion for two minutes. You might have to use a mirror the first time to locate it.
solidcolours/Getty Images
Hegu point
The Hegu point is located on the webbing section of your hand between the thumb and index finger. Larson explained that it can help reduce overall stress and anxiety. You’ll want to press hard enough to feel pressure but you don’t want pain. Apply pinch pressure for about two to five minutes.
Shou San Li point
The Shou San Li pressure point is found on the outer elbow. To access it, you simply place two fingers below your outer elbow while it’s bent 90 degrees. Experts say it helps ease general anxiety, neck tightness and intestinal distress.
Chest center point
A pressure point that Sharratt recommended for emotional grounding and calming the nervous system is Ren 17, also known as chest center or Tan Zhong. It’s located at the center of the sternum, level with the fourth intercostal space. For men, it’s roughly the space between the nipples. Apply gentle pressure with small circular motions for three to four minutes.
Neiguan point
According to Sharratt, Pericardium 6 or Neiguan point is another pressure point that will calm the nervous system. There are a few locations in the wrist, although Pericardium 6 is located in the center between the two large tendons. To find it, hold your hand palm side up and place three fingers on the wrist, starting at the base of the palm. Then, put your thumb just below the third finger, and you’ll feel the two large tendons. Apply gentle pressure.
Larson said this point is particularly helpful for nausea that often accompanies anxiety attacks.
MementoJpeg/Getty Images
Hall of Impression point
Also known as Yin Tang or the third eye, the Hall of Impression pressure point is located between the eyebrows. To access it, start by sitting comfortably and closing your eyes. Then, touch the spot with either your index finger or thumb. You should take slow, deep breaths as you apply gentle pressure in a circular motion. It’s best to do this for five to 10 minutes to see your stress and anxiety symptoms ease.
Yongquan point
The Yongquan point, also known as Kidney 1, is located on the sole of the foot. You can find this point by locating the depression formed when you curl your toes toward the sole of your foot. It’s just under the ball of your foot. This point promotes relaxation and stress reduction.
Shen Men point
The Shen Men point is one of my favorites because it’s so easy to access and feels very relaxing. Shen Men, also known as the spirit gate, is located on the pinky side of your wrist, just below the palm. It may also help with motion sickness and insomnia.
There is some research behind acupressure
The research behind this topic is still developing but some studies support that it works. However, it’s worth noting that most studies available are limited to stressful situations rather than general anxiety. Also, the sample sizes have been small. This doesn’t discount the results but remembering their context is always important.
For example, there have been a few reviews that have investigated using acupressure for anxiety before medical procedures and treatments. A 2018 study found that using acupressure techniques reduced anxiety and stress in those going through fertility treatment. A 2024 review of research revealed that acupressure decreased anxiety during the COVID-19 pandemic, compared to those who did not use acupressure therapy.
The studies are small, and it’s difficult to parse out the placebo effect of pressure points for anxiety. More research is needed to truly understand how acupressure can ease symptoms. Unlike other trends and techniques out there, acupressure is a risk-free calming technique you can try if your anxiety symptoms are ruling your life. Studies haven’t found any adverse effects from acupressure.
Home remedies like acupressure can help you reduce your anxiety symptoms in the moment. However, it doesn’t do anything for the root cause of the feelings. It’s not intended to be a replacement for traditional therapies or medications. It’s simply a tool that can help you find relief temporarily.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s NYT Mini Crossword could be tricky. 1-Down and 5-Down stumped me for a while, but the other letters filled it in for me. Need some help with today’s Mini Crossword? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get to those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for June 7, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Yoga class need Answer: MAT
4A clue: Umlaut, rotated 90° Answer: COLON
6A clue: “That is shocking!” Answer: OHMYGOD
8A clue: “___ You the One?” (reality TV show) Answer: ARE
9A clue: Egg cells Answer: OVA
10A clue: One of two “royal” sleeping options Answer: KINGBED
12A clue: Bar seating Answer: STOOL
13A clue: Favorite team of the “Chicago Pope,” for short Answer: SOX
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Slices of life Answer: MOMENTS
2D clue: Olympic gymnast Raisman Answer: ALY
3D clue: Request at the end of a restaurant meal Answer: TOGOBOX
4D clue: Hayes of MSNBC Answer: CHRIS
5D clue: Medium for Melville or McCarthy Answer: NOVEL
6D clue: Wood used for wine barrels Answer: OAK
7D clue: June honoree Answer: DAD
11D clue: Sticky stuff Answer: GOO
How to play more Mini Crosswords
The New York Times Games section offers a large number of online games, but only some of them are free for all to play. You can play the current day’s Mini Crossword for free, but you’ll need a subscription to the Times Games section to play older puzzles from the archives.
Are there old electronic devices sitting around your house unused? Though it can be difficult to get rid of that old laptop, desktop or printer you’ve got sitting around — even when it’s been over a decade since you last plugged it in or switched it on — recycling old tech is important, and it can free up a lot of space in your home.
A recent CNET survey found that 31% of US adults are still holding onto unused old devices, including laptops, because they’re unsure of what to do with them. The survey also found that 19% of respondents just toss old devices in the trash — which is actually illegal in many states and can draw hefty fines — while 29% use a recycling service to dispose of old tech. But there are easy and sustainable ways to clear out all that ancient tech.
This story is part of CNET Zero, a series that chronicles the impact of climate change and explores what’s being done about the problem.
Recycling computers and printers can be as easy as bringing them to major retailers such as Best Buy, Office Depot and Staples. Some stores will even give you credit for offloading your old devices, as hard as it might be to let go of them.
Here’s what you need to know about recycling your old tech. For more, learn how to recycle your old phones.
What to do before recycling your old computer
Wherever you choose to take or mail in your items to be recycled, you’ll want to protect your data by removing it as best you can. One way to do this is to perform a factory reset on your computer. Our guide walks you through the process.
Where to recycle computers and printers
Some retail stores will accept computers and printers for recycling, but it’s not always a free service. Policies vary by company.
Apple Store
You can recycle your old Apple computers, monitors and peripherals, such as printers, for free at an Apple store, but there’s a costly catch. According to the Apple Free Recycling program, you must also purchase a qualifying Apple computer or monitor to receive this service. Need another option? A third-party company called Gazelle buys old MacBooks to recycle them. After accepting Gazelle’s offer, you print a prepaid label or request a prepaid box and ship the machine to them.
Read more: Phone and Laptop Repair Goes Mainstream With Push From iFixit
Best Buy stores
Best Buy generally accepts up to three household items per household per day to be recycled for free, including desktop computers and printers, as well as other items ranging from e-readers to vacuum cleaners. While three is the limit for most items, there’s a higher standard for laptops — Best Buy will take five of those per household per day. Note that rules for dropping off monitors vary by state, and it’s not always free to do so. Best Buy also offers a mail-in recycling service for select items, but that’s also not free. A small box that holds up to 6 pounds costs $23, while a large box (up to 15 pounds) costs $30.
Office Depot stores
Office Depot and OfficeMax merged in 2013. The retailers offer a tech trade-in program both in-store and online where you may be able to get a store gift card in exchange for your old computers and printers. If the device has no trade-in value, the company will recycle it for free. Office Depot also sells its own tech recycling boxes that you can fill with electronics to be recycled and then drop off at the stores, but they aren’t free. The small boxes cost $8.39 and hold up to 20 pounds, the medium ones cost $18.29 and hold up to 40 pounds, and the large boxes cost $28 and hold up to 60 pounds.
Staples stores
You can bring your old desktop computers, laptops, printers and more to the Staples checkout counter to be recycled for free, even if they weren’t purchased there. The retailer also has a free at-home battery recycling box which, according to a Staples rep, has led customers to recycle thousands of batteries per week, up from an earlier average of 50 per week. Here’s a list of everything that can be recycled at Staples.
Read more: How to Factory Reset a MacBook, Windows Laptop or Chromebook
How to find an electronics recycling center
If you don’t live near a major retailer or would rather take your computers and printers to a recycling center, you can locate places near you by using search tools provided by Earth911 and the Consumer Technology Association.
Earth911 recycling center
Use the recycling center search function on Earth911 to find recycling centers near your ZIP code that accept laptops, desktops and printers. Note that the results may also turn up places that accept mobile phones and not computers or printers, so you may have to do a little filtering.
Greener Gadgets recycling center
Consult the Consumer Technology Association’s Greener Gadgets Recycle Locator to find local recycling centers in your area that will take old items. The search function also allows you to filter the results to separately hunt for places that take computers versus printers.